Skip to main content

Full text of "Lehigh Course Catalog (1973-1975)"

See other formats


1973-1975 


University  Catalog  of  Curricula, 
Courses  and  Degree  Requirements 


Lehigh 


,H    U   if 


Digitizecfbyjhejnte 
in  20 
Lyrasis  MemberS 


J/ 


MAR  30     1973 


t  Archive 
ip$  from 
oan  Foundation 


http://www.archive.org/details/lehighcoursecata1973 


Lehigh 


University  Catalog  of  Curricula, 
Courses  and  Degree  Requirements 


1973-1975 


The  Lehigh  University  Catalog  is  published  biennially. 
The  next  edition  will  be  published  in  April,  1975. 
Lehigh  University  reserves  the  right  to  change  at  any 
time  the  rules  governing  admission,  tuition,  fees, 
courses,  the  granting  of  degrees,  or  any  other  regula- 
tions affecting  its  students.  Such  changes  are  to  take 
effect  whenever  Lehigh  University  deems  necessary. 
Lehigh  is  published  four  times  annually  during  the 
calendar  year  by  Lehigh  University,  Bethlehem, 
Pennsylvania  18015.  Issues  of  Lehigh  include  the 
Summer  Session  (March),  the  University  Catalog 
(April),  Introduction  to  the  University  (August), 
and  the  Report  of  the  President  (October).  Volume 
47,  Number  2,  April  1973.  Second  class  postage 
paid  at  Bethlehem,  Pennsylvania  18015.  Edited 
and  designed  by  the  Lehigh  University  Office  of 
University  Publications:  George  L.  Beezer,  Director; 
Marvin  H.  Simmons,  Assistant  Director;  Lynn  D. 
Klein,  Production  Assistant;  Sara  L.  Paden,  Admini- 
strative Assistant.  Composition  set  in  Aldine  Roman; 
display  type  in  Palatino.  Printing  by  Holben  Printing, 
Inc.,  Allentown,  Pa.  40M,  3-73. 


Krameria  triandra,  from  Hippolyto  Ruiz  et  Josepho  Pavon, 
Flora  Peruviana  et  Chilensis  (1798),  from  the  Bassler  Collec- 
tion, Linderman  Library,  Lehigh  University. 


Tlie  white  stock  used  in  this 
catalog  is  60%  recycled  paper. 


Contents 


\    idemii  I  lalendai .  3 

Lehigh  University:  History  and  Purpose.  5 

Undergraduate  Admission.  7 

Tuition  and  Fees.  1  1 

Undergraduate  Scholarships  and  Loans,  16 

Student  Personnel  Services,  18 

Genera]  Information,  24 

The  Scene,  29 

Campus  and  City  Maps,  32 

College  or  Arts  and  Science,  35 

College  ot  Business  and  Economics,  39 

College  ot  Engineering,  44 

Special  Academic  Opportunities.  49 

The  Graduate  School,  57 

The  School  of  Education,  67 

Interdisciplinary  Graduate  Programs,  69 

Research  Centers  and  Organizations,  71 

Description  of  Courses,  85 

Accounting,  86 

American  Studies,  89 

Arts-Engineering,  90 

Biology,  94 

Chemical  Engineering,  100 

Chemistry,  106 

Civil  Engineering,  113 

Classics.  121 

Economics,  124 

Education.  128 

Electrical  Engineering,  134 

English.  140 

Environmental  Sciences  and  Resource  Management,  149 

Fine  Arts.  150 

Five-Year  Programs,  153 

Foreign  Careers,  157 

Fundamental  Sciences,  158 

Geological  Sciences,  159 

Government,  164 

History,  170 

Industrial  Engineering,  176 

International  Relations,  180 

Management  and  Finance,  183 

Mathematics,  188 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics,  195 
Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science,  203 

Miidcin  r.ni-ign   I  align. ige.s  .mil   Literatures.  210 

Music,  2  1 9 

Natural  Science,  221 

Philosophy.  222 

Physics,  228 

Psychology,  233 

Religion  Studies,  238 

Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps,  239 

Social  Relations,  243 

Physical  Education  and  Athletics,  248 

Board  of  Trustees,  250 

University  Administration,  257 

Faculty  and  Staff,  265 

Registration  Statistics,  294 

Index,  297 


2     Contents 


Academic  Calendar 


1973-1974 


1972-1973 


April  2  (Mon.) 

Pre -registration  begins 

Last  day  for  filing  of  applications  for  degrees  to  be 

conferred  in  May 
April  6  (Fri.) 

Pre-registration  ends 
April  13  (Fri.) 

Last  day  for  May  Ph.D.  candidates  to  arrange  for 

final  examinations 

Last  day  for  May  Ph.D.  candidates  to  deliver  to 

Dean  of  Graduate  School  approved  dissertation  draft 
April  18  (Wed.),  10  p.m. 

Easter  vacation  begins 
April  23  (Mon.),  8:10  a.m. 

Easter  vacation  ends 

May  3  (Thurs.) 

Last  day  of  classes  for  Arts  seniors  taking  compre- 
hensive examinations 

Last  day  for  submission  of  honors  theses  to  thesis 

advisors  tor  May  graduation 
May  4-8  (Fri.-Tues.) 

Comprehensive  examinations  for  Arts  seniors 
May  4  (Fri.) 

Last  day  for  October  Ph.D.  candidates  to  arrange 

for  final  examinations 

Last  day  for  May  candidates  for  master's  degrees 

to  deposit  with  Dean  of  Graduate  School  unbound 

copies  of  theses 
May  5  (Sat.) 

Last  day  of  classes  in  spring  semester 
May  7  (Mon.) 

Review-Consultation-Study  period  begins 
May  8  (Tues.) 

Review-Consultation-Study  period  ends 

Last  day  for  May  Ph.D.  candidates  to  complete  all 

degree  requirements 
May  9  (Wed.) 

Course  examinations  begin 
May  17  (Thurs.) 

Course  examinations  end 
May  27  (Sun.) 

University  Day 


August  20-28  (Mon. -Tues.) 

Graduate  registration  for  fall  semester 
August  26  (Sun.) 

Freshman  check-in 
August  27-28  (Mon. -Tues.) 

Freshman  orientation 
August  29  (Wed.) 

Undergraduate  registration  for  fall  semester 
August  30  (Thurs.) 

Fall  semester  instruction  begins 

September  4  (Tues.) 

Last  day  for  October  doctoral  candidates  to  deliv- 
er to  Dean  of  Graduate  School  approved  disserta- 
tion drafts 

September  10  (Mon.) 

Last  day  for  filing  applications  for  degrees  to  be 
conferred  on  Founder's  Day 
First  faculty  meeting 

September  11  (Tues.) 

Last  day  for  October  candidates  for  master's  de- 
grees to  deposit  with  Dean  of  Graduate  School 
unbound  copies  of  theses 

September  12  (Wed.) 

Last  day  on  which  registration  for  fall  courses  wOl 
be  permitted 

September  28  (Fri.) 

Last  day  for  October  doctoral  candidates  to  com- 
plete all  degree  requirements 

October  1-3  (Mon. -Wed.) 

Engineering  inspection  trips 
October  4  (Thurs.) 

Tuesday  classes  meet 
October  5  (Fri.) 

Monday  classes  meet 
October  8-9  (Mon. -Tues.) 

Columbus  Day  holiday 
October  14  (Sun.) 

Founder's  Day 
October  29  (Mon.) 

Pre-registration  begins 

Mid-semester  reports  due 

November  2  (Fri.) 

Pre-registration  ends 


Academic  Calendar     3 


No\  i  mbei  9    Fri, 

I  ist  daj  foi  submission  ,>!  honors  theses  to  thesis 

advisors  foi  January  graduation 
November  15  (Thurs.) 

I  .ist  day  for  filing  applications  for  degrees  to  be 

granted  in  January 
Novembei   16  (Fri, 

I  .ist  day  for  [anuary  doctoral  candidates  to 

deliver  to  Dean  ot  Graduate  School  approved  dis 

sertation  drafts 
Novembi  i  21    Wed.),  10  p.m. 

Thanksgiving  vacation  begins 
November  2(>  (Mon.),  8:10  a.m. 

Thanksgiving  vacation  ends 

Friday  classes  meet 
November  27  (Tues.) 

Thursday  classes  meet 

December  7  (Fri.) 

Last  day  of  classes  for  Arts  seniors  taking  compre- 
hensive examinations 

Last  day  for  January  candidates  for  master's  de- 
grees to  deposit  with  the  Dean  of  Graduate  School 
unbound  copies  of  theses 

December  10-13  (Mon. -Thurs.) 

Comprehensive  examinations  for  Arts  seniors 

December  11  (Tues.) 
Last  day  of  classes 

December  12-13  (Wed.-Thurs.) 

Review-Consultation-Study  period 

December  14  (Fri.) 

Last  day  for  January  doctoral  candidates  to  com- 
plete all  degree  requirements 
Course  examinations  begin 

December  22  (Sat.) 

Course  examinations  end 

January  2-11  (Wed. -Fri.) 

Graduate  registration  for  spring  semester 
January  14  (Mon.) 

Undergraduate  registration  for  spring  semester 
January  15  (Tues.) 

Spring  semester  instruction  begins 
January  28  (Mon.) 

Last  day  on  which  registration  for  spring  courses  is 

permitted 

February  18-19  (Mon. -Tues.) 
Washington's  Birthday  holiday 


February  20  (Wed.) 
Monda)  t  lasses  meet 

March  ')  (Sat.).  1  p.m. 

Mid-term  vacation  begins 
March  18  (Mon.),  8:10  a.m. 

Mid-term  vacation  ends 

Last  day  tor  tiling  application  tor  degrees  in  May 
March  21  (Thurs.) 

Mid-semester  reports  due- 
March  25-29  (Mon. -Fri.) 

Pre-registration 

April  10  (Wed.) 

Last  day  for  May  doctoral  candidates  to  arrange 

for  final  examinations 

Last  day  for  May  doctoral  candidates  to  deliver  to 

Dean  of  Graduate  School  approved  dissertation  draft 
April  10  (Wed.),  10  p.m. 

Easter  vacation  begins 
April  15  (Mon.),  8:10  p.m. 

Easter  vacation  ends 

May  2  (Thurs.) 

Last  day  for  classes  for  Arts  seniors  taking  compre- 
hensive examinations 

Last  day  for  submission  of  honors  theses  to  thesis 

advisors  for  May  graduation 
May  3-7  (Fri. -Tues.) 

Comprehensive  examinations  for  Arts  seniors 
May  3  (Fri.) 

Last  day  for  October  doctoral  candidates  to  ar- 
range for  final  examinations 

Last  day  for  May  candidates  for  master's  degrees 

to  deposit  with  Dean  of  Graduate  School  unbound 

copies  of  theses 
May  4  (Sat.) 

Last  day  of  classes  in  spring  semester 
May  6-7  (Mon. -Tues.) 

Review-Consultation-Study  period 
May  8  (Wed.) 

Course  examinations  begin 
May  10  (Fri.) 

Last  day  for  May  doctoral  candidates  to  complete 

all  degree  requirements 
May  16  (Thurs.) 

Course  examinations  end 
May  26  (Sun.) 

University  Day 


4     Academic  Calendar 


Lehigh  University 


History  and  Purpose 

The  charter  granted  Lehigh  by  the  state  of  Pennsyl- 
vania states  with  simple  directness  that  this  University 
was  established  "for  the  education  of  youth."  The 
institution  was  founded  by  the  Honorable  Asa 
Packer,  industrialist  and  philanthropist,  as  an  expres- 
sion of  faith  in  certain  concepts  of  professional 
education. 

Born  a  poor  farm  boy  in  Connecticut,  in  1805, 
Asa  Packer  moved  to  Pennsylvania  in  1822  and  be- 
came one  of  America's  pioneer  captains  of  industry. 
He  helped  open  the  anthracite  fields  ol  Pennsylvania 
by  developing  a  network  of  transportation  canals  and 
the  Lehigh  Valley  Railroad  which  carried  coal  to 
market.  He  was  elected  to  the  state  legislature,  was 
appointed  a  county  judge,  was  elected  to  Congress, 
was  Pennsylvania's  favorite-son  candidate  for  presi- 
dent, and  was  Democratic  candidate  for  governor  of 
Pennsylvania. 

Judge  Packer  foresaw  the  great  industrial  develop- 
ment that  was  just  beginning  and  which  he  had  help- 
ed to  initiate  in  the  mineral-rich  area  of  eastern  Penn- 
sylvania. He  desired  to  contribute  still  further  to  the 
development  of  the  region  that  had  benefited  him  so 
much.  In  1865,  he  asked  Episcopal  Bishop  William 
Bacon  Stevens  to  help  him  plan  a  university. 

Judge  Packer  founded  his  university  in  the  midst 
of  educational  revolution.  Originally,  he  conceived  of 
his  institution  as  primarily  technical.  Yet,  its  original 
experimental  programs  were  greatly  modified  in  the 
fourteen  years  in  which  he  guided  its  destiny.  The 
general  plan  of  study  when  the  new  institution 
accepted  students  in  1866  consisted  of  a  two-year 
common  core  of  courses  for  all  students,  with  a  pro- 
fessional elective  to  be  chosen  by  the  student  for  the 
final  two  years  of  study.  The  professional  elective 
could  be  in  general  literature,  civil  engineering,  mech- 
anical engineering,  metallurgy,  or  analytical  chemis- 
try. From  the  beginning,  Lehigh  combined  the  tradi- 
tional American  college  of  liberal  arts,  the  continental 
university,  and  the  new  technical  institute  of  universi- 
ty rank. 


The  coincidence  of  Judge  Packer's  concepts  with 
those  popular  in  his  day  can  be  seen  in  the  fact  that 
Lehigh  was  founded  the  same  year  as  another  im- 
portant technically-oriented  university,  Cornell,  and 
shortly  after  MIT.  Also,  the  Morrill  Act,  which  estab- 
lished our  land-grant  colleges,  was  being  debated 
when  Judge  Packer  was  a  member  of  Congress.  He  fits 
well  into  the  movement  from  the  traditional  liberal 
education  of  England  to  the  more  technical  German 
programs. 

Lehigh's  founder  was  also  in  the  avant-garde  of 
public  industrialists.  During  his  lifetime,  and  by  be- 
quest, he  gave  Lehigh  over  three  million  dollars,  in- 
cluding land,  buildings  and  endowment.  The  generosi- 
ty of  the  Packer  family  and  friends,  the  distinguished 
faculty  originally  assembled,  and  the  prominence  of 
early  alumni  firmly  established  the  reputation  of 
Lehigh  in  higher  education. 

Lehigh  University  is  fully  accredited  by  the  Middle 
States  Association  of  Colleges  and  Secondary 
Schools.  In  addition,  specialized  programs  in  business 
administration  are  accredited  by  the  American  Asso- 
ciation of  Collegiate  Schools  of  Business,  the  engi- 
neering curricula  are  accredited  by  the  Engineers 
Council  for  Professional  Development,  and  Council 
for  Professional  Development,  and  various  School  of 
Education  programs  are  accredited  by  the  National 
Council  for  Accreditation  of  Teacher  Education,  in- 
cluding Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  approval  for 
certification  programs. 

The  current  market  value  of  the  endowment  fund 
of  the  University  exceeds  fifty  million  dollars.  The 
value  of  equipment,  buildings,  and  grounds  is  more 
than  sixty  million  dollars. 

Organized  as  a  Small  University 

When  Lehigh  opened  its  doors  in  1866,  it  was  given 
the  character  of  a  small  university.  The  undergraduate 
enrollment  is  3,659;  the  graduate  enrollment  2,035. 
Lehigh  desires  to  remain  a  small  university,  and  with 
its  faculty  of  more  than  400,  to  provide  the  best  pos- 
sible education  for  a  co-educational  student  body  of 
its  size. 

Lehigh  is  primarily  a  residential  university.  Approxi- 
mately eighty  percent  of  the  undergraduate  students 
reside  in  University-operated  residence  halls  on  the 
campus  or  in  the  houses  of  national  social  fraternities 
which  maintain  chapters  at  Lehigh. 


History  and  Purpose     5 


Current  undergraduates  come  from  900  public  and 
pi  ivate  secondai  \  schools  in  40  states  and  26  foreign 
countries. 

I  . ■■:<.  [wo  percent  ol  the  undergraduate  studenl 
bods  .no  enrolled  in  the  College  ol  Engineering; 
thirty-six  percent  in  the  College  ol  Arts  and  Science; 
and  twenty  percent  in  the  College  ol  Business  and 
Economics.  The  remaining  two  percent  are  enrolled 
in  the  five-year  arts-engineering  sequence. 

Lehigh  continues  to  base  its  program  on  the  pre- 
mise that  an  education  tor  successful  living  must  com- 
bine the  acquisition  of  knowledge  and  skills  funda- 
mental in  the  professions  with  courses  designed  to 
broaden  the  vision  and  to  enrich  the  personal  life  of 
the  individual.  Therefore  at  Lehigh  requirements  for 
graduation  include  studies  preparatory  to  a  career,  a 
generous  number  of  courses  to  acquaint  the  student 
with  the  nature  and  problems  of  the  world  in  which 
he  lives,  and  opportunities  to  develop  himself  as  an 
individual. 


rei  onstructed.  Each  spring,  the  city  ami  the  campus 
receive  thousands  of  music  lovers  who  come  to  hear 
the  Bach  Ch oil  in  Lehigh's  Packer  Memorial  Church. 
Situated  in  the  center  of  the  Lehigh  Valley  industrial 
complex,  Bethlehem  is  preeminently  a  city  ol  steel,  as 
the  home  site  of  the  main  administrative  offices,  re- 
search laboratories,  and  a  major  production  facility  of 
the  Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation. 

There  are  five  colleges  in  the  Lehigh  Valley  besides 
Lehigh,  all  private:  Lafayette  (coed),  Allcntown 
College  of  St.  Francis  dc  Sales  (coed),  Moravian 
(coed),  Muhlenberg  (coed),  and  Cedar  Crest  (women). 
A  cooperative  program  is  maintained  between  the 
colleges  and  Lehigh.  There  are  also  two  two-year 
community  colleges  in  the  area. 


Campus  and  Community 

Located  on  a  200-acre  hillside  campus  on  the  south 
side  of  the  Lehigh  River,  the  towers  of  Lehigh  Univer- 
sity overlook  the  city  of  Bethlehem,  which  has  a  pop- 
ulation of  73.000.  and  is  located  in  eastern  Pennsyl- 
vania, approximately  60  miles  north  of  Philadelphia 
and  90  miles  west  of  New  York  City. 

In  founding  his  university,  Judge  Packer  provided 
the  site  for  the  campus  '"in  the  midst  of  a  noble  park 
of  forest  trees."  A  century  later,  there  remains  abun- 
dant evidence  of  the  source  of  Judge  Packer's  inspira- 
tion, for  the  trees  continue  to  create  the  quiet  cam- 
pus atmosphere.  Most  of  the  University's  buildings 
are  located  on  the  north  slope  of  South  Mountain.  An 
additional  500  acres  in  Saucon  Valley,  on  the  south 
side  of  South  Mountain,  are  used  as  playing  fields. 
With  the  addition  of  land  acquired  through  a  coopera- 
tive venture  with  Bethlehem's  Urban  Renewal  pro- 
gram, the  University  has  added  new  library,  class- 
room, and  laboratory  facilities. 

Settled  in  1741  by  Moravians  seeking  religious 
asylum,  the  city  of  Bethlehem  is  rich  in  historic  tradi- 
tion. The  city  became  an  important  point  for  early 
colonial  travelers  stopping  between  New  York  and 
Philadelphia.  Twenty-one  remarkably  preserved  pre- 
Revolutionary  War  buildings  remain  in  the  heart  of 
the  city.  Many  have  been  restored  and  others  will  be 


6     Lehigh  University:  Campus 


Undergraduate  Admission 


Requirements 

The  enrollment  of  Lehigh  University  is  strictly  limit- 
ed by  action  of  its  board  of  trustees,  with  a  resulting 
limitation  in  the  number  of  candidates  who  can  be 
admitted  each  year  to  the  several  divisions  of  the 
University.  The  University  seeks  candidates  without 
regard  to  race,  color,  religious  creed,  or  national  ori- 
gin. 

In  the  selective  procedure  necessitated  by  this 
limitation,  the  University,  through  its  Office  of  Ad- 
mission, takes  into  account  a  number  of  criteria 
which  are  believed  to  have  some  individual  validity 
and  in  combination  a  high  degree  of  validity  in  pre- 
dicting probable  success  in  college  work. 

Secondary  School  Preparation 

The  admission  policy  of  the  University  is  designed  to 
encourage  students  with  varied  backgrounds  to  con- 
sider Lehigh  while  insuring  that  any  individual  stu- 
dent is  not  guided  into  a  program  of  studies  for  which 
he  or  she  is  inadequately  prepared. 

The  courses  or  units  required  for  admission  repre- 
sent the  quantitative  equivalent  of  the  usual  four-year 
college  preparatory  program  and  include  certain  pre- 
scribed subjects  for  candidates  depending  upon  their 
college  and  curriculum  choice. 

An  applicant's  full  potential  as  a  Lehigh  student, 
including  evidence  of  academic  growth  and  the  desire 
to  learn,  are  special  qualities  which  may  not  be  re- 
flected in  mere  accumulation  of  units. 

All  applicants  should  have  completed  four  years  of 
English,  two  to  four  years  of  history  and  social 
studies,  three  years  of  mathematics  and  two  to  four 
years  of  laboratory  science.  (Chemistry  is  required 
and  physics  recommended  for  candidates  planning 
studies  in  science  or  engineering.) 

Students  planning  to  enter  the  College  of  Engi- 
neering or  the  College  of  Business  and  Economics,  or 
the  bachelor  of  science  program  in  the  College  of  Arts 
and  Science,  must  have  studied  mathematics  through 
trigonometry. 


Students  planning  a  bachelor  of  arts  degree  in  the 
College  of  Arts  and  Science  must  present  at  least  two 
years  of  one  foreign  language. 

One  of  the  major  features  of  Lehigh  is  the  ease 
with  which  a  student  may  normally  transfer  from  one 
curriculum  or  college  to  another.  Such  transferring 
may,  however,  necessitate  a  student's  obtaining  addi- 
tional background  for  his  new  discipline  area  on  cam- 
pus or  elsewhere. 

Summary  of  Minimum  Subject  Matter  Requirements 
(1 6  units) 

English      4 

Foreign  Language*    2 

College  Preparatory  Mathematics**      4 

Electives      6 

*Waivers  of  the  requirement  in  foreign  language  are 
granted  to  otherwise  well-qualified  candidates  for 
admission  to  the  College  of  Engineering  or  the  Col- 
lege of  Business  and  Economics. 

**Waivers  of  the  requirement  in  mathematics  are 
granted  to  otherwise  well-qualified  candidates  for 
admission  who  propose  to  major  in  one  of  the  follow- 
ing fields  offered  by  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science: 
American  studies,  fine  art,  classics,  English,  modern 
foreign  languages,  government,  history,  international 
relations,  journalism,  music,  philosophy,  social  rela- 
tions. 

Note:  Chemistry  is  required  and  physics  is  recom- 
mended for  candidates  planning  programs  in  science, 
arts-engineering,  and  engineering.  Electives  should 
include  such  college  preparatory  subjects  as  langu- 
ages, social  studies,  and  sciences. 

Quality  of  Work 

The  quality  of  the  candidate's  work  is  more  impor- 
tant than  merely  meeting  minimum  subject  matter 
requirements.  The  strength  of  his  preparation  is  judg- 
ed primarily  by  his  rank  or  relative  grade  in  class;  by 
the  extent  to  which  he  has  made  grades  distinctly 
higher  than  the  average  grade;  by  evidence  of  im- 
provement or  deterioration  in  quality  of  record  as  he 
has  progressed  through  secondary  school;  by  his  rela- 
tive success  or  failure  in  the  particular  subjects  which 
he  proposes  to  continue  in  college;  and  by  the  com- 
ments and  recommendations  of  his  principal  or  head- 
master. 


Undergraduate  Admission:  Requirements      7 


Inn  .iiu  I-  I  xaminations 

All  candidates  for  admission  to  the  freshman  class  at 
Lehigh  University  are  required  to  write  entrance  tests 
prepared  and  administered  b)  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  Tests  required  by  Lehigh  Univer- 
sity are  listed  below. 

Scholastic   [ptitude  Test 

Each  candidate  is  required  to  write  the  Scholastic 
Aptitude  Test  (SAT)  to  provide  the  University  with  a 
measure,  on  a  national  scale,  ot  his  aptitude  and  read- 
iness tor  college  study.  Lehigh  prefers  that  this  test  be 
written  cither  on  the  November,  December  or  the 
January  testing  date  of  the  senior  year. 

Achievement  Tests 

Each  candidate  is  required  to  write  three  additional 
College  Board  Achievement  Tests.  One  of  these  must 
be  English  Composition.  Candidates  for  a  science 
program  in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science  or  for  a 
program  in  the  College  of  Engineering  are  expected  to 
write  a  Mathematics  (Level  I  or  Level  II)  Achieve- 
ment Test.  Candidates  for  Engineering  are  expected 
to  write  a  Science  (chemistry  or  physics)  Achieve- 
ment Test.  Candidates  for  B.A.  programs  in  Arts  and 
Science,  including  five-year  Arts-Engineering  candi- 
dates, should  write  an  Achievement  Test  in  the 
foreign  language  to  be  studied  in  college.  Other  candi- 
dates write  tests  which  they  may  choose  in  consulta- 
tion with  their  advisors.  The  English  Composition  and 
two  additional  Achievement  Tests  should  be  written 
in  December.  January,  or  March  of  the  senior  year, 
unless  satisfactory  junior  year  scores  were  submitted 
to  Lehigh  University. 

Test  information  and  applications  should  be 
secured  from  the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board  at  one  of  the  following  addresses  (whichever  is 
closer  to  the  candidate's  home  or  school):  P.  O.  Box 
592,  Princeton,  New  Jersey  08540  or  P.  O.  Box  1025, 
Berkeley,  California  94701  or  from  the  candidate's 
school. 

Candidates  should  register  for  the  tests  early  in  the 
senior  year  and  not  later  than  one  month  prior  to  the 
test  date  (two  months  for  the  candidates  who  will  be 
tested  in  Europe,  Asia,  Africa,  Central  and  South 
America,  and  Australia). 

The  candidate  is  responsible  for  requesting  that  his 


tesl  score  be  senl  to  Lehigh    eithei  by  indicating 
Lehigh  on  his  College  Board  application  or.il  he  fail 

cd  to  do  this,  by  special  rcque  I  '  o  the  College  Board 
office.  In  addition  to  requesting  that  his  College 
Board  scores  be  sent  to  Leliigli,  the  Candidate  must 
submit  an  application  for  admission  to  the  freshman 
class  at  Leliigli. 

Other  Criteria  and  Interviews 

Information  about  other  qualifications  of  candidates 
is  obtained  from  principals,  headmasters,  and  counsel- 
ors. Such  information  relates  to  the  candidate's 
health,  emotional  stability,  intellectual  motivation, 
social  adjustment,  participation  in  school  activities, 
and  established  habits  of  industry  and  dependability. 

Each  candidate  is  urged  to  visit  Lehigh  whenever 
possible  so  that  he  may  see  the  University  and  talk 
with  an  officer  of  admission.  An  appointment  should 
be  made  in  advance  of  the  visit. 

The  Office  of  Admission  is  open  for  interviews 
every  weekday  between  9:00  a.m.  and  1  1  :00  a.m. 
and  from  1 :30  p.m.  to  4:00  p.m.  Interviews  are  also 
granted  on  Saturday  mornings,  but  classes  are  not  in 
session.  Tours  of  the  campus  are  available  every  week- 
day afternoon  and  Saturday  mornings.  The  Office  of 
Admission  is  closed  Sundays,  national  holidays, 
Saturday  afternoon  during  the  school  year,  and  all 
day  Saturday  during  the  summer  months.  Visitors  are 
welcome  during  the  summer  months. 

Although  a  personal  interview  is  not  required  of  all 
candidates,  the  University  reserves  the  right  to  require 
an  interview  whenever  this  appears  desirable  or  neces- 
sary and  to  base  determination  of  admission  in  part 
on  the  report  of  the  interviewing  officer. 

Procedures 

Admission  to  the  Freshman  Class 

If  a  candidate  has  determined  that  he  is  sincerely 
interested  in  Lehigh  and  if  he  believes  that  he  will 
meet  admission  requirements  of  subject  matter  and 
school  record,  he  should  secure  from  the  Office  of 
Admission  an  application  for  the  freshman  class  en- 
tering in  September.  (Lehigh  does  not  admit  a  fresh- 
man class  in  February.) 

The  application  should  be  submitted  early  in  the 
last  year  of  preparation  for  college.  Every  effort 


8      Undergraduate  Admission:  Procedures 


should  be  made  to  submit  an  application  during  the 
fall  semester  of  the  senior  year  and  definitely  not 
later  than  March  first. 

Application  Fee 

Each  undergraduate  application  for  admission  to  the 
freshman  class  or  with  advanced  standing  or  to  the 
General  College  Division  must  be  accompanied  by  an 
application  fee  in  the  amount  of  $15.00.  The  check 
or  money  order  for  the  application  tee  should  be 
made  payable  to  Lehigh  University.  The  application 
fee  is  non-refundable  in  the  event  the  candidate  does 
not  matriculate  at  Lehigh  University.  It  is  not  applied 
toward  tuition  if  the  candidate  matriculates.  An 
application  cannot  be  accepted  without  the  applica- 
tion fee. 

Early  Decision 

Lehigh  will  give  a  candidate  an  early  favorable  deci- 
sion on  his  application  if  he  meets  the  following  crite- 
ria: (1)  His  preliminary  credentials,  including  Schol- 
astic Aptitude  Test  scores  show  clear  qualification  for 
admission  to  Lehigh;  (2)  He  is  certain  that  Lehigh  is 
his  first  choice  of  college. 

On  this  basis  the  Committee  on  Admission  selects 
candidates  who  have  submitted  requests  for  early 
decision  by  November  1.  Lehigh's  decisions  will  be 
made  by  December  1.  If  the  decision  is  favorable,  it  is 
assumed  the  candidate's  academic  strengths  will  con- 
tinue throughout  the  senior  year  and  that  he  will 
complete  all  normal  admission  requirements.  On  re- 
ceiving a  favorable  decision  the  candidate  promptly 
withdraws  other  applications. 

Early  Decision  candidates  whose  parents  have  sub- 
mitted Parents'  Confidential  Statements  will  receive 
notice  by  December  1  of  the  action  taken  on  requests 
for  financial  aid. 

This  plan  is  not  appropriate  for  all  of  our  candi- 
dates. There  are  many  candidates  who  are  unable  to 
make  an  early  college  choice.  Such  candidates  are  not 
penalized.  Candidates  who  do  not  receive  favorable 
replies  to  their  requests  for  "early  decision"  should 
not  feel  discouraged.  Only  a  portion  of  the  class  is 
selected  under  this  plan,  since  the  Committee  on  Ad- 
mission still  prefers  to  take  action  on  most  applica- 
tions later  in  the  year. 


Advanced  Placement 

There  are  several  means  whereby  able  students  with 
superior  preparation  may  obtain  advanced  placement 
and/or  college  credit  at  Lehigh. 

In  many  secondary  schools  able  and  well-qualified 
students  have  opportunities  to  enroll  in  one  or  more 
Advanced  Placement  courses  given  under  the  auspices 
of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board.  Lehigh 
encourages  students  to  enroll  in  these  college-level 
courses  and  to  write  the  Advanced  Placement  tests 
offered  by  the  C.E.E.B.  each  May.  Entering  freshmen, 
who  ask  the  C.E.E.B.  to  submit  their  test  scores  and 
papers  to  Lehigh,  and  who  are  recommended  by  their 
schools,  are  considered  for  advanced  placement 
and/or  college  credit. 

Advanced  Placement  test  scores  range  from  a  low 
of  1  to  a  high  of  5.  Students  who  earn  the  recom- 
mendations of  their  schools  and  scores  of  3  or  higher 
on  the  Advanced  Placement  tests  receive  advanced 
placement  and/or  credit  in  most  departments.  A  few 
departments  regularly  offer  special  examinations  dur- 
ing Freshman  Orientation  to  students  who  completed 
college-level  courses  in  secondary  school,  who  did  not 
write  Advanced  Placement  examinations,  and  who 
request  permission  to  write  the  tests.  The  current 
practices  at  Lehigh  follow: 

English.  Advanced  Placement  and  six  semester  hours 
of  Lehigh  credit  for  English  1  and  2,  10,  14,  or  16 
(the  standard  freshman  courses)  to  students  who  earn 
scores  of  3  or  higher  on  the  C.E.E.B.  Advanced  Place- 
ment Test  in  English.  Other  students  who  earn  a  score 
of  700  or  higher  on  the  SAT-Verbal  Aptitude  Test 
receive  equal  credit. 

Mathematics.  Advanced  Placement  and  four  semester 
hours  of  Lehigh  credit  for  Mathematics  21,  Analytic 
Geometry  and  Calculus  I,  to  students  who  earn  scores 
of  3  or  higher  on  the  Calculus  AB  examination:  ad- 
vanced placement  and  eight  semester  hours  of  Lehigh 
credit  for  Mathematics  21  and  Mathematics  22,  Ana- 
lytic Geometry,  and  Calculus  I  and  II,  to  students 
who  earn  scores  of  3  or  higher  on  the  Calculus  BC 
examination.  Other  students,  selected  by  the  depart- 
ment of  mathematics  on  the  basis  of  entrance  creden- 
tials, are  invited  to  participate  in  an  accelerated  cal- 
culus sequence,  Mathematics  31  and  32.  Upon  com- 
pletion of  Math.  31  and  32,  each  of  which  carries 
four  credit  hours,  and  upon  certification  by  the  de- 


Undergraduate  Admi 


Procedures      9 


partment  ol  mathematics  ol  superioi  performance, 
the  student  receives  four  hours  ol  advanced  pl.u ■>■ 
ment  credit  in  calculus.  The  department  also  admini- 
sters placement  tests  iluring  Freshman  Orientation  to 
students  who  did  not  write  the  Advanced  Placement 
examination  and  who  request  permission  to  write  .1 
Lehigh  test. 

Chemistry.  Advanced  Placement  and  five  semester 
hours  of  Lehigh  credit  for  Chemistry  21  and  Chemis- 
try 22  to  students  who  earn  scores  ot  4  or  5.  Other 
students  who  earn  scores  ot  750  or  higher  on  the 
Chemistry  Achievement  Test  of  the  C.E.E.B.  also 
receive  equal  credit.  The  department  administers  tests 
during  Freshman  Orientation  to  students  who  did  not 
write  the  Advanced  Placement  examination  and  who 
wish  to  establish  credit  tor  the  first  Lehigh  course. 
History.  Consideration  for  advanced  placement 
and/or  credit  to  students  who  earn  scores  of  3  or 
higher  on  the  American  History  or  European  History 
Advanced  Placement  examinations.  Special  courses, 
History  51  and  History  52,  are  available  to  students 
who  earn  advanced  placement  and/or  credit. 
Biology.  Advanced  Placement  and/or  3  semester 
hours  of  Lehigh  credit  for  Biology  21  to  students 
who  earn  scores  of  3  or  higher.  Examinations  are  not 
offered  during  Freshman  Orientation. 
Physics.  Advanced  Placement  and  four  semester  hours 
ot  Lehigh  credit  for  Physics  11.  Introductory  Physics, 
to  students  who  earn  scores  of  4  or  5  on  the  Physics 
C  examination.  Placement  or  credit  is  not  granted  to 
students  who  write  the  Physics  B  examination.  The 
department  administers  tests  during  Freshman  Orient- 
ation to  students  who  did  not  write  the  Advanced 
Placement  test  and  who  request  permission  to  write  a 
Lehigh  examination. 

Foreign  Languages.  The  department  of  modern 
foreign  languages  and  literatures  does  not  normally 
offer  advanced  placement  or  credit  based  on  the  Ad- 
vanced Placement  Test.  However,  students  scoring 
600  or  above  on  the  College  Board  Achievement  Test 
are  exempt  from  the  language  requirement  and  may 
elect  advanced  language  or  foreign  literature  courses. 
Each  language  section  determines  student  placement 
according  to  criteria  which  may  include  Achievement 
Test  scores,  Advanced  Placement  Test  scores,  years  of 
prior  study,  or  a  personal  interview. 

The  University  encourages  the  initiative  which 
secondary  school  students  are  showing  in  enrolling  in 
advanced  courses,  in  requesting  advanced  standing  in 


college,  and  in  assuming  responsibility  for  a  greater 
share  ol  theii  own  education,  In  addition  to  the 
opportunities  for  advanced  placement  of  freshmen, 
suggested  in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  sophomores 
are  invited  to  consider  the  advantages  of  enrolling  in 
some  junior  courses.  This  may  be  accomplished  by 
special  examinations  available  in  certain  courses  for 
students  who  performed  particularly  well  as  fresh- 
men. 

In  the  junior  year  students  may  register  tor  inter- 
departmental honors  seminars  and  in  some  programs 
may  take  what  is  referred  to  as  "unscheduled  work." 
where  they  have  an  opportunity  to  do  individual 
work  in  consultation  with  a  member  of  the  faculty. 
In  the  senior  year  students  may  continue  with  the 
interdepartmental  honors  seminars  and  may  under- 
take departmental  honors  programs.  Particularly 
well-qualified  students  are  permitted  to  take  a  limited 
number  of  graduate  courses.  Some  students  engage  in 
research  projects  in  connection  with  their  senior 
thesis. 

The  opportunities  for  able  and  well-motivated 
students  are  increasing  each  year  and  more  students 
are  qualifying  each  year  for  advanced  sections  and 
courses  and  honors  programs. 

Acceptance  of  Admission  and  Deposit 

Selection  of  candidates  for  the  freshman  class  en- 
tering in  September  is  made  between  the  end  of  Feb- 
ruary and  the  first  of  April  following  receipt  of  Janu- 
ary College  Board  scores  and  preliminary  secondary 
school  records.  Lehigh  subscribes  to  the  "Candidates' 
Reply  Date,"  which  has  been  set  at  May  first. 

When  a  candidate's  preliminary  credentials  are 
complete  and  he  has  been  offered  formal  admission 
to  Lehigh  University,  he  will  be  asked  to  notify  the 
Director  of  Admission  of  his  acceptance  of  the  offer 
of  admission  by  making  a  deposit  of  $50  to  hold  a 
place  for  him  in  the  limited  enrollment.  This  deposit 
is  not  an  additional  fee  but  is  applied  toward  tuition 
charges  for  the  first  semester.  However,  the  deposit  is 
forfeited  in  case  of  failure  to  enroll  for  the  specified 
semester. 

Presidential  Prizes 

Ten  Presidential  Prizes  are  awarded  to  entering  fresh- 
men based  on  merit  and  without  regard  to  financial 
need.  (See  statement  on  page  54  of  the  Special 


10      Undergraduate  Admission:  Procedures 


Academic  Opportunities  section  of  this  catalog. 


Tuition  and  Fees 


Transfer  Students 

Candidates  for  admission  from  other  institutions  are 
admitted  with  advanced  standing  to  the  three  colleges 
of  the  University.  Such  candidates  must  have  met  the 
subject  matter  entrance  requirements  prescribed  for 
undergraduates  at  Lehigh.  No  entrance  examinations 
are  required. 

A  candidate  who  has  studied  at  another  college 
prior  to  applying  tor  admission  to  Lehigh  will  be  con- 
sidered on  the  basis  of  the  quality  of  his  record  at 
that  college.  A  candidate  who  has  been  dropped  from 
another  college  for  disciplinary  reasons  or  for  poor 
scholarship  or  who  is  not  in  good  standing  at  his 
former  college  is  not  eligible  for  admission  to  Lehigh 
University. 

A  student  who  is  planning  to  transfer  to  Lehigh 
University  should  so  arrange  his  work  in  college  that 
he  will  cover  as  many  as  possible  of  the  subjects  of  his 
chosen  curriculum  at  Lehigh. 

A  student  who  desires  to  transfer  to  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity from  another  college  must  submit  an  applica- 
tion for  admission  (on  a  special  transfer  form)  with 
the  SI 5  application  fee.  He  must  request  each  college 
previously  attended  to  submit  to  the  Office  of  Admis- 
sion at  Lehigh  University  an  official  transcript  of  his 
academic  record.  Catalog  pages  describing  the  courses 
completed  at  other  colleges  should  be  enclosed  with 
the  application.  It  is  not  necessary  to  send  complete 
catalogs. 

A  candidate  who  has  attended  more  than  one  uni- 
versity, college,  or  junior  college  must  present  a 
record  from  each  institution.  Failure  to  submit  a 
complete  record  of  former  academic  experience  will 
result  in  cancellation  of  admission  or  registration. 


Lehigh  University  reserves  the  right  to  change  at  any 
time  the  rules  governing  tuition  and  fees. 

The  comprehensive  tuition  in  the  undergraduate 
colleges  is  12,850  a  year.  A  student  regularly  enrolled 
in  any  of  the  undergraduate  divisions  of  the  Universi- 
ty who  registers  for  fewer  than  the  normal  hours  of 
work  will  pay  either  S 1 1 9  for  each  semester-hour 
carried,  or  the  regular  tuition,  whichever  amount  is 
lower. 

Undergraduate  Expenses 

Items  of  personal  expense  are  dependent  upon  each 
student's  personal  habits  and  circumstances.  There 
are  certain  basic  expenses  in  addition  to  tuition  which 
must  be  met.  For  example,  books,  stationery,  and 
drawing  instruments  may  be  purchased  at  the  book- 
store in  Maginnes  Hall  at  an  average  annual  expense 
of  S150  to  1170.  This  allowance  does  not  include 
personal  expenditures. 

Since  Lehigh  is  primarily  a  residential  university, 
provision  is  made  for  student-living  quarters  and 
dining  facilities,  and  social  fraternities.  Not  all  upper- 
classmen  live  in  residence  halls  or  fraternity  houses. 
Many  elect  to  live  in  off-campus  apartments  or  room- 
ing houses.  Students  living  in  residence  halls  are  re- 
quired to  eat  in  the  University  dining  facilities.  Three 
basic  meal  plans  are  available,  and  are  described  later 
in  this  section.  There  are  no  fees  for  athletics,  health 
service,  library,  student  activities,  or  student  concerts 
and  lectures.  In  addition,  there  are  no  matriculation, 
graduation,  or  laboratory  fees. 

Undergraduate  fees  are  payable  prior  to  registra- 
tion. A  bill  will  be  rendered  by  the  Bursar's  Office 
which  will  indicate  the  payment  date.  If  desired,  pay- 
ment may  be  made  in  installments  of  60  percent,  plus 
a  service  charge  of  $3  per  semester,  due  prior  to  regis- 
tration, 20  percent  due  one  month  after  registration, 
and  20  percent  due  two  months  after  registration. 
The  $3  service  charge  is  not  refundable. 


Tuition  and  Fees:  Undergraduate  Expenses     1 1 


Residence  1  lalls 

About  50  percent  of  1  ehigh  undergraduates  live  in 
University  residence  halls.  Lehigh  has  seven  residence 
halls  tor  undergraduate  men  .nut  women.  Most  rooms 
are  designed  for  two  students,  but  a  limited  number 
of  single,  triple,  and  suite  arrangement  rooms  are 
available.  Another  residence  hall,  comprised  ol  apart- 
ment units,  will  be  completed  in  1974. 

Room  rental  charges  in  the  residence  halls  range 
from  S265  to  S310  per  semester  in  1973-74.  An  addi- 
tional charge  of  S45  to  S52.50  per  semester  is  made 
for  single  rooms.  Maid  service  is  included  in  the  room 
fee,  and  all  essential  furniture  is  provided.  Rooms  are 
rented  on  an  annual  lease  basis  only. 

When  a  candidate  accepts  an  offer  of  admission  to 
the  freshman  class,  the  candidate  is  sent  a  Room  and 
Board  Application-Contract.  Those  desiring  accom- 
modations in  the  residence  halls  are  urged  to  return 
this  application-contract  promptly  because  priority  of 
assignment  is  based  on  date  of  receipt  of  this  applica- 
tion, acceptance  of  admission,  and  application  for 
admission.  A  non-refundable  advance  deposit  of  $100 
must  accompany  the  application.  The  deposit  will  be 
credited  to  the  fall  semester  room  and  board  charges. 
Normally  freshman  room  assignments  are  made  in 
early  August  by  the  Office  of  the  Dean  of  Residence. 

Freshmen  who  wish  to  room  together  must  make 
special  request  with  their  applications,  and  letters 
from  parents  or  guardians  of  each  student  should  be 
submitted  in  support  of  the  request.  Any  questions 
concerning  residence  halls  should  be  directed  to  the 
Office  of  the  Dean  of  Residence. 

Students  desiring  to  continue  in  the  residence  halls 
as  upperclassmen  are  permitted  to  file  application- 
contracts  in  early  spring.  Based  on  priorities  and  avail- 
ability, contracts  are  accepted  April  1  for  the  follow- 
ing academic  year.  A  S100  advance  deposit  is  re- 
quired. 

Each  student  in  the  residence  halls  is  provided 
with  a  bed,  mattress,  chest  of  drawers,  and  chairs. 
Residents  supply  such  personal  items  as  pillows, 
wastepaper  baskets,  quilts,  ash  trays,  and  radios.  Most 
residents  must  supply  their  own  desk  lamp.  Students 
may  supply  their  own  bed  linen  and  towels  and  make 
their  own  arrangements  to  have  these  laundered,  or 
they  may  subscribe  to  a  linen  service  which  provides 
clean  bed  linen  and  towels  each  week.  The  present 
charge  for  this  service  is  approximately  $35  for  the 


ioI  year. 

Personal  laundry  is  handled  by  the  student  on  an 
individual  basis.  A  laundry  service  is  made  available  in 
the  residence  halls  by  a  local  firm  at  approximately 
S80  per  war .  (  )i her  students  use  coin-operated  wash- 
ers. 

Residents  will  be  held  responsible  for  any  damage 
done  to  their  rooms  or  any  other  part  of  the  resi 
dence  halls  and  their  equipment. 

The  University  is  not  responsible  for  the  loss  or 
destruction  of  any  student  property  whether  such 
losses  occur  in  the  residence  halls,  lockers,  class- 
rooms, etc.  The  safekeeping  of  student  property  is 
the  responsibility  of  each  individual  student  and  no 
reimbursement  from  the  University  can  be  expected 
tor  the  loss  of  such  property.  Insurance  protection,  if 
desired,  may  be  obtained  by  a  student  or  his  parents 
from  an  insurance  broker  or  agent. 

Information  on  off-campus  housing  may  be  secur- 
ed from  the  Office  of  the  Dean  of  Residence. 

Social  Fraternities 

Approximately  one-third  of  the  male  students  live  in 
fraternity  houses.  Such  accommodations  are  available 
only  to  upperclassmen  who  receive  invitations  to  join 
the  groups. 

Of  the  thirty-one  social  fraternities  with  chapters 
at  Lehigh,  twenty -seven  occupy  houses  on  the  cam- 
pus. The  remaining  houses  are  in  Bethlehem  adjacent 
to  the  campus.  Freshmen  are  "rushed"  during  the 
first  semester  of  the  freshman  year,  but  they  do  not 
move  into  fraternity  houses  until  the  sophomore 
year.  Many  commodities  and  services  needed  by  the 
fraternities  are  provided  by  the  co-operative  Fraterni- 
ty Management  Association.  Students  who  accept 
invitations  to  live  in  fraternities  are  required  to  for- 
malize their  acceptance  in  a  written  contract  with  the 
fraternity.  These  contracts  are  based  on  budgets  pre- 
pared with  the  Fraternity  Management  Association 
and  approved  by  the  fraternity  chapters  and  alumni 
corporations.  These  contracts  are  binding  in  the  fra- 
ternity segment  of  the  University's  residential  system. 
Accordingly,  upon  registration  for  the  academic 
period  covered  by  contract,  fraternity  members  are 
obligated  to  pay  approved  fraternity  bills  through  the 
University. 

Living  costs  in  fraternities  vary  with  the  individual 
chapters  but  are  generally  of  the  same  order  of  ex- 


12      Tuition  and  Fees:  Undergraduate  Expenses 


pense  as  residence  (room  and  board)  in  University- 
operated  halls. 

Dining  Services 

Each  student  who  lives  in  the  residence  halls  is  pro- 
vided with  board  in  the  University  dining  services. 
The  following  three  board  plans  are  available: 
Plan  A.  Twenty-one  meals  per  week  at  $340  per 
semester.  This  includes  three  meals  daily  beginning 
with  the  evening  meal  before  the  first  day  of  classes 
and  continuing  except  for  announced  holidays 
through  the  noon  meal  of  the  last  day  of  the  examin- 
ation period  each  semester. 

Plan  B.  Seventeen  meals  per  week  at  $307.50  per 
semester.  This  includes  Monday  breakfast  through 
and  including  Saturday  lunch  beginning  with  the 
evening  meal  before  the  first  day  of  classes  and  con- 
tinuing, except  for  holidays,  through  the  last  day  of 
classes  for  each  semester.  Meals  during  the  examina- 
tion periods,  ending  with  the  noon  meal  of  the  last 
day  of  examinations  are  also  included. 
Plan  C.  Fifteen  meals  per  week  at  $295  per  semester. 
This  includes  Monday  breakfast  through  Friday  din- 
ner beginning  with  the  evening  meal  before  the  first 
day  of  classes  and  continuing,  except  for  announced 
holidays,  through  the  last  day  of  classes  each  semes- 
ter. Meals  during  the  examination  periods,  ending 
with  the  noon  meal  of  the  last  day  of  examinations, 
are  also  included. 

Plan  A  is  required  for  freshmen  residing  on  the 
campus.  Upperclassmen  residing  on  the  campus  have 
the  choice  of  any  of  the  three  plans. 

The  board  plans  and  the  student  dining  rooms  are 
open  primarily  to  students  of  the  residence  halls. 
These  plans  may  be  extended  to  non-residence  hall 
students  on  a  limited  basis.  In  addition,  a  five  meal 
per  week  plan  is  available  (the  noon  meal,  Monday 
through  Friday)  at  a  cost  of  $87.50  per  semester. 
Students  who  do  not  live  in  the  residence  halls  may 
apply  to  the  Bursar  for  participation  in  one  of  the 
dining  plans.  A  Snack  Bar  is  operated  in  the  Universi- 
ty Center  and  is  open  to  all  students  of  the  Universi- 
ty- 
Freshmen  residing  on  the  campus  are  required  to 
eat  their  meals  in  the  University  dining  facilities  dur- 
ing Freshman  Orientation.  There  will  be  an  additional 
charge  for  serving  the  three  meals  per  day  during 
Freshman  Orientation. 


Each  student  who  participates  in  one  of  the  board 
plans  will  receive  a  dining  service  identification  card 
which  is  not  transferable.  Use  of  the  card  by  someone 
other  than  to  whom  it  is  issued  is  illegal  and  will  re- 
sult in  disciplinary  action.  New  cards  will  be  issued  to 
replace  lost  cards  upon  the  payment  of  a  fee  of  $5. 

Visitors  on  campus  may  eat  in  the  Asa  Packer 
Room,  the  faculty  and  guest  dining  room,  in  the  Uni- 
versity Center. 

Special  Fees 

Military  and  Band  Deposits.  A  deposit  of  $25  is  made 
by  each  student  enrolling  in  military  or  air  science  or 
in  band.  This  deposit  is  refunded  when  the  property 
issued  to  the  student  is  returned. 

Chemistry  Breakage.  Students  taking  chemistry  labora- 
tory courses  are  required  to  reimburse  the  University 
for  returnable  equipment  broken  or  otherwise 
damaged  and  for  all  chemicals  used  in  excess  of 
reasonable  amounts. 

Examination  Fees.  Students  who  for  satisfactory 
reasons  absent  themselves  from  final  examinations 
will  be  allowed,  upon  petition,  to  take  make-up 
examinations  without  payment  of  an  examination 
fee.  A  fee  of  $5  is  charged  for  any  examination  subse- 
quent to  the  first  regular  final  or  make-up  examina- 
tion allowed  upon  petition  in  any  course.  This  regula- 
tion applies  to  the  psychological  and  placement  ex- 
aminations required  of  new  students  if  taken  at  some 
time  other  than  those  scheduled. 
Late  Registration  Fees.  The  penalty  for  procuring  a 
registration  ticket  after  the  time  specified  by  the 
Registrar  shall  be  $10.  A  student  who  does  not  com- 
plete his  registration  within  three  days  after  the  date 
of  his  registration  ticket  is  subject  to  a  penalty  of 
$10.  No  registration  will  be  accepted  later  than  the 
tenth  day  of  instruction  in  a  regular  semester  or  the 
fifth  day  of  instruction  in  any  summer  term. 
Late  Pre-Registration  Fee.  The  penalty  for  a  late  pre- 
registration  or  a  change  in  pre-registration  is  $10.  This 
will  be  waived  for  cause  upon  the  recommendation  of 
the  college  dean. 

Change-of -Roster  Fee.  Having  once  registered  in  any 
semester,  a  student  may  not  drop  any  course  except 
on  the  recommendation  of  the  director  of  his  curricu- 
lum. There  will  be  a  $10  change -of-roster  fee  for  each 
change  unless  it  is  waived  by  the  college  dean. 
Late  Installment  Payment.  In  certain  cases,  students 


Tuition  and  Fees:  Undergraduate  Expenses      13 


arc  permitted  to  pay  scmestei  bills  in  three  paymeni 
In  othei  cases,  emergency  short  term  loans  are  grant- 
ed to  be  repaid  in  period  installments  within  the 
semestei  in  which  the  loan  is  granted.  A  penalty  fee 
o(  SIO  is  levied  on  any  student  who  fails  to  make 
payment  in  accordance  with  the  agreed  schedule. 
Late  Payment  oj  Fees.  University  fees  are  payable 
prior  to  registration.  It  payment,  or  provision  tor 
p.ivment  s.itist.utoi  v  to  the  University,  i.s  not  made 
prior  to  registration,  a  fee  'it  SIO  will  be  assessed  it 
sueli  payments,  or  provisions  for  payments,  are  made 
atter  the  registration  date. 

Late    Ipplication  foi  Degree  Fee.  A  fee  ot  SIO  is 
charged  for  late  filing.  See  Notice  ot  Candidacy  for 
Degree  tor  dates. 

Application  for  Admission  Fee.  A  fee  of  $15  is  re- 
quired with  each  application  tor  admission  to  the 
undergraduate  colleges  ot  the  University. 
Listener  's  Fee.  Undergraduate  students  enrolled  in 
less  than  a  full  program  who  wish  to  attend  a  course 
or  courses  without  obtaining  credit  will  be  charged  a 
listener's  fee  of  SI  19  for  each  such  course  attended. 
Transcripts.  Each  student  is  entitled  to  one  copy  of 
liis  record  free  of  charge.  This  can  be  an  official  or 
unofficial  transcript.  Unofficial  copies  are  released  to 
the  student;  official  copies  are  sent  directly  to  the 
educational  institution,  company,  state  board,  etc.,  as 
the  circumstances  may  require.  After  the  first  copy  is 
released  a  tee  of  SI  is  assessed  for  each  subsequent 
copy. 

Refunds 

Tuition.  In  the  event  of  the  death  of  a  student  or  his 
involuntary  induction  into  the  armed  forces,  tuition 
will  be  refunded  in  proportion  to  the  fraction  of  the 
semester  remaining  at  the  time  of  his  death  or  induc- 
tion. 

It  a  student  withdraws  from  the  University,  he  is 
entitled  to  receive  a  refund  of  his  tuition  less  SI 00 
and  less  a  deduction  of  2  percent  of  the  tuition  for 
each  day  of  instruction  completed,  computed  from 
the  first  day  of  instruction  in  the  semester.  No  stu- 
dent who  is  suspended  or  expelled  from  the  Universi- 
ty shall  be  entitled  to  any  refund. 

A  summer  session  student  who  formally  withdraws 
from  the  University  is  entitled  to  receive  a  refund  of 
his  total  tuition  less  $5  for  each  credit  hour  for  which 
he  is  registered  and  less  a  deduction  for  each  day  of 


rcgulai  instruction  ol   I  perceni  "I  the  total  tuition 
paid  computed  from  the  first  day  ol  instruction  in 

.|i  HI. 

Refunds  will  be  made  through  the  tenth  day  of 
instruction  in  a  regular  semestei  to  undergraduate 
students  for  reductions  of  schedules  below  twelve 
.  redil   hours    lull  time).  The  refund  shall  be  in  .in 
amount  equal  to  the  number  ot  credit  hours  remain- 
ing multiplied  by  the  credit  hour  rate  deducted  from 
the  semester  tuition  paid.  Refunds  will  be  made 
through  the  tilth  day  of  instruction  in  the  summer 
session  for  reductions  of  schedules  in  an  amount 
equal  to  the  credit  hours  dropped  multiplied  by  the 
credit  hour  rate.  No  refunds  will  be  made  to  any  un- 
dergraduate student  for  any  reduction  in  his  schedule 
atter  the  tenth  day  of  instruction  in  a  regular  semes- 
ter or  the  fifth  day  of  instruction  in  a  summer 
session. 

Residence  Hall  Rental  and  Dining  Service  Charge. 
Residence  hall  rooms  are  rented  on  an  annual  lease 
basis  only.  A  student  who  signs  a  Room  and  Board 
Application-Contract  is  expected  to  occupy  a  room  in 
the  residence  halls  for  the  full  college  year. 

An  advance  deposit  on  residence  hall  rental  and 
dining  service  charges  of  S100  will  be  required  with 
the  signing  of  the  contract.  The  deposit  will  be  credit- 
ed to  the  fall  semester  room  and  board  charges. 

A  full  refund  of  all  residence  hall  rental  and  dining 
service  charges  paid,  including  advance  deposits,  will 
be  made  in  the  event  a  student  does  not  register  be- 
cause of  illness,  injury,  death,  induction  into  the  arm- 
ed forces,  or  if  the  student  is  dropped  from  the  Uni- 
versity for  academic  reasons.  In  such  cases  the  Univer- 
sity must  be  notified  within  10  days  to  be  eligible  for 
refund.  Should  the  student  be  readmitted  to  the  Uni- 
versity for  the  following  fall  or  spring  semester  and 
there  are  accommodations  available  in  the  residence 
halls  system  at  the  time  of  readmission,  the  student  is 
bound  by  the  contract  to  accept  residence  halls  ac- 
commodations. Except  for  the  reasons  stated  above, 
no  refund  will  be  granted  to  incoming  freshmen  stu- 
dents. 

No  student  who  is  suspended  or  expelled  from  the 
University  for  disciplinary  reasons  shall  be  entitled  to 
any  refund  of  deposit  or  residence  hall  room  and 
dining  service  charges. 

Currently  enrolled  students  who  sign  Room  and 
Board  Application-Contracts  in  the  spring  for  resi- 


14      Tuition  and  Fees:  Undergraduate  Expenses 


dence  as  upperclassmen  in  the  following  year  are  en- 
titled to  a  partial  refund  of  advance  deposit  if  the 
following  requirements  are  satisfied: 

A.  In  the  event  of  voluntary  withdrawal  from  the 
University. 

B.  In  the  event  of  desired  voluntary  withdrawal 
from  the  residence  halls  if  the  lease  can  be  transferred 
to  another  student  for  whom  no  other  accommoda- 
tions exist.  If  the  lease  cannot  be  transferred  to 
another  student,  for  whom  there  are  no  other  accom- 
modations, there  will  be  no  refund  of  deposit  and  the 
student  will  be  held  liable  for  the  full  amount  of  the 
residence  halls  and  dining  service  charges  contracted. 

C.  Partial  refund  schedule; 

Notification  received  by  Amount  of 

the  University  on  or  before  Refund 
May  1  $60 

July  1  $40 

August  15  $20 

After  August  15  no  refund 

A  refund  of  residence  halls  rentals  and  dining  ser- 
vice charges  will  be  made  on  a  proportionate  basis 
after  registration  in  the  event  of  a  student's  involun- 
tary withdrawal  from  the  University  due  to  illness,  in- 
jury, death,  or  induction  into  the  armed  forces.  In 
the  event  of  voluntary  withdrawal  from  the  Universi- 
ty no  refund  will  be  made  except  in  the  case  of  a 
transfer  of  lease  to  another  student  for  whom  no 
other  accommodations  exist.  In  the  event  of  a  trans- 
fer of  lease  to  another  student  under  these  conditions 
a  proportionate  refund  of  residence  hall  rental  and 
dining  service  charges  less  $50  will  be  made.  The  max- 
imum proportionate  refund  cannot  exceed  the  total 
of  residence  hall  rental  and  dining  service  charges  less 
$100. 

No  residence  hall  or  dining  service  refund  will  be 
considered  until  (and  date  for  calculation  of  propor- 
tionate refund  will  be  determined  by)  such  date  that 
room  is  vacated  and  door  key(s)  and  dining  service 
meal  ticket  are  returned  to  the  Residence  Halls 
Office. 

A  student  who  forfeits  a  room  and  dining  service 
reservation  in  the  fall  semester  and  who  returns  to  the 
University  in  the  spring  semester  is  still  obligated  for 
room  rental  and  dining  service  charges  for  the  the 
spring  semester  providing  such  facilities  are  available. 

A  refund  shall  be  certified  to  the  Bursar  by  the 
Dean  of  Residence. 


Payment.  All  refunds,  including  overpayments  of 
charges  resulting  from  scholarship  awards,  loans, 
financing  arrangements  with  banks,  etc.,  will  be  made 
by  check  payable  to  the  student.  A  minimum  of  ten 
days  is  normally  required  to  process  refund  checks. 


Tuition  and  Fees:  Undergraduate  Expenses      15 


Undergraduate  Scholarships 
and  Loans 


Lehigh  University  extends  grant  and  self-help  oppor- 
tunities to  deserving  and  promising  students  who 
would  not  otherwise  be  able  to  attend  the  University. 
to  the  extent  that  tunds  are  available  tor  such  assis- 
tance. Approximately  twenty-six  per  cent  of  the  pre- 
sent undergraduate  enrollment  was  granted  University 
assistance.  In  addition,  outside  grants  and  loans  were 
awarded  to  Lehigh  students  from  programs  sponsored 
by  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania,  Army  and 
Air  Force  ROTC.  and  many  private  and  state  sponsor- 
ed organizations. 

Application  Procedures 

To  be  equitable  in  the  awarding  of  financial  assis- 
tance, "need"  must  first  be  clearly  evidenced.  Fami- 
lies are  required  to  file  the  Parents'  Confidential 
Statement  with  the  College  Scholarship  Service.  Once 
need  has  been  established,  the  Committee  on  Under- 
graduate Financial  Aid  endeavors  to  aid  as  many 
well-qualified  applicants  as  funds  will  allow.  An  in- 
creasing number  of  students  have  been  aided  since  the 
advent  of  the  "package"  concept  of  awards,  whereby 
a  student  receives  a  combination  of  grant  assistance 
and  self-help  (loan  and  campus  employment).  Self- 
help  allows  the  student  a  greater  degree  of  personal 
involvement  in  the  financing  of  his  own  education. 

In  the  competition  for  financial  aid  funds,  empha- 
sis is  placed  upon  exceptional  academic  achievement 
and  promise,  commendable  participation  in  activities 
outside  the  classroom,  and  good  citizenship.  Awards 
are  made  on  a  yearly  basis.  For  an  award  to  be  renew- 
ed, an  updated  Parents'  Confidential  Statement  is 
required  to  establish  continued  evidence  of  need  and 
the  level  of  assistance  indicated.  Continuation  of  an 
award  assumes  that  the  recipient  will  continue  to 
show  scholastic  excellence  and  leadership  activity 
commensurate  with  the  promise  shown  when  the 
award  was  originally  made. 

Eligibility 

A  special  scholarship  application  is  not  required  by 
Lehigh.  Requests  should  not  be  made  for  a  particular 


type  "I  s(  holarship.  The  submission  oi  a  College 
Scholarship  Service  I  orm  I"  fori    [anuary  15  estab- 
lishes the  candid. ile  as  an  applii  .ml  for  all  types  "I 
financial  aid  foi  which  he  is  eligible,  as  outlined  be- 
low. 

The  Committee  i  in  I  inancial  Aid  makes  first  selec- 
tions in  March  and  notifies  all  candidates  as  prompt  \) 
as  possible. 

All  uppet  classmen  applying  tor  financial  aid  con- 
sideration may  acquire  their  applications  from  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid  beginning  two  weeks  prior  to 
the  Christmas  vacation.  The  Committee  on  Financial 
Aid  reviews  uppcrclassman  applications  within  three 
weeks  of  receiving  grades  for  the  spring  semester,  and 
notifies  applicants  as  promptly  as  possible. 

Transfer  applicants  for  aid  consideration  are  re- 
viewed with  the  uppcrclassmen,  provided  that  the 
admission  and  financial  aid  dossier  is  complete. 

Programs  Available 

Trustee  Scholarships.  These  are  awards  covering  the 
tuition  charges  in  whole  or  part,  provided  by  alloca- 
tion of  the  Board  of  Trustees  from  general  funds  in 
order  to  supplement  endowed  scholarships. 
Endowed  and  Supported  Scholarships.  These  are  pro- 
vided by  individuals  and  by  corporations  either 
through  endowments  or  by  annual  contributions,  and 
are  granted  to  able  and  deserving  students  who  other- 
wise would  not  be  able  to  attend  college. 
Leadership  Awards.  While  still  requiring  evidences  of 
genuine  financial  need,  good  scholarship,  and  good 
citizenship,  these  awards  place  more  emphasis  on 
leadership  attainments  in  non-academic  activities. 
These  include  Alumni  Student  Grants  provided  for 
good  students  with  both  aptitude  and  achievement  in 
athletics.  Leadership  awards  are  restricted  in  terms  of 
the  particular  qualifications  and  interests  of  the  appli- 
cants as  indicated  in  each  instance. 
Lehigh  University  Merit  Scholarships.  These  are  grant- 
ed in  cooperation  with  the  National  Merit  Scholarship 
Corporation.  The  corporation  and  Lehigh  annually 
award  up  to  twenty  four-year  Merit  Scholarships 
financed  through  the  Annual  Giving  Program  of  Le- 
high alumni.  The  National  Merit  Scholarship  Corpora- 
tion conducts  the  competition  for  these  scholarships 
as  well  as  all  others  under  its  supervision.  Final  selec- 
tion of  Lehigh  University  Merit  Scholars  is  limited  to 
Merit  Finalists  who  wish  to  attend  Lehigh  University 


16      Undergraduate  Scholarships  and  Loans:  Application  Procedures 


and  are  qualified  to  do  so.  The  individual  stipend  is 
based  on  the  candidate's  need  as  estimated  by  the 
University  and  is  adjusted  annually  according  to  the 
financial  status  of  his  parents  and  his  own  ability  to 
earn  funds  during  vacation  periods.  Stipends  range 
from  S100  to  $1,500  per  year. 
Tuition  Loans.  Such  loans  are  made  on  the  basis  of 
merit  and  need,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Committee 
on  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid  to  the  extent  that 
funds  are  available.  No  loan  can  be  made  to  a  student 
on  scholastic  or  disciplinary  probation.  The  maxi- 
mum indebtedness  to  the  University  that  any  student 
may  normally  incur  will  generally  not  exceed  one-half 
of  his  total  tuition  obligations  up  to  and  including  the 
semester  for  which  he  is  seeking  tuition  aid. 

Each  student  qualifying  for  a  tuition  loan  is  asked 
to  sign  a  note,  endorsed  by  his  parents  or  guardian. 
Repayment  schedule  satisfactory  to  the  University 
may  be  arranged  through  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
Tuition  loans  will  bear  interest  at  the  rate  of  4%  from 
the  date  of  the  note,  with  provision  that  the  rates 
shall  be  increased  to  6%  in  the  case  of  any  note  which 
falls  into  default. 

Short-Term  Loans.  These  are  emergency  loans  and 
must  be  repaid,  according  to  an  acknowledged  sched- 
ule, before  the  end  of  classes  of  the  semester  for 
which  they  are  granted.  Short-term  loans  bear  interest 
at  the  rate  of  four  percent  per  year  from  the  date  of 
the  note.  A  minimum  interest  charge  of  fifty  cents  is 
made  for  each  short-term  loan  granted. 

The  maximum  amount  for  which  a  short-term  loan 
may  be  granted,  whether  for  tuition  or  for  other  pur- 
poses, is  sixty  percent  of  the  student's  total  bill  to  the 
University  for  that  semester. 

Every  student  incurring  indebtedness  to  the  Uni- 
versity is  required  to  undertake  to  pay  his  debt  in  full 
as  rapidly  as  possible.  Prompt  repayment  of  loans 
insures  the  availability  of  a  continuing  fund  to  help 
other  students. 

Programs  Sponsored  by  Office  of  Education.  These 
consist  of  the  Supplementary  Educational  Opportuni- 
ty Grant  (SEOC)  program,  the  College  Work-Study 
Program  (CW-SP),  and  the  National  Direct  Student 
Loan  (NDSL)  program.  All  recipients  are  selected  by 
the  University. 

SEOG  is  for  students  of  exceptional  financial  need 
who  without  this  grant  would  be  unable  to  continue 
their  education.  Grants  up  to  $1000  a  year  are  avail- 


able tor  4  years  of  undergraduate  study,  and  are 
matched  with  at  least  an  equal  amount  of  University 
assistance. 

CW-SP  assists  students  by  providing  job  opportuni- 
ties either  with  the  college  itself  or  with  private  or 
public  non-profit  agencies  working  in  cooperation 
with  Lehigh.  Students  may  work  an  average  of  15 
hours  weekly,  with  pay  determined  by  the  University. 

NDSL  makes  it  possible  for  the  University  to  make 
loan  awards  up  to  $1000  to  needy  students.  The 
financial  aid  officer  is  responsible  for  determining 
eligibility.  Repayment  begins  9  months  after  gradua- 
tion or  termination  of  at  least  half-time  study  and 
may  extend  over  a  10-year  period.  Interest  charges  of 
3  percent  also  begin  at  the  start  of  the  repayment 
period.  No  repayment  is  required  and  no  interest  is 
charged  for  any  period  up  to  3  years  of  service  in  the 
armed  forces,  Peace  Corps,  or  VISTA.  Graduate  stu- 
dents are  eligible  to  borrow  up  to  $2500  per  year, 
with  deferment  of  previous  loan  repayment. 
State  Programs.  These  are  important  sources  of  both 
grant  and  loan  assistance.  Students  residing  in  the 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  may  be  eligible  for  a 
PHEAA  grant-in-aid  up  to  $1,200  per  year.  Current 
high  school  juniors  and  seniors  should  obtain  infor- 
mation from  their  guidance  office.  College  students 
check  with  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid.  Lehigh  stu- 
dents have  also  received  grant  assistance  from  New 
Jersey,  Massachusetts,  Rhode  Island,  and  Connecti- 
cut. 

Guaranty  loan  programs  exist  in  most  states,  al- 
lowing students  to  borrow  up  to  $1,500  annually 
with  low  interest  and  deferred  repayment.  Applica- 
tions may  be  obtained  at  participating  lending  institu- 
tions. 

Presidential  Prizes.  The  Presidential  Prizes  are  award- 
ed to  entering  freshmen  based  on  merit  and  without 
regard  to  financial  need.  (See  statement  on  page  54  of 
the  Special  Academic  Opportunities  section  of  this 
catalog.) 


Undergraduate  Scholarships  and  Loans:  Programs  Available      1  7 


Student  Personnel  Services 


Counseling  and  Assistance 

General  counseling  ol  individual  students,  especially 
in  the  freshman  year,  begins  with  the  residence  hall 
counselors.  These  counselors  are  carefully  selected 
upperclassmen,  appointed  by  the  president  ot  the 
University,  who  help  the  freshman  and  who  direct 
him  to  more  highly  specialized  aid  when  needed.  The 
entire  program  is  conducted  under  the  supervision  of 
the  dean  of  residence. 

Freshmen  whose  problems  transcend  the  compe- 
tence ol  the  residence  halls  counselors  come  to  other 
advisors  for  guidance  in  many  areas  of  student  life 
and  welfare.  Problems  of  vocational  choice  and  aca- 
demic adjustment  are  not  uncommon,  particularly 
during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years.  At  all 
levels,  academic  and  procedural  questions,  personal 
problems,  social  adjustment  difficulties,  and  many 
other  troubles  are  dealt  with  daily.  The  office  of  the 
dean  of  students  serves  as  a  central  agency  in  helping 
students  to  meet  their  problems  and  concerns,  both 
through  its  staff  and  through  referral  to  other  student 
personnel  and  academic  offices. 

Each  student  in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science  is 
considered  from  the  beginning  of  his  course  as  an 
individual  and  his  choice  of  studies  is  carefully  organ- 
ized in  terms  of  his  specific  backgrounds  of  prepara- 
tion and  his  future  objectives.  Individual  counseling 
continues  throughout  the  student's  four  years  in  the 
college.  In  the  College  of  Business  and  Economics 
faculty  advisors  work  with  the  individual  student  and 
his  individual  problems  for  the  same  purposes.  Simi- 
larly, the  associate  dean  of  the  College  of  Engineering 
curriculum  spends  much  time  with  the  freshman  engi- 
neering students  in  an  effort  to  help  in  the  adjust- 
ment of  academic  difficulties  and  in  better  definition 
of  vocational  objectives.  These  forms  of  advisement 
are  carried  on  through  the  following  years  with  the 
student's  academic  advisors. 

A  student's  problems  often  reveal  the  need  of 
more  highly  specialized  attention,  whereupon  the 
student  is  referred  to  the  particular  service  which  he 
should  consult.  Problems  of  mental  or  physical  well- 


being  are,  ol  course,  referred  to  the  Universil  v  I  [eall  h 
Service  which  is  described  in  another  section.  The 
University  Chaplain  is  available  for  the  student  with 
religious,  moral,  or  personal  concerns  that  are  inter- 
fering with  his  peace  of  mind  and  his  studies. 

II  .1  student  is  uncertain  about  his  vocational  plans 
or  he  needs  to  know  more  about  his  own  capacities, 
interests  or  personal  characteristics,  the  University 
Counseling  Service  is  available  without  charge.  Confi- 
dential interviews  may  be  secured  by  any  student 
who  wishes  to  review  his  own  progress  and  further 
evaluate  and  refine  his  thinking  about  his  future 
goals.  Services  offered  include  personal  counseling  for 
those  students  who  may  need  and  desire  it. 

Later,  in  his  senior  year,  the  question  of  prime 
importance  is  the  decision  of  a  position  after  gradua- 
tion. The  Director  of  Placement,  in  personal  and 
group  conferences,  advises  on  applying  for  a  position, 
on  being  interviewed,  and  on  the  relative  advantages 
and  disadvantages  in  working  for  the  different  busi- 
ness and  industrial  firms  seeking  the  services  of  col- 
lege graduates. 

Financial  problems  can  become  a  serious  hazard 
for  a  student.  The  Director  of  Financial  Aid  is  availa- 
ble for  consultation  on  these  problems  and  many 
other  related  concerns. 

If  the  student  is  a  veteran  of  military  service  and 
has  questions  involving  relations  with  the  Veterans 
Administration,  he  will  find  the  Registrar  informed  in 
this  field.  The  Registrar  also  is  an  advisor  on  the  draft 
and  military  service,  on  matters  of  transferred  credits, 
graduation  requirements,  and  allied  topics. 

A  serious  hazard  to  success  in  a  student's  academic 
life  may  be  in  poor  study  habits  or  reading  skills.  The 
Reading  and  Study  Clinic  can  provide  help. 

Not  all  student  problems  are  individual  problems. 
Many  are  group  problems,  having  to  do  with  group 
living  in  the  residence  halls,  with  student  activities, 
student  organizations  of  many  kinds,  fraternity  life, 
and  campus  social  life  in  general.  The  deans  and  their 
aides  give  much  of  their  time  to  this  area  of  student 
life. 

Many  members  of  the  teaching  faculty  are  deeply 
interested  in  students  and  student  life  and  spend  a 
great  deal  of  time  working  with  student  groups.  They 
contribute  their  services  as  academic  advisors,  activity 
sponsors,  group  sponsors  and  advisors,  by  entertain- 
ing in  their  homes,  and  in  friendly  personal  relation- 


18     Student  Personnel  Services:  Counseling  and  Assistance 


ships  with  students.  Their  contributions  are  invalu- 
able and  appreciated  all  the  more  because  they  are 
largely  voluntary. 

In  these  and  in  other  ways  Lehigh  University  en- 
deavors to  maintain  the  close  contacts  with  students 
which  characterize  the  smaller  institution.  Services 
are  available  for  all  student  needs,  and  the  student 
need  only  turn  to  his  nearest  residence  hall  counselor, 
professor,  or  closest  campus  friend  to  learn  where  he 
can  receive  the  help  he  needs. 

Students'  Health  Service 

A  dispensary  is  maintained  which  is  equipped  and 
staffed  for  routine  medical  and  minor  surgical  care. 
Routine  care  provided  by  the  regular  Health  Service 
physicians,  nurses,  etc.,  is  provided  at  no  cost  to  stu- 
dents. Dispensary  hours  are  regular  University  office 
hours  during  the  week,  and  one-half  day  on  Saturdays 
and  Sundays. 

A  night  medical  attendant  is  on  duty  through  the 
fall  and  spring  semesters.  Facilities  are  available  dur- 
ing these  hours  for  the  treatment  of  minor  injuries 
and  illnesses.  A  physician  is  on  call  at  all  times  during 
the  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

Patients  requiring  more  than  a  few  days  bed  care 
are  sent  home  or  to  local  hospital  when  indicated. 
Any  expenses  so  incurred  must  be  paid  by  the  stu- 
dent. 

Due  to  limited  staff  and  multiplicity  of  dispensary 
duties,  Health  Service  physicians  are  not  able  to  make 
professional  calls  on  students  in  living  groups  or  in 
rooms,  except  in  cases  of  absolute  emergency.  If  un- 
able to  visit  the  dispensary  in  the  event  of  illness  or 
injury,  students  are  advised  to  call  local  physicians  for 
treatment.  Such  physicians'  fees  will  be  paid  by  the 
student,  his  family,  or  his  Health  Insurance  Plan. 

The  Health  Service  wishes  to  work  closely  with  the 
student's  family  physician  and,  as  far  as  possible,  will 
continue  any  treatment  or  follow-up  requested  by 
him. 

Physical  Examinations.  Prior  to  arrival  on  campus 
each  new  undergraduate  student  is  required  to  submit 
a  Health  History  Form  and  Record  of  Physical  Exam- 
ination completed  and  signed  by  his  own  physician.  It 
is  essential  that  all  parts  of  this  form  be  completely 
answered  by  the  student  and  the  examining  physician 
to  be  eligible  for  registration.  At  the  appropriate  time 
these  forms  are  mailed  to  new  students  with  specified 


date  for  completion  and  return  to  the  Director  of  the 
Health  Service. 

The  physicians  of  the  Health  Service  carefully 
analyze  the  results  of  all  physical  examinations  in 
order  to  detect  any  latent  or  obvious  physical,  emo- 
tional, or  mental  abnormality.  When  found,  a  person 
involved  may  be  invited  for  a  conference  and  the 
disability  discussed  with  the  student  confidentially. 

Close  cooperation  between  the  Department  of 
Physical  Education  and  the  Health  Service  permits 
the  establishment  of  rehabilitation  measures,  etc.,  as 
indicated. 

Immunization.  All  new  and  transfer  students  are  re- 
quired to  show  evidence  of  immunization  to,  or 
booster  dose  of  tetanus  toxoid  and  oral  polio  vaccine 
within  the  last  six  years. 

Laboratory.  Facilities  are  available  for  routine  labora- 
tory procedures.  Additional  procedures  are  perform- 
ed at  a  local  hospital  at  the  expense  of  the  student. 
X-ray  Services.  The  X-ray  equipment  of  the  Health 
Service  includes  a  diagnostic  unit.  Work  is  limited  to 
chest  X-rays  and  extremity  X-rays.  No  pictures  are 
taken  of  organs  which  require  contrast  media  such  as 
dyes,  barium,  etc. 

A  small  charge  is  made  to  cover  the  cost  of  reading 
the  films  by  a  local  radiologist. 

Physiotherapy.  A  well-equipped  physiotherapy  sec- 
tion is  a  valuable  adjunct  to  the  University  Health 
Service.  A  well-trained  technician  administers  treat- 
ment under  the  supervision  of  the  University  physi- 
cians with  such  equipment  as  diathermy,  whirlpool, 
ultra-violet  and  infra-red  lamps. 

Personnel.  Full-time  Health  Service  personnel  normal- 
ly include  three  physicians,  a  physiotherapist,  a  labor- 
atory and  X-ray  technician,  two  registered  nurses, 
two  night  medical  attendants,  a  secretary,  an  admini- 
strative assistant,  and  a  receptionist. 
Accident  and  Sickness  Reimbursement  Insurance. 
The  University  offers  students  insurance  coverage 
against  accident  and  sickness  at  nominal  cost,  and  on 
an  entirely  voluntary  basis. 

The  Health  Service  highly  recommends  this  in- 
surance plan  to  both  present  and  prospective  stu- 
dents. Past  experience  has  emphasized  the  importance 
of  such  protection.  All  students  are  urged  to  partici- 
pate in  this  plan  throughout  their  college  careers.  The 
policy  covers  such  items  as  prescription  drugs,  out- 
patient X-rays  which  are  not  performed  by  the  Health 
Service,  and  consultations  which  are  not  covered  by 


Student  Personnel  Services:  Students'  Health  Service      19 


the  usual  hospitalization  policies. 
All  foreign  students  and  others  who,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  administrative  officers  of  the  University, 
may  not  be  in  .1  position  to  meet  the  costs  of  accident 
or  sickness  .ire  usually  required  to  carry  this  insur- 
ance. 

Counseling  Service 

The  University  is  actively  interested  in  the  progress  of 
its  students  as  they  pursue  their  educational  and  per- 
sonal goals  and  wishes  to  provide  assistance  should 
difficulties  arise  during  their  college  years.  This  office 
offers  the  opportunity  for  consultation  with  clinical 
psychologists  and  other  counselors  in  regard  to  a  wide 
variety  of  problems  ranging  in  severity  from  those 
concerns  that  arise  during  the  course  of  normal  devel- 
opment to  more  debiliting  emotional  disturbances. 

In  cases  where  pertinent  and  objective  information 
about  academic  ability,  vocational  interest  or  social- 
personal  adjustment  is  desirable,  psychological  tests 
are  often  administered.  Such  test  batteries  are  avail- 
able at  every  student's  individual  option.  Interpreta- 
tion of  these  tests  are  intended  to  help  the  student 
achieve  his  maximum  effectiveness  in  his  course  work 
and  studying,  his  professional  development  and  his 
campus  life.  The  test  scores  are  utilized  as  only  one  of 
a  number  of  sources  of  information  important  to  wise 
and  effective  planning.  A  library  of  educational  and 
occupational  information  is  maintained  by  the  Coun- 
seling Service,  to  which  students  can  refer  as  they 
attempt  to  develop  a  clear  conception  of  the  educa- 
tional and  vocational  world  and  their  place  in  it. 
Additionally,  cross  communication  with  other  Uni- 
versity personnel  agencies  is  maintained  in  gathering 
together  information  and  expediting  plans  made 
cooperatively  with  the  student. 

When  a  student  is  generally  uncertain,  confused 
and  unable  to  plan  for  the  future  with  confidence,  or 
experiencing  frustration  with  his  studies  and  choice 
of  major,  or  very  unhappy  about  his  social  success 
and  his  ability  with  people,  he  may  undertake  per- 
sonal counseling  aimed  at  helping  him  understand  his 
direction  and  motivation.  Psychotherapeutic  counsel- 
ing, in  particular,  encourages  the  student  to  explore 
the  sources  of  his  feelings,  to  consider  their  influence 
on  his  behavior  and  to  discover  new  ways  to  manage 
his  own  affairs  more  effectively.  In  these  instances 
personal  psychotherapeutic  interviews  would  be  in- 


tensive and  likely  to  involve  conferences  over  an  ex- 
tended period  of  time, 

Both  testing  and  counseling  services  are  available, 
without  cost,  to  all  University  students  and  all  inter- 
views are  held  in  confidence. 

Although  student  counseling  is  the  major  profes- 
sional activity  of  this  office,  the  Counseling  Service  is 
also  the  administrative  center  of  a  variety  of  local  and 
national  testing  programs  in  which  students  might 
wish  to  participate  during  their  college  career.  The 
most  frequently  administered  of  these  programs  are 
the  Graduate  Record  Examination,  Law  School  Ad- 
mission Test,  the  Admission  Test  for  Graduate  Study 
in  Business,  National  Teacher  Examination  and  Miller 
Analogies  Test. 

The  Service  also  engages  in  research  on  tests,  coun- 
seling and  other  personnel  functions.  The  results  of 
such  research  are  ultimately  useful  in  the  counseling 
of  individual  students. 

Placement  Services 

The  University  provides  a  centralized  placement  ser- 
vice to  alumni,  graduate  students  and  seniors.  It  also 
serves  underclassmen  seeking  summer  employment. 

In  addition  to  arranging  interviews  with  prospec- 
tive employers,  the  Placement  Office  has  a  staff  of 
qualified  counselors  who  are  prepared  to  provide 
career  information  and  counseling.  Lehigh  students 
and  alumni  are  encouraged  to  avail  themselves  of  this 
counseling  service  in  planning  and  establishing  suit- 
able career  goals. 

Alumni  are  asked  to  register  with  the  Placement 
Office  if  they  wish  assistance  in  changing  positions  or 
seeking  new  employment. 

Annually  several  hundred  industries,  business  firms 
and  government  agencies  send  representatives  to  the 
campus  to  interview  candidates.  In  addition  to  those 
who  visit  the  campus,  there  are  many  employers  who 
seek  candidates  by  direct  referral. 

A  well-developed  library  of  employment  literature 
is  maintained  for  the  use  of  candidates. 

The  Educational  Placement  Office  in  the  School  of 
Education  handles  placement  of  teachers  and  other 
educational  personnel. 

Reading  and  Study  Clinic 

There  are  many  factors  which  influence  the  perfor- 


20     Student  Personnel  Services:  Counseling  Service 


mance  of  college  students.  An  important  one  is  the 
expertness  with  which  they  master  the  skills  neces- 
sary for  college  work.  High  level  skills  are  needed  in 
preparing  assignments,  note-taking,  outlining,  listen- 
ing, recalling  information  and  facts,  taking  examina- 
tions, preparing  written  and  oral  reports,  and  reading 
critically  and  accurately.  The  Reading  and  Study 
Clinic,  School  of  Education,  offers  Lehigh  students 
an  opportunity  to  develop  satisfactory  reading  and 
study  habits.  The  following  services  are  available  to 
all  students:  analysis  of  reading  and  study  skills,  read- 
ing and  study  improvement  programs,  and  individual 
guidance  on  problems  of  academic  adjustment. 

First-year  students,  particularly,  are  encouraged  to 
arrange  for  a  conference  so  that  they  can  be  assisted 
in  making  an  evaluation  of  their  learning  tools  and  in 
planning  for  more  effective  work. 

The  improvement  programs  are  offered  periodical- 
ly during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters.  Small  group 
instruction  is  scheduled  for  interested  students.  The 
instruction  is  adapted  to  the  needs  of  the  individual 
in  well-equipped  facilities. 

Student  Activities  and  Events 

Extra-curricular  activities  provide  special  opportunity 
for  students  to  develop  leadership,  to  participate  in 
interest  groups  and  programs  of  their  own  choosing, 
and  to  learn  cooperation  and  group  activity.  At 
Lehigh  University  the  philosophy  of  extra-curricular 
activities  is  to  allow  the  students  as  much  opportuni- 
ty as  possible  for  setting  their  own  policies,  devising 
their  own  programs,  and  assuming  full  responsibility 
for  their  organizations.  This  philosophy  makes  it  pos- 
sible for  the  activities  to  be  extremely  significant  in 
the  personal  development  of  the  participating  stu- 
dents. 


relevancy  courses,  and  the  academic  calendar;  social 
life  and  regulations,  extracurricular  activities,  and 
athletics;  and  areas  of  academic  environment  such  as 
pass-fail  grading,  admission,  registration,  residence 
and  dining  hall  facilities,  the  library,  bookstore,  and 
computer.  The  Forum  also  has  the  authority  to 
review  with  recommendations  to  the  board  of 
trustees  or  other  appropriate  bodies,  programs  in 
long-range  planning,  such  as  academic  development, 
staff  requirements,  physical  facilities,  and  the  overall 
budget  of  the  University;  community  relations  pro- 
grams; administrative  appointments  at  the  rank  of 
dean  and  above;  and  matters  pertaining  to  curricu- 
lum, research,  and  academic  discipline. 

While  the  board  of  trustees  as  the  ultimate  legal 
authority  of  the  University  retains  the  authority  over 
all  transactions  of  the  University  Forum,  the  strength 
of  the  Forum  lies  in  the  establishment  of  a  representa- 
tive legislative  body  composed  of  equal  numbers  of 
students  and  faculty,  so  that  everyone  can  feel  there 
is  a  place  where  a  valid  project  may  be  carefully  con- 
sidered. All  meetings  of  the  Forum  are  open  to  the 
community,  with  the  right  to  address  the  Forum  pro- 
vided to  any  requesting  it. 

National  Honorary  and  Recognition  Societies 

Honorary  scholarship  societies  at  Lehigh  include  Phi 
Beta  Kappa  (the  oldest  national  honorary  society), 
Tau  Beta  Pi  (national  honorary  engineering  society 
organized  at  Lehigh  in  1885),  Sigma  Xi  (pure  and 
applied  science),  Beta  Gamma  Sigma  (business  ad- 
ministration), Phi  Eta  Sigma  (freshman  honorary), 
and  fifteen  other  national  honorary  and  recognition 
societies.  These  recognize  service  or  achievement  in 
different  fields  of  study,  in  leadership,  in  perfor- 
mance in  R.O.T.C.,  etc. 


The  University  Forum 

The  question  of  student  representation  in  University 
policy-making  has  been  a  major  one  in  this  decade. 
To  give  students  a  voice  in  all  Lehigh  affairs  a  Univer- 
sity Forum,  composed  of  60  students,  60  faculty,  and 
five  members  of  the  administration,  was  established 
in  1970  as  the  primary  campus  legislative  body. 

The  University  Forum  has  legislative  responsibility 
in  setting  policy  on  academic  program  and  planning 
in  such  areas  as  freshman  seminars,  high  immediate 


Volunteer  Service 

Varied  opportunities  for  student  expression  of  social 
responsibility  exist  at  Lehigh  through  programs  spon- 
sored by  the  Lehigh  University  Volunteers  (LUV)  and 
the  Office  of  the  Coordinator  of  Volunteer  Com- 
munity Services.  About  250  Lehigh  students  current- 
ly participate  in  volunteer  service  efforts  in  the  Le- 
high Valley  area  in  fifteen  different  programs.  The 
LUV  is  governed  by  a  board  composed  of  coordina- 
tors of  the  various  projects  the  Council  sponsors. 


Student  Activities  and  Events     21 


Most  oi  the  volunteei  work  is  done  in  cooperation 
with  community  agencies  or  s,  In » <l     s,  mie  ,.i  the 
projects  include  tutorial  and  teaching  aide  programs 
in  public  .uul  private  schools,  recreation  activities 
through  the  YMCA  and  4-H.  Big  Brothei .  companion- 
ship and  group  work  with  children  and  adults  in  resi- 
dential mental  health  treatment  facilities,  aids  to  the 
elderly  through  Fellowship  in  Service  to  Humanity 
I  ISII   .  legal  aid  research,  income  tax  service  at 
neighborhood  centers,  blood  assurance,  and  numerous 
individual  and  short-term  efforts. 

The  Foreign  Opportunities  Committee  coordinates 
programs  involving  the  Peace  Corps,  VISTA,  the 
American  Friends  Service  Committee,  and  Crossroads 
Africa,  a  program  through  which  North  American 
college  students  devote  their  summers  to  community 
work  projects  in  Africa  supervised  by  Africans. 

Student  Interest  Associations 

At  Lehigh,  student  organizations  embrace  a  wide 
range  of  activities.  Course  societies  promote  intellect- 
ual interests  in  various  fields  of  study  and  develop 
professional  spirit  among  the  students.  Interest  and 
hobby  groups  include  art,  bridge,  chess,  camera,  lan- 
guages, sailing,  skiing,  boxing,  judo,  and  political 
clubs,  electronics  and  satellite  tracking. 

The  musical  groups  (bands,  instrumental  ensem- 
bles, and  glee  club)  provide  group  training  for  quali- 
fied students,  present  concerts  and  musical  programs, 
and  combine  their  talents  in  several  annual  programs. 
Lehigh's  Marching  Band,  one  of  the  best  in  the  East, 
is  well  known  for  its  precision  military  drills  at  foot- 
ball games.  The  band  forms  two  concert  bands  for  the 
winter  and  spring  seasons:  The  Concert  and  the 
Varsity  Bands.  The  bands  perform  a  number  of  major 
concerts  during  the  year.  In  recent  years  the  Concert 
Band  has  performed  at  New  York's  Carnegie  Hall  and 
Philadelphia's  Town  Hall,  and  the  Glee  Club  has 
toured  Puerto  Rico  during  spring  vacation.  In  addi- 
tion to  giving  joint  concerts  with  the  Lehigh  Band, 
the  Glee  Club  also  sings  with  the  choirs  of  various 
women's  colleges.  A  significant  part  of  the  campus 
musical  scene  is  the  ensemble  and  chamber  recitals. 
The  musical  programs  are  noteworthy  for  the  perfor- 
mances by  non-majors. 

The  dramatic  society  of  Lehigh,  known  as  Mustard 
and  Cheese,  presents  several  productions  a  year  and  a 
series  of  special  films.  Of  particular  interest  to  many 


students  is  the  Ircqucnt  showing  ot  foreign  and 
Ann-Mi  .in  .lit  films. 

The  students  ol   Lehigh  University  publish  a  scmi- 
w  eekly  newspaper,  the  Brown  and  White,  and  a  year- 
book, The  Epitome.  The  students'  modern  radio 
stations.  WI.RN.  640  kc,  and  WLVR-FM,  91.3  MHZ, 
both  broadcast  throughout  the  day. 

A  student-operated  coffeehouse  which  scats  about 
fifty  people  is  located  in  the  undercroft  of  Packer 
Memorial  Church. 

Religious  Activities 

The  religious  program  is  under  the  general  supervision 
of  the  University  Chaplain,  who  also  provides  for 
Protestant  chapel  services,  broadly  based  and  ecumen- 
ical in  form,  varying  from  the  traditional  to  the  infor- 
mal and  innovative.  Some  services  feature  the  Lehigh 
University  Glee  Club  while  others  utilize  folk  music. 
Roman  Catholic  services  are  arranged  by  the  Chaplain 
to  Catholic  students. 

The  regular  Protestant  and  Roman  Catholic  service 
schedules  are  announced  at  the  beginning  of  the  year. 
Attendance  at  all  religious  services  is  voluntary. 

The  Chaplain's  Council,  consisting  of  representa- 
tives from  the  various  religious  groups  of  all  faiths  on 
campus,  sponsors  a  variety  of  programs  together  with 
those  organizations  and  separately  under  the  Chap- 
lain's Office.  The  Council  has  sponsored,  for  example, 
a  luncheon  program  and  a  film  series,  both  with  dis- 
cussion, talks  by  religious  leaders  and  faculty 
members,  and  multi-media  presentations.  Council 
programs  are  open  to  all  members  of  the  student 
body. 

The  Newman  Club  carries  on  a  program  among 
Catholic  students  under  the  guidance  of  a  priest 
assigned  by  the  Diocese  of  Allentown  to  direct  the 
program.  The  Hillel  Foundation  program  is  available 
to  students  of  the  Jewish  faith,  while  various  Protest- 
ant churches  in  the  community  include  fellowship 
organizations  for  Lehigh  students  in  their  programs. 

Athletics 

Lehigh's  intercollegiate  program  consists  of  varsity 
teams  in  football,  cross-country,  soccer,  wrestling, 
basketball,  hockey,  rifle,  swimming,  tennis,  track, 
baseball,  lacrosse  and  golf;  Junior  Varsity  teams  in 
football,  wrestling,  basketball,  swimming,  and  base- 
ball: freshman  teams  in  most  of  these  sports.  Sched- 


22     Student  Activities  and  Events 


ules  are  arranged  chiefly  with  eastern  colleges  which 
have  athletic  policies  similar  to  Lehigh's. 

Normally  Lehigh's  athletic  schedule  includes  four 
or  five  home  football  games,  six  or  seven  home  wrest- 
ling meets,  nine  or  ten  home  basketball  games,  nine 
home  baseball  games,  and  four  home  swimming  meets 
as  well  as  games  or  meets  at  other  colleges  in  these 
and  other  sports  listed  in  the  preceding  section. 

A  comprehensive  intramural  sports  program  is 
sponsored  for  the  entire  University,  including  teams 
from  the  residence  halls,  fraternities,  classes,  town, 
faculty,  graduate  students,  and  independent  groups. 
Twenty-four  sports  activities  are  included  in  the  pro- 
gram. Students  are  encouraged  to  participate  in  these 
recreational  sports,  awards  are  given  for  group  and 
individual  excellence.  The  fact  that  ninety  teams  par- 
ticipated last  year  in  the  basketball  leagues  alone  in- 
dicates the  extent  of  the  intramural  program. 

Special  Events 

Students  are  encouraged  to  attend  the  many  musical, 
theatrical,  and  special  events  on  the  Lehigh  calendar. 
Programs  of  great  variety  and  depth  are  arranged  by 
the  Committee  on  Performing  Arts,  the  Cleaver 
Foundation,  the  Department  of  Music,  the  Student 
Activities  Council,  and  the  music  organizations  of 
Lehigh.  Recent  concert  series  have  included  the  New- 
port Folk  Festival,  the  Turnau  Opera  Players,  the 
Bach  Aria  Group,  the  Aeolian  Chamber  Players,  the 
Cologne  Chamber  Orchestra,  the  Vienna  Octet,  and 
the  New  York  Pro  Musica.  In  conjunction  with 
choruses  of  women's  colleges  the  Glee  Club  has  per- 
formed choral  masterpieces  including  the  Stravinsky- 
Cocteau  opera-oratorio,  "Oedipus  Rex."  The  annual 
Pops  Concert,  presented  by  the  combined  musical 
organizations  at  the  end  of  the  spring  semester,  is  one 
of  Lehigh's  most  popular  events. 

Among  the  outstanding  speakers  brought  to  the 
Lehigh  campus  in  recent  years,  in  addition  to  scholars 
in  many  academic  disciplines,  were  Charles  Goodell, 
Dick  Gregory,  Wehrner  Von  Braun,  Jane  Fonda, 
Howard  Zinn,  Charles  V.  Hamilton,  Daniel  Mahoney, 
Joseph  Heller,  Isaac  Asimov,  and  Tom  Hayden.  Many 
of  these  speakers  have  appeared  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Forum  for  Visiting  Lecturers. 

A  noteworthy  feature  of  the  special  events  calen- 
dar for  any  year  is  the  annual  Jacob  Blaustein  Lec- 
tures in  International  Relations  which  presents  an 


outstanding  public  figure  speaking  on  crucial  ques- 
tions of  international  relations.  Lecturers  have  in- 
cluded Sir  Denis  Brogan,  General  Maxwell  D.  Taylor, 
Belgium's  Paul  Henri  Spaak,  Israel's  Abba  Eban,  W. 
Averell  Harriman,  James  Reston,  and  Harold  Wilson. 
The  lecture  series  was  established  at  Lehigh  through 
an  endowment  gift  from  the  Jacob  and  Hilda 
Blaustein  Foundation  of  Baltimore.  Mr.  Blaustein, 
Class  of  1913,  was  a  pioneer  in  the  petroleum  indus- 
try and  an  international  statesman  of  some  note. 

In  1971  the  Berman  Lectures  in  Economics  began 
with  Paul  Samuelson,  the  Nobel  Prize  winner. 

Another  recent  addition  to  the  program  is  the 
Globus  Series  in  the  Avant-Garde  Creative  Arts.  This 
series,  begun  in  1969  through  an  endowment  gift 
from  New  York  investment  banker  Morton  Globus, 
features  theatrical  productions,  art  and  sculpture 
exhibits,  multi-media  shows,  and  experimental  films. 

The  department  of  fine  arts  arranges  a  series  of 
monthly  exhibits,  including  works  by  contemporary 
American  artists  and  sculptors,  as  well  as  industrial, 
photographic,  and  student  art  shows.  The  University's 
permanent  collection  of  art  is  displayed  in  several 
buildings  on  the  campus. 


Student  Activities  and  Events     23 


General  Information 


V  ademic  Regulal  ions 


General  College  Division 

Tlic  General  College  Division,  plans  tor  which  wen 
approved  by  the  faculty  on  April  6.  1942,  was  organ- 
ized to  supplement  the  work  ol  the  established  under 
graduate  curricula  by  meeting  the  educational  needs 
of  certain  special  groups  of  students.  The  division 
aims  to  provide  an  opportunity  for  individuals,  not 
planning  a  four-year  program,  to  pursue  such  work, 
either  of  a  general  or  a  more  specialized  nature,  as 
their  preparation  and  interests  make  desirable;  a  trial 
period  for  those  who  wish  to  become  candidates  for 
baccalaureate  degrees  but  whose  preparatory  training 
does  not  fully  satisfy  the  entrance  requirements  for 
the  curricula  of  their  choice;  and  facilities  for  quali- 
fied adults  to  continue  their  education  without  being 
committed  to  a  restricted  or  specialized  program. 

Although  all  work  available  through  the  General 
College  Division  will  be  found  at  present  among  the 
regular  offerings  of  the  several  departments,  the  work 
taken  by  students  enrolled  in  this  division  is  not  re- 
garded as  primarily  preparation  for  admission  to  the 
upper  classes  of  the  University;  rather,  the  courses  are 
looked  upon  as  complete  in  themselves. 

Each  student  in  the  General  College  Division  has 
an  individual  program,  one  not  subject  to  distribution 
or  curriculum  requirements,  yet  one  limited  by  the 
student's  ability  to  meet  the  prerequisites  of  the 
courses  which  he  desires  to  take.  With  but  few  excep- 
tions, the  student  enrolled  in  this  division  enjoys  the 
same  privileges  as  all  other  undergraduates  in  the  Uni- 
versity, including  eligibility  to  unrestricted  prizes, 
access  to  student  aid,  and  the  right  of  petition;  and  he 
is  also  subject  to  the  same  general  regulations,  those 
pertaining  to  scholastic  probation  not  excepted.  The 
General  College  Division  student  will  not,  however, 
be  a  candidate  for  a  degree,  save  in  those  instances 
where  transfer  to  one  of  the  undergraduate  programs 
of  study  leading  to  degrees  is  approved  by  the  Com- 
mittee on  Standing  of  Students. 


Eligibility  foi  Degree 

In  order  to  be  graduated,  a  candidate  for  a  bacca- 
laureate degree  must  achieve  .1  minimum  cumulative 

average  of  1 .70. 

To  be  eligible  for  a  degree  from  Lehigh  University, 
,1  student  not  only  must  have  completed  all  of  the 
scholastic  requirements  for  the  degree,  but  also  he 
must  have  paid  all  University  fees,  and  in  addition  all 
bills  for  the  rental  of  rooms  in  the  residence  halls,  or 
for  damage  to  University  property  or  equipment,  or 
for  any  other  indebtedness  for  scholarship  loans  or 
for  loans  from  trust  funds  administered  by  the  Uni- 
versity which  are  protected  by  properly  executed 
notes  approved  by  the  Treasurer. 

Final  Date  tor  Completion  of  Requirements 

For  graduation  all  requirements,  scholastic  and  finan- 
cial, must  have  been  satisfied  prior  to  the  graduation 
exercises. 

Notice  of  Candidacy  for  Degree 

Candidates  for  graduation  on  University  Day  file  with 
the  Registrar  on  or  before  March  15  a  written  notice 
of  candidacy  for  the  degree;  candidates  tor  gradua- 
tion in  January  file  a  notice  of  candidacy  on  or  be- 
fore December  1 ;  candidates  for  graduation  on 
Founder's  Day  file  a  notice  cf  candidacy  on  or  before 
September  10.  Failure  to  file  such  notice  by  the  dates 
mentioned  debars  the  candidate  from  receiving  the 
degree  at  the  ensuing  graduation  exercises.  If  a  peti- 
tion for  late  filing  is  granted,  a  fee  of  $10  is  assessed. 

Graduating  Theses 

Undergraduate  theses,  when  required,  are  accompani- 
ed by  drawings  and  diagrams,  whenever  the  subjects 
need  such  illustration.  The  originals  are  kept  by  the 
University,  as  a  part  of  the  student's  record,  for 
future  reference;  but  copies  may  be  retained  by  stu- 
dents and  may  be  published,  provided  permission  has 
first  been  obtained  from  the  faculty. 

Credit  and  Grades 

A  semester  hour  of  college  work  consists  of  one  hour 


24      General  Information:  Academic  Regulations 


a  week  of  lectures  or  classwork,  or  two  or  three  hours 
of  laboratory  work  (or  laboratory  work  combined 
with  classwork)  a  week  for  one  semester.  The  normal 
assumption  is  that  the  student  will  be  expected  to  do 
at  least  two  hours  of  study  in  preparation  for  each 
hour  of  classwork. 

Latest  Date  for  Registration.  No  registration  is 
accepted  later  than  the  tenth  day  of  instruction  in 
any  semester. 

Grading  System.  Final  grades  in  courses  are  A,  B,  C, 
D,  and  F.  A,  B,  C,  and  D  are  passing.  The  key  to 
grades  is  as  follows:  A— Excellent;  B— Good;  C— Con- 
tinuation Competency,  defined  to  mean  that  the  stu- 
dent has  achieved  a  level  of  proficiency  such  that  the 
instructor  believes  that  he  is  prepared  to  take  any 
subsequent  course  which  has  this  course  as  a  prerequi- 
site; D— Unsatisfactory,  but  passing,  defined  to  mean 
that  the  student  has  achieved  a  level  of  proficiency 
such  that  he  can  apply  the  course  toward  graduation, 
but  in  the  estimate  of  the  teacher  he  has  not  acquired 
adequate  proficiency  to  perform  satisfactorily  in  any 
subsequent  course  which  has  this  course  as  a  prerequi- 
site; F— Failure.  Courses  taken  under  the  Pass-Fail 
system  are  graded  P  (passing)  or  F  (failure). 

A  student  who  withdraws  from  a  course  during  the 
first  twelve  weeks  of  instruction  will  receive  a  grade 
of  "W."  A  student  who  withdraws  from  a  course  after 
the  first  twelve  weeks  of  instruction  will  receive 
"WF"  unless  the  committee  on  standing  of  students, 
for  cause,  allows  a  grade  of  "W"  to  be  recorded. 

A  student  officially  withdrawn  from  the  Univer- 
sity after  the  twelfth  week  of  instruction  shall  receive 
from  each  instructor  a  "WP"  or  "WF." 

The  letters  "Abs."  (absent)  are  used  to  indicate 
absence  from  a  final  examination  in  a  course.  The 
grade  of  "Abs."  is  reported  with  a  letter  grade  in 
parentheses,  such  letter  grade  representing  the  depart- 
ment's estimate  of  the  student's  work  up  to  the  close 
of  instruction  with  the  provision  that  in  cases  where  a 
department  does  not  feel  justified  in  reporting  an 
estimated  grade,  a  report  of  "Abs.  (X)"  will  be 
returned. 

The  letters  "Inc."  are  used  to  indicate  that  the 
work  in  a  course  is  incomplete.  In  such  cases,  an  ap- 
propriate letter  grade  shall  accompany  the  "Inc." 
designation  (e.g.,  "Inc.[B]  ")  if  the  instructor  has  suf- 
ficient basis  to  report  such  a  grade.  Otherwise,  the 
grade  shall  be  reported  as  "Inc.(X)."  A  student  who 


incurs  an  "incomplete"  in  any  course  and  fails  to 
remove  the  "incomplete"  within  one  calendar  year, 
loses  all  equity  in  the  course. 

Pass-Fail  System.  The  pass-fail  grading  option  is  in- 
tended to  encourage  student  exploration  of  challeng- 
ing courses  that  would  normally  be  avoided  for  fear 
of  depressing  grade-point  averages.  It  is  intended  par- 
ticularly for  exploration  outside  the  major  field.  Stu- 
dents should  avoid  wasting  this  option  on  unsuitable 
courses,  such  as  certain  basic  introductory  courses 
having  no  college-level  prerequisite  or  corequisite. 
The  restrictions  on  the  use  of  the  system  are  listed 
below.  Students  who  desire  to  take  particular  courses 
pass-fail  shall  consult  (at  the  time  of  preregistration) 
with  their  curriculum  directors  or  registration  ad- 
visors for  guidance  in  this  area.  Each  curriculum 
director  or  registration  advisor  should  consider  the 
intent  of  this  system  and  the  demands  of  the  particu- 
lar curriculum,  then  formulate  suitable  guidelines  to 
aid  students  in  the  intelligent  use  of  this  option.  At 
the  same  time,  instructors  should  be  prepared  to  ad- 
vise particular  students  as  to  the  suitability  of  their 
particular  courses  for  the  pass-fail  option. 

The  restrictions  on  the  use  of  the  system  are: 

1.  Before  a  student  can  take  a  course  pass-fail,  he 
must  have  achieved  sophomore  standing,  have  de- 
clared a  major,  and  he  must  be  in  good  academic 
standing. 

2.  A  student  may  take  no  more  than  two  courses 
pass-fail  in  any  one  semester.  He  may  take  a  maxi- 
mum of  six  courses  pass-fail  per  undergraduate  career 
if  he  is  on  a  four-year  program  or  a  maximum  of  eight 
courses  per  undergraduate  career  if  he  is  on  a  five- 
year,  two-degree  program. 

No  course  may  be  taken  pass-fail  that  satisfies  any 
part  of  the  graduation  requirements  for  his  current 
major. 

4.  A  student  must  have  his  registration  advisor's 
approval  to  take  a  course  pass-fail.  A  student  must 
designate  the  course(s)  taken  pass-fail  by  the  tenth 
day  of  instruction  in  a  regular  semester  or  the  fifth 
day  of  instruction  in  any  summer  term.  Prior  to  this 
deadline,  the  student  may  transfer  from  pass-fail  grad- 
ing to  regular  grading  or  vice  versa  without  penalty. 
After  this  deadline,  the  student  cannot  transfer  from 
regular  grading  to  pass-fail  grading  or  vice  versa. 

5.  The  instructor  giving  the  course  is  not  officially 
notified  which  of  his  students  is  taking  the  course 


Academic  Regulations     25 


pass  fail.  Therefore,  he  reports  ■>  regular  lettei  grade 
foi  the  p.iss  fail  students.  The  registrar  will  then 

,1  "P"  foi  reported  lettei  grades  ol  A.  B,  C,  and 
D  and  an  "F"  foi  a  reported  letter  grade  ot  F. 

6.  Under  this  system,  the  student  surrenders  Ins 
equity  to  letter  grades  ol  A.  B,  C  or  I )  it  he  passes  the 
course.  A  passing  grade  shall  apply  to  the  student's 
graduation  requirements  but  shall  not  be  used  in  the 
computation  ol  his  cumulative  average.  An  F  grade 
shall  be  computed  in  the  normal  manner. 

Probation  and  Drop  Regulations 

The  scholastic  requirements  tor  each  student  are  ex- 
pressed in  terms  ot  his  cumulative  scholastic  average 
(the  weighted  point  average  of  all  grades  received  in 
residence).  The  cumulative  scholastic  average  will  be 
computed  at  the  end  of  each  semester  (and  full  sum- 
mer session,  i.e.,  one  in  which  12  or  more  semester 
hours  have  been  rostered).  Grades  are  weighted  as 
follows:  A.  4:  B,3:C.  2;  D,  1;  F,  WF,  Abs.(F), 
Inc.(F),  0.  It  a  course  in  which  a  D  or  lower  grade  was 
received  is  repeated,  the  grade  received  upon  repeti- 
tion of  the  course  shall  be  counted  in  the  cumulative 
average,  and  the  grade(s)  and  credit  hours  received 
when  the  course  was  previously  taken  shall  be  drop- 
ped from  the  cumulative  average.  W.  WP,  Abs.  (X), 
and  Inc.  (X)  grades  are  not  included  in  averages.  WF 
is  counted  as  an  F.  When  grades  of  "absent"  or 
"incomplete"  include  a  letter  designation,  this  letter 
shall  be  used  in  determining  the  average. 
Probation.  A  student  will  be  placed  on  scholastic 
probation  when  either: 

(a)  His  cumulative  scholastic  average  falls  below 
these  levels: 

Freshman,  1st  Semester      1.30 
Freshman,  2nd  Semester      1.40 
Sophomore,  1st  Semester      1.50 
Sophomore,  2nd  Semester      1.60 
Junior,  1st  Semester,  and  thereafter      1.70 

(b)  He  fails  more  than  7  semester  hours  in  one 
semester. 

The  designation  "Freshman,  1st  Semester,"  etc.,  is 
the  classification  officially  determined  by  the  Regis- 
trar irrespective  of  the  number  of  semesters  the  stu- 
dent has  attended  college. 

Disabilities  of  Scholastic  Probationers.  A  student  who 
is  on  scholastic  probation  is  ineligible  for  (a)  intercol- 


legiate competition  and  all  other  activities  publicly 
representative  "I  the  I  Iniversity,  (b  i  major  of!  ice 
(elective  or  appointive)  in  any  University  organiza 
lit  mi.  and  (c)  such  other  activity  as  may  require  mori 
time  than  should  be  diverted  from  primar)  purposes 
by  any  student  whose  academic  survival  is  at  risk.  All 
students  however,  have  the  right  to  petition  to  the 
Committee  on  Standing  ot  Students  tor  exception  to 
this  rule. 

Removal  from  Probation.  A  student  who  has  been 
placed  on  scholastic  probation  is  restored  to  good 
standing  it  at  the  end  ot  his  next  semester  or  full  sum- 
mer session  all  incompletes  incurred  during  the  pre- 
vious semester  have  been  removed  and  if  he  meets  the 
standards  indicated. 

Dropped  for  Poor  Scholarship.  A  student  who  makes 
a  2.20  average  or  better  in  his  probationary  semester 
but  fails  to  meet  the  standards  set  forth  in  paragraph 
three  above  is  continued  on  scholastic  probation  for 
another  semester.  A  student  who  makes  less  than  a 
2.20  average  in  his  probationary  semester  and  fails  to 
meet  the  standards  in  paragraph  three  above  is  drop- 
ped for  poor  scholarship. 

Honors 

Honors  are  of  four  kinds:  class  honors,  graduation 
honors,  departmental  honors,  and  interdepartmental 
honors.  (For  departmental  and  interdepartmental 
honors,  see  Comprehensive  Honors  Program  in  the 
Special  Academic  Opportunities  section  of  this  catalog. 
Class  Honors.  Upon  completion  of  the  work  of  the 
freshman  and  sophomore  years,  on  recommendation 
of  the  Registrar  and  by  vote  of  the  faculty,  class 
honors  are  awarded  to  those  individuals  who  have 
made  an  average  of  3.00  or  better  during  the  preced- 
ing year. 

The  names  of  these  students  are  announced  at  the 
Founder's  Day  exercises  and  published  in  the  Found- 
er's Day  Program. 

Graduation  Honors.  Degrees  "with  honors"  are 
awarded  by  vote  of  the  University  faculty  to  those 
students  who  have  attained  an  average  of  not  less 
than  3.25  in  their  junior  and  senior  years'  work  at  the 
University. 

Degrees  "with  high  honors"  are  awarded  by  vote 
of  the  University  faculty  to  those  students  who  have 
an  average  of  not  less  than  3.50  in  their  junior  and 
senior  years'  work  at  the  University. 


26     Academic  Regulations 


Degrees  "with  highest  honors"  are  awarded  by  the 
vote  of  the  University  faculty  to  those  students  who 
have  an  average  of  not  less  than  3.75  in  their  junior 
and  senior  years'  work  at  the  University. 

Students  who  spend  all  or  part  of  their  junior  or 
senior  years  at  another  institution  may  qualify  for 
graduation  honors  under  the  following  conditions: 

1 .  The  student  must  have  at  least  90  hours  of  work 
at  Lehigh  and  an  average  during  his  last  four  semes- 
ters in  residence  at  Lehigh  which  qualified  him  for 
graduation  honors.  This  average  determines  the  high- 
est category  of  graduation  honors  that  it  is  possible 
for  the  student  to  attain. 

2.  The  student's  average  at  the  other  institution 
when  computed  with  the  last  four  semesters  at 
Lehigh  must  be  such  as  to  still  qualify  the  student  for 
graduation  honors.  This  average  may  lower  the  overall 
average  of  the  student  from  one  category  of  gradua- 
tion honors  to  another  one. 

Graduation  honors  are  announced  on  University 
Day  and  published  in  the  official  commencement 
program. 

In  all  cases,  it  is  required  that  each  student  have 
not  less  than  forty-eight  hours  of  work  graded  A,  B, 
C,  D,  or  F. 

In  computing  the  averages  of  candidates  for  gradu- 
ation honors,  semester  grades  are  weighted  according 
to  the  number  of  credit  hours  in  the  course  concern- 
ed on  the  basis:  A  equals  4,  B  equals  3,  C  equals  2,  D 
equals  1,  and  F  equals  0. 

Review— Consultation— Study  Period 

The  Review— Consultation  — Study  (R.C.S.)  period  is 
intended  to  provide  a  few  days  for  informal  academic 
work  between  the  end  of  the  formal  instruction 
period  and  the  beginning  of  final  examinations.  It  is 
expected  that  students  will  use  this  period  to  consoli- 
date their  command  of  the  material  of  their  courses. 
Faculty  members  will  make  themselves  available  to 
their  students  at  announced  times  during  the  R.C.S. 
period,  for  example,  at  the  hours  when  they  meet 
classes  during  the  formal  instruction  period.  No  quiz 
may  be  given  during  this  period. 


Social  Regulations  and  Procedures 

Lehigh  University  exists  for  the  transmission  of 
knowledge,  the  pursuit  of  truth,  the  development  of 
students,  and  the  general  well-being  of  society .  Free 
inquiry  and  free  expression  are  indispensable  to  the 
attainment  of  these  goals.  All  members  of  the 
academic  community  are  encouraged  to  develop  the 
capacity  for  critical  judgment  and  to  engage  in  a  sus- 
tained and  independent  search  for  truth. 

Out  of  concern  for  individuality  and  respect  for 
the  privacy  of  all  persons,  the  University  does  not 
seek  to  impose  a  common  morality  on  its  members. 
However,  institutional  existence  is  a  privilege  granted 
by  public  trust,  subject  to  the  sanctions  and  responsi- 
bilities defined  by  the  society  of  which  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity is  a  part.  Furthermore,  society  generally  pro- 
vides legal  canons,  ethical  mores,  and  conduct  expec- 
tancies pertaining  to  individual  and  collective  be- 
havior. For  these  reasons  the  University  has  the 
obligation  to  establish  certain  standards  of  conduct 
appropriate  and  applicable  to  the  University  commu- 
nity. 

Lehigh  University  accepts  its  responsibility  as  an 
institution  within  the  broader  social  community.  The 
standards  of  behavior  expected  of  its  members  are 
those  which  the  University  regards  as  essential  to  its 
educational  objectives  and  the  University  as  a  com- 
munity. 

In  accordance  with  these  purposes  and  objectives, 
disciplinary  action  will  be  taken  when  necessary  to 
protect  the  academic  integrity  of  the  University  and 
the  welfare  of  its  members.  An  emphasis  on  counsel- 
ing and  learning  will  accompany  such  action. 

In  general,  University  regulations  are  not  concern- 
ed with  conduct  on  the  campus,  but  all  must  recog- 
nize that  whether  on  campus  or  off-campus,  they  are 
subject  to  the  laws  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsyl- 
vania and  the  United  States.  Their  responsibilities  as 
citizens  require  that  they  conform  to  the  laws  of  the 
land,  realizing  that  the  University  shall  not  provide  a 
sanctuary  for  individuals  who  violate  their  citizenship 
obligations.  At  the  same  time,  the  University  is  con- 
cerned with  the  students'  rights  as  citizens  with  equal 
protection  under  the  law,  and  will  endeavor  to  direct 
them  to  legal  counsel  as  may  be  necessary. 

For  educational  purposes  the  University  reserves 
the  right  to  review  any  action  taken  by  civil  authori- 


Social  Regulations  and  Procedures     21 


tit-s  regarding  its  members.  Although  ordinarily  the 
University  will  not  impose  further  sanctions  aftei  law 
enforcement  agencies  have  disposed  ol  the  case,  it 
does  have  the  obligation  to  introduce  counseling 
and  01  disciplinary  action  il  the  individual's  conduct 
has  interfered  with  the  University's  exercise  of  its 
education.il  objectives  or  responsibilities  to  its  mem- 
bers. 

The  University  as  a  part  of  the  community  lias  an 
obligation  to  its  members  to  report  serious  crimes  to 
the  appropriate  civil  authorities. 

The  University  relies  primarily  on  general  princi- 
ples and  statement  of  expectation  for  the  guidance  of 
conduct,  and  it  is  assumed  that  those  admitted  to  the 
academic  community  ot  Lehigh  are  capable  of 
governing  themselves  accordingly.  Specific  regulations 
are  kept  to  a  reasonable  minimum  and  arc  intended 
to  avoid  necessary  limitations  having  no  educational 
relevance.  Students  are  advised  to  consult  the  Student 
Handbook  for  details  governing  applicable  regula- 
tions, disciplinary  procedures,  and  due  process  codes. 
Alcoholic  Beverages.  While  in  attendance  at  Lehigh, 
students  are  subject  to  the  laws  of  the  Common- 
wealth ot  Pennsylvania.  Their  responsibilities  as  citi- 
zens require  that  they  conform  to  the  laws  of  the 
Commonwealth.  In  this  respect,  attention  is  called  to 
the  Pennsylvania  Liquor  and  Penal  Codes  which  pro- 
vides that  any  person  less  than  21  years  of  age  who 
attempts  to  purchase,  purchases,  consumes,  possesses, 
or  transports  any  alcoholic  beverages  within  Pennsyl- 
vania is  subject  to  fine  or  imprisonment  or  both.  The 
selling  or  furnishing  of  alcoholic  beverages  of  any 
kind  to  persons  under  21  years  of  age  by  any  agency 
or  person  is  prohibited.  It  is  also  illegal  to  misrepre- 
sent one's  age  to  obtain  such  beverages  or  to  possess 
or  transport  liquor  not  purchased  according  the  Penn- 
sylvania law. 

In  accordance  with  these  regulations,  the  Universi- 
ty has  the  following  policy  with  respect  to  alcoholic 
beverages: 

(1)  Alcoholic  beverages  are  prohibited  on  all  Uni- 
versity grounds,  in  all  non-residential  buildings,  in 
Taylor  Stadium  and  all  playing  fields. 

(2)  A  student  with  a  guest  at  the  University  is  re- 
sponsible for  his  conduct  and  for  making  Pennsyl- 
vania law  known  to  him. 

Drugs.  In  recent  years  there  has  been  considerable 
publicity  regarding  the  illegal  traffic  in  drugs  and 
increased  activity  of  enforcement  agencies  involving 


college  students.  State  and  Federal  laws  prohibit  .ill 
use  and  distribution  of  illegal  or  dangerous  drugs 
without  medical  prescription.  It  is  most  necessary 

that  students  familiarize  themselves  with  these  laws, 
some  "i  which  are  very  se>  :re,  ind  recognize  that  the 
University  campus  is  not  a  sanctuary  from  the  law.  A 

summary  of  relevant  laws  is  made  available  to  stu- 
dents by  the  University. 

The  University  is  particularly  concerned  with  drug 
use  which  leads  to  behavior  harmful  to  others  and  to 
the  drug  user  himself.  The  University  undertakes, 
through  student  and  staff  (e.g.,  Counseling  and 
Health  Services),  to  provide  objective  information 
about  drugs  and  to  offer  assistance  to  students  with 
problems  associated  with  drugs,  in  recognition  of  the 
fact  that  in  all  cases  of  drug  involvement  the  responsi- 
bility clearly  rests  with  the  individual  student.  When  a 
student's  involvement  with  drugs  impairs  his  effec- 
tiveness as  a  student,  his  student  status  may  be  dis- 
continued until  he  can  again  function  effectively  in 
the  academic  community. 

No  student  can  expect  the  University  to  serve  as  a 
cover  for  an  illegal  drug  market,  whether  consumers 
be  on  campus  or  off.  Where  there  is  serious  involve- 
ment or  a  repeated  problem  in  the  trafficking  of 
drugs,  decisive  action  will  be  taken. 
Guests.  Recent  liberalization  of  visiting  regulations 
for  guests  is  to  be  understood  in  terms  of  the  Univer- 
sity's essential  character  and  some  fundamental 
educational  principles.  As  a  predominantly  residential 
institution,  the  right  of  each  student  to  privacy  is 
naturally  limited  by  the  rights  of  his  roommate.  Thus, 
the  use  of  a  room  for  social  purposes  would  not  be  at 
the  expense  of  another's  legitimate  use  of  the  room 
for  sleep  or  study. 

Motor  Vehicles.  Students  at  Lehigh  University  are 
permitted  under  certain  circumstances  to  have  motor 
vehicles  while  attending  the  University  provided  that 
the  vehicles  are  properly  registered  with  the  Office  of 
the  Dean  of  Students.  This  privilege  will  be  revoked 
whenever  it  appears  that  a  student  is  guilty  of  reckless 
or  inconsiderate  driving,  or  that  he  willfully  disobeys 
University  regulations  governing  the  use  of  or  parking 
of  his  vehicle.  The  term  "motor  vehicle"  includes 
automobiles,  motorcycles,  motor  scooters,  etc.  New 
students  are  not  permitted  to  have  or  to  operate 
motor  vehicles  during  their  freshman  year.  Exception 
may  be  made  by  the  dean  of  students  for  commuting 
freshmen,  for  freshmen  living  at  home,  or  for  medical 


28     Social  Regulations  and  Procedures 


or  other  exceptional  reasons  upon  petition  from  the 
student.  Also,  financial  aid  students  may  not  own  or 
operate  motor  vehicles  while  at  the  University  unless 
they  accept  a  1300  decrease  in  aid  or  make  petition 
to  the  Financial  Aid  Committee. 
Dissent.  The  University  faculty  has  a  policy  on 
dissent  which  emphasizes  the  responsibility  of  all 
members  of  the  University  community.  The  guide- 
lines adopted  broadly  set  forth  acceptable  forms  of 
dissent  on  campus. 

Generally,  the  policy  on  dissent  provides  the  fol- 
lowing: 

(1)  Free  inquiry  and  free  expression,  including  the 
right  to  open  dissent,  are  indispensable  in  achieving 
the  goals  of  an  academic  community. 

(2)  Coercive  activities  employed  by  individuals  or 
groups  either  to  repress  legitimate  dissent  or  to 
demonstrate  dissent  are  a  threat  to  the  openness  of 
the  academic  community  and  will  be  dealt  with  as  an 
extremely  serious  matter. 

(3)  Where  physical  coercion  is  employed  or  physi- 
cal obstruction  persists  and  the  University  is  prevented 
from  resolving  the  matter  through  its  established  dis- 
ciplinary procedures,  legal  sanctions  will  be  employ- 
ed. 

This  statement  provides  that  orderly  and  peaceful 
demonstrations  on  campus  are  not  forbidden  unless 
they  interfere  with  legitimate  University  function. 
The  authority  for  making  the  initial  judgment  in  de- 
termining the  permissible  limits  of  protest  rests  with 
the  president  and  counsel  of  an  advisory  committee 
consisting  of  four  faculty  members  and  four  students. 
Conduct  which  exceeds  permissible  limits  will  be  met 
with  University  sanctions  ranging  in  severity  from 
admonition  to  expulsion,  or  in  cases  of  aggravated  or 
persistent  violation  of  defined  rights,  with  civil  arrest 
and  prosecution  under  an  appropriate  charge.  Primary 
authority  for  discipline  rests  with  the  faculty  and  its 
Committee  on  Discipline. 


The  Scene 


The  map  on  page  32  of  this  catalog  shows  the 
buildings  on  the  campus,  including  the  fraternity 
houses  and  residence  halls.  The  following  listing  pro- 
vides a  brief  description  of  those  buildings  most  fre- 
quented by  students  and  faculty  and  an  introduction 
to  the  educational  facilities. 

The  Alumni  Memorial  Building,  the  administrative 
center  of  the  University,  was  built  as  a  memorial  to 
Lehigh  men  who  served  in  World  War  I.  The  building 
houses  the  offices  of  the  president  and  his  staff,  the 
treasurer  and  the  business  offices,  the  registrar,  ad- 
mission, development,  public  information,  and 
alumni  association  offices. 

A  varied  display  of  paintings,  drawings,  prints  or 
sculpture  by  two  or  more  nationally  recognized 
artists  is  presented  in  the  Alumni  Memorial  Building 
Galleries.  These  exhibitions  are  changed  each  month. 
The  Permanent  Collection,  comprising  a  group  of 
finely  chosen  works  presented  to  or  acquired  by  the 
University  are  displayed  in  these  galleries  and  are 
shown  in  the  offices  and  library  areas  about  the  cam- 
pus. Several  of  the  finest  pieces  are  displayed  on  the 
walls  of  the  University  Center  and  in  the  Allen 
Corson  DuBois  Gallery  of  Maginnes  Hall. 

The  James  Ward  Packard  Laboratory,  gift  of  the 
founder  of  the. Packard  Motor  Car  Company  and 
Lehigh  graduate  in  1884,  houses  the  offices  of  the 
dean  of  the  College  of  Engineering,  classrooms,  and 
laboratories  of  the  departments  of  electrical,  indus- 
trial, and  mechanical  engineering  and  engineering 
mechanics.  The  Computing  Center  with  its  Control 
Data  Corporation  (CDC)  6400  computer,  library,  and 
offices  is  also  located  in  Packard  Lab.  A  major  feature 
of  the  building  is  the  600-seat  auditorium  located  on 
the  ground  floor. 

Christmas-Saucon  Hall  has  historic  interest 
because  Christmas  Hall  is  the  first  building  of  Lehigh 
University.  The  double  building  has  offices  and  class- 
rooms primarily  used  by  the  department  of  mathe- 
matics, as  well  as  office  facilities  for  the  University 
placement  and  personnel  services. 

Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory  is  named  for  the  late 


The  Scene      29 


John  Fritz,  known  .1-.  the  fathei  ol  the  steel  indu 
in  the  United  States  and  .1  member  ol  Lehigh's 
original  board  ol  trustees,  who  gave  the  l  fniversity 

I  mill:,  in   I  »ll>)  I  hi   t  he  ei  eel  ion  and  complete  equip- 
ment ol  an  engineering  laboratory.  In   1955.  .1  seven 
Story  addition  to  the  original  structure  was  opened.  It 
houses  a  universal  hydraulic  testing  machine,  capable 
ol  applying  a  5.000,000-lb.  load  to  tension  or  com- 
pression members  up  to  40  feet  in  length.  Equipment 
tor  applying  loads  to  structures,  the  latest  strain  and 
repeated  deformation  measuring  instruments,  and 
impact  ,md  hardness  testing  machines  are  also  avail- 
able. The  lab  is  used  by  the  department  of  civil  engi- 
neering tor  offices,  various  research  projects,  and  for 
laboratory  work  in  conjunction  with  instruction  in 
the  mechanics  of  materials,  hydraulics,  and  properties 
of  cement  and  concrete. 

Packer  Memorial  Church,  a  gift  of  the  late  Mrs. 
Mary  Packer  Cummings.  daughter  of  the  founder  of 
the  University,  was  built  in  1887.  Sunday  services, 
special  religious  programs,  music  recitals,  and  the 
annual  Bethlehem  Bach  Festival  are  held  in  the 
chapel.  A  coffee  house  operated  by  students  is 
located  in  the  basement. 

Taylor  Gymnasium  and  Field  House  were  donated 
by  the  late  Charles  L.  Taylor,  class  of  1876.  Follow- 
ing World  War  II  the  gymnasium  was  remodeled,  re- 
equipped,  and  expanded  as  one  of  the  major  projects 
of  the  Lehigh  Progress  Fund.  The  gymnasium  in- 
cludes a  swimming  pool,  75  by  42  feet,  ranging  in 
depth  from  5  to  10  feet;  five  basketball  courts: 
weight  room:  fencing  room;  and  class  and  meeting 
rooms.  Adjacent  to  the  gymnasium  and  field  house  is 
Taylor  Stadium,  a  nine-acre  facility  providing  football 
and  baseball  fields,  with  a  seating  capacity  of  16,000. 

The  Physics  Building  is  a  five-story  structure 
devoted  entirely  to  the  teaching  of  and  research  in 
physics.  It  contains  laboratories  for  undergraduate 
and  graduate  classes,  research  laboratories,  reading 
room,  and  shops.  Extensive  renovations  were  com- 
pleted in  1960-61. 

The  William  H.  Chandler  Chemistry  Building  is 
named  in  recognition  of  Dr.  Chandler's  35  years' 
service  as  professor  of  chemistry,  1871-1906.  The 
east  wing,  built  in  1939,  is  named  the  Harry  M. 
Ullmann  Chemistry  Laboratory  in  recognition  of  Dr. 
Ullmann's  service  as  department  head.  The  three- 
story  fireproof  building  provides  spaces  for  offices. 


.  1. 1 -.si 001  ns,  .nul  student  laboratories,  in  addition  to 
laboratory  space  and  equipment  for  re  search  in- 
stitutes. 

Sinclair  Laboratory,  a  gifi  ol  the  late  Mrs.  fennie 
H.  Sinclair  and  named  for  her  late  husband,  Francis 
MacDonald  Sinclair,  houses  the  ('enter  tor  Surface 
and  Coatings  Research  !CSCR)  and  the  National 
Printing  Ink  Research  Institute,  a  research  facility 
sponsored  by  several  industrial  tirms  which  was 
formed  at  Lehigh  in  1946.  The  laboratory  also  pro- 
vides offices  for  the  University  Provost. 

The  University  libraries  include  Lindcrman 
Library,  which  incorporates  the  original  library  build- 
ing, a  gift  of  the  founder  and  named  in  memory  of  his 
daughter  Lucy  Packer  Linderman,  and  a  more 
modern  edifice  built  in  1929,  and  the  Mart  Science 
and  Engineering  Library,  opened  in  1969. 

Linderman  Library  houses  525,000  volumes  in  the 
humanities  and  social  sciences,  the  Rare  Book  Collec- 
tion of  6,000  volumes,  and  the  University  Archives. 
Collections  are  particularly  strong  in  the  classics, 
English  literature,  and  British  colonial  history.  The 
annual  acquisition  rate  averages  about  1  5,000 
volumes.  The  library  receives  over  4,500  periodicals 
and  serials,  including  important  newspapers,  both 
foreign  and  domestic,  and  has  long  been  a  repository 
for  a  wide  selection  of  U.S.  government  documents. 
A  special  feature  of  Linderman  Library  is  the  music 
listening  room  located  on  the  ground  floor.  The 
building  also  houses  the  offices  for  the  library, 
research,  administrative  systems,  university  publica- 
tions, and  physical  planning  staffs. 

Mart  Library  houses  100,000  volumes  in  the  fields 
of  engineering,  mathematics,  and  natural  and  physical 
science,  and  includes  facilities  for  an  all-night  study 
room.  A  special  feature  is  the  use  of  the  library  by 
the  Center  for  Information  Science  for  information 
retrieval  experiments.  The  three-story  structure  is 
named  for  two  deceased  alumni  from  Kansas:  Leon 
T.  Mart,  class  of  1913,  and  his  son,  Thomas  L.  Mart, 
class  of  1951. 

Whitaker  Metallurgical  and  Chemical  Engineering 
Laboratory,  a  five -story  laboratory  with  a  two-story 
classroom  wing,  opened  in  1965.  Among  the  more 
than  twenty  separate  areas  for  scientific  and  engi- 
neering investigations  are  laboratories  for  high  pres- 
sure research  and  reaction  kinetics,  nuclear  studies, 
analog  computation,  process  control,  high  tempera- 


30      The  Scene 


ture  thermodynamics  and  kinetics,  analytical  studies, 
and  fine  structures  and  metallography.  The  classroom 
wing  includes  an  auditorium-lecture  hall  with  a  seat- 
ing capacity  of  225. 

Maginnes  Hall,  a  four-story  structure  opened  in 
1970,  houses  the  office  of  the  dean  of  the  College  of 
Arts  and  Science,  offices  and  classrooms  for  the  de- 
partments of  English,  history,  government,  inter- 
national relations,  classics  and  religion.  It  also  pro- 
vides offices  for  the  curator  and  director  of  exhibi- 
tions. From  this  office,  students  and  faculty  can 
arrange  for  rental  of  more  than  600  framed  reproduc- 
tions from  the  collection  of  lithographs,  etchings,  dry 
points  and  other  graphics.  Guide  service  and  gallery 
talks  can  also  be  scheduled. 

The  University  Bookstore  is  located  on  the  ground 
floor  of  Maginnes  Hall,  with  its  main  entrance  on  the 
north  side  of  the  building.  In  addition  to  all  required 
textbooks  and  supplies,  the  bookstore  carries  a  large 
selection  of  paperback  and  hardcover  books, 
stationery  items,  specialized  engineering  require- 
ments, and  an  assortment  of  greeting  cards,  phono- 
graph records,  posters,  magazines  and  newspapers, 
and  drug  sundries. 

Williams  Hall,  donated  by  the  late  Dr.  Edward  H. 
Williams,  Jr.,  class  of  1875,  professor  of  mining  and 
geology  at  Lehigh  for  21  years,  contains  classrooms, 
laboratories,  and  museum  collections  of  the  depart- 
ments of  biology,  geological  sciences,  psychology, 
and  the  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental 
Studies.  The  building  was  renovated  in  1956,  when  a 
fourth  story  was  added  to  the  original  structure. 

Eugene  Gifford  Grace  Hall,  named  for  the  donor,  a 
member  of  the  class  of  1899  and  president  of  the 
Lehigh  Board  of  Trustess  from  1924  to  1956,  is 
devoted  to  sports  and  recreation.  The  building  is  used 
primarily  for  basketball  and  wrestling,  and  also  serves 
as  an  assembly  room  for  concerts  and  lectures.  It 
seats  over  3,000.  The  third  floor  provides  classrooms 
and  offices  for  the  ROTC  departments. 

Coppee  Hall,  named  for  the  first  president  of 
Lehigh,  contains  offices  and  classrooms  for  the  de- 
partments of  fine  arts  and  speech.  Some  foreign 
language  offices  are  also  housed  in  this  building, 
which  at  one  time  was  the  first  University  gym- 
nasium. 

The  interior  of  Packer  Hall,  the  University  Center, 
the  original  structure  given  Lehigh  by  its  founder,  was 


razed  and  completely  reconstructed  in  1958,  and  a 
large  addition  was  built  to  the  rear  and  west  of  the 
original  building.  The  UC,  as  the  building  is  known  on 
campus,  provides  student,  faculty,  and  guest  dining 
rooms,  lounges,  a  snack  bar,  offices  for  the  student 
newspaper  and  radio  stations,  the  University  Forum, 
student  organizations,  meeting  and  conference  rooms, 
and  offices  for  the  Vice  President  and  Dean  of  Stu- 
dent Affairs  and  the  Dean  of  Student  Life  and  their 
staffs.  The  University  Center  walls  are  hung  with 
many  excellent  pieces  from  the  University's  Perma- 
nent Art  Collection. 

Drown  Memorial  Hall  was  erected  by  friends  and 
alumni  as  a  memorial  to  the  late  Dr.  Thomas  M. 
Drown,  fourth  president  of  the  University  from  1895 
to  1904.  It  provides  offices,  classrooms,  reading 
rooms,  and  lecture  rooms  for  the  dean  and  depart- 
ments of  the  College  of  Business  and  Economics. 

Lamberton  Hall  houses  the  department  of  modern 
foreign  languages  and  literatures.  The  department 
of  music  also  uses  the  building,  with  rehearsal  rooms 
for  the  band  and  glee  club. 


The  Scene     31 


r^ 

o 

cc 

o 

no 
cu 

© 
in 

NO 

.3 

CO 

3 

CM 

<L> 

0> 
CO 

a 
o 

OS 

u 

no 
o\ 

O 

60 

CD 
CO 

3 

CO 

a 

0 

X 

X 

IS 

U 

Q 

X 

_o 

0 

X 

CO 

0 

nl 

a! 

rt 

3 

^ 

ri 

hh 

>. 

u 

cu 

a) 

0 

3 
£ 

rt 

3 

-3 

-3 

_= 

o 

H 

H 

p 

H 

H 

i- 

£ 

u 

-d 

rt 

< 

C 
rt 


fi 
rt 


C     1> 


rt  S3 

w  s 

CJ  <U 

0!  Q 


60 

c 
33  • 

3 

m 

3 
o  ■ 


-d 

33 

3 
CQ 


E  -22 


3    _£ 

-d  -5 


U- 


U 


to 

u 


.2      Oh 

3  < 

"0    J3 


=3  .< 


w 

CO 

o 


3      S 

pq  U 


«  n    d 


-o  .2 


rt      " 

Oh     .2 

w'  2 

M    g 

c    -3 


O  33 


CO 

E  C 

.2    E 


SP  "So 
S3    oc     £   _2 


00    33 

60  'V*    co 

2      C.2 


-3    -=• 


"     u     cj   -3    >-i 
r*      -h      co 

C 

O 


(-i       t_;       i_)       <s       vi 


60 

-d 


E 



u 

3 

>-s 

c 

O 

60 

.ej 

'— 

_0 

'u 

> 

o 

co 

3 

15 

3 

0 

0 

T3 

-3 

'£ 

3 

ph  «  ac 


Ph  Ph 

<HH  <HH 

o  o 

3  3 

O  O 


O    .2 


+h     cj    .S    . 


> 

Q  Q 


oa  > 

.5  3 

S  .2 

-3  > 


Ph 


CJ     *h     hcc. 

-H  H  H 

2  .o  ,0 


a -a 

§1 


o 

3 
60 


SP 


Bi 


-a 

3 


-d 

3 


J    o 


60 

3 


co   oo 


cO 
1-  hJ 


CO 

Xi 

CO 

' — 1 

4 

60 

c 

nl 

i-4 

>^ 

3 

-d 

co 
0 

-d 

O 

CD 

C/3 

U 
-a 

3 

U 
C4 

CM 

O 

J3 
(3 

-d 

3 
al 

CJ 

-°  2  <m 
m    «  -> 

4_,         to      1-H 


^     i) 

3    ~- ' 

3     -° 

P       cJ 

h-1 


2  o 

3  en 


pLH 


5     w    "^T" 


a)      aj 


o 


u  u 


u 


CJ      D-, 

3      E 
CJ      O 

u  u 


3 

1—1      nl 
-      1-. 

o  t2 

Oh    ^ 


o 
U 

<u 

H        C 

O  <u 

Ih-3U 

—  2-3 
2  3  ° 
V    -3      S3 

^  *H  CJ 

2   S   ' 


CO     X 


LO 

CO 


ON     n! 
X 


|H 

nl 

1H 

3 


33      3 
nj      ^     O 

I      0    h 


3 

'So  • 


2   J 


CJ 

3 


aj    H3    ^ 


-3 
SO    ^ 
C4 


.  E 

OJ  O 

U  CJ 

3  HI 

U  -rH 

■hh  n3 

"  3 

C3  nl 

'd  co 

3  nl 


S 


3 


CO 


"2  -° 

co  -. 
JS    " 

CJ  1H 

nl  OJ 
Oh  J4 
• CO 

60  ."3 

3    J3 

cj    C^ 

cj 

.3  "3 

60     O 

3    _3 

O     cj 


CO 
CN 


60 
3 


3 
M 

3 
O 


Uh    O 


rt      rt      oJ    '-m 


«  £  S  S  2  O  m 


o    o 

CJ      oj      oj      rt 
60    60    60    3 

CJ        CJ        CJ     -73 

"3  "3  "3    2 
u  o  u  O 


3 
0 

X 


% 


c 

S 

cfl 

E 

CU 

u 

c 
<u 

CU 


o 

-3 


ON 

on   m 


Ph     E 


CO 

ao 


3 

o 

DC 


NO 


Oh 


<     < 


m  -o 

-C     - 

CL.    nl 

—.      cj 

<  m 


in 

2  -* 

1-1  oo 

Oh  Oh 


cj      nl    -3    -3 
M    U    U    U 


H  -g 


CN 
CN 


CO      CO 

3    CO 
■2    M 


O    On 
CnI     00 


CO     00 


U-l      NO 


3    -3  _B  la 

O     U  O  Oh 

tj^    ca  aj  rt 

O      1)  cu  cu 

0  O  Q  Q 


"  (U 

S  3 

.SP  rt 

co  H 

nl  n! 


3 
O 

C3 

CO 

Oh 

D 


cu     u     aj     u    "u 

Q  Q  Q   Q   Q 


<s>   co 


Oh  > 


3 
O 

X 

3     ^  ° 

"S    NO     CO    "^ 
-3      ..     lo      ., 


3  -« 

O  Oi 

X  <3 

>h  n! 

1H  CU 

2  S 

E  cf 


b  j3 
.SP  u 

c/3      to 

«    "S 
Oh  -5 

Oh      S 


I  .2 

Jj      3 

"S  3 


o 


3 
O 

X 

3 
3 
O 

U 


-^  JhI  2  S 


QJ         CJ 


a  o  w 


-3    _C 
Oh     Oh 


O 

ON 

00 
CO  ON 
Oh      _, 

rt    -d 

£  -2 
.SP  E 

C/5      nl 
.-4     — 


ON 


i- -H        CO     ^1 

■a  -d  < 


u 


3    _3 

•  -H  CJ 


CN 

On 


CM 

O 


Oh   ■" 


"H        CO 

ffl      3 

•  -H  O 

7?    ffi 
Oh 


<N 

in 


cj    in 
on 


3 

o 

ac 

3 
O 


-3 

Ph 
3 
O 


CO    -3 


rt     co     rt     nl     co 


>>    3 


S    C/5 


E    E    E    E    E 

60    60    60     60    60 


00    CO     00    00     C/3 


3      CJ      Oh 

«Q    W 

"033 
■4_t     4-j      rt      rt 

w  w  h  H 


cN 

■* 

T— 1 

3 

CO 

bJD— - 

o 

O 

C            >N 

is    ^ 

rt 

IH   ° 

en 

rt 

|H 

E 

CU 

^     rt 

U 

CO 

J3 

m  S 

"> 

's 

rt 

•S  3 

u 
<u 

'E 

2 

CA 

-d 

CHH 

CO      in 

-o 

Ci 

o 

bH          OJ 

C 

60 

3 

3 

0 

60^ 

-r-     3 
•-C      nl 

r— 1 

CO 

CO 
CM 

Crt 

be 

is 

in 

CNl 

rt 
(J 

cj    -3 

"3 

a: 

CO 

_C 

3 
M 

— 

"Oh 

"2      60 

3 

CN 
CO 

CO 

60 

CO 

"3 

3 

ea 

u 

1 

3 

0 

E 

(U 

"3 
o 

-3 
U 

CO 

- 

E 

Oh 
< 
CU 

-£ 

■S-) 

3      3 

co    .3 

6o2 
.3  '3 

ac   i- 

3 
O 
o 
3 
rt 
CO 

rt 

E 

CO 

O 

lH 

o 

-d 
3 
rt 

CO 

60 

CO 

CO 

X 

>-> 
u 
O 

rt 

tH 
0 

nl 

in 
co 

13 

X 

3 

"3 

C3 

3 

« 

3 
0 

>■ 

■~ 
0 

lH 

0 
rt 

rt 

4! 

'S 
E 

c 

OJ 

*-* 

1-4 

CD 

-n  .2 
a  E 

3 

0) 
CU 
Oh 

h-l 
CJ 

a 

4-J 

rt 
o 

l-l 

N 

3 

3 

C 

3      CJ 

'lH 

— 

Oh 

« 

o 

3 

<i 

1) 

CU 

cj    -3 

J3 

3 

o 

O 

lH 

-0 

'  ^ 

u 

CJ 

O    U 

u 

pq 

(J 

CJ 

Q 

w 

PL, 

NO 

CO 


60 
3 


3 

cq 


-d 
3 

oo 


ON  1* 

co  CJ 

_  3 

cu  *t3 

rt  rt 

u  cu 

o  aa 


o 

CO 


rt  -2 

aa  j 

3  3 

O  co 

tt  E 

CJ  lH 

-O  CJ 

S  .3 

J  hJ 


3 
>.  -3 

5  u 

rt      rt 


O 


i-i    i—l 


c 


3 

bio  S 
nl     n 

2  S 


00 
60  NO  CN 
3     rt 


3    .3 
Ph    "d 

-P     CQ 

Oh    ^ 

O      w 


o 

— 
-3 


oo 
o 


CO 


NO 


=3    CO 

rt     0 

aa  " 

o 

60  Chh 

.3    E 

3      O 


NO 

CM 

O 
rt 


00 
CO 


3 
o 

aa 

^j 
S 

-d 
3 

co 


1h    33      CJ    — 


-2  aa 


>>         CJ 

-3      u 
Oh     Oh 


C 
O 

_o 
CJ    J3 

CJ       4-i 

CO 


o 

15 


Oh     h-1 


3  ro 
3 

'S  3 

co  3 

3  2 

O  co 


ON 

<N 


-  J3    o    o 

>>    3    ^^ 


O 
-O 

CO 

-d 
m    c 

rt 
&"    cj 


co 


in    CM 


U      3 
>,    c 

.«  ac 


co     -O 


3 

O     r- 

aa  "^i 


is  « 


Cu    fX    c^j   c/d   oo  H   H 


oX 

CJ  Oh  co 

H      £,_«  t,  g 

CU     .S       CO  3  CO 

•S    "  -S  s2  ifj 

3      d    h?  9  31 

D   >   £  £  =5 


C 


JL   . 

i  r  ' 


____ 

JLJLJL    JL    JL^L       ®  1 1      ■ 

■"li — inr   ir  ir  *isr     "Bob™ -S,  =*u 

-  in  in 


J  L  JlL        jl  JL 

[ jjLJu^JL" 


-l  u 


i[~;r" lit 

Jl_]L_JL 


^ 


College  of  Arts  and  Science 


John  W.  Hunt,  Dean 

G.  Mark  Ellis,  Assistant  Dean 

The  Curricula 

The  College  of  Arts  and  Science  offers  several  curri- 
cula options:  (a)  a  four-year  curriculum  in  arts  and 
sciences,  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts; 
(b)  a  four-year  curricula  in  the  fields  of  biology,  geo- 
logical sciences,  psychology,  and  environmental 
science  and  resource  management,  leading  to  the  de- 
gree of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  the  designated  field; 
and  (c)  a  five-year  curriculum  in  Arts-Engineering 
leading  to  a  baccalaureate  degree  from  the  College  of 
Arts  and  Science  and  a  B.S.  degree  in  the  student's 
field  of  engineering. 

Freshman  English 

Students  in  all  of  these  curricula  must  meet  a  require- 
ment for  freshman  English.  The  normal  requirement 
is  English  1  and  2,  10,  14,  or  16.  For  exceptions,  see 
Advanced  Placement. 

The  Bachelor  of  Arts  Degree 

The  curriculum  in  Arts  and  Science  emphasizes  a 
liberal  education.  It  asks  the  student,  in  collaboration 
with  his  advisor,  to  select  courses  to  fill  three  general 
categories,  namely,  distribution  to  insure  breadth  of 
education,  a  major  field  of  concentration  to  provide 
depth,  and  free  electives  to  adjust  both  breadth  and 
depth  to  the  student's  individual  needs. 

Distribution  Requirements 

The  object  of  the  distribution  requirements  is  to  give 
the  student  an  elementary  knowledge  of  the  fields  of 
contemporary  thought  and  to  orient  him  in  the  world 
of  man  and  nature.  The  requirements  also  provide 
opportunities  for  students  to  take  additional  work  in 
fields  related  to  their  major  field  of  concentration. 

Distribution  requirements  are  administered  by  the 
Dean  of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science  in  accor- 


dance with  the  group  regulations  given  below.  The 
student  has  a  wide  choice  of  offerings  from  which  to 
select  courses  to  fulfill  distribution  requirements. 
Honors  students  may,  with  the  approval  of  the 
dean,  substitute  Creative  Concepts  seminars  for  distri- 
bution courses  other  than  foreign  languages. 

Mathematics 

One  course:  Math.  21,  31,  41,  or  Phil.  14  or  equiva- 
lent. 

Foreign  Languages 

The  principal  purpose  of  studying  a  foreign  language 
in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science  is  to  develop  a 
means  of  perceiving  and  thinking  of  a  culture  other 
than  one's  own.  Accordingly,  the  student  is  asked  to 
choose  his  language  of  study  on  the  basis  of  a  desire 
to  know  more  about  some  non-English  speaking  part 
of  the  world. 

Each  student  is  required  to  achieve  working  profi- 
ciency in  the  four  language  skills— speaking,  listening, 
reading  and  writing.  The  number  of  hours  varies  de- 
pending on  the  language  selected  and  previous  study 
in  the  language. 

A  student  is  not  allowed  to  receive  college  credit 
for  course  work  in  a  language  taken  at  a  level  lower 
than  his  previous  study  of  that  language  warrants. 

With  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  College,  an 
option  is  offered  those  who  find  it  necessary  to  pur- 
sue in  college  the  study  of  two  foreign  languages, 
provided  that  neither  language  was  studied  in  secon- 
dary school.  Such  students  may  offer  in  satisfaction  of 
the  language  requirement  second-year  level  profi- 
ciency in  one  foreign  language  and  first-year  level 
proficiency  in  another. 

Qualified  students  are  encouraged,  to  the  extent 
that  their  courses  of  study  permit  it,  to  participate  in 
approved  Study  Abroad  programs  as  these  may  from 
time  to  time  be  maintained  by  the  University  or  ap- 
proved for  participation  by  Lehigh  students. 

Humanities 

Twelve  semester  hours  must  be  chosen  from  at  least 
two  of  the  following  groups: 

1.  Literature  (Courses  in  English  or  American 
Literature;  Greek,  Latin,  or  modern  foreign  literature 
in  translation;  or  literature  courses  at  the  third-year 


College  of  Arts  and  Science:  Bachelor  of  Arts  Degree     35 


level  or  higher  in  .1  foreign  language,  provided  that 
such  courses  .ire  not  also  used  to  satisfy  tlie  toreign 
language  requirement  1 

1.  Fine  Arts.  Music  or  Archaeology 

3.  Philosophy 

-t.  Religion  Studies 

Natural  Sciences  and  Mathematics 

Twelve  semester  hours,  chosen  from  at  least  two  of 
the  following  groups: 

1.  Astronomy 

2.  Biology 

3.  Chemistry 

4.  Geological  Sciences 

5.  Mathematics 

6.  Physics 

7.  Psychology 

Social  Sciences 

Twelve  semester  hours,  chosen  from  at  least  two  of 
the  following  groups: 

1.  Sociology,  Cultural  Anthropology,  Social  Psy- 
chology 

2.  Ancient  Civilization,  History,  Archaeology 

3.  Government,  International  Relations, 
Economics 

4.  Urban  Studies 

Major  Field  of  Concentration 

During  the  second  semester  of  the  freshman  year  if 
possible,  and  in  any  event  no  later  than  the  end  of  the 
sophomore  year,  each  student  in  the  curriculum  of 
Arts  and  Science  will  select  some  sequence  of  studies 
as  his  major  field  of  concentration.  A  major  consists 
of  at  least  twelve  hours  of  advanced  work  in  the  field 
chosen.  Including  preliminary  college  work,  the  mini- 
mum number  of  hours  constituting  a  major  is 
twenty -four. 

The  major  field  of  concentration  is  designed  to 
enable  a  student  to  master  an  area  of  knowledge  so 
far  as  that  is  possible  during  the  undergraduate  years. 
In  all  fields  certain  courses  are  prescribed,  but  the 
mere  passing  of  courses  will  not  satisfy  the  major 
requirements.  A  student  must  achieve  a  minimum  2.0 
average  in  his  major  courses.  It  is  expected  that  the 
student  will  prepare  himself  largely  through  his  own 
reading. 


Standard  Majoi  Sequences 

The  student  may  wish  to  choose  one  oi  the  stand. ml 
major  sequences.  See  pages  under  the  appropn.ii. 
alphabetical  listing. 

When  a  student  selects  one  of  these  standard 
majors,  the  chairman  of  the  department  offering  the 
major  or  the  oflicial  director  of  a  non-departmental 
major  becomes  a  student's  major  advisor  and  makes 
out  his  major  program.  The  final  responsibility  for 
meeting  both  major  and  non-major  requirements, 
however,  rests  with  the  student. 

Special  Interdisciplinary  Majors 

In  addition  to  the  standard  major  programs,  specially 
structured  interdisciplinary  major  sequences  are  possi- 
ble. For  example,  a  student  interested  in  a  profession- 
al school  of  urban  or  regional  planning  might  be  in- 
terested in  structuring  a  special  major  consisting 
primarily  of  courses  in  government  and  economics,  or 
of  economics  and  social  relations. 

Any  student  may,  with  the  aid  of  members  of  the 
faculty  chosen  from  the  disciplines  involved,  work 
out  an  interdisciplinary  major  program  to  include  not 
less  than  twenty-four  hours  of  related  course  work,  of 
which  at  least  twelve  hours  shall  consist  of  advanced 
courses.  The  program  must  be  approved  by  the  major 
advisors  and  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

Multiple  Majors 

Some  students  choose  to  fulfill  the  requirements  of 
more  than  one  major  sequence.  A  student  initiates 
this  by  having  separate  major  programs  made  out  by 
different  major  advisors.  Because  successful  comple- 
tion of  only  one  major  program  is  required  for  a  bac- 
calaureate degree,  a  student  with  more  than  one  pro- 
gram is  asked  to  designate  one  as  the  official  major 
and  is  expected  to  maintain  normal  progress  in  ful- 
filling its  requirements. 

The  Bachelor  of  Science  Degree 

Students  desiring  to  major  in  the  fields  of  biology, 
geological  sciences,  psychology,  or  environmental 
sciences  and  resource  management  may  elect  to  work 
for  a  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  This  option  is  also 
open  to  Arts-Engineers  desiring  to  major  in  one  of 
these  fields. 


36     College  of  Arts  and  Science:  Bachelor  of  Science  Degree 


Normally,  a  student  electing  to  work  for  the  B.S. 
degree  will  have  a  strong  pre-professional  orientation. 
He  will  take  more  courses  in  his  major  field  of  con- 
centration than  will  his  counterpart  in  the  Bachelor 
of  Arts  program.  In  all  other  respects  the  student  in  a 
B.S.  curriculum  will  meet  the  same  requirements  as 
will  the  student  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  program, 
except  that  the  B.S.  candidate  is  not  asked  to  fulfill 
the  same  distribution  requirements. 

For  the  specific  requirements  of  the  B.S.  curricula 
in  biology,  geological  sciences,  psychology,  and  envir- 
onmental sciences  and  resource  management  please 
see  pages  under  the  appropriate  alphabetical  listing. 

Arts-Engineering 

The  curriculum  in  Arts-Engineering  is  especially  de- 
signed for  students  wishing  a  regular  professional 
education  in  a  field  of  engineering  and  also  the 
opportunity  to  study  broadly  or  in  a  second  field. 
Arts-Engineers  fulfill  all  requirements  for  the  profes- 
sional engineering  degree  for  which  they  are  working. 
However,  the  first  three  years  of  science  and  engineer- 
ing courses  are  scheduled  over  four  years  for  the 
Arts-Engineer.  During  this  period  the  Arts-Engineer  is 
a  student  in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science  pursuing 
a  B.A.  or  B.S.  major  program.  In  normal  circum- 
stances he  will  complete  work  for  his  degree  in  the 
College  of  Arts  and  Science  at  the  end  of  four  years. 
He  will  transfer  for  his  fifth  year  to  the  appropriate 
department  of  engineering,  where  he  will  pursue  a 
regular  fourth  year  of  science  and  engineering  course 
work  in  his  chosen  field  of  engineering. 

These  arrangements  make  it  difficult  for  an  Arts- 
Engineer  to  qualify  for  his  B.S.  in  the  College  of  Engi- 
neering before  he  has  met  all  requirements  for  his 
baccalaureate  in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science.  In 
some  instances  it  may  be  advisable  to  take  the  two 
degrees  at  the  end  of  the  fifth  year.  To  qualify  for 
both  degrees  a  student  must  submit  for  the  second 
degree  thirty  credit  hours  in  addition  to  the  number 
required  for  the  B.S.  in  Engineering  alone. 

Arts-Engineers  working  for  the  baccalaureate  of 
art  automatically  fulfill  the  engineering  general 
studies  requirements  while  filling  the  distribution 
requirements  of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science. 
Arts-Engineers  working  towards  the  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  biology,  geological  sciences,  psychology,  or 
environmental  science  and  resource  management 


must  pay  special  attention  to  the  engineering  general 
studies  requirements,  which  must  be  met  in  time  for 
the  student  to  qualify  for  the  Bachelor  of  Science 
degree  in  Engineering. 

Arts-Engineers  have  the  same  opportunities  for 
multiple  majors  and  special  interdisciplinary  majors  as 
are  available  to  students  working  for  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts. 

Pattern  rosters  which  show  the  normal  combina- 
tion of  courses  for  the  first  four  years  of  the  Arts- 
Engineering  curriculum  will  be  found  under  descrip- 
tion of  courses. 

Graduation  Requirements 

The  Bachelor  of  Arts  Degree 

1.  The  completion  with  the  required  average  of  a 
minimum  of  120  credit  hours  of  collegiate  work, 
apportioned  so  as  to  cover  the  distribution  and  con- 
centration requirements.  Basic  courses  in  military  or 
air  science  are  carried  in  addition.  No  more  than  six 
hours  of  advanced  aerospace  studies  or  military 
science  may  be  counted  towards  graduation  credit; 

2.  A  cumulative  average  of  2.00  or  better  in  the 
courses  required  in  the  student's  major  program; 

3.  Completion  of  all  general  requirements  applying 
to  all  candidates  for  baccalaureate  degrees  described 
under  Academic  Regulations. 

The  Bachelor  of  Science  Degree  in  Biology,  Geological 
Sciences,  Psychology,  or  Environmental  Science  and 
Resource  Management 

1.  The  completion  with  the  required  average  of  the 
minimum  number  of  credit  hours  of  collegiate  work 
indicated  for  the  curriculum.  Basic  courses  in  aero- 
space studies  or  military  science  are  carried  in  addi- 
tion. No  more  than  six  hours  of  advanced  R.O.T.C. 
credit  may  be  counted  towards  graduation  credit; 

2.  Completion  of  all  general  requirements  applying 
to  all  candidates  for  baccalaureate  degrees  described 
under  Academic  Regulations. 

Special  Requirements 

Regular  Progress 

Each  student  in  the  college  is  expected  to  maintain 
regular  progress  towards  the  baccalaureate  degree  by 


College  of  Arts  and  Science:  Arts-Engineering     37 


ing  .1  noi  in .il  course  load  eat  h  semester.  The 
normal  course  load  m.i\  varv  between  fourteen  and 
seventeen  hours  depending  on  the  number  and  ditli- 
culty  of  the  courses  involved.  Courses  in  military 
science  or  aerospace  studies  are  usually  carried  in 
addition.  Normal  semester  course  loads  for  Arts- 
Engineering  students  are  detailed  in  the  pattern 
rosters  tor  Arts-Engineers. 

Comprehensive  Examination  or  Senior  Thesis 

The  comprehensive  examination  in  the  major  field  or 
a  senior  thesis  is  required  of  students  in  a  few  major 
fields  of  concentration.  The  student  should  consult 
the  major  sequences  to  determine  which  majors  re- 
quire successful  completion  of  a  senior  comprehen- 
sive examination  or  a  senior  thesis. 

The  comprehensive  examination  is  given  under  the 
direction  of  the  chairman  of  the  major  department. 
No  student  is  allowed  to  take  a  senior  comprehensive 
examination  more  than  twice  in  any  one  field.  In  case 
of  failure  on  the  first  attempt,  a  second  trial  is  not 
permitted  until  a  period  of  three  months  has  passed. 

Special  Opportunities 

Arts-M.B.A.  Program 

This  five  year,  two-degree  program  is  designed  to 
meet  the  needs  of  competent  students  in  any  of  the 
Arts  and  Science  majors  (other  than  accounting, 
economics,  or  finance)  who  wish  to  supplement  their 
liberal  education  with  graduate  training  in  business 
management. 

The  normal  over-all  time  involved  in  the  two- 
degree  program  is  five  years.  During  his  first  four 
years  the  student  takes  background  courses  in  busi- 
ness and  economics.  If  he  successfully  completes 
these  and  is  admitted  to  the  graduate  phase  of  the 
program,  he  may  expect  to  complete  remaining  re- 
quirements for  the  M.B.A.  degree  in  one  additional 
year. 

The  background  courses  to  be  taken  during  the 
undergraduate  years  will  be  found  listed  under  the 
Five-Year  Programs  under  description  of  courses, 
together  with  additional  information  concerning  the 
M.B.A.  program. 


Honors  and  Independent  Study 

Qualified  students  in  .ill  curricula  ot  the  college  may 
choose  to  work  for  either  departmental  or  interde- 
partmental honors.  Particularly  well-qualified  stu- 
dents sometimes  work  for  both.  These  programs  are 
described  under  the  comprehensive  honors  program 
later  in  this  catalog. 

Students  will  find  various  opportunities  for  inde- 
pendent study  in  all  curricula  and  in  most  major  se- 
quences. They  work  out  such  programs  of  indepen- 
dent study  in  collaboration  with  their  major  advisors. 
On  the  advice  of  the  chairman  of  the  student's  major 
department  and  with  the  consent  of  the  dean  of  the 
college,  a  junior  or  a  senior  of  unusual  merit  who 
wishes  to  concentrate  in  his  chosen  field  may  be 
allowed  to  substitute  not  more  than  four  or  six  hours 
respectively  of  unscheduled  work  per  semester  for  an 
equal  number  of  hours  of  elective  work  otherwise 
required  for  graduation. 

Acceleration 

Opportunities  for  a  student  to  accelerate  towards 
graduation  include,  in  addition  to  advanced  place- 
ment and  work  in  summer  school,  rostering  course 
overloads  during  the  regular  semester  and  passing 
special  examinations  for  credit.  The  student  should 
see  his  major  advisor  or  the  dean  of  his  college  con- 
cerning these  opportunities. 


38     College  of  Arts  and  Science:  Special  Opportunities 


College  of  Business  and 
Economics 


Brian  G.  Brockway,  Dean 
Max  D.  Snider,  Assistant  Dean 

Programs  of  Study 

The  College  of  Business  and  Economics,  which  is  a 
member  of  the  American  Association  of  Collegiate 
Schools  of  Business,  offers  a  program  of  study  design- 
ed to  provide  an  understanding  of  the  complexities  of 
the  managerial  process  in  society,  both  within  and 
outside  of  the  business  firm.  Many  of  the  most  diffi- 
cult societal  problems  today  involve  decision-making, 
conflict  resolution,  and  the  efficient  and  effective 
management  of  human  and  physical  resources. 
Studies  of  business  and  economics  provide  fundamen- 
tal bases  for  understanding  and  approaching  solutions 
to  many  aspects  of  these  problems,  particularly  as 
they  present  themselves  to  business  leaders  and  ad- 
ministrators in  other  fields. 

Thus  the  college's  undergraduate  business  program 
stresses  analytical  and  communication  skills  for  the 
development  and  articulation  of  problem-solving 
techniques.  Educational  breadth  is  provided,  equiva- 
lent to  many  liberal  arts  programs,  but  with  depth  of 
study  of  business  processes  such  as  accounting  infor- 
mation systems,  financial  flows  and  markets,  manage- 
ment processes  and  the  impact  of  economic  variables 
and  forces  upon  business  and  social  issues.  In  essence, 
the  undergraduate  education  deemed  most  suitable 
for  young  men  and  women  who  will  be  the  business 
leaders  of  tomorrow  is  formulated  as  analytically 
rigorous  but  with  broad  educational  foundations 
combined  with  an  exercise  in  depth  of  understanding 
of  business  processes  in  the  economy  in  which  we 
live. 

This  education  in  fundamentals,  principles,  and 
problem-solving  mental  agility  provides  the  graduates 
with  various  options.  Some  of  the  young  men  and 
women  choosing  this  curriculum  have  already  settled 
upon  business  careers.  Others  will  use  it  as  a  base  for 
further  professional  studies,  in  law,  graduate  business 
schools,  or  specialized  graduate  training  in  economics, 
operations  research,  or  other  related  fields.  Still 


others  go  into  administrative  careers  in  government  or 
non-profit  institutions  such  as  hospitals  and  universi- 
ties. Others  apply  their  talents  to  professional 
accounting,  financial  investment,  or  management 
consulting  careers.  Others  go  into  teaching  of  eco- 
nomics or  administrative  science.  Undergraduate 
education  must  first  of  all  provide  the  solid  base  of 
analytical  skills  and  acquaintance  with  a  segment  of 
significant  and  relevant  phenomena  of  our  society. 
Equipped  then  with  learning  skills  and  intellectual 
facility  in  problem  solving,  the  student's  ultimate 
career  must  be  of  his  own  making. 

Business  today  can  no  longer  be  approached  with 
narrow  or  superficial  vocational  training.  Its  problems 
are  strongly  conditioned  by  the  state  of  the  economy 
and  even  by  social  issues  confronting  modern  business 
executives.  Thus  a  strong  basis  in  the  social  sciences  is 
essential  to  understanding  the  nature  of  business  or- 
ganizations. The  student  must  also  touch  base  with 
physical  sciences  and  technology.  Finally  mathe- 
matics and  computer  systems  are  essential  elements 
of  modern  decision-making  processes.  An  introduc- 
tion to  all  of  these  is  provided  in  Lehigh's  undergrad- 
uate program  in  business  and  economics. 

At  the  same  time  the  student  of  today  must  be 
provided  with  options.  Initiative  and  motivation 
would  be  stultified  in  a  straight-jacketed  curriculum. 
To  avoid  such  rigidity,  the  necessary  exposures  to 
science,  language,  and  other  arts  are  accomplished  by 
optional  requirements,  within  each  of  which  the  stu- 
dent has  wide  choice.  Thus  the  basic  curriculum 
rationale  is  similar  to  a  distribution  requirement  in 
liberal  arts,  to  guarantee  breadth  of  undergraduate 
educational  experience.  Additionally,  however,  ap- 
proximately twenty  percent  of  credits  required  for 
graduation  are  completely  open  for  selection  on  a 
free  elective  basis.  Thus  some  students  take  double 
majors,  since  intensive  specialization  is  not  required, 
others  carry  majors  into  more  advanced  levels,  while 
still  others  choose  work  across  the  University  ranging 
from  humanities  to  technical  engineering  subjects, 
achieving  even  greater  breadth  or  more  specially 
tailored  combinations  than  provided  in  standard  re- 
quirements. 

Thus  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Business 
and  Economics  represents  a  liberal  educational  ex- 
perience coupled  with  a  solid  understanding  of 
business  and  the  economy.  It  is  frequently  combined 


College  of  Business  and  Economics:  Programs  of  Study     39 


iii  five-year  programs  with  other  bachelor's  degrees  in 

.irts  or  engineering,  and  nuv  load  directly  to  a  tit  til 
year  achievement  ol  the  M.B.A.  degree  in  the  college 
or  in  some  other  institution. 

Objectives 

Objectives  ot  the  College  of  Business  and  Economics 
are  to  provide  an  understanding  (at  the  undergraduate 
level)  and  managerial  and/or  research-teaching  exper- 
tise (at  graduate  levels)  of  the  nature  of  business  en- 
terprise decision-making  and  resource  management  in 
the  economy.  Undergraduate  objectives  may  be  sum- 
marized as  follows: 

1.  To  provide  tools  ot  analytical  rigor  and  perspec- 
tive for  continuing  learning  abilities  with  respect  to 
the  nature  of  business  and  its  role  in  the  economy; 

2.  To  increase  communication  skills; 

3.  To  provide  breadth  of  appreciation  of  the 
scientific,  technological,  social  science  and  humanity 
features  of  the  world  in  which  business  is  carried  on; 

4.  Through  a  common  body  of  knowledge  to 
stimulate  interest  in  and  acquaint  a  student  with  basic 
business  and  economic  systems  of  pricing,  financial 
accounting,  distribution  and  management  processes; 

5.  Through  a  major,  to  provide  each  student  with  a 
learning  exercise  in  depth  in  at  least  one  area  of  busi- 
ness or  the  economy  in  which  business  operates  such 
as  accounting  systems,  finance,  economics,  economic 
statistics,  foreign  careers,  management  or  marketing. 

6.  To  work  increasingly  with  mature  students  for 
intermediate  and  upper  class  subject  areas  of  business 
and  economics,  as  an  introduction  to  professional 
work  or  a  sound  basis  for  acquiring  experience  in  the 
tield  or  for  graduate  education. 

Graduate  programs  leading  to  the  degrees  of 
Master  of  Business  Administration,  Master  of  Arts 
and  Master  of  Science  as  well  as  the  Ph.D.  and  Doctor 
of  Arts  degrees  are  described  on  following  pages. 

Curriculum  for  B.S.  in  Business  and  Economics 

120  hours  required  for  degree. 

College  Core  Requirements  (52  credits) 

English  and  Mathematics  (15  credits) 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Engl  2, 10,  14,  or  16     Composition  and  Literature  (3) 


Math  41  BMSS  Calculus  I  (3) 

Math  42  BMSS  Probability  (3) 

Math  43  BMSS  Linear  Algebra  (3) 

Business  and  Economics  Core  (37  credits) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Eco  45  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Eco  129  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

Eco  206  Microcconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  219  Macrocconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Acctg  51  Essentials  of  Accounting  (3) 

Acctg  52  Essentials  of  Accounting  (3) 

Acctg  1  1  1  Computers  in  Business  (3) 

Law  101  Business  Law  (3) 

Mkt211  Marketing  (3) 

Fin  225  Business  Finance  (3) 

Mgt  201  Development  of  Management  Thought 
(3) 

Note:  BMSS  stands  for  biological,  management  and 
social  science. 

Major  Program  (15  credits) 

Before  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  their  junior 
year,  students  will  select  a  major  or  field  of  concen- 
tration. A  major  program  will  consist  of  sequential  or 
related  courses  in  accordance  with  one  of  the  desig- 
nated major  programs,  as  detailed  on  following  pages 
under  department  course  listings.  Seven  majors  are 
offered:  accounting,  economics,  economic  statistics, 
finance,  foreign  careers,  management,  and  marketing. 

Optional  Courses  (30  credits) 

The  student  must  elect  three  hours  from  each  of  the 
following  four  groups: 

(1)  English,  speech,  journalism  or  modern 
foreign  languages  departments. 

(2)  Government,  history,  international  relations, 
and  social  relations  departments  (including  the  Divi- 
sion of  Urban  Studies). 

(3)  Fine  arts,  classics,  mathematics,  music,  religion 
studies,  and  philosophy  departments. 

(4)  Biology,  chemistry,  geological  sciences,  physics 
and  psychology  departments. 

The  remaining  hours  (18)  must  be  taken  in  any  one 
or  more  of  the  departments  listed  in  the  four  groups 
above  or  any  one  or  more  the  departments  in  the 


40     College  of  Business  and  Economics:  Bachelor  of  Science  Curriculum 


College  of  Arts  and  Science,  as  follows:  biology, 
classics,  English,  fine  arts,  geological  sciences,  govern- 
ment, history,  international  relations,  mathematics, 
modern  foreign  languages,  music,  philosophy,  psy- 
chology, religion  studies,  and  social  relations.  One- 
hour  courses  will  not  be  accepted  for  the  optional 
courses  but  may  be  counted  toward  electives. 

Electives  (23  credits) 

Normally  any  courses  in  the  University  for  which  a 
student  has  the  prerequisites  may  be  used  as  electives 
as  long  as  such  courses  carry  University  credits.  Ad- 
vanced military  science  and  aerospace  studies  courses 
may  be  counted  as  electives  up  to  6  credits,  but  fresh- 
man and  sophomore  level  courses  in  military  science 
and  aerospace  studies  do  not  carry  credit  against  the 
120  hours  required  for  graduation. 

Planning  Courses  of  Study 

In  addition  to  freshman  English  and  mathematics 
requirements,  each  freshman  enrolled  in  the  College 
of  Business  and  Economics  will  register  for  Econom- 
ics 1  his  freshman  year.  For  the  fourth  and  possibly 
fifth  courses,  he  will  take  courses  toward  the  optional 
requirement  each  semester  of  his  freshman  year.  The 
normal  program  for  freshmen  is  fifteen  hours  each 
semester. 

Accounting  51  is  normally  taken  in  the  first  semes- 
ter of  the  sophomore  year.  Other  business  and  eco- 
nomics core  requirements  should  be  selected  with 
some  sampling  of  introductory  courses  that  may  help 
the  student  choose  his  major  by  fall  pre -registration 
in  his  junior  year. 

The  pass-fail  option  is  available  for  students  in  the 
college  for  elective  credits.  Courses  with  passing  letter 
grades  must  be  submitted  to  meet  the  core,  major 
program,  and  optional  requirements.  Courses  taken 
on  a  pass-fail  basis  will  be  classified  as  elective 
courses. 

Graduate  Study  in  Business  and  Economics 

The  College  of  Business  and  Economics  offers  three 
degrees  at  the  master's  level:  the  M.B.A.,  the  M.A. 
and  M.S.  On  a  more  advanced  level,  the  college  offers 
the  Ph.D.  and  Doctor  of  Arts  degrees. 

Graduate  education  in  the  College  of  Business  and 
Economics  distinguishes  by  emphasis  between  profes- 


sional management  training  through  the  M.B.A., 
which  is  generally  though  not  always  terminal  at  the 
master's  level,  and  graduate  pursuit  of  business  and 
economics  subjects  in  depth  for  research  and/or 
teaching  expertise  through  the  doctoral  and  related 
M.A. -M.S.  programs. 

A  candidate  for  admission  to  graduate  study  in  the 
College  of  Business  and  Economics  must  offer  either 
the  Admission  Test  for  Graduate  Study  in  Business 
(ATGSB)  or  the  Graduate  Record  Examination 
(GRE)  Aptitude  Tests. 

The  M.B.A.  Degree 

The  M.B.A.  degree  is  designed  to  give  candidates  con- 
ceptual, analytical,  and  operational  knowledge  of 
decision-making  processes  in  the  management  of 
human  and  physical  resources.  Both  internal  and  ex- 
ternal aspects  of  enterprise  and  organizations  in 
modern  economic  systems  impinge  upon  managerial 
roles.  Education  in  the  business  profession  or  profes- 
sions requires  understanding  of  business  functions  but 
also  integration  of  these  in  the  management  process. 
The  program  requires  generalized  managerial  compe- 
tence but  permits,  if  the  student  desires,  advanced 
concentration  in  such  fields  as  finance,  marketing, 
quantitative  or  behavioral  management,  professional 
accountancy  or  economics,  international  trade  and 
finance,  labor  relations,  etc. 

All  candidates  for  this  program  are  required  to 
take  the  Admission  Test  for  Graduate  Study  in  Busi- 
ness. Information  about  this  test  may  be  obtained  at 
many  counseling  centers  or  by  writing  to  the  Educa- 
tional Testing  Service,  Box  966,  Princeton,  New 
Jersey  08540. 

The  courses  listed  below  are  available  in  the  even- 
ing or  on  Saturday  morning  to  permit  qualified  can- 
didates to  obtain  the  degree  on  a  part-time  basis. 
Ordinarily  graduates  of  a  four-year  program  in  busi- 
ness and  economics  complete  the  M.B.A.  in  one  year 
on  a  full-time  basis.  Normally,  two  years  on  a  full- 
time  basis  are  required  to  complete  the  M.B.A.  degree 
for  those  candidates  who  have  not  previously  com- 
pleted any  of  the  first  year  program  courses  listed 
below.  A  comprehensive  examination  is  required  of 
all  candidates  for  the  M.B.A.  degree. 


College  of  Business  and  Economics:  Graduate  Study     41 


Firs!  Year  Program  ,  30  hours) 

Quantitative  Methods  and  Systems 

Acctg  108         Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 

Acctg  1  1  1  Computers  in  Business  (3) 

Eco  45  Statistical  Methods  (3) 

Mgt  302  Quantitative  Models— Conceptual  (3) 

or 
Mgt  314  Operations  Analysis  (3) 

Functional  and  Organization  Studies 

Fin  225  Business  Finance  (3) 

Mkt211  Marketing  (3) 

Mgt  321  Organization  Behavior  (3) 

or 
Mt;t  201  Development  of  Management  Thought 

(3) 

Economic  and  Legal  Environment 

Eco  129  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

Eco  206  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Law  101  Business  Law  (3) 

Note:  Students  who  have  had  Acctg.  51  and  52  or  the 
equivalent  are  not  required  to  take  Acctg.  108. 

Students  are  usually  given  credit  without  examina- 
tion for  one  of  the  foregoing  courses  with  grades  of  C 
or  better  if  taken  toward  a  prior  degree  earned  not 
more  than  eight  years  before  first  matriculation  in  the 
M.B.A.  program. 

Required  Advanced  Courses  (15  hours) 

Acctg  422  Managerial  Accounting  (3) 

Eco  431  Managerial  Economics  (3) 

or 
Eco  432  Advanced  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Fin  421  Financial  Management  (3) 

Law  401  Legal  Problems  in  Business  (3) 

Mgt  451  Managerial  Policy  and  Decision-Making 

(3) 

Note:  Students  who  majored  in  accounting  substitute 
Acctg.  431,  Accounting  Theory  and  Thought,  for 
Acctg.  422. 

Mgt.  451  should  be  taken  the  last  semester  before 
graduation. 


Elective  Courses  |  15  hours) 

Elective  credit  hours  may  be  selected  from  desired 
combinations  of  300-  and   100  level  courses  offered  in 
the  College  of  Business  and  Economics,  as  described 
under  the  various  departmental  listings.  However, 
each  candidate  is  urged  to  take  at  least  6  to  9  credits 
of  electives  in  one  of  the  fields  in  which  work  is  offer- 
ed in  the  college.  He  will  be  considered  to  have 
majored  in  the  field  if  he  takes  9  hours  of  electives  in 
a  field  including  at  least  six  hours  at  the  four  hundred 
level.  Thus,  for  example,  he  may  major  in  accounting, 
finance,  labor  relations,  international  trade  and 
finance,  management  science,  marketing,  etc. 

Of  the  total  of  60  credits,  the  last  30  credits  are 
taken  in  residence  and  must  meet  the  University 
graduate  requirements  for  any  master's  degree. 

Graduate  Work  for  Research  and/or  Teaching  in 
Business  and  Economics 

The  Ph.D.  Degree 

The  philosophy  of  the  Ph.D.  program  is  to  nurture 
the  individual's  intellectual  growth  so  that  he  may 
independently  pursue  professional  objectives.  It  is 
assumed  that  the  individual's  level  of  proficiency, 
attained  at  the  completion  of  his  degree  program,  will 
continue  to  increase  with  his  professional  develop- 
ment. 

The  student  is  expected  to  pursue  an  intellectual 
and  scholarly  interest  in  four  areas,  including  eco- 
nomic theory.  His  program  of  study  in  these  four 
areas  is  arranged  with  the  chairman  of  the  Ph.D.  com- 
mittee of  the  college.  This  program  of  study  is  design- 
ed to  prepare  the  student  to  pass  general  examina- 
tions in  his  four  areas  so  that  he  may  be  admitted  to 
candidacy.  Course  requirements  include  competence 
in  quantitative  analysis  at  least  through  Economics 
352,  Statistical  Methods  (3)  and  Management  314, 
Operations  Analysis  (3)  and  a  course  in  the  history  of 
economic  thought.  Once  the  student  has  satisfactorily 
completed  his  general  examination,  a  dissertation 
committee  is  organized  and  its  chairman  guides  the 
candidate  in  the  preparation  of  his  dissertation. 

The  Doctor  of  Arts  Degree 

The  philosophy  of  the  Doctor  of  Arts  degree  is  to 
provide  advanced  graduate  work  with  breadth  of 


42     College  of  Business  and  Economics:  Graduate  Study 


knowledge,  sensitivity  and  teaching  skills  in  prepara- 
tion of  teaching  faculty  particularly  for  two-year  and 
four-year  colleges.  A  sensitivity  core  of  18  hours  is 
required.  Additional  classwork  of  at  least  36  hours 
(of  which  24  must  be  at  the  400-level)  is  required  in 
preparation  for  doctoral  examinations  in  four  fields 
(of  which  one  may  be  outside  the  college)  including 
an  examination  in  economic  theory.  Additional  re- 
quirements include  an  internship  and  research  project 
dealing  with  learning,  teaching,  or  research  problems 
in  business  or  economics. 


vantageous  in  dealing  with  the  increasingly  complex 
problems  of  industrial,  commercial,  and  public  service 
organizations. 


The  Master  of  Arts  and  the  Master  of  Science  Degrees 

The  Master  of  Arts  degree  is  offered  to  students  who 
qualify  in  the  field  of  general  economic  theory  and  in 
one  other  field  within  the  college.  For  the  Master  of 
Science  degree,  the  requirements  are  as  specified 
above  plus  Economics  352,  Advanced  Economic 
Statistics  (3),  and  Management  314,  Operations 
Analysis  (3). 

Eighteen  of  the  minimum  of  thirty  hours  required 
for  a  master's  degree  must  be  taken  within  the  Col- 
lege of  Business  and  Economics.  Up  to  twelve  hours 
of  the  thirty  hour  requirement  may  be  elected  from 
related  fields  in  any  department  of  the  University 
with  the  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  doctoral 
committee. 

The  Master  of  Science  in  Management  Science 

The  management  science  program  is  directed  toward 
integrating  the  scientific  method  with  the  functional 
aspects  of  organizations  by  investigating  the  applica- 
tion of  quantitative  methodology  and  systems  analy- 
sis in  the  context  of  such  areas  as  accounting,  finance, 
marketing,  production  and  public  service.  This  inte- 
gration will  provide  the  student  with  a  broader  per- 
spective toward  managerial  decision-making  in  private 
enterprise  and/or  public  administration.  Undergradu- 
ate students  with  prior  exposure  to  engineering,  busi- 
ness, economics,  mathematics  or  the  physical  sciences 
who  desire  a  professional  career  as  a  staff  specialist  in 
management  science  will  be  ideal  candidates  for  the 
program.  In  addition,  those  students  who  are  experi- 
enced in,  or  intend  to  fill,  line  manager  positions 
would  find  the  management  science  background  ad- 


College  of  Business  and  Economics:  Graduate  Study      43 


College  of  Engineering 


John  | .  Karakash,  Dean 

Robert  Gallagher,  Associate  Dciiii 

The  Curricula 

Tlic  College  of  Engineering  offers  curricula  in  chemi- 
cal engineering,  chemistry,  civil  engineering,  electrical 
engineering,  mechanical  engineering  and  engineering 
mechanics,  engineering  physics,  fundamental  sciences, 
industrial  engineering,  and  metallurgical  engineering 
and  materials  science.  Each  leads  to  the  degree  of 
bachelor  of  science  in  the  designated  area. 

Each  of  the  curricula  includes  course  requirements 
in  the  physical  sciences,  mathematics,  engineering 
sciences,  and  the  advanced  engineering  or  science 
course  work  essential  for  the  particular  degree.  In 
addition,  each  curriculum  has  General  Study  require- 
ments in  the  humanities  and  social  sciences. 

In  the  past  engineering  education  was  identified 
explicitly  and  uniquely  in  terms  of  the  need  of  indus- 
trial life.  Present-day  programs  continue  to  provide 
and  emphasize  such  preparation.  However,  the  flexi- 
bility inherent  in  the  curricula  enables  students  to 
design  personalized  programs  leading  directly  into 
other  professional  colleges  or  professions  such  as 
medicine,  law,  government,  management  or  architec- 
ture. The  college  encourages  such  mobility.  Experi- 
ence shows  that  the  background  provided  through  the 
college  programs,  including  "the  engineering 
approach"  to  identification  and  resolution  of  prob- 
lems, finds  increasingly  wider  applicability  in  those 
areas  of  activity  which  call  for  a  combination  of  prac- 
tical and  conceptual  intelligence. 

The  science  curricula  of  the  college  stress  funda- 
mentals while  providing  opportunities  for  electives  in 
each  of  the  substantive  fields  within  the  sciences. 
Senior  year  programs  in  the  sciences  can  be  planned 
to  facilitate  transition  to  either  graduate  school  or 
industrial  laboratories. 

Undergraduates  with  interests  in  such  topical  areas 
as  environmental  control,  biomedical  instrumenta- 
tion, computer  or  computing  sciences,  aerospace,  or 
management  can  pursue  their  interests  through  elec- 


tives provided  in  each  o)  the  curricula.  Effective  pre 
paration  foi  graduate  study  in  such  specialties  con- 
sists ot  basic  programs  in  science  and  engineering 
science  and  of  electives  especially  chosen  for  the  field 
of  interest.  Such  electives  may  be  chosen  from  among 
all  the  offerings  of  the  University  and  are  usually 
taken  during  the  last  two  years. 

The  freshman  choice  of  a  specific  curriculum  may 
be  changed  prior  to  the  sophomore  year  without  loss 
of  time.  During  the  first  year,  any  student  who  is 
uncertain  as  to  his  curriculum  should  consult  with  his 
faculty  advisor.  In  the  second  semester  of  the  fresh- 
man year,  just  prior  to  prcrcgistration  for  the  sopho- 
more year,  each  student  elects  a  particular  curricu- 
lum. Since  the  sophomore  year  programs  for  several 
curricula  are  very  much  alike,  it  is  possible  for  a  stu- 
dent to  transfer  from  one  curriculum  to  another  as 
late  as  the  end  of  the  sophomore  year  without  having 
to  make  up  courses.  There  are  instances,  however, 
where  such  a  transfer  will  require  one  or  two  courses 
to  be  taken  during  a  summer  session  at  Lehigh  or 
elsewhere. 

The  college  recognizes  that  the  four-year  programs 
are  not  intended  to  train  specialists  in  a  given  area  but 
rather  to  educate  students  in  terms  of  principles  so 
that  they  may  be  able  to  apply  these  to  the  problems 
they  encounter  following  graduation.  It  is  for  this 
reason  that  the  degree  awarded  upon  graduation  is 
bachelor  of  science  in  a  particular  division  of  engi- 
neering or  science. 

Five-year  programs  combining  the  liberal  arts  and 
engineering,  business  administration  and  engineering, 
or  electrical  engineering  and  physics  are  also  pro- 
vided. In  each  of  these  combined  curricula  one  bache- 
lor degree  is  awarded  upon  the  successful  completion 
of  four  years  of  study,  and  a  second  bachelor  degree 
is  awarded  at  the  end  of  the  fifth  year.  Completion  of 
one  additional  year  at  the  graduate  level  leads  to  the 
master  of  science  degree  in  the  preferred  field.  Similar 
programs  lead  to  an  M.S.  in  Materials,  or  a  Master  in 
Business  Administration. 

Students  initially  planning  four  year  programs 
leading  to  bachelor  of  science  degrees  in  any  one  of 
the  college  programs  and  who  later  decide  to  also 
earn  a  bachelor  degree  in  any  other  major  field  of 
study,  can  proceed  toward  this  objective  provided 
they  have  reached  this  decision  prior  to  their  third 
year.  In  many  instances  this  can  be  accomplished 


44     College  of  Engineering:  Tlie  Curricula 


with  one  additional  year  of  study. 

The  college  curricula  are  designed  to  provide  stu- 
dents with  as  much  latitude  as  can  be  made  available 
without  compromising  the  balance  and  integrity  ex- 
pected of  them  by  accrediting  agencies.  This  is 
satisfied  with  the  "minimum"  program  identified 
with  each  curriculum. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  college  expects  each  of  its 
students  to  take  full  advantage  of  all  opportunities 
open  to  them  and  to  complete  "normal"  programs 
which  call  for  six  to  twelve  credit  hours  over  the 
"minimum"  programs.  Actually,  the  college,  through 
its  advisors,  will  be  prepared  to  help  students  to  use 
these  six  to  twelve  hours  of  "personal  electives"  along 
with  other  electives  as  available,  toward  a  personal 
interest  development  program.  This  may  take  the 
form  of  some  concentration  in  an  option  or  specialty 
within  a  students'  own  degree  program,  or  alternately 
in  a  topical  area  not  necessarily  within  a  student's 
own  department. 

Recommended  Freshman  Year 

The  following  outline  of  work  for  the  freshman  year 
is  most  easily  scheduled  and  satisfies  the  appropriate 
requirements  for  all  engineering  students.  For  sched- 
ules of  the  work  required  of  the  following  three 
years,  please  refer  to  the  specific  curricula  under  de- 
scription of  courses. 

Freshman  Year,  First  Semester  (15  or  16  credit 
hours) 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Chem  21,  22     Introductory  Chemistry  Principles  & 

Lab  (5) 

or 
Phys  11,12       Introductory  Physics  I  &  Lab  (5) 
Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  &  Calculus  (4) 

Engr  1  Introduction  to  Engineering  Problems 

(3) 

or 

Social  Science  GS  Elective  (3  or  4) 

Freshman  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  or  16  credit 
hours) 

Engl  2*  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Phys  11,12       Introductory  Physics  I  &  Lab  (5) 
or 


Chem  21,  22     Introductory  Chemistry  Principles  & 

Lab  (5) 
Math  22  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  II 

(4) 
Engr  1  Introduction  to  Engineering  Problems 

(3) 

or 

Social  Science  GS  Elective  (3  or  4) 

*Note:  A  student  is  free  to  substitute  for  English  2 
any  one  of  the  following  three  courses:  English  10, 
14,  or  16.  (See  page  141.) 

Engineering  1,  Introduction  to  Engineering  Prob- 
lems, is  a  three-hour  course  offering  programming  of 
elementary  engineering  problems  in  compiler  langu- 
age through  lecture  and  preparation  of  problem  solu- 
tion in  fields  represented  by  the  college  curricula. 
Students  may  choose  to  elect  a  three-credit  social 
science  course  (GS)  from  the  fields  of  government, 
history,  international  relations,  or  social  relations. 
Alternately,  freshmen  may  elect  to  complete  Eco- 
nomics 1,  which  is  required  of  all  students  in  the  col- 
lege, and  thereby  postpone  their  choice  of  a  social 
science  elective. 

General  Studies 

The  General  Studies  program  is  designed  to  enable 
students  to  range  widely  or  to  delve  deeply  in  the 
humanities  and  the  social  sciences  with  the  purpose 
of  exposing  them  to  the  value  systems,  assumptions, 
and  methodologies  contained  in  these  areas.  Since  all 
students  in  the  college  are  expected  to  complete 
specified  sequences  of  courses  in  the  physical 
sciences,  and  other  electives  are  available  for  related 
courses  in  natural  sciences,  the  general  studies  pro- 
gram is  restricted  to  the  humanities  and  social 
sciences. 

In  addition  a  student  pursuing  the  B.S.  program  in 
the  College  of  Engineering  can,  if  he  so  chooses,  or- 
ganize his  general  study  program  in  a  manner  which 
also  achieves  the  equivalent  of  a  "minor"  in  any  one 
of  the  established  areas  in  the  humanities  or  social 
sciences.  This  requires: 

1,  Identifying  the  area  of  interest,  i.e.,  sociology, 
philosophy,  fine  arts,  literature,  etc.,  and  obtaining 
the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  general  studies.  In- 
terested students  initiate  action  by  arranging  a  con- 
ference with  the  chairman  of  general  studies. 


College  of  Engineering:  Recommended  Freshman  Year     45 


2.  Submitting  to  the  chairman  of  general  studies  a 
proposed  course  program  in  the  area  ol  concentration 
as  formulated  jointly  by  the  student  and  a  member  of 
the  faculty  representing  the  area  ol  concentration. 
Tlie  names  of  such  faculty  representatives  will  be 
forwarded  to  students  by  the  chairman  ol  general 
studies  upon  approval  of  their  choice  of  area  of  con- 
centration. 

In  general,  the  "minor"  is  earned  upon  completion 
of  a  program  of  not  less  than  15  credit  hours  in  the 
area  of  concentration.  In  each  and  every  case  the 
faculty  advisor  in  the  area  of  concentration  must 
recommend  the  student's  work  for  such  recognition. 
It  is  desirable  that  students  planning  to  earn  a  minor 
through  general  studies  apply  soon  after  their  fresh- 
man year  but  not  later  than  the  beginning  of  their 
fifth  term. 

The  general  studies  sequence  starts  in  the  freshman 
year  with  six  hours  of  English  composition  and  litera- 
ture, and  in  the  sophomore  year  four  hours  of  eco- 
nomics. By  the  end  of  the  senior  year,  a  minimum  of 
15  additional  hours  (5  courses)  are  elected  to  satisfy 
the  requirement  of  a  total  of  twenty-five  hours  in 
general  studies.  Several  courses  such  as  History  1  and 
2,  Course  of  Civilizations,  and  Philosophy  100,  Phi- 
losophy of  Contemporary  Civilizations,  have  been 
developed  particularly  to  meet  general  studies  objec- 
tives. 

The  general  studies  courses  are  as  follows: 

Required  Courses  (10  credit  hours): 

English  1,  and  one  course  from  among  English  2,  10, 
14,  or  16. 
Economics  1 

Elective  Courses  in  Humanities  and  Social  Sciences 
(15  credit  hours): 


Cl 


assies:  any  course 

Economics: 

Eco  129  Money  &  Banking  (3) 

Eco  206  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  303  Economic  Development  (3) 

Eco  305  The  Economic  Development  of  Latin 

America  (3) 

Eco  307  History  of  Economic  Thought  (3) 

Eco  308  History  of  Economic  Thought  (3) 

Eco  309  Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3) 


Eco  310  Economic  Evolution  (3) 

Eco  31  1  Economics  of  Resource  Use  (3) 

Eco  312  Urban  Economics  (3) 

Eco  316  Intermediate  Macroeconomic  Theory 

(3) 

Eco  335  Manpower  Economics  (3) 

Eco  337  Transportation  and  Spatial  Economics 

(3) 
Eco  338  Labor  Market  Institutions  (3) 

Eco  343  European  Economic  Integration  (3) 

English:  any  literature  course 

Fine  Arts:  any  course 

Foreign  Language:  any  language  course  on  the  inter- 
mediate or  elementary  level,  classical  or  modern.  (If 
elementary  language  study  is  elected,  a  minimum  of 
five  hours  must  be  in  one  language  in  order  to  receive 
general  studies  credit.  A  student  may  not  elect  for 
elementary  study  in  any  language  in  which  he  has 
entering  credit.) 

Government:  any  course 

History:  any  course 

International  Relations:  any  course 

Journalism: 

Journ  12  Reporting  of  Public  Affairs  (3) 

Journ  21  Creative  Writing  (3) 

Journ  22  Creative  Writing  (3) 

Journ  111  Problems  in  Advanced  Reportage  (3) 

Journ  115  Interpretive  Writing  (3) 

Journ  118  History  of  American  Journalism  (3) 

Journ  120  Journalism  Proseminar  (3) 

Journ  121  Law  of  the  Press  (3) 

Journ  122  Law  of  the  Press  II  (3) 

Music:  any  course  except  Music  1-4,  5-8,  9,  10. 

Philosophy:  any  course 

Psychology: 

Psych  4  Psychology  as  a  Social  Science  (3) 

Psych  21  (SR  21)       Social  Psychology  (3) 
Psych  107  Developmental  Psychology  (3) 

Psych  121  Encountering  Self  and  Others  (3) 

Psych  251  Psychological  Perspectives  in  Tech- 

nological Society  (3) 
Psych  331  Humanistic  Psychology  (3) 

Psych  361  Personality  (4) 


Religion  Studies:  any  course 
Social  Relations:  any  course 


46     College  of  Engineering:  General  Studies 


Speech: 
Speech  30 
Speech  61 
Speech  62 


Fundamentals  of  Speech  (3) 
Theatre  Production  (3) 
Theatre  Production  (3) 


Graduation  Requirements 

Students  in  good  academic  standing  earn  their  degree 
by  meeting  the  requirements  of  their  specific  bache- 
lor of  science  curriculum  and  the  University  require- 
ments described  under  the  academic  regulations 
section  of  this  catalog.  Waiver  of  program  require- 
ments is  approved  through  petition  endorsed  by  the 
department  and  the  Committee  on  Standing  of  Stu- 
dents. Students  are  expected  to  satisfy  the  credit 
hour  requirements  of  their  chosen  curriculum.  Basic 
military  science  credit  hours  are  in  addition  to  the 
credit  hours  specified  by  the  curriculum.  Students  are 
encouraged  to  confer  with  their  curriculum  advisor 
on  all  matters  related  to  their  program. 

Honors  Programs 

Outstanding  students  in  the  college  may  participate  in 
the  Comprehensive  Honors  Program.  Each  depart- 
ment offers  honors  work,  and  adapts  this  to  its  cur- 
riculum. 

Outstanding  students  may  receive  permission  to  do 
independent  study  on  an  unscheduled  basis,  thereby 
proceeding  more  rapidly  and  more  deeply  than  is 
possible  in  regular  programs.  This  enables  students 
who  are  qualified  for  and  interested  in  this  work  to 
proceed  in  a  direction  agreed  upon  with  their  honors 
advisor,  leading  to  the  preparation  of  an  undergradu- 
ate thesis.  For  further  information  see  the  section  on 
the  Comprehensive  Honors  Program. 

Inspection  Trips 

Inspection  trips  to  industrial  plants  are  a  required 
part  of  specific  courses  in  various  engineering  curricu- 
la. Written  reports  may  be  required.  These  trips  are 
generally  held  during  the  senior  year  and  involve  an 
average  expense  of  $25  to  $50.  The  location  of  the 
University  in  the  center  of  industrial  activities  of 
various  types  furnishes  unusual  opportunities  for 
visits  of  inspection  to  engineering  plants. 


Arts-Engineering  Curricula 

Under  the  five-year  plan  the  student  is  in  the  College 
of  Arts  and  Science  for  four  years,  earning  the  B.A. 
degree  on  completion  of  a  program  which  includes, 
along  with  specific  B.A.  training,  the  fundamental 
mathematical,  scientific,  and  engineering  subjects  of 
the  engineering  curriculum  of  his  choice.  In  the  fifth 
year  the  student  is  enrolled  in  the  College  of  Engi- 
neering, carrying  on  a  program  leading  to  the  degree 
of  B.S.in  the  selected  curriculum. 

Engineering  students  who  decide  at  any  stage  of 
their  program  to  work  for  both  the  B.A.  and  B.S. 
degrees  are  urged  to  work  with  their  advisors  toward 
the  formulation  of  an  augmented  program  meeting 
the  requirements  of  both  degrees.  If  the  decision  is 
made  prior  to  the  third  year  both  degree  require- 
ments may  be  satisfied  within  a  total  of  five  years. 


College  of  Engineering:  Arts-Engineering  Curricula     47 


Special  Academic  Opportunities 


Lehigh's  Interdisciplinary  Tradition 

Lehigh  has  traditionally  taken  advantage  of  its  rela- 
tively small  size  and  lack  of  rigid  departmental  lines 
to  develop  flexible  and  interdisciplinary  programs.  On 
the  graduate  level,  a  student  may  choose  to  pursue 
work  by  field  rather  than  department  in  such  areas  as 
computer  science,  applied  mathematics  and  manage- 
ment science  (see  Interdisciplinary  Graduate  Programs, 
p.  69).  The  graduate  student  may  also  do  his  thesis 
or  dissertation  research  in  one  of  the  eight  interdis- 
ciplinary centers,  which  are  described  in  detail  on 
pages  71  to  81. 

Interdisciplinary  work  on  the  undergraduate  level 
can  be  arranged  in  each  of  the  colleges  for  the  student 
desiring  a  concentration  in  a  field  outside  a  usual 
major.  In  the  College  of  Engineering,  a  student  may 
develop  a  minor  in  a  field  of  his  interest,  not  neces- 
sarily even  in  his  college.  In  the  College  of  Arts  and 
Science,  special  interdisciplinary  majors  may  be  in- 
dividually developed  to  suit  a  student's  needs  (see 
page  36).  Current  examples  of  such  programs  include 
such  combinations  as  fine  arts  and  history,  informa- 
tion science  and  electrical  engineering,  business  and 
psychology,  mathematics  and  social  relations,  and 
journalism  and  urban  studies. 

Alert  to  the  increasing  desire  of  students  for 
courses  related  to  contemporary  and  political  prob- 
lems, the  faculty  has  developed  interdisciplinary  pro- 
grams in  such  areas  as  urban  studies,  oceanography, 
environmental  sciences  and  resource  management, 
fundamental  science,  American  studies,  and  Afro- 
American  studies. 

The  program  in  urban  studies,  outlined  under 
government  in  the  description  of  courses,  is  intended 
to  provide  undergraduate  instruction  for  students 
who  wish  to  enter  professional  careers  that  require 
interdisciplinary  knowledge  of  the  problems  of  urban 
life  or  who  will  be  pursuing  graduate  studies  in  urban 
affairs.  Several  cooperating  departments,  associated 
with  the  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental 
Studies,  provide  instruction  in  marine  ecology, 


biological  oceanography,  sanitary  microbiology, 
water  supply  and  transport,  and  environmental  plan- 
ning. Because  environmental  studies  are  interdisciplin- 
ary in  nature,  the  emphasis  in  these  courses  is  to  pro- 
vide a  general  introduction  to  the  undergraduate  plan 
ning  graduate  study  in  a  specialized  area. 

In  addition,  there  is  the  Social  Welfare  Education 
Program,  designed  to  provide  semi-professional  train- 
ing in  social  work.  The  program  is  desirable  for  stu- 
dents interested  in  various  areas  of  counseling  and 
guidance  work,  the  ministry  and  in  urban  planning. 
The  program  constitutes  a  minor  of  four  courses 
taken  in  sequence  at  various  colleges  of  the  Lehigh 
Valley. 

Further  information  on  the  other  programs  listed 
above  may  be  found  by  consulting  the  index. 

Opportunities 

High  Immediate  Relevance  Courses 

In  addition  to  the  sensitive  topics  outlined  above,  a 
program  of  High  Immediate  Relevance  (HIR)  courses 
enables  all  instructional  departments  to  introduce 
courses  temporarily  within  a  semester.  HIR  courses 
are  normally  either  experimental  courses  or  courses 
based  on  contemporary  social  and  scientific  issues. 
They  may  later  become  part  of  the  regular  curriculum 
if  proved  successful.  HIR  courses  can  be  taken  on  a 
pass/fail  basis.  Since  most  HIR  courses  are  not  devel- 
oped in  time  to  be  included  in  this  catalog  listing, 
they  are  identified  with  a  97-98  number  and  are  in- 
corporated in  the  Registrar's  official  semester  roster 
for  a  maximum  of  two  semesters.  A  sample  listing  of 
HIR  courses  includes:  Media  and  Values;  Fiction  and 
the  Technological  Vision;  Physics  for  Poets;  Art, 
Technology  and  Environmental  Sculpture;  Economics 
and  Society;  Seminar  in  Oriental  Religions;  Television 
Workshop;  and  The  Black  in  American  Literature. 

Change  of  Major 

There  is  a  great  flexibility  in  undergraduate  curricula 
at  Lehigh  intended  to  take  into  consideration  the 
changing  interests  and  needs  of  students.  For  exam- 
ple, in  the  College  of  Engineering,  each  department 
provides  a  range  of  hours  needed  for  graduation  to 
provide  flexibility  to  the  student  who  wants  to  take 
more  or  less  work  outside  the  department.  This  flexi- 


Special  Academic  Opportunities:  Lehigh's  Interdisciplinary  Tradition     49 


bility  extends  to  late  changes  ol  tnajoi  01  even  college 
without  loss  "i  credits. 

The  graduate  student  may  find  !>  is  interests  shift 
ing  to  a  now  field  .is  he  progresses  in  liis  educational 
program  or  he  may  wish  to  strengthen  his  preparation 
.  areer  by  advanced  study  in  ,\  related  field  or  in 
.m  interdisciplinary  progr.im.  The  policy  ot  the 
Graduate  School  is  to  provide  as  much  flexibility  as 
possible  to  the  student  who  wishes  to  change  to  a 
new  but  related  Held  ot  study  after  either  his  bacca- 
laureate  or  liis  master's  degree. 

The  student  should  consult  with  the  director  of  liis 
previous  program  and  with  the  director  of  the  new 
field  in  which  he  is  interested  to  establish  the  course 
program  that  will  remedy  any  deficiencies  in  back- 
ground and  will  be  of  maximum  value  to  him.  Stu- 
dents who  have  just  completed  a  bachelor's  degree  in 
one  field  at  Lehigh  University  may  find  it  advantage- 
ous to  study  for  a  graduate  degree  in  a  related  field 
under  a  new  group  of  the  faculty  without  losing  the 
continuity  and  familiarity  provided  by  staying  on  this 
campus. 

Five-Year,  Two-Degree  Programs 

Another  feature  ot  Lehigh's  flexibility  is  the  oppor- 
tunity for  five-year,  two-degree  programs  which  en- 
able a  student  to  receive  either  two  bachelor  degrees 
or  a  bachelor  and  a  master's  degree  upon  completion 
of  five  years  of  study. 

Most  five-year,  two-degree  programs  appear  in  the 
description  of  courses  under  Arts-Engineering  and 
Five-Year  Programs.  It  is  possible  to  arrange  for  a 
dual  bachelor  degree  program  even  after  studying  at 
Lehigh  for  some  period  of  time.  An  engineering  stu- 
dent, for  example,  who  decides  at  any  stage  of  his 
study  that  he  wishes  to  meet  the  requirements  for 
both  the  bachelor  of  arts  and  the  bachelor  of  science 
degree  may  complete  the  combined  requirements  in 
five  or  possibly  six  years,  depending  on  when  he  de- 
cided to  try  for  both  degrees. 

Of  increasing  interest  to  undergraduates  are  the 
two-degree,  five-year  programs  which  enable  one  to 
secure  a  bachelor  and  a  master's  degree.  Because 
Lehigh's  well-established  graduate  programs  are 
closely  integrated  with  the  undergraduate  programs, 
it  is  possible  to  consider  programs  leading  to  the  engi- 
neering-master of  business  administration  degree,  the 
arts-M.B.A.  degree,  the  engineering-master  of  science 


in  materials  program,  01  the  lilih  yeai  program  in  the 
"il  of  Education  which  enables  those  receiving  a 
h.A.  degree  to  accomplish  professional  teacher  train- 
ing and  serve  as  a  salaried  intern  in  the  public  schools. 
After  the  completion  of  one  year  ol  lull  time  teach- 
ing, the  student  can  receive  the  master  of  arts  for 
secondary  teachers  or  the  master  of  education  degree 
for  elementary  teachers.  Many  other  five-year, 
graduate-level  combination  programs  exist,  and  the 
student  is  advised  to  consult  with  his  advisor  in  plan- 
ning such  a  program. 

Pre-Law  and  Pre-Mcdical  Programs 

Although  no  formal  programs  exist,  Lehigh  students 
have  been  very  successful  in  attaining  entrance  to 
medical,  dental  and  law  schools.  Pre-med  and  pre-law 
programs  can  be  worked  out  for  students  in  each  of 
the  three  undergraduate  colleges.  Coordinated  six- 
year  undergraduate  programs  are  now  being  develop- 
ed with  several  medical  colleges  in  Philadelphia. 
Interested  students  should  consult  with  their  curricu- 
lum advisor  or  the  pre-med  or  pre-law  advisor. 

Research  Initiates 

Undergraduate  students  who  seek  or  are  considering  a 
career  involving  research  are  encouraged  to  investigate 
the  possibility  of  becoming  research  initiates  in  their 
junior  or  senior  years.  A  research  initiate  is  attached 
to  a  specific  research  project  in  progress  on  the  cam- 
pus, serving  as  an  assistant  to  an  advanced  graduate 
student  or  to  a  staff  member.  He  assists  in  experi- 
ments, sits  in  on  project  conferences,  and  if  occasion 
permits,  undertakes  small  side  investigations  appropri- 
ate to  his  competence. 

The  research  initiate  may  receive  degree  credit  by 
registering  for  unrostered  work  for  up  to  6  hours  per 
semester.  In  a  few  cases,  a  nominal  stipend  may  be 
paid  for  his  work,  and  summer  employment  is  also 
occasionally  available.  The  student  should  explore  the 
possibility  of  becoming  a  research  initiate  with  his 
curriculum  advisor. 

Accelerated  Programs 

It  is  possible  for  Lehigh  students  to  accelerate  their 
programs  so  that  they  may  graduate  in  as  little  as 
three  years.  Such  programs  are  made  possible  by 
credits  awarded  for  advanced  standing  upon  admis- 


50     Special  Academic  Opportunities:  Research  Initiates 


sion,  credit  by  examination,  overloads,  and  summer 
work.  Again,  interested  students  should  consult  with 
their  curriculum  advisors. 

Special  Summer  Opportunities 

In  addition  to  the  normal  opportunities  offered  to 
students,  both  graduate  and  undergraduate,  in 
summer  school  for  both  remedial  and  accelerated 
work,  special  programs  are  available  for  intense  in- 
depth  experiences  as  well  as  for  field  work.  Examples 
include  the  Robert  A.  Taft  Institute  of  Government 
and  the  Field  Work  in  Archaeology  program  (History 
403)  run  by  the  department  of  history  and  Moravian 
College.  Summer  short  courses  and  workshops  are 
offered  in  a  wide  variety  of  subject  areas.  Interested 
students  should  consult  with  their  curriculum 
director  or  the  Director  of  Summer  Session. 

Apprentice  Teaching 

Apprentice  teaching  is  designed  for  advanced  stu- 
dents, normally  in  their  senior  year,  who  wish  to 
learn  about  teaching  under  the  guidance  of  an  experi- 
enced teacher.  Master  and  apprentice  teachers  are, 
with  the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  the  department 
in  which  the  apprentice  teaching  is  done,  free  for  the 
most  part  to  work  out  whatever  arrangements  best  fit 
the  needs  of  the  course.  Apprentices  typically  receive 
three  hours  of  credit  for  attending  all  classes,  doing 
some  lecturing  or  leading  of  discussion  sections, 
assisting  in  making  up  and  grading  some  written 
assignments  and  tests,  and  being  available  for  some 
individual  consultation  with  students.  A  student  may 
register  for  apprentice  teaching  only  once  each  semes- 
ter, and  only  twice  (for  credit)  in  his  college  career, 
for  a  maximum  total  of  six  hours  of  credit.  He  may 
be  an  apprentice  teacher  (for  credit)  in  a  given  course 
only  once.  A  graduate  student  who  is  not  a  paid 
teaching  assistant  may  register  for  apprentice  teach- 
ing, but  his  department  must  decide  whether  the 
credit  he  receives  for  the  course  will  count  toward 
fulfilling  his  course  requirements  for  a  graduate  de- 
gree. The  apprentice  will  be  graded  by  his  master 
teacher.  Students  who  wish  to  do  apprentice  teaching 
in  extra-departmental  courses,  such  as  those  offered 
as  Freshman  Seminars  or  Creative  Concepts  courses, 
may  do  so  with  the  approval  of  the  director  of  the 
program.  Such  students  will  be  registered  for  course 


number  300  in  the  appropriate  program  (e.g.,  F.S. 
300:  Apprentice  Teaching  in  F.S.  97C;  or  C.C.  300: 
Apprentice  Teaching  in  C.C.  101). 

Study  in  Foreign  Countries 

To  the  extent  that  their  courses  of  study  permit  it, 
students  maintaining  a  "B"  average  or  better  are 
encouraged  to  consider  spending  one  or  two  semes- 
ters of  study  in  acceptable  "junior  year  abroad"  pro- 
grams or  as  regularly  enrolled  students  in  a  foreign 
university.  Among  the  accepted  programs  are  New 
York  University  in  Spain,  Smith  College  and  Wayne 
State  University  in  Germany,  Sweet  Briar  and 
Hamilton  in  France,  and  Dickinson  College  at 
Bologna,  Italy.  Students  declared  qualified  for  accept- 
able foreign  study  remain  eligible  to  apply  for  finan- 
cial aid  from  Lehigh  University. 

To  emphasize  further  University  interest  in  inter- 
national study,  the  University  has  provided  funds  to 
cover  transportation,  tuition,  and  living  expense 
stipend  for  a  graduating  senior  desiring  to  study 
abroad. 

The  Modern  Foreign  Languages  Department 
offers,  subject  to  annual  approval  by  the  admini- 
stration, a  second  semester  program  in  academic 
subjects  available  at  a  German  university  with  Lehigh 
credit.  The  program  is  open  to  students  with  junior 
standing  or  above. 

The  Modern  Foreign  Languages  Department  also 
offers  summer  language  and  literature  programs  in 
Paris,  France,  Salzburg,  Austria,  and  Santander, 
Spain.  These  programs  provide  up  to  six  hours  of 
academic  credit,  and  are  open  to  undergraduate  and 
graduate  students  in  good  standing  at  an  accredited 
school  of  higher  learning,  and  to  elementary  and 
secondary  school  teachers  in  service. 

The  Washington  Semester 

Opportunity  is  available  each  year  for  several  selected 
juniors  or  seniors  to  spend  one  semester  of  study  in 
the  nation's  capital  through  cooperation  with 
American  University  in  Washington,  D.C.,  and  some 
sixty  other  colleges  and  universities. 

The  students  enroll  at  Lehigh  but  spend  the  semes- 
ter in  residence  at  American  University  with  the  stu- 
dents from  the  participating  colleges. 


Special  Academic  Opportunities:  The  Washington  Semester     51 


Freshman  Seminars 

Interdisciplinary  problem-centered  Freshman 
Seminars  (FS)  are  offered  each  semestei  to  freshmen 
enrolled  in  any  curriculum.  The  seminars  deal  with 
primary  problems  of  contemporary  culture  and  are 
intended  to  challenge  the  ciiucntion.il  idealism  ol 
freshmen.  A  three  credit  hour  seminar  will  tultill 
general  studios  requirements  in  the  College  ot  Engi- 
neering or  distribution  requirements  in  the  College  ol 
Arts  and  Science. 

Most  freshmen  courses  are  introductions  to  disci- 
plines, that  is,  courses  in  which  the  student  learn 
procedures  that  will  enable  him  to  take  more  special- 
ized courses.  Problem-centered  Freshman  Seminars 
are  based  on  the  premise  that  these  typical  courses 
should  be  complemented  by  studies  that  relate  con- 
temporary cultural  problems  to  the  many  disciplines 
in  the  humanities  and  in  the  sciences. 

Enrollment  in  the  seminars  is  limited.  Freshman 
interested  in  enrolling  arc  invited  to  complete  the 
appropriate  forms  distributed  with  other  pre -registra- 
tion materials  and  to  consult  with  their  faculty  ad- 
visor. 

Typical  Freshman  Seminars  offered  in  recent 
semesters  include  Energy  and  Society,  Change  and 
Crisis  in  American  Colleges,  Man  and  His  Man-Made 
World,  Science  and  Moral  Values,  The  Revolt  of  the 
Inarticulate,  and  Environmental  Crises.  Freshman 
Seminars  are  also  offered  on  a  regular  basis  by  some 
departments  as  a  part  ot  their  normal  course  offer- 
ings, for  example.  History  51  and  52. 

Afro-American  Studies 

The  University  offers  a  number  of  courses  that  are 
relevant  to  Afro-American  studies.  Representative 
courses  are  S.R.  368,  Urban  Community;  Hist.  331, 
The  Negro  in  America;  Govt.  352,  Civil  Rights;  and 
Engl.  345,  Themes  in  American  Literature.  Students 
who  are  interested  in  Afro-American  studies  work  out 
their  individual  programs  with  their  major  advisors  or 
with  the  dean  of  their  college. 

Cooperative  College  Program 

Lehigh  is  a  member  of  the  incorporated  LVAIC 
(Lehigh  Valley  Association  of  Independent  Colleges). 
This  consortium  also  includes  Allentown  College  of 
St.  Francis  de  Sales  in  Center  Valley,  Cedar  Crest  and 


Muhlenbi  es  in  Allentown,  Moravian  College 

in  Bethlehem,  and  I  afayette  College  in  Easton. 

Under  an  agrecmem  among  the  coll    <    "i  IVAIC 
students  on  "in- 1  ampus  may  cross  register  lor  courses 

given  on  another  campus.  Students  desiring  to  take 
advantage  of  this  opportunity  must  obtain  the  con- 
sent of  the  course  instructors  and  advisors  concerned 
and  accept  differences  in  (  alendar  and  course  schedul- 
ing. They  must  provide  their  own  transportation.  A 
student  taking  a  course  on  another  campus  under  this 
arrangement  does  not  pay  extra  tuition  tor  the  privi- 
lege, and  the  course  he  takes  and  the  grade  he  makes 
in  it  arc  recorded  on  the  transcript  ol  his  home  insti- 
tution. The  agreement  applies  only  to  undergraduate 
students  and  extends  to  both  the  academic  year  and 
summer  sessions. 

A  cooperative  Social  Welfare  Education  Program 
designed  to  provide  preparation  for  entrance-level 
professional  competence  in  social  welfare  positions  is 
sponsored  by  LVAIC.  Lehigh  students  wishing  to 
participate  in  this  program  should  consult  with  the 
chairman  of  the  department  of  social  relations. 

Comprehensive  Honors  Program 

The  Comprehensive  Honors  Program  is  designed  to 
permit  students  who  demonstrate  unusual  academic 
ability  and  interest  to  explore  more  widely  than  their 
curricula  would  normally  allow  and  to  engage  in  inde- 
pendent study  and  research. 

Freshman-Sophomore  Years.  These  are  the  years  in 
which  a  student  normally  chooses  his  major  field  of 
study  and  lays  the  required  groundwork  for  it.  Thus, 
honors  opportunities  are  limited. 

Honors  opportunities  for  freshmen  consist  of 
assignment  before  registration  of  those  most  qualified 
to  honors  courses  in  place  of  certain  required  fresh- 
man courses,  and  acceleration  through  the  attainment 
of  advanced  standing.  Advanced  standing  may  be 
certified  by  the  Office  of  Admission  and  the  registrar 
on  the  basis  of  college  credit  granted  for  certain 
special  secondary  school  courses.  Generally,  however, 
students  who  seek  advanced  standing  should  arrange 
to  take  the  relevant  tests  under  the  CEEB  Advanced 
Placement  Program. 

There  are  no  specific  sophomore  honors  opportu- 
nities. However,  second-semester  freshmen  and  all 
sophomores  who  wish  to  accelerate  their  programs 
may  seek  waiver  of  the  junior-standing  prerequisite 


52      Special  Academic  Opportunities:  Cooperative  College  Program 


for  courses  numbered  "100"  to  "399,"  if  they  have 
the  course  prerequisites.  Students  interested  in  so 
doing  should  consult  the  dean  of  the  college  in  which 
they  are  registered. 

Any  undergraduate  may  accelerate  his  program  by 
passing  by  special  examination  any  course  he  feels  he 
already  has  mastered.  Interested  students  should  con- 
sult with  the  chairman  of  the  department  indicated. 
Junior-Senior  Years.  Honor  students  are  those  with  a 
cumulative  average  of  3.0  or  higher.  In  the  first  or 
second  semester  of  his  junior  year,  an  honor  student 
may  choose  to  work  for  Interdepartmental  Honors, 
or  Departmental  Honors.  Particularly  well-qualified 
students  sometimes  work  for  both.  An  honor  student 
enrolled  in  one  or  both  of  these  programs  is  desig- 
nated a  "University  Scholar." 

Students  with  cumulative  averages  of  less  than  3.0 
may  under  some  circumstances  by  permitted  to  work 
for  Departmental  Honors. 

Departmental  Honors 

These  programs  give  the  University  Scholar  the  op- 
portunity to  study  in  his  major  field  more  intensively 
and  in  greater  depth  than  the  standard  program  pro- 
vides. The  precise  nature  of  the  program  for  each 
student  is  determined  by  his  major  department.  The 
program  may  include: 

a)  Unscheduled  work  or  independent  study  (up  to 
four  hours  per  semester  in  the  junior  year;  up  to  six 
hours  per  semester  in  the  senior  year). 

b)  Waiver  of  graduate  standing:  undergraduate 
students  will  be  permitted  by  petition  to  the  Gradu- 
ate School  to  register  in  a  400  course  for  which  they 
have  the  necessary  prerequisites  under  the  conditions 
that  they:  (1)  have  maintained  a  3.00  average  in  each 
of  the  two  semesters  prior  to  the  date  of  the  petition, 
and  (2)  will  carry  a  course  load  not  to  exceed  15 
hours  unless  4-credit  courses,  R.O.T.C.  and  the  like, 
raise  it  to  17  hours  maximum. 

c)  Honors  thesis  or  project. 

A  candidate  for  Departmental  Honors  must  announce 
to  his  major  advisor  during  his  junior  year,  or  no  later 
than  the  beginning  of  his  senior  year,  his  intention  to 
work  for  Departmental  Honors.  Each  major  advisor 
must  submit  to  the  registrar,  the  dean  of  the  college, 
and  the  chairman  of  Honors  Programs,  no  later  than 
the  close  of  registration  of  each  fall  semester,  the 
names  of  seniors  who  are  working  for  Departmental 


Honors  in  his  major.  The  names  of  those  students 
who  attain  Departmental  Honors  will  be  announced 
at  the  graduation  exercises. 

Interdepartmental  Honors 

The  Interdepartmental  Honors  Program  offers  quali- 
fied undergraduates  the  opportunity  to  devote  part  of 
their  junior  and  senior  years  to  independent  study 
through  a  series  of  limited  enrollment  seminars 
known  as  Creative  Concepts  Seminars,  and  the  pre- 
paration of  a  thesis  or  other  project. 

The  seminars  are  each  based  on  one  of  the  four 
large  areas  of  human  knowledge:  humanities;  life 
sciences;  physical  sciences;  and  social  sciences.  To- 
gether with  the  final  thesis  or  project,  they  provide  a 
foretaste  of  the  kind  of  work  and  of  the  standards  the 
students  will  encounter  in  graduate  and  professional 
schools. 

University  Scholars  in  this  program  are  graduated 
with  Interdepartmental  Honors  if,  in  addition  to 
meeting  all  requirements  for  graduation,  they  have: 

(a)  Completed  three  Creative  Concepts  Seminars 
with  an  average  grade  of  at  least  3.33,  or  four  semi- 
nars with  an  average  grade  3.25. 

(b)  Completed  an  Honors  Thesis  or  Project  with  a 
grade  of  "A." 

No  student  who  enrolls  in  the  Interdepartmental 
Honors  Program  is  obligated  to  complete  it;  he  may, 
if  he  wishes,  register  for  only  such  seminars  as  appeal 
to  him. 

Admission.  Each  sophomore  eligible  for  admission  to 
the  Interdepartmental  Honors  Programs  will  be  noti- 
fied of  his  eligibility  before  the  pre-registration  period 
in  his  fourth  semester.  A  student  is  eligible  to  apply 
for  admission  if  he  has  a  cumulative  three-semester 
average  of  at  least  3.0. 

Each  applicant  must  submit  to  the  chairman  of 
Honors  Program  an  application  approved  by  the 
chairman  of  the  department  in  which  he  is  majoring. 
(Forms  are  obtained  from  the  chairman  of  Honors 
Program.) 

The  Program.  A  student  admitted  to  the  Interdepart- 
mental Honors  Program  must: 

(a)  Continue  to  pursue  a  major  program  since  an 
Honors  Program  does  not  constitute  a  major. 

(b)  Schedule  at  least  three  Creative  Concepts  Semi- 
nars during  his  junior  and  senior  years.  It  is  possible 
to  schedule  only  one  seminar  per  semester.  The  semi- 


Special  Academic  Opportunities:  Comprehensive  Honors  Program     53 


ii.ii  ^  offered  carry  the  following  course  numbers  and 
broad  titles: 

Creative  Concepts  101:  The  Humanities  (3) 
ative  Concepts  102:  The  I  ife  S<  iences  (3) 

Creative  Concepts  103:  The  Physical  Sciences  (3) 

Creative  Concepts  104:  The  Social  Sciences  (3). 

Under  these  headings  .i  variety  of  courses  is  offer 
ed.  Instructors  are  selected  trom  the  University 
faculty,  and  each  is  given  liberty  to  pursue  any  topic 
and  course  of  inquiry  lie  wishes,  guided  only  by  the 
idea  that  he  will  deal  in  some  way  with  concepts  he 
considers  significant  in  man's  attempt  to  understand 
himself  and  his  world.  Ideally  the  student  should 
sample  at  least  three  of  the  broad  areas,  but  this  is 
not  always  possible. 

(c)  Produce  an  Honors  Thesis  or  other  approved 
project  by  scheduling  Creative  Concepts  190:  Honors 
Thesis  (3  to  6  credits)  during  one  or  both  semesters 
of  his  senior  year  (or  during  the  preceding  summer), 
if  unusual  circumstances  prevent  such  scheduling,  the 
student  can  develop  other  procedures  in  consultation 
with  the  chairman  of  Honors  Programs.  The  thesis  or 
project  must  be  supervised  by  a  member  of  the  facul- 
ty who  has  agreed  to  work  with  the  student  and  who 
has  been  approved  to  do  so.  The  student  should  sub- 
mit a  proposal  signed  by  the  advisor  and  by  the  chair- 
man of  the  student's  major  department  to  the  chair- 
man of  Honors  Programs  no  later  than  the  beginning 
of  his  eighth  semester. 

Presidential  Prizes 

Lehigh  University  offers  each  year  ten  Presidential 
Prizes  valued  at  S4.000  each,  for  four  years  of 
college.  These  are  reserved  for  entering  freshmen  and 
are  awarded  on  a  competitive  basis,  irrespective  of 
financial  need.  Each  prize  provides  S500  per  semes- 
ter, credited  toward  tuition,  in  any  of  the  three 
undergraduate  colleges  of  the  University. 

The  prizes  once  assigned  continue  in  force  for  the 
full  four  years  of  the  student's  residence  at  Lehigh 
University,  unless  the  holder  fails  to  meet  the  normal 
scholastic  requirement  of  a  3.00  average  or  better  and 
the  qualifications  of  a  good  citizen.  In  rare  instances 
this  requirement  may  be  waived  upon  unanimous 
vote  of  the  prize  committee  and  the  approval  of  the 
president.  The  prize  is  based  strictly  on  merit,  with- 
out regard  to  financial  need. 


In  order  to  compete  for  one  of  the  prizes  .i  fresh  - 
indidate  must: 

(1)  Be  a  successful  candidate  for  admission  in  any 
ol  the  three  undergraduate  colleges.  Arts  and  Science, 
Business  and  Economics,  or  Engineering,  with  evi- 
dence of  promise  of  high  academic  achievement. 

(2)  Submit  a  separate  prize  application  providing 
more  detailed  information  regarding  any  important 
piece  of  creative  work,  independent  study,  evidence 
of  leadership  potential,  notable  accomplishments 
which  do  not  appear  on  the  regular  record  submitted 
for  admission,  or  the  promise  of  making  an  extra- 
ordinary contribution  to  the  life  of  Lehigh.  Thus  the 
applicant  may  show  high  achievement  in  such  diverse 
areas  as  the  arts,  the  sciences,  athletics,  original 
scholarship,  literature,  or  music. 

(3)  Be  interviewed  by  a  member  of  the  Lehigh 
faculty,  generally  a  member  of  the  prize  committee. 
If  distance  prohibits  a  campus  visit,  the  interview  may 
be  with  a  selected  alumni. 

All  candidates  for  admission  are  automatically 
eligible  to  compete  for  one  of  these  prizes  and  will  be 
so  considered.  A  preliminary  selection  of  finalists  will 
be  made  in  January  when  prize  applications  will  be 
distributed  and  interviews  conducted.  Winners  will  be 
announced  in  April.  It  is  possible  to  receive  a  Presi- 
dential Prize  and  also  qualify  for  other  forms  of 
financial  aid.  The  Parent's  Confidential  Statement, 
however,  is  not  required  to  be  considered  for  a  prize. 

Prizes  will  be  made  in  the  order  of  the  contestants' 
ratings  on  such  weighted  factors  as  secondary  school 
scholastic  record,  evidences  of  effective  leadership 
and  distinguished  group  service,  character  and  person- 
ality, and  performance  in  the  College  Entrance  Exam- 
ination Board  tests.  The  prizes  follow  the  general  plan 
of  the  prestigious  academic  scholarships  typified  by 
the  Rhodes  Scholarships.  Geographic  location  will 
play  some  part  in  the  final  selection.  Men  and  women 
students  are  equally  eligible. 


54     Special  Academic  Opportunities:  Presidential  Prizes 


The  Graduate  School 


Robert  Daniel  Stout,  Dean 

Areas  of  Graduate  Study 

Graduate  study  was  a  part  of  the  original  plan  of  the 
University  and  was  announced  in  its  first  Register  in 
1866.  More  definite  organization  of  the  work  along 
lines  that  are  now  generally  accepted  dates  from 
1883.  Since  that  time  the  degrees  of  Master  of  Arts 
and  Master  of  Science  have  been  offered  without 
interruption.  The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  was 
also  announced  for  a  time  and  twice  conferred.  In  the 
middle  nineties  this  degree  was  withdrawn  and 
doctoral  work  not  again  offered  until  1936,  when  it 
was  once  more  authorized  by  the  trustees.  In  the 
same  year  the  Graduate  School  was  organized,  with  a 
graduate  faculty  which  had  full  power  to  enact  the 
necessary  legislation  governing  the  work  of  the 
school.  In  1960  a  program  of  studies  leading  to  the 
degree  of  Doctor  of  Education  was  first  offered.  A 
Doctor  of  Arts  program  was  begun  in  1971. 

The  rules  and  regulations  of  the  faculty  are  devel- 
oped by  a  Graduate  Committee  composed  of  the 
President  or  his  representative,  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School,  and  twelve  elected  members  of  the 
faculty. 

The  Graduate  School,  in  certain  areas,  offers  quali- 
fied students  opportunity  for  intensive  advanced 
study  and  for  specialized  training  in  methods  of  in- 
vestigation and  research,  with  a  view  to  their  develop- 
ment as  scholars  and  independent  investigators.  The 
school  also  aims  to  serve  the  needs  of  teachers  and 
prospective  teachers  in  elementary  and  secondary 
schools  by  providing  opportunities  for  advanced  pro- 
fessional training,  and  by  preparing  them  for  adminis- 
trative positions. 

Major  work  leading  to  the  master's  degree  may  be 
taken  in  the  following  fields:  applied  mathematics, 
applied  mechanics,  biology,  business  and  economics, 
chemical  engineering,  chemistry,  civil  engineering, 
computer  science,  economics,  education,  electrical 
engineering,  English,  geology,  government,  history, 


industrial  engineering,  information  sciences,  inter- 
national relations,  management  science,  mathematics, 
materials,  mechanical  engineering,  metallurgy  and 
materials  science,  modern  foreign  languages  and 
literatures,  physics,  political  science,  psychology,  and 
social  relations.  In  the  fields  of  Greek  and  Latin,  ad- 
vanced degrees  are  not  offered;  but  students  majoring 
in  other  fields  may  take  collateral  work  in  these  fields 
from  the  list  of  courses  acceptable  for  graduate 
credit. 

Work  leading  to  the  doctor's  degree  is  offered  in 
the  following  fields:  applied  mathematics,  applied 
mechanics,  biology,  business  and  industrial  econom- 
ics, chemical  engineering,  chemistry,  civil  engineering, 
economics,  education,  electrical  engineering,  English, 
geology,  government,  history,  industrial  engineering, 
information  sciences,  mathematics,  mechanical  engi- 
neering, metallurgy  and  materials  science,  physics, 
and  psychology. 

Admission  to  Graduate  Standing 

A  graduate  of  an  accredited  college,  university,  or 
technical  institution  is  eligible  for  consideration  for 
admission  to  the  Graduate  School  at  Lehigh  Universi- 
ty. Actual  admission  is  subject  to  enrollment  limita- 
tions in  each  department  and  is  therefore  competi- 
tive. An  application  for  admission  to  the  Graduate 
School  may  be  secured  from  the  Office  of  Admission. 
The  candidate  should  file  this  application  as  far  in 
advance  as  possible  of  the  beginning  of  the  semester 
when  he  wishes  to  undertake  his  graduate  work.  In 
addition  to  the  application  the  candidate  should  also 
request  that  each  institution  of  higher  learning  which 
he  has  attended  send  directly  to  the  Office  of  Ad- 
mission a  transcript  of  his  academic  record.  An  appli- 
cation fee  of  S10  will  be  charged. 

A  prospective  graduate  student  is  invited  to  com- 
municate directly  with  the  chairman  of  the  depart- 
ment in  which  he  is  interested.  If  it  is  convenient  for 
him  to  visit  the  University  prior  to  completing  his 
admission  or  prior  to  registration,  a  consultation  with 
the  chairman  of  the  department  (or  his  representa- 
tive) will  assist  the  department  in  working  out  a 
program  for  the  student  and  will  aid  the  student  by 
giving  him  a  better  understanding  of  the  facilities  and 
opportunities  for  graduate  study  at  the  University. 

The  submission  of  Graduate  Record  Examination 


The  Graduate  School:  Admission     57 


-  by  i  student  applying  foi  admission  is  urged. 
n  I  hi  m. it  ion  about  this  examination,  write  to  the 
itionaJ  Testing  Service,  20  Nassau  St.,  Princeton, 
New  Jersey.)  It  .1  student  is  applying  foi  admission  to 
graduate  work  in  education,  scores  may  be  submitted 
tot  either  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  or  the 
Miller  Analogies  Test.  Candidates  lor  graduate  work 
in  business  administration  may  submit  scores  for  the 
Admissions  Test  for  Graduate  Students  in  Business. 
In  all  three  instances,  test  scores  may  under  certain 
circumstances  be  required. 

Foreign  students  are  required  to  submit  evidence 
of  competence  in  use  of  English.  Tests  such  as  those 
administered  by  the  International  Institute  of  Educa- 
tion or  the  Educational  Testing  Service  arc  suitable 
for  this  purpose. 

Admission  to  graduate  standing  permits  the  stu- 
dent to  take  any  course  for  which  he  has  the  neces- 
sary qualifications.  It  does  not  imply  admission  to 
candidacy  for  a  degree.  Admission  to  candidacy  for 
an  advanced  degree  is  granted  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  set  forth  below  under  degrees. 

A  graduate  student  who  is  absent  from  the  Univer- 
sity tor  a  semester  or  more  must  obtain  the  written 
approval  of  the  chairman  of  his  major  department  in 
order  to  be  readmitted  to  graduate  standing.  If  the 
student  has  not  established  a  major,  he  must  obtain 
the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 

Students  of  Lehigh  University  who  are  within  a 
few  hours  of  meeting  the  requirements  for  the  bache- 
lor's degree  may,  if  given  permission  by  the  Graduate 
Committee,  enroll  for  a  limited  amount  of  work  for 
graduate  credit. 

Resident  Graduate  Student 

A  resident  graduate  student  is  one  whose  primary 
activity  is  work  toward  an  advanced  degree.  He  must 
spend  at  least  20  hours  per  week  on  research  and/or 
course  work  toward  the  degree,  and  he  may  not 
receive  income  from  any  employment  requiring 
services  totaling  more  than  20  hours  per  week. 

A  student  is  recognized  as  a  candidate  for  the  doc- 
toral degree  if  (a)  he  has  completed  at  least  one  year 
as  a  resident  graduate  student  (as  defined  above)  or 
holds  a  master's  degree  or  its  equivalent,  (b)  he  has 
maintained  a  minimum  average  of  3.0  in  his  graduate 
courses,  and  (c)  he  has  formally  notified  the  dean  of 
the  Graduate  School  through  his  department  his  in- 


tention to  studv  loi  ilu-  ,1,,,  toral  degree. 
This  recognition  ol  the  student's  status  as  a 

d iral  candidate  is  not  necessarily  an  assurance  thai 

the  student  will  be  able  to  meet  the  requirements  of 

the  degree. 

Special  Student 

A  student  who  docs  not  wish  to  or  may  not  qualify 
for  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  as  a  graduate 
student  may  apply  to  the  Office  of  Admission  foi 
admission  as  a  special  student.  He  must  hold  a  bacca- 
laureate degree  or  have  equivalent  experience.  He 
may  register  for  courses  up  to  and  including  the 
300-level  at  the  standard  graduate  tuition  rate.  Ad- 
mission depends  on  approval  by  both  the  relevant 
major  department  and  the  Graduate  School  office. 
Status  as  a  special  student  does  not  prohibit  a  later 
application  for  admission  as  a  graduate  student. 

Registration 

Several  days  are  set  aside  for  graduate  registration  just 
prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  semester  as  indicated  in 
the  calendar.  However,  a  student,  once  admitted,  can 
complete  advance  registration  anytime  in  January, 
June,  or  August  as  the  case  may  be,  by  obtaining  a 
registration  ticket  in  the  office  of  the  Registrar  and 
arranging  in  advance  for  an  interview  with  his  advisor. 
Anyone  who  can  register  in  advance  is  urged  to  do  so. 
Normally  students  are  expected  to  complete  their 
registration  before  the  close  of  the  third  day  of  in- 
struction. Registration  after  the  tenth  day  of  instruc- 
tion in  a  regular  semester  or  the  fifth  day  in  a  summer 
session  is  permitted  only  when  the  express  consent  of 
the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  has  been  obtained. 
A  $10  late  registration  fee  will  be  charged.  Unregister- 
ed students  are  not  permitted  to  attend  classes 
beyond  the  10-day  grace  period. 

It  should  be  noted  that  graduate  work  itself  starts 
promptly  at  the  beginning  of  the  term,  and  it  is  fre- 
quently true  that  graduate  courses  can  be  given  only 
if  there  is  a  certain  minimum  demand  for  them.  Delay 
in  enrolling  for  a  given  course  may  therefore  cause 
the  course  to  be  withdrawn. 


58      The  Graduate  School:  Registration 


Tuition  and  Fees 

The  tuition  in  the  Graduate  School  is  $1425  per 
semester  or  SI  19  per  semester  hour  for  1973-74.  A 
listener's  fee  of  SI  19  for  1973-74  is  charged  for  each 
course  audited,  unless  the  student  is  already  paying 
the  full  tuition  fee.  The  maximum  full-time  roster  of 
graduate  courses,  including  audited  courses,  is  15 
semester  hours.  No  exception  to  this  rule  is  made.  All 
students  using  the  resources  of  the  University  must  be 
registered. 

In  addition  to  the  usual  tuition  an  intern  student  is 
required  to  pay  a  S400  per  year  intern  fee. 

Bills  are  paid  at  the  Bursar's  Office.  If  desired, 
payment  may  be  made  in  installments:  60  percent  plus 
a  service  charge  of  $3  per  semester,  due  prior  to  regis- 
tration; 20  percent  due  one  month  after  registration; 
20  percent  due  two  months  after  registration.  The  $3 
service  charge  is  not  refundable. 

The  University  will  award  educational  grants  to  all 
qualified  elementary  and  secondary  school  personnel 
enrolled  in  the  Graduate  School.  These  grants  for 
teachers,  either  in  full-time  service  or  on  leave  from 
such  appointment,  amount  to  S660  per  semester  or 
S55  per  semester  hour  in  1973-74. 

To  qualify  for  the  doctorate,  all  students  must  pay 
tuition  fees  equivalent  to  three  full  years  (90  credit 
hours)  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree  or  two  full  years 
(60  credit  hours)  beyond  the  master's  degree.  Until 
these  fees  are  met,  resident  doctoral  candidates  must 
pay  a  minimum  registration  fee  of  SI, 000  each  semes- 
ter and  summer  period.  Similarly,  part-time  doctoral 
candidates  must  register  for  a  minimum  of  3  credit 
hours  of  courses  or  dissertation  until  the  fees  are  met. 
Thereafter  doctoral  candidacy  must  be  maintained  by 
a  registration  fee  of  S100  per  semester  and  summer 
period  until  work  for  the  degree  is  completed.  How- 
ever, resident  students  who,  during  their  entire  doc- 
toral program,  have  paid  continuously  full  tuition  (or 
10  hours  per  semester  in  the  case  of  TA's  and  RA's) 
will  be  considered  as  having  satisfied  the  tuition  re- 
quirements for  the  doctoral  degree  upon  completion 
of  all  other  degree  requirements. 

Doctoral  candidates  registering  for  dissertation 
should  indicate  credit  hours  corresponding  to  the 
tuition  paid  (calculated  at  $119  per  credit  hour).  This 
procedure  will  assure  that  proper  credit  toward  the 
minimum  tuition  fees  is  recorded.  When  the  sum  of 
course  credits  and  dissertation  credits  rostered 


beyond  the  master's  degree  (or  its  equivalent  of  30 
semester  hours)  reaches  a  total  of  60  semester  hours, 
the  minimum  tuition  fees  will  have  been  met.  The 
Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  should  be  consulted  in 
any  case  where  the  proper  amount  of  the  registration 
fee  is  in  doubt. 

The  fee  for  each  language  examination  required  of 
the  student  by  his  department  is  $8. 

The  fee  for  microfilming  and  binding  of  the 
master's  thesis  is  S15,  the  receipt  for  which  is  pre- 
sented with  the  completed  thesis  to  the  Graduate 
School  Office. 

In  the  case  of  the  doctorate,  the  publication  fee  is 
S35.  If  a  copyright  of  the  dissertation  is  desired,  an 
additional  fee  of  $15  is  required. 

Identification  cards,  entitling  the  holder  to  attend 
the  various  campus  events,  are  issued  to  graduate 
students  at  a  fee  of  $10  for  the  full  academic  year, 
and  $5  for  the  period  from  January  to  June.  Students 
registered  for  9  credit  hours  or  more  are  entitled  to 
an  identification  card  without  charge. 

Transcripts 

Each  student  is  entitled  to  one  copy  of  his  record  free 
of  charge.  This  can  be  an  official  or  unofficial  tran- 
script. Unofficial  copies  are  released  to  the  student; 
official  copies  are  sent  directly  to  the  educational 
institution,  company,  state  board,  etc.,  as  the  circum- 
stances may  require.  After  the  first  copy  is  released  a 
fee  of  SI  is  assessed  for  each  subsequent  copy. 

Refunds 

A  graduate  student  who  formally  withdraws  from  the 
University  or  who,  o'n  the  advice  of  his  department 
chairman  and  with  the  approval  of  the  dean,  finds  it 
necessary  to  reduce  his  roster  below  twelve  hours  in 
any  regular  semester,  may  qualify  for  a  tuition  re- 
fund. The  amount  of  refund  is  equal  to  the  tuition 
paid  for  the  course  or  courses  being  dropped  less  15 
percent  of  this  tuition  for  each  full  or  fractional  week 
of  the  semester  computed  from  the  date  of  the  begin- 
ning of  instruction  in  courses  open  to  graduate  stu- 
dents. There  is  no  refund  for  semester  hours  dropped 
if  the  remaining  roster  totals  12  or  more  hours. 

A  summer  session  student  who  formally  withdraws 
from  the  University  is  entitled  to  receive  a  refund  of 
his  total  tuition  less  $5  for  each  credit  hour  for  which 


The  Graduate  School:  Tuition  and  Fees     59 


he  is  registered  and  less  .1  deduction  foi  each  day  ol 
regulai  instruction  "I  -I  percent  ol  the  total  tuition 
paid  computed  from  the  lust  da)  ol  instrut  tion  in 
the  session, 

In  the  event  ol  the  death  ol  .1  student  or  his  in- 
voluntary induction  into  the  armed  forces,  fees  will 
be  refunded  in  proportion  to  the  fraction  ol  the 
semester  remaining  .it  the  time  ol  the  student's  de  ith 
or  induction, 

A  student  who  is  suspended  or  expelled  from  the 
University  is  not  entitled  to  any  refunds. 

Degrees 

The  maximum  roster  ot  a  full-time  graduate  student 
is  fifteen  semester  liours.  Graduate  students  who  are 
employed  elsewhere  and  can  give  only  part  of  tlieir 
time  to  graduate  work  must  restrict  the  size  of  their 
rosters  accordingly. 

Graduate  students  who  hold  University  appoint- 
ments of  any  kind  are  permitted  to  enroll  for  only  a 
limited  amount  of  graduate  work.  Full-time  em- 
ployees of  the  University  may  not  take  more  than  six 
semester  liours  ot  graduate  work  in  any  one  semester; 
half-time  employees  may  not  take  more  than  ten 
semester  liours. 

With  the  consent  of  the  chairman  of  his  major 
department  and  of  the  chairman  of  the  department 
concerned,  a  graduate  student  may  be  admitted  as  a 
regular  listener  in  one  or  more  courses,  which 
course(s)  shall  be  outside  his  approved  program  of 
studies  for  the  degree,  provided  that  the  total  number 
of  hours  in  which  he  is  registered  and  in  which  he  is  a 
listener  shall  not  exceed  the  limits  set  forth  above.  In 
no  case  shall  a  student  who  has  attended  a  course  as  a 
listener  be  given  an  examination  for  credit  in  that 
course.  A  listener's  fee  is  charged  for  each  course 
audited. 

Students  desiring  to  qualify  for  graduate  degrees  in 
the  minimum  time  should  have  pursued  an  under- 
graduate major  in  the  subject  equivalent  to  that  offer- 
ed at  Lehigh.  At  the  discretion  of  the  chairman  of  the 
department,  a  limited  number  of  credits  in  closely 
allied  subjects  may  be  accepted  in  lieu  of  courses  in 
the  undergraduate  major.  Those  with  undergraduate 
deficiencies  who  are  admitted  because  they  are  other- 
wise well-qualified  will  be  expected  to  make  up  such 
deficiencies  in  addition  to  satisfying  the  minimum 
requirement  for  the  degree  sought. 


I  iling  "i  \pplii  ation  foi  Degree 

Candidates  for  degrees  t<>  be  conferred  in  M.iv  file 
with  the  Registrar,  on  .1  form  provided  for  the  put 
pose,  on  in  befi  ire  April  I .  .1  writt  n  ni  il  ii  1  of  their 
1  andidat  y;  candidates  for  degrees  to  be  conferred  in 
October  file  .1  similar  notice  on  or  before  September 
10;  candidates  for  degrees  conferred  in  December 
must  file  on  or  before  December  I.  Failure  to  file 
such  notice  by  the  dates  mentioned  may  bar  the 
candidate  from  receiving  the  degree  at  the  ensuing 
graduation  exercises.  If  a  late  application  can  be 
accepted,  the  candidate  is  assessed  a  $10  fee  to  help 
cover  the  extra  cost  of  processing. 

In  addition  to  the  degree  requirements  set  forth 
below,  there  may  be  departmental  requirements  in 
the  field  of  the  major.  These  requirements  appear  in 
the  separate  departmental  statements  in  the  section, 
description  of  courses. 

Master's  Degrees 

The  master's  degree  is  granted  to  properly  qualified 
students  who  complete  satisfactorily  at  least  two  full 
semesters  of  advanced  work.  In  meeting  the  require- 
ments for  the  degree,  the  student  must  comply  with 
the  following  regulations. 

Each  candidate  for  the  master's  degree  must  sub- 
mit for  the  approval  of  the  Graduate  Committee  the 
program  of  courses  he  proposes  to  take  to  satisfy  the 
requirements.  This  program  must  have  the  approval 
of  the  chairman  of  the  student's  major  department, 
and  all  courses  included  which  are  not  offered  by  the 
student's  major  department  must  also  be  approved  by 
the  chairman  of  the  departments  concerned.  The 
program  should  be  submitted  as  soon  as  possible  after 
completion  of  15  credits  toward  the  degree.  Approval 
of  the  program  by  the  Graduate  Committee  signifies 
that  the  student  has  formally  been  admitted  to  candi- 
dacy for  the  degree. 

The  minimum  program  for  the  master's  degree 
must  include: 

a.  Not  less  than  thirty  semester  hours  of  graduate 
work; 

b.  Not  less  than  eighteen  hours  of  "400"  level 
course  work; 

c.  Not  less  than  eighteen  hours  in  the  major  field; 

d.  Not  less  than  fifteen  hours  of  "400"  courses  in 
the  major  field. 


60      The  Graduate  School:  Degrees 


The  eighteen  hours  required  in  the  major  field  are 
ordinarily  taken  in  one  department.  Specific  excep- 
tions to  this  rule  are  mentioned  in  the  departmental 
statements  at  the  head  of  course  listings.  The  remain- 
ing twelve  hours  of  a  minimum  program,  or  any  part 
of  them,  may  also  be  taken  in  the  major  department; 
or  they  may  be  taken  in  any  other  field  in  which 
courses  for  graduate  credit  are  offered,  as  the  needs 
or  interests  of  the  student  may  indicate,  subject  to 
the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  the  major  depart- 
ment. In  all  cases,  the  work  for  the  master's  degree 
must  be  taken  under  at  least  two  instructors. 

Graduate  students  registered  in  "200"  and  "300" 
courses  may  be  assigned  additional  work  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  instructor. 

In  order  to  qualify  for  the  master's  degree,  candi- 
dates will  be  required  to  submit  a  thesis  or  a  report 
based  on  a  research  course  of  at  least  3  credit  hours, 
or  to  pass  a  comprehensive  examination  given  by  the 
major  department.  The  department  will  specify  which 
of  these  requirements  applies,  and  may  specify  both. 
If  required,  the  thesis  shall  not  count  for  more  than 
six  semester  hours.  The  credit  to  be  allowed  shall  be 
fixed  by  the  chairman  of  the  major  department.  One 
unbound  typewritten  copy  of  the  thesis,  approved  by 
the  faculty  members  under  whom  the  work  was  done 
and  by  the  chairman  of  the  major  department,  shall 
be  placed  in  the  hands  of  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate 
School  with  a  receipt  for  SI 5. 00  to  cover  the  fee  for 
microfilming  at  least  three  weeks  before  the  day  on 
which  the  degree  is  to  be  conferred.  Information  as  to 
the  form  in  which  the  thesis  must  be  presented  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the  Graduate  School. 

The  master's  degree  is  not  granted  unless  the  can- 
didate has  earned  the  grades  "A"  or  "B"  in  at  least 
eighteen  hours  of  work  of  his  program.  No  course  in 
which  the  grade  earned  is  less  than  "C"  is  credited 
toward  the  degree.  A  student  who  receives  more  than 
four  grades  below  "B"  in  courses  numbered  "200"  or 
higher  becomes  ineligible  to  qualify  for  the  master's 
degree  or  to  register  for  any  other  "400"  courses. 

All  work  which  is  to  be  credited  toward  a  master's 
degree  must  normally  be  done  in  attendance  at 
Lehigh  University,  and  must  be  completed  within  a 
six-year  period. 

When  all  requirements  have  been  met,  the  candi- 
date is  recommended  by  the  faculty  to  the  trustees 
for  the  master's  degree  appropriate  to  the  work 
pursued. 


Doctor  of  Philosophy 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  is  conferred  on 
candidates  who  have  demonstrated  general  profi- 
ciency and  high  attainment  in  a  special  field  of  know- 
ledge and  capacity  to  carry  on  independent  investiga- 
tion in  that  field  as  evidenced  by  the  presentation  of 
an  acceptable  dissertation  embodying  the  results  of 
original  research.  The  requirements  for  the  degrees 
are  more  specifically  set  forth  in  the  following  regula- 
tions. 

Candidacy 

Time  Requirements.  A  candidate  ordinarily  is  ex- 
pected to  devote  three  or  more  academic  years  to 
graduate  study.  In  no  case  is  the  degree  awarded  to 
one  who  has  spent  less  than  two  full  academic  years 
in  graduate  work.  Study  for  any  specified  period  of 
time,  however,  is  not  in  itself  regarded  as  sufficient 
ground  for  awarding  of  the  degree. 

Graduate  work  done  in  residence  at  other  institu- 
tions will  be  accepted  in  partial  fulfillment  of  the 
time  requirements,  provided  such  work  is  approved 
by  the  Graduate  Committee  and  by  the  departments 
concerned. 

Work  of  fragmentary  character  scattered  over  a 
long  period  of  years,  or  work  completed  many  years 
before  the  student  becomes  a  candidate  for  the 
degree,  is  subject  to  special  review  by  the  Graduate 
Committee.  The  extent  to  which  such  work  may  be 
credited  towards  the  fulfillment  of  the  time  require- 
ments will  be  decided  by  the  committee.  All  post- 
baccalaureate  work  submitted  in  a  program  for  the 
Ph.D.  degree  must  be  completed  within  a  ten-year 
period.  Candidates  entering  the  doctoral  program 
with  a  master's  degree  from  another  institution  or 
after  a  lapse  of  several  years  must  complete  work 
within  a  five-year  period. 

Residence  Requirements.  A  candidate  for  the  degree 
must  complete  at  least  one  full  academic  year  of  resi- 
dent graduate  study  at  Lehigh  University.  The  candi- 
date is  required  to  maintain  continuous  registration 
until  he  completes  all  requirements  for  the  degree, 
including  the  semester  in  which  the  degree  is  granted. 
Approval  of  the  Doctoral  Program.  Candidates  for  the 
doctorate  are  accepted  in  a  limited  number  of  depart- 
ments only,  and  a  department  may  limit  the  number 
of  candidates  accepted  in  any  year.  In  passing  upon  a 
student's  program,  the  committee  will  take  into  con- 


The  Graduate  School:  Degrees     61 


sideration  the  applicant's  general  education,  .is  well  .is 
his  special  qualifications  for  work  in  his  chosen  field, 
i  applicant  is  notified  by  the  Dean  oi  the  ( Iradu- 
ate  School,  in  writing,  ol  the  action  ol  the  committee 
upon  his  application. 

Tin-  student  and  liis  faculty  .idvisor  arc  expei  ted 
to  initiate  steps  lor  approval  of  the  student's  program 
in  the  first  semester  following  completion  of  30  hours 
oi  graduate  credit.  The  department  will  determine  by 
examinations  or  other  credentials  whether  the  stu- 
dent is  qualified.  Application  should  be  submitted  to 
the  Graduate  Committee  not  later  than  one  year  after 
completion  of  the  master's  degree  or  its  equivalent. 
Information  on  the  procedure  to  be  followed  can  be 
obtained  at  the  Graduate  School  Office. 

The  application  of  a  foreign  student  must  be  ac- 
companied by  a  statement  trom  the  department  in 
which  he  intends  to  specialize,  certifying  that  he  has  a 
satisfactory  command  of  English. 

A  special  committee  is  formed  to  guide  the  stu- 
dent in  his  doctoral  program.  The  student  should 
consult  with  his  advisor  on  the  naming  of  the  com- 
mittee and  the  preparation  of  the  application  as  early 
as  possible  after  he  has  passed  his  qualifying  examina- 
tions or  has  been  accepted  by  the  department  to 
pursue  the  degree.  The  committee  is  charged  with  the 
responsibilities  of  assisting  the  student  and  the  ad- 
visor in  formulating  a  course  of  study  and  preparing  a 
suitable  proposal  for  his  dissertation,  of  overseeing 
the  progress  of  the  student  in  his  research,  and  of 
assessing  the  final  dissertation.  Four  members  are 
normally  appointed,  at  least  one  of  them  from  out- 
side the  department.  The  membership  of  the  com- 
mittee is  approved  by  the  Graduate  Committee. 
Plan  of  Work.  Preparation  for  the  degree  is  based  on 
the  study  of  a  major  subject  to  which  one  or  two 
minors  may  be  added.  The  program  of  work,  to  be 
formulated  by  the  candidate,  his  special  committee, 
and  the  chairman  of  his  major  department,  should  be 
planned  to  lead  to  a  general  mastery  of  the  major 
field  and  to  a  significant  grasp  of  any  minor  that  may 
be  added. 

While  there  is  no  definite  requirement  as  to  the 
number  of  courses  to  be  taken,  two  years  devoted  to 
formal  courses  is  customary. 

Language  Requirements.  Language  requirements  for 
the  Doctor  of  Philosophy  degree  are  the  option  of, 
and  in  the  jurisdiction  of,  the  candidate's  major  de- 


partment. They  are  n<>t  .1  University  requirement  foi 
the  degree.  Each  major  department  shall  decide  which 
languages,  it  any,  shall  form  .1  part  ol  each  candidate's 
doctoral  program 

Language  examinations  are  the  responsibility  of  a 
committee  consisting  of  representatives  of  the  langu- 
age department  concerned  and  ol  the  candidate's 
major  department.  Fee  for  each  examination  is  $8. 

Permission  to  take  the  language  examinations  does 
not  imply  admission  to  candidacy  tor  the  degree. 

Examinations  and  Dissertation 

General  Examination.  The  general  examinations  for 
the  doctorate  are  designed  to  test  both  the  student's 
capacity  and  his  proficiency  in  his  field  of  study.  The 
examinations  are  not  necessarily  confined  to  the  con- 
tent of  courses  that  have  been  taken  at  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity or  elsewhere.  They  are  held  not  later  than 
seven  months  prior  to  the  time  when  the  candidate 
plans  to  receive  the  degree.  The  student's  special  com- 
mittee is  in  charge  of  the  examination,  which  may  be 
both  written  and  oral. 

Should  a  candidate  fail  in  any  part  of  the  general 
examinations  he  may  be  permitted  by  the  Graduate 
Committee  to  present  himself  for  a  second  examina- 
tion not  earlier  than  five  months  after  the  first.  If  the 
results  of  the  second  trial  are  also  unsatisfactory  no 
further  examination  is  set. 

Dissertation.  The  candidate  is  required  to  present  a 
dissertation  prepared  under  the  general  direction  of  a 
professor  at  Lehigh  University.  The  dissertation  shall 
treat  a  topic  related  to  the  candidate's  major  subject, 
embody  the  results  of  original  research,  give  evidence 
of  high  scholarship,  and  constitute  a  contribution  of 
knowledge.  It  must  be  approved  by  the  professor 
under  whose  direction  it  was  written,  by  the  candi- 
date's special  committee,  and  by  the  Graduate  Com- 
mittee. A  copy  bearing  written  approval  of  the  pro- 
fessor in  charge  must  be  presented  to  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School  for  transmission  to  the  student's 
special  committee  not  later  than  April  15,  if  the  de- 
gree is  to  be  conferred  in  May;  not  later  than  Septem- 
ber 1,  if  the  degree  is  to  be  conferred  in  October,  not 
later  than  November  9  if  the  degree  is  to  be  conferred 
in  January. 

In  order  that  the  student  receive  proper  credit  for 
tuition  payments  toward  the  miminum  required, 


62      Tlie  Graduate  School:  Degrees 


registration  for  dissertation  should  indicate  the  semes- 
ter hours  covered  by  the  payment. 

The  candidate  shall  deposit  with  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School,  at  least  two  weeks  before  the 
degree  is  to  be  conferred:  (1)  the  original  or  perfect 
black  and  white  typescript  of  the  accepted  disserta- 
tion, unbound,  in  standard  form,  and  suitable  for 
microfilming;  (2)  the  first  carbon  copy  of  the  accept- 
ed dissertation;  (3)  three  copies  of  an  abstract  of  the 
dissertation,  not  exceeding  600  words,  accompanied 
by  a  letter  from  the  dissertation  supervisor  stating 
that  the  abstract  is  acceptable  and  suitable  for  publi- 
cation; (4)  a  receipt  from  the  Bursar  for  the  payment 
of  the  publication  fee  of  thirty-five  dollars  ($35).  The 
publication  fee  is  used  by  the  University  to  defray  the 
cost  of  publishing  the  dissertation  on  microfilm 
(through  University  Microfilms)  and  the  abstract  in 
Dissertation  Abstracts.  If  the  candidate  wishes  to 
copyright  his  dissertation,  he  may  do  so  by  paying 
the  copyright  fee  of  S15  to  the  Bursar  at  the  time  the 
publication  fee  is  paid.  Arrangements  for  the  copy- 
right in  the  author's  name  will  then  be  made  by  the 
University  through  University  Microfilms. 
Final  Examination.  After  the  rough  draft  of  the  dis- 
sertation has  been  returned  from  the  Graduate 
School,  the  student  should  distribute  copies  to  the 
members  of  the  special  committee.  He  will  arrange  a 
suitable  date  for  the  defense  of  his  dissertation  allow- 
ing time  for  the  special  committee  to  examine  the 
draft.  The  date  is  sent  to  the  Graduate  School  Office 
for  information.  The  examination  is  open  to  the 
public,  and  the  department  may  enlarge  the  member- 
ship of  the  official  examining  committee  as  it  sees  fit. 

Conferring  of  Degree  in  Absentia 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  will  not  be  con- 
ferred in  absentia  unless  the  candidate  is  excused  by 
the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 

Doctor  of  Arts 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Arts  is  offered  in  the  fields 
of  business  and  economics,  government,  and  psychol- 
ogy for  students  who  wish  to  prepare  for  a  career  of 
college  teaching  in  one  of  those  fields.  In  every 
respect  admission  standards  will  be  equal  to  those  for 
the  Ph.D.  programs,  and  the  D.A.  programs  have  been 
developed  in  accordance  with  guidelines  issued  by  the 


Council  of  Graduate  Schools. 

The  requirements  for  the  D.A.  degree  parallel 
those  for  the  Ph.D.  with  the  following  exceptions:  I] ) 
a  broader  distribution  of  graduate  courses  in  the  field, 
(2)  a  minor  area  of  study  for  those  students  wishing 
bidisciplinary  preparation  for  two-year  college  teach- 
ing, (3)  course  work  and  training  in  interpersonal 
awareness,  (4)  a  supervised  internship  in  college 
teaching,  and  (5)  a  project  appropriate  to  college 
teaching  in  the  field  instead  of  a  dissertation. 

Doctor  of  Education 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Education  is  intended  for  a 
limited  number  of  carefully  selected  students  engaged 
in  the  fields  of  administration,  counseling,  founda- 
tions, reading,  measurement  and  research,  and  teach- 
ing. Successful  professional  experience  is  required  for 
admission  to  candidacy  for  this  degree. 

In  general,  requirements  for  the  Ed.D.  degree 
parallel  those  already  stated  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  with 
the  exception  of  the  following:  (a)  language  examina- 
tions are  not  required,  (b)  a  statistics  competency 
examination  is  required,  (c)  a  residence  requirement 
which  may  be  satisfied  by  an  academic  year  of  full- 
time  study  or  a  semester  of  full-time  study  preceded 
or  followed  by  a  summer  session  in  which  12  semes- 
ter hours  of  credit  are  earned.  There  is  enough  flexi- 
bility in.  this  program  to  permit  certain  modifications 
appropriate  to  the  specific  objectives  and  background 
of  the  doctoral  student.  For  more  detailed  informa- 
tion, consult  the  Dean  of  the  School  of  Education, 
and  see  the  section  on  the  School  of  Education  in  this 
catalog. 

Postdoctoral  Work 

Students  who  have  completed  the  requirements  for 
the  doctorate  may  enroll  for  postdoctoral  individual- 
ized study  under  the  guidance  of  selected  members  of 
the  faculty.  Such  a  program  of  study  contemplates  a 
broad  educational  and  research  development  at  ad- 
vanced and  mature  levels,  and  provides  opportunities 
to  prepare  for  specific  positions.  A  formal  certifica- 
tion of  such  work  as  may  be  accomplished  by  the 
student  will  be  made. 


The  Graduate  School:  Degrees     63 


Resources  l<>i  Graduate  Study 

Since  the  University  began  in  1961  to  encourage  the 
growth  oi  its  Graduate  School,  resources  available  for 
gr.ulii.iti-  study  have  greatly  increased.  Considering 
the  graduate  program  to  be  composed  of  formal 
course  instruction  and  .1  research  experience,  the  Uni- 
versity has  developed  means  to  enable  students  fruit- 
tullv  to  pursue  such  work. 

Research  provides  a  principal  method  of  training 
and  education  at  an  advanced  level  by  concentrated 
study  on  a  specific  problem  under  close  direction  of 
senior  faculty  members.  Such  study  in  theory  and 
experiment  assures  that  classroom  teaching  is  up-to- 
date;  thus  research,  classroom,  and  laboratory  instruc- 
tion complement  each  other. 

Lehigh  has  numerous  special  laboratories  to  facili- 
tate such  research  in  the  sciences  and  engineering. 
These  laboratories  are  located  in  Fritz  Laboratory, 
which  houses  the  civil  engineering  department  and 
the  world's  second  largest  universal  hydraulic  testing 
machine:  Whitakcr  Laboratory,  completed  in  1965 
for  the  chemical  and  metallurgical  engineering  depart- 
ments; Sinclair  Laboratory,  completed  in  1970,  for 
surface  chemistry  and  coatings  research;  Packard 
Laboratory,  for  electrical  engineering,  mechanical 
engineering,  mechanics,  and  the  Computing  Center, 
the  most  used  laboratory  on  campus;  Williams  Hall, 
tor  biology,  geological  sciences,  psychology,  and  the 
bioelectric  research  laboratory;  the  Physics  Building; 
the  Chemistry  Building,  with  the  Chandler  and 
Ullmann  Laboratories;  and  Coxe  Laboratory,  for 
metallurgy  and  the  electronic  microscopy  laboratory. 

The  University's  Linderman  Library  houses  more 
than  400,000  volumes  in  the  humanities  and  social 
sciences,  including  the  rare  book  collection.  The  Mart 
Science  and  Engineering  Library  houses  100,000 
volumes  and  serves  the  fields  of  engineering,  mathe- 
matics and  the  natural  and  physical  sciences.  Re- 
sources of  other  libraries  are  available  through  the 
nation-wide  Interlibrary  Loan  system. 

Under  certain  programs,  Lehigh  graduate  students 
have  access  to  facilities  at  various  industries  in  the 
area.  Also,  some  of  the  major  libraries  of  the  country 
are  within  an  hour's  drive. 

The  University's  policy  is  to  make  these  resources 
available  to  all  faculty  and  students,  including  under- 
graduates, but  graduate  students  dominate  student 
usage  of  the  more  sophisticated  laboratory  facilities 


and  library  holdings. 

( )ne  111. in  if  est. it  ion  of  tin-  growth  "I  gi.idu.it. 

education  .it  Lehigh  has  been  the  organization  oi 

interdisciplinary  centers  and  interdepartmental  pro- 
jects and  co-operation.  Recent  success  with  mission- 
oriented  research  using  an  interdisciplinary 
approach  — that  is,  scientists  and  engineers  working 
together  on  a  basic  problem— promises  an  interesting 
kind  of  graduate  education.  Lehigh's  interdisciplinary 
centers  offer  an  opportunity  to  implement  this  new 
approach  by  directing  continuous  attention  to  a  given 
group  of  problems,  stimulating  interest  in  their  solu- 
tion, and,  finally,  mobilizing  the  talent  across  campus 
required  for  meaningful  research.  Besides  organizing 
research,  the  centers  create  new  courses  relative  to 
their  research. 

Although  most  graduate  students  find  their  in- 
terests served  by  programs  available  within  a  single 
department,  some  may  elect  to  work  in  interdisciplin- 
ary areas,  which  reach  into  two  or  more  departments. 
Generally,  each  graduate  student's  program  can  be 
designed  to  fulfill  his  own  particular  interests,  subject 
to  the  requirement  that  the  field  thus  defined  has 
scope  and  depth  appropriate  for  an  advanced  degree 
regardless  of  whether  its  boundaries  fall  within  a 
single  department.  Faculty  tend  to  regard  departmen- 
tal organization  more  as  an  administrative  convenience 
than  as  a  limit  to  the  bounds  of  their  scholarly  in- 
terests. 

General  Information 

Campus  Events 

The  cultural  and  athletic  events  of  the  University  are 
open  to  graduate  students  who  request  identification 
cards,  and  recreational  facilities  are  for  the  use  of  all. 

Lehigh  University  provides  a  wide  range  of  social 
and  athletic  activities,  concerts  and  dramatic  produc- 
tions, and  art  and  book  exhibits  for  students  and 
their  guests,  for  faculty,  neighbors,  and  alumni. 

Housing 

Many  resident  graduate  students  live  in  rooms  or 
apartments  near  the  campus,  although  from  time  to 
time  a  limited  number  of  living  accommodations  are 
available  in  the  undergraduate  residence  halls  on  the 
University  campus. 


64      The  Graduate  School:  Resources  for  Graduate  Study 


It  is  anticipated  that  a  University-owned  and 
operated  apartment  complex  for  married  and  gradu- 
ate students  will  open  in  fall,  1973.  This  facility, 
located  in  Saucon  Valley,  will  provide  efficiency,  one 
bedroom,  two  bedroom,  and  three  bedroom  garden 
style  apartments  in  a  rural  setting. 

Inquiries  in  regard  to  accommodations  for  gradu- 
ate students,  either  married  or  single,  can  be  directed 
to  the  Office  of  the  Dean  of  Residence,  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity. 

The  University  cannot  assume  responsibility  for 
locating  housing.  Since  accommodations  are 
scarce,  the  student  is  advised  to  arrange  for  housing 
well  in  advance  of  his  beginning  residence. 

Parking  Regulations 

Graduate  students  are  expected  to  comply  with  cam- 
pus parking  regulations.  They  should  register  their 
automobiles,  and  secure  instructions  from  the  Office 
of  the  Dean  of  Students.  No  fee  is  charged  for  this 
registration. 

Accident  and  Sickness  Reimbursement  Insurance 

The  University  requires  all  resident  graduate  students 
to  carry  the  accident  and  sickness  insurance  coverage 
which  is  available  at  nominal  cost  at  the  Bursar's 
office,  unless  the  student  can  present  evidence  of  an 
approved  coverage  of  his  own. 

All  students  are  required  to  carry  insurance  for 
both  accident  and  illness  either  through  the  Universi- 
ty or  by  other  approved  policies. 

Evening  Classes 

For  the  benefit  of  graduate  students  who  by  reason 
of  employment  in  the  fields  of  teaching  or  industry, 
cannot  attend  classes  during  the  day,  a  certain 
number  of  courses  are  generally  offered  in  the  late 
afternoon,  evening,  and  on  Saturday  morning.  It 
cannot  be  announced  in  advance  which  courses  these 
will  be,  but  a  student  who  is  interested  may  receive 
the  necessary  information  by  communicating,  before 
the  beginning  of  each  semester,  with  the  chairman  of 
the  department  in  the  field  in  which  he  is  interested. 
In  recent  years  evening  and  Saturday  classes  were 
held  in  accounting,  business  law,  chemical  engineer- 
ing, civil  engineering,  economics,  English,  finance, 
government,  history,  industrial  engineering,  interna- 


tional relations,  marketing,  mathematics,  mechanical 
engineering,  metallurgy,  and  psychology.  It  is  antici- 
pated that  in  the  future  courses  will  be  offered  as  the 
demand  warrants. 

Summer  Session 

During  the  summer,  the  University  offers  a  compre- 
hensive program  for  undergraduates  and  graduate 
students  of  two  sessions  of  five  weeks  each.  Many 
workshops  and  special  programs  dealing  with 
extremely  pertinent  topics  such  as  special  engineering 
courses  in  surveying,  reading  and  study  developmen- 
tal laboratory  programs,  overseas  programs,  and  a 
variety  of  other  special  credit  and  non-credit  work- 
shops and  conferences  are  offered.  The  special  in- 
terest programs  are  designed  around  the  interest  of 
the  student  population  which  normally  is  in 
attendance  at  Lehigh. 

In  addition  to  the  summer  session  offerings  at 
Lehigh,  students  are  encouraged  to  study  programs 
offered  at  other  Lehigh  Valley  colleges. 

Financial  Assistance  to  Graduate  Students 

Scholarships  and  Assistantships 

Financial  support  is  available  to  graduate  students 
from  a  number  of  sources  and  in  various  forms- 
scholarships,  fellowships,  traineeships,  teaching  and 
research  appointments.-  The  University  recognizes  the 
high  cost  of  graduate  study,  and  encourages  qualified 
students  to  explore  all  available  sources  of  aid. 
Scholarships.  A  scholarship  is  a  grant  which  covers  or 
helps  to  defray  tuition.  Each  is  awarded  on  the  basis 
of  academic  promise  and  financial  need.  No  services 
are  expected  in  return. 

Fellowships  and  Traineeships.  A  fellowship  or  trainee- 
ship  is  a  grant  to  a  graduate  student  which  covers  his 
tuition  and  provides  an  additional  stipend  to  help 
meet  his  living  expenses. 

The  University  receives  funds  from  individual 
donors  and  corporations  which  provide  for  the  sup- 
port of  several  graduate  students  on  scholarships, 
fellowships  and  traineeships.  In  addition,  government 
agencies  and  foundations  offer  fellowships  and  other 
grants  which  they  award  either  directly  to  outstand- 
ing students  for  use  at  institutions  of  their  choice  or 
to  institutions  for  award  by  them  directly  to  the  stu- 


The  Graduate  School:  Financial  Assistance     65 


dent. 

Appointment  to  these  fellowships  is  foi  .1  period 
oi  two  semesters  and  may  be  renewed,  provided  the 
work  ot  the  holder  is  of  such  quality  as  to  justify 
continuation  oi  financial  aid.  Usually  the  research 

WOrk  win  be  used  foi  thesis  OI  dissertation. 

Annual  stipends  foi  most  fellowships  are  $2400  or 
more,  depending  upon  the  qualifications  of  the  appli- 
cant. Graduate  tellows  pay  the  regular  tuition  fees. 
However,  the  graduate  school,  in  awarding  .1  fellow- 
ship, may  award  at  the  same  time  a  graduate  tuition 
grant.  This  grant  provides  remission  of  all  tuition  fees 
during  the  period  for  which  it  is  awarded. 
Teaching  and  Graduate  Assistantships.  Many  graduate 
students  hold  junior  academic  staff  positions  as  teach- 
ing or  graduate  assistants.  They  assist  the  faculty  in 
grading  undergraduate  quizzes,  instructing  in  the 
classroom  and  laboratory,  and  conducting  recitations. 

The  departments  view  seriously  the  benefits  of  a 
teaching  or  graduate  assistantship  as  a  preparation  for 
a  career  in  university  teaching. 

A  limited  number  of  teaching  assistantships  are 
available  in  applied  mechanics,  biology,  business  ad- 
ministration, chemistry,  English,  education,  geology, 
government,  history,  international  relations,  mathe- 
matics, physics,  political  science,  psychology,  and  in 
chemical,  civil,  electrical,  industrial,  mechanical,  and 
metallurgical  engineering. 

Half-time  assistants  devote  15  to  20  hours  per 
week  to  their  duties  and  receive  $2650  ($2850  after 
one  year  of  satisfactory  service  or  to  holders  of  the 
master's  degree)  for  the  academic  year  plus  remission 
of  tuition  fees.  They  may  take  up  to  10  hours  of 
graduate  work  a  semester  with  remission  of  tuition. 

Appointments  to  assistantships  are  made  upon 
recommendation  of  the  department  chairman.  A  stu- 
dent who  wishes  to  be  considered  for  such  a  position 
should  write  directly  to  his  departmental  chairman. 
Forms  for  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  should 
still  be  filed  with  the  Office  of  Admission. 
Research  Assistantships.  Lehigh  University  cooperates 
with  industrial  concerns,  technical  associations  and 
government  agencies  in  carrying  on  basic  and  applied 
research.  A  number  of  research  assistantships  are 
available  to  qualified  graduate  students  who  assist 
with  these  research  programs. 

Many  students  value  the  opportunity  to  partici- 
pate with  senior  faculty  members  in  an  on-going  pro- 


ject. The  experience  enlivens  theii  course  work  and 
often  determines  one's  thesis  topic.  Usually  a  research 
assistant's  thesis  work  parallels  his  contribution  to  the 
projei  1 . 

Applications  for  research  assistantships  should  be 
accompanied  by  evidence  ol  the  candidate's  qualifica- 
tions lor  the  appointment  sought  and  sent  to  the 
Director  of  the  Ollice  of  Research  or  to  the  chairman 
of  the  department  concerned. 

Research  assistants  receive  stipends  which  vary 
from  $150  to  $550  per  month,  depending  upon  the 
qualifications  and  academic  programs  of  the 
appointee  and  the  time  assigned  to  the  project. 
Appointments  are  generally  for  one  year  and  normal- 
ly are  continued  upon  satisfactory  academic  progress. 
Part-  or  full-time  employment  on  research  projects  is 
frequently  available  during  the  summer  and  entering 
students  who  hold  research  appointments  usually  are 
encouraged  to  begin  their  employment  in  June  or 
July  before  the  commencement  of  formal  graduate 
study  in  the  fall. 

Research  assistants  holding  appointments  for  half- 
time  or  more  pay  a  uniform  tuition  of  $1000  per 
semester  until  they  have  met  the  tuition  requirements 
of  the  degree  for  which  they  are  candidates. 
Applications.  A  student  may  apply  for  any  of  the 
scholarships,  fellowships  or  traineeships  awarded  or 
administered  by  Lehigh  University,  including  those 
granted  by  national  agencies  for  presentation  by  the 
University,  by  completing  the  application  form  avail- 
able from  the  Office  of  Admission.  Each  applicant  is 
automatically  considered  for  all  awards  for  which  he 
is  eligible.  Application  must  be  completed  on  or 
before  February  1.  Each  application  must  be  supple- 
mented by  an  official  transcript  of  the  candidate's 
college  work,  a  statement  concerning  his  practical 
experience,  and  any  other  evidence  of  his  qualifica- 
tions which  he  may  choose  to  submit. 

Scores  made  by  the  applicant  in  the  Graduate 
Record  Examination;  or,  for  those  in  Education,  the 
National  Teachers  Examination;  and  for  M.B.A.  can- 
didates, the  Admissions  Test  for  Graduate  Students  in 
Business,  are  desired  whenever  possible. 

Final  actions  on  applications  are  taken  on  the  re- 
commendation of  departments  to  the  Graduate 
School.  Notices  of  award  are  mailed  in  March.  In 
accordance  with  a  resolution  of  the  Council  of  Gradu- 
ate Schools  in  the  United  States,  to  which  over  180 


66      The  Graduate  School:  Financial  Assistance 


graduate  schools  have  signified  their  assent,  a  student 
has  until  April  15  to  decline  an  award. 

The  holder  of  a  scholarship,  fellowship  or  trainee- 
ship  may  not  accept  any  employment  for  pay  with- 
out written  permission  of  the  Dean. 


The  School  of  Education 


Student  Loan  Funds 

The  University  administers  a  sizeable  loan  fund  pro- 
gram under  which  financial  assistance,  long-term  and 
short-term,  is  available  to  graduate  students.  A  stu- 
dent may  borrow  when  he  has  no  other  support  from 
the  University,  or  to  add  to  his  income  from  a  fellow- 
ship or  assistantship.  To  be  considered,  a  student 
must  provide  complete  details  of  his  budget. 

Information  concerning  application  for  a  loan  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid.  Avail- 
able loan  funds  include: 

National  Direct  Student  Loan  Program  (NDSLP).  As 
federal  funds  are  available  to  the  University,  the 
NDSLP  makes  it  possible  td  borrow  up  to  $2500  each 
year  for  graduate  study  to  a  combined  graduate/ 
undergraduate  total  of  $10,000.  The  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid  is  responsible  for  determining  which  students 
are  eligible  and  the  amount  of  the  loan.  Repayment 
begins  nine  months  after  the  student  ceases  at  least 
half-time  study,  and  may  extend  over  a  ten-year 
period.  Interest  charges  of  three  percent  also  begin  at 
the  start  of  the  repayment  period.  No  payment  is 
required  and  no  interest  is  charged  for  any  period  up 
to  three  years  during  which  the  student  serves  in  the 
Armed  Forces,  Peace  Corps  or  VISTA.  The  program 
also  provides  for  partial  or  total  loan  cancellation  for 
students  who  enter  the  field  of  special  education,  and 
partial  cancellation  for  military  service. 
University  Tuition  Loan  Program  (UTLP).  Loans  are 
made  available  on  the  basis  of  need  to  graduate  stu- 
dents carrying  at  least  a  half-time  academic  load.  In- 
terest charges  of  four  percent  annually  begin  from  the 
date  of  the  note.  Repayment  begins  ninety  days  after 
the  student  ceases  at  least  half-time  study,  at  a  mini- 
mum rate  of  $50  monthly. 


John  A.  Stoops,  Dean 

History  and  Purpose 

The  School  of  Education  was  established  in  1966, 
elevating  it  from  its  former  departmental  status  under 
the  College  of  Arts  and  Science.  The  School  of 
Education  operates  in  conjunction  with  the  Graduate 
School.  Its  administrative  procedures  are  identical  or 
similar  to  those  of  the  Graduate  School  in  regard  to 
admission,  registration,  tuition,  fees,  transcripts,  and 
other  related  matters.  Degree  requirements  are  also 
consistent  with  those  established  by  the  Graduate 
School.  The  School  of  Education  offers  the  Master  of 
Arts  in  Education,  the  Master  of  Education,  the 
Master  of  Science  in  Education,  and  the  Doctor  of 
Education.  Details  regarding  the  specific  regulations 
and  requirements  can  be  found  in  that  section  of  this 
catalog  pertaining  to  the  Graduate  School.  Course 
offerings  and  other  pertinent  data  may  be  found  in 
the  section,  "Description  of  Courses." 

The  school  is  interested  in  the  preparation  of  ele- 
mentary teachers,  secondary  teachers,  community 
college  teachers,  counselors,  school  psychologists, 
administrators,  reading  specialists,  curriculum  special- 
ists, research  specialists,  specialists  in  the  foundations 
of  education,  specialists  in  the  education  of  mentally 
and  emotionally  disturbed  children,  teachers  of 
nurses,  teachers  of  vocational  education  and  teachers 
for  social  restoration  of  potential  delinquents.  The 
Intern  Teaching  Program  is  specifically  designed  for 
qualified  persons  holding  B.A.  degrees  who  wish  to 
enter  the  field  of  teaching.  The  school  is  particularly 
interested  in  established  teachers  who  wish  to  prepare 
for  leadership  responsibility  in  the  schools  through 
preparation  at  the  master's  and  doctorate  levels. 

Two  hundred  nineteen  doctoral  students,  791 
students  engaged  in  MA.  and  M.Ed,  programs,  and 
206  post-master's  degree  students  were  enrolled  in 
the  School  of  Education  in  the  past  academic  year. 

Whereas  graduate  study  in  education  was  once 
undertaken  only  by  those  preparing  for  leadership  in 
the  schools,  it  is  now  a  part  of  the  training  required 


The  School  of  Education     67 


ol  every  qualified  teacher.  In  the  face  ol  this  mourn 
itiii  trend,  1  ehigh  joined  the  Lehigh  Regional  Con- 
sortium, strengthened  its  graduate  program,  and  dis- 
continued profrssion.il  pu-p.ii.it  ion  ol  undergraduate 
students. 

Accordingly,  .1  liltli  yeai  program  is  offered  to 
qualified  holders  oi  II. A.  degrees  who  wish  to  enter 
teaching.  Those  admitted  to  the  program  have  the 
opportunity  to  accomplish  their  professional  training 
and  serve  as  salaried  interns  in  the  public  schools.  At 
the  completion  of  one  or  two  semesters  of  directed 
lull  time  study,  students  may  begin  the  teaching  in- 
ternship. After  the  completion  of  the  fifth -year 
program  and  the  required  semesters  of  intern  teach- 
ing, they  would  ordinarily  have  completed  require- 
ments for  the  Master  of  Arts  (secondary  teachers)  or 
the  Master  of  Education  (elementary  teachers)  de- 
gree. 

For  the  benefit  of  in-service  teachers  many  courses 
are  offered  in  the  evenings  and  on  Saturday  mornings. 
Teachers  of  the  Lehigh  Valley  and  surrounding 
regions  are  encouraged  to  participate  in  the  life  and 
work  of  the  University. 

Programs  ot  Study 

The  School  of  Education  offers  the  Master  of  Arts 
degree,  major  in  Education  with  an  academic  special- 
ty. Candidates  for  this  degree  must  include  in  their 
program  a  minimum  of  twelve  hours  of  graduate 
work  in  an  academic  field.  The  balance  of  the  pro- 
gram is  in  the  foundations  of  education  and  instruc- 
tional process.  The  academic  fields  which  now 
cooperate  with  the  School  of  Education  in  offering 
this  degree  include:  classical  languages,  mathematics, 
English,  modern  foreign  languages,  economics, 
government,  social  relations,  history,  international 
relations,  and  physical  and  natural  sciences. 

Lehigh's  program  of  training  for  advanced  profes- 
sional responsibility  is  planned  in  three  stages.  The 
first  is  represented  in  the  M.Ed..  M.A.,  or  M.S.;  the 
second  exists  in  the  several  specialist  programs;  and 
the  final  stage  is  the  Ed.D. 

The  Master  of  Education  degree  requires,  in  addi- 
tion to  broad  study  of  the  social  foundations  of 
education,  specialization  in  a  professional  field. 
Special  fields  include  elementary  education,  elemen- 
tary administration,  secondary  administration, 
general  administration,  elementary  school  counselors, 


secondary  school  counselors,  school  psychologists, 
spe<  tal  ition,  vocational  education,  and  reading, 

mis  within  the  Secondary  Division  give  opportu- 
nity for  emphasis  in  reading  instruction,  the  teaching 
ol  nurses,  or  social  restoration.  Although  study  at  the 
master's  level  is  intense-  and  specialized,  the  school 
recognizes  that  additional  training  is  needed  for  pro- 
fessional  leadership  in  most  areas.  Therefore,  pro- 
grams designed  for  these  specialists  arc  extended  to 
the  post-master's  level. 

The  Master  of  Science  degree  in  educational 
measurements  and  research,  open  to  both  full-  and 
part-time  students,  is  designed  to  prepare  its  gradu- 
ates for  an  increasing  number  of  challenging  positions 
involving  research,  testing,  and  evaluation  in  school 
districts,  state  departments  of  education,  or  other 
educational  institutions. 

The  Doctor  of  Education  program  provides  for 
major  work  in  five  areas:  (1 )  administration,  (2)  read- 
ing, (3)  educational  foundations,  (4)  counseling,  and 
(5)  educational  measurements  and  research.  Students 
are  screened  for  admission  in  the  fall  and  spring  of 
each  year  and  begin  doctoral  study  the  following 
semester.  Formal  admission  to  the  Ed.D.  program 
usually  occurs  after  the  completion  of  15-30  hours 
beyond  the  master's  level.  When  the  student  has  his 
proposal  accepted  by  the  Graduate  School,  he  be- 
comes eligible  to  take  the  general  examination. 

Divisions 

Division  of  Educational  Administration 

Charles  W.  Guditus,  Director 

Elementary  school  principalship,  secondary  school 
principalship,  school  business  managership,  curricu- 
lum administration,  school  superintendency,  com- 
munity college  teachers. 

Division  of  Counselor  Education 

John  A.  Mierzwa,  Director 

School  psychologist,  counselor,  elementary  school 

counselor,  secondary  school  counselor. 

Division  of  Elementary  Education 

Alfred  J.  Castaldi,  Director 

Elementary  teachers  (interns),  elementary  master 

teachers,  reading,  special  education. 


68     The  School  of  Education 


Division  of  Secondary  Education 

Robert  L.  Leight,  Director 

Secondary  school  teachers  (interns),  secondary 
master  teachers,  educational  foundations,  vocational 
education,  social  restoration. 

Division  of  Educational  Measurements  and  Research 
Paul  VanR.  Miller,  Director 


Interdisciplinary  Graduate 
Programs 


Computer  Science 

An  interdisciplinary  program  is  offered  in  computer 
science  leading  to  the  degree  of  master  of  science.  It 
is  supported  by  departments  of  the  University  with 
considerable  resources  in  the  field  and  an  extensive 
list  of  course  offerings.  These  departments  and  divi- 
sions also  are  active  in  research  related  to  computer 
science: 

1.  In  electrical  engineering,  research  is  underway  in 
equipment  organization,  software  engineering,  coding 
theory,  and  devices  for  digital  systems. 

2.  In  information  sciences,  research  is  conducted 
in  linguistics,  information  retrieval,  and  software  sys- 
tems. 

3.  In  industrial  engineering,  research  is  concerned 
with  operations  research  and  management  systems. 

4.  In  mathematics  research  includes  automata 
theory  and  mechanical  theory -proving. 

The  computer  science  program  is  available  to  stu- 
dents from  many  undergraduate  disciplines.  In  some 
cases  background  courses  may  be  required  to  provide 
necessary  prerequisites.  The  student  should  have  the 
following  preparation: 

1.  Skill  in  programming  in  a  high-level  language, 
and  familiarity  with  a  machine  or  assembly  language. 

2.  Two  years  of  college -level  mathematics. 

While  the  intention  is  to  keep  the  program  as  flexi- 
ble as  possible  to  meet  individual  interests  and  needs, 
the  student  is  normally  expected  to  include  in  his 
program  the  following  core  subjects: 

1.  Mathematical  methods  in  computer  science 

2.  Non-numerical  programming 

3.  Switching  theory 

4.  Data  structures. 

Elective  courses  may  be  chosen  from  one  or  more 
of  the  areas  listed  below: 

1.  Software  and  automata  theory 

2.  Hardware  and  logic  design 

3.  Numerical  analysis 

4.  Linguistics 


Interdisciplinary  Graduate  Programs     69 


5.  Computability 

6.  Applications. 

A  master's  thesis  01  .1  research  course  must  be  in- 
cluded  in  the  program  to  qualify  for  the  degree.  The 
student  must  be  enrolled  tor  administrative  purposes 
in  one  ol  the  following  departments:  electrical  engi 
neering,  industrial  engineering,  information  sciences, 
or  mathematics.  The  program,  however,  is  in  the 
charge  o(  an  interdisciplinary  faculty  committee 
chaired  by  the  dean  of  the  graduate  school. 

Management  Science 

The  industrial  engineering  department  in  conjunction 
with  the  department  of  management  offers  an  inter- 
disciplinary degree  in  Management  Science.  The 
Management  Science  program  is  directed  toward  in- 
tegrating the  scientific  method  with  the  functional 
aspects  of  organizations  by  investigating  the  applica- 
tion of  quantitative  methodology  and  systems  analy- 
sis in  the  context  of  such  areas  as  accounting,  finance, 
marketing,  and  production.  This  integration  will  pro- 
vide the  student  with  a  broader  perspective  toward 
managerial  decision-making  in  private  enterprise 
and/or  public  administration.  Undergraduate  stu- 
dents, with  a  background  in  engineering,  business, 
economics,  mathematics  or  the  physical  sciences,  who 
desire  a  professional  career  as  a  staff  specialist  in 
management  science  will  be  ideal  candidates  for  the 
program.  In  addition,  those  candidates  who  intend  to 
seek  line  manager  positions  would  find  the  manage- 
ment science  background  advantageous  in  dealing 
with  the  increasingly  complex  problems  of  industrial, 
commercial,  and  public  service  organizations. 

The  candidate  is  assumed  to  have  acquired  basic 
competence  in  the  areas  of  accounting,  marketing, 
corporate  finance,  production,  data  processing, 
microeconomics,  linear  algebra,  calculus,  statistics, 
and  introductory  operations  research. 

Required  courses  include: 

1.  Simulation  (I.E.  418) 

2.  Organizational  Behavior  and  Structure  (Mgt. 
321,  I.E.  334,orMgt.  412) 

3.  Management  Science  Project  (Mgt.  [I.E.]  430) 

4.  Nine  hours  of  Quantitative  Methods 

5.  Six  hours  selected  from  a  functional  area. 


The  minimum  program  consists  of  thirty  (30) 
hours  ot  approved  course  work. 

Sample  M.S.  in  Management  Science  Program 

IE  4 1 8  Simulation 

Mgt  321  Organization  Behavior 

IE  430  Management  Science  Project 

IE  311  Decision  Processes 

IE  417  Mathematical  Programming 

Eco  455  Econometric  Models 

IE  325  Production  Inventory  Control 

IE  425  Production  Systems 

Fin  421  Financial  Management 

Fin  431  Advanced  Investment  Analysis  and 
Portfolio  Management 

Applied  Mathematics 

The  Committee  on  Applied  Mathematics  administers 
programs  leading  to  the  degrees  of  Master  of  Science 
and  Doctor  of  Philosophy.  The  programs  leading  to 
these  degrees  are  interdepartmental  and  stress  the 
application  of  mathematics  to  the  physical  and  social 
sciences.  They  provide  a  broad,  rather  than  a  special- 
ized, training  in  these  fields.  The  programs  are  also 
designed  for  candidates  who  have  a  basic  training, 
either  at  the  B.A.  or  M.S.  level,  in  a  field  other  than 
applied  mathematics.  The  committee  encourages  such 
applicants.  The  degrees  will  be  in  applied  mathe- 
matics with  a  minor  in  some  specified  field  of  the 
physical  and  social  sciences. 

A  candidate  for  these  programs  must  have  a  know- 
ledge of  basic  undergraduate  mathematics  which  in- 
cludes linear  algebra  and  differential  equations  (for 
example.  Math.  205).  If  not  taken  previously,  courses 
in  complex  variable  theory  and  partial  differential 
equations,  although  not  prerequisites  for  admission  to 
these  programs,  must  be  added  to  the  student's 
course  requirements. 

All  students  in  the  Ph.D.  program  are  required  to 
pass  a  qualifying  examination  before  the  end  of  their 
fifth  semester  (not  including  summer  session).  For 
the  Master  of  Science  degree,  a  thesis  is  required  in 
addition  to  the  course  requirements.  M.S.  candidates 
can  enter  the  Ph.D.  program  after  completing  all 
course  requirements  (exclusive  of  thesis).  The  date  of 
the  qualifying  examination  for  a  student  entering  the 
program  with  an  M.S.  degree— not  necessarily  in 


70     Interdisciplinary  Graduate  Programs 


applied  mathematics— will  be  determined  on 
admission. 

Several  types  of  programs  which  will.be  available 
to  the  student  are  listed  below.  These  programs  are 
not  the  only  possible  ones.  Others  can  be  arranged 
with  the  consent  of  the  committee. 

Core  Courses 

Math  320,  322,  450 

ChE  462 

(Physics  428  and  429  may  be  substituted  for 

Math.  320,  322) 

Options 

1.  Engineering  Sciences 

Required: 
Mech  450 
Phys471 

Electives: 
Math  405 

Mech  409,  421,  424,  458,  459 
CE459 

EE  350, 409, 457 
Phys369,442 
Geol  301 
Biol  402 

2.  Econometrics 

Required: 

Eco  206  or  435,  316  or  436,  351 

Electives: 

Math  309,  334 

Eco  453,  455,456 

IE  416,  418,  425,  426,  427,  429,  311 

3.  Applied  Analysis 

Required: 

Math  309,  350 
Mech  450, 451 

Electives: 

To  be  chosen  from  lists  under  Options  1  and  2. 


Research  Centers  and 
Organizations 


Currently,  nine  interdisciplinary  research  centers  and 
five  institutes  have  been  established  at  Lehigh  Univer- 
sity to  assist  the  academic  departments  in  developing 
the  full  research  and  advanced  education  potential  of 
the  University  in  special  areas.  The  centers  and  insti- 
tutes represent  research  thrusts  based  on  the  capabili- 
ties and  interests  of  the  faculty  at  Lehigh.  Frequent- 
ly, they  relate  to  the  broad -based  research  needs  of 
government,  industry  and  the  social  community. 

The  goal  is  to  provide  an  effective  interdisciplinary 
framework  for  programs  involving  faculty  members 
and  graduate  students  interested  in  combining  tradi- 
tional course  programs  with  an  interdisciplinary  re- 
search experience. 

The  research  centers,  institutes,  and  research  re- 
lated organizations  are  administratively  responsible  to 
the  Office  of  the  Vice  President— Research. 

Research  Centers 

Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics  was 
established  in  the  fall  of  1965.  The  purpose  of  the 
center  is  to  foster  interdisciplinary  research  related  to 
the  application  of  mathematics,  to  draw  on  other 
disciplines  for  pertinent  mathematical  problems,  and 
to  encourage  the  development  of  advanced  courses  in 
the  application  of  mathematics. 

The  center  surveys  the  need  for  courses  in  the 
application  of  mathematics  and  is  concerned  both 
with  the  design  of  new  courses  and  the  reorganization 
of  existing  courses  so  that  these  needs  may  be  better 
served. 

Research  Activities 

Research  programs  are  currently  in  progress  in  the 
center  in  the  areas  of  non-linear  continuum  mechan- 
ics, the  propagation  of  waves  in  non-linear  media, 
variational  calculus,  numerical  analysis  and  probabili- 
ty and  statistics. 


Research  Centers  and  Organizations      71 


The  program  on  non  linear  continuum  mechani 
includes  fundamental  studies  in  the  formulation  ol 
continuum  theories,  the  study  "I  anomalous  flow 

phenomena  in  viscoelastic  fluids,  the  study  of  finite 
elastic  deformations  and  stability,  and  the  thermo- 
mechanics  ol  materials  in  which  irreversible  processes 
take  place  and  long  range  forces  may  be  present. 

Tlie  program  on  non-linear  wave  propagation  in- 
cludes luiulament.il  mathematical  studies  of  the  prop- 
agation ol  both  stress  and  electromagnetic  waves  in 
non-linear  media  and  the  application  of  these  studies 
in  a  number  ol  areas  of  physics.  Among  the  areas 
currently  being  studied  are  the  propagation  of  explo- 
sive waves  in  laminated  media,  the  formation  of 
severe  storms,  the  formation  of  tidal  waves  and  their 
modification  by  ocean  and  shore  topography,  and  the 
generation  of  harmonics  in  high  intensity  light  beams, 
such  as  those  produced  by  lasers. 

Both  the  work  on  variational  calculus  and  that  on 
numerical  analysis  are  mainly  directed  to  the  solution 
of  non-linear  elliptic  differential  equations. 

The  work  on  probability  and  statistics  is  mainly  in 
the  area  of  time  series  analyses. 

Edit ca tio rial  Oppo rtun ities 

Through  the  Committee  on  Applied  Mathematics  (see 
page  70),  personnel  of  the  center  administer  an  inter- 
disciplinary program  leading  to  the  degrees  of  Master 
of  Science  and  Doctor  of  Philosophy.  These  programs 
are  interdepartmental  and  stress  the  application  of 
mathematics  to  the  physical  and  social  sciences. 

For  further  information,  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Ronald  S.  Rivlin. 

Computing  Center 

Background  and  Purpose 

With  a  long  heritage  of  teaching  and  research  in  the 
engineering  and  science  disciplines,  Lehigh  has  made 
extensive  use  of  computers  for  more  than  a  decade. 
In  1966,  the  need  was  recognized  for  an  independent 
organization  serving  the  diverse  needs  of  the  academic 
community  and  the  Computing  Center  was  formed. 
Today  the  center  is  charged  with  the  responsibility  of 
serving  existing  requirements  while  anticipating  and 
preparing  for  the  future  requirements  of  its  user  com- 
munity. 

Located  in  Packard  Laboratory,  the  Computing 


i  serves  as  .1  laboratory  foi  departmental  courses 

ami  research  in  computer  theory  and  applications, 
including  developmental  programs.   The  center  also 
provides  computer  services  to  all  departments  and 
centers  of  the  University  for  solution  of  instructional, 
research,  and  administrative  problems. 

In  the  summer  of  1968,  the  center  installed  a  Con- 
trol Data  Corporation  6400  computing  system.  This 
system  consists  of  65,536  (60  bits  each)  words  of 
central  memory,  ten  peripheral  and  control  proces- 
sors, each  with  4096  words  ( 1  2  bits  each)  of  memory, 
approximately  1  billion  characters  of  disk  storage,  4 
magnetic  tape  units,  2-1200  line-pcr-minute  printers, 
a  1200  card-per-minutc  card  reader,  2  incremental 
plotters,  and  a  communications  computer  capable  of 
supporting  a  wide  variety  of  remote  entry  and  display 
terminals  and  teletypes.  The  principal  programming 
languages  used  with  the  large  library  of  programs  are 
FORTRAN  IV,  FORTRAN  EXTENDED,  COBOL, 
BASIC,  and  COMPASS  (assembler).  A  Users  Area  is 
provided  containing  teletypes,  key-punch  machines, 
and  reference  materials. 

Research  Activities 

To  preserve  its  role  of  impartial  support  for  all  users, 
the  center  does  not  engage  in  primary  research.  It  has, 
from  time  to  time,  conducted  research-related  activi- 
ties on  its  own  or  in  cooperation  with  academic  de- 
partments or  research  centers.  Its  Computing  Associ- 
ates Program,  wherein  the  center  provides  the 
mechanism  for  industry  and  government  to  work 
with  University  faculty  in  the  identification  and  solu- 
tion of  computer-related  problems,  is  a  good  example 
of  such  an  on-going  cooperative  activity. 

The  center  is  funded  by  the  National  Science 
Foundation  as  the  lead  institution  of  a  regional, 
educational  computing  network.  Currently,  six  col- 
leges and  five  high  schools  utilize  the  Lehigh  com- 
puter through  its  telecommunications  facilities. 

The  center's  primary  role  in  research  is  to  support 
the  computing  activities  of  the  research  community. 
Approximately  one-third  of  the  computer  utilization 
is  devoted  to  this  activity. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Seminars  are  held  or  sponsored  by  the  center  for 
faculty,  staff  and  graduate  students  on  varied  subjects 


72     Computing  Center 


relating  to  data  processing. 

The  center  works  closely  with  the  Computer 
Society  to  meet  the  more  independent  inquiry  needs 
of  undergraduates  and  its  advisor  is  a  member  of  the 
center  staff. 

Graduate  students  desiring  a  more  intensive  educa- 
tional experience  in  an  operating  environment  may 
apply  for  one  of  the  four  teaching  assistantships  pro- 
vided by  the  center. 

As  with  research,  the  center's  primary  method  of 
offering  educational  opportunities  in  the  use  of  com- 
puters is  by  providing  computing  resources  for  use  by 
the  academic  community.  The  majority  of  jobs  pro- 
cessed by  the  center  are  submitted  by  students  as  a 
part  of  their  normal  academic  activities.  The  growth 
of  interactive  processing  facilities  is  expected  to  bene- 
fit immensely  this  group  of  users. 

The  University  has  established  a  multi-disciplinary 
graduate  program  leading  to  the  M.S.  in  Computer 
Science  degree.  This  program  is  described  in  detail  on 
page  69  of  this  catalog. 

For  further  information,  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  John  E.  Walker. 

Center  for  Health  Sciences 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Center  for  Health  Sciences  was  organized  during 
the  latter  part  of  1972.  It  is  concerned  with  inter- 
disciplinary research  and  graduate  and  post-doctoral 
training  in  various  aspects  of  the  biomedical  sciences 
and  bioengineering.  The  center  is  comprised  of  four 
divisions:  (1)  the  Institute  for  Pathobiology,  (2)  the 
Division  of  Biological  Chemistry  and  Biophysics,  (3) 
the  Division  of  Visual  Science,  and  (4)  the  Division  of 
Bioengineering.  Facilities  are  provided  by  these  divi- 
sions for  its  members,  post-doctoral  fellows,  and 
graduate  students  actively  engaged  in  research  in  the 
respective  areas.  A  large  part  of  the  research  conduct- 
ed at  the  center  is  supported  by  private  and  public 
agencies  and  all  are  related  to  either  basic  or  applied 
aspects  of  problems  pertaining  to  human  and  animal 
health. 

Research  Activities 

The  research  opportunities  and  programs  of  each 
division  are  described  below: 


The  Institute  for  Pathobiology. The  Institute  for 
Pathobiology,  a  branch  of  the  Center  for  Health 
Sciences,  is  an  interdisciplinary  unit  involved  with 
research  and  graduate  and  post-doctoral  education. 
Fields  currently  represented  in  on-going  research  pro- 
jects include  virology,  microbiology,  protozoan  and 
metazoan  parasitology,  invertebrate  pathobiology, 
immunology,  biological  control,  biochemistry,  pollu- 
tion research,  epidemiology  and  epizootiology.  A 
number  of  the  current  research  projects  are  being 
funded  by  both  public  and  private  agencies,  including 
biological  control  and  parasitological  studies  overseas. 

The  administrative  offices  and  principal  labora- 
tories of  the  institute  are  housed  in  newly  renovated 
quarters  in  Chandler  Laboratory.  These  facilities  are 
well-equipped  for  cytological,  cytochemical,  fine 
structural,  immunological,  physiological,  biochemical, 
and  tissue  culture  studies.  Studies  on  diseases  of 
marine  and  estuarine  fishes  and  shellfishes  are  being 
conducted  in  conjunction  with  the  University's  South 
Jersey  Wetlands  Institute. 

The  following  are  some  examples  of  research  pro- 
jects presently  being  carried  out  in  the  institute:  pos- 
sible biological  control  of  invertebrate  vectors  of 
human  and  animal  diseases  by  use  of  protozoan,  bac- 
terial, and  viral  pathogens;  development  of  efficient 
molluscicides  for  the  control  of  vectors  of  schisto- 
somiasis and  fascioliasis;  study  of  viral  diseases  and 
virus-induced  tumors  in  fish;  study  of  the  effects  of 
pollution  (thermal,  chemical,  and  biological)  on 
marine  and  freshwater  organisms;  studies  on  the  inter- 
mediary metabolism  and  other  phases  of  the  bio- 
chemistry of  helminth  parasites. 

Division  of  Biological  Chemistry  and  Biophysics.  This 
research  and  graduate  training  unit  is  a  part  of  the 
Center  for  Health  Sciences.  Fields  currently  repre- 
sented in  on-going  research  include  enzyme  bio- 
chemistry, intermediary  metabolism,  medicinal 
chemistry,  biosynthesis  of  organic  molecules,  the 
physical  basis  of  surface  adhesion  in  biological  sys- 
tems, clinical  chemistry,  and  effects  of  radiation  on 
nucleic  acids.  Much  of  the  research  is  being  funded 
from  private  and  federal  agencies. 

The  administrative  offices  of  the  division  and  most 
of  the  laboratories  are  housed  in  Chandler  Labora- 
tory. The  laboratories  are  well-equipped  and  the 
major  pieces  of  equipment  include  infrared,  ultra- 
violet, and  visible  spectrophotometers,  nuclear  mag- 


Center  for  Health  Sciences     73 


netic  resonance  instrumentation,  mass  spectrometers, 
fermenters,  gas  and  liquid  chromatography  facilities, 
and  other  allied  bioorganic  apparatuses. 
Division  oj  I  'isual  Science.  This  research  and  graduate 

training  unit  is  also  .1  part  ot  the  Center  for  Health 
Sciences.  The  major  emphasis  within  this  division  is 
concerned  with  the  phenomenon  of  vision  as  ap- 
prOached  from  the  standpoint  of  the  psychobiologist, 
neurophysiologist,  biochemist,  and  engineer.  Most  of 
the  division's  facilities  are  currently  in  Williams  Hall 
as  is  the  administrative  office. 

The  division's  laboratories  are  well-equipped  and 
among  the  major  facilities  are  a  ncurophysiological 
laboratory  for  single  nerve  cell  recording,  human  and 
animal  psychophysics  laboratories,  and  the  Color 
Science  Laboratory. 

Lehigh  scientists  affiliated  with  the  Division  of 
Visual  Science  have  an  on-going  liaison  program  with 
the  Will's  Eye  Hospital  and  Research  Institute  in 
Philadelphia  and  some  of  the  projects,  especially 
those  pertaining  to  human  vision,  are  conducted  at 
that  facility. 

Division  of Bioengineering.  This  research  and  gradu- 
ate training  unit  of  the  Center  for  Health  Sciences  is 
concerned  with  a  number  of  health-related  problems 
that  are  best  resolved  by  individuals  with  a  back- 
ground in  engineering.  Specifically,  on-going  projects 
include  measuring  the  rigidity  and  tension  of  healthy 
and  diseased  blood  cells,  the  mechanics  of  flow 
through  the  mammalian  respiratory  system,  the  frac- 
ture mechanics  of  skeletal  units,  and  the  development 
of  prosthetic  apparatus. 

The  division's  laboratories  are  housed  primarily  in 
Packard  Laboratory  and  the  administrative  office  is  in 
the  same  building.  In  addition,  several  individuals 
associated  with  this  division  are  engaged  in  joint  re- 
search projects  with  personnel  of  the  Hahnemann 
Medical  School  in  Philadelphia  and  some  of  the  work 
is  being  conducted  at  that  facility. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Graduate  students  working  under  the  direction  of 
members  of  the  various  components  of  the  center 
may  satisfy  their  course  requirements  towards  the 
M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  by  selecting  from  the  offer- 
ings of  the  departments  of  chemistry,  physics, 
biology,  psychology,  civil  engineering,  mechanical 


engineering  and  mechanic  s.  as  well  as  othei  depart- 
ments ol  the  University. 

In  addition  to  research,  the  center  sponsors  sym- 
posia as  well  as  an  annual  series  of  seminars  on  topics 
pertinent  to  its  objectives. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Thomas  C.  Cheng. 

(enter  tor  Information  Science 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Center  for  Information  Science  was  established 
in  1  962  as  a  division  of  the  University  library.  It  was 
reorganized  in  1967  as  an  independent  center  for 
research  and  development  with  the  objective  of  pro- 
viding guidance  and  leadership  in  transdisciplinary 
studies  of  information  systems  and  their  operations. 

In  the  last  twenty  years,  the  products  of  science 
and  technology  have  not  only  posed  unforeseen  de- 
mands on  libraries,  but  have  also  generated  an  entire- 
ly new  complex  of  ideas  concerning  the  processes  of 
communication.  Information  science  has  emerged  as  a 
response  to  these  needs  and  as  the  result  of  advances 
in  computer  technology.  The  field  is  concerned  with 
the  origin,  dissemination,  collection,  organization, 
storage,  retrieval,  interpretation,  and  use  of  informa- 
tion. 

Research  Activities 

The  Center  for  Information  Science  supports  on- 
going research  projects  in  the  theory,  design,  develop- 
ment, implementation,  management,  and  operation 
of  computer-based  information  systems.  The  focus  of 
this  activity  is  the  LEADERMART  system,  which  was 
developed  at  Lehigh  with  the  aid  of  a  grant  from  the 
National  Science  Foundation  to  provide  a  fully  auto- 
mated information  retrieval  system  on-line  to 
Lehigh's  time-shared  CDC  6400  computer. 

Research  activity  based  on  LEADERMART  in- 
cludes the  development  of  a  prototype  health  know- 
ledge transfer  system,  the  study  of  logic  flows  in 
medical  diagnosis,  the  application  of  computer  tech- 
nology to  health  care,  and  the  design  of  a  question- 
answering  system.  The  LEADERMART  system  has 
been  designated  as  a  node  in  the  emerging  National 
Science  Computer  Network,  and  serves  as  a  model  for 
projected  information  dissemination  resource-sharing 
arrangements. 


74     Center  for  Information  Science 


Facilities  for  LEADERMART  research,  develop- 
ment, and  operation  include  access  to  the  CDC  6400 
in  both  time-sharing  and  batch  modes,  remote  card 
readers,  printers,  CRT  terminals  in  the  Center  for 
Information  Science,  and  teletypes. 

There  is  substantial  additional  research  in  the 
center  with  emphasis  on  psycholinguistics,  mathe- 
matical linguistics,  and  biomedical  information 
retrieval.  Research  in  psycholinguistics  involves  ex- 
perimental studies  of  lexical  memory,  while  activities 
in  mathematical  and  computational  linguistics  con- 
cern the  development  of  algorithms  for  the  automatic 
analysis  of  English  sentences.  Biomedical  information 
system  research  deals  with  new  techniques  of  full-text 
searching,  and  means  for  interfacing  the  LEADER- 
MART  system  with  the  teaching  and  practice  of 
clinical  diagnosis. 

Educational  Opportunities 

The  Center  for  Information  Science  is  closely  affili- 
ated with  the  Division  of  Information  Science  within 
the  Department  of  Philosophy  (see  course  listing). 
Programs  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  are 
offered  by  the  division.  In  addition,  the  division  co- 
operates with  the  departments  of  mathematics,  elec- 
trical engineering,  and  industrial  engineering  in  sup- 
porting the  master's  degree  program  in  computer 
science. 

In  both  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  programs  in  informa- 
tion science,  considerable  emphasis  is  placed  on 
mathematics,  computer  programming,  computer 
languages,  statistics,  electrical  engineering,  psychol- 
ogy, sociology,  and  management  science.  This  wide- 
spread involvement  of  different  disciplines  is 
necessitated  by  the  eclectic  nature  of  information 
science. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director,  Pro- 
fessor D.  J.  Hillman. 

Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies 

Background  and  Purpose 

Effective  utilization  of  the  resources  of  the  oceans 
requires  the  cooperation  of  many  scientific  and  engi- 
neering disciplines.  Practical  solutions  for  the  many 
urgent  environmental  problems  will  most  likely  be 
achieved  through  a  similar  combination  of  scientific 


and  engineering  talent.  The  purpose  of  the  Center  for 
Marine  and  Environmental  Studies  (CMES)  is  to 
foster  a  multi-disciplinary  approach  to  research  on 
these  broad  problem  areas.  Originally  established  in 
1962  as  the  Marine  Science  Center,  the  scope  was 
expanded  to  include  environmental  studies  and  ocean 
engineering  in  1968  under  the  new  name.  The  staff  of 
the  center  includes  faculty  and  graduate  students 
from  the  departments  of  biology,  chemical  engineer- 
ing, chemistry,  civil  engineering,  economics,  geologi- 
cal sciences,  mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics, 
and  physics. 

A  good  marine  scientist  is  one  well-trained  in  a 
classical  field  of  science,  i.  e.,  biology,  chemistry, 
geology,  or  physics,  who  can  apply  the  principles  of 
these  disciplines  to  problems  of  the  oceans.  A  good 
ocean  engineer  is  one  well-trained  in  a  traditional 
engineering  discipline  who  can  apply  engineering  prin- 
ciples to  problems  unique  to  operations  in  the  ocean. 
An  environmental  scientist  or  engineer  needs  a  broad 
background  in  many  disciplines,  as  environmental 
problems  are  invariably  interdisciplinary  in  nature. 
The  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies 
seeks  to  provide  research  opportunities  in  these  fields 
and  to  assist  faculty  and  graduate  students  in  apply- 
ing their  academic  training  and  experience  to  the 
acquisition  of  new  knowledge  and  to  the  solution  of 
real  problems. 

Research  Activities 

The  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies 
includes  a  broad  spectrum  of  research  activities.  Some 
of  the  research  in  marine  science  and  environmental 
studies  is  done  at  the  off-campus  seashore  facility  of 
the  center,  the  South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute  (see 
separate  listing  in  this  section  under  institutes). 
Lehigh  University  is  a  member  of  the  Institute  for 
Development  of  Riverine  and  Estuarine  Systems 
(IDRES),  a  regional  multi-institutional  consortium 
organized  to  conduct  research  on  broad  interrelated 
environmental  problems  of  effective  utilizations  of 
riverine-estuarine  resources,  using  the  Delaware  River 
Basin  and  Delaware  Bay  as  a  model  system.  Water 
quality  and  pollution  studies  are  carried  out  on  the 
Lehigh  and  Delaware  rivers  and  their  smaller  tribu- 
taries. Waste  water  treatment  research  is  performed  in 
cooperation  with  local  industries  and  municipal 


Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies      75 


sewage  plants.  Through  cooperation  with  other  insti 
tutions  having  oceanography  facilities  .nul  ships,  stall 
and  students  affiliated  with  the  centei  have  .>  v.iriety 
.>t  opportunities  toi  experience  and  work  .it  sea. 

Current  research  activities  include: 
Marine  Science.  Biochemistry  of  proteolytic  marine 
bacteria;  fate  ot  fatty  acids  in  salt  marshes;  biologic. il 
effects  oi  thermal  pollution:  immunological  methods 
for  fish  egg  identification;  winter  flounder  population 
studies;  ocean  dumping  pollution  studies  in  New 
York  Bight:  sublethal  effects  ot  pollutants  on  key 
Organisms;  coastal  salt  marsh  ecosystems;  fine  grained 
sediment  accumulation  on  a  deep  sea  fan;  deforma- 
tion ot  near-surface  sediments  at  a  subducting  conti- 
nental margin;  shallow  water  near  shore  and  estuarinc 
sedimentation. 

Ocean  Engineering  (Marine  Geotechnical  Labora- 
tory). Development  ot  geotechnical  instrumentation 
for  submersibles;  establishment  of  geotechnical  test 
areas  in  San  Diego  Trough  and  Gulf  of  Maine;  in-placc 
measurement  of  geotechnical  properties  ot  sea  floor 
soils  in  Gulf  of  Mexico;  shear  strength  and  consolida- 
tion testing  of  soft  cohesive  sea  floor  soils. 
Environmental  Stitdies.  Stream  recovery  after  pollu- 
tion: advanced  waste  water  treatment  methods;  re- 
search needs  in  regional  planning  (IDRES);  biological 
regeneration  of  activated  carbon;  fluidized  bed  en- 
zyme treatment  of  acid  whey  waste;  chemical  treat- 
ment of  fly  ash. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Graduate  students  participating  in  the  center's  pro- 
grams usually  receive  M.S.  or  Ph.D.  degrees  in  the 
traditional  discipline  of  their  choice,  i.e.,  biology, 
chemistry,  geological  sciences,  civil  engineering,  etc. 
Thesis  or  dissertation  research  required  for  the  ad- 
vanced degree  may  be  performed  within  the  frame- 
work of  the  research  activities  of  the  center.  The  pro- 
gram of  courses  to  meet  the  student's  special  field  of 
interest  and  to  satisfy  the  departmental  and  graduate 
school  degree  requirements  will  be  arrived  at  by  con- 
sultation with  the  chairman  of  the  student's  major 
department,  and  will  usually  include  courses  in  other 
departments.  Courses  in  marine  science,  i.e.,  biologi- 
cal oceanography,  chemical  oceanography,  marine 
geology,  ocean  physics,  etc.,  are  offered  in  those  and 
other  departments.  Ocean  engineering  courses  are 


offered  in  the  civil  engineering  department.  Courses 
related  to  enviionuiciit.il  studies  an  offered  in  the 
departments  ot  biology,  chemistry,  chemical  engi- 
neering, civil  engineering,  and  geological  sciences.  For 
course  descriptions,  see  the  catalog  listings  under  the 
various  academic  departments. 

Further  information  concerning  educational  op- 
portunities may  be  obtained  from  the  chairman  of 
the  prospective  major  department,  or  from  the 
director  of  the  center,  Professor  James  M.  Parks. 

Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research  is  an 
interdisciplinary  endeavor  in  which  faculty  and  stu- 
dents with  a  broad  range  of  scientific  interests  inter- 
act on  research  relevant  to  surface  and  coating  phe- 
nomena. It  combines  the  expertise  and  talents  of 
chemists,  chemical  engineers,  metallurgists,  physicists, 
and  mechanical  engineers  in  a  unified  program  of 
research  and  education,  for  the  most  part  at  the 
graduate  level. 

The  importance  of  the  center's  research,  its  broad 
scope,  and  the  need  for  an  integrated  approach  are 
readily  evident  from  several  considerations:  almost 
every  aspect  of  life  involves  a  surface;  surfaces  are 
rarely  bare  but  are  usually  covered  with  coatings;  the 
diverse  nature  of  surfaces  and  coatings  requires  that 
many  facets  of  interfaces,  colloids,  and  related 
sciences  be  understood. 

The  center's  position  of  strength  in  these  areas 
began  with  the  initiation  of  research  in  surface 
chemistry  at  Lehigh  in  the  early  1940's.  The  program 
broadened  into  the  field  of  chemical  coatings  in  1946 
when  the  National  Printing  Ink  Research  Institute 
undertook  support  of  research  at  the  University.  The 
two  interrelated  research  programs  initially  function- 
ed within  the  physical  chemistry  curriculum;  how- 
ever, because  of  the  continual  growth  of  the  research 
plus  the  increasing  tendency  to  interact  with  other 
departments,  formal  center  status  was  conferred  in 
1966. 

The  purpose  of  the  center  is  to  encompass  all  per- 
tinent disciplines  in  its  efforts  to  develop  and  promul- 
gate an  understanding  of  surface  and  coating 
phenomena.  Interaction  among  faculty  and  students 


76     Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 


is  greatly  facilitated  by  the  fact  that  the  center  is 
housed  in  a  new  building,  the  36,000-square-foot 
Francis  MacDonald  Sinclair  Memorial  Laboratory, 
especially  tailored  to  its  needs. 

Financial  support  for  the  center  comes  largely 
from  research  projects  contracted  with  various  indus- 
trial and  governmental  agencies.  Opportunities  for 
cooperative  sponsorship  are  provided  by  the  center's 
liaison  programs,  whereby  fundamental  nonproprie- 
tary research  is  performed  in  areas  of  specific  interest 
to  the  participating  sponsors.  Current  liaison  pro- 
grams are  concerned  with  surface  science  and  emul- 
sion polymerization.  A  Laboratory  for  Color  Science 
is  also  cooperatively  supported. 

The  center  is  particularly  well-equipped  with 
specialty  instrumentation  needed  for  advanced  re- 
search. The  Sinclair  Laboratory  houses  equipment  for 
experimental  studies  employing  electron  spin 
resonance,  ferromagnetic  resonance,  flash  desorption, 
Mbssbauer  spectroscopy,  Auger  spectroscopy,  ellip- 
sometry,  and  computerized  spectrophotometry. 
Other  specialty  equipment  includes  microbalances,  a 
materials  testing  machine,  gas  adsorption  and  heat  of 
immersion  apparatus,  wetting  balances,  and  apparatus 
for  the  preparation  of  reproducible  dispersions  and 
films. 

Research  Activities 

The  center's  research  program  includes  a  broad  range 
of  topics  vital  to  modern  science  and  technology. 
Some  of  the  active  topics  are:  rate  of  drying  of  latex 
films;  electrophoresis  of  latex  particles;  application  of 
latexes  in  medicine;  emulsion  polymerization  in  con- 
tinuous stirred  tank  reactors;  rheology  and  nip  be- 
havior in  non-Newtonian  fluids;  adhesion  and  flow  of 
fluids  on  porous  substrates;  water  purification  by 
flocculation;  characterization  of  surfaces  by  adsorp- 
tion; microelectrophoresis;  computerized  color 
matching;  estimation  of  color  differences;  color  con- 
stancy and  metamerism;  light  scattering  by  micro- 
voids;  ice  formation  on  low  energy  nucleants;  wetting 
in  multiphase  systems;  theoretical  studies  of  alumino- 
silicate  complexes;  catalytic  properties  of  fresh  sur- 
faces; optical  spectroscopy  of  surfaces;  Mossbauer 
spectroscopy  of  surfaces;  Auger  spectroscopy  of  frac- 
ture surfaces;  environmentally  affected  crack  growth 
in  metals;  relation  between  surface  properties  and 


fracture;  hydrogen  embrittlement  of  high  strength 
alloys;  electrodeposition  of  intcrmctallic  compounds; 
pulse  electroplating;  resistance-capacitance  studies  of 
polymeric  coatings. 

Educational  Opportunities 

CSCR  is  a  facility  in  which  graduate  students  under- 
take dissertation  research  leading  to  the  M.S.  or  Ph.D. 
degree  in  existing  science  and  engineering  curricula. 
Pertinent  courses  are  offered  in  the  departments  of 
chemistry,  chemical  engineering,  physics,  mathe- 
matics, biology,  metallurgy  and  materials  science,  and 
mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics. 

Irrespective  of  source  of  financial  support,  poten- 
tial and  current  graduate  students  whose  interests  are 
consistent  with  the  center's  objectives  are  welcome  to 
associate  with  the  research  program  and  to  avail 
themselves  of  the  experimental  facilities.  Since  re- 
search topics  are  selected  by  mutual  agreement,  in- 
terested students  are  encouraged  to  explore  research 
opportunities  with  the  center's  director. 

The  center's  research  also  forms  the  basis  of  con- 
tinuing educational  programs  designed  to  up-date 
industrial  personnel.  The  conference  center  in  the 
Sinclair  Laboratory  is  ideally  suited  for  the  special 
seminars  and  short  courses  held  periodically.  Recent 
topics  include  surface  analysis,  printing  ink  tech- 
nology, emulsion  polymerization,  computer  formula- 
tion of  colorants,  and  MOssbauer  spectroscopy.  The 
center  has  also  hosted  national  meetings  such  as 
Colloid  Symposium  in  1970,  the  Carbon  Conference 
in  1971,  and  a  conference  on  Ecology  in  the  Graphic 
Arts  in  1972.  In  addition,  the  center  provides  oppor- 
tunities for  resident  post-doctoral  studies  and  for 
visiting  scientists. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Henry  Leidheiser. 

Center  for  Social  Research 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Center  for  Social  Research  encourages  research  in 
the  social  sciences  particularly  where  current  policies 
necessitate  cutting  across  traditional  disciplinary  lines 
for  the  solution  of  social  problems.  Established  in 
1965,  the  center  sponsors  innovative  research  pro- 
grams in  economic  and  business  forecasting, 


Center  for  Social  Research      7  7 


urban  studies,  behavioral  research  and  manpowei 
studies.  These  programs  involve  active  group;,  ol  gr.idu 
ate  students  and  selected  undergraduates  who  have 
found  the  center  to  represent  .1  campus  nucleus  of 
enthusiastic  intellectual  activity  in  these  areas.  Inter 
actions  are  encouraged  with  governmental,  business. 
labor  and  other  groups  in  the  community  to  provide 
communication,  contacts,  and  common  efforts 
toward  solutions  of  social  science  problems.  Thus  the 
center  serves  to  coordinate  and  facilitate  research, 
liaison,  and  problem -solving  efforts  by  faculty  and 
graduate  students  in  the  social  sciences. 

Research  Activities 

Research  activity  in  the  center  has  ranged  widely  over 
various  topics  in  social  science.  Earlier  business  and 
economics  research  included  the  development  of  resi- 
dential housing  forecasting  models  and  college  gradu- 
ate manpower  studies  of  mobility,  turnover  and 
career  attitudes.  Current  economic  research  stresses 
policy  issues  in  population,  migration,  and  public 
finance  as  well  as  newer  aspects  of  the  role  of  busi- 
ness in  a  changing  environment  with  respect  to 
growth. 

Behavioral  research  includes  on-going  work  on 
social  agency  information  systems  and  key  social 
psychological  aspects  of  attitude  and  behavioral  pat- 
terns in  modern  life.  Perceptions  of  crowding  re- 
present a  social  science  dimension  of  the  place  of  tall 
buildings  in  our  civilization  as  do  certain  aspects  of 
public  decision-making  in  the  context  of  planning  for 
growth.  Governmental  and  economic  as  well  as  be- 
havioral contributions  are  being  explored  through  the 
center  in  this  connection. 

One  of  the  themes  currently  representing  a  chal- 
lenge to  social  scientists  emerges  from  the  impact  of 
governmental  fragmentation  on  delivery  systems  in 
the  public  sector.  In  addition  to  cost  and  efficiency 
questions,  techniques  and  machinery  for  conflict 
resolution  and  decision-making  on  these  issues  re- 
present areas  of  interest  to  the  cooperating  scholars 
from  the  several  social  science  departments  at  the 
University. 

The  Urban  Studies  program  stresses  research  on 
the  inter-relatedness  of  social,  political,  economic, 
physical  and  historical  forces  which  affect  urban  life 
and  form. 


Educational  <  )pportunities 

Research  seminars  and  1  ourse  ol  ferings  in  the  social 
sciences  are  listed  in  the  catalog  under  the  respective 
social  science  departments  of  the  University  in  eai  h 
college.  Thus  economics  courses  and  degree  require 
ments  are  listed  under  the  College  of  Business  and 
Economics.  The  departments  of  government  and 
social  relations  in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science 
have  numerous  courses  basic  to  research  work  in  be- 
havioral science  and/or  public  policy  problems  and 
political  processes.  The  psychology  department,  the 
School  of  Education,  the  industrial  engineering  de- 
partment and  the  College  of  Engineering  as  well  as 
certain  courses  in  the  management  and  accounting 
departments  of  the  College  of  Business  and  Econom- 
ics also  involve  course  work  with  active  faculty  and 
student  interests  in  the  Center  for  Social  Research. 

The  urban  studies  graduate  program  is  intended  to 
meet  the  pressing  need  for  urban  generalists  who 
possess  interdisciplinary  knowledge  of  urban  pro- 
cesses. Depending  upon  interest  and  choice  of 
courses,  students  will  be  prepared  for  careers  in  city 
management,  urban  planning  and  redevelopment, 
human  relations  and  social  rehabilitation.  Master's 
degree  candidates  work  within  the  disciplines  of 
economics,  government,  history  or  social  relations 
and  achieve  an  urban  concentration  through  the  com- 
bined offerings  of  the  social  science  departments 
though  all  take  U.S.  416  Urban  Seminar.  (See  urban 
studies  division  under  government  department  for 
recommended  combinations  of  individual  depart- 
mental course  offerings  and  graduate  advisors.) 

For  further  information,  write  to  the  acting 
coordinator,  Professor  L.  Reed  Tripp. 

Fritz  Laboratory 

Background  and  Purpose 

Founded  in  1909,  the  Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory 
serves  for  the  advancement  of  knowledge  and  tech- 
niques in  the  fields  of  structures,  structural  mechan- 
ics, materials,  hydraulics  and  fluid  mechanics,  struc- 
tural model  analysis,  soil  mechanics,  and  sanitary 
engineering. 

The  Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory  is  associated 
primarily  with  the  department  of  civil  engineering.  In 
addition,  there  are  cooperative  research  efforts  with 


78     Fritz  Laboratory 


other  departments  of  the  University  and  with  other 
institutes  and  universities.  Research  projects  are 
sponsored  through  the  Office  of  Research  by  national 
research  councils,  mechanics,  structural  model  analy- 
sis, soil  mechanics,  and  sanitary  engineering  agencies. 

Graduate  studies  combined  with  research  investiga- 
tions commenced  at  Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory  in 
1928.  A  major  expansion  of  the  facilities  in  1955  has 
been  followed  by  addition  of  the  necessary  equip- 
ment to  meet  the  needs  of  new  research  opportuni- 
ties. 

The  staff  of  the  laboratory  consists  of  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity faculty  members,  research  associates,  research 
assistants,  and  supporting  technical  personnel.  The 
laboratory  awards  research  assistantships  and  certain 
fellowships  to  competent  research  personnel  who  are 
candidates  for  advanced  degrees.  Students  from  de- 
partments and  divisions  such  as  civil  engineering, 
metallurgy,  mechanics  and  mechanical  engineering 
and  information  science  are  able  to  take  advantage  of 
research  opportunities  with  the  laboratory.  Through- 
out their  work  in  research  programs,  men  are  trained 
for  careers  in  teaching,  in  research,  and  in  advanced 
engineering  design. 

Research  Activities 

The  current  research  divisions  indicate  present  in- 
terests and  activities  of  the  laboratory  staff  and  in- 
clude the  following:  fatigue  and  fracture  (brittle 
failure  due  to  cyclic  and  impact  loading);  geotech- 
nical  engineering  (soil,  foundation,  rock  and  pave- 
ment mechanics);  hydraulics  and  sanitary  engineering 
(stream  and  channel  flow,  hydrology,  sediment  trans- 
port in  pipes  and  channels,  water  quality  control, 
water  resources,  and  waste  water  treatment);  building 
systems  (behavior  and  strength  of  building  com- 
ponents, frames  and  overall  systems,  problems  in- 
volved in  the  design  of  high  rise  buildings,  earthquake 
and  wind  responses);  structural  concrete  (prestressed 
and  reinforced  concrete  bridges  and  buildings);  struc- 
tural connections  (welded  and  bolted  joints,  com- 
posite structures);  structural  stability  (buckling  of 
plates,  beams,  columns,  and  frames).  The  operations 
division  provides  services  for  laboratory  work,  and 
includes  an  instrumentation  group  and  a  computer 
systems  group,  the  latter  maintaining  close  liaison 
with  the  University  CDC  6400  facility. 


As  a  result  of  the  research  studies  conducted  by 
the  staff  of  the  laboratory,  it  has  been  possible  to 
make  basic  changes  to  design  procedures  and  specifi- 
cations in  numerous  specialty  fields.  The  laboratory 
participates  in  a  worldwide  exchange  of  research  in- 
formation, maintains  a  special  library  of  technical 
papers  appropriate  to  its  fields,  and  stimulates  the 
publications  of  papers  in  technical  journals  both  in 
this  country  and  abroad. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Through  the  laboratory  organization,  technical  semi- 
nars and  lectures  are  presented  on  current  research 
findings  and  on  new  design  applications  in  the  various 
fields  of  civil  engineering  and  related  disciplines. 

Courses  students  select  are  primarily  in  the  depart- 
ment of  civil  engineering;  however  to  gain  a  broader 
understanding  many  students  choose  courses  from 
the  departments  of  biology,  chemical  engineering, 
chemistry,  geological  sciences,  mechanical  engineering 
and  mechanics,  and  metallurgy  and  materials  science. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Lynn  S.  Beedle. 

Materials  Research  Center 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Materials  Research  Center  was  formally  estab- 
lished in  February  1962  to  fulfill  the  need  for  a 
research  and  educational  facility  permitting  intellec- 
tual stimulation  of  faculty  and  students  dedicated  to 
research  in  materials.  Currently,  approximately  180 
persons,  including  graduate  students  and  faculty 
members  representing  science  and  engineering  depart- 
ments, are  engaged  in  research  pertaining  to  materials 
science  and  engineering. 

The  fundamental  objectives  of  the  Materials  Re- 
search Center  are  to  encourage  interaction  among  the 
science  and  engineering  disciplines  with  an  interest  in 
materials  and  to  promote  interdisciplinary  research 
activity  and  interdepartmental  educational  opportu- 
nities. To  achieve  these  objectives,  the  center  seeks  to 
establish  a  climate  in  which  faculty  members,  post- 
doctoral associates,  and  graduate  assistants  develop  an 
awareness  of  materials;  arrange  for  facilities  and  space 
required  to  conduct  interdisciplinary  research;  guides 
the  search  for  new  materials  by  encouraging  funda- 


Materials  Research  Center     19 


mental  research  and  new  approaches  to  materials 

problems;  and  .issists  in  developing  educational  op- 
portunities in  materials,  in  particular,  interdisciplin 
.n  v  graduate  programs  devoted  to  training  tor 
research  in  materials. 

Tile  Materials  Research  ("enter  .ilso  conducts  the 
Materials  Liaison  Program  with  industry  and  govern- 
ment. Founded  in  ll)(>3.  this  program  encourages  the 
mutual  intellectual  stimulation  of  scientists  and  engi- 
neers dedicated  to  a  common  problem.  The  program 
serves  as  a  means  tor  the  exchange  ot  knowledge  of 
materials  problems  between  scientists  and  engineers 
associated  with  the  center  and  their  industrial  and 
governmental  counterparts  by  semi-annual  day  semi- 
nars, special  lectures,  consultation  on  materials  prob- 
lems and  research,  distribution  of  all  M.S.  and  Ph.D. 
theses  abstracts  on  materials  research,  and  monthly 
seminars  with  outstanding  invited  speakers. 

The  staff  consists  of  members  of  the  departments 
ot  chemistry,  chemical  engineering,  electrical  engi- 
neering, mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics, 
metallurgy  and  materials  science,  and  physics.  Mem- 
bers of  the  departments  of  geological  sciences  and 
industrial  engineering  are  currently  involved  in 
cooperative  programs.  Communication  with  these 
associated  departments  is  achieved  through  the 
Materials  Research  Council,  which  is  composed  of 
senior  faculty  members  from  all  of  the  engineering 
departments  as  well  as  from  the  department  of 
geological  sciences.  The  council  serves  in  an  advisory 
capacity  as  well  as  a  channel  for  information. 

Research  Activities 

The  present  organization  of  the  Materials  Research 
Center,  located  at  the  Coxe  Laboratory,  includes  four 
laboratories,  the  advanced  materials  laboratory, 
mechanical  behavior  laboratory,  polymer  laboratory, 
and  physical  ceramics  laboratory,  and  three  service 
laboratories,  the  electron  microscopy  laboratory,  the 
physical  measurements  laboratory,  and  the  materials 
clean  room. 

Current  interdisciplinary  research  activities 
include: 

Advanced  Materials.  Characterization  of  metal  oxide 
films;  defect  structure  of  amorphous  and  crystalline 
materials  in  both  bulk  and  thin  film  form;  diffusion 
kinetics;  eutectic  research  including  solidification. 


mi.  restructure,  and  property  studies;  preparal  ion  .mil 
properties  of  materials  lor  solid  state  devices;  process- 
ing ot  metal  insulator  semi-conductor  structures  and 
their  evaluation  and  application  to  integrated  circuits; 
structure  and  properties  of  sputtered  and  evaporated 
thin  films;  high  temperature  oxidation  of  metals. 
Mechanical  Hchavior.  Electron  fractography  (scanning 
and  replica);  effect  of  stress  state  and  load  history  on 
fatigue  crack  propagation;  mechanical  behavior  of 
eutectic  composite  materials;  fatigue  of  polymeric 
materials  and  adhesive  joints;  fracture  of  bridge  steels; 
low-cycle  fatigue. 

Physical  Ceramics.  Press  forging  (compressive  deform- 
ation); strengthening  mechanisms;  correlation 
between  surface  condition  and  strength;  thermal 
stress  fracture;  strength  and  clastic  deformation; 
brittle  composites;  synthesis  of  mechanisms  of  wear 
of  ceramic  alloy  cutting-tools;  static  and  cyclic 
fatigue  of  ceramic  solids;  fracture  toughness  and 
crack  propagation  behavior  of  refractories. 
Polymers.  Fatigue  and  relaxation  processes  in  engi- 
neering plastics;  morphology  and  mechanical  behavior 
of  interpenetrating  networks;  constrained-layer  damp- 
ing systems;  structure,  morphology,  and  mechanical 
behavior  of  polyvinyl  chloride;  reinforcement  of 
elastomers  and  thermoelasticity;  application  of  elec- 
tron microprobe  to  salt  diffusion  in  membranes; 
strengthening  mechanisms  in  polymer-modified  con- 
crete. 

Educational  Opportunities 

This  center  facilitates  interdisciplinary  programs  of 
study  and  research  that  cross  the  traditional  boun- 
daries of  science  and  engineering  curricula,  pro- 
viding a  fundamental,  broad  approach  to  the  field  of 
materials  science  and  technology.  Graduate  students 
participating  in  the  center's  program  usually  receive 
M.S.  or  Ph.D.  degrees  in  the  traditional  discipline  of 
their  choice,  i.e.,  chemistry,  physics,  metallurgy  and 
materials  science,  electrical  engineering,  etc.;  how- 
ever, they  are  expected  to  pursue  course  work  related 
to  a  broader  understanding  of  materials  and  conduct 
research  on  an  interdisciplinary  materials  problem  in 
one  of  the  four  center  laboratories. 

Course  offerings  in  materials  are  summarized  under 
five-year  programs  as  well  as  under  department  headings. 
In  addition,  a  special  program  leading  to  an  M.S.  in 


80     Materials  Research  Center 


materials  is  found  under  five-year  programs. 

Financial  support  for  graduate  students  is  available 
through  the  Materials  Research  Center  by  means  of 
industrial  fellowships  as  well  as  fellowships  provided 
from  the  operating  funds  of  the  center,  and  by  re- 
search assistantships  related  to  sponsored  research 
programs. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Donald  M.  Smyth. 

Institutes 

Lawrence  Henry  Gipson  Institute  for 
Eighteenth-Century  Studies 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Lawrence  Henry  Gipson  Institute  for 
Eighteenth-Century  Studies,  established  in  1971, 
serves  as  a  lasting  memorial  to  one  of  America's  most 
distinguished  scholars.  It  helps  to  support  the  re- 
search activities  of  the  Lehigh  community  of  human- 
ists and  social  scientists  interested  in  developing  a 
further  understanding  of  the  period  of  history 
epitomized  in  Professor  Gipson's  monumental  life 
work,  The  British  Empire  before  the  American  Revo- 
lution (15  vols.,  1936-1970). 

Through  its  council,  the  Lawrence  Henry  Gipson 
Institute  for  Eighteenth-Century  Studies  awards 
research  grants  and  fellowships  from  the  income  of  its 
endowment,  a  fund  made  possible  by  Professor 
Gipson's  bequest  of  his  entire  estate  to  Lehigh.  To 
further  the  scope  of  the  original  endowment,  the 
council  of  the  institute  seeks  additional  support  by 
promoting  research  and  other  programs  related  to  the 
eighteenth  century. 


to  stimulate  interdisciplinary  research  activities. 
These  seminars  are  broad  in  scope  and  will  include 
faculty  from  neighboring  institutions. 

Interdisciplinary  graduate  courses  in  eighteenth- 
century  studies  to  provide  students,  who  normally 
concentrate  on  one  discipline,  with  a  grasp  of  other 
significant  developments  and  an  understanding  of  the 
rich  cultural  and  intellectual  milieu  of  the  eighteenth 
century.  Such  courses  will  stress  the  inter-relationship 
of  history,  politics,  literature,  fine  arts,  philosophy, 
psychology  and  the  sciences. 

Annual  symposia  to  honor  the  late  Professor 
Gipson,  involving  a  distinguished  scholar  in 
eighteenth-century  studies  to  give  lectures  and  also  to 
discuss  opportunities  for  further  scholarly  explora- 
tion. 

Additional  research  resources  for  the  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity Library,  automatically  available  to  the  faculty 
and  students  of  all  colleges  and  universities  intercon- 
nected with  the  library. 

Faculty  fellowships  for  the  pursuit  of  research  in 
an  eighteenth-century  topic. 

A  national  Lawrence  Henry  Gipson  Fellowship  to 
be  awarded  on  a  competitive  basis  to  a  promising 
graduate  student  in  eighteenth-century  studies. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Among  the  academic  departments  involved  in 
eighteenth-century  studies  are  English,  government, 
history,  modern  foreign  languages,  fine  arts,  music, 
philosophy,  psychology,  and  social  relations. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  coordinator, 
Professor  Lawrence  H.  Leder. 

Institute  of  Fracture  and  Solid  Mechanics 


Research  Activities 

The  income  from  the  endowment  of  the  Lawrence 
Henry  Gipson  Institute  for  Eighteenth-Century 
Studies,  and  other  funds  raised  by  the  council,  will 
provide  for: 

Faculty  research  grants  to  defray  travel  costs, 
microfilming,  and  other  such  expenses. 

Graduate  student  grants  to  help  support  deserving 
students  during  their  dissertation  year. 

Internal  seminars  to  bring  together  the  eighteenth- 
century  interests  of  faculty  and  graduate  students  and 


Background  and  Purpose 

The  Institute  of  Fracture  and  Solid  Mechanics  was 
established  in  the  fall  of  1970  to  enable  faculty 
members  and  students  within  the  University  to  parti- 
cipate in  research  relevant  to  fracture  and  solid 
mechanics  on  a  unique,  interdisciplinary  basis. 

An  area  of  special  interest  to  the  institute  has  been 
in  fracture  mechanics  which  deals  with  the  study  of 
structural  and  material  sensitivity  to  flaws.  Such  flaws 
can  seriously  affect  the  design  and  strength  of  ships, 
aircrafts,  automobiles,  bridges  and  buildings.  In 


Institute  of  Fracture  and  Solid  Mechanics     81 


addition,  fracture  mechanics  is  rinding  application  in 
such  areas  .is  bone  fracture,  environmentally  en 
hanced  cracking  oi  pavements  and  structural 
members,  tin-  fracture  >>i  rocks,  and  the  erosion  of 
materials  by  solid  or  watei  particle  impingement. 
The  institute  centralizes  many  activities  in  the 
lick!  of  solid  and  fracture  mechanics.  These  activities 
include:  expansion  of  research  capabilities  to  include 
the  application  of  concepts  of  fracture  mechanics  to 
geology  (rocks),  medicine  (bones),  and  composite 
materials;  editing  books  on  timely  subjects  in  fracture 
and  solid  mechanics;  compilation  and  collection  of 
written  materials  to  establish  and  maintain  a  special 
library  of  fracture  mechanics;  planning  of  conferences 
on  fracture  and  solid  mechanics;  offering  short 
courses  and  seminars  on  special  topics;  conducting  a 
liaison  program  with  industry  and  with  government 
agencies. 

Research  Activities 

Currently,  there  are  several  research  programs 
being  conducted  in  solid  and  fracture  mechanics. 
Sponsors  of  these  programs  are  from  industrial  corpo- 
rations and  government  agencies.  The  programs  cover 
the  following  research  topics: 
Fracture  Mechanics.  Analytical:  stress  analysis  of 
engineering  structures  weakened  by  flaws;  spherical 
and  cylindrical  shells  with  mechanical  imperfections; 
crack  extension  in  viscoelastic  and  rate  sensitive 
materials:  thermoelastic  analysis  of  crack  problems; 
heat  generation  at  the  crack  tip  region  in  metals; 
vibration  and  impact  of  solids  containing  cracks; 
three-dimensional  studies  of  surface  and  through 
cracks;  fracture  behavior  of  layered  and  fiber- 
reinforced  composites;  elastic-plastic  solutions  of 
crack  problems. 

Experimental:  static  and  dynamic  fracture  tough- 
ness testing  of  metallic,  non-metallic  and  composite 
materials;  crack-extension  resistance  curve  measure- 
ments for  aluminum  and  titanium  alloys  and  steels; 
glass-to-rubbery  transition  temperature  in  viscoelastic 
materials;  velocity  measurements  of  running  cracks; 
fatigue  crack  propagation  in  pressurized  shells  and 
shells  under  membrane  load;  combine  loading 
(biaxial,  tension-bending,  etc.)  of  thin  plates  with 
cracks;  photoelastic  studies  of  stress  distribution  in 
cracked  and  composite  bodies;  environmental  effects 


.mi  crack  propagation  under  static  cyclic  loads;  fatigue 
crack  propagation  under  programmed  loading; 

gaseous  hydrogen  embi  ittlcment . 

Solid  Mechanics.  Analytical  and  Numerical  Methods 
of  Analysis:  conlumi.il  mapping  tei  hnique  applied  to 

potential  solutions;  two-  and  three-dimensional 
asymptotic  expansions  near  geometric  discontinuities; 
integral  transform  solutions  leading  to  Frcdholin  in 
tcgral  equations:  singular  integral  equations  with 
generalized  Cauchy  Kernels;  application  of  the 
Chebyshev  and  Jacobi  polynomials;  methods  based 
on  the  Gauss-Jacobi  quadrature  formulas;  special 
applications  of  numerical  treatment  and  finite 
elements  to  continuum  problems  involving  singulari- 
ties; convergence  of  finite  clement  solutions  for  con- 
tinuum mechanics  problems. 

Plates  and  Shells:  development  of  advanced  plate 
and  shell  theories;  load-deflection  and  instability 
behavior  of  elastic  and  plastic  shells  of  revolutions; 
composite  and  sandwich  shells  subjected  to  static  and 
dynamic  loadings;  dynamics  of  magneto-elastic  shells. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Students  interested  in  fracture  and  solid  mechanics 
should  refer  to  course  offerings  in  the  departments  of 
mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics,  metallurgy 
and  materials  science,  civil  engineering,  chemistry  and 
biology. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  George  C.  M.  Sih. 

Institute  for  Metal  Forming 

Background  and  Purpose 

The  Institute  for  Metal  Forming,  sponsored  by  the 
department  of  metallurgy  and  materials  science,  was 
formally  established  in  1970  with  the  following  ob- 
jectives: (1)  to  teach  the  principles  and  applications 
of  metal  forming  technology  to  graduate  and  under- 
graduate students;  (2)  to  provide  instruction  and 
equipment  for  graduate  research  in  metal  forming 
processes;  and  (3)  to  assist  industry  with  solutions  to 
problems  in  metal  forming. 

Metal  working  processes  are  analyzed  mathe- 
matically (usually  involving  the  computer).  The 
results  of  the  analyses  are  checked  and  refined  by 
comparison  with  experimental  data  obtained  in  the 


82     Institute  for  Metal  Forming 


fully  instrumented  metal  forming  laboratories  which 
are  part  of  the  facilities  of  the  institute. 

In  addition,  an  important  part  of  the  effort  of  the 
institute  is  the  preparation  of  educational  programs 
using  the  latest  audiovisual  techniques.  These  pro- 
grams are  used  in  the  classroom  and  in  institute- 
sponsored  seminars  on  campus  and  at  industrial  facili- 
ties. 

Long-range  planning,  together  with  major  equip- 
ment acquisitions  and  construction,  are  supported  by 
University  funds,  federal  funds,  and  an  industrial 
consortium  group. 

Research  Activities 

Several  of  the  current  research  areas  are:  hydrostatic 
extrusion;  pressure -induced  ductility;  flow  through 
converging  conical  dies;  effect  of  holes,  inclusions  and 
pressure  on  the  tensile  properties;  friction  measure- 
ment; cladding  and  forming  of  composite  materials; 
forming  of  polymers;  deep  drawing,  impact  extrusion 
and  ironing;  powder  consolidation. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Students  interested  in  metal  forming  should  refer  to 
course  offerings  in  the  departments  of  metallurgy  and 
materials  science  and  mechanical  engineering  and 
mechanics.  In  addition,  the  institute  offers  special 
informal  seminars  and  lectures  for  graduate  students. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Betzalel  Avitzur. 

South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute 

Background  and  Purpose 

This  facility  is  a  joint  activity  between  the  South 
Jersey  Wetlands  Institute,  incorporated  as  a  non- 
profit organization,  and  Lehigh  University.  The  Uni- 
versity operates  the  institute  under  the  Center  for 
Marine  and  Environmental  Studies  at  Lehigh. 

The  South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute  which  com- 
menced operations  in  May  1972,  is  located  on  a 
34-acre  site  on  the  edge  of  a  coastal  salt  marsh  near 
Stone  Harbor,  New  Jersey.  It  is  a  research  and 
teaching  field  station  and  following  the  practice  of 
other  seaside  marine  research  stations,  educators  and 
researchers  from  other  colleges  and  universities  may 


use  the  facilities  of  the  Wetlands  Institute  for  research 
and  education  which  falls  within  the  general  objects 
of  the  institute.  These  objectives  are:  (1)  to  increase 
the  understanding  of  the  natural  processes  controlling 
the  wetlands  ecosystems  through  fundamental  re- 
search; (2)  to  investigate  the  renewability  of  the 
natural  resources  and  to  increase  the  biotic  potential 
of  the  wetlands  area;  (3)  to  ascertain  the  effects  of 
disturbances  caused  by  man's  activities,  and  to  find 
methods  of  minimizing  these  effects  through  practical 
and  applied  research;  (4)  to  provide  factual  scientific 
information  which  can  serve  others  as  a  basis  on 
which  to  make  intelligent  decisions  for  the  long-range 
beneficial  multiple  use  of  coastal  areas;  (5)  to  train 
scientists  and  engineers  in  methods  of  solving  and  of 
preventing  problems  in  the  coastal  zones;  and  (6)  to 
educate  the  general  public,  both  resident  and  vaca- 
tioning, in  the  importance  of  wetlands  to  the  general 
ecology  of  coastal  areas,  to  the  need  for  preserving 
and  for  enhancing  the  wetlands  in  maintaining  those 
aspects  of  the  coastal  zones  that  make  them  attractive 
to  residents  and  vacationers,  and  what  each  person 
can  do  to  protect  the  environment. 

The  Wetlands  Institute  provides  facilities  for  year- 
round  studies  of  the  surrounding  environment  and 
includes:  6  research  laboratories,  dormitory  space  and 
kitchen  facilities,  lecture  room  and  demonstration 
area,  flowing  salt  water  system,  maintenance  shop, 
scientific  laboratory  equipment,  and  a  variety  of  out- 
board motor  skiffs. 

Research  Activities 

Current  research  interests  of  the  institute  staff 
include:  salt  marsh  food  webs;  physiological  criteria 
for  determining  sub-lethal  effects  of  various  environ- 
mental parameters;  sedimentation  studies;  geo- 
chemistry of  coastal  salt  marsh  waters;  beach  sand 
studies;  microbial  mineralization  of  cellulose  and 
chitin  in  salt  marshes;  new  techniques  for  identifica- 
tion of  planktonic  fish  eggs;  viral  diseases  offish; 
effect  of  sewage  on  marine  organisms;  and  aqua- 
culture  offish  and  shellfish. 

Educational  Opportunities 

Formal  graduate  studies  are  offered  through  the 
graduate  programs  in  the  various  departments  of  the 
University.  One  facet  of  graduate  student  training  is 
related  to  preparation  of  scientists  to  continue  studies 


South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute     83 


i>t  the  coastal  area;  the  othei  is  concerned  with  pro- 
viding  school  science  teachers  with  sufficient  training 
so  thai  they  are  able  to  return  to  the  classroom  and 
pass  on  vital  information  about  the  tidal  wetlands  to 
tln-ir  students,  the  future  leaders  of  the  country.  In 
conjunction  with  teacher  training,  every  cttort  is 
made  to  provide  lectures,  demonstrations  and  tours 
of  the  wetlands  for  classes.  Hopefully,  various  class- 
room projects  may  be  developed  where  students  and 
scientists  may  work  together.  Selected  undergraduate 
courses  are  also  offered  as  part  of  the  summer  pro- 
gram. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  director, 
Professor  Sidney  S.  Herman. 


Council  lor  Research  in  Teaching  and  Learning 

The  University  Council  for  Research  in  Teaching  and 
Learning  is  an  interdisciplinary  effort  to  support  the 
interests  among  groups  of  faculty  members  in  re- 
search and  development  activities  to  enhance  the 
teaching-learning  process.  Formed  as  task  forces, 
these  groups  pursue  common  interests  in  such  areas  as 
computer  applications,  educational  technology,  pro- 
grammed learning,  delinquent  education,  and  many 
others.  A  significant  aspect  of  the  council's  work  is 
that  it  encourages  research  and  development  activities 
relevant  to  the  Lehigh  community  and  to  the  educa- 
tional community  at  large. 


Research  Organizations 


Bureau  of  Educational  Service 

The  Bureau  of  Educational  Service  was  organized  in 
1953  to  provide  professional  assistance  to  public  and 
private  schools  and  various  other  educational  groups. 

Among  the  purposes  of  the  bureau  are  the  render- 
ing of  professional  assistance  to  educational  institu- 
tions by  a  cooperative  study  of  their  problems,  foster- 
ing research  in  the  field  of  educational  practice,  and 
helping  to  make  the  resources  of  the  University  more 
readily  available  to  communities  and  agencies  in  need. 
In  fulfilling  these  purposes  the  bureau  obtains  the 
services  of  specialists  from  all  areas  of  the  academic 
profession. 

Detailed  information  on  assistance  with  specific 
problems  can  be  secured  from  the  Director,  Division 
of  Educational  Administration,  School  of  Education. 

Office  of  Research 

The  Lehigh  Institute  of  Research  was  organized  in 
1924  to  encourage  and  promote  scientific  research 
and  scholarly  achievement  in  every  division  of  learn- 
ing represented  in  the  organization  of  the  University, 
and  in  recognition  of  the  need  for  further  and  more 
exact  knowledge  in  science  and  in  the  application  of 
science  to  the  affairs  of  modern  life.  The  institute  was 
reorganized  in  1945  in  recognition  of  the  increasing 
role  of  government  agencies  and  industry  in  sponsor- 
ing research,  and  renamed  in  1968  in  recognition  of 
its  administrative  function. 


84     Research  Organizations 


Description  of  Courses 


General  Information 

Following  is  a  list  of  undergraduate  and  graduate 
courses  offered  by  Lehigh  University.  For  purposes  of 
record,  all  approved  courses  are  listed.  It  must  be 
understood,  however,  that  the  offerings  in  any  given 
semester  are  contingent  upon  a  number  of  factors, 
including  student  needs  as  determined  at  the  time  of 
pre-registration. 

Credit  Hours 

The  number  in  parentheses  following  each  course  title 
indicates  the  credit  value  of  the  course  in  terms  of 
semester  hours.  Three  hours  of  drawing,  of  work  in 
the  laboratory,  or  of  practice  in  the  field  are  regarded 
as  the  equivalent  of  a  recitation  or  lecture  of  one 
hour's  duration. 

Course  Numbering 

The  course  numbering  system  specifies  which  courses 
can  be  applied  to  the  program  of  study  as  the  student 
progresses  toward  his  undergraduate  or  graduate 
degree.  The  numbering  series  is  as  follows: 
0-99      Undergraduate  courses,  primarily  for  under- 
classmen. Not  available  for  graduate  credit. 
100-199      Advanced  undergraduate  courses.  Not  open 
to  freshmen  except  on  petition.  Not  open  to  sopho- 
mores except  on  petition,  unless  part  of  major  pro- 
gram or  curriculum.  Not  available  for  graduate  credit. 
200-299      Courses  open  to  advanced  undergraduates 
and  graduates.  Not  available  for  graduate  credit  in  the 
major  field. 

300-399      Courses  open  to  advanced  undergraduates 
and  graduates.  Available  for  graduate  credit  in  the 
major  field. 

400-499      Courses  open  to  graduate  students  only,  and 
undergraduates  by  special  petition. 

High  Immediate  Relevance  Courses 

Each  instructional  department  is  authorized  to  offer 
High  Immediate  Relevance  courses— courses  based  on 


contemporary  social  and  scientific  issues— within  a 
semester,  with  the  option  of  having  them  become  a 
permanent  part  of  the  University  curriculum.  HIR 
courses  will  be  numbered,  as  is  appropriate,  .  .  .  .97- 

98, 197-198 297-298,  ....  397-398,  for  a 

maximum  of  two  semesters. 

Students  may  take  97-98  HIR  courses  Pass/Fail 
under  the  standard  procedures  for  Pass/Fail. 

Apprentice  Teaching 

Apprentice  teaching  is  designed  for  advanced  stu- 
dents, normally  in  their  senior  year,  who  wish  to 
learn  about  teaching  under  the  guidance  of  an  experi- 
enced teacher.  Master  and  apprentice  teachers  are, 
with  the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  the  department 
in  which  the  apprentice  teaching  is  to  be  done,  free 
for  the  most  part  to  work  out  whatever  arrangements 
best  fit  the  needs  of  the  course.  Apprentices  typically 
receive  three  hours  of  credit  for  attending  classes, 
doing  some  lecturing  or  leading  of  discussion  sections, 
assisting  in  making  up  or  grading  some  written  assign- 
ments and  tests,  and  being  available  for  some  indivi- 
dual consultation  with  students.  A  student  may 
register  for  apprentice  teaching  only  once  each  semes- 
ter, and  only  twice  for  credit  in  his  college  career,  for 
a  total  of  not  more  than  six  hours  of  credit.  He  may 
register  to  be  an  apprentice  teacher  in  a  given  course 
only  once.  A  graduate  student  who  is  not  a  paid 
teaching  assistant  may  register  for  apprentice  teach- 
ing, but  his  department  must  decide  whether  he  may 
receive  credit  which  will  count  toward  fulfilling 
requirements  for  a  graduate  degree.  The  apprentice 
will  be  graded  for  his  work  in  the  course  by  his 
master  teacher.  Students  who  wish  to  do  apprentice 
teaching  in  extra-departmental  courses,  such  as  those 
offered  as  Freshman  Seminars  or  Creative  Concepts 
courses,  may  do  so  with  the  approval  of  the  director 
of  the  program.  In  High  Immediate  Relevance  courses 
or  courses  cross-listed  in  several  departments,  the 
approval  of  the  chairman  of  that  department  in  which 
the  course  is  taught  will  be  required.  In  such  cases, 
the  student  will  be  registered  for  the  300  course  with 
the  same  heading  as  the  course  in  which  he  is  an 
apprentice  (e.g.,  FS  300— Apprentice  Teaching  in  FS 
97C;  CC  300-Apprentice  Teaching  in  CC  101A;  HIR 
300— Apprentice  Teaching  in  HIR  197,  or  as  a  depart- 
mental 300  course  if  the  HIR  course  is  given  as  a 
departmental  offering). 


Description  of  Courses     85 


I'll  i equisites 

\cademi<  preparation  required  tor  admission  to 
courses  is  indicated  under  "Prerequisite      following 
course  descriptions  st.ited  in  most  eases  lor  purposes 
of  convenience  in  terms  ol  Lehigh  courses.  Status 
required  tor  admission,  where  numbering  does  not 
fully  describe  this  status,  is  also  indicated  under  "Pre- 
requisites." 

A  student  who  does  not  have  the  status  or  the 
academic  preparation  set  forth  as  prerequisites  must, 
in  order  to  be  admitted  to  a  course,  tile  with  the 
Registrar  at  the  time  ot  registration  and  on  a  standard 
form  provided  by  the  Registrar  a  waiver  of  prerequi- 
sites signed  by  the  instructor  teaching  or  in  charge  of 
the  course,  the  head  of  the  teaching  department,  and 
the  student's  curriculum  director.  Academic  work 
completed  elsewhere  must  be  attested  in  this  manner 
as  being  substantially  equivalent  to  prerequisites 
listed,  unless  the  student's  records  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  show  that  the  proper  officers  have  so  evalu- 
ated this  preparation  previously. 

English  2,  10,  14,  or  16  shall  be  prerequisite  to  all 
100— or  higher— level  courses:  exceptions  may  be 
made  only  by  petition  to  the  Committee  on  Standing 
ot  Students. 


Accounting 


Pl  otev,oi  s 

Robert  H.  Mills,  Ph.D.,  C.P.A.,  Chairman 
Alfred  P.  Koch.  M.S..  C. P. A. 
Carl  L.  Moore,  M.S.,  C.P.A. 
Wendell  P.  Trumbull,  Ph.D..  C.P.A. 

Adjunct  Professor 

H.  Louis  Thompson,  M.B.A. 

Associate  Professor 

Feng-Shyang  Lull,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professor 
Kenneth  P.  Sinclair,  Ph.D. 

Instructors 

Stuart  K.  Webster,  M.B.A. ,  C.P.A. 
Dunham  R.  Bainbridge,  M.S.,  C.P.A. 

Major  in  Business  and  Economics  College 

Required:  15  credits  beyond  the  core,  listed  on  page  40. 

Acctg  315  Financial  Accounting  (3-4) 

Accounting  Electives  (except  Acctg  390) 
(11-12) 

Major  in  Arts  and  Science  College 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Acctg  51,52  Essentials  of  Accounting  (6) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Eco  45  Statistical  Methods  (3) 

Math  41  BMSS  Calculus  I  (3) 

Math  42  BMSS  Probability  (3) 

Math  43  BMSS  Linear  Algebra  (3) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Acctg  111  Computers  in  Business  (3) 

Acctg  315  Financial  Accounting  (3-4) 

Eco  129  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

Eco  206  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Law  1  Business  Law  (3) 

Mgt  302  Quantitative  Models— Conceptual  (3) 

or 

Mgt  321  Organization  Behavior  (3) 


86     Accounting 


Plus  nine  semester  hours  of  300-level  accounting  courses  ex- 
cluding Acctg.  390,  Internship. 

Note:  Students  interested  in  qualifying  for  the  CPA  or  CMA 
certificate  at  either  the  bachelor  or  M.B.A.  level  should  con- 
sult the  chairman  of  the  department  of  accounting  or  their 
major  advisor. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

51.  Essentials  of  Accounting  (3) 

The  organization,  measurement  and  interpretation  of  eco- 
nomic information.  Introduction  to  accounting  theory,  con- 
cepts and  principles,  the  accounting  cycle,  and  information 
processing.  Exposure  to  controversial  issues  concerning 
income  determination  and  valuation.  Prerequisite:  sopho- 
more standing. 

52.  Essentials  of  Accounting  (3) 

Financial  statement  analysis  for  managerial  and  external  use. 
The  use  of  economic  information  for  managerial  planning 
and  control.  Introduction  to  job  order,  process,  and  standard 
cost  accounting,  variable  costing,  and  volume-mix-price-cost 
relationships.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  51  or  108. 

108.  Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 

A  one-semester  survey  of  accounting  principles  and  practices, 
including  an  introduction  to  industrial  cost  systems  designed 
primarily  for  those  students  planning  to  take  only  one  ac- 
counting course.  Other  students  should  take  the  Acctg.  51, 
52  sequence. 

111.  Computers  in  Business  (3) 

An  introduction  to  computers  with  emphasis  on  business 
applications.  Develop  a  working  knowledge  of  a  computer 
language  sufficient  to  solve  business  problems.  Basic  know- 
ledge of  hardware,  software,  error  control,  integrated 
systems,  and  simulation.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had 
a  previous  equivalent  (normally  3  credit  hours)  course  in 
computers. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 
300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Acctg. (1-3) 

307.  Federal  Tax  Accounting  (3) 

An  interpretation  of  the  Federal  income  tax  laws,  rules,  and 
regulations  applicable  to  income  tax  determination  of  in- 
dividuals, partnerships,  and  corporations.  Tax  planning  and 
timing  of  transactions  is  emphasized.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  51 
or  108. 

311.  Accounting  Information  Systems 

A  general  introduction  to  the  development  and  implementa- 
tion of  an  electronic  data  processing  accounting  information 
systems.  The  course  will  consider  the  tools  and  techniques 
used  by  someone  performing  the  systems  function.  Prerequi- 
site: Acctg.  52  or  108  and  Acctg.  111. 


315.  Financial  Accounting  (3-4) 

Intensive  study  of  theory,  generally  accepted  accounting 
principles,  and  problems  concerned  with  presenting  fairly  the 
operating  results,  financial  position,  and  changes  in  financial 
position  of  business  entities;  preparation,  analysis,  and  inter- 
pretation of  financial  statements.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  52  or 
108. 

317.  Advanced  Accounting  (4) 

Problems  dealing  with  business  combinations,  partnerships, 
fund  accounting  as  it  applies  to  non-profit  entities,  fiduciary 
accounts,  insolvent  concerns,  etc.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  52  or 
108. 

318.  Contemporary  Issues  (2-3) 

Intensive  study  of  A.I. C. P. A.  pronouncements,  research 
studies,  cases,  reports,  related  to  current  external  reporting 
problems  in  public  accounting.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  315. 

319.  Development  of  Accounting  Principles  (3) 

A  critical  and  historical  survey  of  the  development  of 
accounting  principles  and  theory  in  the  twentieth  century. 
Prerequisite:  Acctg.  315. 

320.  Auditing  (3) 

Survey  of  auditing  theory,  objectives,  and  practices  relating 
largely  to  the  responsibilities  of  independent  professional 
accountants;  ethics  of  the  profession,  generally  accepted 
auditing  standards,  internal  control,  examination  of  various 
systems  including  EDP,  statistical  methods,  report  writing, 
etc.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  315. 

324.  Cost  Accounting  (3) 

Principles  and  practices  of  industrial  cost  accounting,  in- 
cluding cost  planning  and  budgeting,  cost  controls,  job-lot 
and  standard  and  process  systems,  variance  analysis,  perfor- 
mance reports,  costs  in  management  decisions.  Prerequisite: 
Acctg.  52  or  108. 

371.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Readings  and  research  in  various  fields  of  accounting;  design- 
ed for  superior  students  who  have  a  special  interest  in  some 
topic  or  topics  not  covered  by  the  regularly  rostered  courses. 
Written  term  paper(s)  required.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in 
accounting  acceptable  to  the  supervising  professor  and  the 
department  chairman. 

372.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  accounting  for  which  no 
regularly  scheduled  coursework  exists.  When  offered  as  group 
study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  interests  of  instructor 
and  students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  accounting  accept- 
able to  instructor  and  department  chairman. 


Accounting     87 


l>>(>.  Internship  ,11  (,] 

Designed  to  give  advanced  students  ol  accounting,  who  have 
maintained  a  satisfat  toi  \  standard  of  scholarship  and  who 

show  promise  in  the  field  of  accounting,  an  opportunity  to 
acquire  field  experience  and  training  with  selected  mdnsin.il 
or  public  accounting  firms  or  governmental  agencies  .is  .1 
complement  to  the  academic  learning  process.  Outside  read- 
ings will  be  assigned,  Written  reports  will  be  submitted  by 
employer  and  students.  The  amount  of  credit  will  be  in- 
fluenced by  the  length  ol  the  training  period  and  the  charac- 
ter ot  the  experience  afforded  to  the  trainee,  but  will  not 
exceed  sis  hours  tor  a  regular  semester  or  three  hours  for  a 
summer  period  ol  at  least  eight  weeks.  Prerequisite:  junior 
standing  and  approval  of  faculty  committee  on  internship. 

1  'ot  t  graduates 

The  specialized  accounting  courses  at  the  300-level  are  fre- 
quently offered  in  graduate  sections  in  addition  to  the 
400-level  courses.  These  graduate  offerings  permit  MBA 
students  to  take  a  limited  concentration  of  9-12  hours  in 
accounting.  If  they  have  taken  12  to  15  hours  in  accounting 
as  undergraduates,  their  total  professional  preparation  of 
21-27  hours  represents  a  sound  basis  for  a  career  in  public, 
industrial  or  governmental  accounting.  Undergraduates  may 
wish  to  plan  ahead  for  a  full  five-year  program  including  the 
master's  degree  for  professional  accounting  preparation. 
(Note  that  Acctg.  422,  Managerial  Accounting,  is  for  non- 
accounting  major  MBA  students  and  not  open  for  credit  to 
master's  candidates  who  majored  in  accounting  as  under- 
graduates or  who  are  carrying  an  accounting  field  of  speciali- 
zation at  the  graduate  level.)  For  further  information  about 
CPA  requirements  in  different  states,  CMA  certificates,  or  for 
the  selection  of  accounting  electives,  see  the  chairman, 
accounting  department. 

406.  Advanced  Tax  Planning  &  Research  (3) 
An  advanced  course  in  Federal  tax  laws,  rules,  and  regula- 
tions involving  cases  and  problems  relating  to  various  tax 
entities.  Tax  planning  and  utilization  of  research  tools  is 
emphasized.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  307. 

408.  (I.E.  408)  Management  Information  Systems  (3) 
For  description,  see  I.E.  408. 

422.  Managerial  Accounting  (3) 

Survey  course  for  non-accounting  majors  (related  course  for 

accounting  majors  is  Acctg.  324);  uses  of  accounting  data  for 

managerial  planning  and  control,  including  cost  control; 

capital  expenditure  planning;  product  pricing  decisions; 

operations  research  applications.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  52  or 

108. 

424.  Advanced  Management  Accounting  (3) 
Managerial  planning  and  control  problems  with  emphasis  on 
the  responsibilities  of  the  accountant.  Practical  applications 
using  cases.  Includes  advanced  treatment  of  management 
control  systems,  managed  costs,  transfer  pricing,  and  the 
capital  investment  problem.  Prerequisite:  Acctg.  324  or  422. 


I  >1.  Accounting  Theory  .mil  Thought  (3) 

\  -  nil,  il  and  historical  examination  ol  modern  accounting 
pts,  Concerned  with  measuring  enterprise  income  and 
capital  and  related  cconomii  data,  in  both  simplil  icd  and 
realistic  circumstances,  and  with  communicating  and  inter- 
preting such  data  effectively  to  interested  parties.  Prere- 
quisite: 15  hours  of  accounting. 

442.  Professional  Accounting  Seminar  (3) 
Survey  of  technical  and  professional  accounting  problem,  n 
the  advanced  level.  Advanced  case  studies  in  public 
accounting  and  management  services.  Prerequisite:  15  hours 
of  accounting.  Offered  every  other  year. 

471.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

An  extended  study  of  an  approved  topic  in  the  field  of 
accounting.  May  be  repeated. 

472.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  accounting  for  which  no 
regularly  scheduled  coursework  exists.  When  offered  as  group 
study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  interests  of  instructor 
and  students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  accounting  accept- 
able to  instructor  and  department  chairman.  May  be 
repeated. 


88     Accounting 


American  Studies 


Joseph  Dowling,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History  and  Director  of 
American  Studies 

This  is  an  interdepartmental  major  emphasizing  the  idea  that 
the  institutions  and  values  of  a  society  comprise  a  whole  and 
not  merely  a  sum  of  separate  parts.  By  concentrating  on  the 
unique  expressions  of  individuals  contained  in  the  literature 
of  America  and  by  studying  the  historical  movements  within 
which  these  expressions  develop,  American  Studies  reveals 
relationships  which  may  not  be  clearly  seen  within  the  frame- 
work of  a  single  discipline.  By  carefully  chosen  electives  the 
student  can  add  to  the  insights  of  literature  and  history. 
Thus,  for  example,  a  student  may  pursue  the  relationship  of 
the  behavioral  sciences  to  history  and  literature  or  use  the 
various  disciplines  to  give  greater  comprehension  of  the  prob- 
lems of  the  American  city.  In  addition,  the  study  in  depth  of 
one's  own  environment  provides  the  student  with  a  greater 
awareness  of  the  forces  which  have  shaped  his  world  and  his 
character  and  should  produce  a  greater  sensitivity  to  the 
values  of  his  own  society. 

The  major  consists  of  sequences  in  American  history  and 
literature,  followed  by  twelve  hours  of  advanced  study 
divided  equally  between  American  history  and  American 
literature,  six  hours  of  electives  in  any  aspect  of  the 
American  experience  and  six  hours  of  either  European  litera- 
ture or  European  history.  In  his  senior  year  the  student  will 
take  one  history  and  one  literature  seminar  organized  around 
a  single  theme  in  each  respective  field.  The  major  require- 
ments total  42  hours. 

Because  the  emphasis  is  strongly  placed  on  American 
history  and  literature,  an  undergraduate  American  Studies 
major  will  provide  thorough  preparation  for  graduate  work  in 
American  Studies  and,  with  suitable  collateral  courses, 
American  literature  or  American  history.  In  addition,  the 
major  may  help  in  preparing  students  for  advanced  work  in 
law,  theology,  and  teaching  in  secondary  schools  and  commu- 
nity colleges. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Hist  13,  14  American  Civilization  (6) 

Engl  23,  24  American  Literature  (6) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Six  credit  hours  to  be  chosen  from  each  group. 

Engl  331  20th  Century  American  Literature  (3) 

Engl  341  Contemporary  American  Literature  (3) 

Engl  343  American  Romanticism  (3) 

Engl  344  American  Realism  (3) 

Hist  119  Colonial  America  (3) 


Hist  120 
Hist  327 
Hist  328 

Options 

Hist 
Engl 


Revolutionary  America  (3) 
American  Intellectual  History  (3) 
American  Intellectual  History  (3) 


European  History  (6) 
European  Literature  (6) 
Electives  (6) 


Choice  of  electives  and  options  to  be  made  in  consultation 
with  advisor,  selected  from  such  disciplines  as  economics, 
fine  arts,  government,  philosophy,  religion  studies,  social 
relations. 

Required  Senior  Seminars 

Engl  345  Themes  in  American  Literature  (3) 

Hist  374  Themes  in  American  History  (3) 

Admission  to  honors  in  American  Studies  is  by  invitation 
of  the  committee  in  the  student's  junior  year.  The  student 
must  attain  an  average  of  3.2  in  major  courses,  in  addition  to 
the  University  honors  requirements.  Those  interested  in 
honors  work  are  urged  to  consult  the  director. 


American  Studies     89 


Arts  — Engineering 


The  standard  major  for  arcs-engineers  working  cowards  a  B.A. 

degree  is  applied  science.  This  includes  all  of  the  science  and 
engineering  courses  required  in  the  freshman  year  and  in  die 

pattern  roster  lor  the  chosen  tield  of  engineering. 

Arts  engineers  with  special  interests  outside  engineering 
frequently  combine  another  arts  or  science  major  with  their 
engineering  program.  Interested  students  should  consult  with 
the  Dean  of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science. 

Recommended  Freshman  Year 

Arts-engineering  freshmen  have  the  same  roster  of  courses  as 
do  engineering  freshmen,  with  the  exception  that  the  arts- 
engineering  freshman  takes  Economics  1  the  second  semester 
in  place  of  an  elective.  Reter  to  the  recommended  freshman 
year,  College  of  Engineering. 

Recommended  Professional  Sequences 

Beginning  with  the  sophomore  year,  the  arts-engineering 
student  will  be  guided  by  the  appropriate  pattern  roster  in  his 
chosen  tield.  The  pattern  roster  shows  the  most  effective  way 
of  combining  arts  and  engineering  courses  to  prepare  for  the 
last  year  in  the  branch  of  engineering  chosen. 

Although  the  minimum  number  of  credit  hours  needed 
for  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  is  1  20,  a  student  in  arts-engineering 
should  expect  to  earn  more  than  this  in  order  to  qualify  for 
the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  in  his  chosen  field  of  engineer- 
ing at  the  end  of  the  fifth  year.  The  number  needed  for  both 
degrees  is  shown  for  each  pattern  roster. 


Junioi  Year,  First  Semestei     tS  credit  hours 

I  anguage  (4) 

l  hi  in  I'M  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  192  Physical  Chemistry  Lab  (1) 

ChE  167  Unit  Operations  (3) 

ChE  169  Unit  Operations  I  ab  I  (1) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  ( 1 7  credit  hours) 

Language  (3) 
ChE  170  Unit  Operations  Lab  II  (1) 

ChE  286  Modelling,  Simulation,  and  Control  (3) 

ChE  210  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  (4) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

.Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

ChE  302  Chemical  Engineering  Kinetics  (3) 

Chem  51  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  55  Organic  Chemistry  Lab  (2) 

Electives  for  Engineering  Major  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

ChE  174  Chemical  Plant  Design  (3) 

Electives  for  Engineering  Major  (9) 
Distribution  Electives  (3) 

Summer 

ChE  100  Industrial  Employment 

Note:  For  senior  year  engineering  electives,  the  student 
should  consult  with  department  of  chemical  engineering 
advisors. 


Arts-Chemical  Engineering 

154  credit  hours  needed  for  B.A.  and  B.S. 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

ChE  41  Cascade  Processing  Concepts  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (IS  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Chem  90  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

ChE  52  Introduction  to  Transport  Phenomena  (4) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 


Arts-Civil  Engineering 

155-167  credit  hours  needed  for  B.A.  and  B.S. 
Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  Approved  Mathematics  Elective  (3)* 

Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 


90     Arts-Engineering 


Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Language  (4) 
Mechll  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

CE  13  Civil  Engineering  Concepts  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Language  (3) 
Mech  102  Dynamics  (3) 

CE  40  Principles  of  Surveying  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Summer  (3  credit  hours) 

CE  41  Engineering  Surveys  (3) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

CE101  Computer  Methods  (1) 

CE  121  Mechanics  of  Fluids  (3) 

CE  143  Soil  Mechanics  (3) 

CE  159  Structural  Analysis  (3) 

Electives  (6)* 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (IS  credit  hours) 


CE  110 
CE  160 
CE  170 
CE  222 


Summer 
CE100 


Civil  Engineering  Laboratory  (3) 
Structural  Design  (3) 
Environmental  Engineering  (3) 
Hydraulic  Engineering  (3) 
Elective  (3)* 


Industrial  Employment 
Eight  weeks  of  industrial  employment 
should  precede  fifth  year.  Consult  chairman 
of  department. 


Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Mech  103  Principles  of  Mechanics  (4) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

EE  11  Introduction  to  Computer  Engineering  (3) 

Math  231  Statistical  Inference 

or 
Math  309  Theory  of  Probability  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (9) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Language  (3) 
EE  20  Introduction  to  Circuit  Theory  (4) 

Phys  31  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

EE  105  Electronic  Circuits  (4) 

EE  104  Linear  Systems  and  Signals  (4) 

Approved  Electives  (6) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 


EE  103 
EE231 
EE  106 
EE  142 


Summer 

EE  100 


Physical  Electronics  (3) 
Electric  and  Magnetic  Fields  (3) 
Electromechanics  and  Machines  (3) 
Junior  Lab  (2) 
Approved  Electives  (6) 


Industrial  Employment 


*  Electives  which  require  approval  of  civil  engineering 
department. 


Note:  students  must  choose  at  least  one  elective  in  mathe- 
matics and  at  least  one  elective  in  materials,  thermodynamics, 
fluid  mechanics,  or  physical  chemistry. 


Arts-Electrical  Engineering 

157  credit  hours  needed  for  B.A.  and  B.S. 
Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 


Arts-Engineering  Physics 

150  credit  hours  needed  for  B.A.  and  B.S. 

Arts-engineering  physics  students  will  complete,  during  the 
first  four  years,  the  physics  major  under  the  guidance  of  the 
chairman  of  the  department  of  physics. 


Arts-Engineering     91 


Aiis  -Indiuo  i.i I  Engineering 

152  credit  hours  needed  fot  B.A.  and  U.S. 

Sophomore  Yc.it,  First Semestei  \  1 7  credit  hours) 

Language  (5) 
Math  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  HI  (4) 

Phys  -I  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

IE  5  InduNtri.il  Organization  Models  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

1  anguage  (5) 
Math  233  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

IE  18  Information  Processing  Theory  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  i'irst  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Language (4) 
Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

IE  205  Engineering  Statistics  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Language  (3) 
IE  206  Operation  Research  Techniques  (4) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 
Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

IE  101  Fundamentals  of  Manufacturing  Engineering 

(4) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 
Distribution  Electives  (9) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 


IE  102 

Summer 
IE  100 


Work  Systems  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Electives  (6) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 


Industrial  employment  should  precede  fifth 
year.  Consult  chairman  of  department. 


Note:  Engineering  science  electives  must  be  cleared  with  the 
department  of  industrial  engineering. 


Arts  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Engineering  Mechanics 

155- 1  (il  credit  hours  needed  fot  IV A.  and  U.S. 
Sophomore  Year,  First  Semestet  (17  i  redit  hours 

language  (5) 
Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  ( 17  credit  hours) 

Language (5) 
Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

CE  1 1  Engineering  Graphics  (3) 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Language  (4) 
Met  63  Engineering  Materials  and  Processes  (3) 

or 
Met  91  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

ME  101  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  I  (1) 

ME  104  Thermodynamics  I  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

Language  (3) 
Mech  1  1  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

Mech  13  Materials  Testing  Laboratory  (1) 

Math  208  Complex  Variables 

or 
Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

EE  160  Electrical  Circuits  and  Apparatus  (3) 

EE  161  Electrical  Problems  (1) 

EE  162  Dynamo  Laboratory  (1) 

ME  102  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  II  (2) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

ME  105  Thermodyanmics  II  (3) 

ME  108  Laboratory  I  (2) 

Mech  102  Dynamics  (3) 

Mech  203  Advanced  Strength  of  Materials  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

ME  231  Fluid  Mechanics 

or 
CE121  Mechanics  of  Fluids  (3) 

CE  123  Fluid  Mechanics  Laboratory  (1) 

ME  242  Mechanical  Vibrations  (3) 

ME  109  Laboratory  (2) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 


92     Arts-Engineering 


Summer 
ME  100 


Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (16-17  credit  hours) 


Summer  employment  should  precede  fifth 
year.  Consult  department  chairman. 


Arts-Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

156-167  credit  hours  needed  for  the  B.A.  and  B.S., 
depending  on  option  selected. 


Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 
Met  63 


Language  (5) 

Engineering  Materials  and  Processes 

or 
Met  91  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-1 6  credit  hours) 


Language  (5) 

Met  10 

Metallurgy  Laboratory  (1) 

Mech  1 

Statics  (3) 

EE  160 

Electrical  Circuits  and  Apparatus 

and 

EE  161 

Electrical  Problems 

Phys 31 

or 

Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechai 

Distribution  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Language  (4) 
Met  207  Electron  and  Crystal  Structure  (3) 

Met  210  Metallurgical  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Mech  11  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

ChE  60  Engineering  in  Chemical  Manufacturing  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (18  credit  hours) 

Language  (3) 
Met  208  Phase  Diagram  and  Transformations  (3) 

Met  21  8  Mechanical  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Met  307  Structure  and  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods 

or 
Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

Distribution  Electives  (9) 


ME  166 

Mech  102 
Met  304 
Met  101 


Summer 
Met  100 


Procedures  for  Mechanical  Design 

or 

Dynamics  (2-3) 

Extractive  Metallurgy  I  (4) 

Professional  Development  (1) 

Distribution  Electives  (9) 


Industrial  employment  should  precede  fifth 
year.  Consult  chairman  of  department. 


Note:  students  selecting  Research  Option  should  elect  Met. 
240,  Research  Techniques,  in  the  second  semester  of  the 
senior  year. 


Arts-Engineering     93 


Biology 


Professors 

Richard  Griffith  Malsbcrger,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Saul  Benjamin  Barber,  Ph.D. 

Thomas  C.  Cheng,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Center  for  Health  Sciences 
Sidney  Samuel  Herman,  Ph.D.,  Director.  South  Jersey 
Wetlands  Institute 
Basil  Waldo  Parker,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Bradford  Breckenridge  Owen,  Ph.D. 
Hayden  Nelson  Pritchard,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professor 

Steven  S.  Krawiec,  Ph.D. 
Ann  Cali,  Ph.D. 

Adjunct  Professors 

Edward  John  Benz.  M.D. 
Eugene  M.  Landis.  M.D.,  Ph.D. 
George  John  Jackson,  Ph.D. 
Jack  B.  Pearce,  Ph.D. 
Kenneth  E.  Wolf,  Ph.D. 


The  biology  department  offers  students  choice  of  two 
majors,  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  biology  and  the  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  biology.  The  principal  differences  in  requirements 
for  the  two  majors  are: 

1.  The  B.A.  course  of  study  requires  the  student  to  com- 
plete the  distribution  requirements  of  the  College  of  Arts  and 
Science  in  addition  to  the  requirements  of  the  biology  major. 

2.  The  B.S.  course  of  study  requires  that,  in  addition  to 
the  requirements  of  the  biology  major,  the  student  complete 
a  group  of  courses  with  the  only  elective  restriction  being 
that  they  be  outside  the  fields  of  natural  science  and  mathe- 
matics. 

3.  The  B.A.  curriculum  has  a  total  of  53  hours  of  courses 
in  the  major  requirements  as  compared  to  82  in  the  B.S.  cur- 
riculum. 

The  B.A.  major  in  biology  is  not  designed  specifically  for 
pre-professional  training  but  it  does  exceed  the  minimum 
requirements  for  admission  to  medical,  dental  and  allied  pro- 
fessional colleges  as  well  as  to  study  for  advanced  degrees  in 
most  of  the  fields  of  graduate  biology.  It  is,  therefore,  recom- 
mended to  those  students  who  desire  an  adequate  back- 
ground in  biology  combined  with  the  cultural  background  of 
the  arts  college  distribution  requirements. 

The  B.S.  major  in  biology  is  designed  specifically  for 


optimal  scientifn  preparation  foi  entry  into  professional 
graduate  training  in  medicine,  dentistry  and  allied  pi" 
onal  fields  as  well  in  graduate  biology.  Such  pre  prof 

si. in. 1 1  Ir.miiiij;  is  pun  hascd    'I  the  i  "'.:  "I  .i  1,'iliu  I  ion  ill  llir 

number  of  non  si  ien<  c  courses  a  student  will  be  able  to  take 
during  a  normal  four  year  undergraduate  program.  The  stu- 
dent should,  therefore,  consider  carefully  before  committing 
himself  to  cither  program.  An  initial  choice  of  one  or  the 
other  program  is  revisablc,  although  this  becomes  more  diffi- 
cult after  the  freshman  year. 

The  Bachelor  ol  Arts  Major 

Required  Courses 

Biol  21  Principles  of  Biology  (3) 

Biol  22  Introduction  to  Biology  Laboratory  (1  ) 

Biol  28  Genetics  (3) 

Plus  nine  hours  of  organismic  biology  including  one  course  in 
botany,  six  hours  of  environmental  biology,  and  six  hours  of 
cellular  biology. 

Organismic  Biology 

Biol  34  Comparative  Anatomy  (4) 

Biol  303  Advanced  Invertebrate  Zoology  (3) 

Biol  313  General  Histology  (3) 

Biol  314  Vertebrate  Embryology  (3) 

Biol  331  Non-vascular  Plants  (3) 

Biol  332  Vascular  Plants  (3) 


Environmental  Biology  (3) 


Biol  306 
Biol  309 
Biol  333 
Biol  324 
Biol  317 
Biol  361 

Cellular  Biology 

Biol  35 
Biol  320 
Biol  353 
Biol  333 
Biol  371,  372 
Biol  322 


Ecology  (3) 

Aquatic  Biology  (3) 

Symbiosis  (3) 

Animal  Behavior  (3) 

Evolution  (3) 

Sanitary  Microbiology  (3) 


Microbiology  (3) 
Cell  Physiology  (3) 
Virology  (3) 
Symbiosis  (3) 
Biochemistry  (3) 
Animal  Physiology  (3) 


Additional  Required  Courses 

Math  41  BMSS  Calculus  (3) 

Math  41  BMSS  Probability  (3) 

Math  43  BMSS  Linear  Algebra  (3) 

Chem  21,  22         Chemical  Principles  &  Laboratory  (4) 

Chem  51,  52,  55  Organic  Chemistry  &  Laboratory  (8) 

Chem  39  Analytical  Chemistry 

or 
Chem  194  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Phys  13,  14  General  Physics  and  Physics  Laboratory  (4) 


94      Biology 


Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 


Freshman  Year 

Biol  21 
Biol  22 
Biol  28 
Chem  21 
Chem  22 
Math  41 
Math  42 
Phys  11,12 

Sophomore  Year 


Principles  of  Biology  (3) 

Introduction  to  Biology  Laboratory  (1) 

Genetics  (3) 

Chemical  Principles  I  (4) 

Chemical  Principles  I  Laboratory  (1) 

BMSS  Calculus  (3) 

BMSS  Probability  (3) 

Introductory  Physics  I  (5) 


Chem 

51 

Chem 

52 

Chem 

55 

Phys 

L3,  14 

Math  43 

Biol 

Junior  Year 

Chem 

39 

Chem 

194 

Biol 

Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Organic  Chemistry  Laboratory  (2) 

General  Physics  (4) 

BMSS  Linear  Algebra  (3) 

Electives  (3  or  6) 


Analytical  Chemistry 

or 

Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Electives  (3,  6,  or  9) 


Senior  Year 

Biol  Electives  (3,  6,  or  9) 

The  Bachelor  of  Science  Major 

Required  Courses 

Biol  21  Principles  of  Biology  (3) 

Biol  22  Introduction  to  Biology  Lab  (1) 

Biol  28  Genetics  (3) 

Plus  nine  hours  from  each  of  the  following  areas  including  at 
least  one  course  in  botany. 

Organismic  Biology 

Biol  34  Comparative  Anatomy  (4) 

Biol  303  Advanced  Invertebrate  Zoology  (3) 

Biol  313  General  Histology  (3) 

Biol  314  Vertebrate  Embryology  (3) 

Biol  331  Non-vascular  Plants 

Biol  332  Vascular  Plants  (3) 

Environmental  Biology 

Biol  306  Ecology  (3) 

Biol  309  Aquatic  Biology  (3) 

Biol  333  Symbiosis  (3) 

Biol  324  Animal  Behavior  (3) 

Biol  317  Evolution  (3) 

Biol  361  Sanitary  Microbiology  (3) 


Cellular  Biology 

Biol  35 
Biol  320 
Biol  353 
Biol  333 
Biol  371,  372 
Biol  322 


Microbiology  (3) 
Cell  Physiology  (3) 
Virology  (3) 
Symbiosis  (3) 
Biochemistry  (6) 
Animal  Physiology 


Additional  R 

Math  21,  22, 
Math  41,42, 


Chem  21 
Chem  22 
Chem  51 
Chem  52 
Chem  55 
Chem  90 
Chem  191 
Chem  192 
Phys  11 
Phys 12 
Phys 21 
Phys  22 
Geol  1 


Psych  3 
Psych  9 
Phil  261 


equired  Courses 

23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  (12) 

43,  44      BMSS  Calculus,  Probability  and  Linear 

Algebra  (12) 

or 

Introductory  Chemical  Principles  (4) 

Chemical  Principles  Lab  (1) 

Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Organic  Chemistry  Lab  (2) 

Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Physical  Chemistry  Lab  (1) 

Introductory  Physics  I  (4) 

Introductory  Physics  Lab  I  (1) 

Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

and  one  of  the  following: 
Psychology  as  a  Natural  Science  (3) 
Statistical  Analysis  (3) 
Philosophy  of  the  Natural  Sciences  (3) 


Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 


Principles  of  Biology  and  Lab  (4) 

Genetics  (3) 

Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  I,  II  (8) 

or 

BMSS  Calculus  and  Probability  (6) 

Chemical  Principles  I  and  Lab  (5) 

Introductory  Physics  I  and  Lab  (5) 


Freshman  Year 

Biol  21,  22 
Biol  28 
Math  21,  22 

Math  41,42 
Chem  21,22 
Phys 11,  12 

Sophomore  Year 

Chem  51,  53,  55  Organic  Chemistry  and  Lab  (8) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

or 
Math  42,  43  Calculus  and  Linear  Algebra  (6) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  and  Lab  (5) 

Chem  90  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Biol  Electives  (6) 

Psych  Elective 

or 
Phil  Elective  (3) 


Biology     95 


Junior  Yeai 

Cliom  191,  192  Physical  Chemistry  (4) 

Gcol  i  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Psych  Elective 

or 

Phil  Elective  (3) 

Biol  Blectives  (6-12) 


Senior  Year 
Biol 


Elcctivcs  (6-12) 


( tndergraduate  Courses 

21.  Principles  ot  Biology  (3) 

Introduction  to  biology  by  study  of  selected  principles. 
Topics  covered  include  cell  structure  and  function,  plant  and 
animal  structure  and  function,  diversity  and  evolution  of 
organisms.  Three  lectures  per  week. 

22.  Introduction  to  Biology  Laboratory  (1) 
Laboratory  observations  and  experiments  to  illustrate  how 
biological  information  is  acquired.  Designed  primarily  as  a 
laboratory  to  accompany  Biology  21.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
21  previously  or  concurrently.  One  3-hour  laboratory  per 
week.  Graded  only  pass-fail. 

28.  Genetics  (3) 

The  basic  laws  governing  inheritance  in  plants  and  animals, 
chromosome  behavior,  nature  of  genes.  The  relation  of  en- 
vironmental modifications,  hybrid  variation,  and  mutations 
to  the  mechanics  of  evolution. 

34.  Comparative  Vertebrate  Anatomy  (4) 

A  course  in  vertebrate  zoology  with  emphasis  on  the  study  of 
homologous  body  structures  in  the  various  vertebrate  classes 
and  their  relationship  to  the  functional  demands  of  habit  and 
environment  in  each  class.  Detailed  dissections  of  representa- 
tive vertebrates  are  made  in  the  laboratory.  Two  lectures  and 
two  laboratory  periods  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  21  and 
22,  or  equivalent;  sophomore  standing. 

35.  Microbiology  (3) 

Emphasis  on  the  appearance,  physiology,  and  taxonomy  of 
prokaryotes.  Selected  subjects  pertaining  to  relations 
between  man  and  microorganisms.  Prerequisite:  a  laboratory 
course  in  biology. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

221.  Undergraduate  Research  (3) 

Laboratory  work,  field  work,  or  both  depending  upon  the 
interest  and  competence  of  the  student.  Prerequisites:  junior 
standing  and  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 


2.11.  N.itui.il  History  and  Urology  (3) 

A  i  oni  cntratcd  I  nurse  in  recognition  of  species  of  plants  and 
.num. iK  and  study  of  their  interrelationships  in  natural  and 
altered  environments.  Lectures  and  seminars  in  use  of  keys 
and  preservation  of  collections.  Designed  for  secondary 
school  teachers  in  life  sciences.  Prerequisites:  graduate 
standing  or  consent  of  instructor. 

232.  Natural  History  and  Ecology  Workshop  (3) 

Field  and  laboratory  work  in  natural  history  and  erology. 

Must  be  taken  concurrently  with  Biol.  231. 

241.  Ecology  of  Wetlands  (6) 

Study  of  plants  and  animals  of  wetlands  areas  and  their  inter- 
relationship with  the  environment.  The  importance  of  the 
wetlands  to  the  marine  environment  and  methods  of  conser- 
vation. Independent  study  will  form  part  of  the  course. 
Primarily  designed  for  secondary  school  teachers  of  the 
sciences.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  (Offered  only  in 
summer  session  at  Lehigh's  South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute.) 

261.  Special  Topics  in  Biology  (1-3) 

Research,  conferences,  and  reports  on  selected  topics  not 
covered  in  the  general  undergraduate  offerings.  May  be  taken 
more  than  once  for  credit. 

262.  Special  Topics  in  Biology  (1-3) 
Continuation  of  Biology  261. 

303.  Advanced  Invertebrate  Zoology  (3) 

A  detailed  survey  of  representative  invertebrates.  Anatomical 

and  histological  examination  of  selected  types.  Concepts  of 

evolution  and  speciation.  One  lecture  and  two  laboratories 

per  week.  Prerequisite:  two  semesters  of  biology,  one  with 

laboratory. 

306.  Ecology  (3) 

The  basic  principles  of  ecological  interrelationships;  training 
in  use  of  analytical  keys  and  reference  collections  for  the 
identification  of  plants  and  animals;  field  trips  for  the  study 
of  interrelationships  of  living  organisms.  Two  lectures  and 
one  laboratory  period  or  field  trip  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
two  semesters  of  biology,  one  with  laboratory. 

309.  Aquatic  Biology  (3) 

Lectures  on  the  physical,  chemical  and  biological  aspects  of 
the  fresh  water  environment  including  cyclic  and  seasonal 
changes.  A  consideration  of  the  major  groups  of  organisms 
and  their  interactions.  Influence  of  man-made  alterations 
including  impoundments  and  waste  disposal  methods.  Two 
lectures  and  one  laboratory  period  or  field  trip  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Biol.  21  or  22  or  equivalent. 


96     Biology 


313.  General  Histology  (3) 

The  techniques  of  preservation  and  preparation  of  animal  and 
plant  tissues  for  microscopical  study;  comparative  studies  of 
fresh  and  preserved  tissues.  One  lecture  and  two  laboratory 
periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  21  and  22  or  equivalent, 
Biol.  34  or  equivalent  recommended. 


332.  Evolution  of  Vascular  Plants  (3) 
A  comparative  study  of  the  ontogenetic  and  phylogenetic 
development  of  vascular  plants.  The  life  cycles,  ecological 
importance  and  cellular  morphology  of  the  higher  plants  are 
examined.  Emphasis  on  the  plants  of  Pennsylvania.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor  or  Biol.  21. 


314.  Vertebrate  Embryology  (3) 

A  study  of  reproduction  from  germ  cell  formation  through 
establishment  of  the  principal  organ  systems  of  the  vertebrate 
body.  Various  mechanical  and  physiological  problems  con- 
fronting the  growing  embryo  are  considered,  and  direct  ob- 
servation of  whole  mounts,  sections,  and  living  material  are 
made  in  the  laboratory.  Two  lectures  and  one  laboratory 
period  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  34  or  equivalent. 

317.  (Geol.  317)  Evolution  (3) 

The  origin  of  species  and  higher  categories  with  emphasis  on 

animals.  Isolating  mechanisms,  population  structure,  rates  of 

evolution,  extinction.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  21  or  consent  of 

instructor. 

320.  Cell  Physiology  (3) 

The  fundamental  processes  of  life  at  the  cellular  level,  in- 
cluding permeability  and  related  membrane  phenomena,  en- 
zymatic transformations,  respiration,  photosynthesis,  gene 
function,  bioelectricity,  and  other  aspects  of  neuron  func- 
tion, contractility  and  other  kinds  of  protoplasmic  motility. 
Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  or  two  semesters  of 
biology,  at  least  one  with  laboratory,  and  Chem.  52. 

322.  Animal  Physiology  (3) 

The  physiology  of  organs  and  organ  systems  in  animals.  Em- 
phasis on  mammalian  systems,  but  lower  vertebrates  and 
invertebrates  are  also  included.  Functions  studied  include 
digestion,  nutrition,  metabolism,  excretion,  respiration,  cir- 
culation, locomotion,  nervous  and  chemical  coordination. 
Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  or  two  semesters  of 
biology,  at  least  one  with  laboratory,  and  Chem.  52. 

324.  Animal  Behavior  (3) 

Discussion  of  the  behavior  of  invertebrates  and  vertebrates 
and  analysis  of  the  physiological  mechanisms  responsible  for 
behavioral  actions.  Emphasis  on  perception,  environmental 
stimuli,  and  adaptive  value  of  specific  behavior  patterns.  Pre- 
requisite: consent  of  instructor  or  Biol.  21. 

331.  Non-vascular  Plants  (3) 

A  comparative  study  of  the  ontogenetic  and  phylogenetic 
development  of  algae,  fungi  and  bryophytes.  The  life  cycles 
and  ecological  importance  of  representative  organisms  are 
examined.  Two  lectures  and  one  laboratory.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor  of  Biol.  21. 


333.  Symbiosis  (3) 

Consideration  of  factors  governing  symbiotic  relationships, 
including  phoresis,  commensalism,  parasitism,  and  mutual- 
ism. Lectures  and  demonstrations  emphasizing  the  theoretical 
and  applied  aspects  of  morphological  and  physiological 
adaptation,  nutrient  assimilation  and  metabolism,  develop- 
ment, host  reactions,  and  the  dynamics  of  host-symbiont 
interactions  are  presented.  Laboratory  experiments  designed 
to  acquaint  the  student  with  techniques,  evaluation  of  data, 
and  to  demonstrate  principles  are  carried  out.  Prerequisite: 
Biol.  21.  Two  lectures  and  one  laboratory  period  per  week. 

336.  Evolution  of  Land  Plants  (3) 

Comparative  study  of  the  ontogenetic  and  phylogenetic 
development  of  plants  as  they  invaded  the  terrestrial  environ- 
ment. The  algae  are  studied  briefly,  but  stress  is  placed  on  the 
bryophytes  and  tracheophytes  (land  plants).  The  life  cycles 
of  representative  plants  are  examined  in  detail.  Two  lectures 
and  a  laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  21  or  its  equivalent. 

341.  Biology  of  Marine  Animals  (6) 

Emphasis  on  comparative  morphology  and  physiology  of 
marine  animals.  Field  trips  for  ecological  observation  and 
collection  as  well  as  anatomical  study  and  physiological  ex- 
perimentation. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  and  two 
semesters  of  biology.  (Offered  only  in  summer  session  at 
Lehigh's  South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute.) 

353.  Virology  (3) 

A  lecture  course  on  bacterial  and  animal  viruses  including 
taxonomy,  physical  and  chemical  properties,  and  the  bio- 
chemical transformations  of  infected  cells.  Prerequisite:  a 
course  in  microbiology  or  biochemistry. 

361.  Sanitary  Microbiology  (3) 

Laboratory,  field  work,  and  reports  on  the  microbiology  of 
water  supplies,  waste  disposal,  and  food  processing.  Prerequi- 
site: one  semester  each  of  microbiology  and  analytical 
chemistry. 

371.  (Chem.  371)  Elements  of  Biochemistry  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Chem.  371. 

372.  (Chem.  372)  Advanced  Biochemistry  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Chem.  372. 

For  Graduates 

The  biology  department  accepts  a  limited  number  of  students 
who  are  interested  in  graduate  study  towards  the  Ph.D. 
degree.  Candidates  for  M.S.  degrees  are  also  accepted  but 


Biology      97 


emphasis  is  on  the  formei  degree.  Currently  the  dcpartmcnl 
averages  aboul  twenty  lull  time  graduate  students  in  resi 
dence  each  year. 

The  training  program  initially  emphasizes  breadth  in 
biolog\  followed  In  concentration  iii  .1  special  field  of  in- 
terest. Because  ol  the  small  si/c  of  the  department  staff  and 
the  restricted  number  of  graduate  students,  stafl  and  students 
work  together  vers  closel) .  especially  during  the  years  ol 
student  specialization. 

The  first  two  or  two  and  one-half  years  are  devoted 
primarily  to  course  work  but  some  of  these  are  special  re- 
search and  readings  courses  that  may  serve  as  starting  points 
for  thesis  research.  Stall  members  normally  direct  student 
research  programs  only  in  the  areas  encompassed  by  their 
own  research  interests.  These  are:  comparative  physiology  of 
nerve  and  muscle,  capillary  circulation,  virology,  biological 
oceanography,  histochemistry,  aquatic  biology,  biological 
aspects  of  water  pollution,  symbiosis  and  parasitism,  and 
biology  of  nucleic  acids.  Interdisciplinary  programs  in 
biological  aspects  of  marine  sciences  may  also  be  arranged  in 
cooperation  with  the  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental 
Sciences. 

Special  department  requirements  for  the  M.S.  degree  in- 
clude one  year  of  graduate  biochemistry,  two  semesters  of 
graduate  statistics  and  at  least  one  semester  of  research,  as 
well  as  passing  an  M.S.  qualifying  examination.  Requirements 
for  the  Ph.D.  degree  are  determined  by  the  student's  special 
committee  and  are  tailored  to  fit  his  special  needs  and  in- 
terests, but  also  include  passing  a  special  examination  as  well 
as  a  defense  of  the  Ph.D.  thesis. 

The  prerequisite  for  graduate  work  in  biology  is  under- 
graduate training  in  biology,  chemistry,  physics  and  mathe- 
matics approximately  equivalent  to  that  taken  by  biology 
majors  at  Lehigh  University.  Minor  deficiencies  in  these  areas 
may  be  completed  during  the  first  year  of  graduate  study, 
usually,  however,  without  graduate  credit.  Candidates  for 
admission  to  graduate  study  in  biology  should  take  the 
Graduate  Record  (G.R.E.)  Advanced  Test  in  Biology  as  well 
as  the  G.R.E.  Verbal  and  Mathematical  Aptitude  tests. 
Failure  to  include  results  of  these  examinations  with  applica- 
tion for  admission  can  seriously  delay  or  prevent  action  on 
the  application. 

Current  departmental  projects  of  special  interest  are  as 
follows:  neurophysiological  mechanisms  in  animal  behavior; 
viral  diseases  of  fresh-water  fishes;  biological  surveys  of  lakes; 
thermal  and  industrial  pollution  of  the  Delaware  River;  salt 
marsh  ecology;  periphyton  and  water  quality;  cytochemistry 
of  lymphocystis  tumor  cells;  capillary  permeability,  porosity 
and  dye  cinematography  studies;  physiology  of  parasites, 
physiological  ecology  of  marine  symbionts,  invertebrate  im- 
munobiology,  and  nucleic  acids  of  microorganisms. 

402.  Comparative  Animal  Physiology  (3) 
Lectures  and  seminars  on  selected  areas  in  the  comparative 
physiology  of  animals.  Introduction  to  the  current  literature 
of  subjects  studied.  These  include  mechanisms  of  osmotic 
control,  temperature  effects,  nerve  and  muscle  physiology 
and  others.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  320  or  equivalent. 


405.  Special  lopus  in  Biology  (1-3) 

Research,  >  onferenccs,  and  reports  mi  selei  ted  lopii  s  mil 

covered  in  the  general  graduate  offerings,  Maj  be  taken  more 
than  once  lor  credit, 

•100.  Hiologii  al  Seminar  (1  ) 

An  advanced  seminal  in  current  developments  including  de 
partmental  research.  Required  for  candidates  for  graduate 
degrees.  May  be  taken  more  than  once  for  credit. 

407.  Biological  Research  (3) 

Investigations  in  any  phase  of  the  biological  sciences  accord- 
ing to  the  student's  preparation  and  interests. 

408.  Biological  Research  (3) 
Continuation  of  Biol.  407. 

409.  Advanced  Morphology  (3) 

A  laboratory  course  in  special  phases  of  morphology,  such  as 
comparative  osteology,  comparative  morphology,  or  embry- 
ology of  the  vertebrates,  etc.,  to  meet  the  individual  interest 
of  the  student.  Offered  as  required. 

411.  General  Cytology  (3) 

Conferences,  assigned  readings,  and  laboratory  work  on  the 
structural  features  of  the  cell  in  relation  to  cellular  function 
and  on  modern  methods  of  preparing  living  and  fixed  tissues 
for  cytological  study.  Included  arc  special  studies  of  the  cy- 
tology of  microorganisms.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  313  or  its 
equivalent. 

412.  Biological  Membranes  (3) 

Membranes,  structures  essential  to  the  organization  of  pro- 
karyotes  and  eukaryotes,  will  be  studied  in  terms  of  their 
appearances,  distributions,  compositions,  molecular  organiza- 
tions, and  functions.  The  problems  of  genetic  determination 
and  synthesis  of  membranes  will  also  be  approached. 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  membrane  models  generated  by 
results  from  current  research.  Readings,  lectures,  and  recita- 
tions. 

414.  Advanced  Ecology  (3) 

Conferences  and  field  work  with  emphasis  in  such  areas  as 
aquatic  ecology,  limnology,  and  fisheries  biology.  Whenever 
possible  this  will  include  participation  in  research  problems 
conducted  by  the  Water  Resources  Council  of  the  Lehigh 
Office  of  Research.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 
Offered  as  required. 

415.  Cytochemistry  (3) 

A  study  of  morphological  and  biochemical  events  during  cell 
growth  and  differentiation  including  lectures,  labs,  and 
student  reports  on  current  literature.  Special  emphasis  is 
placed  on  developmental  patterns  and  laboratory  procedures 
of  the  cytochemist.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 
Offered  as  required. 


98     Biology 


416.  Immunology  (3) 

Consideration  of  antigen-antibody  systems  from  theoretical 
and  practical  aspects.  Lectures  and  reports  on  the  structure 
and  origins  of  antigens  and  antibodies  and  the  mechanisms  of 
agglutination,  precipitation,  complement  fixation,  anaphy- 
laxis, etc.  Laboratory  work  on  preparation,  standardization, 
and  assay  of  antigens  and  antibodies.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  353, 
Chem.  371  or  equivalent. 

417.  Marine  Ecology  (3) 

An  advanced  course  in  the  ecology  of  the  marine  environ- 
ment. Study  of  the  physical  and  chemical  factors,  organisms 
and  their  interrelations.  Ecological  theory  pertaining  to  popu- 
lation dynamics  and  energy  flow.  Two  lectures  and  one 
laboratory  period  per  week.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

418.  Biological  Oceanography  (3) 

Surveys  of  marine  plant  and  animal  plankton,  nekton  and 
benthos.  Composition  of  various  groups,  productivity,  inter- 
relationships of  plants  and  animals  and  the  role  of  micro- 
organisms in  the  sea.  Three  lectures  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

421.  Morphogenesis  of  the  Lower  Invertebrates  (3) 
The  structural  and  chemical  aspects  of  normal  and  teratologi- 
cal  development  among  the  acoelomate  and  pseudocoelomate 
phyla  are  considered  from  the  standpoint  of  cell  and  tissue 
differentiation,  comparative  morphological  and  physiological 
functions,  exogenous  stimulatory  factors,  and  metabolic  re- 
quirements. 


435.  Ethology  (3) 

Advanced  topics  in  behavior,  including  stereotyped  action 
patterns,  receptor  and  central  nervous  information  proces- 
sing, and  techniques  of  behavioral  investigation.  Seminar 
format.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

441.  Marine  Botany  (3) 

A  study  of  the  morphological,  physiological,  biochemical  and 
ecological  features  of  those  plants  found  primarily  in  the  salt 
water  environment.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  evolu- 
tionary and  ecological  significance  of  the  phytoplankton, 
benthic  algae  and  rooted  aquatic  plant  divisions  associated  in 
and  near  the  oceans.  The  economic  importance  of  these 
plants  will  be  considered.  Laboratory  work,  field  work  and 
library  searches  and  reports. 

442.  Marine  Zooplankton  (3) 

A  comprehensive  study  of  neritic  and  oceanic  plankton. 
Studies  on  the  life  history,  morphology  and  distribution  of 
both  holoplanktonic  and  meroplanktonic  animals.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor. 

480.  (Geol.  480)  Marine  Science  Seminar  (1) 
An  advanced  interdisciplinary  seminar  on  various  problems  of 
marine  sciences,  with  visiting  speakers  and  student  presenta- 
tions. May  be  substituted  for  Biol.  406. 


423.  The  Biology  of  Transplantation  (3) 
The  mechanisms,  both  cellular  and  humoral,  responsible  for 
the  recognition  of  'self  from  'nonself  in  the  animal  kingdom 
and  the  reactive  processes  resulting  from  such  are  explored 
from  the  viewpoint  of  immunity,  nutritional  uptake,  and 
ontogenetic  factors. 

425.  Biological  Electron  Microscopy  (3) 
Uses  of  the  transmission  and  scanning  electron  microscopes 
in  biology.  Laboratory  work  in  the  preparation  of  biological 
specimens  for  study  with  both  kinds  of  E.M.'s  and  some  in- 
dependent work  at  the  transmission  E.M.  Study  of  current 
information  on  cell  ultrastructure. 

433.  Growth  and  Development  in  Plants  (3) 
A  comparative  study  of  embryo  and  cellular  development  in 
the  plant  kingdom  including  the  algae,  bryophytes  and 
tracheophytes.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  morphology,  physi- 
ology and  the  role  of  macromolecular  substances  during 
growth  and  differentiation.  Literature  search,  experimental 
work  and  oral  reports.  Two  lectures,  one  laboratory. 


Biology     99 


Chemical  Engineering 


Professors 

Leonard  Andrew  Wenzcl,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Alan  Shivers  Foust,  Ph.  D.,  McGinn  Projcssor 
Curtis  William  Clump,  Ph.D. 
Robert  William  Coughlin,  Ph.D. 
William  Edward  Schiesser,  Ph.D. 
Fred  P.  Stein,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

William  L.  Luyben,  Ph.D. 
Gary  Wayne  Poehlein,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Marvin  Charles,  Ph.D. 
Anthony  J.  McHugh,  Ph.D. 
Leslie  H.  Sperling,  Ph.D. 

Lecturers 

Jacob  Myer  Geist,  Ph.D. 
Abraham  Lapin,  Ph.D. 
Clyde  McKinley,  Ph.D. 

Research  Associates 

Francis  X.  Hasselberger,  Ph.D. 
Joseph  V.  Hoffman,  Ph.D. 


Chemical  engineers  play  important  roles  in  all  activities 
bearing  on  the  chemical  process  industry.  These  include  the 
functions  of  research,  development,  design,  plant  construc- 
tion, plant  operation  and  management,  corporate  planning, 
technical  sales,  and  market  analysis.  The  industries  that  pro- 
duce chemical  and/or  certain  physical  changes  in  fluids  in- 
cluding petroleum  and  petrochemicals,  rubbers  and  polymers, 
pharmaceuticals,  metals,  industrial  and  fine  chemicals,  foods, 
and  industrial  gases  have  found  chemical  engineers  to  be  vital 
to  their  success.  Chemical  engineers  are  also  important  parti- 
cipants in  pollution  abatement,  space  exploration,  and 
national  defense  programs. 

Preparation  for  this  broad  field  requires  a  sound  back- 
ground in  the  fundamental  sciences  of  physics,  chemistry, 
and  mathematics  plus  a  general  background  training  in  the 
application  of  these  fundamentals  to  carrying  forward  into 
industrial  production  the  new  products  and  processes  dis- 
covered in  the  laboratory.  This  latter  training  is  directly 
called  Chemical  Engineering.  In  accord  with  this  philosophy, 
the  student  is  not  trained  for  any  specific  industry,  but  the 


education  is  sufficiently  broad  that  a  graduate  is  competent 
to  enter  any  ot  the  chemical  and  allied  industries, 

The  aim  of  the  curriculum  is  to  develop  in  the  student 
understanding  of  the  scientific  fundamentals,  an  ability  with 
mathematical  tools,  and  the  habits  of  precise  analysis  of  pro- 
cess engineering  problems  that  will  allow  him  to  function 
effectively  in  this  broad  field,  and  to  grow  into  positions  of 
responsibility.  Of  course  these  technical  abilities  must  be 
coupled  with  an  understanding  of  the  economic,  sociological, 
and  cultural  environment  within  which  the  engineer  operates. 
The  curriculum  includes  a  relatively  large  commitment  to 
education  in  these  latter  areas. 

The  program  is  also  designed  to  prepare  a  student  for 
graduate  study  in  chemical  engineering  or  in  peripheral  fields. 
Further  study  at  the  graduate  level  leading  to  advanced  de- 
grees is  highly  desirable  in  preparation  for  careers  in  the  more 
highly  technical  aspects  of  manufacturing.  The  increasing 
complexity  of  modern  manufacturing  methods  requires 
superior  training  for  men  working  in  the  research,  develop- 
ment, and  design  fields  or  for  teaching. 

Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 

Freshman  Year  (see  p.  45) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

ChE  41  Cascade  Processing  Concepts  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

ChE  52  Fundamentals  of  Transport  Phenomena  (4) 

Electives  (6) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (15—18  credit  hours) 

Chem  191,  192  Physical  Chemistry  &  Lab  (4) 
Chem  51,  53  Organic  Chemistry  &  Lab  (4) 
ChE  167,  169       Unit  Operations  &  Lab  I  (4) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

ChE  286  Modeling,  Simulation,  and  Control  (3) 

ChE  170  Unit  Operations  Laboratory  II  (1) 

ChE  210  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  (4) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Electives  (6) 


Summer 
ChE  100 


Industrial  Employment 


1 00     Chemical  Engineering 


Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

ChE  302  Chemical  Engineering  Kinetics  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 
Electives  (9-12) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

ChE  174  Chemical  Plant  Design  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 
Electives  (9-12) 

Note:  The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load 
required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirement;  the  higher  re- 
presents the  normal  semester  load. 

The  30  hours  of  electives  must  be  taken  from  the  follow- 
ing distribution: 

Chemistry  6  hours 

Engineering  sciences,  physics,  and  mathematics  (including 

Mech.  1  or  Mech.  103)  12  hours 

Free  electives  12  hours 

Undergraduate  Courses 

41.  Cascade  Processing  Concepts  (3) 

Concepts  of  equilibrium  in  gas,  liquid,  and  solid  systems. 
Engineering  of  sequential  and  cascade  processing  methods 
from  technical  and  economic  considerations.  Computer 
modeling  of  leaching,  extraction,  and  distillation  processes. 
Prerequisite:  Engr.  1  or  equivalent  in  programming. 

52.  Introduction  to  Transport  Phenomena  (4) 

The  principles  of  transport  of  energy,  momentum,  and  mass 

and  the  analogies  between  them.  Transport  coefficients  and 

their  evaluation.  Applications  in  variable-property  fields 

within  a  phase.  Three  recitations  and  one  laboratory  per 

week. 

60.  Unit  Operations  Survey  (3) 

The  theory  of  heat,  mass,  and  momentum  transport.  Laminar 
and  turbulent  flow  of  real  fluids.  Heat  transfer  by  conduc- 
tion, convection,  and  radiation.  Application  to  a  wide  range 
of  operations  in  the  chemical  and  metallurgical  process  in- 
dustries. 

100.  Summer  Employment 

During  the  summer  (preferably  following  the  junior  year) 
candidates  for  the  degree  of  B.S.  in  Chemical  Engineering  are 
required  to  obtain  industrial  experience  through  employment 
for  at  least  eight  weeks  in  a  plant  or  laboratory  or  engineering 
office  and  submit  a  report  thereon. 

165.  Unit  Operations  I  (4) 

A  laboratory-related  study  of  the  implications  of  transport 
phenomena  and  conservation  principles  as  applied  to 
chemical  processing  equipment.  Two  recitations,  two  labora- 
tory periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Ch.E.  52. 


166.  Unit  Operations  II  (4) 

A  continuation  of  Ch.E.  165.  One  recitation,  three  labora- 
tory sessions  per  week. 

167.  Unit  Operations  (3) 

Implications  of  transport  phenomena  and  conservation  prin- 
ciples as  applied  to  chemical  processing  equipment.  Prerequi- 
site: Ch.E.  52. 

169.  Unit  Operations  Laboratory  I 

Laboratory  experience  in  unit  operations.  Prerequisite:  Ch.E. 
167  previously  or  concurrently. 

170.  Unit  Operations  Laboratory  II 

Laboratory  experience  with  steady  state  and  dynamic  process 
operations.  Prerequisite:  Ch.E.  286  previously  or  con- 
currently. 

174.  Chemical  Plant  Design  (3) 

A  study  of  the  technical  and  economic  aspects  of  the  design, 
location,  and  operation  of  chemical  plants.  Prerequisite: 
Ch.E.  166  or  Ch.E.  286. 

185.  Undergraduate  Research  I  (3) 

Independent  study  of  a  problem  involving  laboratory  investi- 
gation, design  or  theoretical  studies  under  the  guidance  of  a 
senior  faculty  member. 

186.  Undergraduate  Research  II  (3) 

A  continuation  of  the  project  begun  under  Ch.E.  185.  Prere- 
quisites: Ch.E.  185  and  consent  of  the  professor. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

200.  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  (3) 
Energy  relations  and  their  application  to  chemical  engineer- 
ing. Consideration  of  flow  and  non-flow  processes,  evaluation 
of  the  effect  of  temperature  and  pressure  on  thermodynamic 
properties  of  ideal  and  actual  fluids:  prediction  of  the  heat 
effects  accompanying  phase  changes  and  chemical  reactions, 
application  to  industrial  processes.  Prerequisites:  Ch.E.  51, 
Chem.  90  or  equivalent. 

210.  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  (4) 

Energy  relations  and  their  application  to  chemical  engineer- 
ing. Consideration  of  flow  and  non-flow  processes.  Evalua- 
tion of  the  effects  of  temperature  and  pressure  on  the  ther- 
modynamic properties  of  fluids.  Prediction  of  heat  effects 
accompanying  phase  changes  and  chemical  reactions.  Deter- 
mination of  chemical  and  physical  equilibrium  status.  Prere- 
quisite: Chem.  90  or  equivalent. 


Chemical  Engineering      1 01 


>86.  Modeling,  Simulation,  and  Control  (3) 
Review  "i  physical  laws  thai  arc  the  basis  for  mathemati    il 
models  ol  physical  systems.  Mathematical  modeling  <>i  im 
port. mi  chemical  engineering  systems.  Digital  and  analog 
computet  simulation  techniques  for  solution  ol  ordinary 
differential  equations  describing  chemical  processes.  Practical 
aspects  ol  process  control  system  design  and  operation.  Ex- 
posure to  control  equipment:  sensors,  transmitters,  control 
lersand  control  valves.  Prerequisite;  Math  205. 


>00.  Appie ntu  e  Teaching  in  Ch.E. 


(1-3) 


301.  Process  Design  (3) 

Study  of  the  strategy  ol  chemical  process  design  with  em- 
phasis on  optimum  order  ol  steps,  flow  diagrams,  energy 
balances,  recycle  ratios  and  their  effect  on  the  economics  of 
the  operation.  Survey  of  methods  for  ordering  equations. 
Discussion  of  process  optimization  for  non-linear  systems. 
Effects  of  uncertainty  in  process  design. 

302.  Chemical  Engineering  Kinetics  (3) 

The  application  of  chemical  kinetics  to  the  design  and  opera- 
tion of  reactors.  Interrelations  of  kinetics,  thermodynamics 
and  unit  operations  in  steady  or  unsteady  states.  Prerequi- 
sites: Ch.E.  166  or  286,  Ch.E.  200  or  equivalent,  previously 
or  concurrently. 

312.  (Chem.  312,  Met.  312)  Fundamentals  of  Corrosion  (3) 
For  description,  see  Chem.  312. 

315.  Transport  Processes  (3) 

A  combined  study  of  the  fundamentals  of  momentum  trans- 
port, energy  transport  and  mass  transport  and  the  analogies 
between  them.  Evaluation  of  transport  coefficients  for  single 
and  multicomponent  systems.  Analysis  of  transport  phenom- 
ena through  the  equations  of  continuity,  motion  and  energy. 

320.  Waste  Water  Control  (3) 

The  physical  processes  of  importance  in  the  design  of  indus- 
trial waste  water  treatment  facilities.  Topics  will  include  sedi- 
mentation and  filtration  processes  as  well  as  advanced 
methods  such  as  adsorption,  ion  exchange,  osmosis,  foaming, 
freezing,  and  hydrate  formation. 

321.  Fundamentals  of  Air  Pollution  (3) 

Introduction  to  the  problems  of  air  pollution  including  such 
topics  as:  sources  and  dispersion  of  pollutants;  sampling  and 
analysis;  technology  of  economics  and  control  processes; 
legislation  and  standards.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing  in  the 
college  of  engineering. 

350.  Special  Topics  (3) 

A  study  of  areas  in  chemical  engineering  not  covered  in 
courses  presently  listed  in  the  catalog.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit  if  different  material  is  presented. 


351.  Mathematical  Modeling  in  I  hemic. il  Engineering  (3) 
Review  ol  physical  laws  which  serve  .is  the  h.isis  lor  mathe- 
matical models  of  physical  systems.  Representative  models 
for  discrete,  itaged  and  distributed  systems  with  examples 
chosen  from  chemical  processing.  Numerical  solution  ol 
algebraic  and  differential  equations  with  emphasis  on 
chemical  engineering  systems  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
205  or  equivalent  and  a  knowledge  of  Fortran. 

360.  (M.E.  360)  Nuclear  Reactor  Engineering  (3) 
Sec  M.E.  360  for  description. 

380.  Design  Projects  (1-6) 

Design  project  work  as  a  member  of  a  team,  preferably  in- 
cluding students  from  differing  disciplines.  The  project  will 
attack  a  problem  which,  when  possible,  involves  one  of  the 
local  communities  or  industries.  Specific  projects  will  normal- 
ly be  guided  by  faculty  from  several  departments  with  con- 
sultants from  off  the  campus.  The  course  will  be  offered  both 
semesters  and  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

386.  Process  Control  (3) 

Laplace  transformation  and  transfer  functions,  frequency 
response,  feedback  and  feedforward  control.  Opcnloop  and 
closedloop  stability  analysis  using  root  locus  and  Nyquist 
techniques,  design  of  feedback  controllers  with  time  and 
frequency  domain  specifications.  Experimental  process  iden- 
tification, introduction  to  samplcd-data  control  theory.  Pre- 
requisite: Ch.E.  286  or  equivalent. 

392.  (Chem.  392)  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Introduction  to  concepts  of  polymer  science.  Kinetics  and 
mechanism  of  polymerization,  synthesis  and  processing  of 
polymers,  characterization.  Relationship  of  molecular  con- 
formation, structure  and  morphology  to  physical  and 
mechanical  properties.  A  term  paper  based  on  literature  or 
laboratory  work  is  required.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  90  or 
equivalent. 

393.  (Chem.  393,  Met.  343)  Physical  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Structural  and  physical  aspects  of  polymers  (organic,  inor- 
ganic, natural).  Molecular  and  atomic  basis  for  polymer  pro- 
perties and  behavior.  Characteristics  of  glassy,  crystalline,  and 
paracrystalline  states  (including  viscoelastic  and  relaxation 
behavior)  for  single  and  multi-component  systems.  Thermo- 
dynamics and  kinetics  of  transition  phenomena.  Structure, 
morphology,  and  behavior.  Prerequisite:  one  year  physical 
chemistry. 

394.  (Chem.  394)  Organic  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Organic  chemistry  of  synthetic  high  polymers.  Functionality 
and  reactivity  of  monomers  and  polymers.  Theory  of  step- 
growth  and  chain-growth  polymerization  in  homogeneous 
and  heterogeneous  media.  Polymerization  by  addition,  elimi- 
nation, substitution  and  coupling  reactions.  Ionic  fee-radical 
and  coordinate  catalysis.  Prerequisite:  one  year  physical 
chemistry  and  one  year  organic  chemistry. 


102     Chemical  Engineering 


For  Graduates 

The  department  of  chemical  engineering  at  Lehigh  University 
is  a  department  of  moderate  size  active  in  research  and  teach- 
ing emphasizing  the  theory  of  chemical  processing  opera- 
tions. The  teaching  staff  consists  of  eleven  senior  faculty  men 
plus  three  locally  employed  engineers  who  serve  as  lecturers. 
The  undergraduate  enrollment  has  been  stable  over  the  past 
several  years  at  a  figure  that  produces  about  forty  B.S. 
degrees  each  year.  The  graduate  enrollment  has  grown 
markedly  so  that  there  now  are  thirty-five  full-time  graduate 
students  enrolled  in  the  department  plus  approximately  an 
equal  number  of  locally  employed  engineers  who  enroll  for 
one  or  two  graduate  courses.  Our  graduate  students  have 
come  from  many  educational  institutions.  Some  of  these  are: 
M.I.T.,  R.P.I.,  Delaware,  Rochester,  Purdue,  Drexel,  Carne- 
gie-Mellon, Newark  College  of  Engineering,  U.C.L.A.,  Case, 
Penn  State,  Virginia,  Maryland,  N.Y.U.,  and  Tufts.  Last  year 
the  department  awarded  nine  M.S.  degrees,  and  four  Ph.D. 
degrees. 

Offerings  of  the  department  include  courses  in  thermody- 
namics, reaction  kinetics,  transport  processes,  heat  transfer, 
mass  transfer,  momentum  transfer,  process  dynamics,  and 
applied  mathematics.  In  addition,  more  specialized  courses  in 
catalysis,  cyrogenic  engineering,  and  polymer  processing  are 
offered  on  a  rotating  basis.  The  individual  graduate  student 
builds  his  program  out  of  these  courses  plus  additional  work 
in  mathematics,  chemistry,  mechanical  engineering,  physics, 
and  industrial  engineering  as  his  interests  and  goals  dictate. 
The  net  result  is  a  training  extending  the  breadth  and  depth 
of  understanding  of  the  fundamentals  of  chemical  engineer- 
ing. There  is  very  little  additional  material  in  specific  applica- 
tions or  industries.  Theses  are  chosen  by  the  student  accord- 
ing to  his  own  interest,  but  usually  are  consistent  with  this 
basic  departmental  philosophy. 

The  research  facilities  of  the  department  are  continually 
being  expanded  and  are  adequate  to  support  the  research 
interests  of  the  staff  and  graduate  students.  In  addition  to  the 
research  equipment  directly  available  in  the  department, 
graduate  students  often  find  the  CDC  6400  computer 
operated  by  the  University's  computer  center  a  valuable 
research  tool.  Currently  research  is  conducted  in  the  fields 
listed  below. 

Thermodynamic  Properties  of  Multicomponent  Systems: 
Joule-Thomson  coefficients  of  gas  mixtures 
Latent  heat  of  vaporization  at  high  pressure 
Phase  equilibria 

Specific  heats  and  heats  of  solutions  of  liquid  mixtures 
PVT  measurement 

Measurement  of  the  effect  of  pressure  on  heat  capacity 
Adsorption  equilibria  from  gas  mixtures  on  various  substrates 

Fluid  Dynamics: 
Retention  studies  in  process  equipment 
Eddy  diffusivity  measurements 
Process  dynamics  and  response  in  flow  systems 
Turbulence  in  annular  flow 
Rheology  of  heavily-doped  suspensions 


Viscoelastic  properties  of  suspensions 
Dynamics  of  film-splitting 
Flow  of  non-Newtonian  fluids 

Heat  and  Mass  Transfer: 
Two-phase  heat  and  momentum  characteristics 
Ice  formation  on  cold  surfaces 
Pulsed  extraction  column  performance 
Mass  transfer  through  dialysis  membranes 

Reaction  Kinetics: 
Immobilized  enzyme  catalysis 
Kinetics  of  thermal  decomposition  of  explosives 
Reduction  of  metal  oxides  in  plasmas 
Ion  exchange  catalysis 
Mechanism  of  explosion  initiation 
Catalysis  in  ortho-para  hydrogen  conversion 
Influence  of  microstructure  on  gas  adsorption  and  catalysis 

Process  Dynamics  and  Control: 
Distributed  parameter  representation  of  engineering  systems 
Control  systems  for  distillation  columns  with  side-stream 
draw-offs 

Frequency  response  of  process  systems 
Digital  simulation  of  chemical  process  systems 
Optimization  of  absorber  operation 
Feed-forward  control  of  distillation  columns 

Polymer  Science: 
Morphology  of  polymer  crystallization  from  solution 
Characteristics  of  heterogeneous  polymer  systems 
Interpenetrating  polymer  networks  (IPN's) 
Constrained  layer  damping  with  IPN's 
Polymer-concrete  system  applications 
Emulsion  polymerization  mechanisms 
Diffusion  through  polymer  films 

The  department  occupies  the  Whitaker  Metallurgical  and 
Chemical  Engineering  Laboratory.  In  this  building  some 
40,000  ft.  of  space  is  available  for  the  research,  teaching,  and 
office  needs  of  the  department.  The  building  is  completely 
air  conditioned,  and  includes  specially  designed  facilities  for 
analog  computation,  calibration  standards,  process  dynamics 
study,  reaction  kinetics  and  thermodynamics  research, 
nuclear  engineering,  high  pressure  research,  and  a  wide  range 
of  general  research  space. 

In  addition  to  activities  that  are  traditionally  chemical 
engineering,  the  department  cooperates  with  several  other 
campus  groups  to  offer  interdisciplinary  programs.  At  present 
these  include  a  program  in  chemical  metallurgy  carried  on  in 
cooperation  with  the  department  of  metallurgy  and  materials 
science,  a  program  in  polymer  science  through  cooperation 
with  the  Polymers  Research  Laboratory  of  the  Materials  Re- 
search Center,  a  program  in  water  resources  through  coopera- 
tion with  the  departments  of  civil  engineering  and  biology, 
research  in  interfacial  phenomena  through  the  Center  for 
Surface  and  Coatings  Research,  and  air  and  water  pollution 
with  the  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies.  More 
complete  descriptions  are  available  on  all  of  these  programs. 

Of  these,  the  most  completely  formulated  is  the  chemical 


Chemical  Engineering      1 03 


metallurgy  program.  Though  Ph.D.  programs  are  available, 
this  is  basicall)  M.S.  oriented.  Graduates  from  this  program 
should  be  uniquely  prepared  to  contribute  to  the  metal  re- 
fining  industry  .  The  program  includes  industi  ial  exposure  as 
well  as  .1  carefull)  selected  sequence  ol  courses  and  research 
topic.  Study  in  this  program  is  underwritten  by  several  in- 
dustrial concerns.  Students  having  an  interest  in  this  area 
should  write  for  .1  descriptive  brochure. 

A  cooperative  M.S.  program  has  been  initiated  for  those 
specially  interested  in  careers  in  design.  An  individually 
tailored  course  sequence  is  coupled  with  a  design  project 
which  replaces  the  more  conventional  M.S.  research  project. 
In  order  to  assure  complete  support  of  the  design  work,  and  .1 
professional  evaluation  of  it,  this  project  is  done  within  the 
process  design  group  of  one  of  several  nearby  design  engineer- 
ing companies.  The  student  is  supported  by  the  host  com- 
pany. 

Arrangements  have  been  made  with  Air  Products  and 
Chemicals,  Inc.,  and  with  Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation  to 
allow  a  graduate  student  in  chemical  engineering  to  support 
himself  by  part-time  employment  in  their  research  or  engi- 
neering departments.  Both  of  these  installations  are  within 
easy  driving  distance  of  the  Lehigh  campus,  and  in  both 
places  the  student  would  receive  experience  in  the  most  ad- 
vanced work  being  done  in  the  industry.  Typically,  a  student 
would  work  20  hours  per  week  and  would  receive  pay  equiva- 
lent to  that  of  a  teaching  assistant.  This  would  allow  him  to 
enroll  for  about  10  hours  of  graduate  course  work  per  semes- 
ter, and  to  progress  toward  the  M.S.  degree  at  a  rate  equiva- 
lent to  that  of  a  teaching  or  research  assistant.  Under  this 
arrangement,  the  student  pays  his  own  tuition  which  he 
accumulates  from  his  industrial  wage. 

There  are  available  within  the  department  several  oppor- 
tunities for  financial  support  for  the  graduate  student.  See 
the  Graduate  School  section  for  details. 

Opportunities  for  financial  support  during  graduate 
studies  are  varied,  depending  upon  individual  interests  and 
needs.  However,  they  are  limited  in  number,  and  cannot  be 
offered  to  more  than  a  few  qualified  applicants.  The  time 
required  for  an  M.S.  degree  can  vary  from  twelve  months  to 
two  years  depending  upon  the  type  of  support  and  the  pre- 
paration, diligence,  and  ability  of  the  student.  A  Ph.D.  degree 
is  obtainable  in  a  minimum  of  36  months,  but  more  normally 
requires  4  years. 

400.  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  I  (3) 
Applications  of  thermodynamics  in  chemical  engineering. 
Topics  include  prediction  of  physical  and  chemical  equilibria, 
heat  effects  accompanying  solution,  flow  of  compressible 
fluids,  refrigeration  including  solution  cycles,  vaporization 
and  condensation  processes.  Prerequisite:  an  introductory 
course  in  thermodynamics. 


401.  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  II  (3) 

A  detailed  study  o!  the  uses  ol  thermodynamics  in  predicting 

phase  equilibria  in  solid,  liquid,  and  gaseous  systems.  The 
phase  rule;  solution  theories;  uses  of  equations  of  state. 
Theoretical  basis  and  development  ol  equations  of  state, 
applications  to  azcotropic  and  cxtracivc  distillation,  multi 
component  separations,  liquid  extraction. 

410.  Chemical  Engineering  Kinetics  (3) 

The  application  of  chemical  kinetics  to  the  engineering  design 
and  operation  of  reactors.  Non-isothermal  and  adiabatic  reac- 
tions. Homogeneous  and  heterogeneous  catalysis.  Residence 
time  distribution  in  reactors.  Prerequisite:  Ch.E.  302. 

413.  Heterogeneous  Catalysis  (3) 

Surface  area,  pore  structure  and  pore-size  distribution  of 
catalysts.  Influence  of  pore-diffusion  on  catalytic  reactions 
and  the  design  of  catalytic  reactors.  Chemical  adsorption  and 
physical  adsorption.  Chemistry,  energetics  and  kinetics  of 
adsorption,  desorption,  and  surface  reaction.  Electronic 
structure  and  catalysis;  atomic  orbital  and  bondstructure 
models.  Mechanisms  of  catalytic  reaction  of  industrial  im- 
portance. Selection  and  classification  of  catalysts. 

421.  Heat  Transfer  (3) 

Analysis  of  steady  and  unsteady  state  transfer.  Radiation, 
vaporization,  and  condensation.  Heat  transfer  in  high  velocity 
flow  and  in  rarificd  gases.  Applications. 

428.  Rheology  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  momentum  transfer  in  elastic  viscous 
liquids.  Rheological  behavior  of  solution  and  bulk  phase 
polymers  with  emphasis  on  the  effect  of  molecular  weight, 
molecular  weight  distribution  and  branching.  Derivation  of 
constitutive  equation  based  on  both  molecular  theories  and 
continuum  mechanics  principles.  Application  of  the  momen- 
tum equation  and  selected  constitutive  equations  to  geomet- 
ries associated  with  viscometric  flows. 

430.  Mass  Transfer  (3) 

Equilibrium  stage  and  continuous  contact  mass  transfer 
operations  with  emphasis  upon  distillation,  absorption,  and 
extraction.  Binary  and  multicomponent  separations. 

435.  Simultaneous  Heat  and  Mass  Transfer  (3) 
Unit  operations  involving  simultaneous  heat  and  mass  trans- 
fer. Emphasis  on  drying,  humidification,  dehumidification, 
and  condensation  in  the  presence  of  non-condensable  gases. 

440.  Process  Design  (3) 

Synthesis  of  flow  sheets  for  various  processes,  investigation 
of  contributions  to  overall  economy  of  various  alternatives. 
Evaluation  of  profitability  of  alternatives. 


1 04     Chemical  Engineering 


441.  System  Dynamics  and  Control  (3) 

Survey  of  dynamic  models  for  heat  exchangers,  reactors, 
distillation  columns  and  other  processing  units.  Principles  of 
dynamic  testing  using  periodic,  transient  and  random  signals. 
Feedforward,  adaptive  and  computer  control. 

442.  System  Design  (3) 

The  state  space  formulation  of  dynamic  systems.  Concepts  of 
observability  and  controllability.  The  discrete  and  continuous 
formulations  of  the  maximum  principle.  Dynamic  program- 
ming. Optimization  by  systematic  search. 

450.  Special  Topics  (3-12) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  field  of  chemical  engineering  not 
covered  in  the  more  general  courses.  Credit  above  3  hours  is 
granted  only  when  different  material  is  covered. 

451.  Problems  in  Research  (1) 

Study  and  discussion  of  optimal  planning  of  experiments  and 
analysis  of  experimental  data.  Discussion  of  more  common 
and  more  difficult  techniques  in  the  execution  of  chemical 
engineering  research. 

455.  Seminar  (1-3) 

Critical  discussion  of  recent  advances  in  chemical  engineering. 
Credit  above  one  hour  is  granted  only  when  different  material 
is  covered. 

461.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Chemical  Engineering  I  (3) 
Application  of  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations  to 
the  solution  of  chemical  engineering  problems  with  emphasis 
on  chemical  reactions  and  transport  processes  as  they  occur 
in  industrial  chemical  processing.  Applications  of  solution  in 
series,  separation  of  variables,  and  integral  transforms.  Prere- 
quisite: Math.  322. 


470.  Cryogenic  Engineering  (3) 

Liquefaction  and  separation  of  gases,  physical  and  chemical 
principles.  Low  temperature  thermometry.  Insulation.  Pro- 
perties of  fluids  and  of  structural  materials.  The  behavior  of 
helium.  Ultra-low  temperature  phenomena  and  theories. 

471.  Low  Temperature  Processes  (3) 

The  problems  and  design  of  plants  operating  in  the  cryogenic 
temperature  range.  Refrigeration  demands.  Distillation  and 
heat  exchange  at  low  temperatures.  Analysis  of  processes  for 
thermodynamic  and  operating  efficiency.  Problems  of  safety, 
non-steady  state  behavior  and  control. 

480.  Research  (3-4) 

Investigation  of  a  problem  in  chemical  engineering. 

481.  Research  (3-4) 
Continuation  of  Ch.E.  480. 

492.  (Chem.  492)  Topics  in  Polymer  Science  (3) 
Intensive  study  of  topics  selected  from  areas  of  current  re- 
search interest  such  as  morphology  and  mechanical  behavior, 
thermodynamics  and  kinetics  of  crystallization,  new  analy- 
tical techniques,  molecular  weight  distribution,  non- 
Newtonian  flow  behavior,  second-order  transition  phenom- 
ena, novel  polymer  structures.  Credit  above  3  hours  is 
granted  only  when  different  material  is  covered.  Prerequisite: 
Chem.  392  or  equivalent. 


464.  Numerical  Methods  in  Engineering  (3) 

Applied  computer-oriented  mathematics  including  linear 
difference  operators,  interpolation  polynomials,  numerical 
quadrature  based  on  the  Newton  Cotes  open  and  closed 
formulas,  matrices  and  linear  algebra  with  emphasis  on  the 
solution  of  large  sparse  systems,  algorithms  for  nonlinear 
algebraic  and  transcendental  systems.  Major  emphasis  will  be 
given  to  the  use  of  the  computer  for  the  solution  of  problems 
selected  from  a  number  of  scientific  and  engineering  disci- 
plines. 

465.  Numerical  Methods  in  Engineering  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Ch.E.  464  with  emphasis  on  the  numerical 
integration  of  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations. 
Topics  include:  single  step  and  multistep  algorithms  for 
initial  value  problems  in  ordinary  differential  equations,  error 
monitoring  and  control,  stability  and  the  integration  of  stiff 
systems,  geometric  classification  of  partial  differential  equa- 
tions, explicit  and  implicit  finite  difference  algorithms,  con- 
vergence, consistency  and  stability. 


Chemical  Engineering     1 05 


Chemistry 


Piotessiirs 

Frederick  Mayliew  Fowkes,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 

Albert  Charles  Zettleinoyer,  Ph.D.  Distinguished  Professor, 

!  'ice  President  and  Provost 

Eugene  Murray  Allen,  Ph.D. 

Charles  Stephen  Kraihanzel,  Ph.D. 

Henry  Leidheiser.  Jr.,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Center  for  Surface  and 

Coatings  Research 

John  Alexander  Manson,  Ph.D.,  Director  of  the  Polymer 

I  aboratoi  v.  Materials  Keseari  h  i  'enter 

Joseph  Robert  Merkel,  Ph.D. 

William  Edward  Ohnesorge,  Ph.D. 

Robert  Stacy  Sprague,  Ph.D. 

James  Edward  Sturm,  Ph.D. 

Thomas  Edwin  Young,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Prolessors 

Alfred  James  Diefenderfer,  Ph.D. 

Ned  D.  Hcindel,  Ph.D. 

Kamil  Klier,  Ph.D. 

Roland  William  Lovejoy,  Ph.D. 

Fortunato  Joseph  Micale,  Ph.D. 

Donald  Morgan  Smyth,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Materials  Research 

Center 

John  W.  Vanderhoff,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Director,  Center  for 

Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

Assistant  Professors 

Matthew  Harold  Hulbert,  Ph.D. 

Keith  J.  Schray,  Ph.D. 

Gary  W.  Simmons,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  to  the  Director,  Center 

for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

Daniel  Zeroka,  Ph.D. 


Students  majoring  in  chemistry  receive  an  education  which 
provides  a  broad  base  for  further  specialization  in  a  wide 
variety  of  careers.  A  degree  in  chemistry  (with  biology  elec- 
tives)  is  the  strongest  preparation  for  medical  school,  and  an 
excellent  background  for  graduate  studies  in  other  health- 
related  disciplines  (biochemistry,  pharmacology,  immunolo- 
gy, pathology,  etc.).  Graduate  schools  gladly  accept 
chemistry  majors  into  a  variety  of  other  programs  (physics, 
material  science,  oceanography,  environmental  studies, 
mineralogy,  etc.).  Within  the  field  of  chemistry,  graduates  are 
prepared  for  research  (in  universities,  government  labora- 
tories, or  industrial  laboratories),  for  teaching  (in  universities, 
colleges,  or  high  schools),  for  industrial  positions  (in  product 
development,  sales,  or  management)  and  for  government 


positions  (pollution  control,  I  ood  and  Drug  Administration, 
etc.).  Mosl  i  demists  are  employed  in  manufacturing  indus- 
tries (ph.  it  ni. i.  .nil.  als,  plastii  s,  libers,  rubbci .  paper,  coat- 
ings, electronics,  materials,  automobiles,  air  craft,  petroleum, 
agricultural  chemistry,  etc.)  and  in  many  "I  these  industries 
chemists  rise  to  top  management  positions.  Currently  many 
job  opportunities  are  opening  up  after  three  years  of  relative- 
job  scarcity,  although  Lehigh  chemistry  graduates  have  had 
little  difficulty  in  finding  jobs. 

The  undergraduate  curriculum  in  chemistry  contains 
many  of  the  prerequisites  for  biology,  geology,  metallurgy, 
physics,  and  chemical  engineering  so  that  students  can  easily 
transfer  either  way  with  no  loss  of  credits,  even  in  the  junior 
year. 

Chemistry  students  have  the  opportunity  to  design  their 
undergraduate  curriculum  for  specialization  in  a  variety  of 
fields: 

Health- Related  Chemistry  (Including  Prcmedical  Students) 

Suggested  biology  electives:  21,  22,  35 

Suggested  chemistry  electives:  352,  371,  372,  377,  378,  350 

(Clinical  Chemistry) 

Suggested  physics  elective:  367 

The  above  electives  may  be  used  in  place  of  Math.  205  and 

German  3. 

Materials  Chemistry  (Polymer,  Solid  State,  Surface) 

Suggested  physics  electives:  31,  363 

Suggested  chemistry  electives:  312,  392,  393,  394,  396,  397 

The  above  electives  may  be  used  in  place  of  German  3. 

Environmental  Chemistry 

Suggested  biology  electives:  21,  22,  35 

Suggested  chemical  engineering  electives:  320,  321 

Suggested  chemistry  electives:  303,  334,  397,  310 

The  above  electives  may  be  used  in  place  of  Math.  205  and 

German  3. 

Geochemistry 

Suggested  geology  electives:  333,  334,  336,  352,  372 
Suggested  chemistry  electives:  303,  396 
The  above  electives  may  be  used  in  place  of  Math.  205  and 
German  3. 

Chemistry  Management 

Suggested  accounting  electives:  108,  315 

Suggested  law  elective:  101 

Suggested  management  electives:  201,  211,  317,  321 

Suggested  chemistry  electives:  392,  397 

The  above  electives  may  be  used  in  place  of  Math.  205  and 

German  3. 


106     Chemistry 


The  Five-Year  Program 

Five-year  programs  are  available  for  students  to  receive  B.S. 
or  B.A.  degrees  and  an  M.S.  degree  in  several  fields  of  chemis- 
try (inorganic,  organic,  analytical  or  physical  chemistry,  poly- 
mers, or  biochemistry).  A  five-year  program  is  also  available 
for  a  B.S.  degree  in  chemistry  and  a  master's  degree  in  busi- 
ness administration  (M.B.A.). 

The  Bachelor  of  Arts  and  the  Bachelor  of  Science  Majors 

Lehigh  University  offers  a  B.A.  degree  in  chemistry  from  the 
College  of  Arts  and  Science  and  a  B.S.  degree  in  chemistry 
from  the  College  of  Engineering.  In  most  classes,  the  B.S. 
candidates  outnumber  the  B.A.  candidates  in  chemistry,  but 
not  always.  The  required  courses  in  science  and  mathematics 
are  identical  for  the  two  programs;  these  are  shown  in  the 
recommended  sequence  of  courses  for  the  B.S.  degree.  The 
difference  in  the  two  programs  lies  in  the  distribution  of 
courses  in  the  humanities  and  social  sciences.  At  present  can- 
didates for  the  B.A.  degree  must  obtain  proficiency  in  a 
modern  foreign  language.  B.S.  candidates  need  take  no  langu- 
age courses,  although  German  3  is  strongly  recommended. 
The  minimum  number  of  semester  hour  credits  needed  for 
graduation  is  120  for  the  B.A.  degree  and  122  for  the  B.S. 
degree,  but  a  larger  number  is  recommended  (131  semester 
hours  is  considered  to  be  a  normal  total  for  the  B.S.  degree. ) 

Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses  for  the  B.S.  Degree 

Freshman  Year  (See  page  45) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Chem  51  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  53  Organic  Chemistry  Lab  (1) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

GS  Requirement  in  Social  Science  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Chem  52  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  54  Organic  Chemistry  Lab  (2) 

Chem  90  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Ger  3  Elementary  German  (5)  (or  approved  sub- 

stitutes) 
Math  205  Linear  Methods  (or  approved  substitute)  (3) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (14-17  credit  hours) 

Chem  191  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  192  Physical  Chemistry  Lab  (1) 

Chem  234  Analytical  Chemistry  Lab  (1) 

Chem  302  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  332  Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  358  Advanced  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 
Electives  (0-3) 


Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (1 6  credit  hours) 

Chem  280  Advanced  Chemical  Experimentation  (3) 

Chem  308  Coordination  Chemistry  (3) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (3) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

Chem  382  Electrochemistry  and  Kinetics  (3) 

Chem  Elective  (2-3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Electives  (6-9) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

Chem  381  Radiation  and  Structure  (3) 

Chem  Elective  (2-3) 

Electives  (9-12) 

Note:  The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load 
required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirements;  the  higher  the 
normal  semester  load. 

Chemistry  electives:  two  electives,  one  of  which  must  have  a 
lab,  are  to  be  chosen  from  the  following  list: 

Chem  303  Nuclear  and  Radiochemistry  (3) 

Chem  306  Inorganic  Lab  (2) 

or 
Chem  368  Advanced  Organic  Lab  (2) 

Chem  310  Instrumentation  Principles  I  (3) 

Chem  312  Fundamentals  of  Corrosion  (ChE  312,  Met 

312) 
Chem  334  Chemical  Oceanography  (3) 

Chem  350  Special  Topics  (3) 

Chem  352  Heterocyclic  Compounds  (3) 

Chem  371  Elements  of  Biochemistry  (Biol  371)  (3) 

Chem  372  Advanced  Biochemistry  (Biol  372)  (3) 

Chem  375  Research  Chemistry  Lab  (3) 

Chem  377  Biochemistry  Lab  (2) 

Chem  392  Introduction  to  Polymer  Science  (ChE  391) 

(3) 
Chem  393  Physical  Polymer  Science  (ChE  393,  Met 

343)  (3) 
Chem  394  Organic  Polymer  Science  (ChE  394)  (3) 

Chem  396  Solid  State  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  397  Colloid  and  Surface  Chemistry  (3) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

21.  Introductory  Chemical  Principles  (4) 

An  introduction  to  certain  important  principles  of  chemistry. 
Topics  include  atomic  structure  and  bonding,  stoichiometry, 
states  of  matter,  and  introductions  to  kinetics,  chemical 
equilibrium,  acid-base  theories,  oxidation-reduction  reac- 
tions, and  galvanic  cells.  Math.  21,  31,  or  41  previously  or 
concurrently.  Two  lectures,  two  recitations. 


Chemistry      107 


22.  Chemical  Principles  Lab  (1 ) 

A  laboratory  course  to  be  taken  concurrently  with  Chemistry 
21.  An  introduction  to  chemical  laboratory  techniques  with 
emphasis  on  quantitative  measurements.  One  three  houi 
laboratory  period  per  week. 

23.  Earth,  Air.  Fire,  and  Water  (4) 

A  study  of  chemical  principles  underlying  the  impact  of 
society  on  the  quality  of  our  environment,  particularly  of  air 
and  water.  Emphasis  is  on  examples  in  inorganic  chemistry. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  21  or  exemption  from  Chemistry  21 
b\  examination.  Two  lectures,  one  two-hour  demonstration 
period. 

39.  Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 

The  fundamentals,  theory,  and  practice  of  analytical  chemis- 
try for  all  students  except  chemistry  majors.  Selected  topics 
in  the  areas  of  classical  and  instrumental  analysis.  Funda- 
mental techniques  arc  presented  in  the  laboratory.  Two 
lectures,  one  laboratory  period.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  21. 

51.  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Systematic  survey  of  the  typical  compounds  of  carbon,  their 
classification  and  general  relations;  study  of  synthetic  reac- 
tions. Prerequisite:  Chem.  21. 

52.  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Continuation  of  Chem.  51.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  51. 

53.  Organic  Chemistry  Laboratory  (1) 

Preparation  of  pure  organic  compounds.  Prerequisite:  Chem. 
21. 

54.  Organic  Chemistry  Laboratory  (2) 
Continuation  of  Chem.  53  with  particular  emphasis  upon 
aromatic  compounds  and  qualitative  organic  analysis.  Prere- 
quisite: Chem.  53  and  Chem.  52,  concurrently. 

55.  Organic  Chemistry  Laboratory  (2) 

A  course  in  the  preparation  of  pure  organic  compounds  and 
the  techniques  of  organic  chemistry  applicable  to  both  ali- 
phatic and  aromatic  compounds.  Prerequisites:  Chem.  51  and 
Chem.  52  concurrently. 

90.  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Development  of  the  principles  of  thermodynamics  and  their 
application  to  systems  in  which  composition  is  of  major  con- 
cern: solutions,  chemical  and  phase  equilibria.  Elements  of 
chemical  reaction  kinetics.  Discussion  of  various  states  of 
matter  (gases,  liquids,  solids,  interfaces).  Prerequisites:  Chem. 
21;  Math.  23,  previously  or  concurrently. 

191.  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Quantum  chemistry  of  bonding  and  molecular  structure. 
Elements  of  statistical  thermodynamics.  Prerequisites:  Chem. 
21,  Math.  23,  Phys.  21. 


192.  Physical  Chemistry  Laboratory  (I) 
This  i  ourse  provides  a  series  of  laboratory  studies  which 
illustrate  the  various  fields  of  study  in  experimental  physical 
chemistry.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  90. 

194.  Physical  Chemistry  for  Biological  Sciences  (3) 
The  principles  and  applications  of  physical  chemical  concepts 
to  systems  of  biological  interest,  including  the  gas  laws,  ther- 
modynamics of  metabolic  reactions,  colligativc  properties, 
electrochemical  equilibria,  reaction  kinetics  and  enzyme 
catalysis,  and  transport  of  macromoleculcs  and  viruses.  Prere- 
quisite: Chem.  21. 

196.  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Primarily  for  majors  in  metallurgical  engineering.  (Not  for 
chemistry  or  chemical  engineering  students.)  Kinetic  theory 
and  chemical  kinetics;  electrochemistry;  topics  in  surface 
chemistry  and  solid  state  chemistry.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  21. 

234.  Analytical  Chemistry  Laboratory  (1) 
Laboratory  course:  experiments  coordinated  with  and 
illustrating  methods  and  principles  discussed  in  Chem.  332. 

250.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  chemistry  not  included  in  other  courses. 

Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

280.  Advanced  Chemical  Experimentation  (3) 
Laboratory  course  combining  techniques  of  analytical,  inor- 
ganic, organic,  and  physical  chemistry  in  the  synthesis,  purifi- 
cation, and  characterization  of  selected  compounds.  Prerequi- 
sites: Chem.  54,  192,  234,  308,  previously  or  concurrently. 


300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Chem. 


(1-3) 


302.  Principles  of  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3) 

Application  of  the  theories  of  atomic  and  molecular  structure 
and  of  chemical  bonding  to  the  periodic  relationships  and 
selected  descriptive  chemistry  of  the  non-transition  elements. 
Prerequisite:  Chem.  191  previously  or  concurrently. 

303.  Nuclear  and  Radiochemistry  (3) 

A  broad  survey  of  nuclear  science  with  particular  emphasis 
on  aspects  of  importance  to  chemistry  and  biology.  Elemen- 
tary nuclear  theory;  production,  separation  and  identification 
of  radioactive  and  stable  isotopes;  use  of  isotopes  in  the 
study  of  chemical  and  biological  systems;  radiological  safety; 
nuclear  engineering.  Two  lectures  and  one  lecture-laboratory. 

306.  Inorganic  Laboratory  (2) 

A  laboratory  course  illustrating  a  variety  of  techniques  for 
the  preparation  and  purification  of  inorganic  compounds. 
Hours  equivalent  to  two  laboratory  periods  per  week  will  be 
arranged  by  the  instructor.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  302, 
previously  or  concurrently. 


108     Chemistry 


308.  Coordination  Chemistry  (3) 

Continuation  of  Chem.  302.  Introduction  to  transition  metal 
complex  ions  and  coordination  compounds  and  to  the 
theories  of  bonding  in  these  substances.  The  thermodynamics 
of  metal  ion  complex  formation  in  solution.  Kinetics  and 
mechanisms  of  transition  metal  complex  reactions.  Isomerism 
in  complex  compounds.  Introduction  to  transition  metal 
organometallic  chemistry.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  302  or  its 
equivalent. 

310.  Instrumentation  Principles  I  (3) 

A  study  of  electrical,  electronic,  and  optical  principles  in 
modern  instrumentation  for  measurement  and  control.  Prin- 
ciples and  applications  of  semiconductors  with  associated 
circuitry  applied  to  modern  instrumentation.  Transducer 
application  to  fields  of  electrical,  optical  and  mechanical 
measurement.  Two  lectures  and  one  three-hour  laboratory. 

311.  Instrumentation  Principles  II  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Chem.  310  with  emphasis  on  applications 
and  utilization  of  digital  electronics.  The  development  of  the 
complete  instrument  including  optical  instrumentation.  Two 
lectures  and  one  three-hour  laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Chem. 
310  or  equivalent. 

312.  (Ch.E.  312,  Met.  312)  Fundamentals  of  Corrosion  (3) 
Corrosion  phenomena  and  definitions.  Electrochemical 
aspects  including  reaction  mechanisms,  thermodynamics, 
Pourbaix  diagrams,  kinetics  of  corrosion  processes,  polariza- 
tion and  passivity.  Non-electrochemical  corrosion  including 
mechanisms,  theories,  and  quantitative  descriptions  of  at- 
mospheric corrosion.  Corrosion  of  metals  under  stress. 
Cathodic  and  anodic  protection,  coatings,  alloys,  inhibitors 
and  passivators.  Prerequisite:  Met.  91,  Chem.  90  or 
equivalent  or  permission  of  instructor. 


352.  Heterocyclic  Compounds  (3) 

The  chemistry  of  thiophene,  pyrrole,  furan,  pyridine  and 
their  derivatives,  considered  from  the  viewpoint  of  recent 
theories  of  organic  structure  and  reaction  mechanisms.  Prere- 
quisite: Chem.  358. 

356.  Quantitative  Organic  Analysis  (1) 

Quantitative  analysis  of  organic  compounds.  One  laboratory 
period  per  week.  Prerequisites:  three  hours  of  analytical 
chemistry;  a  course  in  organic  chemistry. 

358.  Advanced  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 
The  study  of  modern  theories  of  reaction  mechanisms  and 
their  applications  to  the  problems  of  organic  chemistry.  Pre- 
requisite: one  year  of  organic  chemistry. 

368.  Advanced  Organic  Laboratory  (2) 

The  synthesis  and  study  of  organic  compounds  illustrating 
the  important  techniques  and  special  pieces  of  apparatus 
commonly  used  in  organic  chemical  research.  Prerequisite: 
one  year  of  organic  chemistry  and  laboratory. 

371.  (Biol.  371)  Elements  of  Biochemistry  (3) 

A  general  study  of  carbohydrates,  proteins,  lipids,  nucleic 
acids  and  other  biological  substances  and  their  importance  in 
life  processes.  Protein  and  enzyme  chemistry  are  emphasized. 
Prerequisite:  one  year  of  organic  chemistry. 

372.  (Biol.  372)  Advanced  Biochemistry  (3) 

Dynamic  aspects  of  biochemistry:  enzyme  reactions  includ- 
ing energetics,  kinetics,  and  mechanisms;  metabolism  of  car- 
bohydrates, lipids,  proteins,  and  nucleic  acids;  photosyn- 
thesis, electron  transport  mechanisms,  coupled  reactions, 
phosphorylations,  and  the  synthesis  of  biological  macro- 
molecules.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  371. 


332.  Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 

Theory  and  practice  of  chemical  analysis.  Principles  of  quan- 
titative separations  and  determinations;  theory  and  applica- 
tion of  selected  optical  and  electrical  instruments  in  analy- 
tical chemistry;  interpretation  of  numerical  data,  design  of 
experiments,  solute  distribution  in  separation  methods.  Prere- 
quisite: Chem.  51,  90. 

334.  Chemical  Oceanography  (3) 

Chemistry  of  the  oceans  and  other  natural  water  systems, 
with  emphasis  on  processes  occurring  at  the  interfaces  with 
the  air,  the  sediments,  the  rivers,  and  living  organisms.  Op- 
tional cruise.  Prerequisite:  two  chemistry  courses  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

350.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  advanced  topics  in  chemistry  not  included  in  other 

courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of  department. 


375.  Research  Chemistry  Laboratory  (3) 
Advanced  independent  study  or  an  investigation  involving 
intensive  work  with  faculty  guidance  in  laboratory  and 
library.  Topics  in  active  research  in  biochemistry,  analytical, 
inorganic,  organic,  and  physical  chemistry.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  department  chairman. 

377.  Biochemistry  Laboratory  (2) 

Laboratory  studies  of  the  properties  of  chemicals  of  bio- 
logical origin  and  the  influence  of  chemical  and  physical 
factors  on  these  properties.  Laboratory  techniques  used  for 
the  isolation  and  identification  of  biochemicals.  Prerequisite: 
Chem.  371,  previously  or  concurrently. 

378.  Biochemical  Preparations  (2) 

A  laboratory  course  involving  the  preparation  or  isolation, 
purification  and  identification  of  chemicals  of  biological 
origin.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  377  and  372,  previously  or  con- 
currently. 


Chemistry      109 


381 .  Radiation  and  Stru<  ture  (3) 

Quantum  chemistry  and  group  theory  applied  to  molecular 
orbital  theory  ol  bonding  and  struc  ture  and  to  spci  trosi  opj 
\  ;  iy,  electron,  luminescence,  Raman,  mici  owavc.  Prcrcqui 
sites:  Chcm.  191  and  I 

3S J! .  Electrochemistry  and  Kinetics  (3-4) 
A  unified  study  of  matter  in  the  process  of  change.  Elements 
ol  irreversible  thermodynamics;  electrochemistry;  chemical 
kinetics;  electrokinctic  phenomena.  Three  one-hour  lectures 
and  (optional)  three-hour  laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Chcm.  90 
and  332. 

392.  (Ch.E.  392)  Introduction  to  Polymer  Science  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Ch.E.  392. 

393.  (Ch.E.  393.  Met.  343)  Physical  Polymer  Science  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Ch.E.  393. 

394.  (Ch.E.  394)  Organic  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Organic  chemistry  of  synthetic  high  polymers.  Functionality 
and  reactivity  of  monomers  and  polymers.  Theory  of  step- 
growth  and  chain-growth  polymerization  in  homogeneous 
and  heterogeneous  media.  Polymerization  by  addition,  elimi- 
nation, substitution  and  coupling  reactions.  Ionic,  free-radical 
and  coordination  catalysis.  Prerequisite:  one  year  of  physical 
chemistry  and  one  year  of  organic  chemistry. 

396.  Solid  State  Chemistry  (3) 

Chemistry  of  ionic  and  electronic  defects  in  solids  and  their 
influence  on  chemical  and  physical  properties.  Intrinsic  and 
impurity-controlled  defects,  non-stoichiometric  compounds, 
ordering  of  defects  at  surfaces  and  interfaces.  Properties  to  be 
discussed  include:  diffusion,  sintering,  ionic  and  electronic 
conductivity,  solid-state  reactions,  photoconductivity,  recti- 
fyingjunctions,  chemisorption,  and  catalysis.  Prerequisite: 
Chem.  90  or  Met.  210  or  equivalent. 

397.  Colloid  and  Surface  Chemistry  (3) 

Physical  chemistry  of  everyday  phenomena.  Intermolecular 
forces  and  electrostatic  phenomena  at  interfaces,  boundary 
tensions  and  films  at  interfaces,  mass  charge  transport  in  col- 
loidal suspensions,  electrostatic  and  London  forces  in  dis- 
perse systems,  gas  adsorption,  and  heterogeneous  catalysis. 
Prerequisite:  Chem.  90  or  equivalent. 

For  Graduates 

The  department  of  chemistry  offers  graduate  work  leading  to 
both  the  M.S.  and  the  Ph.D.  degrees  (the  M.S.  is  not  a  prere- 
quisite for  the  Ph.D.);  facilities  are  available  for  post-doctoral 
research.  Forty-five  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  candidates  were  enrolled 
in  the  department  in  the  1972-73  academic  year. 

A  student  may  specialize  in  biochemistry,  analytical,  in- 
organic, organic,  physical,  or  polymer  chemistry.  The  depart- 
ment has  numerous  laboratory  facilities  and  considerable 
scientific  equipment  for  chemical  research  as  well  as  a 
capable  faculty  which  works  closely  with  students  in  the 


classroom  and  in  the  research  laboratory. 

The  University  libraries  contain  approximately  a  half- 
million  volumes  and  i  urrently  subscribe  to  some  6000  serials 

and  periodicals.  There  arc  particularly  strong  collections 
available  for  research  in  the  physical  and  natural  sciences. 

The  graduate  program  m  chemistry  at  Lehigh  has  a  two- 
told  purpose.  It  affords  a  student  the  opportunity  to  acquire 
a  modern  advanced  knowledge  ol  chemistry  within  the 
framework  of  formal  graduate  courses  and  permits  the  devel- 
opment ol  techniques  required  of  competent  research 
through  independent  scientific  investigation.   The  graduate 
program  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  in  chemistry  consists  of  approx- 
imately one-third  formal  course  work  and  two-thirds  inde- 
pendent research  and  study.  A  student  entering  upon 
graduate  study  with  a  teaching  assistantship  will  spend  an 
average  of  three  or  four  years  of  full  time  residency  beyond 
the  bachelor's  degree  to  complete  all  the  requirements  for  the 
Ph.D.  degree. 

During  his  first  year  of  graduate  work  a  student  normally 
takes  basic  graduate  courses  from  the  fields  of  analytical, 
biological,  inorganic,  organic,  and  physical  chemistry  and 
becomes  acquainted  with  the  research  interest  of  the  various 
faculty  members.  From  these  contacts  the  student  is  able  to 
assess  critically  his  own  research  interest,  and  thus  choose  a 
research  director.  Having  selected  a  research  director,  a  re- 
search problem  is  mutually  agreed  upon;  a  thesis  committee 
is  appointed  to  serve  in  an  advisory  capacity. 

It  is  assumed  that  an  entering  graduate  student  in  chemis- 
try will  have  satisfied  the  requirements  for  the  bachelor's 
degree  that  meet  the  minimum  standards  recommended  by 
the  American  Chemical  Society  Committee  on  Professional 
Training.  Thus,  in  addition  to  the  usual  chemistry  courses,  a 
student's  undergraduate  curriculum  should  include  at  least 
one  year  of  physics,  mathematics  through  calculus,  and  pre- 
ferably at  least  one  year  of  German.  If  a  student  shows  a 
deficiency  in  one  or  more  of  these  undergraduate  areas,  these 
can  be  rectified  during  the  first  year  of  graduate  work  and  do 
not  affect  a  student's  eligibility  for  an  appointment  to  an 
assistantship.  Teaching  and  research  assistantships,  as  well  as 
fellowships,  are  available  to  graduate  students  in  chemistry. 
The  assistantships  are  regarded  as  half-time  appointments, 
permitting  a  student  to  enroll  for  up  to  ten  credit  hours  of 
course  work  per  semester.  Students  on  teaching  appoint- 
ments normally  have  an  average  of  8  hours  per  week  of  in- 
structional duties  in  undergraduate  recitation  classes  or 
laboratories.  The  University  does  not  charge  tuition  or  other 
fees  of  students  on  teaching  appointments.  Current  research 
projects  of  interest  are  listed  below. 

Analytical  Chemistry:  electron-reduction  and  oxidation 
mechanisms  of  organic  compounds;  Hammett  correlations 
with  electrochemical  reduction  potentials;  analysis  in  marine 
environment,  luminescence  of  metal  chelates;  voltammetry  in 
non-aqueous  solvents. 

Biochemistry:  production,  isolation,  and  characterization 
of  proteolytic  enzymes  of  marine  bacteria;  determination  of 
the  amino  acid  specificity  of  bacterial  proteases;  mechanism 
of  action  of  proteolytic  enzymes;  nucleases  of  marine 


110     Chemistry 


bacteria;  isolation  and  characterization  of  antimicrobial  sub- 
stances; physiology  and  biochemistry  of  marine  bacteria  and 
other  microorganisms;  denitrification  reactions;  immobiliza- 
tion of  enzymes;  sugar  phosphate  substrate  utilization  by 
glycolytic  enzymes;  mechanism  of  phosphoglucose  isomerase 
and  aldolase;  phosphoryl  transfer  reactions  of  enzymes; 
studies  on  choline  acetyl  transferase. 

Inorganic  chemistry:  synthesis  and  characterization  of 
amide  complexes  of  transition  metals;  silicon  organometallic 
compounds;  substitution  and  rearrangement  reactions  in- 
volving metal  carbonyls;  organic  syntheses  and  catalysis  in- 
volving transition  metal  complexes. 

Organic  chemistry:  synthesis  of  medicinal  agents;  correla- 
tion of  molecular  structure  and  pharmacological  behavior; 
chemical  models  for  biochemical  reactions;  photochemical 
enolization  processes;  sulfur  bonding  in  novel  heteroaromatic 
sulfur  compounds;  biosyntheses  involving  indole  inter- 
mediates; synthesis  of  new  heterocyclic  systems;  synthesis  of 
phosphate  esters  of  biological  interest;  kinetics  and 
mechanism  of  phosphate  ester  hydrolysis. 

Physical  chemistry:  vacuum  ultraviolet  photochemistry; 
radiation  chemistry;  flash  photochemistry  and  kinetic  spec- 
troscopy; surface  chemistry  of  metals,  semiconductors,  and 
polymers;  heterogeneous  nucleation  phenomena;  catalysis; 
heats  of  wetting;  stability  of  colloidal  dispersions;  polymer 
adsorption;  molecular  structure  and  bonding  properties  of 
inorganic,  organic,  and  organometallic  compounds  from 
vibration-rotation  spectra  using  infrared  and  Raman  spectro- 
scopy; molecular  motion  in  the  crystalline  state;  molecular 
structure,  conformation,  and  properties  of  polymers  in  solu- 
tion and  in  the  solid  state;  application  of  quantum  mechanics 
and  statistical  mechanics  to  problems  of  chemical  interest; 
heterogeneous  catalysis;  adsorption  and  chemisorption 
kinetics;  solid  state  chemistry;  point  defects  in  oxides. 

Polymer  chemistry:  synthesis,  structure,  conformation, 
and  properties  of  high  polymers;  transition  and  viscoelastic 
behavior;  rubber  elasticity;  behavior  of  composites  and  other 
multi-component  systems. 

The  chemistry  department  has  offices,  laboratories,  a 
library,  and  other  research  facilities  throughout  the  four 
floors  of  Chandler  Laboratories;  biological  chemistry  is 
located  in  nearby  Williams  Hall  which  also  houses  the  biology 
department.  Physical  chemistry  of  surfaces  is  located  in 
Sinclair  Laboratory  with  the  Center  for  Surfaces  and  Coat- 
ings Research;  polymer  chemistry  is  partly  in  Coxe  Labora- 
tory (Materials  Research  Center)  and  partly  in  Sinclair 
Laboratory.  The  specialized  equipment  available  in  the  de- 
partment for  graduate  research  includes:  mass  spectrometer, 
x-ray  diffraction  spectrometer,  single-beam  grating  infrared 
spectrometer,  Raman  spectrograph,  nuclear  magnetic  reso- 
nance spectrometer,  electron  spin  resonance,  emission  spec- 
trographs, atomic  absorption  spectrometer,  spectrofluoro- 
meter,  phosphorescence  spectrometer,  infrared  Fourier  trans- 
form, Auger,  Mossbauer  spectrometers,  radiotracer  equip- 
ment, Geiger  and  scintillation  counters,  light  scattering 


photometer,  differential  refractometer,  flash  photolysis  ap- 
paratus, densitometers,  preparative  and  analytical  gas  chrom- 
atographs,  ellipsometer,  double-beam  infrared  and  ultra- 
violet-visible recording  spectrometers,  counting  equipment 
for  radioactivity  measurements,  Wenking  potentiostat, 
recording-multipurpose  polarographs,  and  chronopotentio- 
meters,  high  speed  centrifuges,  automatic  fraction  collectors, 
freeze  dryers,  high  voltage  electrophoreses  apparatus,  elec- 
tron microscope,  laboratory  fermentor,  walk-in  cold  room, 
cell  disintegrator,  Warburg  respirometer,  zone  and  disc  elec- 
trophoresis apparatus,  paper  column  chromatography  equip- 
ment, freeze-dryer,  autoclave. 

In  addition  to  the  facilities  of  the  chemistry  department, 
there  are  several  research  centers  located  on  the  campus  that 
are  maintained  by  the  University;  see  page  71  of  this  catalog 
for  a  listing  of  the  centers  and  their  facilities. 

400.  Inorganic  Chemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Investigation  of  a  problem  in  inorganic  chemistry. 

401.  Inorganic  Chemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Continuation  of  Chem.  400. 

402.  Advanced  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3) 

Theories  of  bonding.  Group  theoretical  principles  will  be 
utilized  in  studies  of  molecular  orbital  and  ligand  field 
theories  of  bonding.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  302  or  equivalent. 

403.  Advanced  Topics  in  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3) 
Subjects  of  contemporary  interest  in  inorganic  chemistry, 
including  quantitative  treatment  of  acid-base  chemistry  in 
non-aqueous  solvents,  mechanisms  of  inorganic  reactions, 
chemistry  of  organometallic  compounds  and  metal  carbonyls, 
and  chemistry  of  metal  chelates.  This  course  may  be  repeated 
when  a  different  topic  is  offered.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  302  or 
its  equivalent  and  consent  of  instructor. 

429.  Seminar  in  Inorganic  Chemistry  (1-6) 

Reports  and  discussions  of  recent  developments  in  inorganic 
chemistry. 

430.  Analytical  Research  (1-4) 

Investigation  of  problems  in  analytical  chemistry. 

431.  Analytical  Research  (1-4) 
Continuation  of  Chem.  430. 

432.  Advanced  Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 

Recent  developments  in  analysis  by  chemical  methods. 
Statistical  methods  in  analytical  chemistry:  treatment  and 
interpretation  of  numerical  data;  design  of  experiments; 
application  to  and  discussion  of  multistage  and  other 
methods  for  separating  chemical  species.  Prerequisite:  Chem. 
332  or  equivalent.  Offered  alternate  years. 


Chemistry      111 


433.  Advanced  [opicsin  Electrochemistry  (3) 
TTieory  and  applications  "l  selected  electrochemical  tech 
niqucs;  solutions  to  mass  transport  problems,  treatment  o! 
electron  transfer  kinetics  ami  kinetics  nl  .issnci.it cil  chemical 
reactions,  .ind  critical  evaluation  nl  adsorption  a  nil  other 
factors  associated  with  eleetroclieniic.il  processes.  Prerequi- 
site: Chem.  332  or  equivalent,  Offered  alternate  years. 

436.  Advanced  Methods  ol  Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 
Theory  and  analytical  applications  ol"  selected  spectroscopic 
techniques:  e.g.,  luminescence,  magnetic  resonance,  and 
microwave  spectroscopy.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  381  or  Chem. 
445,  or  equivalent.  Offered  alternate  years. 


458.  Topics  ill  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  limited  areas  in  organic  chemistry.  May 
be  repeated  when  a  different  topic  is  offered. 

459.  Seminar  in  Organic  Chemistry  (1-6) 

Reports  and  discussions  of  recent  important  developments  in 
theoretical  and  applied  organic  chemistry. 

460.  Organic  Chemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Investigation  of  a  problem  in  organic  chemistry. 

461.  Organic  Chemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Continuation  of  Chem.  460. 


439.  Seminar  in  Physical  Chemistry  (1-6) 

Reports  and  discussions  of  recent  developments  in  physical 

chemistry. 

441.  Chemical  Kinetics  (3) 

A  study  of  kinetic  processes.  Phenomenological  chemical 
kinetics:  order,  mechanism  effect  of  external  variables  on 
rate.  Theories  of  the  rate  constant.  Relation  between  thermo- 
dynamics and  kinetics.  Applications  to  selected  systems  such 
as  unimolecular  decompositions,  adsorption  and  catalysis. 
Prerequisite:  one  year  of  physical  chemistry. 

443.  (Met.  443)  Solid  State  Chemistry  (3) 
Crystal  structure,  diffraction  in  crystals  and  on  surfaces, 
bonding  and  energy  spectra  in  solids,  dielectrics,  surface 
states  and  surface  fields  in  crystals.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  191 
or  equivalent. 

445.  Elements  of  Physical  Chemistry  (4) 
Quantum  chemistry  of  simple  systems,  molecular  structure 
and  spectroscopy,  statistical  and  classical  thermodynamics, 
and  principles  of  kinetic  processes. 

449.  Seminar  in  Analytical  Chemistry  (1-6) 

Reports  and  discussions  of  recent  developments  in  analytical 
chemistry. 

450.  Theoretical  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

An  advanced  study  of  topics  in  theoretical  and  mechanistic 
organic  chemistry:  solvolyses,  rearrangements,  multi-center 
reactions,  carbenes,  photochemistry  and  the  application  of 
nuclear  magnetic  resonance  to  organic  chemical  problems. 
Offered  alternate  years. 

451.  Theoretical  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

The  chemistry  of  benzenoid  aromatic  compounds,  quinones 
and  non-benzenoid  aromatic  substances,  including  modern 
theories  of  structure,  electrophilic,  nucleophiiic  and  homoly- 
tic  aromatic  substitution  and  the  less  familiar  addition  reac- 
tions of  aromatic  systems.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  358.  Offered 
alternate  years. 


466.  Advanced  Organic  Preparations  (2-3) 

A  laboratory  course  of  instruction  in  advanced  techniques  of 

the  preparation  of  organic  compounds. 

471.  Natural  Products  (3) 

A  survey  of  the  chemistry  of  steroids,  tcrpenes,  alkaloids  and 
antibiotics  with  emphasis  on  instrumental  methods  of  analy- 
sis and  structure  proof,  recent  synthetic  and  biosynthetic 
pathways.  Offered  alternate  years. 

473.  Seminar  in  Biochemistry  (1-4) 

Reports  and  discussion  of  current  developments  in  the  field 
of  biochemistry. 

474.  Biochemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Investigation  of  a  problem  in  biochemistry. 

475.  Biochemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Continuation  of  Chem.  474. 

476.  Microbial  Biochemistry  (3) 

Composition,  nutrition  and  metabolism  of  micro-organisms; 
with  emphasis  on  microbial  enzyme  reactions  and  products 
of  microbial  metabolism.  Prerequisites:  Chem.  372  and  Biol. 
35  or  their  equivalents. 

477.  Topics  in  Biochemistry  (3) 

Intensive  study  of  selected  areas  of  biochemistry,  such  as 
mechanisms  of  enzyme  action,  new  developments  in  the 
chemistry  of  lipids,  nucleic  acids,  carbohydrates  and  proteins. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

479.  Biochemical  Techniques  (1-3) 

Laboratory  studies  of  the  techniques  and  principles  involved 
in  the  isolation,  identification  and  biochemical  transforma- 
tion of  carbohydrates,  lipids,  nucleic  acids  and  proteins.  Pre- 
requisite: Chem.  371  or  its  equivalent,  previously  or  con- 
currently. 


112      Chemistry 


480.  Advanced  Biochemical  Preparations  (1-3) 
An  advanced  laboratory  course  in  the  preparation,  isolation, 
purification  and  identification  of  biochemically  produced 
materials.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  materials  and  procedures  of 
current  interest  in  biochemistry.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the 
chairman  of  department. 

490.  Physical  Chemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Investigation  of  a  problem  in  physical  chemistry. 

491.  Physical  Chemistry  Research  (1-4) 
Continuation  of  Chem.  490. 

492.  (Ch.E.492)  Topics  in  Polymer  Science  (3) 

For  course  description,  see  Ch.E.  492. 

494.  Quantum  Chemistry  (3) 

Principles  and  applications  of  quantum  mechanics  to 
chemical  problems.  Applications  to  chemical  bonding,  mole- 
cular structure,  reactivity  and  spectroscopy.  Prerequisite: 
Chem.  445  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department.  Offered 
alternate  years. 

495.  Statistical  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Principles  and  applications  of  statistical  mechanics  to 
chemical  problems.  A  study  of  the  techniques  for  evaluating 
the  properties  of  matter  in  bulk  from  the  properties  of 
molecules  and  their  interactions.  Offered  alternate  years. 

497.  Topics  in  Colloid  and  Surface  Chemistry  (3) 

Applications  of  colloid  chemistry;  special  topics  in  surface 
chemistry.  Lectures  and  seminar.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  397. 
May  be  repeated  for  credit  as  different  topics  are  covered. 

498.  Advanced  Topics  in  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

An  advanced  study  of  some  field  of  physical  chemistry.  Rota- 
tion-vibration spectroscopy;  theory  of  solutions;  photo- 
chemistry and  radiation  chemistry;  irreversible  thermody- 
namics or  other  topics  of  current  interest. 


Civil  Engineering 


Professors 

David  Alan  VanHorn,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 

Lynn  Simpson  Beedle,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Fritz  Laboratory 

George  Clarence  Driscoll,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

John  William  Fisher,  Ph.D. 

John  Orth  Liebig,  Jr.,  M.S. 

Le-Wu  Lu,  Ph,D. 

Alexis  Ostapenko,  Ph.D. 

Adrian  F.  Richards,  Ph.D. 

Lambert  Tall,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Arthur  William  Brune,  Ph.D. 

Wai-Fah  Chen,  Ph.D. 

John  Hartley  Daniels,  Ph.D. 

George  Anson  Dinsmore,  M.S. 

Hsai-Yang  Fang,  Ph.D. 

Walter  H.  Graf,  Ph.D. 

Ti  Huang,  Ph.D. 

Robert  Leroy  Johnson,  Ph.D. 

Celal  Nizamettin  Kostem,  Ph.D. 

Roger  George  Slutter,  Ph.D. 

Bung-Tseng  Yen,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Terence  John  Hirst,  Ph.D. 
Willard  Austin  Murray,  Ph.D. 
Paul  John  Usinowicz,  Ph.D. 


Civil  engineering,  the  stem  from  which  have  branched  the 
other  types  of  engineering,  is  concerned  with  projects  which 
contribute  to  the  comfort  and  needs  of  man.  The  profession- 
al practice  of  a  civil  engineer  includes  the  conception,  design, 
construction,  operation,  and  maintenance  of  private  and 
public  projects,  including  bridges,  buildings,  highways,  air- 
ports, railroads,  harbors,  docks,  subways,  tunnels,  water 
supply  and  purification  systems,  sewage  collection  and  treat- 
ment facilities,  water  power  developments,  the  making  of 
surveys,  and  research.  Many  civil  engineers  are  associated 
with  consulting  engineering  firms,  contractors,  industrial 
concerns,  or  various  governmental  agencies. 

In  the  undergraduate  program,  the  work  of  the  first  two 
years  deals  chiefly  with  the  scientific  and  mathematical  prin- 
ciples which  form  the  bases  of  engineering  practice.  The  last 
two  years  include  the  applications  of  these  principles,  along 
with  opportunities  for  elective  courses  in  areas  of  individual 
interest.  All  students  receive  instruction  in  engineering 


Civil  Engineering     113 


measurements,  soil  mechanics,  fluid  mechanics  and  hy- 
draulics,  structural  theory  and  design,  transportation  engi- 
neering and  environmental  engineering.  Special  five  ycai  conv 
bined  programs  leading  to  the  degrees  U.S.  in  C.E.  and  cither 
B.S.  i"  M.E.  or  B.A.  can  be  arranged.  Also,  a  combined  pin 
gT.un  leading  to  the  degrees  B.S.  in  C.E.  and  B.S.  in  Business 
Administrate  ind  one-half  years),  M.B.A.  in  manage 

ment  science,  or  M.S.  in  foreign  studies  can  be  arranged. 

Engineers,  through  their  professional  societies,  have  urged 
that  the  engineering  student  be  educated  as  a  professional 
man  with  a  sound  understanding  of  his  place  in  society.  This 
education  is  provided  through  a  well-planned  civil  engineering 
program  enriched  by  the  humanistic-social  courses  taken 
during  the  four  years,  and  selected  with  the  advice  and 
approval  ot  the  curriculum  director. 

Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 

Freshman  Year  (See  page  45) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  &  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

CE  13  Civil  Engineering  Concepts  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Math  Elective  (3) 

CE  40  Principles  of  Surveying  (3) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Mech  11  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Summer  (3  credit  hours) 

CE  41  Engineering  Surveys  (3) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (16-19  credit  hours) 

CE101  Computer  Methods  (1) 

CE  1 21  Mechanics  of  Fluids  (3) 

CE  159  Structural  Analysis  I  (3) 

CE143  Soil  Mechanics  (3) 

Mech  102  Dynamics  (3) 

Elective  (3-6) 


Senioi  Year,  First  Semestet    ti  {8  credit  hours) 

l  i   203  i'i  ofcssional  I  Icvclopmcnl  (3) 

CE  207  Transportation  Engineering  (3) 

( is  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (6-9) 

Senior  Year,  Sei  ond  Semester  |  15  IS  credit  hours) 

CE  200  Engineering  Planning  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 
Elective  (912) 

Note:  The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load 
required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirements;  the  higher 
represents  the  normal  semester  load. 

Elective  opportunities  total  15-27  credits,  with  at  least  6 
credits  to  be  in  engineering  science  courses.  The  engineering 
sciences  form  the  transition  between  basic  sciences  and  engi- 
neering design.  For  the  civil  engineering  student,  typical  engi- 
neering science  clcctivcs  would  be  M.E.  1 04,  105,  and  242; 
Mech.  203;Met.  63  or91;E.E.  20,  160,  161, and  162. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

11.  Engineering  Graphics  (2) 

Use  of  drawing  instruments;  freehand  lettering  and  shape 
description;  theory  of  orthographic  projection,  revolution, 
and  pictorial  representation;  theoretical  problems  in  space 
relationships  between  points,  lines  and  planes;  surfaces  as 
loci.  Emphasis  on  visualization  and  geometric  logic. 

13.  Civil  Engineering  Concepts  (3) 

Introduction  to  the  analysis  and  design  of  civil  engineering 
systems.  Graphical  communication  and  analysis.  Case  studies 
and  student  projects  in  the  several  areas  of  civil  engineering 
specialization.  Oral  and  written  reports. 

40.  Principles  of  Surveying  (3) 

Study  of  errors  in  measurements,  their  effect  on  field  pro- 
cedures and  office  computations  and  their  use  in  determining 
precisions  for  methods  and  equipment  to  meet  prescribed 
accuracies  and  in  preparation  of  survey  specifications.  Study 
of  methods  in  the  use  of  the  tape,  transit,  and  level  in  land, 
engineering,  and  topographic  surveying.  Astronomical  obser- 
vations for  true  direction,  state  plane  coordinate  systems, 
survey  computations,  theory  of  errors  and  statistics  appli- 
cable to  second  order,  third  order,  and  ordinary  surveys. 


Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

CE  110  Civil  Engineering  Lab  (3) 

CE  170  Environmental  Engineering  I  (3) 

CE  160  Structural  Design  (3) 

CE  222  Hydraulic  Engineering  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 


41.  Engineering  Surveys  (3) 

Applications  of  surveying  to  route  location,  topography, 
highways,  construction,  and  boundaries.  Daily  recitation  and 
field  work  for  a  three-week  period.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  40. 
Summer  session. 


Summer 
CE  100 


Industrial  Employment 


114     Civil  Engineering 


100.  Industrial  Employment 

During  the  summer  following  the  junior  year,  students  are 
required  to  spend  at  least  eight  weeks  in  approved  office  or 
shop  work  or  on  engineering  construction.  A  written  report 
on  the  shop  work  or  project,  outlining  the  experience  ob- 
tained is  due  on  return  from  summer  vacation. 

101.  Computer  Methods  (1) 

Computer  programming  of  problems  encountered  in  civil 
engineering,  predicated  on  numerical  techniques.  Prerequi- 
site: Engr.  1. 

102.  Civil  Engineering  Proseminar  (1) 

A  study  of  current  civil  engineering  projects  and  develop- 
ments with  written  reports.  At  weekly  meetings  these  reports 
are  presented  orally  in  abstract.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing. 

103.  Special  Problems  (1-6) 

Supervised  individual  research  problems  with  report,  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  instructor. 

104.  Readings  in  Civil  Engineering  (1-3) 

Study  of  selected  technical  papers,  with  abstracts  and 
reports.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

106.  Structural  Design  (3) 

Elementary  theory  and  design  of  structures  in  steel,  wood, 

and  concrete.  An  abridged  course  in  stress  analysis  and  design 

for  students  other  than  civil  engineers.  Prerequisite:  Mech. 

11. 

110.  Civil  Engineering  Laboratory  (3) 

Experimental  investigation  of  civil  engineering  problems.  The 
collection,  evaluation  and  interpretation  of  data.  Laboratory 
work  in  the  major  disciplines  of  civil  engineering  concluded 
with  an  experimental  investigation  in  one  or  more  areas  of 
the  student's  choice.  Prerequisites:  junior  standing  or  consent 
of  the  department  chairman. 


in  engineering  practice.  Prerequisite:  Mech.  11  or  consent  of 
department  chairman. 

157.  Concrete  Laboratory  (1) 

Principles  of  the  behavior  of  plain  and  reinforced  concrete. 
Design  and  preparation  of  concrete  mixtures,  and  tests  of 
aggregates,  control  cylinders,  and  reinforced  concrete  beams. 
Prerequisite:  C.E.  160  previously  or  concurrently. 

159.  Structural  Analysis  I  (3) 

Elastic  analysis  of  statically  determinate  frames  and  trusses; 
deflections  by  the  method  of  virtual  work;  force  method 
analysis  of  indeterminate  structures;  moment  distribution 
concept.  Prerequisite:  Mech.  1  1. 

160.  Structural  Design  (3) 

Principles  of  structural  design.  Safety  and  economy. 
Strength,  stability  and  serviceability  criteria.  Selection  of 
simple  structural  members  to  resist  tensile,  compressive, 
bending,  and  shearing  loads.  Various  structural  materials  will 
be  covered,  especially  steel  and  reinforced  concrete.  Prerequi- 
site: C.E.  159. 

170.  Environmental  Engineering  I  (3) 

Analysis  and  design  of  water  distribution,  waste  water,  and 
storm  water  collection.  Water  and  waste  water  sources  and 
treatment  configuration.  Laboratory  work  in  water  and  waste 
water  evaluation  with  application  to  design.  Prerequisite: 
C.E.  121. 

200.  Engineering  Planning  (3) 

Principles  of  systems  planning  of  civil  engineering  projects.  A 
study  of  factors  affecting  the  inception,  evaluation,  planning, 
design  and  completion  of  typical  engineering  projects,  includ- 
ing technical,  political,  economic,  social  and  environmental 
factors;  urban  planning;  plan  implementation;  decision 
making;  management  techniques  and  reporting;  optimal  prin- 
ciples. Prerequisite:  junior  standing. 


121.  Mechanics  of  Fluids  (3) 

Hydrostatics,  fundamental  laws  of  fluid  motion,  emphasis  on 
control  volume  methods.  Potential  flow,  dynamic  similitude, 
boundary  layers,  pipe  flow,  and  hydrodynamic  forces  on 
objects.  Prerequisite:  Mech.  102  previously  or  concurrently. 

123.  Fluid  Mechanics  Laboratory  (1) 

Measurement  of  pressure,  velocity  and  flow  rate.  Experimen- 
tal error  and  test  procedures.  Exercises  in  closed  conduit 
flow,  open  channel  flow,  and  hydraulic  machinery.  Prerequi- 
site: C.E.  121  or  M.E.  231. 

143.  Soil  Mechanics  (3) 

Fundamental  physical,  chemical  and  mechanical  properties 
affecting  the  engineering  behavior  of  soils.  Identification; 
classification;  permeability;  effective  stress  and  pore  water 
pressures;  compaction,  compression  and  consolidation; 
stress-strain  behavior  and  shear  strength;  laboratory  tests  for 
engineering  properties;  application  of  theories  and  principles 


203.  Professional  Development  (3) 

Elements  of  professionalism  and  registration;  responsibilities 
of  technical  and  professional  societies,  and  of  the  civil  engi- 
neer as  a  professional  and  citizen.  Principles  of  technical 
writing,  law,  and  engineering  economics  applicable  to  civil 
engineers.  Written  and  oral  reports.  Prerequisite:  senior  stand- 
ing. 

207.  Transportation  Engineering  I  (3) 

Principles  of  the  design,  construction,  and  maintenance  of 
transportation  facilities  with  emphasis  on  highways  and  air- 
ports in  the  areas  of  geometric,  drainage,  and  pavement 
design.  Properties  and  performance  of  materials  used.  Field 
trips  and  design  problems.  Prerequisites:  C.E.  41,  C.E.  143. 

222.  Hydraulic  Engineering  (3) 

Hydraulic  measurements,  open  channel  hydraulics,  and  sedi- 
ment transport,  hydraulic  machinery,  hydraulic  structures, 
coastal  hydraulics.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  121  or  equivalent. 


Civil  Engineering     115 


244.    Foundation    I  ngllll'ellllg  i  I) 

Application  ol  the  theories  and  print  iples  "i  soil  mechanics 

indation  design.  S i t  ■.-  investigations  engineering  tc  n 
evaluate  subsoil  conditions,  bearing  capacity  and  settlement 
analyses  fot  building  foundations.  I  atcra]  loads  on  retaining 

walls  Hid  bulkheads.  Slope  stability  and  embankment  design. 
Seepage.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  143  or  consent  ol  department 
chairman. 

259.  Structural  Analysis  II  (3) 

Deflection  ol  beams  and  frames  by  moment  area  methods; 
force  analysis  of  complex  structures;  plastic  analysis  by 
mechanism  methods;  influence  coefficients;  introduction  to 
displacement  methods  of  analysis;  computer  applications. 
Prerequisite:  C.E.  159. 

261.  Structural  Steel  Design  (3) 

Design  of  steel  structures,  including  plate  girders,  other  built- 
up  members,  trusses,  frames,  grillages,  shell-type  structures 
and  thin  gage  members.  Additional  topics  include  connec- 
tions, composite  beams,  and  fatigue  and  fracture  concepts 
related  to  structural  design.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  160,  C.E.  259 
or  consent  of  department  chairman. 

263.  Structural  Concrete  Design  (3) 

Design  of  reinforced  concrete  structural  elements  and  basic 
systems,  including  continuous  beams,  frames,  slabs,  footings, 
and  walls.  Serviceability  criteria.  Introduction  to  prestrcssing 
and  torsion.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  160,  C.E.  259  or  consent  of 
department  chairman. 

271.  Environmental  Engineering  II  (3) 

Introduction  to  unit  operations  and  unit  processes  involved 
in  water  and  waste  water  treatment  facilities.  Consideration 
of  combinations  to  meet  water  quality  requirements,  either 
as  water  supply  source  or  as  receiving  mantle.  Prerequisite: 
C.E.  170. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  C.E. (1-3) 

316.  Civil  Engineering  Planning  (3) 

Project-oriented  planning  of  one  or  two  civil  engineering  pro- 
jects of  students'  choice,  with  oral  and  written  report;  task 
force  approach,  collection  and  analysis  of  data;  consideration 
of  technical  and  environmental  factors;  cost  analyses.  Inter- 
action with  consulting  engineers  and  planners.  Prerequisite: 
senior  standing  or  consent  of  department  chairman. 

322.  Hydromechanics  (3) 

Fundamental  equations  of  fluid  flow.  Stress  on  viscous  flow 
with  introductions  to  turbulence,  boundary  layers,  and  tur- 
bulent shear  flow.  Hydraulic  applications.  Prerequisites: 
Math.  205,  C.E.  121. 

323.  Hydraulic  Laboratory  Practice  (1-3) 

Study  of  theory  and  methods  of  hydraulic  experimentation. 


324.  (Mech.  323)  Fluid  Mechanics  ol  the  Ocean  and 

Atmosphere  (3) 

For  course  description,  see  Mech.  323. 

325.  Hydrology  (3) 

Hydrologic  cycle.  Precipitation,  evaporation,  transpiration, 
infiltration.  Ground  water.  Stream  flow,  hydrographs,  floods. 
Statistical  analysis  applied  to  hydrology.  Prerequisite:  C.E. 
121. 

326.  Ground  Water  Hydrology  (3) 

The  study  of  subsurface  water,  its  environment  and  dis- 
tribution. Theory  of  ground  water  movement.  Mechanics  of 
well  flow.  Sea  water  intrusion.  Artificial  recharge.  Basin 
development.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  121  or  consent  of  depart- 
ment chairman. 

328.  Channel  and  Oceanographical  Hydraulics  (3) 
Hydraulics  of  fixed  bed  channels,  specific  energy  concept, 
secondary  current,  frictional  resistance,  flow  stability,  arti- 
ficial obstruction.  Oceanographical  engineering  and  coastal 
hydraulics,  theory  of  waves,  wave  forces,  wave  refraction  and 
diffraction,  coastal  processes.  Prerequisites:  C.E.  121  and 
consent  of  department  chairman. 

332.  Ocean  Engineering  (3) 

Quantitative  oceanographic  information  for  engineers,  with 
emphasis  on  the  coastal  zone.  Navigation  and  energy  systems; 
materials;  pollution  problems;  brief  survey  of  the  offshore 
petroleum  and  mining  industries;  manned  and  telechiric  un- 
dersea operations.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chair- 
man. 

333.  Ocean  Engineering  Field  Investigations  (1-3) 

Field  studies  in  ocean  engineering  involving  participation  in 
research  investigations  conducted  at  sea.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  department  chairman. 

341.  Soil  Stabilization  (3) 

The  mechanisms  of  soil  stabilization:  compaction,  use  of 
additives  (aggregates,  cement,  asphalt,  chemicals),  special 
techniques.  Principles  and  techniques  of  soil  stabilization  for 
use  as  foundation  material  in  highways  and  airfields;  theories 
of  flexible  and  rigid  pavement  design.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  143 
or  equivalent. 

342.  Experimental  Soil  Mechanics  (3) 

Experimental  studies  dealing  with  the  measurement  of  soil 
properties  in  the  laboratory  and  in  situ;  application  of  these 
properties  to  design;  consolidation;  strength  of  soils  in  tri- 
axial  compression  and  other  shear  tests,  including  measure- 
ment of  pore  water  pressures;  model  design  and  analysis;  field 
measurement  of  in  situ  soil  properties;  laboratory  and  field 
instrumentation.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  143. 


116     Civil  Engineering 


343.  Seepage  and  Earth  Structures  (3) 
Long-  and  short-term  stability  of  embankments  and  cut 
slopes;  numerical  and  graphical  methods  of  stability  analysis; 
seepage  through  soils;  design  of  earth  dams,  embankments 
and  excavations;  influence  of  seepage  on  embankment  stabili- 
ty; construction  control  and  field  measurement  of  pore 
pressures  and  earth  movements.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  143  or 
equivalent. 

352.  Structural  Dynamics  (3) 

Analysis  of  linear  structural  systems  to  time  dependent  loads. 
Free  and  forced  vibration.  Classical  and  numerical  methods 
of  solution.  Lumped-mass  techniques,  energy  methods,  and 
introduction  to  matrix  formulation  of  dynamic  problems. 
Application  to  design.  Prerequisite:  Math.  205  or  equivalent. 

359.  Plastic  Analysis  and  Design  (3) 

Plastic  analysis  and  design  of  steel  structure.  Strength  and 
behavior  of  frames  and  component  parts  beyond  the  elastic 
limit.  Methods  of  predicting  strength  and  deformation  in  the 
plastic  range.  Studies  of  industrial  and  multistory  frames. 
Comparison  of  plastic  design  techniques  with  allowable-stress 
design  methods.  Current  research.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  259  or 
equivalent. 

360.  Advanced  Structural  Design  (3) 

Project-oriented  advanced  design  of  structures  for  bridges  and 
buildings  in  steel  or  reinforced  concrete  and  combinations  of 
both  materials.  Emphasis  on  economy,  strength  and  perfor- 
mance. Consideration  of  design  of  timber  or  glued-laminated 
structures,  depending  on  student  interest.  Prerequisites:  C.E. 
261  and  C.E.  263,  or  equivalent. 

365.  Prestressed  Concrete  (3) 

Principles  of  prestressing.  Analysis  and  design  of  basic  flex- 
ural  members.  Instantaneous  and  time-dependent  properties 
of  materials.  Prestress  losses.  Additional  topics  may  include 
continuity,  partial  prestressing,  compression  members,  cir- 
cular prestressing,  etc.  Prerequisites:  C.E.  263;  C.E.  259  pre- 
viously or  concurrently,  or  consent  of  department  chairman. 

371.  Environmental  Health  Engineering  (3) 
Engineering  applications  to  public  health;  food  and  milk  sani- 
tation, solid  wastes,  vector  control,  communicable  disease 
control.  Institutional  and  industrial  sanitation,  housing,  air 
pollution,  bathing  and  recreational  water  quality.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  department  chairman. 

374.  Sanitary  Engineering  Analysis  and  Operations  (3) 
Applications  of  chemical  theory,  concepts  of  operations  com- 
monly used  in  water  quality  control  and  laboratory  evalua- 
tions for  design  of  processes  in  water  and  waste-water  treat- 
ment. Prerequisite:  C.E.  271  or  consent  of  department 
chairman. 


376.  Water  Resources  Engineering  (3) 

Utilization  of  principles  of  hydraulics,  hydrology  and  envi- 
ronmental engineering  in  problems  of  erosion  and  flood  con- 
trol, power,  irrigation  navigation,  and  water  quality  control; 
economics  and  water  law  in  river  basin  planning.  Prerequi- 
sites: C.E.  222  and  C.E.  170  or  consent  of  department  chair- 
man. 

380.  Design  Projects  (1-6) 

Design  project  work  as  a  member  of  a  team,  probably  includ- 
ing students  from  differing  disciplines.  The  project  will  attack 
a  problem  which,  when  possible,  relates  to  a  problem  of  one 
of  the  local  communities  or  industries.  Specific  projects  will 
normally  be  guided  by  faculty  from  several  departments  with 
consultants  from  off  the  campus.  The  course  will  be  offered 
both  semesters  and  may  be  repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  department  chairman. 

381.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

A  study  of  selected  topics  in  civil  engineering,  not  included  in 
other  formal  courses. 

385.  Research  Procedures  Seminar  (1) 
Planning  and  execution  of  research  projects,  survey  of  cur- 
rent research,  elements  of  proposals  and  budgets.  Literature 
search  procedures.  Presentation  of  data,  and  of  written  and 
oral  reports.  Guidelines  for  visual  aids. 

For  Graduates 

Graduate  studies  in  civil  engineering  permit  the  student  to 
build  upon  the  broad  background  of  undergraduate  training 
in  order  to  prepare  for  professional  practice  at  an  advanced 
level,  for  research  and  development,  or  for  teaching.  The 
selection  of  graduate  courses  and  research  opportunities 
offered  in  the  department  permits  the  development  of  study 
programs  either  encompassing  a  wide  range  of  interests  or 
pursuing  a  special  area  of  civil  engineering  in  depth.  The 
department  offers  advanced  work  in  structural  engineering, 
geotechnical  engineering,  geotechnical  ocean-engineering, 
hydraulic  engineering  and  environmental  engineering,  leading 
to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degrees;  23  Ph.D.  and  38  M.S.  candi- 
dates were  enrolled  in  the  department  in  the  1972-73 
academic  year. 

A  graduate  program  leading  to  the  M.S.  degree  will  nor- 
mally consist  of  a  number  of  courses  in  a  major  area  plus  at 
least  two  courses  in  a  minor  area  or  areas.  Each  candidate  for 
a  master's  degree  is  expected  to  take  at  least  one  research 
course  (C.E.  429,  439,  449,  469,  479,  481,  or  491),  but  a 
minimum  of  24  hours  of  the  program  should  consist  of 
courses  outside  this  group.  Research  assistants  and  fellows 
normally  will  prepare  a  thesis. 

A  number  of  selected  subjects  offered  by  the  departments 
of  mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics,  chemical  engineer- 
ing, metallurgy  and  materials  science,  biology,  and  geological 
sciences  may  also  be  considered  a  part  of  the  major  field  in 
civil  engineering.  A  list  of  such  subjects  is  available  through 
the  chairman  of  the  department. 


Civil  Engineering     117 


The  Ph.D.  degree  program  normal!)  includes  (1  |  courses 
in  the  major  field,  ,  J1  courses  in  minor  in- Ids.  and  (3)  ■<  il is 
serration  presenting  results  ol  original  research.  In  addition, 
andidatc  is  required  to  have  some  educ  ation  in  one  01 
two  non-engineering  fields.  Tli is  requirement  may  be  met  bj 
taking  two  course.  |  !00  level  01  above),  or  by  taking  two 
foreign  language  courses,  or  by  passing  a  language  proficiency 
examination.  Holders  of  master's  degrees  planning  to  become 
candidates  tor  a  Ph.D.  must  take  a  qualifying  examination  at 
the  first  opportunity  following  one  semester  in  residence. 
Alter  qualification,  the  program  of  work  is  formulated  by  the 
candidate,  his  special  committee,  and  the  department  chair- 
man. 

The  laboratories  of  the  department  are  located  in  the 
Fritz  Engineering  laboratory.  Established  in  1909  by  the 
generosity  of  the  late  John  Fritz,  and  improved  through  ad- 
ditions to  apparatus  and  equipment,  the  laboratory  offers 
complete  tacilities  for  research  and  instruction  in  structural 
engineering,  geotechnical  engineering,  model  analysis,  fluid 
mechanics  and  hydraulics,  environmental  engineering,  and 
other  related  fields.  There  is  a  considerable  amount  of  inter- 
disciplinary research  currently  underway  in  the  laboratory. 

Structural  testing  equipment  includes  dynamic  testing 
machines,  a  5,000,000-pound  universal  hydraulic  testing 
machine,  and  other  special  loading  apparatus.  Hydraulic  test- 
ing equipment  includes  a  dredge  pump  test  facility,  the 
largest  in  this  country,  plus  installations  for  testing  models  of 
spillways,  open  channels,  and  beach  facilities.  A  brochure 
describing  the  research  facilities  and  programs  is  available  on 
request. 

An  interdisciplinary  relationship  with  the  Center  for 
Marine  Science  and  Environmental  Studies  enables  the  devel- 
opment of  academic  and  research  programs  in  ocean  engi- 
neering. 

A  number  of  research  assistantships  and  teaching  assis- 
tantships  are  available  to  provide  financial  aid  to  students  of 
outstanding  promise.  The  half-time  research  or  teaching 
duties  required  of  holders  of  assistantships  provide  valuable 
training  which  supplements  the  formal  course  offering.  The 
graduate  course  offering  of  the  department  is  programmed  to 
fit  the  schedule  of  half-time  assistants.  A  very  limited  number 
of  scholarships  and  fellowships  are  available  to  provide  finan- 
cial aid  for  full-time  study. 

403.  Analytical  Methods  in  Civil  Engineering  (3) 
Analytical  and  numerical  methods  used  in  various  fields  of 
civil  engineering.  Matrix  algebra  in  engineering  analysis.  Itera- 
tive, differencing,  and  discretization  techniques.  Energy 
principles  and  special  methods.  Treatment  of  typical  differen- 
tial equations  in  civil  engineering.  Introduction  to  theory  of 
elasticity  with  some  engineering  applications.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  205  or  equivalent. 

408.  Computer  Methods  in  Civil  Engineering  (3) 
Numerical  and  computer-oriented  methods  specially  applica- 
ble to  the  solution  of  complex  problems  arising  in  various 
fields  of  civil  engineering.  Solutions  of  well-  and  ill-condition- 
ed linear  and  non-linear  systems.  Eigenvalue  formulation  of 


Stability  and  dynamic  problems.  Reduction  tci  hniquc- ■.. 
applied  linear  graph  theory,  integration  schemes  lor  large 
structural  systems.  I  Optimal  design  by  linear  programming. 
Introduction  to  problem-oriented  languages  and  computer- 
ized design.  Prerequisites:  C.E.  403  or  equivalent,  and  work- 
ing knowledge  of  FORTRAN  IV  programming. 

124.  Surface  Walet  Hydrology  (3) 

The  study  of  quantities  in  the  flow  of  water  in  streams. 
Meterology;  hydrographs.  Application  of  statistical  analysis 
and  probability  to  hydrological  problems.  Drainage  basin 
analysis  and  planning.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  121  or  consent  of 
department  chairman. 

425.  Hydraulics  of  Sediment  Transport  (3) 
Hydrodynamic  forces  on  particles,  settling  velocity.  Sediment 
transport  in  open  channel:  tractive  force  theory,  bed  load 
and  suspension  theory,  total  load  and  wash  load.  Bedform 
mechanics,  cohesive  channel  hydraulics.  Sediment  transport 
in  closed  conduits.  Shore  processes  and  coastline  hydraulics. 
Prerequisites:  C.E.  121  and  C.E.  222,  and  consent  of  depart- 
ment chairman. 

428.  Advanced  Topics  in  Hydraulics  (1-3) 

Recent  developments  in  hydromechanics  and  hydraulics. 
Topics  to  be  selected  from:  wave  mechanics,  theory  of  flow 
through  porous  media,  dispersion,  hydrodynamic  forces  on 
structures,  potential  flow,  free  streamline  theory,  open  chan- 
nel hydraulics,  computer  methods.  Prerequisites:  C.E.  322 
and  consent  of  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit. 

429.  Hydraulic  Research  (1-6) 

Individual  research  problems  with  reports.  May  be  repeated 
for  credit. 

431.  Geotechnical  Ocean  Engineering  (3) 
Study  of  the  engineering  and  scientific  aspects  of  soils  floor- 
ing the  oceans;  soils  and  their  distribution;  theory  and 
practice  of  sampling,  laboratory  and  in  situ  testing,  geo- 
physical methods,  and  computerized  data  synthesis;  biologic- 
al, geochemical,  and  physical  properties  of  the  electrolyte- 
gas-solid  soil  system  of  the  sea  floor  and  the  response  of  this 
system  to  applied  static  and  dynamic  forces.  Prerequisite: 
C.E.  143  or  equivalent. 

437.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geotechnical  Ocean  Engineering  (1-3) 
Advanced  study  of  selected  topics  in  geotechnical  ocean  engi- 
neering, such  as:  physico-chemistry  of  ocean  sediments; 
foundation  design  in  soft  sediments;  instrumentation  for 
deep-sea  soil  surveys;  and  others.  Selection  of  topics  will  de- 
pend on  particular  qualifications  of  the  staff,  as  well  as  in- 
terest of  students.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chair- 
man. May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

439.  Ocean  Engineering  Research  (1-6) 

Individual  research  problems  with  reports.  May  be  repeated 

for  credit. 


118     Civil  Engineering 


443.  Advanced  Soil  Mechanics  I  (3) 

The  origin,  composition,  and  physico-chemical  properties  of 
soils  and  their  influence  on  the  engineering  properties  and 
behavior  of  soils;  transmission  of  water  in  saturated  and  un- 
saturated soils;  advanced  theory  of  compaction;  compression 
and  consolidation;  theories  of  shear  strength.  Prerequisite:  a 
course  in  soil  mechanics. 

444.  Advanced  Soil  Mechanics  II  (3) 

Fundamental  and  advanced  theories  of  soil  mechanics  appli- 
cable to  earth  structures  and  foundation  design;  stresses  in 
homogeneous  and  layered  systems  for  ideal  elastic,  plastic 
and  visco-elastic  soils;  lateral  earth  pressures;  slope  stability; 
vibration  and  other  dynamic  forces.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  443. 


453.  Structural  Members  and  Frames  (3) 

General  torsion  of  thin-walled  open,  closed,  and  combined 
open  and  closed  cross-sections;  general  instability  of  thin- 
wailed  members;  inelastic  instability;  special  problems  in 
stability.  Desirable  preparation:  C.E.  403  and  Mech.  415. 

454.  Plate  and  Shell  Structures  (3) 

Analysis  and  design  of  plates  loaded  transversely  and  in  their 
plane.  Shear  lag;  influence  surfaces.  Buckling  and  post- 
buckling  behavior  of  elastic  and  inelastic  plates.  Membrane 
and  bending  analysis  of  cylindrical,  rotational  and  hyper- 
bolic-paraboloidal  shells.  Exact  and  approximate  engineering 
methods.  Design  considerations.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 


445.  Advanced  Foundation  Engineering  (3) 
Current  theory  and  practice  relating  to  the  design  of  founda- 
tions for  buildings  and  other  structures.  Analysis  and  limita- 
tion of  settlements;  bearing  capacity  analyses  of  shallow 
foundations  and  piles;  flexible  and  rigid  retaining  wall  design; 
embankment  design;  control  of  seepage  and  other  construc- 
tion problems;  site  investigations.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in 
soil  mechanics. 

447.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geotechnical  Engineering  (1-3) 
Advanced  studies  in  selected  subjects  related  to  geotechnical 
engineering.  The  general  areas  in  which  studies  may  be  taken 
include:  stress-strain-time  relationships  of  soils,  colloidal 
phenomena  in  soils,  ground  water  flow  and  seepage,  soil  dy- 
namics, soil  plasticity,  numerical  methods  applied  to  soil 
mechanics,  earth  dam  design,  theories  of  layered  systems  and 
their  application  to  pavement  design,  rock  mechanics.  The 
studies  specifically  undertaken  in  any  particular  semester 
depend  on  the  availability  of  staff  and  the  interest  of  stu- 
dents. Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chairman.  Offered 
on  sufficient  demand  only.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

449.  Geotechnical  Research  (1-6) 

Individual  research  problems  relating  to  soil  engineering,  with 
report.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  soil  mechanics. 

450.  Advanced  Structural  Theory  I  (3) 

Introduction  to  force  and  displacement  matrix  analysis  of 
structures.  Consideration  of  influence  of  support  settlement, 
temperature,  and  fabrication  tolerances  on  stress  resultants 
and  deformations.  Prerequisite:  C.E.  259  or  equivalent. 

451.  Advanced  Structural  Theory  II  (3) 

Specialized  methods  of  analysis:  column  analogy,  moment 
distribution.  General  treatment  of  deformation  methods 
using  matrix  algebra.  Selected  topics  in  structural  theory: 
influence  lines,  multi-story  building  frames,  space  structures. 
Introduction  to  finite  element  method;  non-linear  problems. 
Prerequisite:  C.E.  450. 


455.  Advanced  Structural  Dynamics  (3) 
Analysis  and  design  of  structures  to  resist  wind,  earthquake, 
and  blast  loading.  Matrix  methods  and  computer  applica- 
tions. Non-linear  and  elasto-plastic  response.  Damping  charac- 
teristics of  structures  and  structural  components,  spectral 
analysis,  dynamic  instability.  Characteristics  of  aerodynamic 
and  seismic  forces  and  nuclear  blast.  Introduction  to  vibra- 
tion of  3-dimensional  structural  systems.  Prerequisites:  C.E. 
403,  C.E.  352  or  Mech.  406,  and  C.E.  450  or  equivalent. 

457.  Theory  and  Design  of  Steel  Structures  (3) 
Analysis  and  design  of  steel  structures;  structural  connec- 
tions; composite  steel-concrete  systems  and  other  compo- 
nents. Consideration  of  residual  stress;  brittle  fracture; 
fatigue  strength;  fastener  systems.  Study  of  current  research 
and  application  to  design  practice. 

459.  Advanced  Topics  in  Plastic  Theory  (3) 

Fundamentals  of  the  mathematical  theory  of  plasticity;  the 
general  theorems  of  limit  analysis  and  their  applications  to 
beams  under  combined  loading,  arches,  space  frames,  plates 
and  shells.  Limit  analysis  of  two-  and  three-dimensional  prob- 
lems in  soil,  concrete,  rock,  and  metal.  Current  develop- 
ments. Prerequisite:  C.E.  359. 

462.  Experimental  Methods  of  Structural  Analysis  (3) 
Mechanical  properties  of  structural  materials  and  different 
procedures  of  evaluating  these  properties;  experimental 
methods  of  stress  analysis;  statistical  analysis  of  experimental 
data. 

463.  Experimental  Methods  of  Structural  Research  (3) 

Mechanical  properties  of  structural  materials  and  different 
procedures  of  evaluating  these  properties;  experimental 
methods  of  stress  analysis;  statistical  analysis  of  experimental 
data. 

464.  (Mech.  416)  Theory  of  Plates  and  Shells  (3) 
For  course  description  see  Mech.  416. 


Civil  Engineering     119 


165.   Vdvanced  Topics  in  Concrete  Structures  (3)  181.  Special  Problems  (1-6) 

Advanced  topics  in  reinforced  and  prestressed  concrete.  An  intensive  study,  with  report,  of  some  special  Held  of  civil 

I  iin it  design  concepts.  Yield  line  theorj  foi  concrete  slabs.  engineering  which  is  not  covered  in  the  other  courses.  A 

Composite  members.  Additional  topics  ni.iv  iiuiiuli  ilesmn  ol  design  project  or  ,m  interdisciplinary  study  of  some  problem 

concrete  bridge  systems,  shear  walls,  arches:  seismic  design.  related  to  civil  engineering  may  also  be  included.  May  be 

Prerequisiti  > 3  or  equivalent.  repeated  for  credit. 

466.  Concrete  Shell  Structures  (3)  483.  Graduate  Seminar  (1-3) 

Analysis  and  design  of  various  types  of  concrete  shell  struc-  Study  of  current  topics  in  the  field  of  civil  engineering. 

tures.  Folded  plates,  barrel  shells  and  shells  of  double  curva- 
ture. Application  of  prcstressing.  Prerequisites:  C.E.  403,  491.   Thesis  (1-6) 
C.E.  263,  and  C.E.  365  or  equivalent.  Desirable  preparation: 
C.E.  454  oi  Mech.  Hi.. 

467.  Advanced  Topics  in  Structural  Engineering  (1-3) 
Advanced  study  of  selected  topics  in  structural  mechanics 
and  engineering,  such  as:  finite  element  methods,  suspension 
systems:  space  frames;  stability  of  non-linear  systems;  cold- 
formed  and  lightweight  construction;  optimization  and  relia- 
bility: second-order  phenomena  in  structures;  interaction  of 
structures  with  environment;  structural  use  of  plastics;  com- 
posite construction,  etc.  Selection  of  topics  will  depend  on 
particular  qualifications  of  the  staff,  as  well  as  on  the  inter- 
ests of  the  students.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department 
chairman.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

468.  (Mech.  415)  Stability  of  Elastic  Structures  (3) 
For  course  description  see  Mech.  415. 

469.  Structural  Research  (1-6) 

Individual  research  problems  with  reports.  May  be  repeated 
for  credit. 

471.  Water  Treatment  Facilities  (3) 

Theory  and  design  of  water  treatment  facility  components, 
from  source  to  distribution  system.  Laboratory  work  in 
water  chemical  parameter  determinations  for  design  applica- 
tions. Prerequisite:  C.E.  374. 

472.  Water  Pollution  Control  Facilities  (3) 

Fundamental  principles  and  design  of  water  pollution  control 
facilities  for  domestic  and  industrial  waste  waters.  Physical- 
chemical  and  biological  studies  in  laboratory  determination 
of  design  parameters  to  be  applied  in  design  procedures.  Pre- 
requisite: C.E.  374. 

475.  Advanced  Topics  in  Water  Resources  (1-3) 
Advanced  study  of  selected  topics  in  areas  such  as:  physico- 
chemical  methods  of  water  quality  control;  biological  sys- 
tems for  waste-water  treatment;  multiple  use  of  water  re- 
sources; and  others.  Selection  of  topics  will  depend  on  par- 
ticular qualifications  of  the  faculty  as  well  as  interest  of  the 
students.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  department  chairman. 
May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

479.  Environmental  Engineering  Research  (1-6) 
Individual  research  problems  in  environmental  engineering 
with  summary  report.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 


120     Civil  Engineering 


Classics 


Professors 

Joseph  Abele  Maurer,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Douglas  David  Feaver,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor 

Edna  Sophia  DeAngeli,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professor 

David  Kent  Silhanek,  Ph.D. 


Majors  in  Classics  seek,  through  insight  into  the  culture  of 
ancient  Greece  and  Rome,  to  gain  an  appreciation  of  Greco- 
Roman  achievements  in  art,  literature,  philosophy,  and 
science,  and  to  formulate  an  evaluation  of  the  importance  of 
these  for  modern  culture.  Readings  in  the  original  languages 
of  masterpieces,  chosen  both  for  their  usefulness  in  develop- 
ing skill  in  the  languages  and  for  their  intrinsic  worth  and 
abiding  importance,  aim  at  developing  an  accumulative 
growth  in  the  mastery  of  the  languages  and  in  the  ability  to 
interpret,  criticize,  and  evaluate  the  achievements  of  classical 
civilization. 

The  basic  work  is  supplemented  by  studies  in  the  history, 
archaeology,  art,  philosophy,  and  literary  history  of  Greece 
and  Rome,  and  by  an  introduction  to  the  basic  tools  and 
disciplines  of  scholarly  research  in  this  area.  Students  are 
encouraged  to  undertake  research  in  fields  of  their  own  inter- 
est. 

Classics  as  a  major  has  stood  the  test  of  time,  offering  a 
general  cultural  background  for  careers  in  widely  diverse 
fields  in  the  professions,  business,  and  public  service.  It  has 
particular  relevance  as  a  preparation  for  careers  in  teaching, 
law,  writing,  archaeology,  and  the  church. 

Lehigh  University  is  a  cooperating  institution  of  The 
American  School  of  Classical  Studies  at  Athens.  Graduates  of 
Lehigh  University  receive  free  tuition  in  the  school. 

Major  in  Greek 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Gk  1,  2  Elementary  Greek  (6) 

Gk  3,  4  Intermediate  Greek  (6) 


Required  Major  Courses 


Gk316  Plato  (3) 

Gk  21  Ancient  History  (3) 

Gk  50  Greek  Literature  in  English  Translation  (3) 

Gk  202  Greek  Archaeology  (3) 

Majors  in  Greek  will  write  a  translation  examination  during 
their  seventh  semester.  No  comprehensive  examination  is 
required. 

Major  in  Latin 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Elementary  Latin  (3) 
Caesar  (3) 

Nepos  and  Cicero  (3) 
Vergil  (3) 

■  Courses 

The  Latin  Lyric  (3) 

Latin  Drama  (3) 

Ancient  History  (3) 

Latin  Literature  in  English  Translation  (3) 

Archaeology  of  Italy  (3) 

and  twelve  hours  from  the  following: 

Readings  (3) 

Readings  (3) 

The  Roman  Epic  (3) 

Latin  Historical  Grammar  (3) 

Satire  (3) 

Roman  Prose  Writers  (3) 

will  write  a  translation  examination  during 
mester.  No  comprehensive  examination  is 


Major  in  Classics 

This  major  is  designed  for  those  planning  to  go  on  to  gradu- 
ate work  in  classics,  ancient  history,  ancient  philosophy, 
classical  archaeology,  and  classical  linguistics. 

Programs  in  this  major  will  be  worked  out  for  each  stu- 
dent with  due  consideration  to  his  particular  preparation  and 
specific  goals.  In  general  the  program  will  require  as  a  mini- 
mum: 

(a)  18  hours  of  courses  in  either  the  Latin  or  Greek  langu- 
age at  the  "100"  level  or  higher. 

(b)  12  hours  of  courses  in  the  second  language. 

(c)  6  hours  in  ancient  history  (Greek  21,  Latin  22). 

(d)  6  hours  in  Senior  Seminars  (Greek  381,  Latin  381). 
Depending  upon  specific  goals  the  student  will  be  strongly 

urged  to  take  courses  in  fine  arts,  mediaeval  history,  philoso- 
phy, French  and  German. 

Either  a  comprehensive  examination  or  a  senior  essay  will 
be  required  for  graduation. 


Lat  61 

Lat  62 

Lat  63 

Lat  65 

Required 

Major 

Lat  166 

Lat  168 

Lat  22 

Lat  51 

Lat  203 

Lat  211 

Lat  212 

Lat  303 

Lat  304 

Lat  305 

Lat  306 

Majors  in 

Latin 

their  seventh  se 

required. 

Gk  111,  112 
Gkll3 
Gk203 
Gk271 


Greek  Drama  (6) 
Greek  Historians  (3) 
Greek  Epic  (3) 
Readings  (3) 


Classics     121 


Recommended  Electives 


i   ii    [dvanccd  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 


Astron  1 

>   \ 
FA  3 

Phil  23] 
SR  I] 

Greek 


The  Solar  System  (3) 
Fundamentals  of  Art  (3) 
History  of  Architecture  (3) 

Ancient  1'liilosophy  (3) 
Introduction  to  Anthropology  (3) 


( Undergraduate  <  'ourses 

1.  Elementary  Greek  (3) 

For  ill  students  who  desire  to  obtain  a  knowledge  of  the 
fundamentals  of  the  Greek  language.  Early  in  the  semester 
there  will  be  reading  in  stories  and  legends  in  easy  Greek. 

2.  Elementary  Greek  (3) 

Continued  work  in  Greek  vocabulary,  forms,  and  syntax. 
Selected  readings  in  Greek  prose.  Prerequisite:  Gk.  1, 

3.  Intermediate  Greek  (3) 

Xenophon:  Anabasis,  and  other  works.  Grammar  review. 
Prerequisites:  Gk.  1  and  2,  or  one  year  of  entrance  Greek. 

4.  Intermediate  Greek  (3) 

Plato:  Euthyphro,  Apology,  and  Crito,  or  other  dialogues. 
Prerequisite:  Gk.  3. 

21.  (Hist.  21)  Ancient  History  (3) 

The  development  of  civilization  from  palaeolithic  times  to 
the  world  empire  of  Alexander  the  Great.  The  social,  eco- 
nomic, religious,  philosophic,  artistic,  and  literary  develop- 
ment of  the  ancient  world;  the  origin  of  political  institutions. 

50.  Greek  Literature  in  English  Translation  (3)s, 
The  development  of  the  major  departments  of  Greek  litera- 
ture; required  readings  in  English  translations,  with  special 
attention  to  the  epic,  drama,  and  lyric  poetry.  No  knowledge 
of  the  Greek  language  is  required. 

111.  Greek  Drama  (3) 

Representative  plays  of  Sophocles,  Euripides,  and 
Aristophanes.  Literary  study  of  the  drama.  Prerequisite:  Gk. 
4. 

112.  Greek  Drama  (3) 

Continuation  of  Gk.  111.  Prerequisite:  Gk.  4. 

113.  Greek  Historians  (3) 

Selections  from  Herodotus,  Thucydides,  or  Xenophon.  A 
study  of  Greek  historiography.  Prerequisite:  Gk.  4. 


2()1 .  Archeaology  of  the  Near  East  (3) 

Aims  and  methods  <>1  archaeology.  A  chronological  survey  of 
archaeological  funis  from  Palaeolithic,  Neolithic,  Bronze  Age. 
Iron  Age  and  later  cultures  in  the  Near  East,  concentrating  on 
the  Nile,  Tigris-Euphrates  River  basins,  and  the  levant. 
Material  illustrating  the  cultures  and  events  of  the  Bible. 

202.  Greek  Archaeology  (3) 

Aims  and  methods.  A  chronological  presentation  of  prehist- 
oric civilizations  including  the  Neolithic,  Minoan,  Hclladic, 
and  Mycenaean  periods.  A  study  of  extant  ancient  monu- 
ments, buildings,  and  city  plans  of  important  sites  of  the 
classical  and  Hellenistic  periods.  Lectures,  collateral  readings, 
and  reports. 

203.  Greek  Epic  (3) 

Reading  of  considerable  portions  of  the  Homeric  Epics  and  a 
study  of  the  poems  as  works  of  literature.  Studies  of  the 
background  of  the  poems,  and  introduction  to  scholarly 
problems  of  interpretation  and  theories  of  origins.  Prerequi- 
sites: six  hours  of  courses  at  the  "100"  level  and  consent  of 
the  chairman  of  department. 

251.  Classical  Mythology  (3) 

Readings  in  the  major  myths  and  legends  of  ancient  Greece 
and  Rome,  with  intensive  study  of  those  having  the  greatest 
relevance  for  modern  man.  The  changing  aspects  of  myth  as 
reflected  in  both  ancient  and  modern  literature.  Considera- 
tion of  the  transmission  of  myth  in  non-literary  aspects  of 
our  culture. 

271.  Readings  (3) 

Intensive  reading  in  one  author  or  in  a  selected  genre.  Prere- 
quisites: six  hours  of  courses  at  the  "1 00"  level  and  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

316.  Plato  (3) 

Tlie  Republic,  and  other  dialogues.  Lectures  on  classical 
philosophy.  Prerequisites:  six  hours  of  courses  at  the 
100-level  and  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

381.  Senior  Seminar  (3) 

A  proseminar:  introduction  to  classical  scholarship  with  par- 
ticular attention  to  the  methods  of  research,  bibliographical 
aids,  and  scholarly  literature.  Surveys  will  be  made  of  such 
varied  fields  as  archaeology,  numismatics,  hermeneutics, 
palaeography,  and  epigraphy.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

Latin 

22.  (Hist.  22)  Ancient  History  (3) 

Continuation  of  Gk.  21.  The  Hellenistic  Age.  Rome  from  its 

origin  to  395  A.D. 


1 22     Classics 


51.  Latin  Literature  in  English  Translation  (3) 
A  study  of  Latin  literature  by  means  of  the  best  English 
translations.  The  lives  of  the  most  important  authors  are 
studied  and  their  works  read  according  to  the  major  depart- 
ments of  literature— history,  comedy,  epic,  lyric,  etc.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  on  the  chronological  development  of  the 
literature  and  historical  background  necessary  to  the  interpre- 
tation of  the  author's  works.  Lectures  and  readings  with 
special  reports.  No  knowledge  of  the  Latin  language  is  re- 
quired. 

61.  Elementary  Latin  (3) 

For  all  students  who  desire  to  obtain  a  knowledge  of  the 
fundamentals  of  the  Latin  language.  Special  emphasis  on 
English  derivations  and  the  principles  of  grammar. 

62.  Caesar  (3) 

Selections  from  Caesar:  The  Gallic  War.  Prose  composition 
and  syntax.  Prerequisite:  Lat.  61  or  2  entrance  units. 

63.  Nepos  and  Cicero  (3) 

Nepos:  de  Viris  Illustribus;  Cicero's  orations  and  either  de 
Senectute  or  de  Amicitia.  Prerequisite:  Lat.  62  or  3  entrance 
units. 

65.  Vergil  (3) 

Vergil:  Aeneid,  selections  from  the  entire  work;  study  of  the 
aesthetic,  political,  and  philosophical  values  of  Vergil's  poet- 
ry. Prerequisite:  Lat.  63  or  at  least  3  entrance  units. 

166.  The  Roman  Lyric  (3) 

Selected  poems  of  Catullus.  Lectures  on  the  history  and  de- 
velopment of  lyric  poetry;  constant  practice  in  reading  the 
more  important  meters;  memorization  of  stanzas  and 
passages.  Prerequisite:  Lat.  65  or  at  least  4  entrance  units. 

168.  Latin  Drama  (3) 

Readings  of  selected  plays  of  Plautus,  Terence,  and  Seneca. 

Prerequisite:  Lat.  65  or  at  least  4  entrance  units. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

203.  Archaeology  of  Italy  (3) 

Neolithic,  Terramara,  Villanovan,  and  Etruscan  cultures. 
Rome  the  city:  its  buildings,  monuments,  and  streets,  its 
destruction  and  rediscovery  through  excavation;  origin  and 
growth  of  the  city;  the  three  periods,  empire,  republic,  and 
kingdom;  methods  of  identifying  and  dating  monuments.  A 
survey  of  Pompeii,  Herculaneum,  and  Ostia.  Lectures,  read- 
ings and  reports. 

211.  Readings (3) 

Intensive  readings  in  one  author  or  in  a  selected  genre.  Prere- 
quisites: six  hours  of  courses  at  the  "100"  level  and  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

212.  Readings  (3) 

Intensive  reading  in  one  author  or  in  a  selected  genre.  Prere- 
quisites: six  hours  of  courses  at  the  "100"  level  and  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 


301.  The  Roman  Republic  (3) 

The  final  century  of  the  Roman  Republic  (133-44  B.C.)  stud- 
ied through  a  close  examination  of  the  original  sources  in 
translation.  The  course  gives  a  broad  comprehension  of  the 
historical  background  to  the  Latin  authors  of  the  Roman 
Republic  normally  read  in  secondary  school. 

302.  The  Roman  Empire  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Latin  301.  The  principate  of  Augustus  and 
the  first  century  of  the  Roman  Empire  (44  B.C.-70  A.D.). 
The  course  gives  a  broad  comprehension  of  the  historical 
background  to  the  Latin  authors  of  the  Augustan  and  Silver 
Age  normally  read  in  secondary  school. 

303.  The  Roman  Epic  (3) 

The  epic  in  Latin  literature  with  lectures  on  the  Greek  mod- 
els; early  Latin  translations  of  Greek  epics:  later  minor 
writers  of  epic.  Passages  from  Lucretius,  Vergil,  and  Ovid;  a 
study  of  the  Aeneid  in  its  entirety.  Prerequisites:  six  hours  of 
courses  at  the  "100"  level  and  consent  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

304.  Latin  Historical  Grammar  (3) 

The  development  of  Latin  syntax  with  survey  of  early  Latin. 
Syntactical  analysis  of  Caesar,  Cicero,  and  Vergil.  The  devel- 
opment of  classical  prosody  and  metrics  with  emphasis  on 
changes  in  the  hexameter  from  Catullus  and  Lucretius  to 
Vergil.  The  course  is  designed  primarily  for  teachers  of  Latin 
in  secondary  schools  and  for  majors  in  Classics  planning  to 
teach.  Prerequisites:  six  hours  of  courses  at  the  "100"  level 
and  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

305.  Satire  (3) 

Selected  satires  of  Horace  and  Juvenal.  Lectures  on  the 
history  of  Roman  satire  and  its  influence  on  modern  litera- 
ture; study  of  social  conditions  under  the  empire.  Prerequi- 
sites: six  hours  of  courses  at  100-level  and  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

306.  Roman  Prose  Writers  (3) 

Selections  from  Cicero,  Tacitus,  and  Seneca.  Prerequisites: 
six  hours  of  courses  at  100-level  and  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

382.  Senior  Seminar  (3) 

Continuation  of  Gk.  381.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman 

of  department. 

411.  History  of  Latin  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  Latin  literature  from  the  earliest  remains  of  Latin 
to  the  age  of  Cicero.  Intensive  readings  in  Latin  of  selections 
of  representative  authors  and  genres.  Prerequisites:  six  hours 
of  courses  at  the  "300"  level  or  equivalent. 

412.  History  of  Latin  Literature  (3) 

Continuation  of  Lat.  411.  The  Age  of  Vergil  to  the  end  of 
Classical  Literature.  Prerequisite:  Lat.  411. 


Classics     1 23 


Economics 


l'l  i  itc.SMM  s 

Finn  Bjorn  Jensen,  Ph.D.,  MacFarlanc  Professor  and  Chair- 
man 

Jay  Richard  Aronson,  Ph.D. 
Nicholas  W.  Balabkins.  Ph.D. 
AJvin  Cohen,  Ph.D. 
Gerald  Garb,  Ph.D. 
Eli  Schwartz.  Ph.D. 
L.  Reed  Tripp,  Ph.D.,  Magee  Professor 

Associate  Professors 

Warren  Aiken  Pillsbury,  Ph.D. 
Ching  Sheng  Shen,  Ph.D. 
John  E.  Walker,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Jacob  DeRooy,  Ph.D. 
Jon  Terence  Innes,  Ph.D. 
John  Daniel  Keefe,  M.A. 
John  R.  McNamara,  Ph.D. 
Robert  J.  Thornton,  Ph.D. 
Andrew  B.  Weintraub,  Ph.D. 

Adjunct  Professors 

Reese  D.  Jones,  M.A. 

S.  Herbert  Unterberger,  Ph.D. 

Instructor 

David  B.  Smith,  M.S. 


Major  in  Arts  and  Science  College 

Required  Preliminary  Courses  for  B.A. 
Freshman  Year 


Eco  1 
Math 


Economics  (4) 
Two  courses  (6) 


Required  Major  Courses 

Sophomore  Year 

Eco  206  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  219  Macroeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  45  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Eco  129  Money  &  Banking  (3) 


Junior  Year 

Eco  or  Fin  Any  300-level  course  (6) 

Senior  Year 

Eco  or  I  in  Any  300-level  course  (6) 

Majors  in  Business  and  Economics  College 

Economics  Major 

Required:  15  credits  of  economics  beyond  the  core  listed  on 
page  40. 

Economics  Statistics  Major 

Required:  15  credits  beyond  the  core  as  follows: 

Eco  346  Business  Cycles  and  Forecasting  (3) 

Eco  347  National  Income  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  352  Advanced  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Math  44  BMSS  Calculus  II  (3) 

Eco  300-level  course  (3) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

1.  Economics  (4) 

A  course  in  the  principles  of  economics.  General  topics  cover- 
ed are:  the  determination  of  national  income;  the  determina- 
tion of  relative  prices;  money  and  banking;  monetary  and 
fiscal  policy;  and  government  finance. 

45.  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Descriptive  statistics,  elementary  probability  and  probability 
distributions,  sampling,  estimation  of  population  parameters, 
decision  theory,  regression  and  correlation,  analysis  of  vari- 
ance, non-parametric  tests,  time  series  analysis,  and  index 
numbers.  Prerequisites:  Math.  41  and  42,  or  equivalent. 

129.  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

A  general  course  dealing  with  the  nature  and  functions  of 
money  and  commercial  banking,  monetary  and  banking  de- 
velopment in  the  United  States,  the  value  of  money,  and 
monetary,  credit  and  fiscal  policies. 

130.  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

A  course  dealing  with  specific  monetary  and  banking  prob- 
lems with  suggested  actions  to  resolve  these  problems.  Prere- 
quisite: Eco.  129. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

All  of  the  following  courses  in  economics  have  as  a  prere- 
quisite Economics  1  or  equivalent. 

206.  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Determination  of  prices  in  terms  of  the  equilibrium  of  the 
business  enterprise  and  consumer  choices  in  markets  of  vary- 
ing degrees  of  competition;  determination  of  wages,  rent, 
interest,  and  profits. 


124     Economics 


219.  Macroeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

An  introduction  to  macroeconomic  measurement,  theory, 
and  policy.  Provides  framework  within  which  broad  macro- 
economic  policy  prescription  can  be  formulated  especially 
with  reference  to  such  problems  as  inflation  and  unemploy- 
ment. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Eco. (1-3) 

303.  Economic  Development  (3) 

The  principal  determinants  of  economic  development;  eco- 
nomic development  in  advanced  and  underdeveloped 
countries. 

305.  The  Economic  Development  of  Latin  America  (3) 
Forces  at  work  in  the  changing  economics  in  Latin  America: 
in  addition  to  the  economic  variables,  social  and  political 
factors  are  considered  and  related  to  technological  change 
and  the  development  process. 

307.  History  of  Economic  Thought  (3) 

Emergence  of  economics  as  a  separate  discipline.  Exposition, 
comparison,  and  appraisal  of  the  method  and  theories  of  the 
classical,  socialist,  Austrian,  and  neo-classical  schools  of  eco- 
nomists concerning  the  economic  order,  valuation,  produc- 
tion, price  formation  and  resource  allocation,  money,  bank- 
ing and  credit,  business  cycles,  social  welfare,  and  the  role  of 
the  state. 

308.  History  of  Economic  Thought  (3) 

The  development  of  modern  economics  by  means  of  the 
historical  and  analytical  approaches.  The  objective  is  to  pro- 
vide an  understanding  of  the  nature  and  the  significance  of 
economic  science  by  means  of  examining  contributions  of 
leading  economists  or  schools  from  Adam  Smith  to  the  pre- 
sent. 

309.  Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3) 

A  comprehensive  examination  of  the  philosophical,  econom- 
ic, and  political  tenets  of  American  Capitalism,  Soviet  Social- 
ism, and  Nazi  Fascism.  Analysis  of  economic  planning  under 
various  socio-economic  systems:  study  of  comparable  eco- 
nomic growth  of  the  U.S.  and  the  Soviet  Union. 

310.  Economic  Evolution  (3) 

Long  term  economic  growth  and  social  transformation  of  the 
United  States. 

311.  Economics  of  Resource  Use  (3) 

Economic  aspects  of  environmental  pollution  and  conserva- 
tion will  be  considered,  including  benefit-cost  analysis  of 
public  projects  for  development  of  natural  resources,  policies 
for  controlling  the  quality  of  land  and  water  resources,  and 
the  relationship  between  economic  activity  and  environmen- 
tal quality. 


312.  Urban  Economics  (3) 

A  survey  and  analysis  of  economic  problems  related  to  urban 
areas;  the  nature  and  function  of  cities;  the  economic  and 
spatial  characteristics  of  urban  activity  including  housing, 
land  value,  land  use,  transportation,  fiscal  problems,  urban 
labor  markets  and  poverty. 

320.  Advanced  Macroeconomic  Analysis  (3) 
A  further  course  in  macroeconomic  theory  and  policy. 
Primary  consideration  is  given  to  alternative  theoretical  speci- 
fications of  complete  monetary  economies  and  the  resulting 
policy  implications  for  achieving  economic  growth  and  sta- 
bility. Prerequisite:  Eco.  219  or  consent  of  department 
chairman. 

332.  Monetary-Fiscal  Policy  (3) 

A  course  devoted  to  the  study  of  monetary,  credit,  and  fiscal 
policies  of  governments  and  central  banks  with  particular 
reference  to  the  policies  of  the  United  States  Treasury  and 
the  Federal  Reserve  System.  Current  problems  will  receive 
special  emphasis.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  129  or  equivalent. 

335.  Manpower  Economics  (3) 

The  structure  of  the  labor  force;  the  theory  of  wages  and 
employment;  the  economics  of  legal  and  social  aspects  of  the 
labor  market. 

336.  Business  and  Government  (3) 
Microeconomic  theory  and  the  American  legal  system. 
Efforts  by  the  state  to  maintain,  moderate,  and  supercede 
competitive  private  contracting  as  a  social  arrangement  by 
which  to  promote  risk-taking,  efficiency,  equitable  exchange, 
progressiveness,  conservation,  and  individual  liberty.  Eco- 
nomic analysis  of  results. 

337.  Transportation  and  Spatial  Economics  (3) 

The  principles  of  transportation  in  theory  and  practice  are 
integrated  with  traditional  and  spatial  economics.  Transport 
models  and  location  theories  are  reviewed  for  varying  condi- 
tions of  spatial  separation  of  economic  activity.  Transporta- 
tion policies  are  analyzed  and  evaluated  in  terms  of  their 
efficiency  in  the  allocation  of  resources  for  the  firm  and  the 
economy  at  the  local,  regional  and  national  levels.  Prerequi- 
site: Eco.  206  or  consent  of  instructor. 

338.  Labor  Market  Institutions  (3) 

The  development  of  the  social  and  legal  status  of  trade 
unions;  the  process  of  collective  bargaining;  the  evolution  of 
modern  social  welfare  programs. 

339.  International  Trade  (3) 

The  theory  of  international  trade;  the  theory  of  tariffs; 
United  States  commercial  policies;  the  impact  of  growth  and 
development  on  the  world  economy. 


Economics     125 


)  lii.  International  I  inani  c  (3) 

The  balance  of  payments  and  the  theorj  of  disturbances  and 
adjustment  in  the  intcrii.ition.il  economy;  international 
monetary  policies. 

>  I  \.  I  uriijicin  luononiic  Integration  (3) 
Analysis  of  the  problems  of  economic  integration  with 
special  emphasis  on  the  development  of  economit  coopera- 
tion  and  integration  in  Western  Europe  The  methods  and  the 
problem!,  of  economic  planning  in  the  Common  Market. 

.1  States  ir.ule  and  investments  and  European  economic 
integration. 

346.  Business  Cycles  and  Forecasting  (3) 

A  study  of  economic  conditions,  involving  short-term  fluctu- 
ations, growth,  forecasting  and  stabilization  proposals.  Prere- 
quisite: a  course  in  statistics. 

347.  National  Income  Analysis  (3) 

Analysis  of  income  and  product  aggregated  from  the  point  of 
view  of  development  arid  structural  breakdown,  emphasizing 
sector  accounts,  savings  and  investments;  and  integrated  with 
broad  macroeconomic  theory.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  346. 

348.  Advanced  Business  Cycles  (3) 

Recent  business  cycle  theories;  the  evolution  of  the  theories 
and  the  problems  of  economic  change  which  the  theories 
attempt  to  explain.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  346. 

351.  Introduction  to  Mathematical  Economics  (3) 
Applies  mathematical  techniques  to  economic  problems  of 
optimization  and  constrained  optimization  and  to  economic 
models  involving  both  comparative  static  and  dynamic  analy- 
sis. Prerequisites:  Math.  41  and  43,  Eco.  206  and  219. 

352.  Advanced  Statistical  Methods  (3) 

A  further  course  in  quantitative  method:  sampling  design, 
probability  distributions  including  the  analysis  of  variance, 
and  multiple  correlation  and  their  application  to  common 
situations.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  45  or  equivalent. 

353.  Public  Finance:  Federal  (3) 

A  course  dealing  with  government  expenditures  and  revenues, 
the  economics  of  taxation,  and  government  administration. 

354.  Public  Finance:  State  and  Local  (3) 

The  major  issues  regarding  revenues,  expenditures,  debit  and 
budgeting  policy  will  be  examined  in  the  light  of  fiscal  princi- 
ples and  economic  effects.  Particular  attention  will  be  given 
to  current  practices  in  Pennsylvania  and  contiguous  states. 
Prerequisite:  Eco.  353. 

355.  Empirical  Economic  Analysis  (3) 

The  course  provides  empirical  content  to  the  theoretical  con- 
cepts developed  in  intermediate  economic  theory  (micro-  and 
macro-).  Prerequisites:  Eco.  45,  206,  and  219. 


171 .  Readings  in  I  i  imomii  s  (  1) 

r   adings  in  various  fields  ol  economics,  designed  for  the 
student  who  has  .1  special  interest  in  some  field  of  economics 
not  covered  by  the  regularly  rostcred  courses.  Prerequisite: 
preparation  in  economics  acceptable  to  the  department 
chairman. 

372.  Readings  in  Economics  (3) 
1  ontinuation  of  Eco.  371. 

For  Graduates 

404.  Development  Theory  and  Problems  (3) 
The  evolution  of  growth  doctrines  and  the  analysis  of  such 
developmental  problems  as:  structural  versus  monetary  re- 
form, ideological  controversy  of  the  appropriate  economic 
system,  balanced  investment  programs  as  opposed  to  un- 
balanced plans,  the  nature  and  changes  in  the  aggregate  pro- 
duction function,  and  dependence  upon  domestic  as  opposed 
to  foreign  source  of  savings.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  303. 

407.  History  of  Economic  Thought  (3) 
Consideration  of  selected  topics  in  the  history  of  economic 
thought,  with  special  attention  devoted  to  tracing  the  origins 
of  modern  economic  theory.  Prerequisite:  graduate  exposure 
to  economic  theory. 

415.  (Fin.  415)  Capital  and  Interest  Theory  (3) 
See  Fin.  415  for  course  description. 

425.  Public  Finance  (3) 

Major  issues  in  taxation  of  income  consumption,  and  capital; 
principles  of  government  debt  management;  budgeting  and 
fiscal  planning  for  economic  stability  and  growth. 

431.  Managerial  Economics  (3) 

Problems  of  business  enterprise:  price  and  output  determina- 
tion analysis  of  cost  and  demand  functions  in  markets  of 
various  types  and  under  various  conditions  of  general  busi- 
ness. Emphasis  will  be  on  the  application  of  economic  theory 
to  business  practice.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  206  or  consent  of  the 
instructor. 

432.  Advanced  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

A  survey  of  methods  of  decision-making  at  the  micro- 
economic  level  utilizing  concepts  developed  in  price  theory 
and  econometrics.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  206  or  equivalent. 

435.  Advanced  Topics  in  Microeconomics  (3) 
Topics  in  resource  allocation  and  price  determination. 
Theories  of  choice  of  consumers,  firms,  and  resource  owners 
under  monopoly,  monopsony,  competition,  and  alternative 
market  forms.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  432  or  equivalent  and  con- 
sent of  the  instructor. 


126     Economics 


436.  Advanced  Topics  in  Macroeconomics  (3) 

Theory  of  employment,  income,  and  growth.  Role  of  money 
in  theory  of  output.  Policies  for  economic  stability  and 
growth.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 

437.  Labor  Economics  (3) 

The  economic  environment  of  labor  and  industrial  relations 
with  some  emphasis  on  current  research  involving  theoretical 
and  empirical  analyses  of  labor  markets.  Prerequisite:  Eco. 
335  or  Eco.  338  or  equivalent. 

438.  Labor-Management  Administration  (3) 

A  study  of  the  administration  of  the  relationship  between 
management  and  the  labor  force  both  where  that  relationship 
is  governed  by  a  formal  agreement  and  where  it  is  not.  The 
concepts  underlying  the  substantive  provisions  of  labor  agree- 
ments are  analyzed.  The  problem  of  agreement  making  and 
the  methods  for  peace  keeping  are  subjected  to  critical 
appraisal.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  335  or  338  or  equivalent. 

440.  Regional  Science-Metropolitan  Analysis  (3) 
A  study  of  the  methodology  of  regional  science  with  em- 
phasis on  metropolitan  area  analysis.  A  survey  of  the  applica- 
tions of  this  methodology  to  the  economic  problems  of 
regions  and  metropolitan  areas. 

442.  Foreign  Trade  Management  (3) 

Current  problems  of  foreign  operations,  including  channels  of 
export  in  foreign  markets,  export  and  import  financing, 
foreign  investments,  policies  of  government  and  international 
agencies  as  they  affect  foreign  operations. 

443.  Soviet  Economics  (3) 

The  theory  of  central  planning.  Investment  criteria  in  Soviet- 
type  economies.  Repressed  inflation  and  quantitative  output 
planning.  Liberman's  Economic  Reforms.  Prerequisite:  Eco. 
309  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

444.  Banking  and  Monetary  Policy  (3) 

Description  and  analysis  of  the  U.S.  monetary  and  banking 
structure.  The  supply  and  demand  for  funds.  Financial 
markets.  Central  bank  controls;  monetary  theory  and  policy. 
Prerequisite:  a  course  in  money  and  banking. 

445.  International  Economic  Theory  (3) 

The  theory  of  international  economics,  with  emphasis  on  the 
way  in  which  general  economic  theory  is  applied  to  the  prob- 
lems and  issues  of  international  economics.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  the  instructor. 

447.  Systems  of  National  Accounts  (3) 
A  study  of  American  National  Accounts,  relating  the 
theoretical  analysis  to  actual  and  potential  measurements; 
also  relation  to  National  Accounts  of  other  countries.  Cover- 
age includes  national  income,  input-output,  flow  of  funds, 
national  balance  sheet  and  other  systems  of  aggregation. 


453.  Index  Numbers  and  Time  Series  Analysis  (3) 
Theory  and  construction  of  Index  Numbers.  Measurement 
and  analysis  of  irregular,  seasonal,  cyclical  and  secular  com- 
ponents. Exponential  smoothing,  distributed  lags,  and  intro- 
duction to  spectral  analysis. 

454.  Forecasting  (3) 

A  study  of  the  methods  of  business  forecasting  and  its  rela- 
tion to  planning  with  emphasis  on  the  prediction  of  growth 
and  short-term  movements.  Prerequisite:  Eco.  346  or 
equivalent. 

455.  Econometric  Methods  (3) 

Mathematical  and  statistical  specification  of  economic 
models.  Statistical  estimation  and  test  of  economic  para- 
meters in  single  and  multiple  equation  models.  Prediction  and 
test  of  structural  changes.  Prerequisites:  background  in  statis- 
tics and  calculus. 

456.  Mathematical  Economics  (3) 

Designed  to  provide  an  understanding  of  the  way  in  which 
various  mathematical  techniques  are  applied  in  the  formula- 
tion and  development  of  economic  concepts  and  theories. 
The  course  may  draw  on  theories  of  the  consumer  and  of  the 
firm,  the  analysis  of  economic  fluctuations  and  growth, 
general  equilibrium  theory,  and  other  areas  of  economics 
where  mathematical  techniques  have  been  found  to  be  useful. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

461.  Methodology  in  Theory  and  Research 

Foundations  of  theory  construction  and  empirical  research  in 
economics  and  related  subject  matter.  Theory,  hypothesis 
formation  and  empirical  study  in  the  business  firm,  organiza- 
tions, industrial  relations,  and  micro-macro  research. 

471.  Special  Topics  (3) 

An  extended  study  of  an  approved  topic  in  the  field  of  eco- 
nomics. 

472.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  not  covered  in  scheduled  courses  in  the  de- 
partment. May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  the  consent  of  the 
chairman  of  the  department. 

475.  Business  Economics  Seminar  (3) 

Independent  research  for  M.S.  in  Business  Economics 

candidates. 

490.  Thesis  in  Economics  (6) 

Subjects  for  theses  may  be  selected  by  consultation  with 
major  advisor  and  approval  of  chairman  of  the  department 
and  M.A.  committee. 


Economics      127 


Education 


Professors 

John  A.  Stoops,  Ed. II..  Dean 

Glenn  J.  Christensen,  Ph.D..  University  Distinguished 

Professor 

Alfred  J.  Castaldi,  Ed.D. 

Andrew  J.  Edmiston,  Ph.D. 

John  A.  Mierzwa,  Ed.D. 

Norman  H.  Sam,  Ed.D. 

Merle  W.  Tate,  Ed.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Warren  M.  Davis,  Ph.D. 
Matthew  W.  Gaffncy,  Ed.D. 
Charles  W.  Guditus,  Ed.D. 
Joseph  P.  Render,  Ed.D. 
Robert  L.  Leight,  Ed.D. 
Paul  VanReed  Miller.  Ph.D. 
Estoy  Reddin,  Ed.D. 
William  B.  Stafford,  Ed.D. 
Elvin  G.  Warfel,  Ed.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Raymond  Bell,  Ed.D. 
Mary  A.  Conahan,  Ed.D. 
Thomas  Fleck,  Jr.,  Ed.D. 
Margaret  C.  Grandovic,  Ed.D. 
James  G.  Lutz,  Ed.D. 
David  March,  Ed.D. 
ArtisJ.Palmo,  Ed.D. 
Robert  R.  Panos,  Ph.D. 
Dennis  A.  Pickering,  Ed.D. 
AJice  D.  Rinehart,  Ed.D. 
LeRoy  J.  Tuscher,  Ph.D. 
Nan  Van  Gieson,  Ed.D. 

Adjunct  Professors 

Nancy  Larrick,  Ed.D. 
Margaret  Melchior  Seylar,  M.A. 

Instructors 

David  Barrett  III,  M.Mus. 
Frederick  Baus  III,  M.A. 
Edward  J.  Crawford,  B.A. 
Glenny  Dunbar,  M.A. 
Frederic  L.  Evans,  M.Ed. 
Dermot  M.  Garrett,  B.Sc.Ed. 
James  J.  Garrigan,  M.A. 


Audrey  I  .  Gilmartin,  B.S. 
I  ..ink  J.  Kidder  III,  M.Ed. 
i   irol  I.  Kinney,  B.A. 
Mary  R.  Kleinginna,  M.S.Ed. 
Paul  F.  Kr.i.n.  M.A.T. 
<  !ret(  hen  H.  Krasley,  M.Ed. 
Ella  Jane  Kunkle,  B.A. 
Thelma  P.  I  ifland,  M.Ed. 
Beverly  G.  Miller,  B.A. 
John  C.  Northrup,  M.Ed. 
Lloyd  C.  Parker.  B.A. 
Ruth  B.  Parr,  M.Ed. 
Henry  J.  Schreitmueller,  M.A. 
Karol  Strelecki,  M.S. 
Joseph  Strickland,  Jr.,  B.A. 
Robert  J.  Szabo,  M.Ed. 
Harry  A.  Tachovsky,  B.S. 
Ann  Tarola,  M.Ed. 
George  VanDoren,  M.A. 
Gregory  A.  Zebrowski,  B.S. 

Lecturers 

Roy  C.  Claypool,  M.Ed. 
Alexander  L.  Crosby,  A.B. 
George  Douris,  M.F.A. 
James  J.  Fadule,  Ed.D. 
LibbyJ.  Falk,  Ed.D. 
Richard  W.  Hartmann,  Ed.D. 
Paul  Johnson,  M.A. 
Donald  K.  Kirts,  Ed.D. 
William  W.  Oswalt,  Ed.D. 
Henry  W.  Ray,  Ed.D. 
Richard  C.  Richardson,  Ph.D. 
Stephen  A.  Schafer,  Ed.D. 
Hilary  B.  Shuard,  M.Sc. 
Robert  E.  Wisser,  Ed.D. 


For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

211.  Vocational  Technical  Education  (3) 
Historical  and  philosophical  foundations.  Characteristics  of 
vocational-technical  schools  and  curricula.  Role  of  school  and 
teacher  in  career  development.  Problems  of  vocational 
choice.  Relations  with  trades,  industries,  and  labor  organiza- 
tion. Cooperative  programs.  Prerequisite:  admission  to  certifi- 
cation program  in  career  education. 

221.  Procedures  in  Trade  and  Industrial  Education  (3) 
Teaching  techniques  for  trade  and  industrial  subjects.  Curri- 
culum and  evaluation  as  related  to  classroom  methods.  Stu- 
dent demonstration  and  micro-teaching.  Concurrent  with 
Educ.  321  Classroom  Practice.  Prerequisite:  admission  to 
certification  program.  Summers  only. 


128     Education 


311.  Origins  of  Western  Schools  (3-6) 

A  study  and  travel  seminar  for  experienced  teachers.  Empha- 
sis is  upon  the  nature  and  methods  of  Hellenistic  and  medi- 
eval schools.  Relevant  traditions  in  language,  art,  and  philoso- 
phy are  considered.  Influences  on  American  institutions  are 
shown.  Undertaken  in  cooperation  with  selected  European 
universities.  Summer  session.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the 
instructor. 


327.  Occupational  and  Manpower  Program  Development  (3) 
Methods  and  standards  used  in  study  of  manpower  needs  and 
competency  requirements.  Interdependence  of  technologies, 
trades,  and  professions.  School  and  teacher  responses  to 
change  in  business  and  industry.  Labor  organizations.  Types 
of  manpower  development  programs  and  methods  of  devel- 
opment. Prerequisite:  admission  to  certification  program  in 
career  education. 


313.  Arts  and  Crafts  for  the  Handicapped  (3) 

Study  of  various  artistic  media  (arts,  crafts,  music,  puppetry, 
dramatics)  which  are  helpful  in  promoting  development  of 
handicapped  individuals. 

315.  Teaching  the  Emotionally  and  Socially  Maladjusted  (3) 
The  nature  and  causes  of  emotional  and  social  maladjust- 
ment; methods  of  gaining  insight  into  and  modifying  of 
behavior;  appropriate  curriculum,  methods,  materials,  and 
available  resources.  Field  observations  required.  Prerequisite: 
admission  to  the  special  education  program  or  consent  of  the 
program  director. 


330.  Study  of  the  Individual  (3-6) 
Examinations  of  individual  growth  and  development, 
especially  the  patterns  found  in  different  subcultures.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  the  program  director. 

331.  Shop  and  Laboratory  Management  (3) 

Systems  and  procedures  for  layout,  organization,  main- 
tenance, inventory,  and  safety  of  school  shops  and  labora- 
tories. Issues  in  utilization  and  specialization.  Instructional 
methods.  Relationship  of  shop  practices  to  curricular  objec- 
tives and  career  standards.  Prerequisite:  admission  to  certifi- 
cation program. 


317.  Teaching  the  Mentally  Retarded  (3) 

Special  needs  of  and  vocational  possibilities  for  retarded  in- 
dividuals; current  educational  practices,  curriculum  methods 
of  teaching;  materials  for  promoting  maximal  social  compe- 
tency; available  resources.  Field  observations.  Prerequisite: 
admission  to  the  special  education  program  or  consent  of  the 
program  director. 

319.  Career  Education  for  the  Handicapped  (3) 
Promoting  attitudes,  work  habits,  and  skills  which  enhance 
employability  of  the  handicapped;  appraisal  of  methods  for 
matching  individuals  to  jobs;  job  market  for  the  handicapped; 
various  curricular  and  administrative  designs.  Prerequisite: 
admission  to  the  special  education  program  or  consent  of  the 
program  director. 

321.  Classroom  Practice  (3) 

Experience  in  elementary  and  secondary  classrooms  as  re- 
lated to  theories  of  child  and  adolescent  development,  class- 
room didactics,  and  philosophies  of  education.  Problem- 
centered  discussions.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  dean  of  School 
of  Education. 

323.  Intern  Seminar  (3) 

For  undergraduate  students  admitted  to  certification  pro- 
grams in  career  education  only.  For  further  details,  see  Educ. 
429. 

325.  Intern  Teaching  (3-6) 

For  undergraduate  students  admitted  to  certification  pro- 
grams in  career  education  only.  For  further  details,  see  Educ. 
428. 


341.  The  Teacher  in  Social  Restoration  (3-6) 
The  functions  of  the  teacher  and  the  school  in  prevention 
and  remediation  of  anti-social  behavior.  Field  work  in  re- 
medial teaching  and  experience  in  social  restoration  institu- 
tions. For  the  social  restoration  interns  only. 

343.  The  Disadvantaged  Student  (3) 

Philosophical  analyses  of  disadvantagement  and  relevant 
educational  theories.  Applications  and  evaluations  of  special 
methods  and  techniques.  For  teaching  interns  only. 

351.  Statistical  Methods  in  Research  (3) 
The  concept  of  sampling  from  populations  is  introduced. 
Various  ways  of  describing  and  condensing  sample  data  and 
drawing  inferences  about  population  characteristics  are  cover- 
ed. A  brief  review  of  mathematics  necessary  for  statistical 
analysis  is  included.  No  special  background  in  statistics  is 
presumed.  Emphasis  on  concepts. 

353.  Reporting  Professional  Research  (3) 
Intensive  study  of  and  practice  in  the  application  of  the  prin- 
ciples of  written  exposition  to  common  forms  of  professional 
reporting. 

361.  Curriculum  Construction  for  Career  Education  (3) 

Identification  and  clarification  of  goals  and  competencies. 
Methods  of  curriculum  organization.  Development  of  curri- 
culum resources.  Providing  for  individual  differences.  Organi- 
zing special  experiences.  Development  of  cooperative  pro- 
grams. Evaluating,  recording,  and  reporting  student  progress. 
Prerequisite:  admission  to  certification  program  in  career 
education. 


Education      129 


'>si .  i  (hu.moii.il  Systems  and  Information  Processing  (3) 
introduction  to  the  basic  principles  oi  systems  analysis,  in- 
formation  processing,  cost  analysis,  .mil  conversion  systems. 
Emphasis  to  be  placed  upon  the  application  of  computers 
and  data  processing  to  administration  and  instruction  in  basic 
educational  institutions. 

iS3.  Computer  Assisted  Instruction  (3) 

design  and  development  of  computer  assisted  instruc- 
tional units.  Students  design,  program,  and  test  computer 
assisted  instructional  units  in  one  of  several  modes  such  as 
drill,  practice,  tutorial,  simulation.  Instructional  units  will  be 
programmed  in  the  BASIC  language.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
program  director. 


-107.  Philosophical  Foundations  ol  Education  (3) 

Com  par. 1 1  n.'  philosophical  analysis  ol  educational  .inns,  prac- 
tii  es,  and  institutions.  Major  philosophical  theorists  whose 
work  has  influenced  educational  thought  from  ancient  times 
to  the  present  are  studied. 

•IOH.  Comparative  Education  (3) 

A  survey  of  educational  practices  abroad  including  all  pro- 
grams from  nursery  to  graduate  education.  Major  emphasis  is 
placed  upon  systems  of  articulation,  social  foundations,  legal 
foundations,  and  structure  in  government.  The  nature  and 
purposes  of  the  schools  are  considered  with  particular  re- 
ference to  cultural  patterns.  Focus  is  also  placed  upon  major 
problems  and  trends. 


$91-392.  Workshop  (3,  5,  or  6) 

Cooperative  study  of  current  educational  problems.  Designed 
to  provide  elementary  and  secondary  school  teachers  an  op- 
portunity to  work  at  their  own  teaching  levels  and  in  their 
own  fields.  Students  will  be  limited  to  six  credits  during  a 
summer  session  but  may  register  tor  more  than  one  workshop 
provided  there  is  no  duplication  in  subject  matter. 

393.  Instructional  Media  (3) 

Study  of  principles  underlying  the  use  of  graphic  and  sound 
projection  in  teaching.  Utilization  of  commercial,  student, 
and  teacher  made  materials.  Applications  of  new  instruction- 
al media  such  as  television,  teaching  machines,  and  computer 
assisted  instruction  to  classroom  teaching. 

For  Graduates 

400.  Psychological  Foundations  of  Education  (3) 

Study  and  practice  of  methods  involved  in  making  a  psycho- 
logical analysis  of  pupils  or  classroom  situations  particularly 
in  relation  to  school  problems. 

401.  Sociological  Foundations  of  Education  (3) 
Analysis  of  the  American  school  as  a  social  institution,  its 
cultural  heritage,  its  purposes  and  processes  in  relation  to 
social  change  and  educational  leadership.  Examination  of  the 
school's  role  in  socialization  and  its  responsibilities  for  rele- 
vance to  social  issues  and  to  subcultural  needs. 

403.  Teaching  in  the  Two-Year  College  (3) 
Major  theories  of  teaching,  learning,  and  measurement  are 
studied  with  particular  reference  to  the  problems  of  instruc- 
tion in  the  two-year  college.  The  characteristics  of  students  in 
two-year  colleges  are  examined.  Participants  undertake  re- 
search in  the  field. 

406.  Historical  Foundations  of  Education  (3) 
The  developments  of  primary,  secondary,  and  higher  educa- 
tion; the  aims,  curricula,  methods,  and  systems  of  education 
from  early  times  to  the  present,  in  relation  to  the  social  con- 
ditions and  processes. 


409.  The  Two-Ycar  College  (3) 

Historical  and  philosophical  analysis  of  the  two-year  college 
as  an  institutional  mode  in  American  higher  education.  The 
unique  nature  of  the  two-year  college  is  considered  in  rela- 
tion to  its  service  functions  and  the  values  in  American  higher 
education.  Participants  undertake  research  in  the  field. 

410.  Structure  and  Syntax  of  the  Academic  Disciplines  (3) 
Professors  from  other  departments  of  the  University  are  pre- 
sented in  discussions  coordinated  by  the  School  of  Educa- 
tion. The  patterns  which  organize  and  identify  the  academic 
disciplines  are  emphasized.  Study  is  given  the  nature  and 
significance  of  the  conceptual  structures  which  guide  inquiry 
or  research  in  certain  major  fields  of  scholarship.  Implications 
tor  planning  of  curricula  and  preparations  of  teaching 
materials  are  considered. 

411.  Personality  and  Adjustment  (3) 

Theories  of  personality  and  adjustment  are  examined  with 
emphasis  on  the  adjustment  processes  in  an  educational  set- 
ting. Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  program  director. 

412.  Individual  Assessment  and  Interviewing  (3) 

Various  assessment  procedures  used  in  school  settings  includ- 
ing interviewing,  observational  techniques,  and  individual 
psychological  testing.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  program 
director. 

413.  Theories  of  Psychological  Counseling  (3) 

Analysis  and  synthesis  of  concepts  drawn  from  counseling 
theorists.  The  research  and  current  trends  in  counseling  con- 
cerning educational,  social,  and  vocational  problems  are 
studied.  Prerequisite:  admission  to  program  in  counselor 
education. 

414.  Child  Development  (3) 

A  study  of  physical,  intellectual,  emotional,  and  social 
aspects  of  child  development  as  they  relate  to  the  elementary 
schools. 


130     Education 


416.  Classroom  Didactics  (3-6) 

Initial  preparation  of  interns  for  classroom  teaching.  Second- 
ary interns  are  trained  in  special  methods  of  subject  fields 
and  the  reading  problems  of  secondary  students,.  Elementary 
interns  study  the  place  of  subjects  in  the  elementary  school. 
Open  to  interns  only. 

418.  Values  and  Educational  Purpose  (3) 

Modes  of  philosophical  analysis  used  in  justification  of  educa- 
tional purposes.  The  presence  of  metaphysical,  epistemo- 
logical,  and  metaethical  premises  in  educational  opinion. 
Canons  of  rational  inquiry  as  applied  to  educational  deci- 
sions. Manifestations  of  values  in  contemporary  school  curri- 
cula. Prerequisite:  Educ.  407. 

422.  Education  of  Exceptional  Children  (3) 
Curriculum,  methods  ot  instruction,  and  materials  for  indi- 
viduals who  differ  markedly  from  the  normal  intellectually, 
physically,  emotionally,  or  socially;  the  nature  and  causes  of 
these  differences;  available  resources.  Field  trips;  direct  work 
with  exceptional  encouraged. 

423.  Diagnostic  and  Remedial  Teaching  (3) 

The  role  of  the  classroom  teacher  as  a  diagnostician  of  correc- 
tive learning  difficulties.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  nature 
and  methods  of  educational  diagnosis  and  the  specifics  of 
diagnostic  teaching  important  to  daily  classroom  instruction 
at  all  levels.  Opportunities  are  offered  tor  experiences  in 
diagnosis  and  program  prescription. 

424.  Linguistics  in  Education  (3) 

Emphasis  on  the  nature  of  language,  phonetic  applications, 
and  the  relationships  of  linguistics  to  instruction  in  the  langu- 
age arts. 

425.  The  Diagnosis  and  Adjustment  of  Reading  Difficulties 
(3) 

A  survey  of  problems  in  diagnosing  and  adjusting  reading 
difficulties.  The  psychology  of  reading  as  related  to  learning 
difficulties;  the  measurement  and  diagnosis  of  reading  diffi- 
culties; the  development  of  informal  tests  for  identifying 
reading  difficulties;  materials  for  corrective  and/or  remedial 
instruction.  Prerequisite:  Educ.  431  or  consent  of  instructor. 

426.  Independent  Study  and  Research  (3-15) 

Individual  or  small  group  study  in  the  field  of  specialization. 
Approved  and  supervised  by  the  major  advisor.  Not  more 
than  six  credits  may  be  earned  in  a  semester. 

427.  Participation  in  Teaching  (3) 

Study,  directed  observation  of,  and  initial  practice  in  the 
various  phases  of  teaching  in  a  campus  laboratory-demonstra- 
tion school  or  in  elementary  and  secondary  schools  in  the 
area. 


428.  Intern  Teaching  (3-6) 

Intensive  practice  in  the  application  of  the  principles  of 
teaching.  Each  intern  is  appointed  to  a  full-time  teaching 
position  for  one  or  two  semesters.  Supervision  is  provided 
both  by  the  employing  school  district  or  community  college 
and  by  the  University.  Prerequisite:  Educ.  427. 

429.  Intern  Teaching  Seminar  (3) 

Critical  analysis  and  discussion  of  classroom  instructional 
practices.  Discussion  and  illustration  will  be  based  on  the 
experiences  of  participants  as  they  engage  in  intern  teaching. 
Education  428  required  concurrently. 

431.  Developmental  Reading  (3) 

Introductory  course  spanning  the  elementary  and  secondary 
levels.  Emphasis  on  the  history  of  reading  instruction,  basic 
premises  in  reading,  the  sequence  of  language  development, 
directed  reading  activities  and  reading  in  content  areas. 

434.  Mathematics  in  Elementary  Education  (3) 

435.  Social  Studies  in  Elementary  Education  (3) 

436.  Science  in  Elementary  Education  (3) 

437.  Language  Development  of  Children  (3) 

The  nature  of  language  and  its  relation  to  the  development  of 
communication  skills.  Critical  analysis  of  related  research. 
Implications  for  the  elementary  school. 

438.  Fine  Arts  in  Elementary  Education  (3) 

443.  Elementary  School  Administration  (3) 

The  major  problem  of  organization  and  administration  of 
elementary  schools;  types  of  organization,  pupil  promotion, 
time  allotment,  service  agencies,  and  plant  and  equipment. 
Required  for  a  principal's  certificate. 

444.  The  Elementary  School  Curriculum  (3) 

Problems  of  curriculum  development  in  the  first  six  grades; 
subject  matter  placement,  program  making  for  difficult  types 
of  schools,  regular  vs.  special  subjects,  articulation,  and  simi- 
lar problems. 

446.  Learning  Disabilities  (3-6) 

Types  of  specific  learning  disabilities  and  their  effects  on 
development  and  learning;  physiological  basis  of  learning  and 
general  learning  theory;  various  theoretical  approaches;  diag- 
nostic and  remedial  procedures.  Can  be  repeated  for  credit  as 
a  90-hour  practicum  with  the  consent  of  the  program 
director. 

447.  Seminar  in  Reading  Research  (3) 

An  advanced  course  dealing  with  critical  appraisal  and  discus- 
sion of  classical  and  current  studies  in  reading. 


Education      131 


-!•(').  children's  l  iicr.it urc  m  Reading  Instruction 

isidcration  of  the  role  of  liior.it urc  in  the  instructional 

program  of  ilu-  elementary  schools.  Emphasis  is  given  the  use 
of  trade  hooks  for  individual  instruction  in  reading. 

153.  Secondary  School   administration  (3) 
The  major  problems  of  organization  and  administration  of 
secondary  schools;  program  ot  studies,  teaching  Staff,  pupil 
personnel,  plant  and  equipment,  and  community  relation- 
ships. Required  for  a  principal's  certificate. 

454.  The  Secondary  School  Curriculum  (3) 

Methods  of  study  of  curriculum  problems,  selection  of  sub- 
ject matter  in  various  fields,  principles  of  program  construc- 
tion, and  similar  problems. 

455.  Statistics  1  (3) 

Reduction  and  description  of  data.  Characteristics  of  a  fre- 
quency distribution.  Score  transformations.  Bivariate  linear 
correlation  and  regression.  Statistical  inference:  tests  of  hy- 
potheses and  estimation  of  parameters,  errors  of  inference 
and  their  control,  power  of  a  statistical  test.  Uses  of  the 
normal,  t  and  chi-square  sampling  distributions. 

456.  Statistics  II  (3) 

Extended  applications  of  the  binomial,  normal,  r,  and  chi- 
square  sampling  distributions.  The  F  distribution.  One-way 
and  factorial  analysis  of  variance  and  covariance.  Multiple 
and  partial  linear  correlation  and  regression.  Application  of 
packaged  programs  for  computer  analysis  of  data.  Prerequi- 
site: Educ.  455  or  consent  of  the  program  director. 

457.  Statistics  III  (3) 

Extensions  of  the  analysis  of  variance  and  covariance  to  the 
complex  designs.  Topics  include:  completely  randomized, 
factorial,  incomplete  factorial,  randomized  blocks,  nested, 
and  repeated  measures  designs.  Emphasis  on  experimental 
design  and  application  of  packaged  programs  for  computer 
analysis  of  data.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  program 
director. 

458.  Computer  Applications  (3) 

Writing  and  testing  computer  programs  and  the  use  and 
adaptation  of  packaged  programs;  applications  in  behavioral 
research  and  in  administration  and  instruction.  Prerequisite: 
Educ.  456  or  459. 

459.  Methods  of  Statistical  Inference  and  Research  Design 
(3) 

Review  of  descriptive  statistics;  multiple  correlation  and  re- 
gression; tests  of  inference;  analysis  of  variance  and  covari- 
ance; application  of  packaged  programs  for  computer  analysis 
of  data.  Prerequisite:  Educ.  351  or  455,  or  consent  of  the 
instructor. 


160.  c.i  on  p  (  ,  muscling  and  (iroup  I'roi  esses  (3) 

Study  oi  group  dynamics  through  critical  review  ol  theories, 

Emphasis  on  group  processes  as  reined  to  counseling  and 
guidance  through  class  participation  and  demonstration.  Pre- 
requisite: Educ.  483  previously  or  concurrently. 

463.  Public  School  Administration  (3) 

A  systematic  treatment  of  the  problems  of  administration, 
local,  state  and  national.  The  newer  developments  which  arc 
modifying  educational  administration;  state  authorization 
and  organization,  the  board  of  education,  the  superintendent 
of  schools,  personnel  management,  business  administration, 
financial  support,  and  public  relations. 

464.  Foundations  of  Curriculum  Construction  (3) 
Principles  of  curriculum  construction  which  underlie  the 
reorganization  of  the  program  of  studies  for  elementary  and 
secondary  schools;  origin  and  background  of  the  curriculum; 
methods  of  organization;  curriculum  planning  and  develop- 
ment; and  pertinent  applications.  K-12. 

465.  Administration  of  Higher  Education  (3) 

Analysis  of  legal  foundations,  administrative  controls,  and 
operational  patterns  of  the  various  types  of  higher  institu- 
tions with  special  emphasis  on  the  two-year  college.  Coverage 
of  traditions  which  establish  duties,  responsibilities,  and 
rights  of  faculty,  administration,  and  board  of  control  in 
American  colleges  and  universities. 

466.  Supervision  of  Instruction  (3) 

Analysis  of  the  principles  underlying  the  organization  and 
supervision  of  instruction;  application  to  specific  teaching 
situations.  No  lines  will  be  drawn  between  the  elementary 
and  the  secondary  school. 

468.  Administration  of  Student  Service  in  Higher  Education 

(3) 

Study  of  the  broad  scope  of  the  administration  of  student 
services  in  higher  education  including  welfare  functions,  con- 
trol functions,  activities  functions,  and  teaching  functions. 
Emphasis  to  be  placed  upon  matter  of  organization  and 
operation,  the  place  of  these  patterns  in  the  total  operation 
of  the  institution,  and  the  administrator's  role  in  the  develop- 
ment and  implementation  of  appropriate  policies  and  prac- 
tices affecting  students. 

469.  Practicum  in  Supervision  of  Reading  Programs  (3-6) 
For  candidates  for  supervisor's  certificate  in  reading.  An  over- 
view of  the  organization  of  the  instructional  program  and  the 
specific  duties  involved  in  the  supervisory  processes  in, 
reading  programs.  Students  will  observe  and  participate  in 
supervisory  activities.  If  taken  as  a  three-hour  course,  may  be 
repeated  for  a  maximum  of  six  credits. 


132     Education 


470.  Multivariate  Analysis  (3) 

Topics  include  fundamentals  of:  matrix  algebra,  multinormal 
sampling  distribution,  multivariate  tests  of  significance  and 
interval  estimation,  multivariate  analysis  of  variance  and  co- 
variance,  discriminant  analysis,  classification  problems, 
canonical  correlation,  introduction  to  factor  analysis.  Em- 
phasis in  on  application.  Prerequisite:  Educ.  455  and  Educ. 
456  or  consent  ot  program  director. 

471.  Evaluation  in  Education  (3) 

Primarily  for  teachers  and  counselors.  Construction  and 
evaluation  of  the  teacher-made  test.  Selection  of  published 
tests  and  interpretation  of  individual  and  group  results.  Use 
and  misuse  of  tests  in  assessing  achievement. 

472.  Psychometric  Theory  (3) 

Primarily  for  specialists  in  measurements  and  research. 
Theory  of  measurement  as  applied  to  various  kinds  of  tests 
and  scales.  Item  analysis:  pre-testing,  scaling  and  equating; 
errors  of  measurement;  reliability  and  validity;  prediction; 
factor  analysis  in  test  development.  Prerequisite:  Educ.  455 
or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

473.  Advanced  Personnel  Seminar 

An  overview  of  industrial  labor  relations  as  a  background  for 
a  more  detailed  study  of  the  movement  toward  the  organiza- 
tion of  public  employees,  with  special  reference  to  implica- 
tions for  public  school  administrators;  current  developments: 
the  meaning  and  scope  of  negotiations,  the  development  of 
grievance  procedures,  negotiation  agreements,  and  the  nego- 
tiation process.  Prerequisites:  Educ.  463,  Educ.  478. 

474.  Seminar  in  School  Building  (3) 

475.  Seminar  in  Business  Management  (3) 

Systems  designed  to  support  educational  decision-making. 
Analysis  of  conceptual  designs  for  planning-programming- 
budgeting  and  evaluation  systems.  (PPBS). 

476.  Seminar  in  School  Finance  (3) 

Concepts  of  school  finance  including  intergovernmental  fiscal 
relations,  state  grants-in-aid,  taxation,  municipal  borrowing, 
long  term  capital  outlay  programs,  etc.  An  examination  of 
school  business  office  operations  is  included. 

477.  Seminar  in  School-Community  Relations  (3) 

478.  Seminar  in  School  Personnel  Problems  (3) 
Overview  of  the  personnel  function  in  educational  institu- 
tions. Emphasis  upon  emerging  trends  in  staff  planning,  re- 
cruitment, selection,  assignment,  and  orientation,  as  well  as 
tenure,  grievances,  and  related  matters. 

479.  Seminar  in  School  Law  (3) 

The  effect  of  school  law  upon  the  administration  of  public 
school  systems,  including  analysis  and  synthesis  of  judicial 
interpretations  of  the  constitutions,  statutes,  rules,  regula- 
tions, and  common  law  relating  to  educational  issues. 


480.  Elementary  School  Guidance  (3) 

Study  of  child  development  as  related  to  guidance  in  elemen- 
tary schools.  Analysis  of  the  roles  of  counselors,  teachers, 
parents,  and  other  specialists  and  their  influence  upon  the 
child.  Prerequisite:  Educ.  482  and  consent  of  the  instructor. 

481.  Assessment  in  School  Psychology  (3-6) 
Assessment  processes  used  in  school  psychology.  Practice  in 
the  administration  of  tests  and  preparation  of  school  psycho- 
logical reports  is  emphasized.  Prerequisite:  admission  to  pro- 
gram in  school  psychology. 

482.  Philosophy  and  Principles  of  Guidance  (3) 
Introduction  of  guidance  processes  in  the  elementary  and 
secondary  schools  and  higher  education.  Theoretical  founda- 
tions, principles,  and  ethics  of  guidance  are  considered  to- 
gether with  the  functions,  services,  and  organization  of  a 
guidance  program. 

483.  Counseling  (3) 

Intensive  examination  of  theories  and  techniques  of  counsel- 
ing. Students  will  conduct  counseling  interviews.  Prerequi- 
site: admission  to  program  in  counselor  education. 

484.  Career  Development  (3) 

Study  of  the  process  of  selecting  and  pursuing  educational 
and  vocational  goals  with  an  emphasis  upon  decision-making. 
Career  development  is  examined  as  a  facet  of  general  human 
development.  Evaluating  and  using  occupational,  educational, 
and  related  information. 

485.  Elementary  School  Principal's  Clinic  (3-6) 

486.  Secondary  School  Principal's  Clinic  (3-6) 

487.  Counseling  and  School  Psychology  Clinic  (3-12) 

488.  School  Superintendent's  Clinic  (3-6) 

489.  Reading  Specialists  Clinic  (3-12) 
491-492.  Advanced  Seminars  in  Education  (3) 

493.  Research  (3) 

Basic  principles  of  research  and  techniques  of  gathering  and 
analyzing  data.  Exploration  and  comparison  of  various  ways 
of  bringing  evidence  to  bear  on  the  identification  and  solu- 
tion of  educational  problems.  Emphasis  on  critical  reviews  of 
research  reports  from  various  fields  and  representing  various 
methodologies.  A  research  report  is  required.  Recommended 
to  be  taken  before  approval  for  master's  candidacy. 

494.  Field  Work  (3-6) 

Identification  of  significant  problem  (s)  in  an  educational 
environment,  review  of  the  literature,  and  development  of 
appropriate  research  plans.  No  more  than  3  credits  may  be 
earned  in  a  semester. 


Education      133 


195.  i  ducational  Research  Methodology  (.\) 
i  01  spei  ialists  in  measurements  and  research.  Study  ol  ex- 
perimental and  quasi-experimental  designs,  methods  ol  data 
collection,  and  instrumentation  appropriate  for  use  in  educa- 
tional settings. 


Electrical  Engineering 


196.  Seminar  in  Research  (  SJ 

For  doctoral  students.  Researeli  design  and  application  to 
various  kinds  ol" educational  problems;  data  collection  and 
analysis.  Seminar  will  include  criticism  and  evaluation  of 
student  proposals  and  related  research.  May  be  repeated  for  a 
maximum  of  nine  credits. 

498.  Internship  (3-9) 

Designed  to  give  advanced  students  an  opportunity  to  obtain 
practical  experience  in  selected  school  systems.  Conference 
hours  for  students  and  staff  members  will  be  devoted  to  dis- 
cussion of  work  and  problems  encountered  in  the  schools. 
Students  will  be  sectioned  as  follows:  Section  A,  elementary 
school  principals;  Section  B,  secondary  school  principals; 
Section  C,  guidance  counselors;  Section  D,  superintendents  of 
schools:  Section  E,  reading  specialists;  and  Section  F,  special- 
ists in  measurements  and  research. 


Professors 

Alfred  Kriss  Susskind,  S.M.,  Chairman 

John  |.  Karakash,  D.Eng.,  Distinguished  Professor  and  Dean 

oj  tin-  College  of  Engineering 

Walter  Emil  Dahlke,  Ph.D. 

Nikolai  Eberhardt,  Ph.D. 

Arthur  Irving  Larky.  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

William  Avon  Barrett,  Ph.D. 
Bruce  Dale  Fritchman,  Ph.D. 
Carl  Sanford  Holzinger.  Ph.D. 
Daniel  Leenov,  Ph.D. 
John  George  Ondria,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Proicssors 

Frank  H.  Hielscher,  Ph.D. 
Peggy  Anne  Ota,  Ph.D. 
Kenneth  Kai-Ming  Tzeng,  Ph.D. 

Instructors 

Hans  R.  Gnerlich,  M.S. 
Donald  Lee  Talhelm,  M.S. 

Lecturers 

Francis  A.  Long,  B.S.,  E.E. 
John  K.  Redmon,  M.S. 


The  electrical  engineering  curriculum  has  been  formulated  to 
provide  a  foundation  for  competence  and  growth  in  the 
many  challenging  areas  in  electrical  engineering.  These  in- 
clude electronic  devices,  communication,  information  and 
computing  systems,  control  systems,  electronic  instrumenta- 
tion, and  electrical  power  systems.  In  addition,  the  under- 
graduate program  can  also  serve  as  a  stepping  stone  into  such 
related  areas  as  bioengineering,  computer  science,  system 
engineering,  or  management  science. 

An  undergraduate  will  eventually  determine  that  his  in- 
terests lie  in  one  or  two  directions— such  as  research,  develop- 
ment, design,  or  management.  His  ultimate  success  will  de- 
pend upon  the  depth  and  breadth  of  his  background,  the 
effectiveness  with  which  he  can  utilize  his  knowledge,  and 
the  keenness  with  which  he  can  analyze  and  solve  problems. 
This  is  one  basic  assumption  upon  which  the  four-year  curri- 
culum is  based. 

The  other  basic  assumption  is  that  the  variety  of  activities 


134     Electrical  Engineering 


in  which  modern  electrical  engineers  are  engaged  will  con- 
tinue to  remain  large,  and  so  an  appropriate  curriculum  must 
provide  opportunity  for  mobility  of  the  individual.  Finally, 
the  undergraduate  curriculum  reflects  the  awareness  that  it 
should  concentrate  on  broad  fundamentals  and  not  on  the 
details  of  current  engineering  practice. 

Subjects  in  physics  and  mathematics  form  one  block  of 
courses  in  the  electrical  engineering  curriculum,  because  no 
matter  which  direction  the  individual  will  follow,  a  founda- 
tion in  the  basic  sciences  and  mathematics  will  serve  him 
well.  Within  electrical  engineering,  the  physical  sciences  pro- 
vide a  foundation  for  theoretical  and  experimental  studies  of 
devices,  such  as  transistors,  microwave  components,  and 
energy  converters.  Mathematics  provides  the  basis  for  the 
analytical  study  of  device  models  and  the  tools  for  the  analy- 
sis, design  and  exploitation  of  systems  such  as  computers, 
communication  networks,  and  information  or  control  sys- 
tems. 

There  are  two  other  areas  outside  of  electrical  engineering 
which  are  a  required  part  of  the  curriculum.  The  first  of  these 
is  the  general  studies  program,  common  to  all  engineering 
curricula  at  the  University.  The  other  area  consists  of  related 
engineering  sciences,  and  deals  with  mechanics,  thermody- 
namics, and  materials. 

The  required  courses  in  electrical  engineering  contain  the 
fundamentals  of  linear  circuits  and  systems,  electronic  cir- 
cuits, signal  theory,  computer  hardware  and  software, 
physical  electronics,  electromagnetic  theory,  and  energy  con- 
version. Some  of  these  courses  include  laboratory  work;  two 
upper-level  laboratory  subjects  are  also  required. 

The  electives  in  the  senior  year  provide  opportunity  for 
tailoring  the  individual's  program  according  to  his  interests 
and  goals.  Some  will  use  the  electives  for  acquiring  additional 
background  in  preparation  for  graduate  study,  which  has 
become  so  important  as  a  consequence  of  the  growth  in  the 
intellectual  content  of  engineering  and  science.  Others  will 
select  terminal  courses  in  preparation  for  entry  into  industry 
at  the  completion  of  the  four -year  program.  Students  are  free 
to  select  from  courses  offered  by  other  departments,  and  are 
encouraged  to  do  so  whenever  it  serves  their  individual  needs. 
In  this  manner,  they  can  prepare  themselves  for  activities 
which  straddle  departmental  boundaries,  or  for  entry  into 
professional  schools  such  as  medicine  or  management.  For 
example,  a  program  aimed  toward  the  computing  sciences 
might  include,  in  addition  to  subjects  offered  in  the  electrical 
engineering  department,  courses  taught  by  the  division  of 
information  science  and  the  department  of  mathematics. 
Individually  tailored  programs  of  this  nature  should  be  plan- 
ned through  conference  with  a  department  advisor.  Early 
planning  can  do  much  to  maximize  benefits. 

Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 

Freshman  Year  (see  page  45) 


Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

EE  11  Introduction  to  Computer  Engineering  (3) 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  &  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

EE  20  Introduction  to  Circuit  Theory  (4) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Phys  31  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Mech  103  Principles  of  Mechanics  (4) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (14-17  credit  hours) 

EE  104  Linear  Systems  &  Signals  (4) 

EE  105  Electronic  Circuits  (4) 

Math  231  Statistical  Inference 

or 
Math  309  Theory  of  Probability  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 


EE  103 
EE  106 

EE  231 
EE  142 


Summer 
EE  100 


Physical  Electronics  (3) 
Electromechanics  &  Machines  (3) 
Electric  &  Magnetic  Fields  (3) 
Junior  Lab  (2) 
Approved  Elective  (3) 
Elective  (3) 


Industrial  Employment 


Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

EE  111  Proseminar  (1) 

EE  151  Senior  Lab  I  (2) 

EE  245  Electromagnetic  Theory  (3) 

Approved  Electives  (6) 

Elective  (0-3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (18  credit  hours) 

Approved  Electives  (12) 

Elective  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Note:  the  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  mini- 
mum load  required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirement;  the 
higher  number  is  the  normal  semester  load. 

Approved  electives  are  subjects  predominantly  in  the 
areas  of  science  and  technology.  They  are  not  restricted  to 
offerings  in  the  department  of  electrical  engineering.  Stu- 
dents must  choose  at  least  one  elective  in  mathematics  and  at 
least  one  elective  in  materials,  thermodynamics,  fluid 
mechanics,  or  physical  chemistry. 


Electrical  Engineering      135 


ll.  Introduction  to  Computei  Engineering  (3) 
Introduction  to  computer-system  organization,  data  struc- 
tures,  and  the  basic  concepts  behind  user  oriented  languages. 
Machine  structure;  memory  organization  and  its  allocation 
for  data  aggregates;  assembly  language;  number  representa- 
tion and  arithmetic.  Fundamental  types  of  programming 
statements  and  program  structure.  Functions  and  procedures. 
Iteration  and  recursion.  Prerequisite:  Engr.  1  or  equivalent 
experience  in  programming. 

.20.  Introductory  Circuit  Theory  (4) 

Introduction  to  methods  for  analyzing  lumped  circuits  con- 
taining linear  and  nonlinear,  time-invariant  and  time-varying, 
active  and  passive  elements.  Topics  include:  circuit  elements, 
formulation  of  differential  equations,  mesh  and  node  analy- 
sis, state  equations,  network  functions,  natural  frequencies, 
complete  response  calculations,  pole-zero  analysis,  network 
theorems.  Includes  a  weekly  laboratory  and/or  problem- 
solving  session.  Prerequisite:  Math.  23. 

100.  Summer  Work 

Students  are  expected  to  spend  at  least  eight  weeks  getting 

experience  in  some  industrial  organization,  normally  during 

the  vacation  following  the  junior  year.  A  written  report  on 

the  experience  gained  therein  is  due  on  or  before  November 

1. 


106.  i  lectromechanics  and  Machines  (3} 

pies  ot  electro  magnet  ism  and  their  application  in  elec- 
troinecli.illii.il  ilevue-..  An.ilv.i-.  and  de-,igii     il   tr  .in:. I  or  mcl's, 
solenoidai  actuators,  multi-phase  power  systems,  AC  and  DC 
rotating  machinery,  and  machine  control.  Prerequisite:  E.E. 
20. 

111.  Electrical  Engineering  Proseminar  (1) 
A  weekly  seminar  to  acquaint  students  with  current  topics  in 
electrical  engineering.  Students  prepare  and  present  oral  and 
written  reports  which  are  judged  on  skill  of  presentation  and 
technical  content.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing. 

142.  Junior  Lab  (2) 

Experimental  work  based  on  E.E.  103,  104,  105,  and  106 
intended  to  strengthen  proficiency  in  these  fields.  Two 
three-hour  laboratory  sessions  per  week.  Prerequisite:  junior 
standing. 

151.  Senior  Laboratory  I  (2) 

Laboratory  projects  in  any  phase  of  electrical  engineering, 
frequently  in  the  areas  of  digital  systems,  communications, 
instrumentation,  and  electronic  circuits.  Projects  are  selected 
by  the  student  from  topics  suggested  by  the  students,  staff, 
or  industrial  concerns.  Two  three-hour  sessions  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  senior  standing. 


103.  Physical  Electronics  (3) 

Energy  levels  and  band  theory.  Introduction  to  quantum 
statistics;  electron  emission  and  photoelectric  effect;  electron 
ballistics  and  applications.  Conduction  in  metals  and  semi- 
conductors; theory  of  p-n  junctions  and  transistors;  static  and 
dynamic  characteristics;  equivalent  circuits.  Prerequisite: 
Phys.  31. 

104.  Linear  Systems  and  Signals  (4) 

Transform  theory,  including  continuous  and  discrete  Fourier 
transforms,  fast  Fourier  transform,  bilateral  and  unilateral 
Laplace  transforms,  Hilbert  transform  and  analytic  signals. 
Application  of  transforms  to  the  solution  of  linear  system 
problems.  Introductory  treatment  of  signal  theory  including 
modulation,  correlation  and  filtering.  Sampling  theorems  and 
their  application  to  digital  signal  processing.  Prerequisite: 
E.E.  20. 

105.  Electronic  Circuits  (4) 

Introduction  to  methods  for  analyzing  and  designing  circuits 
containing  semiconductor  devices  such  as  diodes,  bipolar 
transistors,  and  field-effect  transistors  for  both  small  and 
large-signal  applications.  Topics  include  operating-point  stabi- 
lization, basic  amplifier  configurations,  power  relationships, 
graphical  and  mathematical  analysis  techniques,  multistage 
amplifiers  and  feedback.  Includes  a  weekly  laboratory.  Prere- 
quisite: E.E.  20. 


152.  Senior  Laboratory  II  (2) 

Two  choices  open,  each  occupying  two  three-hour  sessions 

per  week. 

(1)  Project  laboratory.  Similar  to  E.E.  151. 

(2)  Microwave  laboratory.  Introduction  to  the  standard 
techniques  of  measurement  in  the  microwave  range,  such  as 
measurement  of  impedance  with  the  slotted  line  and  the 
hybrid  tee;  two-port  parameters  after  Dechamps  and  Weiss- 
floch;  attenuation  by  substitution  and  heterodyning.  Prere- 
quisite: E.E.  346  previously  or  concurrently. 

160.  Electrical  Circuits  and  Apparatus  (3) 

Survey  subject  for  students  not  majoring  in  electrical  engi- 
neering. Elementary  network  theory.  Behavior  of  simple 
linear  networks.  Principles  of  semiconductor  devices  and 
their  use  in  functional  circuits.  Electromechanical  energy 
conversion.  Selected  applications.  Prerequisites:  Math.  23  and 
Phys.  21. 

161.  Electrical  Problems  (1) 

A  weekly  recitation  period  intended  to  supplement  the 
material  in  E.E.  160  lectures  and  to  discuss  homework  assign- 
ments. Prerequisite:  E.E.  160  concurrently. 

162.  Electrical  Laboratory  (1) 

Experiments  on  circuits,  machines,  and  electronic  devices. 
Prerequisite:  E.E.  160  concurrently. 


136     Electrical  Engineering 


For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

The  following  courses  are  departmental  electives  with  the 
exception  of  E.E.  231  and  E.E.  245. 

201.  Computer  Architecture  (3) 

Digital  building  blocks,  conventional  computer  structure  and 
information  flow.  Mechanization  of  arithmetic,  storage,  and 
control  functions.  Input-output  systems  and  controllers. 
Priority  interrupt,  direct  memory  access  and  other  overlap- 
ping techniques.  Architecture  of  small  ("mini")  computers; 
key  features  of  large  ("maxi")  machines.  Digital  design  simu- 
lation. Prerequisites:  E.E.  11  or  Math.  105;  E.E.  241  pre- 
viously or  concurrently. 

205.  Pulse  and  Digital  Circuits  (3) 

Analysis  of  functional  circuits:  wave  shapers,  multivibrators, 
logic  circuits,  pulse  and  timing  generators.  Models  of  semi- 
conductor devices.  Methods  of  nonlinear  analysis  and  worst- 
case  design.  Feedback  and  negative  resistance.  Prerequisite: 
E.E.  105. 

212.  Control  Systems  (3) 

Introduction  to  feedback  control.  Dynamic  analysis  of  linear 
feedback  systems  in  the  time  and  frequency  domain,  with 
emphasis  on  stability  and  steady-state  accuracy.  Major  analy- 
tical tools:  signal-flow  graphs,  root-locus  method,  Nyquist 
plot,  Bode  analysis.  Cascade  compensation  techniques.  Intro- 
duction to  sampled  data  and  state-variable  concepts.  Prere- 
quisite: E.E.  104. 

231.  Electric  and  Magnetic  Fields  (3) 

Fundamentals  of  static  electric  and  magnetic  fields.  Laplace's 
equation.  Polarizability  of  matter.  Boundary  conditions.  Con- 
formal  mapping.  Numerical  methods  in  potential  theory. 
Prerequisite:  junior  standing. 

233.  Power  System  Analysis  I  (3) 

Determination  of  transmission  line  constants;  transmission 
line  equations.  General  circuit  constants.  Regulation  efficiency. 
Symmetrical  components.  System  faults.  Sequence  impe- 
dances of  transmission  lines;  transformer  banks;  metering. 
Prerequisite:  E.E.  106. 

234.  Power  System  Analysis  II  (3) 

Steady  state  and  transient  power  limits  of  transmission  sys- 
tems; electromechanical  characteristics  of  electrical  machines 
and  networks.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  233. 

241.  Switching  Theory  and  Logic  Design  (3) 
Boolean  algebra  and  its  application  to  networks  with  bivalued 
signals.  Function  simplification  and  design  of  combinational 
logic.  Sequential  machines  and  their  realization  in  pulse  and 
level  circuits.  Design  of  simple  digital  systems. 


244.  Communication  Networks  (3) 

Introductory  theory  of  two-terminal  and  four-terminal  net- 
work synthesis.  Transmission  lines  as  network  elements.  Ana- 
log and  digital  filter  theory.  Prerequisites:  E.E.  104  and  105. 

245.  Electromagnetic  Theory  (3) 

Maxwell's  equations.  Wave  solutions  in  rectangular  and  cylin- 
drical coordinate  systems.  Retarded  potentials.  Poynting's 
theorem.  Lossy  and  lossless  isotropic  media.  Skin  effect. 
Transmission  lines,  waveguides,  and  resonant  cavities.  Prere- 
quisite: E.E.  231. 


300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  E.E. 


(1-3) 


307.  Transistor  Circuit  Application  (3) 

Review  of  static  and  dynamic  behavior  of  p-n  junctions. 
Transistor  physical  electronics,  volt-ampere  characteristics, 
and  circuit  models.  Dependence  of  circuit-model  parameters 
on  structure  and  operating  conditions.  Tuned  amplifiers, 
feedback  amplifiers,  and  oscillators.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  105. 

308.  Transistor  Theory  (3) 

Large-signal  theory  of  p-n  junction  devices.  Approximate 
large-signal  models  for  analysis  of  switching,  including  Linvill, 
Ebers-Moll,  and  charge-control  models.  Deviations  from  low- 
level  models  at  high  injection  levels.  Theory  of  field-effect 
transistors  and  large-signal  models.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  103. 

311.  Compiler  Design  (3) 

Principles  of  artificial  language  description  and  design.  Sen- 
tence parsing  techniques,  including  operator-precedence, 
bounded-context  and  syntax-directed  recognizer  schemes. 
The  semantic  problem  as  it  relates  to  interpreters  and  compi- 
lers. Recent  developments,  including  dynamic  storage  alloca- 
tion, table  grammars,  code  optimization,  compiler-writing 
languages.  Prerequisite:  consent  ot  instructor. 

31 5.  Principles  of  Computer  Software  (3) 

Machine,  assembly  and  macro  language  concepts.  Study  of 

assemblers,  macro  processors,  and  loaders,  and  techniques  for 

their  construction.  Introduction  to  operating  systems  as  time 

permits.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  11  or  consent  of  department 

chairman. 

317.  (I.S.  317,  Math.  317)  Analytical  Methods  for  Informa- 
tion Sciences  (3) 

Series  of  topics  in  discrete  mathematics  chosen  for  their  ap- 
plicability to  computer  science,  coding  theory,  and  informa- 
tion retrieval.  Sets;  binary  relations;  lattices;  Boolean  algebras 
and  application  to  logic  design;  semigroups  and  relevance  to 
automata;  groups  and  application  to  coding;  fields  and  rele- 
vance to  circuits  and  codes;  graphs  and  application  to  file 
searching.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing  or  consent  of  depart- 
ment chairman. 


Electrical  Engineering      137 


321.  Current   l  opi<  s  in  Magnetics  (3) 

lies  d    iwn  from  current  areas  of  magneci<  device  thi 
and  application,  such  .is  ortho-ferrite  bubbles,  magneto- 
optics,  magnetic  thin  films,  ferrites,  and  permanent  magnets. 
Text  material  taken  primarily  from  the  current  literature, 
with  emphasis  on  computer  applications.  No  specialized 
background  assumed.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

.VI 2.  Communication  Theory  (3) 

Theory  and  application  of  analog  and  digital  modulation. 
Sampling  theory  with  application  to  analog-to-digital  and 
digital-to-analog  conversion  techniques.  Time  and  frequency 
division  multiplexing.  Introduction  to  random  processes  in- 
cluding filtering  and  noise  problems.  Introduction  to  statisti- 
cal communication  theory  with  primary  emphasis  on 
optimum  receiver  principles.  Prerequisites:  E.E.  104  and 
Math.  309  or  231. 

346.  Microwave  Circuits  and  Techniques  (3) 
Impedance  transformation  along  waveguides.  Matching  tech- 
niques. Resonant  cavities  as  circuit  elements.  Scattering  and 
transfer  matrices.  Periodic  structures.  Selected  microwave 
devices.  Basic  techniques  of  microwave  measurements.  Prere- 
quisite: E.E.  245. 

350.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  field  of  electrical  engineering  not  in- 
cluded in  other  courses. 

351.  Microelectronics  (3) 

Technology  ot  semiconductor  devices  and  of  monolithic  inte- 
grated circuits,  including  crystal  growth  and  doping,  phase 
diagrams,  diffusion,  epitaxy,  thermal  oxidation  and  oxide 
masking,  photolithography,  thin  film  formation.  Effects  of 
these  processes  on  the  design  of  transistors  and  integrated 
circuits.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  103  or  consent  of  department 
chairman. 

For  Graduates 

Graduate  study  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  is  avail- 
able in  the  electrical  engineering  department.  Neither  of  the 
advanced  degree  programs  has  a  fixed  curriculum,  and 
courses  are  selected  by  the  individual  in  consultation  with  his 
advisors. 

In  addition  to  the  uniform  requirements  set  forth  by  the 
graduate  school,  the  electrical  engineering  department  re- 
quires the  submission  of  a  satisfactory  thesis  for  the  master's 
degree,  unless  the  candidate  is  able  to  demonstrate  other 
research  training. 

Subject  to  approval  by  departmental  advisors,  graduate 
degree  programs  frequently  include  as  part  of  the  "major" 
courses  offered  by  other  departments.  This  is  particularly 
appropriate  in  those  areas  where  courses  in  physics  and 
mathematics  provide  a  foundation  for  advanced  work. 

Students  in  the  Ph.D.  program  are  required  to  take  the 
qualifying  examination  within  one  year  after  obtaining  the 
master's  degree.  This  examination  tests  competence  in 


general  areas  of  electrical  engineering.  A  second  examination 
m  the  candidate's  area  ol  specialization  is  taken  at  some  nine 
up  to  the  last  year  of  his  program.  Competence  in  a  foreign 
language  is  not    i  required  part  ol  the  Ph.D.  program  in  elec- 
tric al  engineering. 

Members  ol  the  department  are  particularly  interested  in 
advanced  work  in  the  following  areas:  semiconductor  devices: 
microwave  components  and  circuits;  magnetic  memory 
devices;  computer  languages;  computer  hardware  and  soft- 
ware systems;  communications  and  decision  theory;  pattern 
recognition;  algebraic  coding  theory;  switching  theory  and 
logical  design. 

The  laboratories  of  the  electrical  engineering  department 
are  located  primarily  in  the  James  Ward  Packard  Laboratory 
of  electrical  and  mechanical  engineering.  Facilities  for  experi- 
mental work  in  electronics  and  communication  cover  the 
spectrum  through  microwave  frequencies.  Special  research 
facilities,  including  a  shielded  room,  are  available  for  the 
study  of  devices,  noise  in  semiconductor  networks,  and  digi- 
tal functions.  A  laboratory  with  ultra-high  vacuum  equip- 
ment is  available  for  the  investigation  of  semiconductor  sur- 
faces and  for  the  preparation  of  special  devices.  There  are 
also  facilities  for  oxidation,  diffusion,  photolithography, 
metallization,  and  wire  bonding.  The  department  has  a  PDP-8 
minicomputer  and  a  variety  of  ancillary  building  blocks. 

401.  Digital  Systems  (3) 

Principles  of  machine  organization;  macro-  and  micro-pro- 
gramming. Modern  concepts  and  practices  in  logical  design. 

403.  Design  of  Executive  Systems  (3) 

Hardware  and  software  desiderata  for  executive  (operating) 
systems  in  both  batch  and  interactive  applications.  Brief  sur- 
vey of  contemporary  systems.  Detailed  treatment  of  elements 
of  executive  systems,  such  as  protection  mechanisms,  paging 
and  segmentation,  swapping,  I/O  and  file  systems,  scheduling, 
fault  handling,  crash  recovery.  Techniques  for  actual  con- 
struction of  an  executive  system  will  be  discussed  as  time 
permits. 

407.  Linear  and  Nonlinear  Optics  (3) 

Gaussian  beams.  Optical  waveguides  and  resonators.  Intro- 
duction to  laser  physics.  Crystal  optics  with  attention  to  non- 
linear effects.  Harmonic  and  subharmonic  generation.  Para- 
metric amplifications.  Brillouin  and  Raman  scattering. 
Classical  diffraction  theory.  Holography  with  applications. 

409.  Advanced  Electromagnetic  Theory  (3) 

Maxwell's  equations  in  the  scope  of  modern  physics.  Wave 
propagation  in  anisotropic  and  gyrotropic  media.  Introduc- 
tion to  nonlinear  media.  Atmospheric  propagation  and  scat- 
tering. Selected  topics  from  antenna  theory. 

410.  Electronics  of  Microwave  Tubes  and  Bulk 
Semiconductors  (3) 

Ballistic  theory  of  transit-time  tubes.  Llewellyn-Peterson 
equations.  Free  space-charge  waves  and  their  interaction  with 
slow  wave  structures.  Transit-time  effects  and  microwave 
generation  in  bulk  semiconductors. 


138     Electrical  Engineering 


411.  Information  Theory  I  (3) 

Introduction  to  information  theory.  Topics  covered  include: 
development  ot  information  measures  for  discrete  and  con- 
tinuous spaces,  study  of  discrete-stochastic  information 
sources,  derivation  of  noiseless  coding  theorems,  investigation 
of  discrete  and  continuous  memoryless  channels,  develop- 
ment of  noisy  channel  coding  theorems. 

412.  Information  Theory  II  (3) 

Channel  encoding  and  decoding  problems  and  development 
of  random  coding  bounds.  Study  of  sources  and  channels 
with  memory  including  the  development  of  channel  models 
and  coding  theorems.  Investigation  of  source  coding  with  a 
fidelity  criterion.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  411. 

413.  Active  Networks  (3) 

Synthesis  of  active  networks  to  prescribed  frequency  charac- 
teristics. Stability  and  realizability  criteria.  Parameter  drift 
effects. 

415.  Pattern  Classification  Theory  and  Applications  I  (3) 
Estimation  and  classification  techniques  useful  in  communi- 
cation, control,  and  pattern  recognition.  Simple  decision 
theory;  likelihood  ratios,  estimation.  Bayesian  estimation  and 
reproducing  densities.  Discriminant  functions;  measures  of 
distance  and  information.  Error-correcting  algorithms  and 
stochastic  approximation.  Examples  of  the  design  of  fixed 
and  adaptive  filters,  detectors,  and  pattern  classifiers. 

416.  Pattern  Classification  Theory  and  Applications  II  (3) 
Compound  decision  theory.  Learning  without  a  teacher; 
Markovian  decision  processes.  Cluster  analysis;  linguistic 
models  for  pattern  analysis  and  description;  feature  selection. 
State  of  art  of  practical  pattern  recognition  systems.  Exam- 
ples from  optical  character  recognition,  adaptive  communica- 
tion and  control  systems,  and  picture  processing  by  compu- 
ter. Prerequisite:  E.E.  415. 

425.  Power  System  Analysis  I  (3-6) 

Distribution-system  concepts  and  components:  transformers; 
protective  devices;  voltage  control;  optimum  loading;  ground- 
ing. Protective  relaying:  operating  principles  and  system  cal- 
culations including  fault  calculations  using  symmetrical  com- 
ponents. Surge  phenomena:  traveling-wave  theory;  ground- 
ing; surge-reduction  design  and  arrester  application;  insula- 
tion coordination.  Economics  of  power  systems:  analysis  and 
evaluation  of  financial  structure;  rate  of  return;  rate 
structures;  depreciation. 

426.  Power  System  Analysis  II  (3-6) 

Analysis  of  synchronous  machines.  Steady-state  and  transient 
modes  of  operation;  per  unit  representation;  d-q  equations; 
balanced  and  unbalanced  short-circuit  stability;  saturation. 
Stability  criteria  of  power  systems.  State  functions  and  state 
variables;  system  modelling;  computer  techniques;  state-of- 
the-art  analysis  techniques;  dynamic  stability. 


431.  Topics  in  Switching  Theory  (3) 

Emphasis  on  structural  concepts  motivated  by  recent  ad- 
vances in  integrated  circuit  technology.  Major  topics  include: 
logical  completeness,  error  detection  and  location;  decompo- 
sition techniques;  synthesis  with  assumed  network  forms; 
fault  masking  in  switching  circuits.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  241  or 
equivalent. 

432.  Finite  State  Machines  (3) 

Description  of  sequential  behavior;  Gedanken  experiments; 
error  control;  information  loss-lessness,  iterative  systems. 
Synthesis  of  sequential  machines  in  canonic  forms  and  as 
asynchronous  circuits.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  241  or  equivalent. 

435.  Coding  Theory  (3) 

General  theory  of  error-correcting  codes  for  error  control  in 
digital  computer  and  communication  systems.  Topics  include 
a  review  of  modern  algebra  as  required  in  the  discussion  of 
codes;  the  structure  and  properties  of  linear,  cyclic,  and  con- 
volutional  codes  for  random  or  burst-error  correction  (or 
both);  decoding  algorithms  and  their  circuit  implementations. 
Prerequisite:  E.E.  317  or  Math.  243  or  equivalent. 

444.  Microwave  Devices  (3) 

Optical  masers.  Cavity-  and  traveling  wave  masers.  Devices 
using  ferrimagnetic  resonance:  isolators,  circulators,  electron- 
ically controlled  phase  shifters.  Parametric  amplifiers. 
Amplifiers  and  oscillators  using  active  semiconductor  devices. 

447.  Nonlinear  Phenomena  (3) 

Investigation  of  nonlinear  effects  in  active  and  passive  lump- 
ed and  distributed  circuits  with  emphasis  on  methods  of 
analysis  as  well  as  physical  understanding  of  the  phenomena: 
jump  phenomena,  van  der  Pol's  theory,  stability  criteria, 
phase  locking.  Transmission  line  and  optical  waves  in  non- 
linear media:  shock  waves,  harmonic  generation  and  optical 
parametric  amplification. 

450.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  field  of  electrical  engineering  not 
covered  in  other  courses. 

451.  Physics  of  Semiconductor  Devices  (3) 

Energy  band  structure.  Transport  theory,  lattice  vibrations, 
electronic  conduction.  Theory  of  recombination.  Applica- 
tions of  p-n  junctions  and  metal-insulator-semiconductor 
structures.  Prerequisites:  Phys.  31  and  E.E.  103  or 
equivalent. 

452.  Solid  State  Device  Theory  I  (3) 

Hot  electrons,  secondary  ionization,  avalanche  breakdown, 
electron  transfer  by  intervalley  scattering.  Applications  to 
microwave  oscillators  and  amplifiers,  such  as  avalanche  and 
Gunn  diodes.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  451. 


Electrical  Engineering      139 


is  ;.  Solid  State  Device  Theory  li  (3) 
Properties  .>t  semiconductor  surfaces;  tunneling  theory. 
Applications  to  tunnel  diodes  and  field  effect  tr.msistors. 
Prerequisite:  E.E.  451 . 


English 


454.  Solid  State  Device  Theory  111  (3) 

Optical  electronics.  Theory  of  radiation,  radiative  absorption 
and  emission  in  semiconductors.  Applications  to  optical  e-lec 
tronic  devices:  electroluminescence,  light  emitting  diodes, 
lasers.  Detection  and  modulation  of  optical  radiation,  solar 
cells  and  photodetectors.  Prerequisite:  E.E.  451. 

457.  (M.E.  457)  Introduction  to  Modern  Control  Theory  (3) 
See  M.E.  457  for  description. 

4<i  1.  Theory  of  Electrical  Noise  (3) 
Definitions:  noise  temperature,  spectral  density.  Noise 
sources:  quantum,  thermal,  shot,  generation-recombination, 
(Ticker  noise.  Representation  and  optimization  of  noisy  net- 
works. Prerequisites:  Phys.  31  and  E.E.  103,  or  equivalent. 

462.  Noise  in  Microwave  Devices  and  Networks  (3) 
Noise  in  electron  tubes,  bipolar  and  MOS  transistors,  mixers, 
parametric  amplifiers,  tunnel  diodes,  and  masers.  Prere- 
quisite: E.E.  461. 


Professors 

Albert  Edward  Hartung,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 

Ray  Livingston  Armstrong,  Ph.D. 

Glenn  James  Chris tensen,  Ph.D.,  I  nnvrsi/v  Distinguished 

Professor 

Ernest  Nevin  Dilworth,  Ph.D. 

James  Richard  Frakes,  Ph.D. 

David  Mason  Greene,  Ph.D. 

Frank  Scott  Hook,  Ph.D. 

John  W.  Hunt,  Ph.D.,  Dean  of  the  College  of  Arts  and 

Science 

Carl  Ferdinand  Strauch,  Ph.D.,  Distinguished  Professor 

Associate  Professors 

Peter  G.  Beidler,  Ph.D. 
Cloyd  Criswell,  M.A. 
Jack  Angelo  DeBellis,  Ph.D. 
Eustace  Anthony  James,  Ph.D. 
John  F.  Vickrey,  Ph.D. 


Assistant  Professors 

Addison  C.  Bross,  Ph.D. 
Robert  C.  Cole,  Ph.D. 
Edward  J.  Gallagher,  Ph.D. 
Robert  Richard  Harson,  Ph.D. 
George  Buchanan  MacDonald,  Ph.D. 
Rosemarie  A.  Maier,  Ph.D. 
Albert  J.  Solomon,  Ph.D. 


Two  majors  are  offered  by  the  department  of  English: 
English  literature,  and  journalism. 

English  Literature 

Literature  is  a  representation  of  life  at  the  level  of  man's 
individual,  human  dealings  with  his  fellow  men.  It  is  man's 
response  to  the  physical,  emotional,  intellectual,  and  moral 
conditions  of  his  existence.  A  literary  work  is  one  author's 
ordering  and  interpretation  of  his  experience,  revealing  what- 
ever wisdom  and  beauty  his  vision  of  the  universe  affords 
him.  It  both  illuminates  human  experience  and  is  a  joy  for- 
ever. 

When  these  works  are  seen  as  the  diverse  and  yet  unified 
expressions  of  an  epoch,  they  provide  insight  into  the  human 
problem  and  solution  at  a  particular  moment  in  time.  Put 
together  epoch  after  epoch,  they  thus  become,  in  a  peculiarly 
rich  and  inward  sense,  a  form  of  history.  Among  world  litera- 
tures English  is  perhaps  the  most  varied  and  splendid  and, 


140     English 


together  with  American  literature,  presents  in  today's  inter- 
national setting  an  unusual  breadth  of  national,  racial,  region- 
al, and  cultural  subjects. 

The  English  major  student  will  come  to  know  the  varied 
richness  of  this  literature.  So  that  he  may  learn  how  to  read 
thoughtfully  and  sensitively,  he  will  be  taught  how  to  analyze 
the  basic  processes  of  the  literary  art.  His  own  skill  in  using 
the  written  word  will  grow  as  he  studies  intensively  the 
writings  of  those  who  have  shown  themselves  to  be  the 
supreme  masters  of  the  skill.  Above  all,  he  will  be  challenged 
to  formulate  honest  reactions  to  his  reading  just  as  writers 
originally  did  when  contronted  by  experience;  and  so,  by 
integrating  his  own  experience  with  what  Matthew  Arnold 
called  "the  best  that  has  been  thought  and  said,"  he  will 
come  to  perceive  whatever  wisdom  and  beauty  his  own  en- 
riched vision  will  afford  him.  The  resulting  enlargement  of 
mind  and  spirit  not  only  should  produce  a  flexible,  yet  well- 
integrated,  personality  but  also  can  be  put  at  the  service  of 
society  in  whatever  profession  or  enterprise  the  student  may 
undertake. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Engl  1,  and  2,  10,  14,  or  16     Composition  and  Literature  (6) 

and 
Engl  8,  9  English  Literature  (6) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Engl  323,  324      Shakespeare  &  Elizabethan  Drama  (6) 

and  twenty-four  semester  hours  from  the 

following  courses: 

Engl  183,  184  Readings  in  English  Literature  (6) 

Engl  321,  322  Twentieth-Century  Literature  (6) 

Engl  325  English  Literature  of  the  Romantic  Era  (3) 

Engl  326  English  Literature  of  the  Victorian  Era  (3) 

Engl  331  Milton  (3) 

Engl  333  Restoration  and  Augustan  Literature  (3) 

Engl  334  The  Age  of  Johnson  (3) 

Engl  335  History  of  the  English  Language  (3) 

Engl  336  Writing  for  Publication  (3) 

Engl  337  The  Renaissance  (3) 

Engl  338  The  Seventeenth  Century  (3) 

Engl  339  Chaucer  (3) 

Engl  340  Advanced  Composition  (3) 

Engl  341,  342  Contemporary  Literature  (6) 

Engl  343  American  Romanticism  (3) 

Engl  344  American  Realism  (3) 

Engl  345  Themes  in  American  Literature  (3) 

Engl  346  Middle  English  Literature  (3) 

Note:  electives  are  to  be  chosen  in  consultation  with  the 
chairman  of  the  departmental  undergraduate  major  commit- 
tee to  ensure  adequate  breadth  of  coverage. 

Up  to  six  hours  related  courses  in  other  departments  may 
be  substituted  with  the  approval  of  chairman  of  department. 

Collateral  courses  are  recommended  in  history,  philoso- 
phy, religion  studies,  history  and  criticism  of  the  fine  arts, 
and  classical  and  modern  languages  and  literature.  Students 


planning  to  pursue  graduate  studies  should  acquire  a  reading 
knowledge  of  German,  French,  and  Latin  as  undergraduates. 

Undergraduate  English  Composition  Courses 

All  students  must  meet  the  requirements  of  six  semester 
hours  in  freshman  composition.  This  may  be  done  through 
satisfactory  performance  in  English  1,  the  regular  first- 
semester  freshman  course,  and  in  English  2,  10,  14,  or  16,  the 
regular  second  semester  freshman  courses.  The  student  must 
elect  one  course  from  among  the  English  2,  10,  14,  16  offer- 
ing. Advanced  placement  and  six  semester  hours  of  Lehigh 
credit  for  English  1  and  2,  10,  14,  or  16  are  given  to  students 
who  earn  scores  of  3  or  higher  on  the  CEEB  Advanced  Place- 
ment Test  in  English.  Other  students  who  earn  a  score  of  700 
or  higher  on  the  SAT-Verbal  Aptitude  Test  receive  equal 
credit. 

1.  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Practice  in  expository  writing  and  the  application  of  rhetori- 
cal principles  based  upon  models. 

2.  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Continuation  of  English  1.  Further  practice  in  expository 
writing  in  conjunction  with  the  study  of  the  drama,  the  short 
story,  and  verse.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  1. 

10.  Composition  and  Literature:  Short  Fiction  (3) 
Continuation  of  English  1.  Further  practice  in  expository 
writing  in  conjunction  with  the  study  of  short  stories  and 
novellas  by  masters  of  the  form.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  1. 

14.  Composition  and  Literature:  The  Novel  (3) 
Continuation  of  English  1.  Further  practice  in  expository 
writing  in  conjunction  with  the  study  of  major  works  in  the 
form,  both  English  and  Continental.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  1. 

16.  Composition  and  Literature:  Drama  (3) 

Continuation  of  English  1.  Further  practice  in  expository 
writing  in  conjunction  with  the  study  of  the  literary  and 
theatrical  aspects  of  a  group  of  plays,  classic  and  contempo- 
rary. Prerequisite:  Eng.  1. 

English  Literature  and  Advanced  Composition 

Students  wishing  to  major  in  English  literature  should  take  as 
primary  work  Engl.  8  and  9,  or  such  equivalent  courses  as 
may  be  recommended  by  the  chairman  of  the  department. 
They  should  then  elect  a  total  of  ten  advanced  English 
courses  in  the  junior  and  senior  years.  Students  working  for 
honors  take  a  course  in  which  they  prepare  a  thesis  as  part  of 
the  honors  requirement. 

4.  A  Study  of  the  Drama  (3) 

Reading  and  critical  study  of  the  drama;  theories  of  the 
drama;  th£  drama  and  the  stage;  the  drama  as  a  criticism  of 
life.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 


English      141 


5    \  Stud)  .'i  the  Drama  (3) 

Continuation  "i  Engl.  -I.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  -.  1 0,  I  4,  or  I  (>. 

".   \  Stud)  ol  the  Shorl  Story  (3) 

A  critical  study  of  the  short  story,  English,  American,  .mil 
Continental.  Class  discussions,  extensive  coll.itcr.il  reading, 
and  reports.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

8.  English  Literature  (3) 

A  survey  of  English  literature  Irom  Beowulj  through  the  Prc- 
Romantics,  with  selected  readings.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2.  11), 
14,  or   16. 

l).  English  Literature  (3) 

A  survey  of  English  literature  from  Wordsworth  to  Auden. 

Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  1(>. 

18.  The  Novel  (3) 

A  study  of  a  selection  of  novels  as  noteworthy  works  of 
literature.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

19.  The  Novel  (3) 

Chronological  continuation  of  Engl.  18.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2, 
10,  14,  or  16. 

20.  American  Major  Writers  (3) 

A  study  of  selected  major  writers  from  the  settlement  of 
America  to  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century.  Prerequi- 
site: Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

21.  American  Major  Writers  (3) 

A  study  of  selected  major  writers  from  the  middle  of  the 
nineteenth  century  to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10, 
14,  or  16. 

23.  Survey  of  American  Literature  (3) 

A  survey  of  major  and  minor  writers  from  the  settlement  of 
America  to  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century.  Required 
of  American  Studies  majors;  open  to  others.  Prerequisite: 
Engl.  2,  10,  14.  or  16. 

24.  Survey  of  American  Literature  (3) 

A  survey  of  major  and  minor  writers  from  the  middle  of  the 
nineteenth  century  to  the  present.  Required  of  American 
Studies  majors;  open  to  others.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14, 
or  16. 

35.  Poetry  (3) 

Analytical  and  critical  reading  of  poetry,  to  provide  such 
acquaintance  with  idiom  and  technique  that  poetry  may  be 
read  with  pleasure  and  understanding.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2, 
10,  14,  or  16. 

36.  Masterpieces  of  World  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  great  works  selected  from  the  literature  of  epic 
poetry,  the  drama,  the  romance,  philosophy,  and  the  essay  to 
illustrate  the  humanistic  traditions  of  Western  civilization. 
Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 


'>  1  .  Spe<  i.il   Topic  s  in  English  (3) 

Study  ol  a  characteristic  theme,  mode,  lupus,  oi  approach  in 
English  literature.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  dc- 
pariiiienl  and  Engl.  2,  10,  1  4,  or  I  d. 

92.  Special  Topics  in  English  (3) 

Continuation  ol  English  91.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department  and  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

142.  Technical  Writing  (3) 

Study  and  practice  in  forms  and  methods  of  technical  exposi- 
tion, description,  definition,  classification;  the  technical  re- 
port, abstract.  Prerequisite:  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

151.  Introduction  to  Film  (3) 

A  survey  of  western  cinema  with  emphasis  on  the  technical 
and  aesthetic  properties  which  distinguish  film  from  the 
other  arts.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing  and  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

181.  Undergraduate  Thesis  (3) 

Open  to  advanced  undergraduates  who  wish  to  submit  theses 
in  English.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

182.  Undergraduate  Thesis  (3) 

Continuation  of  Engl.  181.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

183.  Readings  in  English  Literature  (3) 

Open  to  advanced  students  who  wish  to  pursue  special 
courses  of  reading  in  English  literature.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

184.  Readings  in  English  Literature  (3) 

Continuation  of  Engl.  183.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

English  Literature  for  Advanced  Undergraduates  and 
Graduates 

The  objective  of  the  graduate  program  in  English  is  not 
merely  the  impartation  of  knowledge,  however  wide  or  deep. 
Rather  it  is  to  instruct  and  train  the  student  in  the  methods 
by  which  he  may  pursue  the  advanced  study  of  literature  and 
literary  history.  It  is  to  train  him  in  the  techniques  of 
criticism  and  research,  so  that  he  may  go  beyond  what  has 
already  been  done  and  make  an  original  contribution  in  his 
advanced  study.  To  this  end,  graduate  instruction  in  the  de- 
partment is  conducted  chiefly  by  seminars  in  which  enroll- 
ment is  limited  to  an  average  of  twelve  students  and  there  is 
opportunity  for  individual  contact  between  the  student  and 
the  professor  who  is  guiding  his  research. 

Advanced  degrees  may  be  obtained  in  all  areas  of  English 
and  American  literature.  Members  of  the  department  are 
particularly  interested  in  advanced  work  in  Chaucer  and 
medieval  literature,  in  Shakespeare  and  Elizabethan  drama,  in 
twentieth-century  literature,  and  in  American  literature.  In 
1972-73,  22  Ph.D.  and  70  M.A.  candidates  were  enrolled  in 


142     English 


the  graduate  program  in  English. 

Students  desiring  to  qualify  for  graduate  degrees  in  this 
department  should  have  taken  an  undergraduate  major  in 
English  with  at  least  fifteen  semester  hours  of  advanced 
courses  in  English  literature.  Those  with  undergraduate  de- 
ficiencies who  are  admitted  though  otherwise  well  qualified 
will  be  expected  to  make  up  such  deficiencies  in  addition  to 
satisfying  the  minimum  requirements  for  the  degree  sought. 

All  candidates  for  the  master's  degree  in  English  who  ex- 
pect to  go  on  for  the  Ph.D.  are  required  to  complete  success- 
fully eight  semester  courses  (twenty-four  semester  hours)  and 
to  write  a  thesis  representing  the  equivalent  of  six  hours  of 
course  work. 

Beginning  with  the  academic  year  of  1973-74,  master's 
degree  candidates  who  do  not  wish  to  continue  for  the  Ph.D. 
may,  as  an  alternative  option,  receive  a  terminal  M.A.  degree 
by  successfully  completing  nine  semester  courses  (twenty- 
seven  semester  hours)  and  passing  an  examination,  prepara- 
tion for  which  represents  the  equivalent  of  three  hours  of 
course  work.  Details  of  the  examination  are  available  from 
the  director  of  graduate  studies  of  the  department. 

If  his  needs  and  interest  make  it  desirable  for  him  to  do 
so,  the  candidate  for  the  master's  degree  is  permitted  to  take 
collateral  work  in  other  departments  to  the  extent  of  six 
semester  hours  in  lieu  of  an  equivalent  amount  in  the  major 
field. 

Candidates  for  the  doctor's  degree  are  accepted  in  English 
only  after  a  consultation  among  the  graduate  professors  con- 
cerning the  candidate's  qualifications.  The  foreign  language 
requirement  for  the  Ph.D.  in  English  (usually  in  Latin, 
French,  or  German)  may  be  satisfied  in  one  of  two  ways:  (1) 
the  demonstration,  through  examination,  of  a  reading  know- 
ledge of  two  foreign  languages;  or  (2)  the  successful  comple- 
tion, concurrent  with  the  graduate  program,  of  a  foreign 
language  course,  to  be  approved  by  the  departmental 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  at  the  200-,  300-,  or  400-level 
(or  at  a  lower  level  in  classical  languages).  This  second  option 
may  be  used  to  satisfy  a  candidate's  extra-departmental 
course  requirement.  Each  candidate  is  required  to  schedule  at 
least  six  hours  of  course  work  in  History  of  the  Language  and 
Old  English  or,  depending  on  his  previous  preparation,  six 
hours  in  Old  English  alone. 

For  the  doctoral  examination  each  candidate  will  select 
the  following  to  be  examined  upon: 

1.  One  of  the  following  traditional  periods: 
Old  English  and  Medieval 

Renaissance  and  Jacobean,  1500-1660 

Restoration  and  Eighteenth  Century,  1660-1798 

Romantic  and  Victorian,  1798-1900 

American  Literature,  Colonial-1899 

Modern  British  and  American  Literature,  1900-present. 

2.  A  major  figure  (to  be  selected  in  consultation  with  the 
chairman  of  his  doctoral  committee  and  subject  to  the  ap- 
proval of  the  departmental  graduate  committee). 

3.  A  genre,  theme,  matter,  or  customary  grouping  (to  be 
selected  in  consultation  with  the  chairman  of  his  doctoral 
committee  and  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  departmental 
graduate  committee). 


In  each  of  the  three  areas  of  the  examination  the  candi- 
date will  be  expected  to  demonstrate  the  knowledge  and 
expertise  that  would  be  necessary  if  he  were  to  teach  a  course 
in  the  subject.  The  three  areas  may  not  overlap— except  for, 
in  certain  circumstances,  the  third. 

315.  Early  American  Literature  (3) 

A  survey  of  American  literature  up  to  the  Romantic  period. 

317.  The  Contemporary  Drama  (3) 

A  course  in  contemporary  American  and  European  drama 
with  particular  emphasis  upon  the  development  of  social  and 
philosophical  conflicts  of  the  present  day. 

318.  American  Literature  (3) 

Movements  that  have  shaped  American  thought  and  feelings 
as  expressed  in  the  national  literature:  Puritanism, 
Americanism,  Romanticism,  Transcendentalism,  Individual- 
ism, the  Civil  War,  Democracy,  the  West,  Realism,  Inter- 
nationalism, and  Skepticism,  as  presented  by  Jonathan  Ed- 
wards, Franklin,  Paine,  Longfellow,  Poe,  Emerson,  Thoreau, 
Mark  Twain,  Henry  James,  and  Henry  Adams. 

319.  The  Black  in  American  Literature  (3) 

The  characterization  of  the  Black  and  the  literary  treatment 
of  the  Black  experience  in  American  fiction  and  drama  from 
1850  to  the  present.  A  comparative  examination  of  both 
Black  and  white  authors,  such  as  H.  B.  Stowe,  W.  W.  Brown, 
Melville,  Twain,  Hughes,  Toomer,  Faulkner,  Wright,  Baldwin, 
Ellison,  Styron,  and  Jones.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

320.  The  Novel  (3) 

The  great  masterpieces  of  prose  fiction  produced  in  England, 
in  America,  and  on  the  Continent  during  the  nineteenth  and 
twentieth  centuries;  development  of  types  of  the  novel;  the 
theory  and  techniques  of  the  novel. 

321.  Twentieth-Century  American  Literature  (3) 
American  literature  before  World  War  II.  Lectures  and  class 
discussion  of  major  fiction  and  poetry. 

322.  Twentieth-Century  European  Literature  (3) 

English  and  Continental  literature  before  World  War  II.  Lec- 
tures and  class  discussion  of  major  fiction  and  poetry. 

323.  Shakespeare  and  the  Elizabethan  Drama  (3) 

The  development  of  the  English  drama,  including  the  im- 
portant plays  of  Shakespeare. 

324.  Shakespeare  and  the  Elizabethan  Drama  (3) 
Continuation  of  Engl.  323. 


English      143 


325.  English  Literature  •>!  the  Romantic  Bra  (3) 

Poetry  and  prose  ol  the  chiel  romantic  writers    Wordsworth, 

Coleridge.  Scott.  Byron,  Shelley,  Ke.its.  Lamb,  H.i/litt,  De 
Quincey    with  consideration  "i  the  (<oluii.il,  religious,  and 
sociaJ  problems  of  the  period  .is  they  are  exhibited  in  the 
literature.  Readings  and  class  discussions. 

Mb.  English  Literature  ol  the  Victorian  Era  (3) 

Poetry  and  prose  of  the  chiel  Victorian  writers— Tennyson, 

Browning,  Arnold,  Clough,  Rossetti,  Morris,  Swinburne. 

Mac.iul.iy,  Carlyle,  Mill,  Newman,  Ruskin— with  consideration 

ol  the  political,  religious,  and  social  problems  of  the  period  as 

they  are  exhibited  in  the  literature.  Readings  and  class 

discussions. 

331.  Milton  (3) 

The  life  and  works  of  John  Milton  in  connection  with  the 

history  of  his  times  and  chief  sources  of  his  inspiration. 

333.  Restoration  and  Augustan  Literature  (3) 

Prose  and  poetry  from  1660  to  1745,  with  special  emphasis 
upon  the  works  of  Dryden,  Pope,  and  Swift. 

334.  Age  of  Johnson  (3) 

English  prose  and  poetry  in  the  middle  and  later  years  of  the 
eighteenth  century.  Dr.  Johnson  and  his  circle,  and  others 
from  Fielding  to  Blake. 

335.  History  of  the  English  Language  (3) 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the  English  language,  in 
vocabulary,  pronunciation,  and  structure,  beginning  with  its 
relation  to  the  other  Germanic  languages  and  coming  down 
to  modern  English  usage. 

336.  Writing  for  Publication  (3) 

Comprehensive  study  of  the  short  story  and  practice  in  the 
various  techniques  of  writing  short  stories,  essays,  and  poems 
with  a  view  to  publication. 


340.  Principles  ol  Advanced  Composition  (3) 

A  study  ol  the  principles  and  rhetorical  I  or  ins  "I  non- 
narrative  prose  with  intensive  practice  in  writing  at  an  ad 
vanced  level.  Attention  to  the  theory  of  language  and  gram- 
mar. Corollary  readings,  conferences,  and  class  discussions. 
Prerequisite:  English  major  standing  or  2.5  average  in  fresh- 
man English, 

341.  Contemporary  American  Literature  (3) 
American  literature  since  World  War  II.  Lectures  and  class 
discussions  of  new  writers  and  of  recent  works  by  established 
writers. 

342.  Contemporary  European  Literature  (3) 

English  and  Continental  literature  since  World  War  II.  Lec- 
tures and  class  discussions  of  new  writers  and  of  recent  works 
by  established  writers. 

343.  American  Romanticism  (3) 

A  study  of  the  chief  American  Romantics,  Emerson, 
Thoreau,  Whitman,  Hawthorne,  Melville,  and  Emily 
Dickinson.  The  European  and  American  philosphical, 
historical,  and  social  background  as  well  as  the  formal 
aesthetic  study  of  romantic  masterpieces. 

344.  American  Realism  (3) 

The  rise  of  realism  in  prose  and  poetry  in  the  period  roughly 
from  the  1870's  to  1914;  Twain,  Howells,  James,  Robinson, 
Norris,  Crane,  Dreiser,  and  others. 

345.  Themes  in  American  Literature  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  a  selected  topic  in  American  literature, 
primarily  for  American  Studies  majors.  Readings  range  from 
the  colonial  period  to  the  present.  Sample  topics:  the 
American  re-discovery  of  Europe;  the  theme  of  apocalypse; 
American  humor;  the  Edenic  motif;  personal  revolt  and  social 
protest.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  director  of  American 
Studies. 


337.  The  Renaissance  (3) 

The  growth  of  English  non-dramatic  literature  in  the  six- 
teenth century  and  the  stimulus  of  the  Italian  Renaissance 
and  northern  humanism.  Readings  in  and  class  discussions  of 
the  works  of  the  chief  writers— Petrarch,  Erasmus,  More, 
Wyatt,  Surrey,  Lyly,  Sidney,  and  Spenser. 


346.  Middle  English  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  the  major  literary  works  of  the  Middle  English 
period  by  authors  other  than  Chaucer.  Some  works  will  be 
dealt  with  in  translation.,  some  in  the  original.  In  addition  to 
such  major  figures  as  Langland,  Gower,  and  the  Pearl  Poet, 
the  metrical  romances  will  be  emphasized. 


338.  The  Seventeenth  Century  (3) 

The  rich  variety  of  English  literature  from  Donne  to 
Dryden— Donne  and  the  "Metaphysical  School";  Jonson  and 
"The  Tribe  of  Ben";  Cavalier  and  religious  poetry;  the  prose 
of  Bacon,  Browne,  Burton,  Walton,  and  Bunyan. 

339.  Chaucer  (3) 

Reading  and  critical  study  of  the  chief  works  of  Geoffrey 
Chaucer,  with  attention  to  his  language  and  the  backgrounds 
of  his  works. 


For  Graduates 

400.  Old  English  (3) 

A  study  of  the  Old  English  language  and  literature. 

401.  Beowulf  (3) 

A  study  of  the  Beowulf  poem  and  some  of  the  pertinent 
scholarship. 

404.  Literature  of  the  Fourteenth  Century  (3) 
Types  of  medieval  literature,  with  special  attention  to 
Langland,  Gower,  and  the  Pearl  Poet. 


144     English 


405.  Chaucer  (3) 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Chaucer.  Readings,  reports 
and  class  discussions. 

406.  Chaucer  (3) 
Continuation  of  Engl.  405. 

407.  Middle  English  Metrical  Romances  (3) 

A  study  of  the  Middle  English  non-Arthurian  verse  romances. 


465.  Joyce  (3) 

A  sequential  study  of  the  works  of  James  Joyce,  their  place 
in  Irish  and  world  literature,  and  their  influence  on 
twentieth-century  prose. 

472.  Transcendentalism,  Hawthorne,  and  Emerson  (3) 

Representative  works  of  the  Transcendentalist  movement; 
the  major  works  of  Hawthorne  and  Emerson  contrasted  and 
compared  in  terms  of  Transcendentalism  and  Romanticism. 


408.  Arthurian  Literature  of  the  Middle  Ages  (3) 

A  study  of  the  development  of  Arthurian  literature  from  its 

Celtic  beginnings  to  Malory's  Morte  Darthur. 


473.  Melville  and  Whitman  (3) 

The  major  works  of  Melville  and  Whitman  contrasted  and 

compared  in  terms  of  Romantic  doctrine. 


412.  Shakespeare's  History  Plays  (3) 

A  study  of  the  English  history  plays  as  an  introduction  to 

advanced  work  in  Shakespeare. 


477.  Twain  and  James  (3) 

Selected  works  of  Twain  and  James  representing  the  develop- 
ment of  American  fiction  after  the  Civil  War. 


413.  Shakespeare's  Roman  Plays  (3) 

An  intensive  critical  study  of  Julius  Caesar,  Antony  and 

Cleopatra,  and  Coriolanus. 


480.  Hemingway  and  Faulkner  (3) 

A  thematic  and  stylistic  examination  of  the  major  works  of 

Hemingway  and  Faulkner. 


414.  Sixteenth-Century  Drama  (3) 

A  study  of  plays  representing  the  development  of  English 
drama  before  Shakespeare. 

415.  Seventeenth-Century  Drama  (3) 

A  study  of  representative  plays  from  the  major  Jacobean  and 
Caroline  dramatists. 


486.  Literary  Criticism  (3) 

A  course  aimed  to  correlate  and  unify  the  student's  previous 
work  in  literature  by  means  of  wide  reading  in  critical  litera- 
ture and  discussions  of  theories  and  schools  of  criticisms. 

487.  Literary  Criticism  (3) 
Continuation  of  Engl.  486. 


418.  Donne  (3) 

A  study  of  the  complete  body  of  Donne's  verse,  with  especial 
concern  for  its  meanings. 

444.  Pope  (3) 

A  study  of  the  works  of  Pope  and  their  literary  background. 

447.  Eighteenth-Century  Prose  (3) 

Studies  in  periodical  prose,  philosophical  prose,  satire,  and 
the  development  of  the  novel. 

448.  Studies  in  the  Eighteenth  Century  (3) 

Studies  in,  and  reports  on,  one  or  more  authors  or  issues  in 
eighteenth-century  English  literature. 

452.  Keats  (3) 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  John  Keats.  Readings,  re- 
ports, and  class  discussions. 

457.  Carlyle  and  Arnold  (3) 

The  major  works  of  Carlyle  and  Arnold  contrasted  and  com- 
pared in  terms  of  Romanticism  and  Victorian  social  and  reli- 
gious problems. 

461.  Conrad  (3) 

A  study  of  Conrad's  major  novels  and  tales,  with  emphasis  on 
the  author's  style,  technique,  and  attitude. 


490.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  field  of  English  not  covered  in  other 
courses.  May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

491.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  field  of  English  not  covered  in  other 
courses.  May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

492.  Bibliography  and  Methods  of  Research  (3) 

A  study  of  the  bibliographical  tools  essential  to  an  advanced 
student  of  English  literature.  Survey  of  historical,  or  critical 
bibliography,  of  both  printed  books  and  manuscripts;  of 
practical  bibliography,  including  direction  in  the  compilation 
of  a  list  of  books  and  articles  on  an  assigned  subject  and  in 
the  procedures  of  thesis  writing;  and  of  enumerative  biblio- 
graphies of  English  language  and  literature. 

493.  The  Teaching  of  College  English  (2) 

The  principles  and  practice  of  teaching  composition,  prose, 
and  other  literature  on  the  college  level.  A  consideration  of 
standards,  organization,  grammar,  diction,  and  style  in 
student  writing  and  the  adaptation  of  a  student  writing 
program  to  readings  in  prose  and  other  literature.  Class  dis- 
cussions, actual  teaching,  and  reports. 


English     145 


I"  I.  Tlu-  Teaching  ..I  College  I  nglish  (1  ) 
Continuation  of  Engl.  49  ;. 

495.  Graduate  Seminar  (3) 

tensive  study  of  the  works  ol  one  or  more  English  or 

American  authors  or  ol  .i  type  ol  literature. 

196.  Graduate  Seminar  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  the  works  oi  one  oi  more  English  or 

rican  authors,  or  a  type  of  literature.  Subject  and  in- 
structor vary  from  semester  to  semester  according  to  the 
needs  of  the  students  and  the  wishes  of  the  department. 
Courses  available  are  Johnson's  Literary  Criticism  (Mr. 
Dilworth),  Approaches  to  the  Short  Story  (Mr.  Frakes),  Ap- 
proaches to  Poetry  (Mr.  Greene),  Approaches  to  Composition 
(Mr.  Hartung),  Shakespeare  for  Teachers  (Mr.  Hook), 
Seventeenth-Century  Drama  (Mr.  Hook),  Wordsworth  (Mr. 
Harson),  Southern  Writers  of  the  Twentieth  Century  (Mr. 
DeBellis). 

497.  Graduate  Seminar  (3) 
Same  as  Engl.  496. 

498.  Graduate  Thesis  (3) 

499.  Graduate  Thesis  (3) 

Division  of  Journalism 

Professors 

Joseph  Brendan  McFadden,  M.A.,  Head 
Robert  Joseph  Sullivan,  M.A. 

Journalism  is  concerned  with  the  exercise  of  social  responsi- 
bility in  human  affairs.  The  profession  of  journalism  deals 
with  the  truthful  communication  of  tacts  and  their  explana- 
tion. It  is  the  purpose  of  the  program  in  journalism  to  bring 
its  majors:  (1)  to  the  point  where  they  can  gather  significant 
information,  organize  it  quickly  into  effective  form,  and 
communicate  it  clearly,  accurately,  and  with  a  disciplined 
objectivity;  and  (2)  to  an  understanding  of  the  legitimate  role 
ot  the  press  in  society. 

The  first  of  these  objectives  is  obtained  by  extensive,  pro- 
fessionally oriented  practice  in  the  writing,  reporting,  and 
editing  of  news.  The  skill  thus  acquired  is  firmly  rooted  in 
rigorous  training  in  vocabulary,  in  precision  of  expression, 
and  in  sophistication  in  style.  It  is  concerned  with  clear 
writing  and  careful  reporting,  the  kind  that  depicts  the  mean- 
ing of  events.  It  develops  from  a  purposeful  curiosity  and  a 
capacity  to  be  imaginatively  interested  in  human  activity. 
The  second  objective  is  obtained:  (1)  by  study  of  the  rights 
and  responsibilities  of  the  press  under  the  constitution,  with 
emphasis  upon  the  freedom  of  the  press  as  conditioned  by 
the  liberties  of  the  individual  and  the  needs  of  society;  (2)  by 
examination  of  the  journalistic  tradition  in  the  United  States 
in  relation  to  the  political,  economic,  and  social  progress  of 
the  population;  and  (3)  by  independent  study,  culminating  in 


an  undergraduate  thesis,  of  the  press  and  society. 

The  basii  program  in  journalism  provides  Opportunity  foi 
■  oni  'titration  in  al  leasl  one  ol  the  following  areas: 
American  studies,  business  management,  economics,  govern- 
ment, history,  international  relations,  languages,  literature, 
philosophy,  religion  studies,  science,  social  relations,  and 
urban  studies. 

While  the  great  majority  ol  graduates  in  journalism  enti  t 
some  phase  of  written  communication  as  a  career— daily  news 
paper,  wire  services,  magazine,  public  or  industrial  relations, 
advertising,  technical  writing-others  have  used  their  back- 
ground in  journalism  as  a  base  for  the  study  and  practice  of 
law,  service  in  government,  teaching,  business  management, 
and  graduate  study  in  a  variety  of  disciplines. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 


Journ  1,  2 
Journ  1  1 


Brown  and  White  (2) 
News  Writing  (3) 


Required  Major  Courses 

Journ  3-8  Brown  and  White  (2-6) 

Journ  12  Reporting  of  Public  Affairs  (3) 

Journ  17  Magazine  Article  Writing  (3) 

Journ  113  Editing  (3) 

Journ  115  Interpretive  Writing  (3) 

Journ  120  Journalism  Proseminar  (3) 

Journ  121,  122    Law  of  the  Press  (6) 

Note:  Brown  and  White  must  be  rostered  each  semester  while 
the  student  is  a  journalism  major,  and  a  minimum  of  four 
such  semesters  is  required.  With  the  approval  of  the  journal- 
ism faculty,  current  professional  newspaper  experience  may 
be  substituted  semester  for  semester. 

Recommended  Electives 

Journalism  majors  are  encouraged  to  concentrate  their  elec- 
tive courses  in  one  or  two  areas.  (See  concentration  areas  in 
third  paragraph,  above.)  Areas  and  elective  courses  should  be 
chosen  in  consultation  with  the  major  advisor. 

Newspaper  Apprenticeships 

With  the  approval  of  the  journalism  faculty,  qualified  majors 
may  acquire  professional  experience  in  apprenticeships  with 
regional  newspapers. 

1-10.  Brown  and  White  (1  or  2) 

Enrollment  constitutes  membership  on  the  staff  of  the  semi- 
weekly  paper.  Students  enrolling  for  their  first  semester 
register  for  Journ.  1 ;  for  their  second  semester,  Journ.  2,  etc. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

11.  News  Writing  (3) 

Definition,  determinants,  and  components  of  news;  news 
story  structure  and  style;  sources;  interviewing;  practice  in 
gathering  and  writing  news. 


146     English 


12.  Reporting  of  Public  Affairs  (3) 

Reporting  and  writing  news  of  government  on  the  local, 

county,  state,  and  federal  levels;  civil  and  criminal  courts; 

labor,  science,  and  entertainment  news.  Prerequisite:  Journ. 

11. 

17.  Magazine  Article  Writing  (3) 

Writing  and  marketing  non-fiction  magazine  articles. 

21.  Creative  Writing  (3) 

The  study  and  writing  of  fiction,  short  stories,  especially  with 
a  view  to  developing  each  student's  particular  talent.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  instructor  and  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

22.  Creative  Writing  (3) 

Continuation  of  Journ.  21.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruct- 
or and  Engl.  2,  10,  14,  or  16. 

111.  Problems  in  Advanced  Reportage  (3) 
Intensive  practice  in  the  reporting  of  complex  events. 

112.  Problems  in  Advanced  Reportage  (3) 
Continuation  of  Journ.  111. 

113.  Editing  (3) 

Study  of  and  practice  in  newspaper  desk  work;  headline 
writing,  make-up,  and  typography;  selecting,  editing,  and 
rewriting  news  and  feature  copy;  use  of  reference  works  and 
morgue.  Prerequisite:  Journ.  11. 

115.  Interpretive  Writing  (3) 

Editorial  interpretation  of  current  events;  practice  in  inter- 
pretive writing,  including  editorials.  Prerequisite:  Journ.  12. 

118.  History  of  American  Journalism  (3) 
English  background  of  the  American  newspaper;  develop- 
ment of  press  from  Colonial  days  to  the  present;  influence  of 
newspaper  on  American  life;  contributions  of  outstanding 
journalists. 

120.  Journalism  Proseminar  (3) 

Survey  of  the  press  in  its  relation  to  public  affairs.  Extensive 
research  and  reports.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

121.  Law  of  the  Press  (3) 

Constitutional  development  of  freedom  of  the  press;  rights 
and  responsibilities  of  the  press. 

122.  Law  of  the  Press  II  (3) 

Law  of  and  defenses  in  libel;  privacy;  contempt;  copyright; 
obscenity. 


Division  of  Speech  and  Dramatics 

Associate  Professors 

John  Pearson,  M.F.A.,  Head 
Thoburn  Vail  Barker,  M.A. 

Assistant  Professor 
Marshall  L.  Kaufman,  M.A. 

Instructor 

John  A.  Schnaible,  M.A. 

Speech  Clinic 

For  the  purpose  of  diagnosis  and  treatment  of  speech  defects. 
Individual  instruction  provided  for  students  with  minor  dis- 
turbances of  voice  and  speech,  as  well  as  those  with  more 
serious  handicaps.  Open  to  all  students  in  need  of  corrective 
treatment  and  to  those  desiring  speech  tests.  By  appoint- 
ment. No  credit. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

11-13.  Basic  Production  (1) 

The  aesthetic  process  by  which  plays  are  translated  into 
theatrical  terms  for  the  appreciation  and  enjoyment  of  all 
forms  of  dramatic  arts.  Students  enrolling  for  their  first 
semester  register  for  Speech  11;  for  their  second  semester, 
Speech  12,  etc.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division  head. 

21-23.  Impromptu  Speaking  (1) 

The  organization  and  presentation  of  short  expository 

speeches  and  of  speeches  for  special  occasions.  Content 

drawn  from  contemporary  events.  Students  enrolling  for 

their  first  semester  register  for  Speech  21;  for  their  second 

semester,  Speech  22,  etc.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division 

head. 

30.  Fundamentals  of  Speech  (3) 

A  foundation  course  designed  to  develop  knowledge  of  the 
basic  principles  of  speech  and  ability  to  speak  effectively  on 
the  platform. 

31.  Business  and  Professional  Speaking  (3) 
Development  of  speech  for  business  and  professional  prob- 
lems: technique  of  expository  speaking;  use  of  visual 
graphics;  persuasive  speaking  applied  to  the  emotional  or 
analytical  approach  in  selling;  methods  of  interviewing;  tech- 
niques of  conference.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division  head. 

32.  Conference  and  Discussion  (3) 

The  technique  of  investigation,  analysis,  evidence,  inference, 
briefmaking,  and  refutation  in  oral  argument;  participation  in 
the  various  forms  of  discussion— conference  table,  panel,  and 
symposium— and  in  various  types  of  debate— conventional, 
cross-examination,  and  direct  clash.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
division  head. 


English     147 


33.  P. it li.iiiHiit.il v  Procedure  (1) 

Study  .uid  drill  in  modern  rules  .uul  methods  ot  conducting 

organized  group-deliberation. 

34-.lt..  Debate  (1) 

A  study  of  the  principles  and  techhiques  ot  debate,  analysis, 
evidence,  reasoning,  refutation,  briefing,  speech  composition, 
and  delivery  skills.  Members  required  to  participate  in  the 
activities  of  the  Debate  Society.  Students  enrolling  for  their 
first  semester  register  for  Speech  34;  for  their  second  semes- 
ter. Speech  35,  etc.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  head  ot  the 
division. 

41.  Basic  Techniques  of  Acting  (3) 

Techniques  of  the  twentieth-century  actor.  Vocal  produc- 
tion, stage  movement,  improvisational  acting,  characteriza- 
tion. Some  laboratory  projects  in  special  areas.  Some  scene 
study. 

42.  Problems  in  Acting  (3) 

Solving  the  problems  of  the  actor  from  the  earliest  times  to 
the  present.  Some  scene  study;  coordinating  the  craft  of 
acting  in  all  periods  with  the  basic  precepts  of  honesty  in 
performance.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division  head  or 
Speech  41. 

45.  Basic  Design  and  Technical  Theatre  (3) 

Study  and  practice  of  design  concepts  for  the  theatre  design- 
er. Includes  history  of  theatre  architecture. 

46.  Lighting  (3) 

Emphasis  on  the  elements  of  creativity  and  their  translation 
into  the  practice  of  stage  lighting.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
division  head  or  Speech  45. 

47.  Oral  Interpretation  (3) 

The  analysis  and  oral  presentation  of  various  types  of  litera- 
ture. Consideration  of  sound  values,  rhythm,  and  imagery. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  division  head. 


1  I  I.  Basil   Directing  (3) 

Survey  of  theatrical  direction.  Study  of  the  emergence  of  the 
director.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division  head  or  Speech  11. 

For  Advanced  ( 'tulvrgraduales  and  Graduates 

2  11.  Phonetics  (3) 

Practice  in  the  use  of  the  international  phonetic  alphabet. 
Consideration  of  the  standard  speech  characteristics  of  the 
three  major  American  regional  dialects.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  division  head. 

260.  Speech  for  the  Teacher  (3) 

An  orientation  course  in  the  field  of  speech  and  dramatics  for 

those  engaged  in  classroom  teaching. 

301.  History  of  the  Theatre  (3) 

The  history  of  the  theatre  in  western  Europe  from  ancient 
Greece  to  the  Renaissance.  Emphasis  on  audiences,  theatrical 
structures,  production  methods,  actors  and  acting  styles. 
Some  plays  included,  but  whenever  possible,  students  who 
have  not  had  a  course  in  history  of  the  drama  should  sched- 
ule English  4  concurrently.  Offered  in  alternate  years. 

302.  History  of  the  Theatre  (3) 

Continuation  of  Speech  301  from  the  seventeenth  to  the 
twentieth  century.  Students  who  have  not  had  a  course  in 
history  of  the  drama  should  schedule  English  5  concurrently 
when  possible.  Offered  in  alternate  years. 

343.  Basic  Movement  for  the  Stage  (3) 

Physical  skills  for  actors.  Includes  basic  choreography,  stage- 
fighting  and  fight-choreography,  basic  pantomime,  period 
and  modern  dances.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division  head. 

346.  The  Demagogue  (3) 

Demagoguery  from  classical  times  to  the  present.  The  role  of 
the  demagogue  in  creating  opinion.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
division  head. 


48.  Persuasion  (3) 

Study  of  and  practice  in  persuasive  techniques  in  salesman- 
ship, political  speaking,  law  and  advertising.  The  ethical  im- 
plications of  persuasion.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  division 
head. 

61.  Theatre  Production  (3) 

The  practical  technique  and  production  of  plays;  acting, 
stage-lighting,  scenic  design  and  execution,  and  student 
direction  of  plays.  Each  member  must  write  either  an  original 
one-act  play  or  a  thesis  upon  any  practical  problems  of  the 
modern  theatre. 

62.  Theatre  Production  (3) 

Continuation  of  Speech  61.  Prerequisite:  Speech  61. 


148       English 


Environmental  Sciences  & 
Resource  Management 


J.  Donald  Ryan,  Ph.D.,  Chairman  of  Geological  Sciences  and 
Director  of  Environmental  Sciences  &  Resource  Management 
Program 

Society's  increasing  demands  for  energy,  food,  recreational 
opportunities,  and  living  space  have  altered  and  will  continue 
to  alter  the  environment  of  the  earth.  The  need  for  personnel 
trained  to  evaluate  proposed  alterations  and  repair  existing 
deleterious  or  critical  situations  can  only  be  met  by  an  inter- 
disciplinary approach. 

This  is  an  interdepartmental  major  fostering  basic  prepara- 
tion for  advanced  study  and/or  an  immediate  career  in  envi- 
ronmental management  and  conservation.  The  backgrounds 
of  fundamental  mathematics  and  science  required  to  under- 
stand the  complex  of  man  and  his  environment  is  established 
early  within  this  major,  and  in  the  later  phases  latitude  is 
available  for  courses  of  study  leading  to  an  understanding  of 
the  various  aspects  of  the  conflicts  of  society.  Basic  principles 
of  ecology  are  used  as  the  core  of  the  program. 

Individual  programs  can  be  arranged  to  provide  either  a 
major  concentration  on  a  specific  phase  of  environmental 
problems,  i.e.,  water  pollution,  air  pollution,  solid  waste  dis- 
posal, or  land  planning.  Programs  can  be  developed  to  create 
a  broad  awareness  and  knowledge  of  the  total  environment. 
Student  research  into  specific  problems  involving  laboratory, 
field,  or  library  research  is  an  integral  part  of  the  recommend- 
ed program. 

Graduates  of  this  major  can  expect  to  take  part  in  plan- 
ning, education,  research  and  coordination  of  environmental 
programs  for  all  levels  of  government,  schools,  and  industry. 
As  graduate  study  is  advisable  for  students  contemplating 
some  of  these  career  areas,  the  program  provides  thorough 
preparation  for  further  study  in  specific  areas  of  environmen- 
tal sciences. 

Program  for  Bachelor  of  Science  Degree 

College  and  University  Requirements  (SO  credit  hours) 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Engl  2,  10,  14,  or  16     Composition  and  Literature  (3) 
Electives  (39) 

Note:  Elective  courses  are  non-professional  courses  designed 
to  give  the  student  a  broad  understanding  in  traditional  and 
contemporary  fields  of  thought  outside  of  natural  science 
and  mathematics.  The  courses  are  chosen  by  the  student.  The 
elective  program  shall  include  a  large  number  of  courses 
broadly  distributed  among  the  various  areas  of  the  humani- 
ties and  the  social  sciences. 


Required  Major  Courses  (66  credit  hours) 

Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Math  22  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Physll  Introductory  Physics  1  (4) 

Phys  12  Introductory  Physics  Lab  I  (1) 

Chem  21  Introductory  Chemical  Principles  (4) 

Chem  22  Chemical  Principles  Lab  (1) 

Chem  39  Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  51  Organic  Chemistry  (1) 

Chem  53  Organic  Chemistry  Lab  (1) 

Geol  1  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Geol  211  Environmental  Planning  (3) 

Geol  281  Geological  Research  (3) 

Biol  21  Principles  of  Biology  (3) 

Biol  22  Introduction  to  Biology  Lab  (1) 

Biol  35  Microbiology  (3) 

Biol  361  Sanitary  Microbiology  (3) 

Biol  306  Ecology  (3) 

CE  271  Environmental  Engineering  II  (3) 

ChE  52  Transport  Phenomena  (4) 

Engl  142  Technical  Writing  (3)  (or  equivalent) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Plus  four  courses  from  the  following  list  (12 

credit  hours): 

Biol  303  Advanced  Invertebrate  Zoology  (3) 

Biol  317  (Geol.  317)  Evolution  (3) 

ChE  320  Waste  Water  Control  (3) 

ChE  321  Fundamentals  of  Air  Pollution  (3) 

CE  121  Mechanics  of  Fluids  (3) 

CE  170  Sanitary  Engineering  I  (3) 

CE  326  Ground  Water  Hydrology  (3) 

CE  325  Hydrology  (3) 

CE  332  Ocean  Engineering  (3) 

CE  371  Environmental  Health  Engineering  (3) 

CE  162  Environmental  Engineering  (3) 

CE  222  Hydraulic  Engineering  (3) 

Eco311  Economics  of  Resource  Use  (3) 

Geol  313  Sedimentology  (3) 

Geol  363  Introduction  to  Oceanography  (3) 

Geol  212  Geomorphology  and  Surficial  Geology  (3) 

Govt  360  Public  Administration  (3) 

Spch  30  Fundamentals  of  Speech  (3) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  191  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

Mech  102  Dynamics  (3) 

Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 

Freshman  Year,  First  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Chem  21,  22  Introductory  Chemical  Principles  &  Lab  (5) 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 
Electives  (3) 


Environmental  Sciences  and  Resource  Management     149 


Freshman  Yr.ir.  Second  Sent*  dii  hours 

Math  An.iKti.  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Phys  11, 12  Introductory  Physics  I  &  Lab  (5) 

l  ngl  2,  10,  14,  or  1(>     Composition  and  I  iterature  (3) 
Elcctivcs  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  i  /(>  credit  hours) 

Math   '  i  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (-1) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Geol  1  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Chcm  51,  53  Organic  Chemistry  &  Lab  (4) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Biol  21,  22  Principles  of  Biology  &  Lab  (4) 

Chem  39  Analytic  Chemistry  (3) 

Electives  (9) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Geol  211  Environmental  Planning  (3) 

Biol  361  Sanitary  Microbiology  (3) 

Engl  142  Technical  Writing  (or  equivalent)  (3) 

Electives  (6) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

Biol  306  Ecology  (3) 

Biol  35  Microbiology  (3) 

ChE  52  Transport  Phenomena  (4) 

Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 


Fine  Arts 


CE  271 


Environmental  Engineering  II  (3) 
Electives  12 


Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Geol  281  Geological  Research  (3) 

Electives  12 


Professors 

Richard  J.  Redd,  M.F.A.,  Chairman 

Associate  Protcssor 

Carlos  J.  Alvare,  M.  Arch.,  M.C.P. 

Assistant  Professors 

Leon  N.  Hicks,  Jr.,M.F.A. 
Donald  D.  Schneider,  Ph.D. 


The  Department  of  Fine  Arts  offers  three  major  programs 
designed  to  develop  the  creative  potential  of  the  individual 
both  on  a  personal  and  social  level  and  to  provide  a  founda- 
tion for  graduate  studies  in  fine  arts. 

The  program  for  general  art  offers  the  student  experience 
in  drawing,  painting,  printmaking  and  sculpture  which  will 
nurture  creative  expression  and  growth  as  the  artistic  skills 
develop. 

The  program  in  pre-architecture  focuses  on  urban  con- 
cerns, both  functional  and  aesthetic  which  deal  with  prob- 
lems of  man,  society  and  space.  At  least  two  years  additional 
study  beyond  the  B.A.  at  Lehigh  are  necessary  to  complete 
an  architectural  program. 

The  art  history  program  gives  the  student  a  foundation  in 
the  evolution  of  European  art  from  ancient  to  modern  times 
and  in  designed  for  those  who  wish  to  pursue  this  area  of  the 
humanities  as  a  professional  art  historian. 

The  resources  of  a  growing  Lehigh  University  art  collec- 
tion, scheduled  art  exhibitions,  field  work  and  contact  with 
area  architects  and  planners,  extend  the  art  programs  into 
campus  and  community.  Several  major  museums  within  easy 
travelling  distance  facilitate  the  first-hand  study  of  art. 

An  intercollegiate  exchange  with  the  art  department  of 
Moravian  College  permits  fine  arts  majors  to  take  courses 
offered  on  both  campus.  Cross-listed  courses  are  indicated. 

General  Art  Major  (39  credit  hours) 

Required  Preliminary  Courses  (12  credit  hours) 

FA  5  Fundamentals  of  Art  (3) 

FA  10  Color  and  Design  (3) 

FA  11  Drawing  and  Graphics  (3) 

FA  23  Life  Drawing  (3) 


150     Fine  Arts 


Required  Major  Courses  (27  credit  hours) 

FA  220  20th  Century  Art  (3) 

Art  History  Any  two  courses  (6) 

Art  Studio  Six  courses,  one  at  the  advanced  level  (18) 

Pre- Architecture  Major  (52  credit  hours  required) 

Required  Preliminary  Courses  (22  credit  hours) 


Math  21 
Math  22 
Phys  11 
Phys  12 
FA  3,4 
FA  10,  11, 


23 


Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Introductory  Physics  (4) 

Introductory  Physics  Lab  (1) 

History  of  Architecture  (6) 

One  studio  course  in  drawing  or  design  (3) 


Required  Major  Courses  (30  credit  hours) 

Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

Mech  11  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

CE  106  Structural  Design  (3) 

CE  159,  160         May  be  substituted  in  some  programs  (6) 

FA  43  Environmental  Design  (3) 

FA  143  Environmental  Planning  and  Project  (3) 

FA  144  Intermediate  Environmental  Design  (3) 

FA  244  Architectural  Design  (6) 

FA  220  20th  Century  Art  (3) 

FA  151  History  of  Urban  Design  (3) 

Art  History  Major  (36  credit  hours  required) 

Required  Preliminary  Course 

FA  5  Fundamentals  of  Art  (3) 

Required  Major  Courses 

One  of  the  following: 
Color  and  Design  (3) 
Drawing  and  Graphics  (3) 
Life  Drawing  (3) 
Ceramics  I  (Moravian)  (3) 

One  of  the  following: 
Archaeology  of  the  Near  East  (3) 
Greek  Archaeology  (3) 
Archaeology  of  Italy  (3) 
Introduction  to  Anthropology  (3) 

Nine  of  the  following,  at  least  four  at  the 

200-level  for  27  credit  hours: 

History  of  Architecture  I  (3) 

History  of  Architecture  II  (3) 

Ancient  Art  (Moravian)  (3) 

Medieval  Art  (Moravian)  (3) 

Italian  Renaissance  Art  (3) 

Baroque  and  Rococo  Art  (3) 

20th  Century  Architecture  (3) 

19th  Century  Painting  (3) 


FA  10 

FA  11 

FA  23 

Art  75 

Gk201 

Gk202 

Lat  203 

SR31 

FA  3 
FA  4 
Art  105 
Art  110 
FA  115 
FA  117 
FA  200 
FA  219 


FA  220  20th  Century  Art  (3) 

FA  271  Readings  (3) 

Collateral  courses  are  recommended,  and  in  some  instances 
may  be  substituted  for  the  above  in  civil  engineering,  geolo- 
gy, government  and  social  relations.  For  examples:  S.R.  368; 
CE.  13;  CE.  150;  Govt.  357;Geol.  211. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

3.  History  of  Architecture  I  (3) 

A  study  of  man's  expression  through  architecture  from  the 
prehistoric  through  the  Romanesque  period.  Conditioning 
influences,  evolution  of  styles,  the  development  of  organic 
and  inorganic  types,  in  relation  to  structural  purposes,  and 
social  expression. 

4.  History  of  Architecture  II  (3) 

Factors  determining  the  development  and  spread  of  Gothic, 
Renaissance,  and  succeeding  styles,  the  effects  of  discovery 
and  exploration,  the  rise  of  romantic,  classic,  functional, 
international,  and  contemporary  movements  are  examined  as 
epochal  expression.  Principles  of  appreciation  and  aesthetic 
character  in  the  scientific  age. 

5.  Fundamentals  of  Art  (3) 

An  introduction  to  principles  of  visual  expression.  Examples 
of  art  from  various  periods  are  examined  in  relation  to  their 
historical  and  cultural  context,  to  their  plastic  organization 
and  their  significance  as  reflection  of  human  experience. 

10.  Color  and  Design  (3) 

Basic  color  theory,  painting  practice.  Principles  of  design  and 
composition  in  two  and  three  dimensional  media.  Individual 
projects  are  directed  toward  developing  creative  expression. 
Studio. 

11.  Drawing  and  Graphics  (3) 

Methods,  media  and  concepts  of  drawing.  Practice  in  repre- 
senting 3-dimensional  form.  First  principles  in  printmaking. 
Studio. 

23.  Life  Drawing  (3) 

Drawing  from  the  life  model  as  the  fundamental  experience 

for  acquiring  control  of  hand  and  eye  essential  to  good 

draftsmanship.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  the 

department. 

33.  Painting  (3) 

An  introduction  to  painting  in  oil,  acrylic  or  watercolor 
oriented  toward  developing  individual  creative  expression 
combined  with  an  understanding  of  the  physical  nature  of 
the  materials.  Studio  prerequisite:  F.A.  10  or  11,  or  consent 
of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 


Fine  Arts      151 


37.  Printmaking  (3) 

Independent  practice  in  graphic  techniques.  Emphasis  on 

intaglio,  with  introductory  studies  ol  .ind  combination  of 

two  .iddiiion.il  methods  ol  printmaking.  Prerequisite:  F.A. 

II. 

I  >.  Environmental  Design  (3) 

Basic  architectural  design.  Function,  selection  and  organiza- 
tion of  spaces.  Study  of  light ,  color  and  texture.  Emphasis  on 
.  reative  concepts  in  consideration  of  total  environment. 
Critiques  nid  open  juries.  Prerequisite:  engineering  or  archi- 
tectural drawing;  or  field  experience;  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

75.  Ceramics  I  (3) 

Elementary  problems  in  the  basic  techniques  of  hand-built 

and  wheel-thrown  pottery.  Moravian  College  campus. 


143.  Environmental  Planning  and  Project  (3) 

I  'otu  e nl rated  I'livininnn'iu.il  design  pn>iiH  Is.  Individual  anil 
Irani  planning.  Investigatory  and  cumulation  procedures  and 
problems.  Content  tailored  to  contemporary  needs  and  stu- 
dent requirements— conferences,  critiques.  Closed  juries.  For 
majors  only.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

144.  Intermediate  Environmental  Design  (3) 

More  advanced  study  in  architecture  and  site  design.  Increase 
in  scope  and  complexity  of  projects.  Critiques  and  open 
juries.  Prerequisite:  F.A.  43  or  consent  of  instructor. 

145.  Structure  in  Architecture  (3) 

Introduction  to  structural  forms  and  systems;  directed 
toward  an  understanding  of  various  structural  elements. 
Vocabulary  of  structural  terms.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the 
instructor  or  Mech.  1. 


105.  Ancient  Art  (3) 

The  art  of  Egypt,  Mesopotamia,  Greece,  Etruria  and  Rome. 

Moravian  College  campus. 

110.  Medieval  Art  (3) 

The  art  of  the  periods  of  Early  Christian,  Byzantine,  Carolin- 

gian,  Romanesque,  and  Gothic.  Moravian  College  campus. 


151.  History  of  Urban  Design  (3) 

The  historical  development  of  urban  design  in  the  evolution 
of  the  city.  City  planning  theories.  Special  emphasis  will  be 
given  to  the  social  and  economic  parameters  which  determine 
physical  design.  Study  of  the  methods  and  practices  used  in 
the  United  States  today.  Seminar  course.  Prerequisite:  F.A. 
43  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  department. 


115.  Italian  Renaissance  Art  (3) 

Painting  and  sculpture  are  examined  as  the  outgrowth  of 
conditions  in  Italy  during  the  fourteenth,  fifteenth,  and  six- 
teenth centuries:  the  influence  of  medieval  thought  and  tradi- 
tion, the  awakening  interest  in  nature,  the  effect  of  antiquity, 
especially  the  stimulus  it  gave  to  the  individual  effort. 

117.  Baroque  and  Rococo  Art  (3) 
The  artistic  environment  of  Europe  from  the  Counter- 
Reformation  to  the  French  Revolution  as  illuminated  by 
examples  of  painting,  sculpture  and  architecture  provides 
foundations  for  better  comprehension  of  artistic  principles. 
Historical,  aesthetic  and  technical  aspects  of  the  art  as  basis 
for  appreciation. 

123.  Advanced  Life  Drawing  (3) 

An  advanced  course  in  drawing  from  the  live  model.  Prerequi- 
site: F.A.  23.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

133.  Intermediate  Painting  (3) 

Problems  in  oil,  watercolor,  acrylic  and  mixed  media.  Prere- 
quisite: F.A.  33.  Lehigh  and  Moravian  College  campuses. 

137.  Intermediate  Printmaking  (3) 

Studies  of  any  combination  of  two  methods  of  printmaking, 
stressing  experimentation  and  creative  application  of  the 
materials  and  tools  of  graphics.  Prerequisite:  F.A.  37.  Lehigh 
and  Moravian  College  campuses. 


152.  Physical  Planning  and  Design  (3) 
Solution  of  a  physical  planning  problem  with  special  em- 
phasis on  the  relationship  between  the  design  functions  and 
the  social,  economic  and  political  programs  under  which  the 
plan  will  develop.  Studio  course.  Prerequisite:  F.A.  151. 

175.  Ceramics  II  (3) 

Problems  in  wheel-throwing  construction  and  decoration. 
Emphasis  on  creative  expression  and  experimentation.  Prere- 
quisite: F.A.  75.  Moravian  College  campus. 

176.  Ceramics  III  (3) 

Individual  problems  in  thrown  and  hand-built  pottery.  May 
be  repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite:  F.A.  175.  Moravian 
College  campus. 

200.  20th  Century  Architecture  (3) 

History  and  theory  of  modern  architecture  from  late  19th 
century  antecedents.  Wright,  LeCorbusier,  and  Mies  van  der 
Rohe,  and  major  20th  century  schools  of  architectural  de- 
sign. 

213.  Sculpture  II  (3) 

Individual  problems  in  a  variety  of  three  dimensional  media. 
May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Moravian  College  campus. 

219.  19th  Century  Painting  (3) 

From  Neoclassicism  through  the  sequential  movements  of 
Romanticism,  Naturalism,  Impressionism   and  Post- 
Impressionism  in  the  art  of  Europe  and  the  U.S. 


152     Fine  Arts 


220.  20th  Century  Art  (3) 

Sequential  movements  in  contemporary  painting  and  sculp- 
ture. Their  interrelations  as  cultural  expression.  Museum  re- 
ports and  critical  interpretation. 

233.  Advanced  Painting  (3) 

Provides  creative  work  in  depth  in  a  variety  of  painting 

media.  Prerequisite:  F.A.  133  or  consent  of  chairman.  May 

be  repeated  for  credit.  Lehigh  and  Moravian  College 

campuses. 

237.  Advanced  Printmaking  (3) 

Intaglio  and  one  additional  method  of  printmaking.  Emphasis 
on  experimentation  and  application  of  mixed  media  in 
graphics.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chairman  or 
F.A.  137.  Lehigh  and  Moravian  College  campuses.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit. 

244.  Architectural  Design  (1-3) 

Individual  study,  project  or  other  assignment  for  advanced 

students  or  majors  capable  of  progress  beyond  general  course 

content  or  requirement.  Content  organized  by  intructor  and 

chairman  of  department.  Conferences  and  critiques.  May  be 

repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 

department. 

271.  Readings  (3) 

Readings  in  the  visual  arts  for  students  who  wish  to  pursue 
special  interests  in  art  history,  art  criticism  or  aesthetics  not 
covered  by  the  regular  course  offerings.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  the  department  chairman. 

273.  Special  Topics  in  Studio  Practice  (1-4) 
Individually  directed  projects  for  advanced  students  capable 
of  undertaking  independent  creative  work  in  applied  art. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  the  department. 


Five-Year  Programs 


Other  program  combinations  leading  to  two  degrees  can  be 
found  under  Arts-Engineering  sequences  or  may  be  developed 
by  consulting  Graduate  School  requirements  and  the  chair- 
man of  the  appropriate  department. 

Electrical  Engineering  and  Engineering  Physics 

This  curriculum  is  particularly  well  suited  for  students  seek- 
ing thorough  preparation  in  the  field  of  physical  electronics. 
The  program  adds  to  the  basic  electrical  engineering  curri- 
culum a  sequence  of  upper-level  undergraduate  physics 
courses. 

The  E.E.  degree  is  conferred  on  the  completion  of  the 
fourth  year,  and  the  E.P.  degree  at  the  end  of  the  fifth  year. 

Freshman  Year  (See  page  45) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (1 6  credit  hours) 

EE  11  Introduction  to  Computer  Engineering  (3) 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  &  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

Phys  22  Introductory  Physics  Lab  II  (1) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (1  7  credit  hours) 

EE  20  Introduction  to  Circuit  Theory  (4) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Phys  31  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Mech  103  Principles  of  Mechanics  (4) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

junior  Year,  First  Semester  (14-17  credit  hours) 

EE  104  Linear  Systems  &  Signals  (4) 

EE  105  Electronic  Circuits  (4) 

Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

or 
Math  309  Theory  of  Probability  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

EE  103  Physical  Electronics  (3) 

EE  106  Electromechanics  &  Machines  (3) 

EE  231  Electric  &  Magnetic  Fields  (3) 

or 
Phys  212  Electricity  and  Magnetism  I  (3) 

EE  142  Junior  Lab  (2) 

Approved  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (3) 


Five-  Year  Programs      1 53 


Slimmer 

IT  LOO 


Industrial  Employmcnl 


Senioi  Year,  First  Semester  ( 15-1$  credit  hours 

EE  1 1  Proscminar  (1) 

BE  15]  Senior  Lab  I  (2) 

EE  245  Electromagnetic  Theory  (3) 

or 

Tins  213  Electricity  .ind  Magnetism  II  (3) 

Phys  215  Particles  &  Fields  I  (3) 

EE  Departmental  Electives  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  ( IS  credit  hours) 

Phys  21  6  Particles  &  Fields  II  (3) 

EE  Departmental  Electives  (9) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (3) 

Fifth  Year,  First  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Phys  192  Advanced  Lab  (2) 

Phys  340  Heat,  Thermodynamics  &  Pyrometry  (3) 

Phys  362  Atomic  and  Molecular  Structure  (3) 

Math  322  Methods  of  Applied  Analysis  I  (3) 

Approved  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (3) 

Fifth  Year,  Second  Semester  (15  credit  hours) 

Phys  254  Optics  Lab  (2) 

Phys  363  Physics  of  Solids  (3) 

Phys  171  Proseminar  (1) 

Approved  Elective  (3) 

Electives  (6) 

Note:  Approved  electives  are  two  courses  selected  from  Phys. 
364,  365,  369;  Mech.  302;  and  Met.  362. 

Industrial  Engineering  and  Business 

Students  who  desire  to  pursue  both  industrial  engineering 
and  business  administration  may  complete  the  required  work 
for  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  science  in  industrial  engineering 
by  the  end  of  the  fourth  year  and  that  required  for  the 
degree  of  bachelor  of  science  in  business  and  economics  by 
the  end  of  the  fifth  year.  The  first  four  years  are  essentially 
the  standard  industrial  engineering  curriculum. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  fifth  year  the  student  transfers  to 
a  curriculum  in  business  and  economics  and  is  required  to 
complete  thirty-three  semester  hours  by  selecting  a  standard 
major  in  the  College  of  Business  and  Economics,  completing 
the  15  to  18  credit  hours  required  for  the  major.  The  balance 
of  his  program  in  the  fifth  year  will  be  selected  in  consulta- 
tion with  his  advisor  from  those  college  core  requirements 
which  he  has  not  already  taken  for  the  B.S.  in  Industrial  En- 
gineering. 


/  reshman  1  eai  ,  Si  e  page  -15) 

N,  iplh  >m<  're  Year  (Same  as  Industrial  Engineering ) 

Junior  )'iar.  First  Semester  ( 1 8  credit  hours) 

IE  101  Fundamentals  of  Manufacturing  Engineering 

(4) 
II     'ii  •  Engineering  Statistics  (3) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 
Eco  Any  Course  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (18  credit  hours) 

IE  102  Work  Systems  (3) 

IE  206  Operation  Research  Techniques  (4) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (6) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 
Eco  335  Manpower  Economics  (3) 

Those  students  who  will  major  in  accounting  in  the  fifth  year 
will  take  Acctg.  51,  52,  215,  and  one  300-level  Accounting 
course  (excluding  Acctg.  390,  Internship)  in  their  junior  and 
senior  years  instead  of  Acctg.  108,  Mkt.  211,  Fin.  225,  and 
Eco.  335. 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (18  credit  hours) 

Acctg  108  Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 

IE  Electives  (6) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 
Engl  Elective  (3) 

Mkt  211  The  American  Marketing  System  (3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (18  credit  hours) 

IE  154  Project  (3) 

IE  Electives  (9) 

Engl  Elective  (3) 

Fin  225  Business  Finance  (3) 

Majors  in  personnel  and  industrial  relations  must  pursue  the 
following  program  for  the  fifth  year: 

Required  Courses 

Fifth  Year,  First  Semester  (9  credit  hours) 

Law  101  Business  Law  (3) 

Eco  129  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

Psych  201  Industrial  Psychology  (3) 

Fifth  Year,  Second  Semester  (12  credit  hours) 

Eco  206  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  338  Labor  Market  Institutions  (3) 

SR11  Sociology  (3) 

Eco  346  Business  Cycles  (3) 


154     Five-Y 'ear  Programs 


and  twelve  credit  hours  from  the  following: 

Fin  323  Investments  (3) 

Fin  353  Public  Finance:  Federal  (3) 

Fin  340  International  Finance  (3) 

Eco  347  National  Income  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  371  Readings  in  Economics  (3) 

Eco  352  Advanced  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Law  102  Business  Law  (3) 

Govt  360  Public  Administration  (3) 

Eco  372  Readings  in  Economics  (3) 

IE  334  Organizational  Planning  and  Control  (3) 

Mgt  321  Organization  Behavior  (3) 

SR  65  Contemporary  Problems  in  Society  (3) 

Engineering-M.B.A.  Program 

This  program  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  competent 
students  in  any  of  the  engineering  curricula  who  wish  to  add 
to  their  engineering  studies  training  in  business  management 
at  an  advanced  level. 

The  time  involved  is  five  years,  but  a  summer  session 
would  be  necessary  to  attain  both  a  bachelor's  degree  in  engi- 
neering and  a  master's  degree  in  business  administration  or 
management  science.  In  addition  to  a  course  in  economics, 
which  is  required  of  all  engineering  undergraduates,  twenty- 
one  to  thirty  hours  of  basic  business  courses  are  necessary  to 
meet  the  background  requirements  for  the  M.B.A.  degree.  If 
as  much  as  eighteen  hours  of  such  courses  can  be  rostered  in 
the  student's  engineering  curriculum,  the  remaining  twelve 
hours  can  be  obtained  in  one  summer.  Otherwise,  attendance 
at  an  additional  summer  session  would  be  necessary.  Candi- 
dates for  each  program  will  be  required  to  take  the  Admis- 
sion Test  for  Graduate  Study  in  Business,  or  GRE  exam. 

For  background  courses  required  for  the  M.B.A.,  engi- 
neering students  should  see  graduate  study  in  business  and 
economics,  and  consult  with  assistant  dean  ot  the  college, 
Max  D.  Snider. 

Arts-M.B.A.  Program 

This  program  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  students  in  the 
College  of  Arts  and  Science  who  wish  to  add  to  their  arts 
studies  training  in  business  management  at  an  advanced  level. 

The  time  involved  in  the  program  is  five  years,  but  a  cer- 
tain amount  of  summer  session  work  may  be  necessary  for 
majors  in  the  sciences  to  attain  both  a  B.A.  and  a  master's 
degree  in  business  administration  within  that  period.  In  addi- 
tion to  one  course  in  economics,  which  can  be  counted  as 
part  of  the  social  science  distribution  requirements,  thirty 
hours  of  basic  business  courses  are  needed  to  meet  the  back- 
ground requirements.  Thirty  hours  of  requirements  for  the 
M.B.A.  degree  must  also  be  completed. 

For  background  courses  for  the  M.B.A.,  students  should 
see  graduate  study  in  business  in  economics,  and  consult  with 
assistant  dean  of  the  college,  Max  D.  Snider.  Many  of  the 
background  courses  can  be  rostered  in  the  student's  arts 
curriculum. 


B.S.  Engineering— M.S.  Materials 

A  special  program  leading  to  an  M.S.  degree  in  materials  is 
offered  for  engineering  graduates  who  complete  prerequisite 
courses  in  physical  chemistry,  metallurgy,  mechanics,  etc. 
Careful  selection  of  technical  electives  by  interested  Lehigh 
undergraduate  students  can  provide  for  the  required  prerequi- 
site courses  in  typical  engineering  B.S.  degree  programs;  alter- 
nately, for  other  students,  the  prerequisite  courses  are  taken 
before  proceeding  with  the  program.  This  program  is  intend- 
ed to  give  in-depth  training  in  one  of  the  normal  engineering 
disciplines  during  four  years,  combined  with  an  understand- 
ing of  materials  behavior  in  graduate  study  in  approximately 
15  months.  While  intended  primarily  as  a  terminal  degree  for 
those  entering  industry,  the  M.S.  in  materials  provides  suffi- 
cient flexibility  to  permit  those  interested  in  a  career  in 
materials  research  to  continue  for  a  Ph.D.  degree. 

A  schedule  of  prerequisite  courses  together  with  recom- 
mended electives  and  a  typical  graduate  program  for 
mechanical  engineers  is  given  below.  Graduate  programs  for 
other  engineering  disciplines  can  be  developed  by  consulta- 
tion with  the  appropriate  department  advisor  and  the 
director  of  the  Materials  Research  Center. 

Prerequisite  Courses 

Science  Orientation  (21  credit  hours) 

Met  91  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Met  210  Metallurgical  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Met  361  Physics  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  362  Structure  and  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 

Electives  (6) 

Engineering  Orientation  (21  credit  hours) 

Met  63  Engineering  Materials  and  Processes  (3) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Met  207  Electronic  &  Crystal  Structure  (3) 

Met  208  Phase  Diagrams  &  Transformations  (3) 

Met  210  Metallurgical  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Met  218  Mechanical  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 
Electives  (3) 

Note:  An  alternative  to  Chem.  196  is  Chem.  91  and  Chem. 
190. 

Recommended  Electives  for  Preparatory  Program 

Structure  of  Solids  Group 

Met  315  Introduction  to  Physical  Ceramics  (3) 

Met  316  Physical  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  317  Imperfections  in  Crystals  (3) 

Met  333  X-ray  Methods  (3) 

Met  334  Electron  Metallography  (3) 

Met  343  Physical  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Geol  333  Crystallography  (3) 

Phys  362  Atomic  and  Molecular  Structure  (3) 


Five-  Year  Programs      1 55 


Phys  163  Physics  ol  Solid 

Math  Approved  Elective  (3) 

Physical  Metallurgy  Group 

Structure  A  Bchavioi  ol  Materials  (3) 
Met  31 5  Introduction  to  Physical  Ceramics 

II  (.  Physical  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 

Mel   I]  Imperfections  in  Crystals  (3) 

''      113  Materials  Fabrication  (3) 

Mel   133  X-ray  Methods  (3) 

Met  3  )  I  Electron  Metallography  (3) 

Math  Approved  Elei  th 

Met  358  Selection  of  Materials  (3) 

Mechanics  &  Mechanical  Behavior  Group 

ME  166  Procedures  for  Mechanical  Design  (2) 

Mech  313  Fracture  Mechanics  (3) 

Met  313  Materials  Fabrication  (3) 

Met  317  Imperfections  in  Crystals  (3) 

Math  Approved  Elective  (3) 

Chemical  Behavior  Group 

Met  304  Extractive  Metallurgy  1  (4) 

Met  305  Extractive  Metallurgy  II  (3) 

Met  312  Fundamentals  of  Corrosion  (3) 

Chem  381  Radiation  and  Structure  (4) 

Chem  382  Structure,  Electrochemistry  cV  Kinetics  (3) 

ChE  392  Introduction  to  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Chem  397  Colloids  and  Surface  Chemistry  (3) 

Math  Approved  Elective 

Typical  M.S.  Program  in  Materials 
Mechanical  Engineering  Graduate 

Fifth  Year,  First  Semester 

Met  333  X-ray  Methods  (3) 

Met  408  Transformations  (3) 

Met  315  Physical  Ceramics  (3) 

Met  418  Deformation  and  Fracture  (3) 

or 

Approved  Technical  Elective  (3) 

Materials  Research  (3) 


Fifth  Year,  Second  Semester 

Met  412  Electric  &  Magnetic  Properties  of  Materials 

(3) 
Met  343  Physical  Polymer  Sicence  (3) 

Approved  Technical  Elective  (3) 
ME  444  Experimental  Stress  Analysis  (3) 

or 

Approved  Technical  Elective  (3) 

Materials  Research  (3) 


I  .mis.  ( Mii-rings  in  Materials 

In  addition  to  the  courses  noted  in  the  list  of  recommended 

el  i- 1  I IV!".  above,  a  ii  1 1  lube  l    i.l  i.lliel   (;i  .ulu.i  I •..■•,  con- 

.  ei  neil  with  the  behavior  ol  materials  are  taught  in  the  engi- 
neering and  science  departments.  Pertinent  courses  are  listed 
below  by  department,  number  and  title,  and  credit  hours. 
Descriptions  of  these  courses  may  be  found  in  the  respective 
departmental  listings  in  this  catalog. 

ChE  360  Nuclear  Reactor  Engineering  (4) 

ChE  394  Organic  Polymer  Science  (3) 

ChE  470  Cryogenic  Engineering  (3) 

ChE  401  Chemical  Engineering  Thermodynamics  (3) 

ChE  413  Catalysis  (3) 

ChE  428  Rheology  (3) 

ChE  492  Topics  in  Polymer  Science  (3) 

Chem  443  Solid  State  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  497  Topics  in  Colloid  and  Surface  Chemistry  (3) 

CE  459  Advanced  Topics  in  Plastic  Theory  (3) 

Geol  336  Mineral  Phase  Relations  (3) 

Geol  435  Advanced  Mineralogy  (3) 

IE  344  Metal  Cutting  Theory  (3) 

ME  444  Experimental  Stress  Analysis  in  Design  (3) 

Mech  406  Advanced  Vibrations  (3) 

Mech  409  Theory  of  Elasticity  I  (3) 

Mech  410  Theory  of  Elasticity  II  (3) 

Mech  412  Theory  of  Plasticity  (3) 

Mech  413  Fracture  Mechanics  (3) 

Mech  415  Stability  of  Elastic  Structures  (3) 

Met  319  Current  Topics  in  Materials  Science  (3) 

Met  320  Analytical  Methods  in  Materials  Science  (3) 

Met  358  Selection  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  406  Solidification  (3) 

Met  407  Theory  of  Alloy  Phases  (3) 

Met  408  Transformations  (3) 

Met  410  The  Physical  Chemistry  of  Metals  I  (3) 

Met  412  Electrical  &  Magnetic  Properties  of  Materials 

(3) 

Met  413  Analysis  of  Metal  Forming  Processes  (3) 

Met  415  Mechanical  Behavior  of  Ceramic  Solids  (3) 

Met  416  Atom  Movements  (3) 

Met  418  Deformation  and  Fracture  (3) 

Met  425  Topics  in  Materials  Processing  (3) 

Met  437  Dislocations  and  Strength  in  Crystals  (3) 

Met  443  Solid  State  Chemistry  (3) 

Met  458  Metallurgical  Design  (3) 

Met  461  Advanced  Materials  Research  Techniques 

(3) 

Phys  340  Heat  &  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Phys  431  Theory  of  Solids  (3) 

Phys  442  Statistical  Mechanics 

Phys  471  Non-linear  Continuum  Mechanics  (1-3) 


Fifth  Year,  Summer  Semester 

Materials  Research 


156     Five-Y ear  Programs 


Foreign  Careers 


Finn  B.Jensen,  Chairman  of  Economics,  Director  of  the 
Foreign  Careers  Program 

Major  in  Arts  and  Science  College 

The  interdepartmental  major  in  foreign  careers  is  designed  to 
give  students  the  grounding  in  language,  history,  economics, 
and  related  subjects  needed  for  successful  work  with  private 
industry  or  governmental  agencies  in  their  overseas  activities. 

Each  student  in  the  program  will  schedule  all  courses  in 
the  common  core  and  in  one  of  the  options.  In  addition,  he 
will,  in  consultation  with  the  director,  select  courses  in  lan- 
guage, history,  and  other  subjects  which  will  give  him  an  in- 
tensive knowledge  of  the  culture  of  the  area  in  which  he  is 
interested.  Students  electing  the  Russian  area  option  will  be 
expected  to  study  Russian. 

The  program  also  affords  a  broad  base  for  graduate  study 
in  social  sciences  and  business  administration.  Students  inter- 
ested in  this  aspect  of  the  major  sequence  should  consult  the 
director  early  in  their  college  careers. 

Common  Core 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Govt  3  Comparative  Politics  (3) 

Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

or 
Math  41  BMSS  Calculus  I  (3) 

Eco  45  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Concentration  in  the  Latin  American  area 
Eco  305  Economic  Development  of  Latin  America 

(3) 
SR  367  Latin  American  Social  Institutions  (3) 

Hist  Six  hours  of  Latin  American  History  (6) 

Concentration  in  the  European  area 
Eco  309  Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3) 

Eco  343  European  Economic  Integration  (3) 

Hist  Six  hours  of  European  History  (6) 

Concentration  in  the  Russian  area 
Eco  309  Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3) 

Govt  362  The  Soviet  System  of  Government  (3) 

IR  133,  134  Diplomacy  of  Russia  (6) 

IR  334  The  Soviet  Union  in  World  Affairs  (3) 


Foreign  Trade  Option 

Acctg  51  Essentials  of  Accounting  (3) 

or 
Acctg  108  Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 

Eco  129  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

Eco  339,  340        International  Trade  &  Finance  (6) 
Eco  In  consultation  with  the  advisor 

Public  Administration  Option 

Acctg  51  Essentials  of  Accounting  (3) 

or 
Acctg  108  Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 

IR  352  International  Organization  (3) 

or 
IR  361  International  Law  (3) 

Eco  353  Public  Finance  (3) 

Govt  360  Public  Administration  (3) 

Govt  363  Contemporary  Political  Philosophy  (3) 

or 
Govt  364  Contemporary  Political  Analysis  (3) 

Govt  361  Comparative  Administrative  Systems  (3) 

Govt  322  Developing  Countries  (3) 

A  senior  comprehensive  examination  in  the  appropriate 
language  is  required. 

Open  Option 

In  place  of  any  of  the  three  preceding  options,  a  student  may 
take  an  open  option  by  meeting  the  advanced  course  require- 
ments for  one  of  the  other  arts  college  majors.  The  open  op- 
tion is  most  feasible  with  humanities  and  social  science 
majors  but  will  require  a  careful  combining  of  distribution 
courses  and  free  electives  with  the  eighteen  hours  normally 
given  to  the  option.  Students  interested  in  the  open  option 
should  consult  the  director  of  the  Foreign  Careers  major  as 
early  as  possible. 

Major  in  Business  and  Economics  College 

Required:  15  credit  hours  beyond  the  core 


Eco  303 
Eco  309 
Eco  339 
Eco  340 
Eco  305 


Eco  343 


Economic  Development  (3) 

Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3) 

International  Trade  (3) 

International  Finance  (3) 

The  Economic  Development  of  Latin 

America  (3) 

or 

European  Economic  Integration  (3) 


To  qualify  for  this  major,  include  at  least  one  year  (beyond 
the  introductory  course)  of  foreign  language  of  your  area  in 
the  language  option  as  well  as  one  year  of  history  of  your 
area  and  Government  3  (Comparative  Politics)  in  your  social 
science  option. 


Foreign  Careers     151 


Fundamental  Sciences 


Robert  T.  Gallagher,   Issociate  Dean  oj  the  College  of 
Engineering,  Director  oj  Fundamental  Sciences  Program 

The  curriculum  in  Fundamental  Sciences  is  designed  to  en- 
able students  to  achieve  a  breadth  of  academic  background  in 
the  basic  fields  of  modern  science  and  at  the  same  time, 
through  an  option,  to  master  the  discipline  of  one  of  them, 
about  to  the  level  of  a  minimum  bachelor's  program.  The 
options  and  electives  provide  flexibility  by  which  a  student 
may  prepare  for  work  in  industry  or  government,  or  ap- 
proach adequacy  for  graduate  study  in  a  field. 

The  program  offers  excellent  opportunity  tor  students 
who  are  uncertain  of  their  desire  for  a  career  in  a  particular 
field  to  proceed  on  a  broad  program  which  can  lead  to  a 
bachelor's  degree.  If  the  student's  interest  crystallizes  in  an 
established  field,  transfer  to  that  major  will  normally  be 
possible  with  only  a  minimum  of  dislocation,  especially  if  the 
student  has  completed  the  introductory  courses  in  that  field. 

Fundamental  science  majors  are  required  to  concentrate 
in  a  major  or  in  a  hybrid  of  two  fields.  Thus  students  can 
organize  acceptable  programs  including  the  substantive 
course  elements  related  to  any  one  among  several  areas  such 
as  chemistry,  physics  and  mathematics,  biology,  earth  and 
space  science,  science  of  living  systems,  materials,  computer 
science,  and  architecture,  or  meaningful  combinations  of  any 
two  of  these. 

Work  in  the  major  science  subjects  is  continuous  through 
all  four  years.  The  freshman  year  is  identical  with  that  re- 
quired of  all  students  in  the  College  of  Engineering.  The 
general  studies  (GS)  requirements  of  the  engineering  college 
must  also  be  satisfied.  The  discipline  of  a  science  will  be  pro- 
vided by  the  inclusion  of  at  least  15  semester  hours  or  from  a 
combination  which  constitutes  the  core  of  one  of  the  hybrid 
fields,  for  example,  geophysics  or  biochemistry. 

The  details  of  the  student's  program  will  be  worked  out 
by  the  student  with  the  advice  of  the  curriculum  advisor,  and 
with  the  approval  of  the  department  chairmen  concerned 
with  the  field  of  concentration. 


Sophomore  Year,  Sei  ond  Semester  ( /  7  credit  hours) 

Major  (3) 

Approved  Elective  (3) 
Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Phys  21 ,  M  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Vcijr,  First  Semester  (15-16  credit  hours) 

i',co\  1  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

or 
Biol  21,  22  Principles  of  Biology  and  Lab  (4) 

Psych  3  Psychology  as  a  Natural  Science  (3) 

Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

Major  (3) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (IS  credit  hours) 

Approved  Electives  (6) 
Major  (6) 
Elective  (3) 

Senior  Year,  hirst  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

Approved  Electives  (6) 
Major  (6) 
GS  Elective  (3) 
Elective  (0-3)* 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

Phil  42  The  Scientific  Process  (3) 

Approved  Elective  (3) 
Major  (6) 
GS  Elective  (3) 
Elective  (0-3)* 

*Note:  The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load 
required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirement;  the  higher 
figure  represents  the  normal  semester  load. 


Freshman  Year  (See  page  45) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (15-16  credit  hours) 

Biol  21,  22  Principles  of  Biology  and  Lab  (4) 

or 
Geol  1  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Chem  51,  53         Organic  Chemistry  and  Lab  (4) 
Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 


158      Fundamental  Sciences 


Geological  Sciences 


Professors 

J.  Donald  Ryan,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 

James  M.  Parks,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Center  for  Marine  and  Envi- 
ronmental Studies 
Adrian  F.  Richards,  Ph.D. 
Charles  B.  Sclar,  Ph.D. 
Dale  R.  Simpson,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor 
Paul  B.  Myers,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Bobb  Carson,  Ph.D. 
Richard  L.  Stocker,  Ph.D. 
John  R.  Sumner,  Ph.D. 


Geology,  and  related  sciences  such  as  geophysics  and  geo- 
chemistry, deal  with  natural  phenomena  on  or  within  the 
earth.  Each  is  a  science  which  makes  use  of  other  more 
fundamental  sciences  in  its  practice;  hence,  the  student  pre- 
paring for  a  career  in  one  of  the  geological  sciences  must 
combine  study  in  geology  with  a  broad  understanding  of 
physical,  chemical,  and  biological  principles. 

Lehigh  offers  two  undergraduate  programs  in  geological 
science,  one  leading  to  the  degree  of  B.S.  in  geological 
sciences,  the  other  to  the  degree  of  B.A.  The  B.A.  program 
requires  fewer  credits  for  graduation  (120  vs.  126  credit 
hours),  fewer  courses  in  collateral  sciences  and  mathematics 
(34  vs.  37  credit  hours),  and  fewer  geology  courses  (31  vs.  38 
credit  hours).  Candidates  for  the  B.S.  degree  are  also  required 
to  take  15  credit  hours  in  approved  professional  electives. 
The  professional  electives  permit  the  student  to  arrange  for 
an  informal  option  in  an  area  such  as  geophysics,  geochemis- 
try, engineering  geology,  etc. 

Students  electing  the  B.A.  program  are  required  to  meet 
the  distribution  requirements  of  the  College  of  Arts  and 
Science;  candidates  for  the  B.S.  degree  take  30  credit  hours 
of  non-professional  electives  in  place  of  the  distribution  re- 
quirements. Distribution  requirements  for  the  B.A.  program 
include  at  least  second-year  (intermediate  level)  proficiency  in 
one  foreign  language.  There  is  no  foreign  language  require- 
ment in  the  B.S.  program.  However,  it  is  strongly  recom- 
mended that  all  students  planning  on  attending  graduate 
school,  who  have  not  previously  studied  either  French, 
German  or  Russian,  should  include  courses  in  one  of  these 
languages  in  their  undergraduate  programs. 

Attendance  at  an  approved  summer  geology  field  camp  is 
required  in  both  programs.  Lehigh  does  not  operate  its  own 


field  camp  but  arrangements  are  easily  made  for  Lehigh  stu- 
dents to  attend  field  camps  operated  by  other  colleges  and 
universities. 

Both  the  B.S.  program  and  the  B.A.  program  provide  pre- 
paration for  graduate  school. 

Qualified  students  may  be  given  permission  at  the  end  of 
the  junior  year  to  enter  a  program  whereby  they  are  able  to 
begin  work  toward  a  graduate  degree  (M.S.  or  Ph.D.)  during 
the  senior  year.  Students  enrolled  in  this  program  often  will 
be  able  to  complete  all  requirements  for  the  M.S.  degree  with 
only  one  year  of  study  beyond  the  baccalaureate. 

Geological  training  may  be  utilized  in  industry  (especially 
in  the  petroleum,  mining,  highway  construction,  ceramics, 
and  metallurgical  industries),  government  service,  natural 
resource  management,  and  in  secondary  school  and  college 
teaching.  Students  planning  on  careers  in  industry  are  advised 
to  register  for  the  B.S.  program. 

B.S.  in  Geological  Sciences  (126  credit  hours) 

College  and  University  Requirements  (36  credit  hours) 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Engl  2,  10,  14,  or  16     Composition  and  Literature  (3) 
Electives  (30  credit  hours) 

Elective  courses  are  non-professional  courses  designed  to  give 
the  student  a  broad  understanding  in  traditional  and  con- 
temporary fields  of  thought  outside  of  natural  science  and 
mathematics.  The  courses  are  chosen  by  the  student.  The 
elective  program  shall  include  a  large  number  of  courses 
broadly  distributed  among  the  various  areas  of  the  humani- 
ties and  the  social  sciences. 

Tile  Major  Program  (90  credit  hours) 

Mathematics  (12  credit  hours) 

Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Math  22  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Collateral  Sciences  (25  credit  hours) 

Chem  21,  22         Introductory  Chemical  Principles  and  Lab 


Chem  39 
Chem  90 
Phys  11,  12 
Phys21,22 
Biol  21,  22 


(5) 

Analytical  Chemistry  (3) 
Physical  Chemistry  (3) 
Introductory  Physics  I  and  Lab  (5) 
Introductory  Physics  II  and  Lab  (5) 
Principles  of  Biology  and  Lab  (4) 


Geology  (38  credit  hours) 

Geol  1  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Geol  10  Computer  Applications  (1) 

Geol  12  Historical  Geology  (3) 

Geol  23  Structural  Geology  (3) 

Geol  33  Introductory  Mineralogy  and  Petrology  (3) 

Geol  301  Introduction  to  Geophysics  (3) 

Geol  311  Paleontology  (3) 


Geological  Sciences      159 


Geol     l  ;  Scdimcntology  (3) 

Gcol  333  Crystallography  (3) 

tic. 'I  Petrology  and  Petrography  (4) 

(36  Mineral  Phase  Relations  (3) 

Field  Camp  (6) 

Approved  Professional  Electives  (15  credit  hours) 

Courses  approved  to  fulfill  this  requirement  should  form  a 
coherent  package  supporting  the  professional  objectives  of 
the  student. 

B.A.  with  Geology  Major  (120  credit  hours) 

College  and  University  Requirements 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Engl  2,  10,  14  or  16     Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Distribution  Requirements  (See  page  35) 

Tlie  Major  Program  (65  credit  hours) 

Mathematics  (12  credit  hours) 

Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Math  22  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Collateral  Sciences  (22  credit  hours) 

Chem  21,  22         Introductory  Chemical  Principles  and  Lab 

(5) 
Chem  Approved  elective  (3) 

Phys  11,  12  Introductory  Physics  I  and  Lab  (5) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  and  Lab  (5) 

Biol  21,  22  Principles  of  Biology  and  Lab  (4) 

Geology  (31  credit  hours) 

Geol  1  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Geol  10  Computer  Applications  (1) 

Geol  12  Historical  Geology  (3) 

Geol  23  Structural  Geology  (3) 

Geol  33  Introductory  Mineralogy  and  Petrology  (3) 

Geol  Approved  electives  (12) 
Field  Camp  (6) 

Combined  B.A.  or  B.S.  and  M.S.  Program  in  Geological 
Sciences 

The  department  of  geological  sciences  offers  a  combined  B.A. 
or  B.S.  and  M.S.  program  in  geological  sciences.  Students 
working  toward  the  B.A.  in  geology  or  the  B.S.  in  geological 
sciences  who  are  enrolled  in  this  program  are  permitted  to 
take  courses  which  apply  toward  the  M.S.  degree  during  their 
senior  year.  Usually  this  will  permit  completion  of  the  M.S. 
program  within  one  year  (or  less)  of  receiving  the  bachelor's 
degree.  During  the  student's  senior  year,  his  normal  under- 
graduate tuition  will  cover  the  costs  of  all  courses  taken  in- 
cluding those  which  are  taken  for  graduate  credit.  After  re- 
ceiving the  bachelor's  degree,  students  registered  in  the  pro- 


gram who  have  done  satisfactory  work  may  acquire  upon 
admission  to  the  graduate  school  full-time  graduate  status, 
and  as  such,  they  will  become  eligible  to  apply  for  appoint- 
ment to  a  teaching  assistantship,  research  assistantship,  or 
graduate  fellowship. 

The  program  is  designed  for  those  students  who  upon 
completing  the  junior  year  and  the  field  camp  requirement 
need  less  than  30  credit  hours  to  complete  work  for  the 
bachelor's  degree.  Students  accepted  into  the  program 
generally  also  must  rank  in  the  upper-half  of  their  class  and 
must  have  at  least  a  "B"  average  in  all  geology  courses  com- 
pleted. 

Application  for  admission  to  the  program  should  be  made 
during  the  spring  semester  of  the  junior  year  (generally  at  the 
time  of  preregistration  or  later)  and  must  be  approved  by  the 
department  faculty  and  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 
The  application  must  include  (1)  a  tentative  M.S.  program 
approved  by  the  department  chairman,  and  (2)  a  roster,  also 
approved  by  the  department  chairman  showing  which  courses 
taken  during  the  senior  year  apply  toward  the  bachelor's 
degree  and  which  courses  apply  toward  the  master's  degree. 
No  more  than  15  credit  hours  per  semester  may  be  rostered. 
A  total  of  150  credit  hours  is  required  for  the  combined 
B.A. -M.S.  program  and  a  total  of  1 56  credit  hours  is  required 
for  the  combined  B.S.-M.S.  program.  All  of  the  normal  re- 
quirements for  each  degree  as  outlined  in  this  catalog  must  be 
fulfilled. 

Students  enrolled  in  the  program  should  make  application 
for  admission  to  full-time  graduate  status  after  completing 
the  first  semester  of  the  senior  year. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

1.  Principles  of  Geology  (3) 

Fundamental  concepts  of  geology;  the  composition,  struc- 
ture, and  development  of  the  earth;  processes  of  geological 
change.  Lectures,  laboratory  work,  and  field  trip. 

10.  Computer  Applications  (1) 

The  use  of  computers  in  the  solution  of  geological  problems. 
Introduction  to  FORTRAN;  the  use  of  published  and  avail- 
able programs. 

12.  Historical  Geology  (3) 

The  origin  and  evolution  of  the  earth  and  its  parts— the  con- 
tinents, ocean  basins,  hydrosphere,  and  atmosphere;  the 
origin  and  evolution  of  life;  regional  studies.  Lectures,  labora- 
tory, and  field  trips.  Prerequisite:  Geol.  1. 

23.  Structural  Geology  (3) 

The  application  of  basic  concepts  of  stress  and  strain  and 
experimental  data  to  study  of  the  developments  of  faults, 
folds,  and  other  deformational  structures  in  the  earth's  crust. 
Introduction  to  the  larger  scale  problems  of  geotectonics. 
Prerequisite:  Geol.  1. 


160     Geological  Sciences 


33.  Introductory  Mineralogy  and  Petrology  (3) 
Principles  of  crystallography,  mineralogy,  and  petrology; 
megascopic  study,  identification,  and  description  of  common 
minerals  and  rocks.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequisites: 
Geol.  l,Chem.  21. 

101.  Geology  for  Engineering  (3) 

A  study  of  the  materials  which  make  up  the  earth,  the  physi- 
cal, chemical,  and  environmental  history  that  they  relate,  and 
the  processes  that  act  to  change  them.  Designed  primarily  for 
upperclass  science  and  engineering  majors.  Lectures  and 
laboratory -recitation. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

201.  Earth  Sciences  I— Geology  (3) 

Fundamental  concepts  of  geology;  composition  and  structure 

of  the  earth,  dynamics  of  natural  processes,  evolution  and 

development  of  the  earth.  Must  be  taken  concurrently  with 

Geol.  203.  Designed  for  secondary  school  science  teachers. 

Prerequisites:  graduate  standing  or  consent  of  chairman  of 

department. 

203.  Geology  Workshop  (3) 

Field  and  laboratory  exercises  in  geology.  Must  be  taken  con- 
currently with  Geol.  201. 

211.  Environmental  Planning  (3) 

The  systems  approach  to  resource  development  as  it  relates 
to  analysis  of  the  need  of  society.  The  physical  factors  of  the 
environment  are  presented  as  a  framework  of  reference  for 
evaluation  of  the  developmental  alternatives  facing  individu- 
als and  society.  Lectures  and  laboratory. 

212.  Geomorphology  and  Surficial  Geology  (3) 
Systematic  examination  of  the  surface  features  of  the  earth 
and  their  interpretation  as  records  of  geologic  and  environ- 
mental history.  Special  emphasis  on  quantitative  methods  as 
applied  to  geomorphologic  investigation,  the  development 
and  environmental  significance  of  surficial  mantles,  the 
physical  and  sociological  effects  of  Pleistocene  glaciation. 
Lectures  and  occasional  field  trips. 

281.  Geological  Research  (1-3) 

Independent  investigation  of  a  special  problem  in  the  field, 
laboratory,  or  library.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

282.  Geological  Research  (1-3) 

Similar  to  Geol.  281.  May  be  elected  as  a  continuation  or 
separately.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

301.  Introduction  to  Geophysics  (3) 

The  application  of  the  principles  and  practices  of  physics  to 
the  solution  of  problems  related  to  the  earth.  The  origin  of 
the  earth;  geochronology;  temperature  of  the  earth;  seis- 
mology, gravitation;  geomagnetism,  terrestrial  electricity. 
Prerequisite:  senior  standing  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 


304.  Topics  in  Geophysics  (3) 

The  application  of  seismic,  electrical,  magnetic,  and  gravity 

measurements  to  the  solution  of  problems  in  crustal  geology 

and  exploration.  Includes  field  exercises.  Prerequisite:  Geol. 

301. 

311.  Paleontology  (3) 

Morphology  of  invertebrate  fossils,  their  use  in  interpreting 
geologic  history;  evolution  of  the  faunas  and  floras.  Lectures 
and  laboratory  work.  Prerequisite:  Biol.  21. 

313.  Sedimentology  (3) 

The  processes  that  control  weathering,  transportation,  and 
deposition  of  sediments;  the  characteristics  of  sediments  and 
environments  of  deposition.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prere- 
quisite: Geol.  333. 

314.  Weathering  and  Pedogenesis  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  study  or  rock  weathering  and  soil 
formation.  Processes  of  rock  breakdown;  alteration  of  rock 
materials  at  the  earth's  surface;  the  development  of  soil  hori- 
zonation  and  soil  morphology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  de- 
partment chairman. 

317.  (Biol.  317)  Evolution  (3) 

For  course  description  see  Biology  317. 

320.  Advanced  Computer  Applications  (1-3) 
Independent  investigation  of  special  problems  utilizing  com- 
puter techniques.  Prerequisite:  Geol.  10  or  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

321.  Statistical  Applications  (3) 

Statistical  models  applicable  to  geological,  geophysical,  and 
geochemical  field  and  laboratory  studies.  Analysis  of  vari- 
ance, applications  of  the  chi-square  distribution,  analysis  of 
covariance,  linear,  non-linear  and  multiple  regression,  and 
distribution-free  methods. 

322.  Geological  Sampling  (2) 

Consideration  of  elements  of  sampling  theory  applicable  to 
geological  problems.  Geological  populations  and  their  varia- 
bility, sampling  techniques  and  program  design,  statistical 
inference.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chairman  or 
Geol.  321. 

333.  Crystallography  (3) 

Fundamentals  of  crystallography  and  crystal  structure; 
patterns  and  symmetries,  symmetry  notations,  crystal  mor- 
phologies and  internal  structure,  principles  of  crystal  chemis- 
try. The  anisotropy  of  crystalline  materials  with  special 
reference  to  crystal  optics.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prere- 
quisite: Chem.  21. 


Geological  Sciences      161 


ill.  Pctrolupy  .1 111.I  Petrography  (■•) 

Evolution  of  crystalline  rocks  and  their  distribution  in  space 
.md  time;  physical  and  chemical  factors  in  igneous  and  meta- 
morphic  processes.  Microscopic  study  of  rocks.  Lectures, 
laboratory  work,  and  field  trips.  Prerequisite:  Geo).  333. 

336.  Mineral  Phase  Relations  (3) 

Principles  o(  phase  equilibria;  unicomponent  and  multicom- 
ponent  condensed  systems  and  multicomponent  systems  with 
volatile  phases.  The  application  of  phase  relation  studies  to 
mineralogic.il  and  geological  problems.  Prerequisites:  Chem. 
21,  Geol  333.  Lectures  and  laboratory. 

337.  (Met.  333)  X-ray  Methods  (3) 
For  description,  see  Met.  333. 

338.  (Met.  334)  Electron  Metallography  (3) 
For  description,  see  Met.  334. 

352.  Applied  Mineralogy  (3) 

Methods  and  approaches  to  the  solution  of  industrial  and 
environmental  problems  employing  modern  mineralogical 
techniques,  especially  transmitted— and  incident-light  polari- 
zing microscopy  and  X-ray  powder  diffraction.  Case  histories 
of  interest  to  geologists,  chemists,  ceramists,  chemical,  metal- 
lurgical, and  mineral  engineers,  environmental  engineers,  and 
materials  scientists.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequisite: 
Geol.  333  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

356.  Ground  Water  (3) 

The  geology  and  geochemistry  of  ground  water.  Techniques 
used  in  prospecting  for  ground  water,  ground  water  law,  man- 
agement and  conservation,  evaluation  and  planning.  Prerequi- 
sites: Chem.  21,  22,  Geol.  23. 

357.  Economic  Geology  (3) 

The  formation  of  mineral  deposits  and  the  occurrence  and 
characteristics  of  deposits  of  economic  importance.  Includes 
metals,  non-metals,  and  fuels.  Lectures,  laboratory  work,  and 
inspection  trips. 

363.  Introduction  to  Oceanography  (3) 

A  survey  of  the  physical,  chemical,  biological,  and  geological 
nature  of  the  oceans.  Two  lectures,  one  recitation.  Prerequi- 
site: one  year  of  science  (biology,  chemistry,  geology  or 
physics). 

372.  Principles  of  Geochemistry  (3) 

Synthesis  of  the  geological,  chemical,  physical,  and  astro- 
nomical observations  regarding  the  geochemical  evolution  of 
the  earth,  its  internal  constitution,  and  the  physico-chemical 
processes  which  modify  the  crust.  Crystal-chemical  controls 
on  the  abundance  and  distribution  of  the  chemical  elements. 
Experimental  high-pressure  studies  of  geochemical  signifi- 
cance. Shock  metamorphism  as  a  geochemical  process  on  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  moon,  and  planets.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 


181.  Meteorology  (3) 

Principles  ol  meteorology:  composition  ol  the  atmosphere, 
physics  of  the  air,  weather  systems,  weather  instruments  and 
tore  casting.  Two  lectures,  one  laboratory. 

391.  Field  Seminar  (1) 

Study  of  regional  geological  problems  using  field  methods  of 

analysis.  Field  trips.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 

department. 

for  Graduates 

The  graduate  program  in  geology  is  mainly  directed  toward 
the  study  of  geologic  processes.  Candidates  for  the  master's 
degree  receive  instruction  in  most  fields  of  geology  and  are 
expected  to  take  courses  in  appropriate  collateral  fields  of 
science.  Advanced  graduate  students,  working  toward  the 
doctorate,  specialize  in  one  field  of  geology. 

Research  is  an  important  part  of  the  graduate  program.  In 
general,  students  are  encouraged  to  choose  research  problems 
which  for  their  solution  required  the  use  of  integrated  labora- 
tory and  field  studies. 

Candidates  for  the  master's  degree  are  required  to  take  a 
comprehensive  examination  during  the  semester  in  which 
they  expect  to  take  their  degree.  The  examination  also  serves 
as  a  qualifying  examination  for  admission  to  candidacy  for 
the  doctoral  degree.  Students  entering  with  the  master's  de- 
gree take  the  comprehensive  examination  at  the  end  of  their 
first  semester  of  residence. 

Candidates  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  must  demonstrate 
through  examination  a  thorough  reading  knowledge  of  one 
foreign  language,  generally  French,  German,  or  Russian. 

Other  requirements  for  graduate  degrees  are  listed  in  the 
graduate  school  section  of  this  catalog. 

Special  departmental  research  facilities  of  interest  in- 
clude: Norelco  X-ray  diffraction  unit,  Beckman  DU  spectro- 
photometer, Bechman  infra-red  analyzer,  Coleman  nitrogen 
analyzer,  pH  meters,  petrographic  and  binocular  microscopes, 
size  analysis  equipment  for  sedimentation  studies,  chemical 
balances,  hoods,  etc.,  Schmidt-type  Askania  magnetometer, 
Worden  gravity  meter,  Gish-Rooney  electrical  field  equip- 
ment, standard  equipment  for  geological  mapping,  Soltzman 
map  projector,  furnaces  for  hydrothermal  studies. 

402.  Electrical  Methods  (3) 

Electrical  properties  of  rocks  and  minerals;  the  principles  of 
potential  distribution  in  DC  and  AC  fields.  Prerequisites: 
mathematics  through  calculus  and  consent  of  the  instructor. 

405.  The  Earth's  Magnetism  (3) 

Terrestrial  magnetism,  rock  magnetism,  history  of  the  geo- 
magnetic field,  spherical  harmonics,  and  the  interpretation  of 
magnetic  anomalies.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  21. 

411.  Advanced  Paleontology  (4) 

Classification,  evolution,  biometrics,  and  paleoecology;  study 
of  fossil  and  modern  populations  and  assemblages.  Lectures 
and  laboratories.  Prerequisite:  Geol.  311. 


162     Geological  Sciences 


417.  Sedimentary  Petrography  (3) 

The  theory  and  application  of  petrographic  methods  in  the 
study  and  classification  of  sedimentary  rocks.  Prerequisite: 
Geol.  334. 


462.  Paleoecology  (3) 

Reconstruction  of  paleoenvironments  based  on  principles  of 

paleoecology  and  sedimentary  petrology.  Prerequisites:  Geol. 

311,313. 


418.  Sedimentary  Petrogenesis  (3) 

The  origin  and  development  of  sedimentary  rock  types; 

mineral  provenance,  environment  of  deposition,  diagenesis, 

sediments  in  time,  stratigraphic  synthesis.  Prerequisite:  Geol. 

417. 

421.  Global  Tectonics  (3) 

Topics  include  upper  mantle  composition  and  configuration, 
interrelations  between  the  earth's  crust  and  upper  mantle, 
geophysical  data  related  to  hypotheses  in  global  tectonics, 
continental  drift  and  the  plate  model.  Seminars  and  lectures. 

422.  Regional  Tectonics  (3) 

Concepts  of  global  tectonics  as  applied  to  the  geology  of 
specific  areas  of  the  earth's  crust.  The  tectonics  of  the 
Alpine-Himalayan  chain,  Rockies,  Caledonides,  Appalachian, 
coast  ranges,  and  African  Rift  system  are  among  those  sub- 
jects considered.  Seminars  and  lectures.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

424.  Advanced  Structural  Geology  (3) 
The  theory  and  application  of  analytical  methods  in  the 
study  of  rock  deformation;  experimental  deformation,  petro- 
fabric  analysis;  statistical  field  methods. 

435.  Advanced  Mineralogy  (3) 

Topics  of  contemporary  interest  in  mineralogy.  Prerequisite: 
Chem.  302  or  equivalent. 

436.  Advanced  Mineralogy  (3) 

Similar  to  Geol.  435.  Prerequisite:  Chem.  302  or  equivalent. 
May  be  elected  separately.  Offered  as  required. 

437.  Advanced  Igneous  Petrology  (3) 

Origin  of  the  diversity  of  igneous  rocks  as  revealed  by  field 
and  laboratory  studies.  Lectures,  laboratory,  and  field  trips. 

438.  Advanced  Metamorphic  Petrology  (3) 
Processes  involved  in  the  transformation  of  rock  masses 
under  high  pressure  and  temperature.  Problems  of  the  deep 
crust  and  upper  mantle.  Lectures,  laboratory,  and  field  trips. 

454.  Genesis  of  Metalliferous  Deposits  (3) 

Petrological  concepts  regarding  the  origin  of  metalliferous  ore 
deposits.  Laboratory  includes  ore-mineral  synthesis,  ore 
microscopy,  and  electron  microprobe  analysis  of  ores.  Field 
examination  of  ore  deposits  at  operating  mines. 

461.  Marine  Geology  (3) 

Geology  of  the  margins  and  the  floors  of  the  oceans. 


471.  High-Pressure  Petrology  (3) 

High-pressure  phase  transformations,  phase  equilibria,  and 
melting  phenomena  in  multicomponent  systems  of  petro- 
logical importance  as  applied  to  problems  of  the  deep  crust 
and  upper  mantle  in  the  pressure  range  15  to  150  kilobars  at 
temperatures  to  1500  degrees  Centigrade.  Effect  of  water  as  a 
free  phase  at  high-pressure,  and  the  pressure  dependence  of 
ionization  phenomena  in  aquaeous  systems.  Lectures  and 
laboratories. 

472.  Solution  Geochemistry  (3) 

The  processes  of  solution,  transport,  and  deposition  under 
hydrothermal  conditions.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

480.  (Biol.  480)  Marine  Science  Seminar  (1) 
For  description,  see  Biol.  480. 

481.  Geological  Investigation  (1-6) 

Research  on  a  special  problem    field,  laboratory,  or  library 
study;  report  required.  Credit  above  three  hours  granted  only 
when  a  different  problem  is  undertaken. 

482.  Geological  Investigation  (1-6) 

Similar  to  Geol.  481.  Credit  above  three  hours  granted  only 
when  a  different  problem  is  undertaken. 

483.  Thesis  (3) 

May  be  elected  only  by  master's  degree  candidates. 

484.  Thesis  (3) 
Continuation  of  Geol.  483. 

490.  Special  Topics  (3) 

An  extensive  study  of  selected  topics  not  covered  in  more 
general  courses. 

491.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Similar  to  Geol.  490.  May  be  elected  separately. 


Geological  Sciences     1 63 


Government 


Professors 

Charles  Allan  McCoy,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Donald  Dclylc  Barry,  Ph.D. 
W.  Ross  Yates,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Frank  Thomas  Colon,  Ph.D. 
Leonard  I.  Ruchelman,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Charles  N.  Brownstcin,  Ph.D. 
Howard  R.  Whitcomb,  Ph.D. 


The  major  in  government  is  designed  to  promote  understand- 
ing of  political  ideas,  institutions  and  processes  and  to  devel- 
op skills  in  analyzing  and  evaluating  political  problems.  These 
goals  can  best  be  achieved  when  a  student  is  enabled  to 
assume  a  large  measure  of  responsibility  for  his  own  educa- 
tion. He  should  be  free  to  study  in  either  structured  or  un- 
structured ways.  The  government  department  curriculum  is 
designed  so  that  the  undergraduate  can  develop,  with  the 
approval  of  an  advisor,  a  plan  of  course  study  in  line  with  his 
interests,  concerns  and  knowledge.  The  only  requirements  are 
that  the  student  majoring  in  government  take  one  of  the  two 
basic  courses  in  the  curriculum,  Government  1  and  Govern- 
ment 3,  and  that  he  complete  thirty-three  (33)  semester 
hours  of  study  in  the  department,  at  least  fifteen  (15)  of 
which  must  be  in  advanced  courses.  As  an  alternative  to  the 
student-designed  major  program,  the  department  offers  a 
suggested  major  as  a  model  for  a  more  structured  plan  from 
which  the  student  may  work. 

A  balanced  program  within  the  discipline,  one  which  ex- 
poses the  student  to  various  areas  of  inquiry  in  American 
institutions  and  political  processes  as  well  as  in  the  compara- 
tive and  philosophical  perspectives  of  political  analysis,  has 
been  the  way  in  which  the  goals  of  the  major  program 
generally  have  been  achieved.  While  this  approach  will  con- 
tinue to  be  presented  to  the  student  by  the  advisor,  individual 
differences  and  the  goal  of  student  responsibility  militate 
against  making  such  a  program  mandatory. 

The  faculty  advisor  to  the  student  majoring  in  the  govern- 
ment department  is  designated  by  the  department.  The  ad- 
visor consults  with  the  student  and  approves  his  major  pro- 
gram. He  attempts  to  help  the  student  relate  courses  offered 
by  the  department  to  the  student's  educational  goals.  He  may 
also  act  as  a  resource  for  the  student,  and  may  suggest 
courses  in  other  disciplines,  language  courses,  and  courses  in 
research  techniques  which  may  be  of  benefit  to  the  student. 


Completion  ol  the  government  majoi  is  considered  suit- 
able training  for  the  undergraduate  who  wishes  to  go  on  to 

law  school,  and  to  become  ;i  smi.i!  a  ieni  e  teacher,  or  to 
work  in  such  positions  as  governmental  official,  party  or  civic 
leader,  public  affairs  commentator  or  staff  member  of  a 
governmental  research  bureau.  Graduate  study  is  advisable 
for  students  contemplating  certain  careers— college  teaching, 
research,  or  public  management,  for  example. 

The  following  is  a  suggested  major  program  which  serves 
as  a  guide  to  a  government  major.  Such  a  program  would 
probably  meet  the  needs  of  most  students. 

Preliminary  Courses 

Govt  1  American  Political  System  (3) 

Govt  3  Comparative  Politics  (3) 


Advanced  Courses 


Govt  103 
Govt  321 

Electivcs 


Modern  Political  Philosophy  (3) 
Methods  for  Political  Research  (3) 


Seven  elective  courses  with  at  least  two  courses  from  each  of 
the  following  two  fields: 

American  Politics— Public  Law 

Govt  74  Political  Parties  (3) 

Govt  77  Urban  Politics  (3) 

Govt  302  Comparative  State  Politics  (3) 

Govt  306  Public  Policy  Process  (3) 

Govt  325  Electoral  Process  (3) 

Govt  351  Constitutional  Law  (3) 

Govt  352  Civil  Rights  (3) 

Govt  353  Law  and  Politics  (3) 

Govt  354  Administrative  Law  (3) 

Govt  358  Community  and  Regional  Politics  (3) 

Govt  359  The  Legislative  Process  (3) 

Govt  360  Public  Administration  (3) 

Political  Theory— Comparative  Politics 

Govt  78  Political  Behavior  (3) 

Govt  308  Classical  Political  Heritage  (3) 

Govt  316  American  Political  Ideas  (3) 

Govt  322  Politics  of  Developing  Nations  (3) 

Govt  324  Political  Systems  in  Transition  (3) 

Govt  362  The  Soviet  Political  System  (3) 

Govt  363  Contemporary  Political  Philosophy  (3) 

Govt  364  Contemporary  Political  Analysis  (3) 

Govt  365  Political  Values  of  Neo-Freudians  and 
Existentialists  (3) 

Urban  Studies  Option  in  Government 

The  government  major  is  eligible  to  participate  in  the  Urban 
Studies  Program  which  is  a  multi-disciplinary  focus  on  the 
urban  process.  Interested  students  should  refer  for  details 
under  Division  of  Urban  Studies,  Government  Department. 


164     Government 


Undergraduate  Courses 

1.  American  Political  System  (3) 

Constitutional  principles;  organization  and  operation  of  the 

national  government;  the  party  system,  citizenship,  and  civil 

rights. 

3.  Comparative  Politics  (3) 

The  political  systems  of  foreign  countries;  approaches  to  the 

study  of  comparative  politics. 

74.  Political  Parties  (3) 

Organization,  function,  behavior  and  effect  of  parties  on  the 

democratic  process. 

77.  Urban  Politics  (3) 

The  structure  and  processes  of  city  government  in  the  United 
States;  city-state  and  federal-city  relationships;  the  problems 
of  metropolitan  areas;  political  machines  and  community 
power  structures;  the  urban  politics  of  municipal  reform;  city 
planning  and  urban  renewal. 

78.  Political  Behavior  (3) 

Behavioral  approaches  to  political  science.  Application  to 
substantive  topics  and  examples  of  current  research. 

103.  Modern  Political  Philosophy  (3) 

Analysis  of  schools  of  political  thought,  including  Contract 

Theorists,  Utilitarians,  Idealists,  and  Marxists. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

302.  Comparative  State  Politics  (3] 

Analysis  of  major  questions  relating  to  the  role  of  the  states 
in  the  American  federal  systems  and  their  relationship  with 
the  national  government. 

306.  Public  Policy  Process  (3) 

An  analysis  of  the  external  and  internal  influences  on  the 
public  policy  process  of  formal  governmental  institutions. 

308.  Classical  Political  Heritage  (3) 

The  contribution  of  significant  political  theorists  from  Plato 

to  modern  times. 

311.  Teaching  Civil  Liberties  (3) 

Consideration  of  fundamental  civil  liberties  issues  in  constitu- 
tional perspective.  Designed  for  improving  the  teaching  of 
constitutional  freedom  in  public  and  private  schools.  Free- 
dom of  speech,  religious  freedom,  racial  equality,  censorship. 
Materials  and  methods  for  teaching  the  Constitution  and  the 
Bill  of  Rights.  Designed  primarily  for  secondary  school 
teachers. 

312.  Workshop  in  Teaching  Civil  Liberties  (3) 

Research  and  library  work,  outside  lectures,  observation  of 
court  and  administrative  procedures  pertaining  to  civil  liber- 
ties. Must  be  taken  concurrently  with  Govt.  311  when 
courses  are  offered  together. 


313.  Teaching  Government  (3) 

Consideration  of  contemporary  issues  which  arise  in  the 
teaching  of  social  studies  in  the  public  and  private  schools, 
including  those  governmental  decisions  which  affect  the 
educational  environment.  The  course  during  any  given  year 
will  focus  its  attention  on  a  specific  issue  such  as  urban  prob- 
lems, comparative  political  systems,  ideologies  and  American 
political  institutions  and  processes.  Designed  primarily  for 
secondary  school  teachers. 

314.  Workshop  in  Teaching  Government  (3) 

Individual  research  projects  on  contemporary  issues  and  dis- 
cussion of  proposals  for  curriculum  revisions  in  the  public 
and  private  schools.  Outside  speakers  will  be  invited  to  attend 
workshop  sessions.  Must  be  taken  concurrently  with  Govt. 
313  when  courses  are  offered  together. 

316.  American  Political  Ideas  (3) 

A  survey  of  the  ideas  underlying  and  associated  with  the 

political  institutions  and  practices  of  the  United  States. 

321.  Methods  for  Political  Research  (3) 

Introduction  to  research,  research  design  (survey,  experimen- 
tal, aggregate),  statistical  and  non-statistical  analysis,  and 
computer  applications. 

322.  Politics  of  Developing  Nations  (3) 

Theories  of  political  development  in  non-Western  areas,  em- 
phasizing the  tasks  of  modernization  and  nation  building. 
Field  studies  and  methods  will  be  examined.  The  contribu- 
tions of  related  disciplines  such  as  sociology  and  psychology 
will  be  explored. 

324.  Political  Systems  in  Transition  (3) 

Studies  of  the  responses  of  selected  non-communist  states  to 
contemporary  problems.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with 
consent  of  instructor. 

325.  Electoral  Process  (3) 

Public  opinion,  voting  behavior,  campaigns  and  elections. 

351.  Constitutional  Law  (3) 

The  law  of  the  Constitution  as  expounded  by  the  Supreme 
Court  of  the  United  States.  Nature  and  origins  of  judicial 
review,  distribution  and  scope  of  governmental  powers,  and 
economic  regulation  in  a  federal  system.  Detailed  considera- 
tion of  judicial  and  policy  decision-making  processes. 

352.  Civil  Rights  (3) 

A  study  of  constitutional  development  in  political  and  civil 
rights.  Freedom  of  speech  and  of  the  press,  religious  freedom, 
due  process  of  law    and  equal  protection  of  the  laws.  Detailed 
consideration  of  constitution  issues  concerning  criminal  pro- 
cedure and  racial  discrimination. 


Government      165 


(S3. 1  aw  and  Politii  s  (3) 

An  examination  ol  the  techniques  ol  legal  political  analysis 
and  .1  study  of  the  uses  of  the  U-g.il  process  in  the  political 
sphere.  A  large  part  of  the  course  will  involve  the  examina 
t ion  of  law  and  politics  in  the  United  States,  but  pertinent 
materials  and  examples  from  oilier  countries  will  also  be 
drawn  on. 

154.  Administrative  L.nv  (3) 

Consideration  of  the  authority,  procedures,  and  methods 
utilized  by  executive  agencies  in  the  administration  of  public 
policy.  Analysis  of  the  general  problem  ol  adjusting  the  ad- 
ministrative process  to  traditional  constitutional  principles. 

358.  Community  and  Regional  Politics  (3) 

Analysis  of  the  changing  political  dimension  of  community  in 
the  context  of  regionalism.  Attention  directed  to  "the  metro- 
politan problem." 

359.  The  Legislative  Process  (3) 

Organization  and  procedure  of  legislative  and  constituent 
assemblies.  Legislative  leadership.  Role  of  administrative  and 
judicial  agencies  in  law-making.  Pressure  groups,  parties,  and 
policy  determination.  Direct  legislation. 

360.  Public  Administration  (3) 

The  nature  of  administration;  problems  of  organization  and 
management;  public  personnel  policies;  budgeting  and  bud- 
getary systems;  forms  of  administrative  responsibility. 

362.  The  Soviet  Political  System  (3) 

An  examination  of  the  roles  of  the  Communist  Party,  the 
Council  of  Ministers,  the  Supreme  Soviet  and  other  govern- 
mental and  social  organizations  in  governing  the  U.S.S.R. 

363.  Contemporary  Political  Philosophy  (3) 
Analysis  of  selected  concepts  of  contemporary  political 
science;  the  alleged  decline  of  political  theory;  positivistic 
and  Utopian  political  thought;  the  political  person,  political 
elites,  and  modes  of  political  and  governmental  control. 

364.  Contemporary  Political  Analysis  (3) 
Contributions  of  economic,  biological,  psychological  and 
communication  approaches  to  understanding  political 
phenomena. 

365.  Political  Values  of  Neo-Freudians  and  Existentialists  (3) 
The  perspectives  of  Freud,  Neo-Freudians  such  as  Fromm 
and  Marcuse,  and  Existentialists  such  as  Sartre  and  Camus. 

366.  The  Politics  of  Education  (3) 

An  analysis  of  the  political  dimensions  of  the  contemporary 
crisis  in  American  education.  Designed  primarily  for  students 
in  the  School  of  Education.  Summer  session. 


371.  Readings  (3) 

Readings  in  political  science  assigned  to  properly  qualified 
students  in  consideration  of  ihrir  •.po  i.il  imeresi  in  particular 
political  institutions  and  prai  tlces.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
.  hail  man  ol  the  department. 

372.  Readings  (3) 

Continuation  of  Govt.  371.  Prerequisite;  consent  ol  chairman 
oi  department. 

381,  382.  Special  Topics  (3) 

A  seminar  on  a  topic  of  special  interest  in  a  particular  poli- 
tical institution,  process,  or  policy.  Prerequisite;  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

For  Graduates 

The  department  of  government  offers  a  graduate  program 
leading  to  the  Doctor  of  Arts  (D.A.)  and  the  Master  of  Arts 
(M.A.)  degrees.  The  applicant  for  admission  must  demon- 
strate adequate  undergraduate  preparation  and  submit  GRE 
results.  Candidates  for  the  master's  degree  in  political  science 
may  qualify  by  completing  thirty  (30)  hours  of  approved 
course  work  and  passing  an  examination  covering  the  entire 
field  or  completing  twenty-four  (24)  hours  in  approved 
courses  and  submitting  a  satisfactory  thesis.  Candidates  may 
also  declare  an  Urban  Studies  option  which  includes  a  multi- 
disciplinary  focus  on  the  urban  process. 

Master  of  Arts.  This  degree  is  available  for  students  interested 
in  a  variety  of  vocations.  Principally,  M.A.  candidates  prepare 
for  careers  in  local,  state  or  national  government;  public 
school  teaching;  governmental  and  private  research  programs; 
journalism;  or  further  graduate  study  leading  to  a  D.A.  or 
Ph.D.  and  a  career  in  community  college  or  university  teach- 
ing. 

Urban  Studies  Option.  Master's  degree  candidates  in  govern- 
ment can  declare  an  option  in  the  area  of  Urban  Studies.  This 
is  a  multi-disciplinary  effort,  drawing  together  the  expertise 
of  faculty  members  of  other  departments  in  addition  to  the 
government  department.  Core  course  requirements  are  as 
follows:  Research  in  Urban  Areas,  Advanced  Urban  Seminar, 
Special  Topics,  Thesis  Work.  Recommended  courses  are 
Regional  Science,  Metropolitan  Analysis,  Community  Power 
Structure,  Urban  Policy,  Advanced  Urban  Sociology,  Ad- 
vanced Urban  American  History,  Operations  Analysis,  Public 
Finance. 

Doctor  of  Arts.  The  department  of  government  offers  a 
graduate  program  leading  to  the  Doctor  of  Arts  degree 
(D.A.).  The  program  is  designed  for  students  holding  the 
bachelor's  or  master's  degree  who  wish  to  prepare  for  a  career 
in  college  teaching  of  political  science.  In  every  respect,  the 
evaluation  standards  will  be  equal  to  those  of  a  Ph.D.  pro- 
gram. Guidelines  developed  by  the  Council  of  Graduate 
Schools  and  American  Association  of  State  Colleges  and  Uni- 
versities have  been  followed  in  planning  this  program.  The 
D.A.  program  will  differ  from  the  Ph.D.  program  in  (a)  the 
requirement  of  a  broader  distribution  of  graduate  courses  in 
government;  (b)  a  minor  area  of  study  for  those  students  who 


166      Government 


wish  to  have  bi-disciplinary  preparation  for  two-year  college 
teaching;  (c)  course  work  and  training  in  interpersonal  aware- 
ness; (d)  a  general  examination  tailored  to  the  D.A.;  (e)  a 
project  of  applied  research  rather  than  a  dissertation,  and  (f) 
supervised  internships. 

The  Doctor  of  Arts  program  of  government  consists  of 
four  parts:  a  core  concentration  in  interpersonal  awareness 
and  teaching,  a  major  in  government,  an  open-ended  major, 
and  an  internship  and  related  project. 

The  Core  Curriculum  (12  credit  hours) 

Training  in  Interpersonal  Awareness  (6) 
Govt  471  Teaching  Government  (3) 

Govt  472  Workshop  in  Teaching  Government  (3) 

Major  Area— Government  (33  credit  hours  minimum 
requirement) 

300-level  (12  credit  hours) 

In  consultation  with  his  advisor  and  taking  into  consideration 
his  past  work  in  government,  the  student  should  select 
courses  to  achieve  a  balance  in  the  following  general  areas: 
scope  and  methods;  public  law  and  judicial  process;  sub- 
national  politics;  public  administration;  political  philosophy; 
comparative  politics  or  international  relations. 

400-level  (21  credit  hours) 

The  student's  courses  on  the  400-level  should  focus  on 
American  and  community  politics,  the  main  area  of  concen- 
tration in  the  Doctor  of  Arts  program.  But  on  this  level,  too, 
a  balance  should  be  achieved  by  taking  available  courses  in 
political  philosophy,  field  research  and  comparative  politics. 

Minor  Area  (12  credit  hours) 

On  the  basis  of  interest  and  undergraduate  education  stu- 
dents will  be  encouraged  to  select  their  minor  from  a  wide 
range  of  subject  areas  including  both  the  natural  and  social 
sciences.  Where  possible  this  will  be  related  to  the  internship 
experience  of  the  student.  Associated  with  the  department  of 
government  will  be  the  departments  of  social  relations,  and 
history,  and  the  division  of  urban  studies. 

Internships  and  Project  (33  credit  hours) 

The  student  will  participate  in  an  evaluated,  supervised,  part- 
time  teaching  internship  either  at  the  junior  or  four-year  col- 
lege level  for  one  semester. 

Students  will  also  participate  in  a  community  organiza- 
tion internship  on  a  part-time  basis.  The  purpose  of  this  in- 
ternship is  to  sensitize  them  to  a  broad  range  of  social  and 
political  problems  in  the  larger  society. 

The  student  will  complete  a  project  of  applied  research  of 
a  pedagogical  nature  which  is  the  functional  equivalent  of  the 
dissertation  in  a  Ph.D.  program.  Ideally,  it  should  integrate 
his  internship  experiences. 


Examination 

Those  students  entering  the  D.A.  program  without  the 
master's  degree  in  government  will  be  required  to  take  a  con- 
tinuing proficiency  examination  prior  to  their  second  year  of 
study. 

The  general  examination  for  candidates  for  the  D.A.  shall 
be  given  not  later  than  the  start  of  their  third  year  and  shall 
consist  of  (1)  examination  in  their  major  and  minor  fields 
and  (2)  presentation  of  their  proposed  project  and  intern- 
ships. 

401.  Comparative  State  Politics  (3) 

The  role  of  the  states  is  analyzed  within  the  American  federal 
system.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  functions  and  policies  of 
states  and  their  relations  with  the  national  government. 

413.  Modern  Political  Philosophy  (3) 

A  study  of  selected  modern  political  philosophers  and  their 
continuing  effect  on  politics  and  political  philosophy. 

414.  Democratic  Theory  (3) 

A  critical  evaluation  of  democratic  theory  in  light  of  the  con- 
temporary challenges  to  the  democratic  process. 

421.  Research  Methods  (3) 

Research  approaches,  design  techniques,  statistical  and  non- 
statistical  analysis,  and  computer  applications. 

424.  Administrative  Theory  (3) 

Administrative  theory  and  practice  in  both  the  public  and 
non-public  sphere  in  the  United  States;  model  building  and 
field  research  emphasizing  the  concepts  of  public  and  private 
administrative  systems. 

431.  Public  Administration  (3) 

The  study  of  bureaucracy  and  the  problems  of  public  organi- 
zation and  management;  executive  leadership;  personnel, 
budgeting  and  regulatory  administration. 

432.  Public  Policy  Process  (3) 

Executive,  legislative,  and  judicial  interaction  in  the  policy 
process.  External  influences  upon  formal  governmental  insti- 
tutions. Presidential  advisory  system  and  policy  politics,  in- 
ternal congressional  process,  andjudicial  policy-making. 

441.  Judicial  Process  (3) 

An  examination  of  judicial  institutions  and  decision-making 
process  from  various  methodological  approaches  including 
political  behavioralism  and  jurisprudence.  Topics  to  be  con- 
sidered include  judicial  selection,  interest  group  involvement, 
judicial  policy-making,  and  proposals  for  judicial  reform. 

451.  Comparative  Politics  (3) 

The  political  systems  of  nations,  with  emphasis  on  Western 
and  Western-type  democracies.  Approaches  to  the  study  of 
comparative  politics. 


Government      167 


I^J.  Comparative  Communis!  Political  Systems  (3) 
The  political  systems  ol  communist  h.ui.mis.  with  emphasis 
on  the  Soviet  Union  and  Eastern  Europe.  Examination  of 
methods  and  approaches  used  in  the  comparative  study  of 
,  ommunism. 

460.  Urban  Policy  (3) 

An  in-depth  examination  ol  the  politics  of  urban  policy  areas 
such  as  housing,  transportation,  law  enforcement,  planning, 
welfare  and  poverty. 


wish  to  contribute  to  the  solution  ol  urban  problems  in  a 
variety  ol  ways:  city  management,  urban  planning,  human 

relations,  and  social  rehabilitation  are  examples  of  relevant 
career  programs. 

Course  schedules  are  worked  out  with  the  advice  of  the 
faculty  members  who  actively  participate  in  the  urban  studies 
division.  An  advisory  council  of  chairmen  from  cooperating 
departments  will  assure  interdisciplinary  planning  and  coordi- 
nation. Students  must  abide  by  the  following  three-level  se- 
quence of  courses.  A  minimum  of  36  credit  hours  is  required. 


461.  Community  Power  Structure  (3) 

A  focus  on  power  relations  and  decision-making  on  the  com- 
munity level.  Special  attention  given  to  theories  of  communi- 
tv  power. 

471.  Seminar  in  Teaching  Government  (3) 

Theories  and  techniques  of  instruction,  learning,  evaluation, 
instructional  design  on  innovation  in  the  teaching  of  govern- 
ment. Prerequisite:  Doctor  of  Arts  candidacy  or  permission 
of  the  chairman  of  department. 

472.  Workshop  in  Teaching  Government  (3) 

Directed  experience  in  teaching  and  instructional  design  of 
lower  division  government  courses. 

481.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Individual  inquiry  into  some  problems  of  government.  Read- 
ing, field  work,  and  other  appropriate  techniques  of  investiga- 
tion. Conferences  and  reports.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

482.  Special  Topics  (3) 
Continuation  of  Govt.  481. 

Division  of  Urban  Studies 

Associate  Professors 

Leonard  I.  Ruchelman,  Ph.D.,  Head 
Carlos  Alvare,  M.  Arch.,  M.C.P. 
John  Ellis,  Ph.D. 
Warren  Pillsbury,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

James  R.  Mcintosh,  Ph.D. 
Roger  Simon,  Ph.D. 

Lecturer 

David  Amidon,  M.A. 


Required  Preliminary  Courses  (6  credit  hours) 

US  61  The  Study  of  Urbanization  (3) 

US  62  Contemporary  Urban  Issues  (3) 

At  least  fifteen  (15)  credit  hours  to  be  chosen  from  the 
following: 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Eco  312  Urban  Economics  (3) 

FA  43  Environmental  Design  (3) 

FA  151  History  of  Urban  Design  (3) 

Govt  77  Urban  Politics  (3) 

Govt  358  Community  and  Regional  Politics  (3) 

Hist  333  American  Urban  History  to  1880  (3) 

Hist  334  American  Urban  History,  1880  to  Present 

(3) 

SR  368  Urban  Communities  (3) 

SR  292  Research  Methods  (3) 

or 

Govt  321  Research  Methods  (3) 

At  least  fifteen  (15)  credit  hours  to  be  chosen  from  the 
following: 

Eco  354  Public  Finance:  State  and  Local  (3) 

Eco  337  Transportation  and  Spatial  Economics  (3) 

FA  143  Environmental  Planning  and  Project  (3) 

FA  144  Intermediate  Environmental  Design  (3) 

FA  152  Physical  Planning  and  Design  (3) 

Govt  360  Public  Administration  (3) 

Hist  331  The  Negro  in  America  (3) 

SR  75  Minority  Groups  (3) 

SR  320  Urban  Ethnology  (3) 

US  371,  372  Special  Topics  (3  each) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

61.  The  Study  of  Urbanization  (3) 

Analyses  of  the  city  from  early  historical  speculations  to 

current  behavioral  analysis. 


Undergraduate  Curriculum 

This  is  an  interdepartmental  program  intended  for  students 
who  wish  a  broad  interdisciplinary  focus  on  urban  processes 
as  the  means  of  comprehending  multifaceted  city  problems. 
Tbe  urban  studies  program  will  help  to  prepare  persons  who 


62.  Contemporary  Urban  Issues  (3) 

Review  of  the  literature  on  urban  issues:  poverty,  law  en- 
forcement, race  relations,  planning  and  education. 

371,  372.  Special  Topics  (3  each) 

A  seminar  on  a  topic  of  special  interest  in  urban  studies.  Pre- 
requisite: consent  of  the  instructor. 


168      Government,  Division  of  Urban  Studies 


For  Graduates 


Two  courses  from  the  following: 


The  urban  studies  graduate  program  is  intended  to  meet  the 
pressing  need  tor  urban  generalists  who  possess  interdiscipli- 
nary knowledge  of  urban  processes.  Depending  upon  interest 
and  choice  of  courses,  students  will  be  prepared  for  careers  in 
city  management,  urban  planning  and  redevelopment,  human 
relations,  and  social  rehabilitation. 

Master's  degree  candidates  work  within  the  disciplines  of 
economics,  government,  history  or  social  relations  and  are 
expected  to  achieve  an  urban  concentration  through  the  com- 
bined offerings  of  the  social  science  departments.  A  student 
must  fulfill  the  entrance  requirements  of  his  chosen  depart- 
ment which  formally  admits  him  into  the  program.  All  stu- 
dents are  required  to  take  the  urban  seminar  described  below. 

416.  Urban  Seminar  (3) 

A  multi-dimensional  overview  of  the  urban  condition.  An 
examination  of  the  interrelatedness  of  the  social,  political, 
economic,  physical  and  historical  forces  which  affect  urban 
life  and  form. 

Curricula 

Beyond  U.S.  416,  Urban  Seminar,  student  schedules  are  de- 
fined by  the  respective  departments.  Minimum  requirements 
for  each  department  are  as  follows: 

Economics,  advisor:  Mr.  Schwartz  (30  credit  hours) 

Eco  312  Urban  Economics  (3) 

Eco  354  Public  Finance:  State  and  Local  (3) 

Eco  440  Regional  Science— Metropolitan  Analysis  (3) 

Three  additional  courses  in  economics  including: 

Eco  432  Advanced  Microeconomic  Analysis  (3) 

Eco  436  Advanced  Topics  in  Macroeconomics  (3) 

Two  courses  from  the  following: 

SR  468  Advanced  Urban  Sociology  (3) 

SR  472  Special  Topics  (3) 

Hist  442  Readings  in  United  States  History  (3) 

Hist  452  Research  in  United  States  History  (3) 

Govt  460  Urban  Policy  (3) 

Govt  461  Community  Power  Structure  (3) 

A  comprehensive  examination  (general  economics,  urban 
inquiry)  is  required. 


Eco  312  Urban  Economics  (3) 

Eco  440  Regional  Science-Metropolitan  Analysis  (3) 

Hist  333  American  Urban  History  to  1880  (3) 

Hist  334  American  Urban  History,  1880  to  Present 

(3) 
SR  468  Advanced  Urban  Sociology  (3) 

SR472  Special  Topics  (3) 

Thesis  (6) 

A  comprehensive  examination  (theory,  urban  inquiry, 
option)  is  required. 

History,  advisors:  Messrs.  Ellis  and  Simon  (30  credit  hours) 

Hist  401  Methods  in  Historical  Research  (3) 

Hist  440's  Any  course,  including  442  when  urban  topic 

offered  (9) 
Hist  450's  Any  course,  including  452  when  urban  topic 

offered  (6) 

And  one  course  from  the  following: 

SR  468  Advanced  Urban  Sociology  (3) 

Govt  321  Methods  for  Political  Research  (3) 

Govt  460  Urban  Policy  (3) 

or 
Eco  440  Regional  Science— Metropolitan  Analysis  (3) 

Govt  461  Community  Power  Structure  (3) 

Thesis  (6) 

Satisfactory  completion  of  this  plan  will  enable  a  student  to 
apply  for  candidacy  for  the  Ph.D.  in  history. 

Social  Relations,  advisor:  Mr.  Mcintosh  (30  credit  hours) 

Four  courses,  including: 

SR  411  Advanced  Research  Methods  (12) 

And  two  courses  from  the  following: 

Eco  312  Urban  Economics  (3) 

Eco  440  Regional  Science— Metropolitan  Analysis  (3) 

Govt  460  Urban  Policy  (3) 

Govt  461  Community  Power  Structure  (3) 

Hist  333  American  Urban  History  to  1880  (3) 

Hist  334  American  Urban  History,  1880  to  Present 
(3) 


Government,  advisors:  Messrs.  Colon  and  Ruchelman  (30 
credit  hours) 


Govt  460 


Urban  Policy  (3) 


Govt  461  Community  Power  Structure  (3) 

Govt  357  Urban  Government  (3) 

or 
Govt  358  Community  and  Regional  Politics  (3) 

Govt  321  Methods  for  Political  Research  (3) 

or 
Govt  421  Research  Methods  (3) 


Government,  Division  of  Urban  Studies      169 


History 


Professors 

I  awrence  H.  Leder,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Raymond  Gibson  Cowherd,  Pli.D. 
Joseph  Albert  Dowling,  I'h.D. 
John  McVickar  H.iight,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 
Charles  Leon  Tipton,  Ph.D. 

Adjunct  Professor 
Winfred  Kohls,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

John  H.  Ellis,  Ph.D. 
George  Mark  Ellis,  Ph.D. 
William  Gerald  Shade,  Ph.D. 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 
Christa  V.  Graf,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

John  B.  Owens,  Ph.D. 
James  S.  Saeger,  Ph.D. 
Roger  D.  Simon,  Ph.D. 

Lecturer 

Burns  V.  Machobane,  M.Ed. 


History  is  the  study  of  man's  activities.  As  such,  it  encom- 
passes not  only  events  and  public  policy,  but  the  whole 
sweep  of  cultural  achievements— man's  religion  and  philoso- 
phy, literature  and  art,  economic  and  social  life.  Some  of  the 
most  influential  thinkers  and  public  men  of  our  time 
(Toynbee,  Kennan,  Churchill,  Kennedy,  among  others)  have 
studied  contemporary  problems  by  viewing  the  forces  in  the 
past  which  have  shaped  our  world. 

Students  take  courses  in  three  culture  areas,  examining 
major  developments  in  each  in  terms  of  cause  and  effect,  the 
historians'  main  concern.  These  courses  provide  training  in 
research,  analysis  of  historical  problems,  and  formulation  of 
historical  judgments,  as  well  as  in  writing.  History  majors 
have  the  foundation  for  law  school,  government  service, 
journalism,  teaching,  and  graduate  study. 

A  major  in  history  consists  of  thirty-six  hours  distributed 
in  three  of  four  areas:  American,  British,  European,  and 
Latin  American  history.  No  more  than  eighteen  of  these 
hours  may  be  in  one  field.  Majors  are  strongly  urged  during 
either  their  junior  or  senior  years  to  enroll  in  History  201;  for 


chose  interested  in  ihe  m-w.-st  -.un  m,  .il  .ippi.i.n  In",  in  i In- 
discipline, History  395  is  strongly  recommended. 

Admission  to  honors  study  in  history  is  by  invitation  of 
the  department  in  the  student's  junior  year.  The  Studenl 
must  attain  an  average  of  3.25  in  history  courses,  in  addition 
to  the  University  honors  requirements,  .ind  must  demonstrate 
a  special  competence  in  history.  Those  interested  in  honors 
work  are  urged  to  consult  the  chairman  of  the  department 
early  in  their  junior  year. 

Honors  students  in  history  may  plan  special  programs, 
including  more  in-depth  study  of  two  culture  areas  rather 
than  three  and  elimination  of  one  required  preliminary 
course.  Honors  students  in  history  must  enroll  for  three 
hours  credit  of  unrostered  history  as  part  of  their  thirty-six 
hours  and  must  complete  in  that  course  an  honors  thesis. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Hist  1,  2  Course  of  Civilizations  (6) 

or 
Hist  51,  52  Freshman  Seminar  (6) 

Plus  one  of  the  following  sequences: 
Hist  13,  14  American  Civilization  (6) 

Hist  15,  16  English  History  (6) 

Hist  49,  50  History  of  Latin  America  (6) 

Required  Intermediate  Courses 

Nine  hours  chosen  from  the  following: 

Hist  21  Ancient  History  (3) 

Hist  22  Ancient  History  (3) 

Hist  67  The  Iberian  Peninsula  (3) 

Hist  119  Colonial  America  (3) 

Hist  120  Revolutionary  America  (3) 

Hist  135  United  States,  1789-1840  (3) 

Hist  136  United  States,  1840-1877  (3) 

Hist  137  United  States,  1877-1920  (3) 

Hist  138  United  States,  1920  to  Present  (3) 

Hist  159  Modern  Europe  (3) 

Hist  160  Modern  Europe  (3) 

Hist  185-186        Archaeological  Field  Course  (8) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Fifteen  hours  chosen  from  the  following: 

Hist  201  Historical  Perspectives  (3) 

Hist  321  Social  Class  and  Mobility  in  American 

History  (3) 

Hist  322  American  Economic  History  (3) 

Hist  323  American  Constitutional  History  (3) 

Hist  324  American  Constitutional  History  (3) 

Hist  327  American  Intellectual  History  (3) 

Hist  328  American  Intellectual  History  (3) 

Hist  329  American  Foreign  Policy  (3) 

Hist  330  American  Foreign  Policy  (3) 

Hist  331  The  Negro  in  America  (3) 

Hist  333  American  Urban  History  to  1880  (3) 


1 70     History 


Hist  334 


Hist  339 


Hist  340 

Hist  343 

Hist  344 

Hist  345 

Hist  346 

Hist  349 

Hist  350 

Hist  351 

Hist  355 

Hist  356 

Hist  357 

Hist  358 

Hist  361 

Hist  362 

Hist  363 

Hist  364 

Hist  365 

Hist  366 

Hist  371,  372 

Hist  395 

American  Urban  History,  1880  to  Present 

(3) 

Human  Ecology  and  Public  Health  in 

America  (3) 

History  of  American  Medicine  (3) 

English  History,  1471-1660  (3) 

English  History,  1660-1789  (3) 

Liberal  England  (3) 

Socialist  England  (3) 

The  Early  Middle  Ages  (3) 

The  High  Middle  Ages  (3) 

Conservatism  in  the  Modern  Age  (3) 

European  Intellectual  History  (3) 

European  Intellectual  History  (3) 

The  Renaissance  and  Reformation  (3) 

Age  of  the  Baroque  (3) 

A  History  of  Russia  to  1855  (3) 

A  History  of  Russia,  1855  to  Present  (3) 

Modern  Germany,  1648-1848  (3) 

Modern  Germany,  1848  to  Present  (3) 

Colonial  Latin  America,  1492-1825  (3) 

Modern  Latin  America,  1825  to  Present  (3) 

Special  Topics  in  History  (3  each) 

Quantitative  Methods  in  Historical  Studies 

(3) 

History  majors  are  encouraged  to  enroll  in  courses  in  eco- 
nomics, English  and  American  literature,  government,  inter- 
national relations,  philosophy,  psychology,  religion  studies, 
and  social  relations.  Special  notice  should  be  taken  of  the 
possibilities  of  developing  programs  emphasizing  urban 
studies.  Students  intending  to  do  graduate  work  should 
acquire  a  reading  knowledge  of  at  least  one  foreign  language, 
choosing  languages  appropriate  to  their  area  of  concentra- 
tion. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

1.  Course  of  Civilizations  (3) 

Civilizations  in  the  East,  West,  and  Africa  from  earliest  times 
to  1700. 

2.  Course  of  Civilizations  (3) 

Civilizations  in  the  East,  West,  and  Africa  from  1700  to  the 
present. 

13.  American  Civilization  (3) 

An  integrated  survey  of  political,  social,  cultural,  and  eco- 
nomic developments  from  the  founding  of  Jamestown 
through  Reconstruction. 

14.  American  Civilization  (3) 

Continuation  of  History  13;  an  integrated  survey  of  political, 
social,  cultural  and  economic  developments  from  Reconstruc- 
tion to  the  present. 


15.  English  History  (3) 

The  history  of  England  to  1  688.  The  origins  of  representative 
government,  the  development  of  English  social  institutions, 
the  unification  of  England,  and  the  Renaissance  and  Reform- 
ation in  England. 

16.  English  History  (3) 

English  political  and  social  institutions  from  1688  to  the 
present.  The  evolution  of  parliamentary  government,  the  rise 
of  modern  parties,  the  Industrial  Revolution,  and  recent 
social  philosophies. 

21.  (Greek  21)  Ancient  History  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Classics. 

22.  (Latin  22)  Ancient  History  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Classics. 

49.  History  of  Latin  America  (3) 

Spanish  and  Portuguese  colonization  of  America  and  the 
struggles  for  independence,  preceded  by  a  brief  view  of  the 
ancient  American  civilizations  and  the  Iberian  backgrounds. 

50.  History  of  Latin  America  (3) 

Continuation  of  History  49.  The  development  of  the  Latin 
American  nations  in  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries. 

51.  Freshman  Seminar  (3) 

An  intensive  analysis  of  a  particular  period,  problem  or  area 
of  history,  emphasizing  readings,  discussions,  and  reports. 
The  topics  and  instructor  will  vary  each  semester.  Open  by 
invitation  to  students  with  Advanced  Placement  credit  in 
history  or  equivalent  background,  or  upon  application  to  the 
chairman  of  the  department. 

52.  Freshman  Seminar  (3) 

A  continuation  of  History  51. 

67.  The  Iberian  Peninsula  (3) 

Spain  and  Portugal  from  the  eighth  century  to  the  present, 
emphasizing  the  historical  influence  of  Iberian  culture  on  the 
development  of  colonial  institutions. 

119.  Colonial  America  (3) 

Founding  and  growth  of  colonies  in  North  America  through 
c.  1750.  Attention  will  be  paid  to  motives  behind  European 
expansion  as  well  as  to  developments  in  the  colonies. 

120.  Revolutionary  America  (3) 

American  political,  economic  and  cultural  development  from 
the  mid-eighteenth  century  through  the  adoption  of  the 
Federal  Constitution. 

135.  United  States,  1789-1840  (3) 

The  American  political  system  from  the  Constitution  through 
Jacksonianism.  Special  emphasis  upon  the  first  and  second 
party  systems  and  the  democratization  of  American  political 
culture. 


History      1 11 


1  16.  I  niced  States,  L840-1877  (3) 

i. "i\it  W.ir  and  Reconstruction,  emphasizing  the  causi 

Civil  War.  us  impact  upon  American  so,  iety  and  politii  s,  and 

problems  ol  post-war  Reconstruction. 

137.  United  St.itcs,  1877-1920  (3) 

Political.  economic,  jiui  -.oii.il  responses  to  iTulustri.il 
America.  The  rise  of  the  Populist  and  Progressive  movements, 
coming  ot  World  War  I,  and  post-war  developments. 

138.  United  States.  ll>20  to  Present  (3) 

American  institutions  in  the  modern  era,  emphasizing  critical 
changes  of  the  1920's,  the  Crash  of  1929,  the  New  Deal, 
World  War  II,  and  later  political,  social  and  economic  events. 

159.  Modern  Europe  (3) 

Revolutions  and  reactions  in  Western  Europe  from  1789  to 
1870.  The  rise  and  spread  of  liberalism  and  the  origins  of 
Socialism. 

160.  Modern  Europe  (3) 

Contemporary  Europe;  the  origins  and  consequences  of  two 
World  Wars;  the  rise  of  revolutionary  governments  in  Italy, 
Germany,  and  Russia. 

185-186.  Archaeological  Field  Course  (8) 
This  course  introduces  undergraduate  students  to  a  wide 
range  of  topics  in  archaeology.  Undergraduates  who  wish  to 
take  this  course  must  file  a  cross-registration  form  and  apply 
at  Moravian  College.  Ottered  only  in  summer  in  conjunction 
with  Moravian  College. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

201.  Historical  Perspectives  (3) 

Methodologies  and  interpretations  of  Western  historians  from 
ancient  times  to  the  present. 

321.  (S.R.  321)  Social  Class  and  Mobility  in  American 
History  (3) 

The  distribution  of  wealth,  concepts  of  class  and  social 
democracy,  life  styles  and  values  of  different  social  and  eco- 
nomic groups,  and  opportunities  for  mobility;  colonial  times 
to  the  present. 

322.  American  Economic  History  (3) 

Economic  development  since  the  colonial  period,  emphasiz- 
ing the  rapid  industrialization  from  1820  to  1890  and  the 
social  impact  of  economic  change. 

323.  American  Constitutional  History  (3) 

Legal  institutions  from  the  founding  of  Jamestown  through 
the  Civil  War.  Emphasis  on  federalism,  judicial  review,  and 
the  interplay  between  judicial  and  legislative  institutions. 


I  '  I.    \inericin  CoiiMitiitinii.il  History  (3) 

The  response  of  legal  institutions  to  the  crisis  of  Reconstruc- 
tion and  the  challenge  of  industrialization.  Emphasis  on  "due 
process,"  the  changing  legal  status  of  minorities,  and  the 
national  government's  rise  to  dominance. 

327.  American  Intellectual  History  (3) 
Development  of  political,  social,  and  religious  ideas  in 
America  from  the  colonial  period  to  the  Civil  War. 

328.  American  Intellectual  History  (3) 

Economic,  political,  and  religious  thought  in  industrial 
America,  1860  to  the  present. 

329.  American  Foreign  Policy  (3) 

The  French  alliance;  independence  and  boundaries;  com- 
mercial restrictions;  French  Revolution  and  neutrality;  pur- 
chase of  Louisiana;  War  of  1812;  acquisition  of  Florida; 
Monroe  Doctrine;  relations  with  France  and  Great  Britain; 
Oregon  and  Texas;  the  Mexican  War;  Civil  War  diplomacy. 

330.  American  Foreign  Policy  (3) 

Maximilian  in  Mexico;  Seward  and  expansion;  Alaska 
boundary;  War  with  Spain;  the  new  Caribbean  policies',  the 
World  War  of  1914-1918  and  its  aftermath;  diplomatic  events 
preceding  Pearl  Harbor;  outbreak  and  prosecution  of  the  war; 
plans  for  peace;  the  "Cold  War";  diplomacy  since  1945. 

331.  The  Negro  in  America  (3) 

Negro  subculture  in  America  from  the  colonial  period  to  the 
present,  emphasizing  the  struggle  for  emancipation  and  equal 
rights.  Topics  include:  racialism   slavery,  Reconstruction, 
urbanization,  protest  movements,  and  the  "Second  Recon- 
struction." 

333.  American  Urban  History  to  1880  (3) 

Planning  and  design  of  colonial  and  frontier  cities.  Impact  of 
transportation  innovations  and  industrialization,  emergence 
of  a  national  system  of  cities.  Internal  problems  of  early 
industrial  cities:  housing,  transportation,  public  health, 
crime,  social  mobility. 

334.  American  Urban  History,  1880  to  Present  (3) 
Physical  expansion  of  the  industrial  city  and  its  relationship 
to  current  urban  problems.  Suburbanization,  development  of 
the  central  business  district,  reforms  in  housing  and  public 
health,  rise  of  ghettoes,  emergence  of  city  planning  profes- 
sion and  idea  of  "new  towns,"  impact  of  New  Deal  and 
"urban  renewal." 

339.  Human  Ecology  and  Public  Health  in  America  (3) 

The  historical  relation  between  human  ecology  and  public 
health,  emphasizing  developments  in  the  nineteenth  and 
twentieth  centuries.  Readings  and  research  on  population 
growth,  infectious  disease,  use  and  abuse  of  drugs,  public 
health  administration  and  environmental  control. 


1 72     History 


340.  History  of  American  Medicine  (3) 

Social  history  of  the  theory  and  practice  of  medicine,  giving 
particular  attention  to  the  scientific  and  social  processes  faci- 
litating the  rise  of  physicians  as  an  occupational  group,  to  the 
social  distribution  of  medical  care,  and  to  the  role  of  the 
patient  as  consumer. 

343.  English  History,  1471-1660  (3) 

England  under  the  Tudor  monarchy  and  the  problems  facing 
its  successors  culminating  in  the  Civil  Wars  and  Interregnum. 
Political,  economic,  intellectual  and  religious  developments 
of  the  period. 

344.  English  History,  1660-1789  (3) 

Constitutional  monarchy  trom  the  Stuart  Restoration  to  the 
French  Revolution.  English  civilization  in  an  age  of  oligarchy, 
especially  the  political,  social,  economic  and  intellectual  sec- 
tors. 

345.  Liberal  England  (3) 

Political  and  social  history,  1790-1870;  transition  from  aris- 
tocracy to  democracy;  the  influence  of  the  utilitarians; 
radical  reforms  and  reactions;  the  impact  of  the  industrial 
and  agricultural  revolutions. 

346.  Socialist  England  (3) 

Political  and  social  history,  1870-1970;  the  expansion  of 
democracy;  the  growth  of  the  Labor  Party;  the  impact  of  the 
second  industrial  revolution;  the  making  of  the  welfare  state; 
the  consequence  of  two  World  Wars. 

349.  The  Early  Middle  Ages  (3) 

European  institutions  and  cultural  developments  from  284 
A.D.  to  the  mid-eleventh  century.  Evolution  of  the  Church, 
feudalism  and  manorialism,  the  foundations  of  the  Byzan- 
tine, Carolingian,  and  Holy  Roman  Empires,  and  the  literary 
and  artistic  achievements. 

350.  The  High  Middle  Ages  (3) 

A  continuation  of  History  349  to  about  1400  A.D.  Rise  of 
the  universities  and  towns;  legal  developments  and  the  origins 
of  representative  government;  rise  of  the  nation-state;  the 
crusades;  Scholasticism  and  the  decline  of  the  medieval 
church;  expansion  of  trade;  and  literary  and  artistic  develop- 
ments. 

351.  Conservatism  in  the  Modern  Age  (3) 

Conservative  political,  economic,  and  social  thought  from  the 
eighteenth  century  to  the  present. 

355.  European  Intellectual  History  (3) 

Political  and  religious  thought  and  other  aspects  of  the 
history  of  ideas  in  Europe  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  about 
1700. 

356.  European  Intellectual  History  (3) 

A  continuation  of  History  355,  with  special  attention  given 
to  the  impact  of  the  Industrial  Revolution  upon  the  develop- 
ment of  nineteenth-  and  twentieth-century  ideologies. 


357.  The  Renaissance  and  Reformation  (3) 

The  transition  from  medieval  to  modern  society.  Considera- 
tion of  political,  economic,  and  social  forces  produced  by  the 
Renaissance  and  their  influence  upon  the  dominant  religious 
theme  of  the  Reformation  era. 

358.  Age  of  the  Baroque  (3) 

Europe  from  1648  to  1789.  The  growth  of  absolutism  in 
France,  the  rise  of  Prussia,  and  the  social  and  political  and 
economic  conditions  in  the  eighteenth  century. 

361.  A  History  of  Russia  to  1855  (3) 

Major  cultural,  social,  and  political  traditions  of  the  Russian 

people. 

362.  A  History  of  Russia,  1855  to  Present  (3) 

The  Great  Reforms,  collapse  of  Tsarist  absolutism,  revolu- 
tions of  1917,  and  formation  and  consolidation  of  the  Soviet 
dictatorship. 

363.  Modern  Germany,  1648-1848  (3) 

Political,  socio-economic,  and  cultural  developments  from 
the  age  of  triumphant  absolutism  to  the  failure  of  liberalism. 

364.  Modern  Germany,  1848  to  Present  (3) 

Political  history  from  the  Second  Empire  to  the  federal  and 
socialist  republics.  Twentieth-century  intellectual  and  social 
problems. 

365.  Colonial  Latin  America,  1492-1825  (3) 

Individual  investigation  and  reports  on  selected  topics.  The 
Spanish  concept  of  empire,  church-state  relations,  origins  of 
the  Wars  of  Independence. 

366.  Modern  Latin  America,  1825  to  Present  (3) 

Individual  investigation  and  reports  on  selected  topics. 
Nationalism,  conservatism,  and  liberalism  in  the  nineteenth 
century;  the  rightist  revolutions,  socialism,  and  communism 
in  the  twentieth  century. 

371.  Special  Topics  in  History  (3) 

Intensive  study  in  an  area  of  history  not  adequately  covered 
in  currently  listed  offerings.  The  course  may  be  administered 
as  a  reading  program  or  otherwise  as  may  seem  best  to  meet 
the  needs  of  students  of  unusual  ability  and  adequate  pre- 
paration. Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

372.  Special  Topics  in  History  (3) 

Continuation  of  History  371.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

374.  Themes  in  American  History  (3) 
An  intensive  study  of  a  selected  topic  in  American  history 
primarily  for  American  studies  majors.  The  topic  may  vary 
from  time  to  time  as  the  needs  of  the  American  Studies  pro- 
gram dictate.  The  seminar  will  allow  study  of  an  aspect  of 
American  history  in  greater  depth  than  is  generally  the  case. 
Prerequisite:  permission  of  director  of  American  Studies. 


History      1 13 


3'* 5.  Quantitative  Methods  in  Historical  Studii 
Historical  uses  and  methods  ol  quantitative  analysis,  includ- 
ing the  application  of  descriptive  statistics,  statistical  infei 
ence,  and  computet  technology  to  a  variety  ol  problems 
drawn  from  European,  American,  and  Latin  American 
history. 

graduates 

The  Lehigh  library  is  especially  rich  in  materials  tor  advanced 
study  and  research  in  history,  and  the  department  of  history 
oilers  programs  leading  to  master  of  arts  and  doctor  of  philo- 
sophy degrees.  Graduate  programs  provide  intensive  and 
specialized  study,  and  limited  enrollment  maintains  close 
relations  between  faculty  and  students.  Admission  to  gradu- 
ate study  in  history  is  competitive  and  dependent  upon  the 
applicant's  undergraduate  preparation  and  record,  recom- 
mendations, and  GRE  scores.  Besides  general  requirements  in 
the  Graduate  School  section  of  the  catalog,  the  following 
special  requirements  apply  to  graduate  study  in  history. 
Master  oj  Arts.  There  are  two  master's  programs.  Under  plan 
I,  a  candidate  may  earn  the  degree  by  successfully  completing 
twenty-four  hours  of  approved  course  work  and  submitting  a 
satisfactory  thesis.  Those  continuing  toward  a  doctorate  must 
elect  Plan  I.  Candidates  declaring  Plan  II  do  not  write  a 
thesis,  but  take  thirty  hours  of  course  work  in  and  pass  exam- 
inations on  three  fields  chosen  from  Colonial  America, 
United  States  since  1789,  and  Latin  American  history.  Effec- 
tive with  students  entering  the  master  of  arts  program 
beginning  in  June  1973,  all  master's  candidates  must  main- 
tain a  3.0  average  in  all  graduate  work. 

Doctor  of  Philosophy.  Candidates  for  the  doctor  of  philoso- 
phy in  history  must  maintain  a  3.25  history  average  and  a  3.0 
overall  average  on  all  graduate  work  taken  at  Lehigh  or  else- 
where. Students  entering  with  a  master's  degree  take  a  quali- 
fying examination  before  beginning  their  second  semester  at 
Lehigh.  During  their  second  semester  at  Lehigh  doctoral  stu- 
dents select  four  history  fields  and  one  outside  field  and  pre- 
pare themselves  for  written  and  oral  examinations  in  those 
fields.  Course  work  is  required  in  a  fifth  history  field,  but  it 
will  not  be  covered  in  the  comprehensive  examinations.  An 
original  dissertation  is  required  and  may  be  written  only  in  a 
primary  field. 

Primary  Fields.  Primary  fields  are  Great  Britain,  Colonial 
America,  Nineteenth-Century  America,  and  Twentieth  Cen- 
tury America. 

Other  Fields.  Other  fields  of  specialization  are  Medieval- 
Renaissance,  Modern  Europe  to  1789,  Modern  Europe  since 
1789,  and  Latin  America. 

Language  Requirements.  The  qualifying  examination  in  one 
language  must  be  passed  before  beginning  course  work  be- 
yond the  master's  degree  in  order  that  the  language  may  be 
used  in  doctoral  course  work.  The  candidate's  special  com- 
mittee, appointed  by  the  chairman  of  the  department,  will 
designate  anyr  additional  languages  for  the  student  if  needed. 
Languages  will  normally  be  chosen  from  among  French, 
Spanish,  Italian,  German  and  Russian. 

All  graduate  majors  must  take  History  401. 


401.  Methods  in  Historical  Research  (3) 

IV,  h  Hi.  |  ues  ol  i  I'm' arch  in  history:  (raining  in  the  critical 
handling  ot  documentary  materials,  in  measuring  the  value  of 
evidence,  and  in  formal  presentation  of  the  results  of  re- 
search. Required  ot  all  graduate  students  in  history. 

402.  Historiography  (3) 

A  continuation  of  History  401.  The  aims,  methods,  and  ac- 
complishments of  some  of  the  most  renowned  historians  of 
Europe  and  America. 

403.  Field  Work  in  Archaeology  (6) 

Application  of  archaeological  methods  and  techniques  in 
actual  site  excavation.  Archival  research,  surveying,  mapping, 
excavation,  archaeological  photography,  and  artifact  pro- 
cessing and  analysis  will  be  included,  all  culminating  in  an 
anthropological  interpretation  of  the  remains  uncovered. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  and  the  chairman  of  the 
department.  Note:  students  must  put  in  a  full  day's  work  at 
the  site.  Offered  only  in  summer  in  conjunction  with 
Moravian  College. 

410.  Historical  Literature:  Europe  (3) 

Designed  to  familiarize  teachers  with  the  important  literature 

in  the  field.  Students  will  analyze  the  major  interpretations 

of  the  most  significant  movements  in  modern  European 

history. 

420.  Historical  Literature:  America  (3) 

Designed  to  familiarize  teachers  with  the  important  literature 
in  the  field.  Students  will  analyze  the  major  interpretations 
of  the  most  significant  movements  in  American  history. 

441.  Readings  in  Colonial  American  History  (3) 
Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,  problem   or 
area  of  Colonial  American  history.  May  be  repeated  for  credit 
with  permission  of  chairman  of  department. 

442.  Readings  in  United  States  History  (3) 

Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,  problem   or 
area  of  United  States  history.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with 
permission  of  chairman  of  department. 

443.  Readings  in  English  History  (3) 

Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,  problem   or 
area  of  English  history.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  per- 
mission of  chairman  of  department. 

444.  Readings  in  Latin  American  History  (3) 

Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,  problem,  or 
area  of  Latin  American  history.  May  be  repeated  for  credit 
with  permission  of  chairman  of  department. 


1 74     History 


445.  Readings  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  European  History 
(3) 

Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,,  problem   or 
area  of  Medieval  and  Renaissance  European  history.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

446.  Readings  in  Early  Modern  European  History  (3) 
Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,  problem  or 
area  of  Early  Modern  European  history.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit  with  permission  of  chairman  of  department. 


456.  Research  in  Early  Modern  European  History  (3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  Early  Modern 
European  history.  Prerequisite:  appropriate  course  work  on 
the  300-level  (or  its  equivalent),  or  an  appropriate  Readings 
Seminar.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

457.  Research  in  Modern  European  History  (3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  Modern 
European  history.  Prerequisite:  appropriate  course  work  on 
the  300-level  (or  its  equivalent),  or  an  appropriate  Readings 
Seminar.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chair- 
man of  department. 


447.  Readings  in  Modern  European  History  (3) 
Study  in  small  groups  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty 
member  of  the  literature  of  a  particular  period,  problem    or 
area  of  Modern  European  history.  May  be  repeated  for  credit 
with  permission  of  chairman  of  department. 

451.  Research  in  Colonial  American  History  (3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  American  colo- 
nial history.  Prerequisite:  appropriate  course  work  on  the 
300-level  (or  its  equivalent),  or  an  appropriate  Readings 
Seminar.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

452.  Research  in  United  States  History  (3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  United  States 
history.  Prerequisite:  appropriate  course  work  on  the 
300-level  (or  its  equivalent),  or  an  appropriate  Readings 
Seminar.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

453.  Research  in  English  History  (3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  English  history. 
Prerequisite:  appropriate  course  work  on  the  300-level  (or  its 
equivalent),  or  an  appropriate  Readings  Seminar.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chairman  of 
department. 

454.  Research  in  Latin  American  History  (3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  Latin  American 
history.  Prerequisite:  appropriate  course  work  on  the 
300-level  (or  its  equivalent),  or  an  appropriate  Readings 
Seminar.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

455.  Research  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  European  History 

(3) 

An  intensive  research  seminar  on  a  phase  of  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  European  history.  Prerequisite:  appropriate 
course  work  on  the  300-level  (or  its  equivalent),  or  an  ap- 
propriate Readings  Seminar.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with 
permission  of  chairman  of  department. 


History      1 15 


Industrial  Engineering 


Professors 

Arthur  Freeman  Gould.  M.S.,  Chairman 

: e  Eugene  Kane,  M.S. 
Sutton  Monro,  B.S. 
U  allat  i-  James  Richardson,  M.S. 
William  Adams  Smith,  Jr..  Ph.D. 

Associate  Prolcssors 

John  William  Adams,  Ph.D. 
Gary  E.  Whitehousc,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Mikell  Porter  Groover,  Ph.D. 
John  D.  Landis,  Ph.D. 
M.  Wayne  Shiveley,  Ph.D. 

Instructors 

Emory  W.  Zimmers,  Jr.,  M.S. 
David  D.  Hott,  M.S. 
Lynne  H.  Hott,  M.S. 
Lucius  J.  Riccio,  M.S. 


The  curriculum  is  designed  with  the  principal  aim  of  indus- 
trial engineering  in  view,  which  is  the  design,  improvement, 
and  installation  of  integrated  systems  of  men,  materials,  and 
equipment  for  operations  by  the  application  of  the  principles 
of  the  mathematical,  physical,  and  behavioral  sciences. 

Throughout  the  program  there  is  an  integrated  series  or 
sequence  in  the  major  field  which  includes  not  only  basic  and 
fundamental  courses  but  specialized  courses  as  well,  in  the 
fields  of  production  planning  and  control,  quality  control, 
production  engineering,  information  systems,  operations 
research,  and  industrial  man-power  management.  These 
specialized  courses  reflect  the  impact  of  recent  developments 
in  operations  research,  information  processing,  and  automa- 
tion, and  considerable  course  work  involves  use  of  the  high- 
speed digital  computer. 

There  is  a  growing  tendency  on  the  part  of  industries  to 
select  young  men  from  their  engineering  departments  for 
managerial  positions.  Because  of  this  the  industrial  engineer- 
ing courses  are  oriented  to  the  principles  of  scientific  manage- 
ment to  enable  the  industrial  engineering  graduate  to  accept 
and  succeed  in  these  opportunities. 

It  is  the  aim  of  the  industrial  engineering  program  to 
develop  for  industry  and  business  a  potential  manager,  a 
graduate  well  grounded  in  the  fundamentals  of  science, 
trained  in  the  principles  and  methods  of  engineering  analysis 
and  design,  and  adequately  prepared  to  practice  the  profes- 
sion of  industrial  engineering. 


I  reshman  )  eai  ,  See  page  I  i 

Sophomore  > v./r,  hint  Semester  \  \5  credit  hours) 

Math  2.1  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

II  Industrial  Engineering  Models  (3) 
Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Engineering  S   iem  -    Elective  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Sei  ond  Semester  ( 1(>  credit  hours) 

Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

IE  18  Information  Processing  Theory  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Electives  (6) 
Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (16-19  credit  hours) 

IE  101  Fundamentals  of  Manufacturing  Engineering 

(4) 
IE  205  Engineering  Statistics  (3) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Electives  (0-3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (16-19  credit  hours) 


IE  102 
IE  206 


Summer 
IE  100 


Work  Systems  (3) 

Operations  Research  Techniques  (4) 

Engineering  Science  Electives  (6) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 


Industrial  Employment 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

Acctg  108  Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 

IE  Electives  (6) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 


IE  154 

Project  (3) 

IE 

Electives  (9) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Note:  The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load 
required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirement;  the  higher  re- 
presents the  normal  semester  load.  For  explanation  of  Engi- 
neering Science  Elective,  see  IE  Bulletin. 


1 76     Industrial  Engineering 


Undergraduate  Courses 

5.  Industrial  Engineering  Models  (3) 

Deterministic  models  in  the  planning  activities  associated 
with  Industrial  Engineering,  including  engineering'economy, 
flow  chart  construction  and  analysis,  and  fundamentals  of 
production  control.  Prerequisite:  Engr.  1  or  equivalent  ex- 
perience in  programming. 

18.  Information  Processing  Theory  (3) 

Principles  of  organizing,  sorting  and  searching  data;  represent- 
ation of  data  in  various  file  media;  analysis  of  work  flow 
manual  and  equipment  functions,  types  of  programming  sys- 
tems; logic  representation;  validation  and  control  procedures. 
Prerequisite:  Engr.  1  or  equivalent. 

100.  Industrial  Employment  (0) 

Usually  following  the  junior  year,  students  in  the  industrial 
engineering  curriculum  are  required  to  do  a  minimum  of 
eight  weeks  of  practical  work,  preferably  in  the  field  they 
plan  to  follow  after  graduation.  A  report  is  required.  Prere- 
quisite: sophomore  standing. 

101.  Fundamentals  ot  Manufacturing  Engineering  (4) 
Study  of  metal  processing  theory  with  emphasis  on  machin- 
ing, numerical  control,  special  processing  techniques,  work- 
holder  design,  laboratory  experiments. 

102.  Work  Systems  (3) 

Techniques  in  methods  improvement  and  work  measurement. 
The  applications  of  these  techniques  to  the  analysis,  design 
and  control  of  man-machine  work  systems.  Time  study,  pre- 
determined time  systems,  work  sampling  and  standard  data. 
Plant  layout  project.  Prerequisites:  I.E.  101,  I.E.  205. 

105.  Thesis  (3-6) 

Candidates  for  the  bachelor's  degree  in  industrial  engineering 
may,  with  the  approval  of  the  department  staff,  undertake  a 
thesis  as  a  portion  of  the  work  of  the  senior  year.  Prerequi- 
site: senior  standing. 

154.  Senior  Project  (3) 

Special  study  of  a  particular  problem  involving  laboratory 
work  and/or  work  in  local  industrial  plants.  Prerequisite: 
senior  standing  in  industrial  engineering. 

166.  Production  Management  (3) 

A  course  for  non-engineering  majors.  Study  of  production 
functions  including  production  planning,  scheduling,  inven- 
tory control,  quality  control,  work  measurement,  methods 
analysis,  and  facilities  planning.  Prerequisites:  Math.  42, 
Eco.  1. 

168.  Production  Analysis  (3) 

A  course  for  the  engineering  student  not  majoring  in  I.E. 
Engineering  economy;  application  of  quantitative  methods  to 
facilities  analysis  and  planning,  operations  planning  and  con- 
trol, work  measurement  and  scheduling,  and  operating  sys- 
tems analysis.  Prerequisites:  Math.  22  or  42;  Eco.  1. 


For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

205.  Engineering  Statistics  (3) 

Applications  of  point  and  confidence  interval  estimation  and 
hypothesis  testing  to  the  fitting  of  frequency  and  regression 
models,  to  acceptance  and  control  sampling  and  to  elemen- 
tary design  of  experiments.  Prerequisite:  Math.  231,  or 
equivalent. 

206.  Operation  Research  Techniques  (4) 

The  development  and  use  of  the  techniques  of  operations 
research.  Topics  include  linear  programming,  queueing 
theory,  dynamic  programming,  probabilistic  inventory 
models,  and  simulation.  Prerequisites:  Math.  231 ,  Math.  205. 

212.  Elementary  Design  of  Experiments  (3) 
An  introduction  to  the  structure  of  experiments,  the  analysis 
of  experimental  data,  and  their  interrelation.  Measurement 
error,  randomization,  pairs  and  blocks;  regression  and  analy- 
sis of  variance.  Prerequisite:  graduate  standing  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  I.E. (1"3) 

307.  Information  Systems  Engineering  (3) 
Information  systems  design  methods.  Graphical  and  matrix 
techniques.  Boolean  logic.  Information  network  models  and 
teedback  concepts  in  dynamic  information  systems.  Prerequi- 
sites: Math.  205,  231. 

309.  Data  Processing  Systems  (3) 

Analysis  and  planning  of  data  systems  to  store  and  process 
data;  management  of  electronic  data  processing;  feasibility 
studies  and  economic  analysis;  effects  on  organizational  rela- 
tionships. Prerequisite:  I.E.  18  or  equivalent. 

310.  File  Structure  and  Processing  (3) 

Organizing  data  files  for  effective  processing  by  computer. 
Coverage  in  depth  of  coding  and  filing;  list  processing; 
search  strategy;  scoring  techniques;  randomizing  and  chain- 
ing; data  management  procedures;  coordinate  indices.  Demon- 
strations, student  projects  on  computer.  Prerequisite:  I.E. 
309. 

311.  Decision  Processes  (3) 

Application  of  the  techniques  of  operations  research  for 
making  decisions,  including  decisions  under  certainty,  deci- 
sions under  risk,  and  decisions  under  uncertainty.  Emphasis 
will  be  placed  on  the  application  of  simulation  in  decision 
making.  Prerequisite:  I.E.  206  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

321.  Experimental  Industrial  Engineering  (1-3) 
Experimental  projects  in  selected  fields  of  industrial  engineer- 
ing, approved  by  the  instructor.  A  written  report  is  required. 

322.  Experimental  Industrial  Engineering  (1-3) 
Continuation  of  I.E.  321. 


Industrial  Engineering      177 


125   Pi  odiH  tion  Control  (3) 

A  study  of  the  decision  rules,  and  mathematical  and  eco- 
nomic models  of  production  forecasting,  scheduling,  order 
control,  and  inventory  control.  I  '.isc  problems  .tnd  labor. i 

Prerequisite:  I.E.  206  or  consent  ot  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

''I    Organizational  Planning  and  t  ontrol  (3) 
Design  of  organization  and  procedures  for  managing  func- 
tions of  industrial  engineering.  Analysis  and  design  of  re- 
sources planning  and  control,  including  introduction  of 
change  in  man-machine  systems;  manpower  management  and 
wage  administration.  Prerequisites:  I.E.  102  or  166  or  168. 

335.  Sampling  and  Quality  Control  (3) 

Random,  stratified  and  optimal  sampling  plans,  using  fixed 
and  sequentially  determined  sample  sizes.  Application  to 
quality  assurance  and  other  analyses  of  operations.  Stochastic 
methods  for  continuous  inspection  and  Bayesian  procedures 
for  acceptance  inspection.  Prerequisite:  I.E.  205  or  consent 
of  the  chairman  of  department. 

336.  Analysis  of  Experimental  Data  (3) 

Design  of  simultaneous  experiments  including  randomization, 
blocking,  analysis  of  variance  with  equal  cell  frequencies  and 
general  regression.  Prerequisite:  I.E.  205  or  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

340.  Production  Engineering  (3) 

Introduction  to  mechanization  and  automation  of  product 
manufacturing.  Partial  mechanization,  engineering  materials 
utilization,  product  design  analysis,  special  processing 
methods,  economic  analysis  of  processing  design  alternatives. 
Term  project.  Prerequisite:  I.E.  101. 

344.  Metal  Cutting  Theory  (3) 

Intensive  study  of  metal  cutting  emphasizing  temperature 
and  energy  relationships  and  their  effect  on  tool  life,  power 
requirements  and  surface  finish.  Economic  balancing  of  metal 
cutting  variables  from  application  of  theory.  Lectures  and 
laboratory  experiments  including  designing  and  conducting 
an  original  experiment.  Prerequisite:  I.E.  101. 

For  Graduates 

Programs  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  are  offered 
by  the  department  of  industrial  engineering  in  the  following 
fields:  manufacturing  engineering,  information  systems,  and 
operations  research. 

Master  of  Science  in  Industrial  Engineering 

The  minimum  program  for  the  M.S.  degree  consists  of 
twenty-four  hours  of  approved  course  work  and  completion 
of  a  satisfactory  thesis. 

An  M.S.  program  is  selected  to  meet  the  interests  and 
needs  of  the  student,  and  courses  in  other  departments  for 
which  the  student  has  the  prerequisites  may  be  integrated 
into  the  major  field.  Subject  to  proper  approval,  nine  hours 


"i   100-lcvcl  (  nurses  from  outside  the  department  may  be 

included  among  the  courses  required  in  the  major  field.  As 
part  of  a  purposeful  majoi  program  coll.ner.il  courses  may  be 
taken  in  other  brain  lies  ot  engineering,  mathematics,  eco- 
nomii    .  psychology,  and  information  science. 

/ 1, ',  i,  i)  . '/  /'',,/,  i .,  ,pli  ,■  ,,|  /,,,/,,  atrial  I  ngim  ering 

The  I'll. I),  program  is  organized  to  meet  the  individual  goals 
and  interests  of  industrial  engineering  students  who  plan  to 
engage  in  teaching,  consulting,  or  research  activities  in  indus 
trial,  governmental,  or  educational  environments.  The  objec- 
tive of  the  program  is  to  educate  these  students  to  perform 
their  respective  activities  at  a  high  level  of  proficiency.  To 
this  end,  each  doctoral  student  is  required  to:  (1)  demon- 
strate competency  in  several  broad  fields  of  industrial  engi- 
neering related  to  his  area  of  interest;  (2)  prepare  himself, 
through  formal  course  work  and  independent  study,  for  ex- 
amination in  his  particular  area  of  specialization  by  members 
of  the  graduate  faculty;  and  (3)  present  a  dissertation  related 
to  his  field  of  specialization  which  embodies  the  results  of 
original  research,  shows  evidence  of  high  scholarship,  and 
constitutes  a  contribution  to  knowledge. 

Further  information  about  the  Ph.D.  program  is  con- 
tained in  the  Graduate  School  section  of  this  catalog  and  in  a 
brochure  prepared  by  the  department  of  industrial  engineer- 
ing entitled,  "The  Ph.D.  Program  in  Industrial  Engineering." 

Areas  of  Graduate  Study.  The  areas  of  graduate  study  and 
research  which  are  emphasized  in  the  department  of  indus- 
trial engineering  are: 

Operations  Research.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  both  the  devel- 
opment and  applications  of  Operations  Research  techniques. 
The  program  is  strongly  analytical  in  approach  and  content. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  understanding  practical  problems  so 
that  suitable  mathematical  models  can  be  selected  or  devel- 
oped. Such  models  may  be  drawn  from  such  areas  as  inven- 
tory theory,  queueing  theory,  simulation,  decision  theory, 
dynamic  programming,  and  mathematical  programming 
theory.  The  operations  research  student  is  motivated  by  a 
program  which  emphasizes  the  mathematical,  probabilistic, 
statistical,  and  computer  sciences. 

Information  Systems.  The  field  of  information  systems  em- 
bodies management  information  for  decision-making  and 
planning,  operational  systems  to  control  man-machine  activi- 
ty, and  methods  for  system  analysis  and  design.  The  role  of 
the  human  is  stressed  in  data  gathering,  information  process- 
ing and  interaction  with  system  output.  Study  and  research 
work  relate  to  performance  of  computer-based  systems,  in- 
cluding evaluation  criteria  and  cost  effectiveness.  Project 
management,  simulation,  data  management  and  economic 
analysis  principles  and  techniques  are  employed  as  basic  tools 
in  research  activities. 

Manufacturing  Engineering.  Graduate  study  in  manufacturing 
engineering  involves  course  work  and  research  opportunities 
in  specific  areas  related  to  manufacturing.  The  department  is 
currently  interested  in  such  areas  as  metal  processing  theory 


1  78      Industrial  Engineering 


automation  and  numerical  control,  manufacturing  systems 
and  management,  and  work  systems.  Additional  related 
courses  are  offered  in  other  departments  in  the  College  of 
Engineering.  The  Manufacturing  Processes  Laboratory  is 
available  for  the  study  of  metal  cutting  processes  and  the  lab 
is  coupled  with  course  offerings  in  the  same  area. 

Facilities.  The  offices  and  laboratories  of  the  department  are 
located  in  the  James  Ward  Packard  Laboratory.  Available  for 
graduate  study  and  research  within  the  department  are  a 
modern  metal  processing  research  laboratory  and  a  SCI  5800 
(Computer  Systems,  Inc.)  Analog  Computer  with  over  one 
hundred  operational  amplifiers.  The  University's  Computing 
Center,  located  also  in  Packard  Laboratory,  is  equipped  with 
a  CDC  6400  system.  ■ 

The  department  offers  courses  during  the  late  afternoon 
for  the  convenience  of  students  who  are  employed  in  local 
industry  and  are  taking  graduate  work  on  a  part-time  basis. 
There  is  no  evening  program,  however. 

405.  Special  Topics  in  Industrial  Engineering  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  field  of  industrial  engineering. 

408.  (Acctg.  408)  Management  Information  Systems  (3) 
Information  as  a  resource  for  management  planning  and  con- 
trol. Integrated  and  total  systems  concepts  for  organizational 
data  files  and  information  processing.  Development  and 
implementation  of  computer  based  information  systems. 
Prerequisite:  Acctg.  311  or  I.E.  309  or  I.S.  422  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

410.  Design  of  Experiments  (3) 

Fixed,  mixed,  and  random  models,  fractional  factorials,  un- 
equal cell  frequencies.  Sequential  design  for  estimation  and 
optimization.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. 

415.  Manufacturing  Management  (3) 

Analysis  of  the  factors  entering  into  the  development  of 
manufacturing  management  philosophy;  decision-making 
process  in  areas  of  organization,  planning,  operation,  and 
control  of  manufacturing.  Influence  of  the  social,  technical, 
and  economic  environment  upon  manufacturing  management 
decisions, 

416.  Dynamic  Programming  (3) 

The  principles  of  optimality;  one-dimensional  processes, 
multi-dimensional  processes,  lagrange  multiplier  technique; 
markovian  decision  processes;  applications. 

417.  (Mgt.  417)  Advanced  Mathematical  Programming  (3) 
Theory  and  applications  of  the  extensions  of  linear  program- 
ming. Kuhn-Tucker  conditions,  gradient  methods  of  optimiza- 
tion, simplex  based  methods  of  non-linear  programming, 
integer  programming,  branch  and  bound,  zero-one  discrete 
programming  and  stochastic  programming.  Prerequisite:  a 
course  in  linear  programming. 


418.  Simulation  (3) 

Random  number  generation  and  testing;  design  of  simulation 

experiments  for  the  reduction  of  variance  of  estimators; 

simulation  languages;  application  of  simulation  to  industrial 

problems. 

425.  Production  Systems  (3) 

Mathematical  models  of  production  systems;  adaptive  control 
applied  to  production  systems;  computer  process  control; 
interaction  of  physical  system  and  information  system   dy- 
namic simulation. 

426.  Inventory  Theory  (3) 

Optimal  policies  in  deterministic  inventory  processes;  optimal 
policies  in  stochastic  inventory  processes;  operating  charac- 
teristics of  inventory  policies.  Prerequisite:  Math.  309  or  I.E. 
429  or  equivalent. 

427.  Queueing  Theory  (3) 

Single  server  queueing  processes,  Poisson  input  and  exponen- 
tial service  times,  Poisson  input  and  general  service  times, 
derivation  of  busy  period  distributions;  many  server  queueing 
processes;  applications.  Prerequisite:  Math.  309  or  I.E.  429  or 
equivalent. 

428.  Advanced  Work  Systems  (3) 

A  critical  evaluation  of  methods  improvement  and  work 
measurement  techniques.  Emphasis  on  the  design  of  complex 
work  systems,  and  reporting  systems  to  control  work.  Work 
sampling,  construction  of  standard  data,  mathematical 
models  of  work  systems.  Student  projects. 

429.  Stochastic  Processes  for  Engineers  (3) 

Markov  chains.  Applications  include  inventories,  queues, 
random  walk.  Also  discussed  are  discrete  models  of  Brownian 
motion  and  diffusion  processes.  Prerequisites:  a  course  in 
probability  theory  and  a  course  in  linear  algebra. 

430.  (Mgt.  430)  Management  Science  Project  (3) 

An  analysis  of  a  management  problem  and  design  of  its  solu- 
tion incorporating  management  science  techniques.  An  in- 
dividual written  report  is  required.  Recommended  to  be 
taken  in  the  last  semester  of  the  program. 

431.  Operations  Research  Seminar  (3) 

Extensive  study  of  selected  topics  in  techniques  and  models 
of  operations  research. 

433.  Manufacturing  Engineering  Seminar  (3) 
Extensive  study  of  selected  topics  in  the  research  and  devel- 
opment of  manufacturing  engineering  techniques. 

437.  Information  Systems  Seminar  (3) 

Extensive  investigation  of  selected  topics  in  theory,  analysis 

and  design  of  information  systems. 


Industrial  Engineering      1 79 


I  18.  Real  Time  Infoi  mation  (J) 

Planning  and  management  of  real  time,  on  line  information 
systems;  effect  of  data  Kinks,  multi-processing,  time-sharing, 
and  supervisory  routines;  data  gathering  and  display  tech- 
niques for  interactive  systems;  data  communications.  Prere- 
quisite: I.E.  310  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department, 

440.  Application  of  Automation  (3) 

Study  of  concepts  and  principles  of  design  in  fully  automatic 
production  lines;  influence  of  economic  factors;  partial  auto- 
mation; integration  into  existing  production  systems.  Case 
histories  witli  emphasis  on  problems  involved  in  application 
of  principles.  Plant  visits  and  guest  lecturers. 

141.  Network  Modeling  Techniques  (3) 

A  critical  study  of  various  network  modeling  techniques. 
Topics  include;  PERT,  CPM,  network  flows,  decision  trees, 
tlowgraph  analysis  and  GERT.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on 
the  modeling  and  analysis  of  systems  using  these  techniques. 

444.  Design  ol  Cutting  Tools  (3) 

A  study  of  design  paraments  including  tool  materials,  tool 
geometry  and  cutting  conditions  for  material  removal  opera- 
tions. Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  influence  of  tool  selec- 
tion variables,  on  economy  of  operation  and  conformance  to 
product  requirements. 

450.  Manufacturing  Problems  (3) 

Discussion  and  solution  of  manufacturing  problems  involving 
several  subfunctions,  with  emphasis  on  problem  identifica- 
tion and  definition;  selection  of  techniques  of  analysis;  pro- 
cedures for  evaluation  of  proposed  solutions. 

461.  Readings  (1-3) 

Intensive  study  of  some  area  of  industrial  engineering  which 

is  not  covered  in  general  courses. 

490.  Research  Methods  Seminar  (3) 

Research  methods  in  industrial  engineering;  discussion  and 
critical  analysis  of  current  industrial  engineering  research; 
practice  in  preparation  of  research  proposals. 


International  Relations 


Professors 

Carey  Bonthron  Joynt,  Ph.D., Chairman 
Henderson  Bampfield  Braddick,  Ph.D. 
Auric  Nichols  Dunlap,  Ph.D. 
OlesM.  Smolansky,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor 
Zdenek  J.  Slouka,  Ph.D. 


The  field  of  international  relations  poses  an  unprecedented 
challenge  to  student  and  teacher  alike  and  provides  a  stimula- 
ting focus  of  interest  for  undergraduate  education.  It  de- 
mands full  recognition  and  understanding  of  the  vast  forces 
which  are  shaping  the  world— wars,  nationalism,  political 
ideologies,  and  modern  technology.  The  leadership  and  re- 
sponsibilities of  the  United  States  in  the  world  arena  have 
created  a  need  for  broadly  educated  young  men  and  women 
who  possess  a  clear  appreciation  of  the  factors  which  in- 
fluence the  policies  of  nations. 

Students  will  approach  the  study  of  state  behavior 
through  courses  in  the  theory  and  techniques  of  diplomacy, 
the  history  of  modern  international  relations,  and  special 
seminars  in  international  law   international  organization,  and 
world  politics.  The  ultimate  objective  is  to  shape  and  develop 
well-informed  and  independent  observers  and  participants  in 
the  field  of  international  affairs.  The  flexibility  of  the  pro- 
gram permits  added  study  in  history,  government,  economics 
and  other  social  sciences. 

The  broad  knowledge  and  understanding  acquired  can  be 
utilized  in  careers  in  teaching,  the  Foreign  Service  of  the 
United  States  and  other  government  agencies,  international 
business,  and  the  legal  profession. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 
IR1.2  World  Politics  (6) 

Required  Major  Courses 

IR  341,  342  International  Relations  (6) 

IR  351,  352  International  Institutions  (6) 

IR  361,  362  International  Law  (6) 

IR  371,  372  Readings  in  International  Relations  (6) 

and  twelve  semester  hours  to  be  selected, 
with  the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  the 
department,  from  international  relations, 
history,  and  government.  A  senior  essay  is 
required. 


180    International  Relations 


Undergraduate  Courses 

1.  World  Politics  (3) 

An  introductory  analysis  of  the  major  concepts,  principles 
and  problems  involved  in  an  understanding  of  world  politics. 
An  interdisciplinary  approach  is  used,  stressing  the  impacts  of 
behavioral,  political,  economic,  demographical,  military,  legal 
and  institutional  factors  on  international  relations.  Considera- 
ble emphasis  is  placed  upon  current  international  develop- 
ments, essentially  as  case  studies. 

2.  World  Politics  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  foreign  policies  of  the  Great  Powers— 
the  United  States,  the  Soviet  Union,  Britain,  France, 
Germany,  Japan,  China  and  India—and  of  regional  groupings 
in  Asia,  the  Pacific,  the  Middle  East,  Black  Africa  and  Latin 
America.  Considerable  emphasis  is  placed  upon  current  inter- 
national developments,  essentially  as  case  studies. 

11.  European  International  Relations,  1815-1919  (3) 
Politics  of  the  Great  Powers;  clashes  of  interests  and  inter- 
national crises;  development  of  alliances  and  other  associa- 
tions of  states;  wars  and  peace  settlements;  unification  of 
Germany  and  Italy;  European  imperialism;  World  War  I  and 
the  peace  treaties. 

12.  European  International  Relations  Since  1919  (3) 

The  political  and  strategic  structure  of  Europe  in  the  1920's; 
the  rise  of  Germany  under  Hitler;  the  politics  of  international 
crises,  1935-39;  World  War  II  and  the  new  distribution  of 
power  in  Europe;  development  of  the  Cold  War;  European 
functional  integration;  contemporary  European  international 
problems;  European  relations  with  the  United  States. 

21.  The  Diplomacy  of  the  Far  East  to  1919  (3) 

The  opening  of  China  and  Japan;  the  modernization  of 
Japan;  China's  failure  to  modernize;  the  division  of  China 
into  spheres  of  influence;  international  rivalries  in  Korea, 
Manchuria,  and  Southeast  Asia;  economic  and  territorial  im- 
perialism. 

22.  The  Diplomacy  of  the  Far  East  Since  1919  (3) 

An  analysis  of  recent  and  contemporary  political  and  eco- 
nomic problems  confronting  not  only  the  countries  of  the 
Orient  but  the  other  powers  with  interests  in  that  region; 
Japan's  attempt  to  establish  a  New  Order  in  Greater  East 
Asia;  the  defeat  and  recovery  of  Japan;  the  ascendancy  of 
communism  in  China  and  its  consequences. 

31.  The  Middle  East  in  World  Affairs  (3) 

An  analysis  of  the  political,  economic  and  social  forces  which 
have  led  to  the  rise  of  the  modern  states  in  the  Middle  East. 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon  the  role  of  the  area  in  inter- 
national politics  from  the  invasion  of  Egypt  by  Napoleon  to 
1918. 


32.  The  Middle  East  in  World  Affairs  (3) 

The  mandates  system  and  the  Palestine  problem;  movements 
of  modernization  in  Turkey  and  Iran;  the  rise  of  Arab 
nationalism;  the  impact  of  the  Second  World  War  upon  the 
position  of  Britain  and  France;  the  growth  in  influence  of  the 
United  States  and  the  Soviet  Union;  the  emergence  of  Israel 
and  its  impact  on  the  Arab  states;  the  rise  of  Nasserism  and 
the  Suez  Crisis;  the  growth  of  neutralism. 

133.  The  Diplomacy  of  Russia  to  1917  (3) 

Development  and  expansion  of  the  Russian  Empire;  princi- 
ples of  Russian  foreign  policy  and  their  specific  applications 
under  the  Tsarist  and  Provisional  Governments,  treated  par- 
tially as  backgrounds  of  Soviet  policy;  interaction  between 
Russian  domestic  and  foreign  affairs. 

134.  The  Diplomacy  of  Russia  Since  1917  (3) 

A  topical  and  chronological  survey  of  Russian  foreign  rela- 
tions in  the  Soviet  period;  philosophical,  psychological,  eco- 
nomic, social,  and  other  factors  influencing  the  formulation 
and  execution  of  foreign  policy;  interaction  between  Soviet 
domestic  and  foreign  affairs. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 
300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  I.R. (3) 

311.  World  Affairs,  1919-1945  (3) 

The  structure  and  politics  of  the  state  system  after  World  War 
I;  ideals  and  realities  of  the  League  of  Nations;  rise  of 
Germany,  Japan  and  Italy  to  challenge  the  established  order; 
analysis  of  the  political  and  strategic  background  to  appease- 
ment; the  international  crises  of  the  1930's;  the  Second 
World  War.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

312.  World  Affairs  Since  1945  (3) 

The  impact  of  World  War  II  upon  the  state  system;  the  Cold 
War  and  the  development  of  bipolar  international  politics; 
the  United  Nations  as  an  instrument  for  international  order 
and  security;  the  decline  of  the  colonial  system  and  the  emer- 
gence of  new  states;  development  of  Communist  China  and 
Western  Europe  as  new  power  centers;  contemporary  prob- 
lems in  international  relations.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

313.  (Rel.  313)  Religion  and  International  Affairs  (3) 
Theological  assessments  of  the  nation-state,  the  role  of  power 
in  international  affairs,  national  sovereignty  and  internation- 
alism, and  war,  pacificism,  and  alternative  methods  of 
conflict-resolution. 

323.  Southeast  Asia  in  World  Affairs  (3) 
Analysis  of  the  period  since  the  beginning  of  the  Second 
World  War  with  special  attention  to  the  effect  of  the 
Japanese  conquest  of  the  area,  the  rise  of  independent  states, 
the  development  of  the  foreign  policies  of  the  new  states, 
Great  Power  influence,  and  the  development  of  the  Vietnam 
conflict.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


International  Relations      181 


324.  The  l.ii  East  in  World  Affairs    I 
Analysis  of  the  period  since  the  Second  World  War  with 
special  attention  to  the  foreign  policy  of  Communist  China, 
the  foreign  policy  ol  Japan  since  the  peace  treat)  and  the 
roK-  of  the  Great  Powers  in  the  various  postwar  irises  in  the 
Prerequisite:  consent  ol  chairman  of  department. 

334.  Tin-  Soviet  Union  in  World  Affairs  (3) 
An  appraisal  ol  the  objectives  and  tactics  of  Soviet  diplo- 
macy, with  particular  emphasis  upon  Russia's  status  as  one  ol 
the  (.'.rc.it  Towers,  and  upon  contemporary  Soviet  American 
relations  and  their  backgrounds.  Prerequisite:  I.R.  134  or 
consent  oi  chairman  ol  department. 

341.  International  Relations  (3) 

An  examination  of  contemporary  theories  and  basic  concepts 
of  world  politics,  with  application  to  historic  and  current 
issues  of  international  politics.  Consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. 

342.  International  Relations  (3) 

An  examination  of  the  role  of  force  in  international  politics 
including  an  analysis  of  deterrence,  limited  war,  arms  control 
and  disarmament  problems  and  crisis  diplomacy.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

351.  International  Institutions  (3) 

Theory  and  functioning  of  the  League  of  Nations  and  the 
United  Nations  with  particular  reference  to  the  problems  of 
collective  security,  enforcement,  and  the  pacific  settlement 
of  disputes;  functional  and  regional  organizations;  diplomacy 
by  conference;  state  sovereignty  and  inter-state  organization. 

352.  International  Institutions  (3) 

Continuation  of  I.R.  351,  with  emphasis  upon  the  United 
Nations. 

361.  International  Law  (3) 

General  theories  of  law  and  their  application  to  international 
law;  international  lawmaking,  adjudication  and  enforcement; 
personality  of  states,  international  organizations,  corpora- 
tions and  persons;  state  succession;  title  to  territory;  jurisdic- 
tion over  territory,  waters,  airspace,  outer  space  and  persons; 
the  state  and  the  foreign  corporation. 

362.  International  Law  (3) 

Privileges  and  immunities  of  diplomatic  and  consular  officers 
and  of  international  organizations;  treaties  and  agreements; 
pacific  settlement;  measures  short  of  war;  collective  security; 
the  legal  status  of  war  and  the  laws  of  war;  war  crimes  trials 
and  international  criminal  jurisdiction. 

371.  Readings  in  International  Relations  (3) 
Directed  studies  and  readings  in  the  several  fields  of  inter- 
national relations,  designed  for  the  student  who  has  a  special 
competence  or  interest  in  some  area  not  covered  by  regularly 
rostered  courses.  May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


372.  Readings  in  International  Relations  (3) 
Continuation  of  I.R.  371 .  May  be  repi  ated  lor  credit.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  ol  chairman  of  department, 

3S1 .  Spi'i  ial  Topics  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  aspects  of  international  politics 
not  covered  in  another  course.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

382.  Special  Topics  (3) 

A  continuation  of  I.R.  381.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

391.  The  Teaching  ol  International  Relations  (3) 
Lectures,  readings  and  discussion  of  fundamental  concepts, 
principles  and  problems  of  international  relations,  with  cur- 
rent applications.  Open  only  to  present  and  prospective 
junior  and  senior  high  school  teachers. 

For  Graduates 

Between  twelve  and  fifteen  students  currently  are  pursuing 
the  master  of  arts  degree  in  the  department  of  international 
relations.  The  Ph.D.  is  not  offered. 

Each  student's  program  is  planned  on  an  individual  basis 
to  take  advantage  of  his  previous  academic  work  and  his 
career  goals. 

A  thorough  understanding  is  required  of  basic  theoretical 
issues  and,  unless  the  student  comes  prepared,  he  will  be  ex- 
pected to  undertake  a  course  in  theoretical  analysis.  Em- 
phasis throughout  the  department  is  upon  the  fundamentals 
of  international  politics  as  they  affect  international  law  and 
institutions  and  the  policies  and  activities  of  the  Great 
Powers. 

The  department  offers  advanced  work  in  theories  of  inter- 
national politics  and  special  work  in  Soviet  affairs,  Middle 
Eastern  politics,  European  international  relations  between 
the  wars,  international  law  and  military  problems  as  well  as 
arms  control  and  disarmament  studies.  The  department  feels 
this  is  attractive  preparation  for  a  student  who  wishes  to  con- 
tinue work  toward  the  doctorate,  as  a  great  many  depart- 
mental majors  have  done  at  leading  institutions  in  this 
country  and  abroad. 

Candidates  for  the  master's  degree  may  qualify  either  by 
completing  successfully  thirty  hours  of  approved  course  work 
and  passing  an  examination  covering  the  entire  field  or  by 
completing  twenty-four  hours  in  approved  courses  and  sub- 
mitting a  satisfactory  thesis.  Each  candidate  will  select  the 
plan  better  suited  to  his  needs  and  abilities,  upon  the  advice 
and  with  the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  the  department, 
and  will  be  required  to  take  a  comprehensive  oral  examina- 
tion. In  addition,  each  candidate  is  normally  expected  to 
possess  an  adequate  reading  knowledge  of  one  modern 
foreign  language. 

Students  will  be  encouraged  to  include  in  their  programs 
appropriate  courses  in  economics,  government,  history, 
psychology,  and  social  relations. 


182     International  Relations 


441.  Seminar  in  International  Relations  (3) 

Intensive  analysis  of  selected  forces  and  problems  of  world 
politics. 

442.  Seminar  in  International  Relations  (3) 
Continuation  of  I.R.  441. 


Management  &  Finance 


451.  Seminar  in  International  Organization  (3) 
Intensive  analysis  of  selected  agencies  and  activities  of  the 
League  of  Nations  and  affiliated  institutions. 

452.  Seminar  in  International  Organization  (3) 
Continuation  of  I.R.  451,  with  emphasis  upon  the  United 
Nations. 

461.  Seminar  in  International  Law  (3) 

Intensive  analysis  of  the  principal  theories  concerning  the 
nature  of  international  law  and  its  fundamental  conceptions, 
with  special  studies  of  their  application  and  significance  in 
contemporary  international  society. 

462.  Seminar  in  International  Law  (3) 
Continuation  of  I.R.  461. 

471.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  field  of  international  politics  not 
covered  in  other  courses.  May  be  repeated  ior  credit.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

472.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Continuation  of  I.R.  471.  May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


Professors 

James  B.  Hobbs,  D.B.A.,  Chairman 

Brian  G.  Brockway,  LL.M.,  Dean  of  the  College  of  Business 

and  Economics 

Eli  Schwartz,  Ph.D. 

L.  Reed  Tripp,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Carl  R.  Beidleman,  Ph.D. 

John  W.  Bonge.Ph.D. 

Leon  Elwood  Krouse,  Ph.D. 

Benjamin  Litt,  Ph.D. 

Max  Donald  Snider,  M.B.A.,  Assistant  Dean  of  the  College  of 

Business  and  Economics 

Gary  E.  Whitehouse,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Bruce  M.  Smackey,  Ph.D. 
Charles  F.  Vihon,  D.J. 

Adjunct  Professors 

Harry  A.  Dower,  LL.B. 
Edward  H.  McGee,  LL.B. 


Instructors 

James  A.  Greenleaf,  M.A. 
Jay  C.  Lacke,  M.B.A. 
Edward  W.  Schmitt,  M.B.A. 


Finance 

Major  in  Arts  and  Science  College 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Math  41  BMSS  Calculus  I  (3) 

Math  42  BMSS  Probability  (3) 

Math  43  BMSS  Linear  Algebra  (3) 

Fin  225  Business  Finance  (3) 

Eco  129  Money  and  Banking  (3) 

Eco  45  Statistical  Method  (3) 

Acctg  108  Fundamentals  of  Accounting  (3) 


Management  and  Finance      183 


Fin 

12  ) 

Fin 

12  i 

Fin 

Fin 

330 

Fin 

»31 

Fin 

(Eco 

)332 

Fin 

(Eco 

)340 

Fin 

(Eco 

)  553 

Fin 

(Eco 

)  354 

Fin 

.171 

Fin 

372 

Required:  tS  credits  beyond  the  core  listed  on  page  35,  from 
the  following: 

Investments 

Security  Analysis  (3) 

Problems  in  Financial  Management  (3) 

Financial  Flows  and  Markets  (3) 

Bank  Management  (3) 

Monetary-Fiscal  Policy  (3) 

International  Finance  (3) 

Public  Finance:  Federal  (3) 

Public  Finance:  State  and  Local  (3) 

Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Major  in  Business  and  Economics  College 

Required:  IS  credits  beyond  the  core  listed  on  page  40,  from 
the  following: 

Investments  (3) 

Security  Analysis  (3) 

Problems  in  Financial  Mangement  (3) 

Financial  Flows  and  Markets  (3) 

Bank  Management  (3) 

Monetary-Fiscal  Policy  (3) 

International  Finance  (3) 

Public  Finance:  Federal  (3) 

Public  Finance:  State  and  Local  (3) 

Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Special  Topics  (1-3) 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

225.  Business  Finance  (3) 

An  introductory  course  in  corporation  finance  which  stresses 
the  management  approach  as  it  applies  to  asset  management 
and  capital  structure.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  financial  policies 
regarding  the  acquisition  of  funds  and  their  allocation  to 
competing  assets  within  the  firm.  Problems  are  used  to  illus- 
trate the  principles  involved.  Prerequisites:  Eco.  3  and  Acctg. 
51  or  Acctg.  108. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Fin. (1-3) 

323.  Investments  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  investment  process.  The  nature  of  risk 
and  the  form  of  returns  to  financial  assets  are  examined.  In- 
vestor objectives,  attitudes  and  constraints  are  considered  in 
conjunction  with  the  risk-return  matrix  as  the  basis  for  in- 
vestment decisions.  Problems  of  timing,  market  characteris- 
tics and  portfolio  management  are  also  treated.  Prerequisite: 
a  course  in  corporation  finance. 

324.  Security  Analysis  (3) 

Examination  of  factors  which  influence  the  value  of  financial 
securities,  including  earnings  forecasts  and  expectations,  un- 
certainty, investor  attitudes,  required  returns,  and  the  supply 
and  demand  for  securities  and  funds.  Also  considered  are 
market  factors,  technical  approaches,  timing,  screening,  and 


Fin 

323 

Fin 

324 

Fin 

326 

Fin 

330 

Fin 

331 

Fin 

(Eco 

)  332 

Fin 

(Eco 

1  340 

Fin 

(Eco 

)  353 

Fin 

(Eco 

)354 

Fin 

371 

Fin 

372 

ilio  implications.  Prerequisite:  :i  course  in  corporation 
finance. 

32d.  Problems  in  I  ni.nui.il  Management  (3) 

Consideration  is  given  to  tin-  financial  policies  of  manage- 
ment, with  considerable  emphasis  placed  on  the  corporation's 
relationship  to  government  and  the  general  economy.  Prere- 
quisite: a  course  in  corporation  finance. 

330.  Financial  Flows  and  Markets  (3) 

The  nature  and  role  of  financial  intermediaries  in  financial 
markets  from  a  flow  of-tunds  perspective.  Emphasis  is  on  the 
interrelationships  between  financial  and  non-financial  flows 
in  the  economy,  and  the  forecasting  of  interest  rate  struc- 
tures. Prerequisite:  junior  standing. 

331.  Bank  Management  (3) 

The  management  of  bank  resources  and  assets  within  the 
framework  of  economic  and  legal  constraints.  Particular 
attention  is  given  to  optimizing  the  objectives  of  profitabili- 
ty, safety,  and  liquidity.  Completion  of  a  project  in  bank 
management  is  required  of  each  student.  Prerequisite:  senior 
standing. 

332.  (Eco.  332)  Monetary-Fiscal  Policy  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  332. 

340.  (Eco.  340)  International  Finance  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  340. 

353.  (Eco.  353)  Public  Finance:  Federal  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  353. 

354.  (Eco.  354)  Public  Finance:  State  and  Local  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  354. 

371.  Directed  Readings  (3) 

A  course  of  readings  in  various  fields  of  finance,  designed  for 
the  student  who  has  a  special  interest  in  some  field  of  finance 
not  covered  in  scheduled  courses.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in 
finance  acceptable  to  the  department  chairman. 

372.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  finance  for  which  no  regularly 
scheduled  coursework  exists.  When  offered  as  group  study, 
coverage  will  vary  according  to  interests  of  instructor  and 
students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  finance  acceptable  to 
the  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

For  Graduates 

415.  (Eco.  415)  Capital  and  Interest  Theory  (3) 
Examination  of  theories  of  interest  and  capital.  The  follow- 
ing topics  are  investigated:  present  value  theory;  investment 
valuation  under  certainty  and  risk;  term  structure  of  interest 
rates;  the  theory  of  savings,  cost  of  capital,  and  capital  forma- 
tion. Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 


184     Management  and  Finance 


421.  Financial  Management  (3) 

A  decision-oriented  course  which  integrates  the  theory  and 
practice  of  business  finance.  Among  the  topics  included  are 
working  capital  management,  capital  expenditure  decisions, 
functions  of  the  capital  markets,  mergers,  dividend  policy, 
capital  structure,  valuation  and  the  cost  of  capital.  The  effect 
of  uncertainty  on  the  problems  of  financial  analysis  is  con- 
sidered. Readings,  case  problems  and  decision-oriented  re- 
ports are  utilized  to  illustrate  the  principles  involved.  Prere- 
quisite: Fin.  225  and  E.co.  129. 

425.  (Eco.  425)  Public  Finance  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  425. 

431.  Advanced  Investment  Analysis  and  Portfolio 
Management  (3) 

This  course  is  designed  to  integrate  the  theoretical  and  em- 
pirical aspects  of  the  economic  environment  with  the  invest- 
ment analysis  associated  with  portfolio  management  program 
of  financial  intermediaries  and  individuals.  Particular  em- 
phasis will  be  given  in  the  course  to  the  current  impingements 
of  the  economic  environment  upon  portfolio  management 
decisions.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  investments. 

442.  (Eco.  442)  Foreign  Trade  Management  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  442. 

444.  (Eco.  444)  Banking  and  Monetary  Policy  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Eco.  444. 

451.  Quantitative  Financial  Models  (3) 
A  survey  of  quantitative  models  as  they  relate  to  financial 
theory  and  applications.  Finance  topics  include  capital  bud- 
geting, portfolio  selection,  security  evaluation,  cash  manage- 
ment, inventory  policy  and  credit  analysis.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor. 

471.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Graduate  readings  in  finance  not  covered  in  regularly  sched- 
uled coursework.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  finance 
acceptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

472.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  finance  for  which  no  regularly 
scheduled  graduate  coursework  exists.  When  offered  as  group 
study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  interests  in  finance 
acceptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

Law 

Undergraduate  Courses 

101.  Business  Law  (3) 

The  law  of  contracts,  sales  and  bailments;  legal  method  and 
the  judicial  process. 


102.  Business  Law  (3) 

The  law  of  negotiable  instruments,  bank  deposits  and  collec- 
tions, secured  transactions,  and  business  organizations 
(agency,  partnerships,  and  corporations).  Prerequisite:  Law 
101. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

211.  Legal  Concepts  (3) 

Study  of  legal  reasoning,  law  as  a  process  of  resolving  dis- 
putes, law  as  an  instrument  of  social  control;  selected  prob- 
lems in  ownership;  provisions  for  the  redress  of  harm;  main- 
tenance of  law  and  order. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Law (1-3) 

320.  Social  Change  and  the  Law  (3) 

Examination  of  how  law  and  the  legal  process  accommodate 
society's  pressures  for  change  within  existing  institutional 
frameworks.  Representative  topics  include  fair  employment 
practices,  open  housing,  consumer  credit  and  protection,  and 
private  and  public  access  to  information.  Prerequisite:  Law 
101  or  Law  211. 

For  Graduates 

401.  Legal  Problems  in  Business  (3) 

Specific  legal  problems  involved  in  making  business  decisions. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  preventive  law  and  the  tax  conse- 
quences of  business  transactions.  Prerequisite:  Law  101  or 
102. 

410.  Law  and  Urban  Society  (3) 

Exploration  of  the  juridical  aspects  of  and  conditions  for 
institutionalized  decision-making  in  urbanized  society.  Topics 
include  the  relationship  between  public  and  private  decision- 
making and  the  distribution  of  legal  power  between  levels  of 
government.  Prerequisite:  Law  101  or  Law  211. 


Management 

Major  in  Business  and  Economics 

Required:  IS  credits  beyond  the  core  listed  on  page  40  from 
the  following: 


Required  Courses 


Mgt  301 
Mgt  302 

Elective  Courses 


Business  Management  Policies  (3) 
Quantitative  Models— Conceptual  (3) 


Three  courses  (9  credit  hours)  may  be  selected  from  the  fol- 
lowing, with  no  more  than  six  credits  taken  from  outside  the 
College  of  Business  and  Economics. 

Mgt  304  Quantitative  Models— Applications  (3) 

Mgt  321  Organization  Behavior  (3) 

Mgt  331  Industrial  Relations  (3) 


Management  and  Finance:  Law      185 


Mgl  ?71  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Mgl  Special  ropics  (1-3) 

>ll  Accounting  Information  System  (3) 

Manpower  Economics  (3) 
i  i      )38  Laboi  Market  Institutions  (3) 

Eco  352  Advanced  Statistical  Methods  (3) 

Public  Administration  (3) 
IE  ) ; 1  Organization  and  Administration  (3) 

121  Encountering  Self  and  Others  (3) 

Psych  201  Industrial  Psychology  (3) 

Psych  251  Psychologic.il  Perspectives  in  Technological 

Society  (3) 
SR  30  ;  Group  and  Organization  (3) 

SR  304  Human  Communication  (3) 

SR  383  Industrial  Sociology  (3) 


Undergraduate  Courses 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Mgt. 


(1-3) 


301.  Business  Management  Policies  (3) 

A  study  ot  business  problems  and  the  formulation  of  policies 
to  meet  these  problems  from  the  viewpoint  of  general 
management,  integrating  knowledge  acquired  in  other  courses 
in  order  to  develop  skill  in  policy  formulation  for  particular 
functions  and  for  companies  as  a  whole.  Long  range  goals' 
attainment  and  the  required  administration  actions  will  be 
emphasized.  The  course  is  supplemented  by  case  studies, 
simulation  games,  and  interactions  with  management  of  local 
industry.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing  in  management  or 
marketing  major,  or  senior  standing  in  College  of  Business 
and  Economics  with  consent  of  department  chairman. 

302.  Quantitative  Models— Conceptual  (3) 

Survey  course  of  various  management  science  models  and 
methods;  mathematical  programming,  inventory,  queueing, 
maintenance  and  replacement,  simulation,  PERT  and  CPM, 
line  of  balance,  and  game  theory.  Prerequisites:  Eco.  45, 
Acctg.  Ill,  and  one  semester  of  calculus. 

304.  Quantitative  Models— Applications  (3) 
Extension  and  application  of  selected  topics  covered  in  Mgt. 
302.  Development  of  term  projects  to  solve  practical  prob- 
lems. Prerequisite:  Mgt.  302. 

321.  Organization  Behavior  (3) 

Focus  on  three  interpersonal  processes  that  underlie  most 
behavior  interactions  in  work  groups:  (1)  conflict  behavior 
and  modes  of  conflict  resolution;  (2)  competitive  behavior  in 
individual  and  small  groups;  and  (3)  cooperative  behavior 
(ritualistic  and  non-ritualistic).  Prerequisite:  Mgt.  201  (or  a 
course  in  psychology)  and  permission  of  the  department 
head. 

371.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Readings  in  various  fields  of  management,  designed  for  the 
student  who  has  a  special  interest  in  some  field  of  manage- 
ment not  covered  by  the  regularly  scheduled  courses.  Prere- 


quisite: preparation  in  managemenl  acceptable  to  the  de- 
partment chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

372.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  management  lor  which  no 

regularly  scheduled  courscwork  exists.  When  offered  as  group 

study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  interests  of  instructor 

and  students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  management 

ii .  eptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

412.  Organization  Structures  and  Processes  (3) 
An  examination  ot  the  structure  and  processes  of  organiza- 
tions. The  traditional  bureaucratic  model  of  managing  work 
and  information  flow  is  contrasted  with  the  behavioral 
decision-making  model  of  the  firm.  A  synthesis  of  these  per- 
spectives is  sought  through  a  study  of  the  contemporary 
theory  of  organization.  Classroom  activity  centers  around  the 
discussion  of  research-based  theories  and  the  analysis  of  case 
problems.  Prerequisite:  Mgt.  201  or  a  contingency  course  in 
psychology  and  permission  of  the  instructor. 

417.  (I.E.  417)  Advanced  Mathematical  Programming  (3) 
For  description,  see  I.E.  417. 

418.  Analytical  Methods  in  Management  (3) 
Application  of  management  science  methods  to  industrial 
and  commercial  problems.  Scientific  method,  decision 
theory,  linear  programming,  inventory  control,  regression 
analysis,  forecasting,  simulation,  and  related  areas  are  exam- 
ined in  the  context  of  accounting,  finance,  marketing  and 
manufacturing.  Prerequisite:  Mgt.  302  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

430.  (I.E.  430)  Management  Science  Project  (3) 
As  an  individual  or  as  a  member  of  a  small  group,  an  analysis 
is  made  of  a  management  problem  and  the  design  of  its  solu- 
tion is  made  in  corporating  management  science  techniques. 
An  individual  written  report  is  required.  Recommended  that 
it  be  taken  in  the  last  semester  of  the  M.S.  in  management 
science  program. 

451.  Managerial  Policy  and  Decision-Making  (3) 
Integration  of  theory  and  analytic  techniques  through  inten- 
sive investigation  of  complex  economic  and  financial  prob- 
lems in  corporations.  A  case-study  approach  is  used.  Topics 
include  economic  and  accounting  cost  analysis,  price  determi- 
nation, demand  forecasting,  capital  investment  analysis,  risk 
and  uncertainty,  and  the  economic  evaluation  of  alternatives. 
Prerequisites:  graduate  level  exposure  to  accounting,  eco- 
nomics, finance,  management  and  marketing.  An  MBA  stu- 
dent should  take  the  course  in  the  last  semester  of  his  MBA 
program. 

471.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Graduate  readings  in  management  not  covered  in  regularly 
scheduled  coursework.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  manage- 
ment acceptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  re- 
peated. 


186     Management  and  Finance 


472.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  management  for  which  no 
regularly  scheduled  graduate  coursework  exists.  When  offered 
as  group  study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  interest  of 
instructor  and  students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  manage- 
ment acceptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  re- 
peated. 


Marketing 


Major  in  Business  and  Economics  College 

Required:  15  credits  beyond  the  core  listed  on  page  40  fron 
the  following: 


Required  Courses 


Business  Management  Policies  (3) 
Quantitative  Models— Conceptual  (3) 
Marketing  Research  (3) 


Mgt  301 
Mgt  302 
Mkt312 

Elective  Courses 

Two  courses  (6  credit  hours)  from  the  following: 

Mkt  213  Marketing  Communications  (3) 

Mkt  220  Behavioral  Aspects  of  Selling  (3) 

Mkt  315  Consumer  Behavior  (3) 

Mkt  317  Industrial  Marketing  (3) 

Mkt  319  New  Product  Planning  (3) 

Mkt  371  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Mkt  372  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

211.  The  American  Marketing  System  (3) 
Examination  and  analysis  ot  the  contemporary  marketing 
system  within  a  conceptual  and  systems-oriented  approach; 
as  a  social  institution;  specific  marketing  activities;  and  evalu- 
ation of  its  socioeconomic  strengths  and  weaknesses. 

213.  Marketing  Communications  (3) 

The  purposes  and  effects  of  marketing  communications  in- 
cluding the  formation,  performance,  and  dissolution  of 
channels  of  communications,  and  socioeconomic  aspects. 
Prerequisite:  Mkt.  211. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

220.  Behavioral  Aspects  of  Selling  (3) 

Analysis  and  application  of  behavioral  science  concepts  to 
the  sales  transaction.  The  role  of  personal  selling  in  the  total 
mix  of  available  marketing  communications  is  examined 
through  case  problems  and  field  work.  Prerequisite:  Mkt.  211 
and  consent  of  instructor. 


300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Mkt. 


(1-3) 


312.  Marketing  Research  (3) 

Use  of  quantitative  and  qualitative  information  in  routine 
and  non-recurring  decision-making.  Topics  include  statistical 
design  of  marketing  studies,  model  building,  analysis  of  re- 
search studies,  and  the  development  of  marketing  informa- 
tion systems.  Case  problems  and  presentation  of  student 
research  projects  examine  problems  in  communicating 
research  results.  Prerequisites:  Mkt.  211  and  Eco.  45. 

315.  Consumer  Behavior  (3) 

Examination  of  principal  theories  which  the  fields  of  psy- 
chology, social  psychology,  anthropology,  and  economics 
contribute  toward  understanding  the  behavior  and  motiva- 
tions of  consumers.  Topics  include  consumer  needs  and 
wants;  learning  theory;  the  perceptual  process;  decision- 
making processes;  communication;  search  behavior;  market 
segmentation  and  product  differentiation;  and  the  adoption 
and  diffusion  of  innovations.  Prerequisite:  Mkt.  312  or 
equivalent. 

317.  Industrial  Marketing  (3) 

Analysis  of  marketing  problems  unique  to  manufacturers  of 
industrial  products.  Focus  on  planning  the  product  line,  de- 
veloping pricing  strategies,  analyzing  buyer  behavior,  and 
managing  customer  relations.  Case  problems.  Prerequisite: 
Mkt.  211  or  equivalent  background. 

319.  New  Product  Planning  (3) 

An  advanced  marketing  course  specializing  in  the  organiza- 
tion and  management  of  marketing  activities  related  to  the 
development  of  new  and  improved  products.  The  role  of 
marketing  research  and  pre-production  testing  in  the  com- 
mercialization process.  Application  of  simulation  and  risk 
analysis  to  the  screening  of  research  and  development  pro- 
jects. Prerequisite:  Mkt.  312  or  consent  of  department  head. 

371.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Readings  in  various  fields  ot  marketing,  designed  for  the  stu- 
dent who  has  a  special  interest  in  some  field  of  marketing  not 
covered  in  regularly  scheduled  courses.  Prerequisite:  prepara- 
tion in  marketing  acceptable  to  the  department  chairman. 
May  be  repeated. 

372.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  marketing  for  which  no  regu- 
larly scheduled  coursework  exists.  When  offered  as  group 
study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  the  interests  of  the 
instructor  and  students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  market- 
ing acceptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

For  Graduates 

420.  Managing  the  Sales  Effort  (3) 

Organizing  and  managing  the  sales  staff,  including  selection, 
training,  compensation,  motivation,  and  supervision.  Plan- 
ning, executing,  and  controlling  aspects  are  emphasized.  Pre- 
requisite: graduate  coursework  in  marketing,  or  the 
equivalent. 


Management  and  Finance:  Marketing     187 


I  Ml.  Marketing  l'l. inning  .mhI  Organization  (3) 

iduatc  course  in  marketing  with  an  emphasis  on  market 
ing  planning,  marketing  organization,  and  the  impact  ol  in- 
formation on  marketing  decision-making,  Analytical  exam- 
ination of  pricing,  product,  promotion,  and  distribution 
ilr,  ision:  development  of  competitive  strategies. 

471.  Directed  Readings  (1-3) 

Graduate  readings  in  marketing  not  covered  in  regularly 
scheduled  courses.  When  offered  as  group  study,  coverage 
will  vary  according  to  the  interests  of  the  instructor  and  stu- 
dents. Prerequisite:  preparation  in  marketing  acceptable  Co 
the  department  chairman.  May  be  repeated. 

472.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Special  problems  and  issues  in  marketing  for  which  no  regu- 
larly scheduled  graduate  coursework  exists.  When  offered  as 
group  study,  coverage  will  vary  according  to  the  interest  of 
the  instructor  and  students.  Prerequisite:  preparation  in  mar- 
keting acceptable  to  the  department  chairman.  May  be  re- 
peated. 


Mathematics 


Professors 

Arthur  Everett  Pitcher,  Ph.D.,  Chairman  and  Distinguished 

Professor 

Edward  F.  Assmus,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

Dominic  G.  B.  Edelen,  Ph.D. 

Bhaskar  Kumar  Ghosh,  Ph.D. 

Theodore  Hailperin,  Ph.D. 

Chuan-Chih  Hsiung,  Ph.D. 

Samir  Anton  Khabbaz,  Ph.D. 

Jerry  Porter  King,  Ph.D. 

Gilbert  Allan  Stenglc,  Ph.D. 

Albert  Wilansky,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Samuel  Linial  Gulden,  M.A. 
Gregory  T.  McAllister,  Ph.D. 
George  E.  McCluskey,  Ph.D. 
Gerhard  Rayna,  Ph.D. 
Murray  Schechter,  Ph.D. 
Andrew  Kagey  Snyder,  Ph.D. 
David  Trutt,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Franklin  S.  Brenneman,  Ph.D. 
Paul  L.  Davis,  Ph.D. 
Bennett  Eisenberg,  Ph.D. 
Gary  Bernard  Laison,  Ph.D. 
Robert  W.  Johnson,  Ph.D. 
Viswanatha  Raja  Gopala  Rao,  Ph.D. 
Ruth  Silverman,  Ph.D. 
Herbert  Bancroft  Skerry,  Ph.D. 

Lecturers 

Marguerite  B.  Gravez,  M.A. 
Gail  Chadwell  Herz,  Ph.D. 


The  major  in  mathematics  is  designed  to  cover  each  of  the 
three  main  divisions  of  mathematics:  Analysis,  Geometry, 
and  Algebra.  Rigor  and  abstraction,  properly  motivated,  are 
introduced  early  in  the  major  in  the  firm  belief  that  therein 
lies  the  essence  of  mathematics,  not  only  as  a  liberal  disci- 
pline studied  for  its  own  sake,  but  also  in  the  deeper  applica- 
tions of  mathematics  to  the  sciences.  On  completion  of  the 
major  program,  it  is  expected  that  the  student  will  have 
gained  an  appreciation  of  the  universal  character  of  the  sub- 
ject as  well  as  the  ability  to  think  in  mathematical  terms. 
With  this  broad  orientation,  he  could  readily  become  a 


188     Mathematics 


teacher  with  a  penetrating  knowledge  of  his  field,  a  skilled 
user  of  mathematics  in  one  of  the  rapidly  multiplying  posi- 
tions in  industry  and  government,  or  a  student  in  graduate 
school,  continuing  to  advance  to  the  frontiers  of  study  and 
research  in  mathematics. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Math  21  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Math  22  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Math  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

or 
Math  31  Calculus  (4) 

Math  32  Calculus  (4) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Math  219  Principles  of  Analysis  (3) 

Math  220  Principles  of  Analysis  (3) 

Math  226  Complex  Analysis  (3) 

Math  243  Algebra  (3) 

Math  244  Algebra  (3) 

Approved  Electives  (12) 

Note:  The  elective  courses  must  include  Math.  307  or  Math. 
320.  Both  may  be  selected.  Students  with  a  special  interest, 
such  as  applied  mathematics,  may  include  mathematically- 
oriented  200-  or  300-level  courses  offered  by  other  depart- 
ments. Approval  by  a  designated  representative  of  the  chair- 
man of  the  department  is  required. 

Students  interested  in  actuarial  science  can  major  in  mathe- 
matics, choosing  appropriate  courses  in  consultation  with  a 
representative  of  the  chairman  of  the  department,  to  prepare 
for  certain  of  the  actuarial  examinations. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

21.  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  I  (4) 

Functions  and  graphs;  limits  and  continuity;  derivative  and 
differential;  indefinite  and  definite  integral;  logarithm  and 
exponential. 

22.  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  II  (4) 

Trigonometric  and  hyperbolic  functions;  integration;  vector 
algebra  and  calculus;  solid  analytic  geometry.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  21. 


31.  Calculus  (4) 

Functions  and  graphs;  limits  and  continuity;  derivative  and 
differential;  indefinite  and  definite  integral;  logarithm   expo- 
nential, trigonometric  and  hyperbolic  functions;  integration; 
vector  algebra  and  calculus.  Math.  31  may  be  used  in  place  of 
Math.  21  to  satisfy  prerequisites.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

32.  Calculus  (4) 

Vector  calculus;  solid  analytic  geometry;  series;  Taylor's 
Theorem   approximations;  partial  derivatives;  multiple  inte- 
grals; line  and  surface  integrals;  differential  equations.  Math. 
32  may  be  used  in  place  of  Math.  23  to  satisfy  prerequisites. 
Prerequisite:  Math.  31. 

Mathematics  courses  41-44  are  designed  primarily  for  stu- 
dents of  the  Biological,  Management,  and  Social  Sciences. 

41.  BMSS  Calculus  (3) 

The  Riemann  integral,  the  derivative,  limits  and  continuous 
functions,  the  mean  value  theorem,  the  fundamental  theorem 
of  the  calculus,  antiderivatives,  applications  of  the  integral, 
maxima  and  minima,  infinite  sequences  and  series,  partial 
derivatives. 

42.  BMSS  Probability  (3) 

Sets,  functions,  counting  methods,  probability  spaces,  condi- 
tional probability  and  independence,  random  variables,  con- 
tinuous probability  spaces,  some  useful  probability  distribu- 
tions—binomial, hypergeometric,  Poisson,  uniform, 
exponential  and  normal. 

43.  BMSS  Linear  Algebra  (3) 

Matrices,  vectors,  vector  spaces  and  mathematical  systems, 
special  kinds  of  matrices,  elementary  matrix  transformations, 
systems  of  linear  equations,  convex  sets,  introduction  to 
linear  programming. 

44.  BMSS  Calculus  (3) 

Functions  of  several  variables,  applications  of  partial  deriva- 
tives, extreme  values  of  functions,  Lagrangian  multipliers, 
complex  variables  and  exponentials,  Euler's  formula,  calculus 
of  trigonometric  functions,  linear  difference  and  differential 
equations,  systems  of  linear  equations,  numerical  solution  of 
differential  equations.  Prerequisite:  Math.  41  and  43,  or  21 
and  43,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  the  department. 


23.  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Series;  Taylor's  Theorem;  approximations;  partial  derivatives, 
multiple  integrals;  line  and  surface  integrals;  differential  equa- 
tions. Prerequisite:  Math.  22. 

Mathematics  31  and  32  is  an  accelerated  calculus  sequence 
which  is  equivalent  to  Mathematics  21,  22,  and  23. 


81.  Computers  and  Calculus  (1) 

Writing  and  testing  digital  computer  programs  to  solve  prob- 
lems arising  from  the  calculus.  Designed  for  students  enrolled 
in  Math.  21,  31,  and  41  who  are  not  taking  another  introduc- 
tory course  in  computing.  No  previous  knowledge  of  pro- 
gramming is  assumed.  Prerequisite:  Math.  21,  31,  or  41,  con- 
currently or  previously. 

82.  Computers  and  Calculus  (1) 

A  continuation  of  Math.  81.  Prerequisite:  Math.  81  or  con- 
sent of  chairman  of  department. 


Mathematics     189 


10.S.  Computet   1'iogi.immillg  (3) 

The  tr.uisl.uhni  of  simple  mathematical  and  logical  problems 
into  forms  permitting  their  solution  by  digital  computers, 
with  emphasis  on  machine-language  programming  o I  several 
typical  types  ol  computers. 

110.  (I.S.  110)  Algorithmic  Reasoning  (3 J 

The  role  of  machines  as  physical  models  of  abstract  pro- 
!  esses.  Computability,  practical  computability,  and  unsolva- 
bility.  Examples  drawn  from  pure  mathematics  including 
recursive  function  theory  and  the  real  number  system.  Prere- 
quisite: Math.  23  or  Math.  32. 

171.  Reading  Courses  in  Mathematics  (1) 
Credit  not  to  exceed  one  hour  per  semester,  total  credit  not 
to  exceed  three  hours;  approval  of  program  and  written  re- 
port required.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

For  students  who  have  not  taken  their  elementary  mathe- 
matics at  Lehigh,  the  prerequisites  for  certain  advanced 
courses  are  stated  in  terms  of  the  number  of  semester  hours 
of  calculus. 

205.  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Matrices;  systems  of  linear  equations;  determinants  and  rank; 
characteristic  roots;  linear  differential  equations;  eigenvalue 
problems;  analytic  functions;  Bessel's  equation.  Designed  tor 
undergraduates  in  science  and  engineering.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  23  or  Math.  32. 

208.  Complex  Variables  (3) 

Functions  of  a  complex  variable;  calculus  of  residues;  con- 
tour integration;  applications  to  conformal  mapping  and 
Laplace  transforms.  Prerequisite:  Math.  23,  Math  32,  or  nine 
semester  hours  of  differential  and  integral  calculus. 

219.  Principles  oi  Analysis  1  (3) 

The  real  number  system;  limits;  continuous  functions;  dif- 
ferentiation; integration;  infinite  series.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
23,  Math.  32  or  nine  semester  hours  of  differential  and  in- 
tegral calculus. 

220.  Principles  of  Analysis  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  219.  Absolute  and  uniform  conver- 
gence; functions  of  several  variables;  line  and  surface  in- 
tegrals; implicit  functions.  Prerequisite:  Math.  219. 

226.  Complex  Analysis  (3) 

A  self-contained  survey  of  the  fundamentals  of  complex 
analysis.  The  concept  of  analytic  function  from  the  points  of 
view  of  the  Cauchy-Riemann  equations,  power  series,  com- 
plex integration  and  conformal  mapping.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
219. 


230.  Numerical  Methods  (3) 

Numerical  solution  of  non-line. ir  equations  and  systems; 
linear  systems  and  the  algebraic  eigenvalue  problem    dif- 
ference  i  alculus  and  interpolation;  numerical  differentiation 
and  quadrature;  numerical  solution  of  ordinary  differential 
equations.  Students  will  use  a  digital  computer.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  205. 

231.  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

Probability  and  distribution  of  random  variables;  populations 
and  random  sampling;  t,  chi-square,  and  F  distributions;  esti- 
mation and  tests  of  hypotheses;  correlation  and  regression 
theory  of  two  variables.  Prerequisite:  Math.  23,  Math    32,  or 
nine  semester  hours  of  calculus. 

243.  Algebra  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  basic  concepts  of  modern  algebra 
beginning  with  group  theory  and  including  ring  theory,  linear 
algebra,  and  field  theory.  Prerequisite:  Math.  205. 

244.  Algebra  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Math.  243.  Prerequisite:  Math.  243. 

251.  Mathematical  Methods  (1-4) 

An  introductory  survey  of  topics  in  analysis  for  graduate 
students  in  fields  other  than  mathematics.  Topics  may  in- 
clude: differential  equations,  techniques  of  series  expansion, 
numerical  methods,  matrix  and  vector  analysis,  complex  vari- 
ables, calculus  of  vector  fields.  Formal  applications  are  em- 
phasized. Prerequisites:  graduate  standing  and  consent  of  the 
instructor.  With  consent  of  the  department  chairman,  may  be 
repeated  for  credit.  Offered  occasional  years. 

252.  Mathematical  Methods  (1-4) 

A  survey  of  topics  in  analysis  for  graduate  students  in  fields 
other  than  mathematics,  either  continuing  topics  treated  in 
Math.  251  or  introducing  new  topics.  Prerequisites:  graduate 
standing  and  consent  of  the  instructor.  With  consent  of  the 
department  chairman,  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

284.  Number  Theory  (3) 

A  survey  of  elementary  and  non-elementary  algebraic  and 
analytic  methods  in  the  theory  of  numbers.  Includes  the 
Euclidean  algorithm,  Diophantine  equations,  congruences, 
quadratic  residues,  primitive  roots,  number-theoretic  func- 
tions as  well  as  one  or  more  of  the  following  topics:  distribu- 
tion of  primes,  Pell's  equation,  Fermat's  conjecture, 
partitions.  Prerequisite:  Math.  219  or  consent  of  the  chair- 
man of  the  department. 

285.  Introduction  to  Geometries  (3) 

Introduction  to  synthetic  and  analytic  projective  geometry 
with  emphasis  on  Euclidean  and  non-Euclidean  geometries  as 
special  cases.  Some  familiarity  with  matrices  and  determi- 
nants is  desirable. 


1 90     Mathematics 


301.  Vector  and  Tensor  Analysis  (3) 

Elementary  vector  identities.  Gauss's  theorem  and  Stokes's 
theorem.  Elementary  differential  geometry  of  curves  and 
surfaces.  Calculus  of  tensors.  Prerequisite:  Math.  23  or  Math. 
32  or  nine  semester  hours  of  differential  and  integral  calcu- 
lus. 

303.  Mathematical  Logic  (3) 

A  course,  on  a  mathematically  mature  level,  designed  not 
only  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the  logical  techniques  used 
in  mathematics  but  also  to  present  symbolic  logic  as  an  im- 
portant adjunct  in  the  study  of  the  foundations  of  mathe- 
matics. 


322.  Methods  of  Applied  Analysis  I  (3) 

Fourier  series,  eigenfunction  expansions,  Sturm  Liouville 
problems,  Fourier  integrals  and  their  application  to  partial 
differential  equations;  special  functions.  Emphasis  is  on  a 
wide  variety  of  formal  applications  rather  than  logical  devel- 
opment. Prerequisite:  Math.  205  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

323.  Methods  of  Applied  Analysis  II  (3) 

Green's  functions;  integral  equations;  variational  methods; 
asymptotic  expansions,  method  of  saddle  points;  calculus  of 
vector  fields,  exterior  differential  calculus.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  322. 


304.  Axiomatic  Set  Theory  (3) 

A  development  of  set  theory  from  axioms;  relations  and 
functions;  ordinal  and  cardinal  arithmetic;  recursion  theorem; 
axiom  of  choice;  independence  questions.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
219  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

307.  General  Topology  I  (3) 

An  introductory  study  of  topological  spaces,  including  metric 
spaces,  separation  and  countability  axioms,  connectedness, 
compactness,  product  spaces,  quotient  spaces,  function 
spaces.  Prerequisite:  Math.  219. 

308.  Algebraic  Topology  I  (3) 

Polyhedra,  fundamental  groups,  simplicial  and  singular  homo- 
logy. Prerequisites:  Math.  307  and  Math.  327. 

309.  Theory  of  Probability  (3) 

Probabilities  on  discrete  and  continuous  sample  spaces; 
events  on  a  discrete  sample  space;  random  variables  and  prob- 
ability distributions;  transformations;  simplest  kind  of  law  of 
large  numbers  and  central  limit  theorem.  The  theory  will  be 
applied  to  problems  in  physical  and  biological  science.  Prere- 
quisite: Math.  23,  Math.  32,  or  nine  semester  hours  of  dif- 
ferential and  integral  calculus. 

310.  Probability  and  its  Applications  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  309.  Random  variables,  characteristic 
functions,  limit  theorems;  stochastic  processes,  Kolmogorov 
equations;  Markov  chains,  random  walks;  time  series.  Prere- 
quisite: Math.  309  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  depart- 
ment. 

317.  (E.E.  317,  I.E.  317)  Analytical  Methods  for  Information 

Sciences  (3) 

For  description,  see  E.E.  317. 

320.  Ordinary  Differential  Equations  (3) 

The  analytical  and  geometric  theory  of  ordinary  differential 
equations,  including  such  topics  as  linear  systems,  systems  in 
the  complex  plane,  oscillation  theory,  stability  theory,  geo- 
metric theory  of  non-linear  systems,  finite  difference 
methods,  general  dynamical  systems.  Prerequisite:  Math.  220 
previously  or  concurrently  and  Math.  205. 


327.  Groups  and  Rings  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  the  concepts  of  group  theory  including 
the  Sylow  theorems,  and  of  ring  theory  including  unique 
factorization  domains  and  polynomial  rings. 

331.  Numerical  Analysis  (3) 

Examination  of  some  commonly  used  numerical  methods  for 
the  solution  of  linear  and  non-linear  equations,  quadrature, 
and  the  solution  of  ordinary  differential  equations.  Special 
attention  is  given  to  the  analysis  of  errors  resulting  from 
rounding,  discretization,  and  truncation.  The  course  work 
involves  the  use  of  a  digital  computer.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
219. 

333.  Difference  Methods  for  Partial  Differential  Equations 

(3) 

Maximum  principles;  theory  of  characteristics;  construction 
of  convergent  and  stable  difference  schemes;  error  analysis; 
variational  techniques;  iterative  methods;  Von  Neumann's 
stability  criterion;  eigenvalue  problems.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

334.  Mathematical  Statistics  (3) 

Populations  and  random  sampling;  sampling  distributions; 
theory  of  statistical  estimation;  criteria  and  methods  of  point 
and  interval  estimation;  theory  of  testing  statistical  hypo- 
thesis; analysis  of  variance;  non-parametric  methods.  Prere- 
quisite: Math.  309  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  depart- 
ment. 

350.  Special  Topics  (3) 

A  course  covering  special  topics  not  sufficiently  covered  in 

the  general  courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of 

department.  May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Offered  occasional 

years. 

361.  (I.S.  361)  Theory  of  Formal  Grammars  (3) 
For  description  see  I.S.  361. 

362.  Computer  Languages  (3) 

An  examination  of  a  number  of  high-level  computer  program- 
ming languages,  and  of  the  concepts  and  techniques  which 
are  used  in  the  design  of  the  compilers  which  translate  them. 
Prerequisite:  Math.  105  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 


Mathematics      191 


371.  Readings  in  Mathematics    ; 

The  study  ol  a  tOpi<   in  mathematics  under  appropriate  super 
vision:  designed  lor  the  individual  student  who  has  studied 
extensively  and  whose  interests  lie  in  .ire.is  not  covered  in  the 
listed  courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the 
department.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

381.  Probability  and  Statistics  (3) 

Combinatorial  problems,  theory  of  probability,  various  fre- 
quency distributions,  standard  deviation,  sampling,  correla- 
tion. Prerequisite:  open  to  secondary  school  teachers  who 
present  at  least  eighteen  hours  of  undergraduate  mathe- 
matics. 

382.  Algebra  (3) 

Fundamentals  of  algebra,  axiomatic  method,  set  theory,  no- 
tions of  group,  ring,  integral  domain,  and  field.  Prerequisite: 
same  as  Math.  381 . 

385.  Higher  Geometry  1  (3) 

Logical  systems,  postulates,  synthetic  projective  geometry, 
analytic  projective  geometry,  affine,  euclidean  and  non- 
euclidean  geometry.  Prerequisite:  same  as  Math.  381. 

387.  Intermediate  Analysis  (3) 

The  real  number  system,  functions,  limits,  continuity,  deriva- 
tive, law  of  the  mean,  Taylor's  formula,  definite  integral. 
Prerequisite:  open  only  to  secondary  school  teachers  of 
mathematics  who  present  at  least  18  semester  hours  of  under- 
graduate mathematics  including  a  course  in  analysis. 

For  Graduates— Mathematical  Program 

The  department  of  mathematics  offers  a  graduate  program  in 
mathematics  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree.  The  first  of  these 
degrees  was  awarded  in  1939.  In  the  fall  of  1972  there  were 
about  fifty-five  graduate  students  of  mathematics,  of  whom 
about  twenty-five  were  engaged  in  writing  Ph.D.  theses.  The 
M.S.  degree  in  mathematics  may  be  taken  as  a  terminal  de- 
gree or  as  an  incidental  step  on  the  road  to  a  Ph.D.  degree. 

To  begin  graduate  work  in  mathematics,  a  student  must 
present  evidence  of  adequate  study  of  mathematics  as  an 
undergraduate.  His  program  should  have  included  at  least  a 
year  of  advanced  calculus,  a  semester  of  linear  algebra,  and  a 
semester  on  groups,  rings,  and  fields. 

The  program  for  the  M.S.  degree  will  ordinarily  include 
Math.  307,  308,  327,  401,  415,  423,  428.  A  student  with 
unusually  strong  background,  or  specialized  interests,  may  be 
permitted  to  make  substitutions. 

The  M.S.  degree  requires  either  a  thesis  or  a  comprehen- 
sive examination  at  the  discretion  of  the  department  chair- 
man. The  same  examination  is  used  as  the  comprehensive 
examination  for  the  M.S.  degree  and  the  qualifying  examina- 
tion for  the  Ph.D.  degree.  Thus  it  is  usually  required  for  the 
M.S.  degree  for  those  students  who  plan  to  continue  to  the 
Ph.D.  A  syllabus  for  the  examination  is  available. 

The  plan  of  work  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  will  ordinarily 
include  courses  in  algebra,  analysis,  geometry,  and  topology 


at  the  400-level  and  several  courses  including  seminars  in  the 
field  in  which  the  dissertation  is  to  be  written.  The  depart- 
ment accepts  candidates  for  the  Ph.D.  who  wish  to  specialize 
in  and  to  write  a  dissertation  on  some  aspect  of  any  of  the 
following  areas  of  advanced  work:  analysis  with  emphasis  on 
pure  mathematics  or  applied  mathematics,  algebra,  functional 
analysis,  differential  geometry,  mathematical  logic,  probabili- 
ty, statistics,  and  topology. 

One  may  wish  to  refer  to  the  description  of  the  Center  for 
the  Application  of  Mathematics. 

For  Graduates— Computer  Science  Program 

With  the  cooperation  of  several  other  departments,  the  de- 
partment of  mathematics  also  offers  a  program  leading  to  the 
degree  of  M.S.  in  Computer  Science. 

To  begin  work  in  this  program,  the  student  must  have 
some  skill  in  programming  in  a  computer  language  such  as 
FORTRAN,  ALGOL,  BASIC,  APL,  or  WIZARD,  and  some 
familiarity  with  the  concepts  of  machine  or  assembly  langu- 
ages. (Math.  105  can  be  taken,  without  graduate  credit,  to 
remedy  deficiency  in  these  areas.)  He  must  also  present  at 
least  two  years  of  college  mathematics. 

The  program  must  include  the  following  four  "core 
courses,"  except  as  competence  in  the  respective  areas  results 
from  past  courses,  experience,  or  is  demonstrated  otherwise: 

Math  317  Analytical  Methods  for  Information 

Sciences  (3) 
Math  362  Computer  Languages  (3) 

EE  241  Switching  Theory  and  Logic  Design  (3) 

IE  310  File  Structure  and  Processing  (3) 

The  student's  program  is  to  be  developed  in  consultation 
with  a  departmental  advisor,  and  approved  by  an  interdepart- 
mental committee. 

Further  information  can  be  found  in  a  separate  announce- 
ment available  from  the  department. 

401.  Real  Analysis  I  (3) 

Spaces  of  continuous  functions;  the  Lebesgue  integral;  dif- 
ferentiation; general  theory  of  measure  and  integration; 
Banach  and  Hilbert  spaces;  Lp-spaces.  Applications  to  such 
topics  in  classical  analysis  as  integral  equations  and  Fourier 
series.  Prerequisite:  Math.  307  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of 
the  department. 

402.  Real  Analysis  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  401.  Prerequisite:  Math.  401. 

404.  Mathematical  Logic  (3) 

Advanced  topics  in  quantification  theory  relevant  to  formal- 
ized theories,  recursive  functions,  Godel's  incompleteness 
theorem;  algorithms  and  computability.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
303. 


192     Mathematics 


405.  Partial  Differential  Equations  (3) 
Classification  and  transformation  of  equations;  theory  of 
characteristics;  initial  and  boundary  value  problems;  Cauchy's 
problem  for  hyberbolic  equations;  Dirichlet's  problem  for 
elliptic  equations;  potential  theory;  Green's  function;  har- 
monic and  sub-harmonic  functions;  difference  equations; 
applications  to  equations  of  physics.  Prerequisite:  Math.  220. 

406.  Partial  Differential  Equations  (3) 
Continuation  of  Math.  405.  Prerequisite:  Math.  405. 

407.  Transforms  (3) 

The  properties  and  use  of  the  Fourier  transform,  the  Laplace 
transform,  the  finite  transform  and  generalized  functions. 
Prerequisites:  Math.  220  and  either  Math.  208,  Math.  226,  or 
Math.  415. 

408.  Boundary  Value  Problems  (3) 

The  study  of  boundary  value  problems  with  attention  to 
integral  equations,  special  functions,  variational  methods,  and 
eigenvalue  problems.  Prerequisites:  Math.  220  and  either 
Math.  208,  Math.  226,  or  Math.  415. 

409.  Mathematics  Seminar  (3  or  6) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  field  of  mathematics  not  offered 
in  another  course.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. 

410.  Mathematics  Seminar  (3  or  6) 

Continuation  of  the  field  of  study  in  Math.  409  or  the  inten- 
sive study  of  a  different  field.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

415.  Complex  Function  Theory  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  the  theory  of  analytic  functions  of  one 
complex  variable  emphasizing  the  following  topics:  the 
Cauchy  theory,  representation  theorems  for  analytic  func- 
tions, the  geometric  theory,  analytic  continuation  and 
Riemann  surfaces.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of 
the  department. 


424.  Differential  Geometry  II  (3) 

Multilinear  algebra;  differentiable  manifolds;  tensor  bundles; 
exterior  differential  forms;  theorems  of  Stokes  and 
Frobenius;  imbedding  theorem;  affine  connections; 
holonomy  groups;  Riemannian  manifolds.  Prerequisites: 
Math.  423  and  Math.  308. 

425.  Differential  Geometry  III  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  424.  Curvature  tensor;  manifolds  of 
constant  curvature;  Gauss-Bonnet  formula;  completeness; 
harmonic  forms;  curvature  and  homology;  infinitesimal  trans- 
formations; conjugate  points  and  Morse  index  theorem;  Lie 
groups  and  Lie  algebras.  Prerequisite:  Math.  424. 

428.  Fields  and  Modules  (3) 

Field  theory,  including  an  introduction  to  Galois  Theory;  the 
theory  of  modules,  including  tensor  products  and  classical 
algebras.  Prerequisite:  Math.  327. 

431.  Calculus  of  Variations  (3) 

Fundamental  existence  theorems;  necessary  conditions  and 
sufficient  conditions  for  relative  minima  of  single  integrals; 
the  index  theorem   application  to  boundary  value  problems. 
Prerequisite:  Math.  401. 

435.  Functional  Analysis  I  (3) 

Linear  topological  spaces',  local  convexity;  function  spaces; 
inductive  and  weak  topologies;  duality,  separation  and  exten- 
sion theorems;  the  open  mapping  and  uniform  boundedness 
principles;  Banach  algebras;  applications  to  classical  analysis. 
Prerequisite:  Math.  307. 

436.  Functional  Analysis  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  435.  Prerequisite:  Math.  435. 

443.  General  Topology  II  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Math.  307,  with  such  topics  as  filters  and 
nets,  topological  products,  local  compactness,  paracompact- 
ness,  metrizability,  uniformity,  function  spaces,  dimension 
theory.  Prerequisite:  Math.  307. 


416.  Complex  Function  Theory  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  415.  Prerequisite:  Math.  415  or  con- 
sent of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 


444.  Algebraic  Topology  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  Math.  308.  Cohomology  theory,  products, 

duality.  Prerequisite:  Math.  308. 


419.  Linear  Operators  in  Hilbert  Space  (3) 
Algebra  and  calculus  of  bounded  and  unbounded  operators  in 
Hubert  space,  with  applications  to  differential  operators  and 
integral  equations.  Spectral  analysis  of  self-adjoint,  normal, 
and  unitary  operators.  Emphasis  will  be  given  to  those 
aspects  of  the  theory  which  have  applications  in  the  physical 
sciences.  Prerequisite:  Math.  208,  Math.  226  or  Math.  415. 

423.  Differential  Geometry  I  (3) 

The  differential  geometry  of  curves  and  surfaces  in  Euclidean 
space,  including  problems  in  the  large. 


445.  Algebraic  Topology  III  (3) 

Homotopy  theory,  obstruction  theory,  spectral  sequences. 

Prerequisite:  Math.  444. 

449.  Advanced  Topics  in  Algebra  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  topics  in  algebra  with  emphasis 
on  recent  developments.  May  be  repeated  for  credit.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


Mathematics      193 


151,  Measure  [Tieory  (3) 

nts  ( hosen  from  such  copies  as:  ergodie  theory; 

incisure  on  topological  spaces;  harmonic  analysis  on  groups; 
invariant  measures  on  transformation  groups.  May  be  re- 
peated tor  credit.  Prerequisite:  Math.  -1(12. 

453.  Function  Theory  (3) 

The  development  of  one  or  more  topics  in  function  theory, 
such  as  analytic  continuation,  maximum  modulus  principle, 
conforms!  representation,  Taylor  series  analysis,  integral 
functions,  Dirichlct  series,  functions  of  several  complex 
variables.  Prerequisite:  Math.  416. 

457.  Summability  (3) 

The  summability  of  sequences,  series,  and  functions  including 
the  development  of  one  or  more  of  the  following  topics:  the 
classical  theorems  of  Toeplitz,  Schur,  and  Kojima;  summabili- 
ty of  Fourier  and  Taylor  series;  inclusion,  equivalence  and 
consistency  theorems;  functional  analytic  methods  in  summa- 
bility; summability  in  more  general  settings  such  as  linear 
spaces  or  topological  groups.  With  permission  may  be 
repeated  tor  credit.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of 
the  department. 

461.  Mathematical  Statistics  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  one  or  more  topics  not  sufficiently 
covered  in  Math.  334,  such  as  theory  of  statistical  tests, 
statistical  estimation,  regression  and  analysis  of  variance, 
nonparametric  methods,  stochastic  approximation,  decision 
theory.  Prerequisites:  Math.  334  and  Math.  401. 

463.  Probability  Theory  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  one  or  more  topics  not  sufficiently 
covered  in  Math.  309  or  Math.  310,  such  as  limit  theorems, 
Markov  processes,  ergodie  theorems,  martingales,  time  series, 
stochastic  integrals,  potential  theory.  Prerequisites:  Math. 
310  and  Math.  401. 

471.  Hornological  Algebra  (3) 

Modules,  tensor  products,  categories  and  functors,  homology 
functors,  projective  and  infective  modules.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  428. 

472.  Finite  Groups  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  the  structure  of  finite  groups  and  their 
automorphisms.  Prerequisite:  Math.  428. 


2.  Stellar  Astronomy  (3) 

Survey  of  our  knowledge  of  stars  and  stellar  systems. 

211.  Stellar  Structure  and  Evolution  (3) 

Physical  processes  in  stellar  interiors.  Theory  of  stellar  evolu- 
tion and  interpretation  of  observations.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
23  or  32,  previously  or  concurrently,  and  Phys.  21. 

221.  Stellar  Atmospheres  (3) 

Theory  of  stellar  spectra.  Equation  of  transfer,  model  at- 
mospheres, chemical  abundances.  Prerequisites:  Math.  23  or 
32,  previously  or  concurrently,  and  Phys.  21. 

232.  High  Energy  Astrophysics  (3) 

Relativistic  plasmas,  x-ray  sources,  quasars,  pulsars,  radio 
galaxies,  origin  and  evolution  of  galaxies,  current  research. 
Prerequisites:  Math.  23  or  32,  previously  or  concurrently, 
and  Phys.  21 . 

242.  Relativity  and  Cosmology  (3) 

Introduction  to  tensor  analysis.  Einstein's  field  equations, 
origin  and  evolution  of  the  universe,  current  research.  Prere- 
quisites: Math.  23  or  32,  previously  or  concurrently,  and 
Phys.  21. 


Division  of  Astronomy 

Associate  Professor 

George  E.  McCluskey,  Ph.D. 

1.  The  Solar  System  (3) 

A  survey  of  our  knowledge  of  the  solar  system. 


194     Mathematics:  Astronomy 


Mechanical  Engineering  & 
Mechanics 


Professors 

Ferdinand  Pierre  Beer,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 

Russell  Edward  Benner,  Ph.D. 

Philip  Anthony  Blythe,  Ph.D. 

Forbes  Taylor  Brown,  Ph.D. 

John  C.  Chen,  Ph.D. 

James  Vandeusen  Eppes,  M.S. 

Fazil  Erdogan,  Ph.D. 

Thomas  Edgar  Jackson,  M.S. 

Arturs  Kalnins,  Ph.D. 

Jerzy  Antoni  Owczarek,  Ph.D. 

Ronald  S.  Rivlin,  Ph.D.,  Centennial  University  Professor, 

Director,  Center  for  Application  of  Mathematics 

George  C.  M.  Sih,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Institute  for  Fracture  and 

Solid  Mechanics 

Gerald  Francis  Smith,  Ph.D. 

Alan  Hugh  Stenning,  Sc.D. 

Eric  Varley,  Ph.D. 

Robert  Peh-Ying  Wei,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Andrew  D.  Dimarogonas,  Ph.D. 
Ronald  John  Hartranft,  Ph.D. 
Edward  Kenneth  Levy,  Ph.D. 
Robert  Alan  Lucas,  Ph.D. 
Alistair  Kenneth  Macpherson,  Ph.D. 
Joseph  C.  Osborn,  M.S. 
Richard  Roberts,  Ph.D. 
Donald  O.  Rockwell,  Ph.D. 
Eric  P.  Salathe,  Ph.D. 
Robert  Guy  Sarubbi,  Ph.D. 
Theodore  Alfred  Terry,  Ph.D. 
Dean  Pearson  Updike,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Kemal  Arin,  Ph.D. 
Tony  Chen,  Ph.D. 
Gopal  D.  Gupta,  Ph.D. 
Peter  D.  Hilton,  Ph.D. 
Mustafa  R.  Ozgu,  Ph.D. 
James  Peter  Ries,  Ph.D. 

Instructor 

Marlin  E.  Kipp,  M.S. 


The  curriculum  in  mechanical  engineering  and  engineering 
mechanics  consists  of  common  freshman,  sophomore,  and 
junior  years,  and  a  senior  year  offering  a  wide  selection  of 
courses.  Depending  upon  the  program  chosen  during  the 
senior  year,  the  students  are  graduated  with  either  the  B.S.  in 
Mechanical  Engineering  or  the  B.S.  in  Engineering  Mechanics. 

The  core  of  the  program  includes  courses  in  mathematics 
and  the  physical  sciences,  in  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids,  in 
dynamics,  vibrations  analysis,  thermodynamics,  and  design. 
Candidates  for  the  B.S.  in  Mechanical  Engineering  take  an 
additional  course  in  thermodynamics  and  are  required  to  take 
at  least  two  professional  M.E.  courses  during  their  senior 
year.  They  should  use  the  technical  electives  to  develop  com- 
petence in  design,  thermofluid  sciences,  or  some  other  ap- 
proved area.  Candidates  for  the  B.S.  in  Engineering 
Mechanics  must  include  in  their  program  advanced  courses  in 
mathematics,  dynamics  and  mechanics  of  continua.  They 
should  use  the  technical  electives  to  develop  additional  com- 
petence in  a  related  area,  such  as  applied  mathematics,  thermo- 
fluid sciences,  or  materials  science. 

The  field  of  mechanical  engineering  is  wide  and  challeng- 
ing. Conventionally  mechanical  engineering  deals  with  the 
design  and  production  of  machines  and  their  power  sources, 
but  the  field  has  broadened  to  include  many  applications  of 
the  engineering  sciences  to  a  variety  of  engineering  systems 
for  the  benefit  of  mankind.  The  mechanical  engineer  has 
played  an  essential  role  in  the  exploitation  of  new  engineer- 
ing frontiers  such  as  nuclear  power,  cryogenic  systems,  rock- 
etry, satellite  guidance  systems,  and  systems  at  very  high 
and  very  low  pressures  and  temperatures.  Mechanical  engi- 
neers are  also  heavily  involved  in  solving  problems  of  pollu- 
tion control  and  waste  disposal. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  an  increasing  demand  in  indus 
try  and  government  service  for  men  with  a  broad  training  in 
the  fundamentals  of  engineering  rather  than  in  a  given  speci- 
fic field.  Such  training,  in  which  applied  mathematics  and 
mechanics  play  an  important  part,  is  provided  by  the  engi- 
neering mechanics  option  of  this  curriculum.  This  option 
emphasizes  the  analytical  approach  to  engineering  problems 
and  the  application  to  their  solution  of  the  basic  methods 
and  principles  of  mechanics. 

Graduates  in  either  discipline  are  equipped  for  immediate 
work  in  engineering  or  research  and  development  in  govern- 
ment service  or  industry.  Those  with  ability  and  interest  have 
suitable  backgrounds  for  further  studies  at  the  graduate  level. 

Because  of  the  flexibility  of  the  curriculum,  candidates 
for  either  degree  may  combine  the  study  of  mechanical  engi- 
neering or  engineering  mechanics  with  that  of  other  fields, 
such  as  chemical  engineering,  materials  science,  and  biology, 
into  interdisciplinary  programs  which  will  prepare  them  for 
further  work  in  the  areas  of  nuclear  engineering,  environmen- 
tal engineering,  materials  science,  or  biomechanics. 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics      1 95 


Freshman  Yeat   See  page  \S 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  |  17  credit  hoi 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  &  Calculus  111  (4) 

Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

CE  1 1  Engineering  Graphics  (2) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

ME  104  Thermodynamics  I  (3) 

Mech  11  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

Mech  13  Materials  Testing  Laboratory  (1) 

Mel  91  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

or 

Met  63  Engineering  Materials  (3) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (16  credit  hours) 

ME  101  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  (1) 

Mech  102  Dynamics  (3) 

ME  105  Thermodynamics  II 

or 

Approved  Elective  (3) 
ME  231  Fluid  Mechanics  (3) 

Math  208  Complex  Variables 

or 
Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

GS  Requirement  (3) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

ME  102  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  (2) 

Mech  203  Advanced  Strength  of  Materials  (3) 

CE  123  Fluid  Mechanics  Lab  (1) 

ME  242  Mechanical  Vibrations  (3) 

EE  160  Electrical  Circuits  &  Apparatus  (3) 

EE  161,  162  Electrical  Problems  &  Lab  (2) 
Elective  (3) 

Summer 

ME  100  Industrial  Employment 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (14-1 7  credit  hours) 

ME  108  Laboratory  I  (2) 

Approved  Electives  (9) 
GS  Requirement  (3) 
Elective  (0-3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (14-1  7  credit  hours) 

ME  109  Laboratory  II  (2) 

Approved  Electives  (9) 
GS  Requirement  (3) 
Elective  (0-3) 


Note:  In  their  junior  year,  candidates  tor  the  U.S.  in  M.E.  will 
t.ike  M.E.  105;  candidates  for  the  B.S.  in  Engineering 
Mechanics  will  take  Math  208. 

Tin-  approved  electives  must  represent  .1  coherent  group 
of  approved  courses  such  as  200-  and  300-level  courses  in 
mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics,  as  well  as  mathl 
matics,  physics,  chemistry  and  a  limited  number  of  other 
fields.  For  candidates  for  the  B.S.  in  M.E.,  6  hours  of  ap- 
proved electives  shall  be  in  M.E.  and  at  least  6  more  in  M.E. 
or  mechanics.  For  candidates  for  the  B.S.  in  Engineering 
Mechanics,  the  following  courses  shall  be  required:  Mech. 
302,  Advanced  Dynamics;  Mech.  305,  Advanced  Mechanics 
of  Materials;  Mech.  307,  Mechanics  of  Continua;  and  Math. 
322,  Methods  of  Applied  Analysis  I. 

The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  in  the  senior  year  re- 
presents the  load  required  to  meet  the  graduation  require- 
ment; the  higher  represents  the  normal  semester  load. 

Mechanical  Engineering 

Undergraduate  Courses 

100.  Industrial  Employment  (0) 

Usually  following  the  junior  year,  students  in  the  mechanical 
engineering  curriculum  are  expected  to  do  a  minimum  of 
eight  weeks  of  practical  work,  preferably  in  the  field  they 
plan  to  follow  after  graduation.  A  report  is  required.  Prere- 
quisite: sophomore  standing. 

101.  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  I  (1) 

Objectives  and  specifications  are  developed  for  design  pro- 
jects to  be  carried  out  in  the  second  semester.  Alternative 
design  concepts  are  proposed  and  oral  and  written  reports  of 
feasibility  studies  are  presented. 

102.  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  II  (2) 

A  continuation  of  M.E.  101  in  which  groups  are  organized  to 
do  preliminary  design  on  a  previously  defined  project.  Pro- 
gram organization  techniques  are  used  and  laboratory  testing 
and  data  acquisition  is  carried  out  as  needed  to  promote 
design  development.  Prototypes  are  constructed  and  tested, 
when  practical.  Prerequisites:  M.E.  101,  Mech.  1 1,  M.E.  104. 

104.  Thermodynamics  I  (3) 

Basic  concepts  and  principles  of  thermodynamics  with  em- 
phasis on  universal  applications.  First  and  Second  Law  devel- 
opment. Energy  equations.  Reversibility  and  irreversibility. 
Entropy  and  probability.  Thermodynamic  functions.  Proper- 
ties of  pure  substances.  Prerequisites:  Math.  23,  Phys.  3  or 
11. 

105.  Thermodynamics  II  (3) 

Thermodynamics  applications.  Reversible  and  irreversible 
processes  and  cycles  with  various  fluids.  Gas  and  vapor  mix- 
tures. Compressible  and  incompressible  fluid  flow.  Prerequi- 
site: M.E.  104. 


196     Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 


108.  Laboratory  I  (2) 

Lectures  and  laboratory  exercises  relating  to  various  phases 
of  engineering  laboratory  technique  and  procedures.  Includes 
planning,  execution,  and  analysis  of  tests  and  writing  of  re- 
ports. Prerequisite:  M.E.  105. 

109.  Laboratory  II  (2) 

Continuation  of  M.E.  108  with  emphasis  on  project  investiga- 
tions. 

110.  Thesis  (1-3) 

Candidates  for  the  degree  of  B.S.  in  M.E.  may,  with  the  ap- 
proval of  the  director  of  the  curriculum,  undertake  a  thesis  as 
a  portion  of  the  work  during  the  senior  year. 

161.  Mechanical  Engineering  Laboratory  (1) 

Testing  of  mechanical  engineering  equipment.  Prerequisite: 
M.E.  104. 

166.  Procedures  for  Mechanical  Design  (2) 
General  design  procedures,  motion  analysis,  force  analysis, 
static,  repeated  and  impact  types  of  loading,  modes  of 
failure,  stress  analysis,  failure  theories.  Applications  to  the 
design  of  typical  machine  elements.  Prerequisite:  Mech.  11. 


242.  Mechanical  Vibrations  (3) 

Physical  modeling  of  vibrating  systems.  Free  and  forced  sin- 
gle degree  of  freedom  systems.  Matrix  formulation  and  solu- 
tion of  multi-degree  of  freedom  systems.  Simple  continuous 
and  non-linear  systems.  Engineering  applications.  Prerequi- 
sites: Mech.  102  or  103,  Math.  205. 

310.  Projects  (1-6) 

Project  work  on  any  aspect  of  engineering,  performed  either 
individually  or  as  a  member  of  a  team  made  up  of  students 
possibly  from  other  disciplines.  Direction  of  the  projects  may 
be  provided  by  faculty  from  several  departments  and  could 
include  interaction  with  outside  consultants  and  local  com- 
munities and  industries.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

312.  Synthesis  of  Mechanisms  (3) 

Geometry  and  constrained  plane  motion  with  application  to 
linkage  design.  Type  and  number  synthesis.  Comparison  of 
motion  analysis  by  graphical,  analytical  and  computer  tech- 
niques. Euler-Savery  and  related  curvature  techniques  as  ap- 
plied to  cam,  gear  and  linkage  systems.  Introduction  to  the 
analysis  of  space  mechanisms.  Prerequisite:  Math.  205,  Mech. 
102. 


168.  Elements  of  Mechanical  Design  (2) 
Elements  of  mechanical  design:  motion  and  force  analysis, 
sizing  of  members,  selection  of  materials  for  failure  preven- 
tion, production  requirements.  Selected  examples  of  system 
design.  Prerequisite:  Mech.  11. 

211.  Mechanical  Engineering  Analysis  (3) 
Engineering  analysis  methodology.  Basic  analog  computer 
theory  and  programming.  Numerical  methods  for  use  with 
the  digital  computer.  Performance  prediction  of  selected 
mechanical  engineering  systems  using  analog  and  digital  com- 
puter methods.  Prerequisite:  M.E.  242. 


320.  Thermodynamics  III  (3) 

Kinetic  theory  of  gases,  statistical  thermodynamics.  Ad- 
vanced and  specialized  topics  in  thermodynamics.  Prerequi- 
site: M.E.  104. 

321.  Introduction  to  Heat  Transfer  (3) 

Analytical,  numerical,  and  analog  solutions  to  steady  and 
transient,  one  and  two-dimensional  conduction  problems; 
thermal  radiation,  free  and  forced  convection  of  laminar  and 
turbulent  character  inside  cylindrical  tubes  and  over  external 
surfaces;  thermal  design  of  heat  exchangers.  Prerequisites: 
M.E.  104,  M.E.  231. 


For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

220.  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Principles  of  classical  thermodynamics  with  applications  to 
engineering  problems.  Introduction  to  statistical  thermody- 
namics. Prerequisites:  Phys.  3  or  11;  Math  23. 

231.  Fluid  Mechanics  (3) 

Fundamental  concepts.  Physical  similarity.  Kinematics  of 
fluid  flow.  Equations  of  flow  in  integral  form.  Equations  of 
flow  of  perfect  fluids.  Plane  irrotational  flow  of  incompressi- 
ble fluids.  Navier-Stokes  equation;  hydrodynamic  stability; 
turbulence.  Two-dimensional  boundary  layers  in  incompressi- 
ble flows;  separation  of  flow;  wakes;  drag.  Effects  of  com- 
pressibility on  fluid  flow.  Hydraulic  treatment  of  losses  in 
flows  in  ducts.  Flows  with  free  surface.  Basic  measurements 
techniques.  Prerequisite:  Math.  205. 


322.  Gas  Dynamics  (3) 

Equations  of  flow  of  compressible  fluids.  Thermodynamic 
properties  of  gases.  Shock  waves.  One-dimensional  steady 
flow  through  ducts  with  variable  cross-sectional  area,  flows 
with  viscous  friction  and  heat  addition.  Prerequisites:  M.E. 
231,  M.E.  104,  Math.  205. 

324.  Aerospace  Propulsion  Systems  (3) 

Cycle  analysis  of  air-breathing  engines.  Optimum  configura- 
tions for  different  flight  regimes.  Chemical  and  nuclear 
rocket  engines.  Electrical  propulsion  devices.  Rankine  and 
Brayton  cycles  for  space  power  plants.  Component  design. 
Prerequisite:  M.E.  105. 

325.  Vehicular  Propulsion  Systems  (3) 

Thermal  analysis  of  internal  combustion  engines  for  vehicular 
propulsion.  Component  design.  Unconventional  propulsion 
systems.  Applications  to  current  problems  in  ground  trans- 
portation. Prerequisite:  M.E.  105. 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics     197 


>31.  I  luid  Mechanics  (3) 

Kinematics  of  fluid  flow.  Conservation  equations  lor  inviscid 

and  viscous  Hows;  integral  forms  of  equations.  Two-dimen- 
sional potential  Qow  theory  of  incompressible  fluids  with 
applications.  Boundary  layers.  Introduction  to  free  shear 
layer  and  boundary  layer  stability  and  structure  of  turbu- 
lence. Transition  from  laminar  to  turbulent  boundary  layers. 
Separation  of  flow.  Steady  and  unsteady  stall.  Secondary 
flows,  flow  ^i  non-Newtonian  fluids.  Hydrodynamic  lubrica- 
tion. Measurement  techniques.  Prerequisite:  M.E.  231. 

340.  Advanced  Mechanical  Engineering  Design  (3) 
Optimum  design  ot  mechanical  components  and  systems. 
Parameter  optimization  methods  including  the  theory  of 
maxima  and  minima,  geometric  programming  and  optimum 
seeking  methods.  Computer-aided  and  automated  design. 
Computer  programming  of  design  theory,  life  function  of 
components  and  design  tor  reliability.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
231. 

341.  Mechanical  Systems  (3) 

Methods  for  the  analysis  and  design  of  machine  elements 
such  as  springs,  gears,  clutches,  brakes,  and  bearings.  Design 
for  strength,  motion  and  dynamic  response  objectives  is  em- 
phasized. Case  studies  are  presented  which  demonstrate  the 
synthesis  of  elements  into  mechanical  systems  and  the  inte- 
gration of  associated  analytical  methods  into  rational  design 
procedures.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  203  and  M.E.  242. 

343.  Control  Systems  (3) 

Linear  analysis  of  mechanical,  hydraulic,  pneumatic,  thermal 
and  electrical  feedback  control  systems.  Transient  and  fre- 
quency response,  root  locus,  stability  criteria  and  compensa- 
tion techniques.  Prerequisite:  Math.  205,  M.E.  242. 

350.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

A  study  of  some  field  of  mechanical  engineering  not  covered 
in  the  general  courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman 
of  department. 

360.  (Ch.E.  360)  Nuclear  Reactor  Engineering 
A  consideration  of  the  engineering  problems  in  nuclear  reac- 
tor design  and  operation.  Topics  include  reactor  fuels  and 
materials,  thermal  aspects,  instrumentation  and  control  prob- 
lems, radiation  protection  and  shielding,  fuel  processing,  and 
reactor  design.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing  in  engineering  or 
physical  science. 


been  constructed  to  investigate  fluid  amplifier  dynamics  and 
experiments  on  plcxiglas  in  ml,  I  ■.  .n     iu-uiy,  ■  ■  .iiitin  ted  i« 
determine  velocity  profiles  and  pressure  distributions  in  wall 
jets  on  curved  walls.  Oscillatory  flows  arc  being  studied  in 
conical  dil  (users.  In  the  area  ot  heat  transfer  analytical  and 
experimental  work  is  being  carried  out  on  heat  pipes,  and 
studies  of  boiling  and  two  phase  flow  are  in  progress.  A 
specially  designed  closed  jet  water  tunnel  is  available  for  re- 
search on  internal  flows.  A  six  inch  interferometer  can  be 
used  for  studies  in  heat  transfer  and  fluid  mechanics. 

The  department  is  well-equipped  for  experimental  stress 
investigations  including  instrumentation  for  research  with 
resistance  strain  gages,  photo-elasticity,  photostress,  and 
Moire  fringes.  Recent  investigations  have  been  made  on  visco- 
elastic  materials  as  well  as  metals.  Research  in  crack  propaga- 
tion and  fatigue  is  underway  which  involves  the  interaction 
of  students  and  faculty  of  the  department  of  mechanical 
engineering  and  mechanics  with  the  metallurgy  and  materials 
science  department.  Equipment  is  also  available  for  vibration 
and  other  dynamic  studies. 

A  master's  degree  program  in  design  is  available  with  the 
objectives  of  educating  students  in  advanced  design  methods 
and  encouraging  the  initiation  and  implementation  of  cre- 
ative design  projects.  A  wide  range  of  interdisciplinary  course 
offerings  permit  construction  of  a  program  in  one  or  several 
of  the  following  areas;  mechanical  systems,  reliability  engi- 
neering, probabilistic  approaches  to  design,  mechanism  syn- 
thesis, digital  and  analog  computer-aided  design,  ocean  engi- 
neering, bio-mechanics,  optimum  design,  and  environmental 
design.  In  addition  to  his  formal  course  work  the  student  will 
register  for  6  hours  of  M.E.  460,  design  project,  and  submit 
an  acceptable  design  project  as  his  thesis. 

For  the  master's  degree  a  thesis  will  normally  be  required. 

Any  student  who  has  not  taken  the  mathematics  courses 
required  in  the  undergraduate  mechanical  engineering  curri- 
culum will  be  expected  to  make  up  for  this  deficiency  in 
planning  his  graduate  program.  He  may  then  be  required  to 
present  a  larger  number  of  credits  than  the  minimum  re- 
quired for  graduation. 

Subject  to  proper  approval  courses  from  other  engineering 
curricula,  such  as  mechanics,  chemical  engineering,  and 
metallurgy  and  materials  science,  may  be  included  in  the 
major. 

A  student  who  plans  to  work  for  the  doctorate  should 
submit  a  general  plan  to  the  chairman  of  the  department 
during  his  first  year  and  arrange  for  the  qualifying  examina- 
tions. 


For  Graduates 

In  the  thermal-fluid  sciences  research  is  in  process  on  a  vari- 
ety of  problems  involving  fluid  mechanics  and  heat  transfer. 
Investigation  continues  on  basic  fluid  phenomena  with 
special  emphasis  being  given  to  the  area  of  fluidics  including 
work  on  wall  jets,  confined  jets,  jet  interaction  and  jet  stabili- 
ty. In  addition  studies  of  the  dynamics  of  fluid  amplifiers, 
transmission  line  characteristics,  noise  and  modeling  of  fluid 
amplifiers  are  underway.  A  specially  designed  water  table  has 


420.  Advanced  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Critical  review  of  first  and  second  laws,  entropy,  and  general 
thermodynamic  equations  and  relations;  applications  to  cur- 
rent problems  in  technology  and  research. 


198     Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 


421.  Topics  in  Thermodynamics  (3) 

Emphasis  on  theoretical  and  experimental  treatment  of  com- 
bustion processes  including  dissociation,  flame  temperature 
calculations,  diffusion  flames,  stabililty  and  propagation; 
related  problems  in  compressible  flow  involving  one- 
dimensional,  oblique  shock  waves  and  detonation  waves. 
Methods  of  measurement  and  instrumentation. 

424.  Turbulent  Flow  (3) 

Stability  of  laminar  flow;transition  to  turbulence.  Navier- 
Stokes  equations  with  turbulence.  Bounded  turbulent  shear 
flows;  free  shear  flows;  statistical  description  of  turbulence. 
Prerequisite:  M.E.  331. 

426.  Radiative  and  Conductive  Heat  Transfer  (3) 
Principles  of  radiative  transfer;  thermal-radiative  properties  of 
diffuse  and  specular  surfaces;  radiative  exchange  between 
bodies;  radiative  transport  through  absorbing,  emitting  and 
scattering  media.  Advanced  topics  in  steady-state  and  transi- 
ent conduction;  analytical  and  numerical  solutions;  problems 
of  combined  conductive  and  radiative  heat  transfer.  Prerequi- 
site: M.E.  321  or  Ch.E.  421. 

427.  (Ch.E.  427)  Multiphase  Heat  Transfer  (3) 

Heat  transfer  and  fluid  dynamics  of  multiphase  systems.  Sub- 
cooled,  nucleate,  and  film  boiling;  bubble  nucleation;  dy- 
namics of  bubble  growth  and  collapse;  vapor-liquid  co- 
current  flow  regimes;  two-phase  pressure  drop  and  momen- 
tum exchange,  low  instabilities;  convective-flow  boiling; 
simultaneous  heat  and  mass  transfer.  Prerequisite:  M.E.  321 
or  Ch.E.  421. 

428.  Boundary  Layers  and  Convective  Heat  Transfer  (3) 
Navier-Stokes  and  energy  equations,  laminar  boundary  layer 
theory,  analysis  of  friction  dray,  heat  transfer  and  separation. 
Transition  from  laminar  to  turbulent  flow.  Turbulent  bound- 
ary layer  theory,  Prandtl  mixing  length,  turbulent  friction 
drag,  and  heat  transfer.  Integral  methods.  Flow  in  ducts, 
wakes  and  jets.  Natural  convection  heat  transfer.  Prerequi- 
sites: M.E.  331  or  M.E.  321. 


439.  Fluid  Mechanics  of  Turbo-machinery  (3) 
The  Euler  equation.  One-dimensional  analysis  of  turbo- 
machinery.  Performance  characteristics.  Limitations  on  per- 
formance imposed  by  real  fluid  effects.  Cascade  flow.  Two- 
and  three-dimensional  flow.  Surge  and  stall.  Prerequisite: 
M.E.  322. 

442.  Analytical  Methods  in  Engineering  I  (3) 
Analytical  methods  of  solution  for  discrete  and  continuous 
engineering  systems.  Theoretical,  numerical  and  approximate 
methods  of  solution  applied  to  equilibrium,  characteristic 
value  and  propagation  types  of  engineering  problems. 

443.  Analytical  Methods  in  Engineering  II  (3) 
Continuation  of  M.E.  442. 

444.  Experimental  Stress  Analysis  in  Design  (3) 
Applications  of  experimental  stress  analysis  to  mechanical 
design  problems. 

446.  Reliability  Engineering  (3) 

Component  catastrophic-failure  models.  System  reliability 
analysis  and  design.  Drift-failure,  component  tolerance  and 
parameter  variation.  Physical  failure  models  and  parameter 
estimation.  Prerequisite:  Math.  231  or  Math.  309. 

449.  Systems  Analysis  and  Optimization  (3) 

Methods  for  the  analysis  and  optimization  of  mechanical 
engineering  systems.  General  theory  of  linear  multivariable 
dynamic  systems,  state  variable  method  of  solution.  Varia- 
tional methods  of  optimization.  Applications  to  electro- 
mechanical, machine  and  control  systems  design. 

450.  Special  Topics  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  field  of  mechanical  engineering 
not  covered  in  more  general  courses. 

451.  Seminar  (1-3) 

Critical  discussion  of  recent  advances  in  mechanical  engi- 
neering. 


431.  Advanced  Gas  Dynamics  (3) 

Method  of  characteristics.  Unsteady  continuous  flows.  Un- 
steady flows  with  discontinuities.  Shock  tubes.  Detonation 
waves.  Two-dimensional  and  axisymmetric  supersonic  flows. 
Momentum  and  energy  equation  of  compressible  viscous 
fluids.  Prerequisite:  M.E.  322. 

432.  Topics  in  Gas  Dynamics  (3) 

The  equilibrium  thermodynamic  properties  of  a  dissociating 
mixture  of  gases.  Equilibrium  flow  of  dissociating  gases. 
Vibrational  and  chemical  nonequilibrium.  Criteria  for  therm- 
odynamic equilibrium  of  gas  flow.  Chemical  kinetics  of 
gaseous  reactions.  Equations  of  flow  of  a  reacting  gas  mix- 
ture. Nonequilibrium  flows.  Application  to  design  of  ram-jets 
and  rocket  nozzles  and  of  re-entry  vehicles.  Prerequisites: 
M.E.  320,  M.E.  322. 


457.  (E.E.  457)  Introduction  to  Modern  Control  Theory  (3) 
State-space  analysis  in  the  time  and  frequency  domains.  Ob- 
servability, controllability,  stability.  Feedback,  feed-forward, 
and  compensation  techniques  of  control.  Quadratic  perfor- 
mance indices  and  system  optimization;  Pontryagin's  maxi- 
mum principle.  Prerequisite:  M.E.  343,  or  E.E.  212,  or  Ch.E. 
386. 

458.  Modeling  of  Dynamic  Systems 

Modeling  of  complex  linear  and  nonlinear  energetic  dynamic 
engineering  systems.  Emphasis  on  subdivision  into  multiport 
elements  and  representation  by  the  bond  graph  language, 
using  direct,  energetic,  and  experimental  methods.  Field 
lumping.  Analytical  and  graphical  reductions.  Analog,  digital 
and  hybrid  simulation.  Examples  including  mechanisms,  elec- 
tromechanical transducers,  electric  and  fluid  circuits,  and 
thermal  systems.  Prerequisite:  M.E.  343,  or  E.E.  212;  Mech. 
302. 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics     1 99 


459.  Advanced  Topics  in  Control 

Analytic,  graphical  and  numerical  methods  in  nonlinear  con- 
trol systems,  plus  one  or  more  of  the  following:  distributed 
parameter  systems;  optim.il  and  self-optimalizing  control; 
Stochastic  signals  and  systems;  dynamic  programming;  appli- 
cations to  a  class  of  engineering  devices.  Prerequisite;  M.E. 
449  orCh.E.  I  12. 

460.  Design  Project  (1-6) 

Selected  design  project  in  an  area  of  student  and  faculty  in- 
terest where  the  need  for  creative  design  work  is  recognized. 
Economic  as  well  as  physical  and  functional  aspects  are  con- 
sidered. Laboratory  testing  and  data  acquisition  is  carried  out 
as  needed  to  promote  design  development.  Prototypes  are 
constructed  and  tested,  when  practical. 

Mechanics 

Undergraduate  Courses 

I.  Statics  (3) 

Composition  and  resolution  of  forces;  equivalent  force  sys- 
tems; equilibrium  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies;  centroids  and 
centers  of  gravity;  analysis  of  simple  structures;  internal 
forces  in  beams;  friction;  moments  and  products  of  inertia; 
method  of  virtual  work.  Prerequisites:  Math.  22  and  Phys. 
11. 

II.  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

Strength  and  elasticity  of  materials;  theory  of  stresses  and 
strains;  deflection  of  beams  and  shafts;  torsion;  buckling  of 
struts.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  1;  Math.  23,  previously  or  concur- 
rently. 

13.  Materials  Testing  Laboratory  (1) 

Experiments  to  study  the  mechanical  properties  of  engineer- 
ing materials;  correlation  of  the  properties  of  different 
materials,  of  their  behavior  under  different  types  of  load 
application,  and  of  mechanical  properties  of  design  criteria. 
Verification  of  certain  assumptions  used  in  Mech.  11.  Prere- 
quisite: Mech.  11,  preferably  concurrently. 

102.  Dynamics  (3) 

Kinematics  and  kinetics  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies;  relative 
motion;  dynamic  equilibrium;  work  and  energy;  impulse  and 
momentum.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  1;  Math.  23. 

103.  Principles  of  Mechanics  (4) 

Composition  and  resolution  of  forces;  equivalent  force  sys- 
tems; equilibrium  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies;  friction. 
Kinematics  and  kinetics  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies;  relative 
motion;  work  and  energy;  impulse  and  momentum.  Prerequi- 
sites: Math.  23  and  Phys.  11. 


For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

203.  Advanced  Strength  of  Materials  (3) 
Elementary  consideration  of  stress  and  strain  at  a  point. 
Stress-strain  relations  in  two  dimensions.  Basic  equations  of 
motion.  Classical  theories  of  failures.  Analysis  of  simple  con- 
tinuum systems  with  applications  to  materials  behavior 
phenomena.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  1 1 ,  Math.  205. 

302.  Advanced  Dynamics  (3) 

Fundamental  dynamical  theorems  and  their  application  to 
the  study  of  the  motion  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies,  with 
particular  emphasis  on  three-dimensional  motion.  Use  of 
generalized  coordinates;  Lagrange's  equations  and  their  appli- 
cations. Prerequisites:  Mech.  102  or  103;  Math.  205. 

305.  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 
Selected  problems  of  stress  and  strain  that  are  governed  by 
ordinary  differential  equations  such  as  combined  bending  and 
torsion  of  bars,  curved  bars,  beams  on  elastic  foundation. 
Membrane  analogy.  Principles  of  indeterminate  analysis. 
Energy  methods.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  203  or  equivalent; 
Math.  205. 

307.  Mechanics  of  Continua  (3) 

Fundamental  principles  of  the  mechanics  of  deformable 
bodies.  Study  of  stress,  velocity  and  acceleration  fields.  Com- 
patability  equations,  conservation  laws.  Applications  to  two- 
dimensional  problems  in  the  theories  of  perfectly  elastic 
materials  and  also  perfectly  plastic  materials.  Prerequisites: 
Mech.  203  and  305. 

313.  Fracture  Mechanics  (3) 

Fracture  behavior  in  solids,  the  Griffith  theory  and  exten- 
sions to  linear  elastic  fracture  process  models;  stress  analysis 
of  cracks;  generalization  of  fracture  criteria;  plasticity;  sub- 
critical  crack  growth,  including  environmental  and  thermal 
effects;  fracture  toughness  testing;  failure  analysis  and  frac- 
ture control  plans.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  11,  Math.  205. 

323.  (C.E.  324)  Fluid  Mechanics  of  the  Ocean  &  Atmosphere 

(3) 

Hydrostatics  of  the  ocean  and  atmosphere.  Vertical  stability. 
Fluid  motion  in  a  rotating  coordinate  system.  Geostrophic 
flow;  ocean  currents;  surface  and  internal  waves.  Prerequi- 
sites: M.E.  231  or  C.E.  121. 

326.  Aerodynamics  (3) 

Application  of  fluid  dynamics  to  external  flows.  Simple  exact 
solutions  in  two  dimensions.  Kutta  condition  at  a  trailing 
edge.  Thin  aerofoil  theory— steady  and  unsteady  flow.  Lifting 
line  theory.  Flow  past  slender  bodies.  Linearized  compressi- 
ble flow.  Far  field  solutions— shock  formation.  Prerequisite: 
M.E.  231;  Math.  208. 


200     Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 


350.  Special  Topics  (3) 

A  study  of  some  field  of  engineering  mechanics  not  covered 

in  the  general  courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 

department. 

For  Graduates 

The  graduate  courses  in  mechanics  are  open  in  general  to 
students  who  have  been  graduated  from  a  curriculum  in  engi- 
neering mechanics,  engineering  mathematics,  engineering 
physics,  civil  engineering,  or  mechanical  engineering  at  a  re- 
cognized institution. 

A  candidate  for  the  M.S.  degree  in  Applied  Mechanics  is 
expected  to  possess  a  thorough  knowledge  of  undergraduate 
mathematics  and  mechanics.  Math.  205,  208  and  322,  and 
Mech.  302  and  305,  or  their  equivalents,  are  considered  pre- 
requisites for  graduate  work  in  applied  mechanics.  Any  of 
these  courses  which  have  not  been  taken  by  the  student  as  an 
undergraduate  should  be  included  in  his  graduate  program. 
He  may  then  be  required  to  present  a  larger  number  of 
credits  than  the  minimum  required  for  graduation.  A  thesis 
carrying  3  to  6  credit  hours  is  required  of  all  candidates  for 
the  M.S.  degree. 

Current  departmental  research  activities  of  interest  in- 
clude programs  as  follows: 

Continuum  Mechanics.  Formulation  of  field  equations  and 
constitutive  equations  in  non-linear  continuum  mechanics. 
Problems  in  finite  and  linear  elasticity  theories.  Mechanics  of 
viscoelastic  solids  and  fluids.  Plasticity  theory.  Generalized 
continuum  mechanics.  Thermomechanical  and  elector- 
mechanical  interactions.  Stress  bifringence.  Wave  propaga- 
tion. Finite  amplitude  wave  propagation. 

Fracture  Mechanics.  Stress  analysis  of  media  containing  inclu- 
sions or  perforations,  including  visco-elastic,  nonhomogene- 
ous,  and  anisotropic  materials.  Analysis  of  crack  growth 
under  static,  periodic,  and  random  loadings  and  environmen- 
tal effects.  Optimizations  of  fracture  control.  Crack  propaga- 
tion theories  for  non-linear  materials.  Influence  of  cracks  on 
the  strength  of  structural  members. 

Stochastic  Processes.  Response  of  systems  to  stochastic  in- 
puts, including  the  effects  of  multi-dimensional  fields  and 
non-stationary  processes.  Prediction  theory.  Cumulative 
damage  under  random  loads. 

Theory  of  Thin  Shells.  Effects  of  initial  stresses  on  the  de- 
formation of  thin  shells;  vibration  and  stability.  Interaction 
problems  of  elastic  media  with  electric  and  magnetic  fields. 
Dynamic  response  of  magnetically  excited  transducer. 
Mechanics  of  tonomety  applied  to  the  eye.  Construction  of  a 
mathematical  model  for  the  deformation  of  the  eye. 

Fluid  Mechanics.  Finite  amplitude  waves  in  stratified  gases 
and  fluids.  Shock  propagation  and  problems  related  to  the 
sonic  "boom."  Non-equilibrium  and  low  density  flows. 
Boundary  layer  separation  and  wake  models.  Flows  of  non- 
Newtonian  fluids  in  flexible  tubes,  with  application  to  hemo- 
rheology.  Magneto-fluid  mechanics.  Wing  theory.  Three- 


dimensional  flow  in  planar  nozzles  and  in  confined  jets.  Dy- 
namics of  unstable  jets  and  jet  interaction  processes.  Behavior 
of  jets  on  acoustic  fields.  Switching  dynamics  in  bistable  am- 
plifiers. Noise  correlation  studies  in  bounded  jet  flows. 

Special  departmental  facilities  of  interest  to  the  graduate 
student  include  the  latest  mechanical,  electrodynamic  and 
servocontrolled  hydraulic  testing  machines. 

402.  Advanced  Analytical  Mechanics  (3) 
Fundamental  dynamical  theorems  and  their  applications  to 
advanced  problems;  generalized  coordinates;  Lagrange's  equa- 
tions; fixed  and  moving  constraints;  non-holonomic  systems; 
Hamilton's  principle;  Hamilton's  canonical  equations;  contact 
transformations',  Hamilton-Jacobi  partial  differential  equa- 
tion. Prerequisite:  Mech.  302  or  consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. 

405.  Response  of  Systems  to  Random  Loads  (3) 

Stochastic  processes;  correlation  functions  and  power  spec- 
tra; response  of  mechanical  systems  to  one-dimensional  and 
multidimensional  random  load  fields;  probability  theory  for 
several  random  variables;  statistical  properties  of  the  random 
vibrations  of  mechanical  systems;  applications  to  failure  pre- 
diction. Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

406.  Advanced  Vibrations  (3) 

General  theory  of  eigenvalue  problems  for  discrete  and  con- 
tinuous dynamical  systems;  Sturm  Liouville  theory,  variation- 
al techniques;  transient  and  frequency  response.  Prerequisite: 
M.E.  242  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

407.  Wave  Propagation  in  Solids  (3) 

Wave  propagation  in  deformable  elastic  solids;  problems  in 
half-space  and  layered  media;  application  of  integral  trans- 
formations. 

409.  Theory  of  Elasticity  I  (3) 

Kinematics  of  deformation,  analysis  of  stress,  stress-strain 
relations,  strain  energy  function.  Reciprocal  theorem. 
Methods  for  two-dimensional  boundary  value  problems 
applied  to  anti-plane,  torsion,  bending  and  plane  problems. 
Approximate  and  numerical  methods  of  solution.  Prerequi- 
sites: Math.  205;  Mech.  305  or  equivalent  course  in  advanced 
mechanics  of  material. 

410.  Theory  of  Elasticity  II  (3) 

Advanced  topics  in  the  theory  of  elasticity.  The  subject 
matter  may  vary  from  year  to  year  and  may  include,  e.g., 
theory  of  potential  functions,  linear  thermoelasticity,  dy- 
namics of  deformable  media,  integral  transforms  and  com- 
plex-variable methods  in  classical  elasticity.  Problems  of 
boundary  layer  type  in  elasticity;  current  developments  on 
the  micro-structure  theory  of  elasticity.  Prerequisites:  Mech. 
409,  Math.  208,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics     201 


411.  (Phys.  471)  t  .Minimum  Mechanics  (3) 

An  introduction  will  be  given  to  the  continuum  theories  of 
the  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids.  This  will  include  a  dis 
cussion  of  the  mechanical  md  thermodynamical  bases  of  the 
subject,  .is  well  as  the  use  >>t  invariance  principles  in  formul- 
ating constitutive  equations.  Applications  of  the  theories  to 
specific  problems  will  be  given. 

412.  Theory  of  Plasticity  (3) 

Mechanical  behavior  in  the  plastic  range;  foundations  of  the 
theory  of  plasticity;  axisymmetric  problems;  limit  analysis 
theorems;  plane  strain  and  slip  line  theory,  applications  to 
metal  forming;  introduction  to  plastic  analysis  of  structures. 
Prerequisites;  Math.  205;  Mech.  305,  or  equivalent  course  in 
advanced  mechanics  of  materials. 

413.  Fracture  Mechanics  (3) 

Introduction  to  the  Griffith-Irwin  theory  of  static  strength  of 
bodies  containing  cracks;  stress-intensity-factor  methods; 
application  to  fatigue  crack  growth;  complex  variable 
methods  of  stress  analysis  of  cracks  for  extension  and  bend- 
ing of  plates,  for  torsion  and  flexure  of  bars,  and  for  thermal 
stress  problems;  viscoelastic,  anisotropic,  and  non-homogene- 
ous effects.  Prerequisites:  Mech.  203,  Math.  208,  or  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

415.  (C.E.  468)  Stability  of  Elastic  Structures  (3) 
Basic  concepts  of  instability  of  a  structure;  bifurcation, 
energy  increment,  snap-through,  dynamic  instability.  Analy- 
tical and  numerical  methods  of  finding  buckling  loads  of 
columns.  Postbuckling  deformations  of  cantilever  column. 
Dynamic  buckling  with  nonconservative  forces.  Effects  of 
initial  imperfections.  Inelastic  buckling.  Buckling  by  torsion 
and  flexure.  Variational  methods.  Buckling  of  frames.  In- 
stability problems  of  thin  plates  and  shells.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  205. 


flow.  Bernoulli  theorems.  Vortex  motion,  velocity  potential, 
stream  funi  tion.  Potential  flow  in  two  and  three  dimensions. 
Compressible  flow:  sound  waves,  simple  waves;  gas  dynamic 
disi  ontinuities. 

422.  Fluid  Mechanics  (3) 

Similarity  and  dimensional  analysis.  Exact  solution  for 
viscous  incompressible  flow.  Singular  perturbation  theory, 
with  application  to  flows  at  low  and  high  Reynolds  number. 
Hydrodynamic  stability.  Depending  on  interest,  additional 
topics  from  magnetohydrodynamics,  kinetic  theory,  wing 
theory,  turbulence,  water  waves,  flows  in  flexible  tubes.  Pre- 
requisite: Mech.  421. 

424.  Unsteady  Fluid  Flows  (3) 

Gas  dynamics,  finite  amplitude  disturbances  in  perfect  and 
real  gases;  channel  flows;  three-dimensional  acoustics; 
theories  of  the  sonic  boom.  Motions  in  fluids  with  a  free  sur- 
face: basic  hydrodynamics,  small  amplitude  waves  on  deep 
water;  ship  waves;  dispersive  waves;  shallow  water  gravity 
waves  and  atmospheric  waves.  Hemodynamics:  pulsatile 
blood  flow  at  high  and  low  Reynolds  number.  Models  of  the 
interaction  of  flow  with  artery  walls. 

437.  (Met.  437)  Dislocations  and  Strengths  in  Crystals  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Met.  437. 

450.  Special  Problems  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  some  field  of  applied  mechanics  not 

covered  in  more  general  courses. 


416.  Theory  of  Thin  Shells 

Derivation  of  the  complete  linear  governing  equations  for  a 
thin  shell:  differential  geometry;  analysis  of  strain;  stress 
resultants  and  equilibrium;  relations  between  stress  resultants 
and  strain;  integral  identities  in  shell  theory;  layered  shells. 
Numerical  and  analytical  methods  of  solution  of  shell  equa- 
tions. Governing  equations  and  solutions  for  thin  plates. 
Vibrations  of  plates  and  shells.  Nonlinear  theories  of  plates 
and  shells.  Prerequisites:  Math.  205;  Mech.  305;  or  equivalent 
course  in  advanced  mechanics  of  materials. 

417.  Mixed  Boundary  Value  Problems  in  Mechanics  (3) 
General  description  of  mixed  boundary  value  problems  in 
potential  theory  and  solid  mechanics.  Solutions  by  dual 
series,  dual  integral  equations  and  singular  integral  equations. 
Approximate  and  numerical  methods. 

421.  Fluid  Mechanics  (3) 

Kinematics  of  fluid  flow.  Langrangian  and  Eulerian  descrip- 
tions. Basic  conservation  laws.  Review  of  thermodynamics. 
Constitutive  relations.  Vorticity,  circulations.  Irrotational 


202     Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 


Metallurgy  &  Materials 
Science 


Professors 

George  Powell  Conard,  Sc.D.,  Chairman 
Joseph  Francis  Libsch,  Sc.D.,  Alcoa  Professor  and  Vice 
President— Research 

Betzalel  Avitzur,  Ph.D.  Director,  Institute  for  Metal  Forming 
Ye  Tsang  Chou,  Ph.D. 
Walter  Charles  Hahn,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

Ralph  Wayne  Kraft,  Ph.D.,  New  Jersey  Zinc  Professor 
George  Krauss,  Jr.,  Sc.D. 
Alan  Wiggins  Pense,  Ph.D. 

Richard  Moore  Spriggs,  Ph.D.,  Vice  President- 
Administration 

Robert  Daniel  Stout,  Ph.D.,  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 
David  Alden  Thomas,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Director,  Materials 
Research  Center 

Associate  Professors 

Sidney  Roy  Butler,  Ph.D. 

Joseph  Irwin  Goldstein,  Ph.D. 

D.  P.  H.  Hasselman,  Ph.D. 

Richard  Warren  Hertzberg,  Ph.D. 

Donald  M.  Smyth,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Materials  Research  Center 

Stephen  Kenneth  Tarby,  Ph.D. 

John  Dudley  Wood,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professor 

Michael  Richard  Notis,  Ph.D. 


Progress  in  many  fields  of  engineering  depends  upon  dis- 
covery of  new  materials  and  a  better  understanding  of  the 
behavior  of  existing  materials.  Interest  in  new  materials  for 
solid-state  devices,  for  application  of  nuclear  energy  and  for 
space  technology,  as  well  as  a  better  understanding  of  the 
behavior  of  materials  in  the  design  of  structures,  automobiles 
and  aircraft,  plant  processing  equipment,  electrical  machin- 
ery, etc.,  have  increased  the  need  tor  men  trained  in  the 
science  and  technology  of  metals  and  other  materials.  The 
curriculum  in  metallurgy  and  materials  sciences  is  designed  to 
train  graduates  for  research,  development,  operations, 
management  and  sales  careers  in  industry  or  for  graduate 
study  in  metallurgy  and  materials  science. 

Training  for  this  field  of  engineering  requires  basic  studies 
in  mathematics,  chemistry,  physics,  and  mechanics,  plus  a 
general  background  in  engineering  principles,  followed  by 
intensive  training  in  the  application  of  scientific  and  engineer- 
ing principles  to  the  development  and  use  of  materials  in  a 
technological  society.  In  addition,  the  curriculum  offers  an 
introduction  to  humanistic  and  social  studies  which  broaden 


the  student's  outlook  and  enhance  his  professional  develop- 
ment after  graduation. 

The  objective  of  the  program  is  to  combine  a  fundamental 
understanding  of  the  behavior  of  materials  from  the  elec- 
tronic, atomic,  crystallographic,  microstructural  and  macro- 
structural  viewpoints  with  knowledge  of  the  technology  of 
materials  preparation  and  processing.  The  student  will  thus 
receive  a  broad  education  with  emphasis  on  the  factors  which 
govern  the  mechanical,  physical,  and  chemical  properties  of 
materials  to  aid  him  in  the  analysis,  development,  selection 
and  use  of  materials  for  all  types  of  industries.  While  some 
graduates  go  directly  into  metal  producing  companies,  a  large 
proportion  serve  as  metallurgists  or  materials  engineers  in  the 
chemical,  electrical,  transportation,  communications,  space 
and  other  metal  and  materials  consumer  industries.  A  number 
of  students  pursue  graduate  study  for  university  teaching  and 
research  careers. 

Recommended  Sequence  of  Courses 

Freshman  Year  (See  page  45) 

Sophomore  Year,  First  Semester  (16-19  credit  hours)t 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Met  63  Engineering  Materials  and  Processes 

or 
Met  91  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (16-17  credit  hours)t 

Math  205  Linear  Methods 

or 
Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

EE  160  Electrical  Circuits  and  Apparatus 

and 
EE  161  Electrical  Problems  (4) 

or 
Phys  31  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Mech  1  Statics  (3) 

Met  10  Metallurgy  Lab 

or 
Mech  13  Materials  Testing  Lab  (1) 

GS  Electives  (6) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours)t 

ChE  60  Unit  Operations  (3) 

Mech  11  Mechanics  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  207  Electronic  and  Crystal  Structure  (3) 

Met  210  Metallurgical  Thermodynamics  (3) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 


Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science     203 


Junioi  Year,  Second  Semester  |  16-17  credit  hours  I 
ME  166 


Mi  .1,  102 
Mel  101 
Met  208 
Met  218 
Met  304 


Summer 
Met  100 


Procedures  lor  Mechanical  Design  (3) 
or 

Mich.mic.il  Engineering  Design  (3) 

Professional  Development  (1) 

Phase  Diagrams  and  Transformations  (3) 

Mechanical  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Extractive  Metallurgy  1  (4) 

Elective  (3) 


Junior  Year 

Same  as  regular  program. 


Summer  Employment 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (18  credit  hottrs)f 

Met  305  Extractive  Metallurgy  II  (3) 

Met  307  Structure  and  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  313  Materials  Fabrication  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3)* 

Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  ( 15-18  credit  hours)f 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Met  278  Metallurgical  Reports  (3) 

Met  358  Selection  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  Approved  Elective  (3) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

tThe  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load  re- 
quired to  meet  graduation  requirements;  the  higher  the 
normal  semester  load. 

'Engineering  science  electives  include,  for  example,  Ch.E.  41, 
52,  320,  321;  E.E.  11,20,  103;  Mech.  102,  203,  313;  Met. 
312,333,334. 

In  addition  to  the  regular  program,  there  are  two  options  in 
the  curriculum  oriented  to  emphasize  (1)  industrial  metal- 
lurgy, and  (2)  preparation  for  graduate  research  in  materials. 

Industrial  Metallurgy  Option 

The  industrial  metallurgy  option  is  designed  to  prepare  stu- 
dents in  a  four-year  program  as  plant  metallurgists  or 
materials  engineers.  To  assist  in  this  objective,  students  elect- 
ing the  option  take  two  special  courses,  Met.  327  and  329,  in 
place  of  an  equivalent  number  of  other  specified  courses.  The 
emphasis  in  these  courses  is  a  team  approach  to  the  solution 
of  actual  plant  problems.  The  course  is  conducted  in  coopera- 
tion with  the  Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation,  and  three  days 
per  week  are  spent  in  the  Bethlehem  plant  for  investigation 
of  problems  in  plant  operations.  The  option  is  limited  to  a 
small  gToup  of  seniors  selected  by  the  department  from  those 
who  apply.  Summer  employment  is  provided  when  possible 
for  those  who  elect  to  initiate  the  program  during  the  sum- 
mer preceding  the  senior  year. 


Summer 

Met   10(1 


Industrial  Employment 


Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (17-20  credit  hours)t 

Met  327  Industrial  Metallurgy  (4) 

Met  329  Industrial  Metallurgy  (4) 

Met  305  Extractive  Metallurgy  (3) 

Met  307  Structure  and  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  313  Materials  Fabrication  (3) 

Elective  (0-3) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Met  338  Metallurgy  Colloquium  (2) 

Met  358  Selection  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  Approved  Elective  (3) 

GS  Elective  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3)* 

tThe  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load  re- 
quired to  meet  graduation  requirements;  the  higher  the 
normal  semester  load. 

'Engineering  science  electives  include,  for  example,  Ch.E.  41, 
52,320,  321;  E.E.  11,20,  103;  Mech.  102,  203,  313;  Met. 
312,333,334. 

Research  Option 

For  those  students  who  may  be  interested  in  teaching,  re- 
search, or  development,  and  intend  to  pursue  graduate  work, 
a  research  option  is  offered.  In  this  option,  students  are  re- 
quired to  take  Met.  240  and  291.  Financial  support  may  be 
awarded  to  those  students  who  elect  to  initiate  a  research 
program  during  the  summer  preceding  the  senior  year.  The 
option  is  limited  to  a  small  group  of  selected  students. 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (18-19  credit  hours)t 

Same  as  regular  program  with  the  following  addition: 
Met  240  Research  Techniques  (2) 


Summer 
Met  100 


Industrial  Employment  or  Undergraduate 
Summer  Research 


Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours)t 

Met  291  Experimental  Metallurgy  (3) 

Met  305  Extractive  Metallurgy  II  (3) 

Met  307  Structure  and  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  313  Materials  Fabrication  (3) 

Elective  (3-6) 


204     Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 


Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (1 7  credit  hours) 

Chem  196  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Met  338  Metallurgy  Colloquium  (2) 

Met  358  Selection  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  Approved  Elective  (3) 

G.S.  Elective  (3) 

Engineering  Science  Elective  (3)* 

fThe  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represent  the  load  re- 
quired to  meet  graduation  requirements;  the  higher  the 
normal  semester  load. 

*Engineering  science  electives  include,  for  example,  Ch.E.  41, 
52,  320,321;E.E.  11,20,  103;  Mech.  102,203,  313;  Met. 
312,333,  334. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

10.  Metallurgy  Laboratory (1) 

Application  of  equipment  for  laboratory  study  of  structure 
and  properties  of  metals.  Prerequisite:  Met.  63  or  91  pre- 
viously or  concurrently. 

63.  Engineering  Materials  and  Processes  (3) 
A  study  of  engineering  materials  and  properties.  Methods  and 
effect  of  fabrication  and  treatment.  Application  and  use  of 
materials  in  engineering.  Primarily  metals,  but  including  plas- 
tics, ceramics,  and  other  engineering  materials.  Prerequisites: 
Chem.  21;Phys.  11  or  16. 

91.  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

Introductory  study  of  the  relationship  between  structure  (on 
the  atomic,  crystallographic  or  molecular,  micro  and  macro 
scales)  and  physical  and  mechanical  properties  of  metallic, 
ceramic,  and  polymeric  materials.  Influence  of  processing 
variables  on  structure  and  properties.  Lectures  and  recitation. 
Prerequisites:  Chem.  21;  Phys.  21  or  16  previously  or  con- 
currently. 

100.  Industrial  Employment 

In  the  summer  following  the  junior  year  students  in  the  cur- 
riculum of  metallurgy  and  materials  science  are  required  to 
secure  at  least  eight  weeks  of  experience  in  industrial  plants 
or  research  organizations. 

101.  Professional  Development  (1) 

Meetings  with  the  department  staff  for  the  purpose  of  devel- 
oping a  professional  outlook  of  the  engineering  student.  Re- 
quired reading,  oral  reports  and  term  papers.  Prerequisite: 
junior  standing.  Consent  of  chairman  of  the  department. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

207.  Electronic  and  Crystal  Structure  (3) 

Atomic  theory,  chemical  bonding,  lattice  concepts,  and 

theory  of  X-rays.  Nature  of  crystalline  phases,  imperfections, 

and  atom  movements.  Electron  theories  of  solids.  Lectures 

and  laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Met.  10  or  Mech.  13,  and  Phys. 

21. 


208.  Phase  Diagrams  and  Transformations  (3) 
Thermodynamic  basis  for  equilibrium.  The  phase  rule.  Equili- 
brium phase  diagrams  and  non-equilibrium  considerations. 
Solidification  and  solid  state  phase  changes.  Rationalizations 
of  microstructures.  Recovery,  recrystallization,  and  grain 
growth.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Met.  207, 
Met.  210. 

210.  Metallurgical  Thermodynamics  (3) 

The  applications  of  thermodynamic  relations  to  metallurgical 
processes  with  emphasis  on  solving  specific  problems  for  pro- 
cesses such  as  the  open  hearth  for  steel,  heat  treating  atmo- 
spheres, alloy  equilibrium  diagrams,  and  others.  Lectures  and 
problem  sections.  Prerequisite:  Math.  23. 

218.  Mechanical  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 
Study  of  the  deformation  and  fracture  behavior  of  materials. 
Elastic  and  plastic  behavior,  with  emphasis  on  crystallo- 
graphic consideration.  Strengthening  mechanisms  in  solids. 
Static  and  time  dependent  fracture  from  metallurgical  and 
continuum  viewpoints.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequi- 
sites: Mech.  11,  Met.  207,  Met.  63  or  Met.  91. 

240.  Research  Techniques  (2-3) 

Study,  analysis,  and  application  of  experimental  techniques 
in  metallurgical  and  materials  research.  Analysis  of  ex- 
perimental data  and  methods  of  presentation.  Design  of  ex- 
perimental programs.  Recitations  and  laboratory.  Restricted 
to  small  numbers  of  students  by  the  department. 

278.  Metallurgical  Reports  (3) 

An  opportunity  for  the  advanced  student  to  develop  famili- 
arity with  current  metallurgical  literature  and  to  present  oral 
reports  and  a  comprehensive  written  survey.  Prerequisite: 
senior  standing. 

291.  Experimental  Metallurgy  (3) 

Application  of  research  techniques  to  a  project  in  metallurgy 
or  materials  science  selected  in  consultation  with  the  senior 
staff.  Prerequisite:  Met.  240. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Met. (1-3) 

304.  Extractive  Metallurgy  1  (4) 

A  unit  process  study  of  extractive  metallurgy  techniques. 
Includes  chemical  principles,  thermochemistry,  and  kinetics; 
also  phases  in  pyrometallurgical  systems,  combustion  of 
fuels,  and  refractories.  The  preparation,  treatment,  and  hand- 
ling of  materials  for  primary  crude  metal  production.  Lec- 
tures plus  laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Ch.E.  60,  Met.  210. 

305.  Extractive  Metallurgy  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  Met.  304.  A  detailed  engineering  analysis  of 
important  metallurgical  processes.  A  study  of  the  thermody- 
namic and  kinetic  aspects  of  these  processes.  Development  of 
mathematical  models  of  processes  by  computer  program- 
ming. Lectures,  laboratory,  and  plant  trips.  A  three-day  in- 
spection trip  is  required.  Prerequisites:  Met.  304. 


Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science     205 


307.  Structure  and  Behavioi  ol  Materials  (3) 

:  iM.Mi  ol  structure  and  properties  •>!  engineering  materi 
als.  Design  of  tlu'rm.il.  chemical,  and  mechanical  treatments 
to  develop  optimum  properties  in  metals,  ceramics,  and  poly- 
mers. Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Met.  218,  Met. 

U2,    Ch.E.    11  2)  Fundamentals  of  Corrosion  (3) 
Ourse  description,  see  Ch.E.  312. 

313.  Materials  Fabrication  (3) 

Basic  concepts  of  stress,  strain,  and  stress-strain  behavior 
under  load.  Analysis  and  description  of  metal  forming,  metal 
cutting,  casting,  joining,  and  powder  metallurgy.  Lectures 
and  laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Met.  63  or  Met.  91,  or  equiva- 
lent. 

315.  Introduction  to  Physical  Ceramics  (3) 

Methods  of  fabrication,  physical  properties,  and  applications 
of  ceramic  materials,  including  oxides,  carbides,  nitrides, 
borides  and  silicides.  Correlation  ot  atomic  bonding,  micro- 
structure  and  physical  behavior  in  service  environments. 
Special  topics,  including  electronic  ceramics,  nuclear 
ceramics,  refractories,  cutting  tools  and  abrasives.  Prerequi- 
site: Chem.  21  and  Phys.  11  or  consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. 

316.  Physical  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 
Consideration  of  observed  electrical,  magnetic,  thermal,  and 
optical  properties  of  crystalline  materials  with  emphasis  on 
their  relationship  to  electron  configuration  and  crystal  struc- 
ture. Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Met.  207  or 
Phys.  31,  or  consent  of  department  chairman. 

317.  Imperfections  in  Crystals  (3) 

Study  of  the  types  of  imperfections  in  crystals  and  their 
effects  on  the  behavior  of  crytalline  materials  with  particular 
emphasis  on  dislocations.  Prerequisite:  Met.  218. 

319.  Current  Topics  in  Materials  Science  (3) 

A  study  ot  selected  topics  of  current  interest  in  the  field  of 
materials  science  but  not  covered  in  the  regular  courses.  May 
be  repeated  for  credit  with  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the 
department.  Prerequisite:  Met.  210,  Met.  218. 

320.  Analytical  Methods  in  Materials  Science  (3) 
Selected  topics  in  modern  analysis  and  their  application  to 
materials  problems  in  such  areas  as  thermodynamics,  crystal- 
lography, deformation  and  fracture,  and  diffusion.  Prerequi- 
site: Math.  231  or  Math.  205. 

327.  Industrial  Metallurgy  (4) 

This  course  is  restricted  to  a  small  group  of  seniors  and  gradu- 
ate students  selected  by  the  department  from  those  who 
apply.  Three  full  days  per  week  are  spent  at  the  plant  of  the 
Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation  for  research  in  plant  operations. 
Application  by  a  graduate  student  for  admission  to  this 
course  must  be  made  prior  to  March  1  of  the  previous  semes- 
ter. 


329.  Industrial  Metallurgy  (4) 

To  lie  taken  concurrently  with  Met.  327. 

333.  (Geol.  337)  X-ray  Methods  (3) 

Introduction  to  the  fundamentals  and  experimental  methods 
of  X-ray  techniques.  Application  to  various  materials  prob- 
lems including  diffraction,  radiography,  fluorescent  analysis. 
Lectures  and  laboratory  work.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  21 ,  Met. 
91  or  equivalent. 

334.  (Geol.  338)  Electron  Metallography  (3) 

Study  of  the  fundamentals  and  experimental  methods  of 
electron  microscopy,  scanning  electron  microscopy,  and  elec- 
tron microprobe  analysis.  Specific  topics  include  electron 
optics,  electron  beam  interactions  with  solids,  electron  dif- 
fraction, chemical  microanalysis,  and  transmission  electron 
microscopy.  Applications  to  the  study  of  the  structure  of 
material  will  be  given.  Special  laboratories  will  be  given  in 
cooperation  with  other  departments  as  required.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

338.  Metallurgical  Colloquium  (2) 

An  opportunity  for  the  student  to  develop  an  acquaintance 
with  the  current  metallurgical  literature,  the  ability  to  inter- 
pret such  literature  clearly,  and  skill  in  presenting  oral  engi- 
neering reports.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

343.  (Ch.E.  393,  Chem.  393)  Physical  Polymer  Science  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Ch.E.  393. 

358.  Selection  of  Materials  (3) 

Study  of  problems  relating  to  design  and  service  requirements 
of  material  components.  Selection  of  materials-fabrication, 
and  finishing  processes.  Failure  analysis.  Discussion  of 
specific  examples  involving  materials.  Lectures,  problems. 
Prerequisites:  Met.  307  and  Met  313,  or  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

361.  Physics  of  Materials  (3) 

Consideration  of  principles  of  quantum  mechanics  and  sta- 
tistical thermodynamics.  Intended  to  provide  a  basic  under- 
standing of  the  principles  underlying  the  study  of  structure 
and  properties  of  materials.  Prerequisites:  Met.  91  or  equiva- 
lent, Math.  205. 

362.  Structure  and  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 

Study  of  structure  and  transformation  in  materials  and  cor- 
relation of  structure  with  the  physical  and  mechanical 
behavior  of  materials.  Intended,  in  conjunction  with  Met. 
361,  to  provide  an  integrated  background  sequence  for 
further  studies  in  the  science  of  materials.  Prerequisite:  Met. 
91  or  equivalent. 

For  Graduates 

The  department  offers  three  degrees:  an  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  in 
Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science,  and  an  M.S.  in  Materials. 
This  latter  degree  is  part  of  a  special  five-year  program  which 


206     Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 


is  described  on  page  156. 

There  are  a  diversity  of  programs  and  curricula  available 
to  a  person  interested  in  graduate  study  in  the  area  of 
materials.  The  department  of  metallurgy  and  materials 
science  generally  is  the  department  from  which  a  degree  is 
earned.  However,  thesis  and  dissertation  research  may  be  a 
part  of  programs  underway  in  the  department  or  at  the 
Materials  Research  Center  or  other  departments  or  centers  at 
Lehigh. 

The  department  of  metallurgy  and  materials  science  has 
both  a  large  enough  staff  and  graduate  enrollment  to  enable 
it  to  suit  the  needs  of  students  whose  interests  range  from  the 
science  of  materials  through  materials  engineering  and  metal- 
lurgy. At  the  same  time,  those  advanced  students  who  desire 
it  are  usually  provided  the  opportunity  to  gain  experience  in 
teaching  under  the  guidance  of  the  senior  staff. 

The  foundation  for  successful  graduate  work  in  the  de- 
partment includes  sound  preparation  in  chemistry,  physics, 
and  mathematics,  and  adequate  breadth  of  general  education. 
Candidates  entering  the  department  who  have  obtained  their 
previous  degrees  in  fields  other  than  metallurgy  or  materials 
science  may  be  required  to  take  certain  undergraduate 
courses  without  credit  toward  the  graduate  degree  or  to  pass 
an  examination  to  demonstrate  a  satisfactory  foundation  for 
advanced  work. 

The  programs  of  the  department  are  flexible.  Upon 
acceptance,  each  student  is  assigned  a  faculty  advisor.  Under 
his  direction  the  student  plans  a  course  of  study  to  satisfy  his 
needs  and  interests.  The  department  has  established  specific 
recommended  programs  for  the  master  of  science  or  doctor 
of  philosophy  emphasizing  the  following  areas:  chemical 
metallurgy,  materials  engineering,  materials  science,  mechan- 
ical metallurgy,  physical  ceramics,  and  physical  metallurgy. 
These  programs  are  not  rigid.  The  program  in  chemical  metal- 
lurgy offers  a  cooperative  "Chem.-Met."  program  with  the 
chemical  engineering  department.  Through  cooperation  with 
the  mechanical  engineering  department  similiar  arrangements 
have  been  made  to  extend  the  materials  engineering  program 
to  include  an  option  in  materials  design.  The  emphasis  of  the 
mechanical  metallurgy  program  is  on  the  analysis  of  metal 
forming  operations.  Many  students,  however,  have  specialized 
in  other  areas  of  mechanical  metallurgy,  such  as  deformation 
and  fracture  analysis,  either  through  combined  programs  in 
physical  and  mechanical  metallurgy  or  through  cooperation 
with  the  departments  of  mechanics  or  mechanical  engineering 
and  the  Materials  Research  Center.  The  physical  ceramics 
program  emphasizes  unique  processing  techniques  as  well  as 
the  study  of  the  physical  behavior  of  various  ceramic  sys- 
tems. 

Graduate  school  requirements  are  explained  earlier  in  this 
catalog.  In  this  department,  a  candidate  for  the  degree  of 
master  of  science  must  complete  a  thesis.  This  represents  six 
of  the  thirty  semester  hours  required  for  this  degree. 

A  candidate  for  the  Ph.D.  prepares  a  preliminary  program 
of  courses  and  research  providing  for  specialization  in  some 
phase  of  metallurgy,  materials  science,  or  materials  engineer- 
ing (largely  through  research)  in  consultation  with  his  ad- 
visor. Prior  to  formal  establishment  of  the  doctoral  program 


by  his  special  committee  and  its  approval  by  the  graduate 
school,  he  must  pass  a  qualifying  examination  which  must  be 
taken  early  in  the  first  year  of  doctoral  work.  The  depart- 
ment does  not  require  a  foreign  language;  however,  it  does 
require  preparation  and  defense  of  a  research  proposal  as  a 
portion  of  the  general  examination.  Of  the  courses  listed 
above  only  those  in  the  300-series  are  available  for  graduate 
credit  for  students  in  metallurgy  and  materials  science.  There 
are  many  additional  offerings  in  materials  under  the  listings 
of  other  departments.  A  partial  listing  of  such  courses  may  be 
found  under  Five-Year  Programs.  (See  page  156.) 

Most  graduate  students  receive  some  form  of  financial  aid. 
Several  kinds  of  fellowships,  traineeships,  and  assistantships 
are  available.  This  type  of  aid  generally  provides  for  tuition, 
an  allowance  for  experimental  supplies,  and  a  stipend  to  the 
student.  To  date,  The  Internal  Revenue  Service  has  allowed 
this  stipend  to  be  tax  free.  For  details  of  graduate  scholar- 
ships, fellowships  and  assistantships  please  refer  to  the 
Graduate  School  section  of  this  catalog. 

A  number  of  graduate  students  in  metallurgy  and 
materials  science  do  their  research  in  the  Materials  Research 
Center.  The  list  of  research  activities  notes  the  many  areas  of 
interest  and  the  asterisks  indicate  research  of  an  interdiscipli- 
nary nature. 

Chemical  Metallurgy 

Kinetics  of  metallurgical  reactions 

Mathematical  modeling  of  metallurgical  processes 

Thermodynamics  of  metallic  solutions 

Thermodynamics  and  phase  equilibria 

Materials  Science 

Characterization  of  metal  oxide  films* 
Crystal  growth* 

Deformation  and  recrystallization  texture  studies 
Deformation  of  bicrystals 
Dislocation  studies 

Eutectic  research  including  solidification,  microstructure,  and 
property  studies* 
Magnetic  materials 
Meteorites  and  lunar  materials 
Photoelectric  studies  of  insulators 

Preparation  and  properties  of  materials  for  solid  state  de- 
vices* 

Processing  of  metal  insulator  semi-conductor  structures  and 
their  evaluation  and  application  to  integrated  circuits* 
Quantitative  metallography 
Solidification  of  tool  steels 
Structure  and  behavior  of  solid  state  materials* 
Structure  and  properties  of  sputtered,  evaporated,  and  plated 
thin  films* 

Mechanical  Aletallurgy 

Cladding  and  forming  of  composite  materials 

Correlation  of  microstructure  with  mechanical  behavior  of 

low-alloy  high-strength  steels,  especially  fatigue,  creep  and 

brittle  fracture 

Deep  drawing,  impact  extrusion  and  ironing 

Deformation  and  fracture  of  eutectic  composites 

Ductile  fracture 


Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science     207 


Effects  "i  holes,  inclusions  and  pressure  on  the  tensile  pro- 
perties 

Electron  fractography ' 
Eiivironineiit.il  crack  kinetics* 

Fatigue  crack  propagation  studies  of  metals  and  polymers' 
Flow  through  converging  conical  dies 
Forming  of  polymers ' 
Friction  measurement 
Hydrost.itie  extrusion 

Influence  of  welding  on  fatigue  characteristics  of  weldmcnts' 
Mechanical  behavior  of  anisotrophic  materials' 
Pressure-induced  ductility 

Theoretical  analysis  of  metal  forming  methods  and  correla- 
tion with  metallurgical  parameters 
Toughness  of  weld  metal 
Weldability  of  steels 

Physical  Ceramics 

Diffusion  in  multi-component  ceramic  systems' 
Fracture  toughness  and  crack  propagation  behavior  in  refrac- 
tory materials* 

Kinetics  of  phase  transformations  in  ceramics* 
Mechanism  of  wear  and  abrasion  in  ultra-hard  materials* 
Microstructure  aspects  of  the  strength,  elasticity,  and  creep 
behavior  of  high-purity  alumino-silicate  ceramics* 
Polymer  reinforced  ceramics* 
Pressure-sintering  kinetics  of  ceramics* 
Static  and  cyclic  fatigue  of  ceramics* 
Strengthening  mechanisms  in  impregnated  porous  brittle 
materials* 

Strengthening  mechanisms  of  glasses  and  ceramics  by  surface 
compression* 

Synthesis  and  characterization  of  polycrystalline  diamond 
compacts' 

Synthesis  characterization  and  densification  kinetics  of  ultra- 
fine  ceramic  powders* 

Theoretical  analysis  of  deformation,  fracture  and  flow 
characteristics  of  brittle  materials* 

Thermal  stress  fracture  and  spalling  mechanisms  in  brittle 
ceramics* 
Thermoviscoelastic  behavior  of  ceramics  and  glasses* 

Physical  Metallurgy 

Creep-rupture  and  aging,  brittle  fracture  characteristics,  and. 

fatigue  properties  of  low-alloy,  high-strength  steels* 

Diffusion  controlled  growth 

Kinetics  of  solid  state  reactions* 

Metallurgical  factors  affecting  machining* 

Physical  metallurgy  of  aluminum  alloys 

Physical  metallurgy  of  sintered  carbides* 

Recrystallization 

Strengthening  mechanisms 

Structure  and  morphology  of  martensite 

Tempering 

Ternary  diffusion 

Transmission  electron  microscopy  of  crystal  defects 

X-ray  measurement  of  residual  stresses* 


Polymers 

Environmental  effects  on  polymers  to  protect  concrete 

.ig.iinst  corrosion  ' 

Fatigue  crack  propagation  in  engineering  plastics" 
Fracture  surfaces  of  crystalline  polymers" 
Mechanical  behavior  of  interpenetrating  networks* 
Mechanical  behavior  of  polyvinyl  chloride* 
Mechanisms  of  sintering  of  polymers' 
Reinforcement  of  silicon  rubber  by  silica  fillers* 
Second-order  transitions  in  cellulose  triestcrs* 

401.  Metallurgical  Investigation  and  Thesis  (1-6) 
Investigation  of  some  problem  in  the  area  of  mechanical, 
chemical,  and  physical  metallurgy  or  materials  science.  The 
study  must  be  embodied  in  a  written  report.  Prerequisite: 
undergraduate  courses  in  the  field  of  investigation.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit.  Total  of  6  credits  to  be  applied  to  M.S. 
program. 

404.  Materials  in  Modern  Technology  (3) 
Detailed  study  of  special  processing  techniques  for,  or 
chemical,  mechanical,  and  physical  behavior  of,  one  or  more 
of  the  materials  in  modern  technologies,  such  as  the  cyrogen- 
ic,  nuclear,  or  aerospace  fields.  This  course  may  be  repeated 
for  credit  beyond  three  hours  with  the  permission  of  the 
instructor.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chairman. 

406.  Solidification  (3) 

Structure,  theory  and  properties  of  liquids.  Homogeneous 
and  heterogeneous  nucleation,  theory  and  experimental  re- 
sults. Solidification  phenomena  in  pure,  single  and  multi- 
phase materials  including  the  natures  of  the  freezing  inter- 
face, segregation,  constitutional  super-cooling,  dendritic 
growth,  crystallographic  effects,  the  origin  of  defects,  crystal 
growing.  Zone  processes.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

407.  Theory  of  Alloy  Phases  (3) 

Consideration  of  the  application  of  the  principles  of  thermo- 
dynamics, physics,  and  crystallography  to  the  explanation  of 
structure,  physical  properties  and  behavior  of  crystalline 
materials.  Prerequisite:  Met.  208.  Desirable  preparation: 
Phys.  363. 

408.  Transformations  (3) 

A  description  of  phase  equilibria  and  phase  transformations 
with  emphasis  on  the  solid  state.  Phase  diagrams  and  their 
thermodynamic  basis.  Physical  and  kinetic  aspects  of  various 
types  of  phase  transformations.  Prerequisites:  Met.  208,  Met. 
210. 

409.  Recent  Developments  in  the  Theory  of  Materials  (3) 
Current  topics  and  theoretical  developments  in  materials. 
This  course  may  be  repeated  for  credit  with  permission  of  the 
instructor.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  de- 
partment. 


208     Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 


410.  Physical  Chemistry  of  Metals  (3) 

Discussion  of  the  thermodynamic  properties  of  solid  and 
liquid  metals  and  alloy  systems.  Treatment  of  solution  laws, 
methods  of  determining  thermodynamic  properties  by  exper- 
imentation and  computation,  changing  standard  states,  and 
interaction  parameters  developed  for  liquid  ferrous  alloys. 
Prerequisite:  Met.  210  or  equivalent. 

411.  Modern  Joining  Methods  (3) 

The  foundations  upon  which  the  joining  processes  rest;  the 
present  limitations  of  the  various  processes;  the  trends  in  new 
developments;  the  engineering  and  structural  aspects  of  join- 
ing. Prerequisites:  Met.  208  and  218. 

412.  Electrical  and  Magnetic  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 
The  study  of  semiconducting,  dielectric,  magnetic  and  simi- 
lar materials  and  their  properties.  Brief  discussion  of  band 
theory,  conduction  and  emission  mechanisms  and  related 
topics.  The  relation  between  structure  (including  imperfec- 
tions) and  physical  properties.  Prerequisites:  Met.  316  or 
Phys.  363,  Chem.  196;  or  consent  of  department  chairman. 

413.  Analysis  of  Metal  Forming  Processes  (3) 

Three  dimensional  stress  and  strain  analysis.  Yield  criteria, 
plastic  flow  and  the  upper  and  lower  bound  theorems.  Analy- 
sis of  metal  forming  processes,  including  drawing  and  extru- 
sion, press  work,  rolling  and  spinning.  The  emphasis  is  on 
presenting  several  approaches  to  each  problem. 

414.  Physical  Chemistry  of  Metallurgical  Reactions  (3) 
Development  of  quadratic  formalism  for  representation  of 
the  thermodynamic  properties  of  binary  and  ternary  metallic 
solutions.  A  study  of  the  thermodynamic  and  kinetic  aspects 
of  process  metallurgy  reactions.  Emphasis  on  the  kinetic  be- 
havior of  important  slag-metal  reactions.  Prerequisite:  Met. 
410. 

415.  Mechanical  Behavior  of  Ceramic  Solids  (3) 
Strength,  elasticity,  creep,  thermal  stress  fracture,  hardness, 
abrasion  and  high-temperature  deformation  characteristics  of 
single-and-multi-component  brittle  ceramic  solids.  Statistical 
theories  of  strength,  static  and  cyclic  fatigue,  crack  propaga- 
tion, fracture  toughness.  Correlation  of  mechanical  behavior, 
microstructure,  and  processing  parameters.  Prerequisite:  Met. 
218  or  consent  of  department  chairman. 

416.  Atom  Movements  (3) 

Phenomenological  and  atomistic  development  of  the  laws  of 
diffusion  and  their  solution.  Influence  of  gradients  of  concen- 
tration, potential,  temperature  and  pressure.  Effects  of  struc- 
tural defects  on  diffusion  in  metals  and  non-metals.  Prerequi- 
site: Math.  23  and  Chem.  196  or  the  equivalent. 

418.  Deformation  and  Fracture  (3) 

Study  of  slip  and  twinning  in  metals.  Theories  of  deforma- 
tion texture  formation.  Evaluation  of  atomistic,  microstruc- 
tural,  and  continuum  fracture  theories  and  their  interrelation. 


Consideration  of  ductile  and  brittle  fracture,  fatigue,  creep, 
and  failure  of  composite  materials.  Utilization  of  electron 
fractography.  Prerequisite:  Met.  218  or  equivalent. 

419.  Alloy  Steels  (3) 

Structures  and  transformations  in  iron  and  iron  based  alloys. 
Design  and  heat  treatment  of  alloys  for  strength,  toughness, 
creep,  and  corrosion  resistance.  Prerequisite:  Met.  307. 

425.  Topics  in  Materials  Processing  (3) 
Topics  such  as:  ceramics,  metal,  and  polymer  synthesis  and 
compaction  phenomena.  Theories  of  sintering  and  grain 
growth.  Physical  behavior  of  sintered  compacts.  Techniques 
of  fiber  and  crystal  growth.  Vapor  deposition  and  ultra-high 
purity  materials  preparation.  Desirable  preparation:  Met. 
208,  Met.  218,  Met.  315.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department 
chairman. 

437.  (Mech.  437)  Dislocations  and  Strength  in  Crystals  (3) 
Theory  and  application  of  dislocations.  Geometrical  interpre- 
tation; elastic  properties;  force  on  a  dislocation;  dislocation 
interactions  and  reactions;  multiplication.  Dislocations  in 
crystal  structures.  Selected  topics  in  strengthening,  plastic 
flow,  creep,  fatigue  and  fracture  will  be  discussed.  Prerequi- 
sites: Math.  205  or  221,  or  Met.  320;  Met.  317,  or  consent  of 
department  chairman. 

443.  (Chem.  443)  Solid  State  Chemistry  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  Chem.  443. 

458.  Materials  Design  (3) 

Analysis  of  design  requirements  for  materials  components. 
Selection  of  materials  and  processes.  Study  of  failures  in  pro- 
cess and  service  and  application  of  recent  metallurgical  and 
materials  science  knowledge  for  improved  design.  Solution 
and  discussion  of  industrial  problems,  and  outline  of  experi- 
mental approach.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

461.  Advanced  Materials  Research  Techniques  (3) 
Study  of  the  theory  and  application  of  selected  advanced 
techniques  for  investigating  the  structure  and  properties  of 
materials.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  with  the  approval  of  the 
department  chairman. 


Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science     209 


Modern  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures 


Professors 

Anna  Pirsccnok  Herz,  Ph.D..  Chairman 
Victor  Manuel  Valenzuela,  Ph.D. 
John  Andrews  Van  Ecrde,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor 

Arthur  Parcel  Gardner.  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Biruta  Cap,  Ph.D. 
Allen  E.  Hye,  Ph.D. 
Safeta  Juka,  Dr.  d'Univ. 
Anje  C.  van  der  Naald,  Ph.D. 
D.  Alexander  Waldenrath,  Ph.D. 

Instructors 

Duncan  B.  Gardiner,  M.A. 
Alberto  Romero,  M.A. 


language  in  preparation  for  the  departmental  examinations 
(oral  and/or  written)  and  the  graduate  record  examinations. 

Specific  courses  other  than  those  listed  should  include 
collateral  work  in  ancient  and  modern  European  history,  fine 
arts,  music,  and  the  languages  and  literatures  of  other 
peoples,  i.e.,  English,  French,  German,  Greek,  Kiswahili, 
Roman,  Russian,  and  Spanish. 

The  sequence  of  courses  offered  in  any  of  the  modern 
foreign  languages  is  of  particular  relevance  as  preparation  for 
careers  in  teaching  and  foreign  service. 

Interdisciplinary  majors  combining  a  program  of  Russian 
studies  are  encouraged. 

Modern  Foreign  Languages 

301.  General  Linguistics  (3) 

Historical  and  descriptive  linguistics:  emphasis  on  articula- 
tory  phonetics,  morphology,  and  structural  grammatical 
analysis,  especially  as  applied  to  pedagogy.  Conducted  in 
English. 

302.  The  Teaching  of  a  Foreign  Language  (3) 
Conducted  in  English. 

409.  Theory  of  Literary  Criticism  (3) 

The  theory  and  practice  of  literary  criticism  for  students  of 
foreign  literatures.  Conducted  in  English. 


Visiting  Instructor 
Gombilenga  Mikongomi,  Cert. 


The  department  of  modern  foreign  languages  and  literatures 
offers  separate  major  programs  in  French,  German  and 
Spanish  aiming  to  show  the  development  of  the  culture  and 
civilization  of  the  French,  German  and  Spanish-speaking 
countries  of  Europe  and  Latin  America.  Required  language 
and  literature  courses  constitute  a  core  around  which  the 
student  can  build  a  program  of  studies  providing  a  broad  and 
sound  understanding  of  foreign  cultures  as  part  of  the  culture 
of  the  western  world. 

Each  candidate  is  assigned  a  departmental  advisor  to  cor- 
relate and  integrate  supplementary  reading  and  study  to  meet 
special  objectives. 

All  foreign  language  candidates  are  urged  to  participate  in 
Lehigh  University  summer  language  programs  abroad.  Candi- 
dates in  German  are  urged  to  participate  in  the  Lehigh  Uni- 
versity spring  semester  in  Germany.  "Junior  year  abroad" 
programs  and  study  travel  in  foreign  countries  are  recom- 
mended. 

Although  the  minimum  requirement  for  the  major  is 
eighteen  credit  hours  of  which  at  least  six  will  be  selected 
from  200-level  courses,  the  normal  requirement  consists  of 
eight  semester  courses  above  the  elementary  and  intermediate 
levels  through  which  the  candidate  is  expected  to  gain  a 
knowledge  of  literature  and  an  adequate  command  of  the 


French 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Fr  3  Elementary  French  (5) 

Fr  4  Intermediate  French  (5) 

Fr  13,  14  Advanced  French  (7) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Eighteen  hours  of  which  at  least  six  hours  shall  be  chosen 
from  courses  at  the  200-  or  300-level. 

Fr  43,  44  French  Oral  and  Written  Composition  (6) 

Fr  51,  52  Types  of  French  Literature  (6) 

Fr  53  Balzac  (3) 

Fr  54  Malraux  (3) 

Fr  61,  62  17th  Century  French  Literature  (6) 

Fr  63,  64  18th  Century  French  Literature  (6) 

Fr  65,  66  19th  Century  French  Literature  (6) 

Fr  67,  68  20th  Century  French  Literature  (6) 

Fr  271,  272  Readings 

Fr  303  History  of  French  Language  (3) 

Fr  304  Old  French  Literature  (3) 

Fr  307  Baudelaire  (3) 

Fr  308  Symbolism  (3) 

Fr  311,  312  French  Classicism  (6) 

Fr  313,  314  The  Age  of  Enlightenment  (6) 

Fr  315,  316  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Literature 

(6) 


210     Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures:  French 


Fr  317  The  Romantic  Movement  (3) 

Fr  318  Theatre  in  the  Twentieth  Century  (3) 

Fr  319  The  New  Novel  (3) 

Fr  331  French  Poets  of  the  TwentiethCentury  (3) 

Fr  333  The  Great  Women  Writers  of  France  (3) 

Fr  381  French  Cultural  Program  (3-6) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

3.  Elementary  French  (5) 

Basic  conversational  French  illustrating  essential  grammatical 
principles,  reading  of  simple  texts  and  writing;  some  laborato- 
ry- 

4.  Intermediate  French  (5) 

A  continuation  of  French  3.  Prerequisite:  French  3,  or 
Achievement  Test  score  before  entrance,  or  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

13.  Advanced  French  (4) 

A  review  of  grammar  but  an  emphasis  on  speaking  and  writ- 
ing on  topics  affording  an  opportunity  to  master  the  current 
idiom  through  the  use  of  materials  of  contemporary  interest. 
Prerequisite:  Fr.  4,  or  Achievement  Test  score  before  en- 
trance, or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

14.  Advanced  French  (3) 

Emphasis  on  readings  and  discussion.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  3,  or 
Achievement  Test  score  before  entrance,  or  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

43.  French  Oral  and  Written  Composition  (3) 

For  students  who  wish  a  greater  opportunity  for  practice  in 
the  oral  and  written  use  of  French  than  can  be  provided  in 
the  literature  courses.  Prerequisites:  Fr.  14,  or  consent  of 
department  chairman,  or  Achievement  Test  score  of  600. 

44.  French  Oral  and  Written  Composition  (3) 

Designed  to  aid  students  who  have  already  satisfied  the  lan- 
guage requirement  in  French  to  develop  an  advanced  degree  of 
skill  in  speaking  and  writing  the  language. 

51.  A  Survey  of  French  Literature  (3) 

Training  in  the  ability  to  read  and  understand  representative 
works  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the  nineteenth  century.  Out- 
side reading  and  reports.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisites: 
Fr.  42  or  4  units  of  entrance  French  or  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

52.  A  Survey  of  French  Literature  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  representative  works  of  the  nine- 
teenth and  twentieth  centuries.  Outside  reading  and  reports. 
Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisites:  Fr.  51  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

53.  Balzac  (3) 

Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman,  Fr. 
14  and  42,  or  Achievement  Test  score  of  600. 


54.  Malraux  (3) 

Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman,  Fr. 

14  and  42,  or  Achievement  Test  score  of  600. 

61.  Seventeenth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  the  main  pre-classical  and  classical  French  writers 
of  the  seventeenth  century.  Lectures,  discussion  of  texts,  and 
collateral  reading.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisites:  Fr. 
51-52  or  5  units  of  entrance  French,  or  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 

62.  Seventeenth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 
Continuation  of  Fr.  61.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite: 
Fr.  61,  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

63.  Eighteenth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 

The  literature  of  the  Enlightenment  and  pre-Romanticism. 
Lectures,  discussion  of  texts,  reports,  and  collateral  readings. 
Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisites:  French  51-52,  or  5  units 
of  entrance  French,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

64.  Eighteenth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 
Continuation  of  Fr.  63.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  63,  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

65.  Nineteenth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 

Main  literary  currents  of  the  nineteenth  century;  Romanti- 
cism and  Realism.  Lectures,  reports,  collateral  readings.  Pre- 
requisites: Fr.  51-52,  or  5  units  of  entrance  French,  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

66.  Nineteenth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 
Continuation  of  Fr.  65.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  65,  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

67.  Twentieth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  the  principal  novelists  of  the  20th  century  in 
France:  Proust,  Gide,  Mauriac,  Sartre,  Camus,  Robbe-Grillet, 
Beckett;  with  a  consideration  of  the  trends,  philosophy,  and 
movements  they  represent.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequi- 
site: Fr.  51-52  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  department. 

68.  Twentieth  Century  French  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  the  drama  and  poetry  of  20th  century  France 
with  readings  chosen  to  illustrate  the  principal  dramatists  and 
poets  as  well  as  literary  movements.  Conducted  in  French. 
Prerequisite:  Fr.  51-52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

81.  French  Cultural  Program  (3-6) 

A  summer  program  abroad.  Includes  formal  instruction  in  the 
French  language  as  well  as  direct  contact  with  the  French 
people  and  their  culture  during  two  months  in  France. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

A  student  wishing  to  qualify  for  a  master's  degree  in  modern 
foreign  languages  and  literature  should  have  an  undergraduate 


Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures :  French     21 1 


major  or  it>  equivalent  in  French.  Those  with  undergraduate 

deficiencies,  though  otherwise  qualified,  may  be  admitted 
with  the  stipulation  thai  they  make  up  such  deficiencies  in 
addition  to  satisfying  the  minimum  requirements  tor  the 
degree. 

The  graduate  major  shall  consist  ol  a  minimum  of  18 
credit  hours,  15  of  which  arc  to  be  selected  from  the  depart- 
ment's 400-level  course  offerings.  He  may  choose  to  submit  a 
thesis  representing  the  equivalent  of  a  maximum  of  6  hours 
of  course  work.  If  desired,  the  candidate  is  permitted  to  take 
collateral  work  in  related  fields  to  the  extent  of  12  semester 
hours.  At  the  end  of  his  course  work  he  shall  be  asked  to  pass 
a  comprehensive  examination. 

271.  Readings  (3) 

A  study  of  the  works  of  some  author  or  group  of  authors,  or 
of  a  period.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  41-42  or  51-52  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

272.  Readings  (3) 

Continuation  of  Fr.  271.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  271  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

303.  History  of  the  French  Language  (3) 

A  chronological  history  of  the  origins  and  development  of 
the  French  language,  from  the  beginnings  to  the  present. 
Particular  stages  of  the  development  of  the  language  will  be 
analyzed:  Gallo-Romance,  Old  French,  Middle  French, 
Renaissance,  Classicism,  Romanticism,  and  Contemporary 
French.  Vocabulary,  pronunciation,  and  structure  will  be 
treated.  Conducted  in  English.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  51-52,  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

304.  Old  French  Literature  (3) 

Readings  in  French  literature  of  the  Middle  Ages,  particularly 
representative  works  of  the  literary  renaissance  of  the  twelfth 
century:  chanson  de geste,  lyric  poetry  and  roman 
d'aventure.  Longer  treatment  will  be  given  to  the  Arthurian 
romances,  especially  the  works  of  Chrestien  de  Troyes.  Lec- 
tures, discussions,  and  reports.  Some  of  the  readings  will  be 
in  the  original  Old  French,  some  in  modern  French  transla- 
tions. Conducted  in  English.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  51-52,  includ- 
ing a  thorough  reading  knowledge  of  the  language,  or  consent 
of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

307.  Baudelaire  (3) 

The  major  works  in  prose  and  poetry  of  Baudelaire  with  an 
emphasis  on  theme  and  influence.  Conducted  in  French.  Pre- 
requisite: Fr.  51-52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

308.  Symbolism  (3) 

An  intensive  study  of  the  symbolist  school  of  poetry  follow- 
ing Baudelaire  through  Mallarme  and  the  end  of  the  19th 
century. 


31 1.  French  Classicism  (3) 

A  study  of  the  French  classical  theatre,  novel,  and  criticism 
with  emphasis  on  Corneille,  Racine,  Moliere,  Madame  de 
Lafayette,  Malherbe,  and  Boileau.  Conducted  in  French.  Pre- 
requisite: Fr.  51-52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

312.  French  Classicism  (3) 

Continuation  of  Fr.  311.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite: 
Fr.  31 1  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

313.  The  Age  ol  Enlightenment  (3) 

A  study  of  the  "Philosophes"  and  "Encyclopedistcs"  of  the 
18th  century,  with  emphasis  on  Voltaire,  Rousseau, 
Montesquieu,  and  Diderot.  Conducted  in  French.  Prere- 
quisite: Fr.  51-52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

314.  The  Age  of  Enlightenment  (3) 

Continuation  of  Fr.  313.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite: 
Fr.  313  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

315.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Literature  (3) 
Readings,  study,  and  discussion  of  French  prose  and  dramatic 
literature  of  the  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  centuries.  Lectures, 
reports,  and  class  discussion.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequi- 
site: Fr.  52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

316.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Literature  (3) 

Readings  and  analysis  of  representative  lyric  poetry  from  the 
Troubadors  to  the  Pleiade.  Lectures,  reports,  and  class  discus- 
sions. Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  51  or  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

317.  The  Romantic  Movement  (3) 

A  study  and  analysis  of  the  Romantic  movement  in  France 
with  readings  chosen  from  its  principal  exponents.  Con- 
ducted in  French.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  51-52  or  consent  of  chair- 
man of  department. 

318.  Theatre  in  the  Twentieth  Century  (3) 

Contemporary  French  drama  with  an  analysis  of  its  origins 
and  movements.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  Fr. 
51-52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

319.  The  New  Novel  (3) 

A  study  of  current  trends  in  the  novel  in  France  with  repre- 
sentative readings.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  Fr. 
51-52  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

321.  French  Literature  in  Translation  (3) 

The  most  significant  works  in  French  literature  with  a  certain 
emphasis  on  those  that  relate  to  other  literatures,  especially 
those  written  in  Romance  languages.  No  knowledge  of 
French  is  required.  French  321  cannot  count  as  a  language 
course.  Prerequisite:  a  college  course  in  literature,  or  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 


212     Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures:  French 


322.  French  Literature  in  Translation  (3) 
A  continuation  of  Fr.  321.  Fr.  322  cannot  count  as  a  langu- 
age course.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  321,  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

331.  French  Poets  of  the  Twentieth  Century  (3) 
The  leading  poets  from  Valery  to  Bonnefoy.  Conducted  in 
French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  or  two  semesters 
of  French  literature  in  college. 

333.  The  Great  Women  Writers  of  France  (3) 
Women  writers  of  France  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the 
present.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chair- 
man or  two  semesters  of  French  literature  in  college. 

381.  French  Cultural  Program  (3-6) 

A  summer  program  in  France  offering  formal  language  courses 
and  cultural  opportunities  to  graduate  students  and  teachers 
of  French. 

411.  Voltaire  (3) 

Representatives  readings.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite: 
a  300-level  course  or  equivalent,  or  consent  of  chairman  ot 
department. 

412.  Stendhal  and  Flaubert  (3) 

The  major  works  of  Stendhal  and  Flaubert  with  particular 
consideration  to  style,  theme,  and  influence.  Conducted  in 
French.  Prerequisite:  300-level  course  or  equivalent,  or  con- 
sent of  chairman  of  department. 

413.  French  Heritage  (3) 

After  a  brief  introductory  survey  of  the  development  of 
France  from  prehistoric  times  to  the  Middle  Ages,  French 
culture  will  be  studied  more  comprehensively  through  poli- 
tical history,  successive  changes  in  social  structures  and 
mores,  especially  as  they  appear  in  literature  and  art.  Con- 
ducted in  French.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or  equiva- 
lent or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

414.  French  Heritage  (3) 

Continuation  of  Fr.  413.  Prerequisite:  Fr.  413,  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

415.  Proust  and  Gide  (3) 

Selected  readings  in  Proust  and  Gide  with  particular  con- 
sideration to  style,  theme,  and  influence.  Conducted  in 
French.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or  equivalent,  or 
consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

416.  Sartre  and  Camus  (3) 

A  study  of  the  plays  and  novels  of  Sartre  and  Camus  with 
particular  consideration  to  their  philosophies  and  relation  to 
the  current  literary  trends.  Conducted  in  French.  Prerequi- 
site: a  300-level  course  or  equivalent,  or  consent  of  chairman 
of  department. 


417.  Moliere  (3) 

A  study  of  Moliere 's  most  significant  plays  with  special 
reference  to  staging,  technique,  and  influence.  Conducted  in 
French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  or  a  300-level 
course  in  French  literature. 

418.  Writings  of  Jean-Jacques  Rousseau  (3) 

An  emphasis  on  Rousseau  and  pre-Romanticism.  Conducted 
in  French.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or  equivalent,  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

420.  Surrealism  (3) 

The  contributions  of  Breton,  Aragon,  Elnard,  Desnes,  and 
others.  Relations  between  painting  and  poetry.  Conducted  in 
French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  or  a  300-level 
course  in  French  literature. 

422.  French  Satirical  Literature  (3) 

A  survey  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the  present.  Conducted  in 
French.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  or  a  300-level 
course  in  French  literature. 

491.  Independent  Study  (1-3) 

Special  topics  to  supplement  other  study  for  the  M.A.  degree. 
Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or 
equivalent,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  the  department. 

492.  Independent  Study  (1-3) 

Special  topics  to  supplement  other  study  for  the  M.A.  degree. 
Conducted  in  French.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or 
equivalent,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  departmei* 


German 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Ger  3  Elementary  German  (5) 

Ger  4  Intermediate  German  (5) 

Ger  13  Types  of  German  Literature  (4) 

or 
Ger  31  Conversation  and  Composition  (3) 

Ger  14  Types  of  German  Literature  (3) 

or 
Ger  32  Conversation  and  Composition  (3) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Ger  52  Goethe's  Faust  (3) 

And  at  least  two  of  the  following: 

Ger  250,  25 1  Special  Topics  (6) 

Ger  303  German  Romanticism  (3) 

Ger  305  Twentieth  Century  German  Literature  (3) 

Ger  311  Introduction  to  Lyric  Poetry  (3) 

Ger  321  Nineteenth  Century  German  Literature  (3) 

Ger  341  Advanced  Conversation  and  Composition 
(3) 


Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures:  German     213 


Gci   14  i  The  Age  ol  Goethe  (3) 

Survey  of  Older  German  Literature  (3) 

A  senior  comprehensive  examination  is  required, 

( 'iidergraduate  Courses 

V  Elementary  German  (5) 

Fundamentals  ol  German  grammar;  pronunciation;  simple 
conversation  and  composition;  reading  ol  simple  texts.  No 
previous  German  required. 

•I.  Intermediate  German  (5) 

Review  of  grammar;  composition;  reading  and  discussion  of 
intermediate  texts.  Prerequisite:  German  3,  or  2  units  ol  en 
trance  German,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


6.  Scientific  German  (3) 

Readings  in  chemistry  and  physics.  Prerequisite:  Ger.  1,  or 

two  units  lit  entrance  German. 

13.  Types  ot  German  Literature  (4) 

Reading  and  discussion  in  German  of  advanced  texts.  Prere 
quisitc:  German  4,  or  3  units  of  entrance  German,  or  consent 
ot  chairman  ot  department. 

14.  Types  ol  German  Literature  (3) 

Continuation  of  Ger.  13.  Prerequisite:  Ger.  4,  or  Ger.  1  3,  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

31.  Conversation  and  Composition  (3) 

Exercises  in  grammar;  phonetics;  conversation  and  composi- 
tion stressing  situations  taken  from  daily  life.  Prerequisites: 
Ger.  12  or  four  units  of  entrance  German. 


I  1  1 .  1 1  ii  ii  i.ii  1 1 1  ies  in  Germany  (1  II 

I  ormal  participation  in  approved  courses  m  some  branch  of 
the  hum. mines  lor  a  semester  at  a  ( lei  man  university.  Prere 
quisitc :  t  icrman  I  02  or  its  equivalent. 

1 12.  Humanities  in  Germany  ( 1  -4 ) 

Continuation  >>|  German  111.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

113.  Humanities  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ol  German  112.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

114.  Humanities  in  Germany  (1*4) 

Continuation  of  German  I  13.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

121.  Social  Science  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Formal  participation  in  approved  courses  in  some  branch  ot 
the  social  sciences  for  a  semester  at  a  German  university. 
Prerequisite:  German  102  or  its  equivalent. 

122.  Social  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ofGerman  121.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

123.  Social  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ofGerman  122.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

124.  Social  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ofGerman  123.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 


32.  Conversation  and  Composition  (3) 

Continuation  of  Ger.  31.  Oral  and  written  reports,  personal 
and  business  letters,  fundamentals  of  good  style.  Prerequisite: 
Ger.  31  or  Ger.  43. 


131.  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Formal  participation  in  approved  courses  in  some  branch  of 
the  sciences  for  a  semester  at  a  German  university.  Prerequi- 
site: German  102  or  its  equivalent. 


52.  Goethe's  Faust  (3) 

Reading  of  the  Faust  drama  and  collateral  materials.  Prere- 
quisite: Ger.  31  or  43,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

101.  The  European  Drama  (3) 

Readings  and  live  theater  performances  in  Germany.  Prere- 
quisite: 3  semesters  of  college  German  or  the  equivalent.  This 
course  must  be  taken  concurrently  with  Ger.  103. 

102.  Conversation  and  Composition  in  Germany  (4) 
Intensive  practice  with  group  discussion  on  selected  cultural, 
historical  and  political  topics.  Prerequisite:  German  101  or  its 
equivalent. 

103.  Supplemental  Language  Practice  (1) 

Prerequisite:  3  semesters  of  college  German  or  the  equivalent. 
This  course  must  be  taken  concurrently  with  German  101. 


132.  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ofGerman  131.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

133.  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ofGerman  132.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

134.  Sciences  in  Germany  (1-4) 

Continuation  ofGerman  133.  Prerequisite:  German  102  or 
its  equivalent. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

A  student  wishing  to  qualify  for  a  master's  degree  should 
have  an  undergraduate  major  or  its  equivalent  in  German. 
Those  with  undergraduate  deficiencies,  though  otherwise 
qualified  may  be  admitted  with  a  stipulation  that  they  make 
up  such  deficiencies,  in  addition  to  satisfying  the  minimum 


214     Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures:  German 


requirements  for  the  degree. 

The  successful  completion  of  10  semester  courses  (30 
credit  hours)  is  required  for  the  M.A.  degree.  A  thesis  may  be 
offered  in  lieu  of  two  semester  courses  (6  credit  hours).  Col- 
lateral  graduate  work  in  other  departments  may  be  taken 
upon  consultation  with  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

The  prerequisite  for  all  200-level  courses  is  three  years  of 
college  German  or  the  equivalent,  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
the  department. 


352.  Survey  of  Older  German  Literature  (3) 
Survey  of  older  German  literature  from  the  beginning  to  the 
Renaissance.  Prerequisite:  a  200-  or  300-lcvel  course  in 
German  or  consent  of  chairman. 

381.  Cultural  Studies  (3-6) 

A  program  in  German-speaking  Europe,  during  the  summer, 

for  in-service  teachers  of  German  and  advanced  or  graduate 

students. 


250.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Study  of  literary  and  linguistic  topics  not  covered  in  regular 
courses,  or  continuation  of  study  of  topics  begun  in  regular 
courses.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 


411.  George,  Rilke  and  Hofmannsthal  (3) 
Study  of  works  by  three  major  figures  in  German  literature 
between  1890  and  1933.  Prerequisite:  three  credit  hours  in 
German  at  the  300-level. 


251.  German  Culture  and  Civilization  (3) 

A  study  of  German  customs,  institutions,  and  cultural  contri- 
butions to  western  civilization.  No  knowledge  of  German 
required.  German  majors  and  graduate  students  must  write  a 
research  paper  in  German. 

303.  German  Romanticism  (3) 

Early  and  late  Romanticists.  Prerequisites:  Ger.  31,  32,  43,  or 

44,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


421.  Renaissance  and  Baroque  (3) 

German  literature  from  Der  Ackermann  aus  Bohmen  to  the 
Age  of  Enlightenment.  Prerequisite:  three  credit  hours  in 
German  at  the  300-level. 

431.  Lessing  and  the  Enlightenment  (3) 

Discussion  and  analysis  of  the  literature  in  the  pre-Classical 

Age.  Prerequisite:  three  credit  hours  in  German  at  the 

300-level. 


305.  Twentieth  Century  German  Literature  (3) 

Study  of  works  by  representative  writers  from  Naturalism 

through  the  end  of  World  War  II.  Prerequisite:  3  years  of 

college  German  (or  equivalent)  or  consent  of  chairman  of  the 

department. 

311.  Introduction  to  Lyric  Poetry  (3) 

Selected  poems  from  the  beginning  to  the  modern  periods. 

Discussion  and  analysis.  Prerequisite:  three  years  of  college 

German,  or  equivalent,  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the 

department. 

321.  Nineteenth  Century  German  Literature  (3) 

A  study  of  representative  writers  from  the  end  of  Romanti- 
cism up  to  Naturalism  (1830-1885). 

322.  History  of  the  German  Language  (3) 

The  development  of  the  language  and  its  present  structure. 
Prerequisites:  Ger.  31,  32,  43,  44  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

341.  Advanced  Conversation  and  Composition  (3) 

For  undergraduates  and  teachers.  Prerequisites:  German  31 

or  32,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

344.  The  Age  of  Goethe  (3) 

Selected  works  from  Klopstock  to  Holderlin;  with  special 
emphasis  on  Herder,  Goethe  and  Schiller.  Prerequisite: 
German  31  or  43  or  44,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 


441.  Middle  High  German  (3) 

A  study  and  an  analysis  of  the  language  and  some  of  the  out- 
standing writers  in  their  work.  Prerequisite:  three  credit 
hours  in  German  at  the  300-level. 

471.  Independent  Study  (3) 

Research  of  an  author  or  area  of  German  literature. 

472.  Independent  Study  (3) 

Research  of  an  author  or  area  of  German  literature. 

491.  Thesis  (3) 

492.  Thesis  (3) 

Italian 

1.  Elementary  Italian  (3) 

Grammar;  composition;  rapid  reading  of  easy  modern  prose. 
No  previous  study  of  Italian  required. 

2.  Elementary  Italian  (3) 
Continuation  of  Ital.  1.  Prerequisite:  Ital.  1. 

11.  Intermediate  Italian  (3) 

The  age  of  Dante.  Lectures  in  English  on  Dante  and  his  con- 
temporaries; readings  in  the  Divina  Commedia.  Prerequisite: 
one  year  of  college  Italian  or  two  units  of  entrance  Italian. 

12.  Intermediate  Italian  (3) 

The  Romantic  Period:  lectures  in  English,  and  selected  read- 
ings from  the  works  of  Manzoni  and  Leopardi.  Prerequisite: 
one  year  of  college  Italian  or  two  units  of  entrance  Italian. 


Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures :  Italian     215 


Kiswahili 

i.  I  lementary  Kiswahili  (3) 

An  intensive  course  in  vocabulary  and  pronunciation  .is  well 
.is  verb  drills  b.isrvl  on  modern  Kiswahili  geared  to  the  needs 
of  .in  American  student  in  understanding  and  appreciating 
both  the  structure  of  the  language  and  its  cultural  aspects. 

2.  Elementary  Kiswahili  (3) 

"illation  of  Ksw.  I.  Further  practice  in  verb  drills,  pro- 
nunciation, and  vocabulary  build  up.  Prerequisite:  Ksw.  I,  or 
consent  ol  chairman  of  department. 

1  1.  Intermediate  Kiswahili  (3) 

Exercises  in  grammar;  conversation  and  composition  based 
on  situational  East  African  daily  life.  Prerequisite:  Ksw.  2.  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

12.  Intermediate  Kiswahili  (3) 

Continuation  of  Ksw.  1 1  with  more  emphasis  on  composi- 
tion: fundamentals  ot  good  style,  essays,  letter  writing;  oral 
and  written  reports;  modern  Kiswahili  readings,  and  a  short 
survey  of  18th  and  19th  century  Kiswahili  literature.  Prere- 
quisite: Ksw.  1 1  or  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  depart- 
ment. 


41.  Conversation  and  Composition  (3) 

Intensive  prai  tice  in  oral  ami  writ  ten  Russian  :  laboratory 

practice  in  aural  comprehension.  Readings  and  discussions  on 

Russian  literature  and  culture.  Prerequi  ite    Russian  12,  or  3 

units  "I  entrance  Russian,  or  i  onsen t  ol  ,  h.in  in. in  ol  depart 

nielli. 

•12.  Conversation  ami  (  (imposition  (  \) 

Continuation  ol  Russian  41.  Prerequisite:  Russian  41  or  con- 
sent of  chairman  of  department. 

251.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Intensive  study  of  literary  or  linguistic  topics.  Prerequisite: 
Russian  42,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

252.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Continuation  of  Russian  251 .  Prerequisite:  Russian  251  ,  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

341.  Russian  Realism  (3) 

Selected  works  by  the  Russian  realists  of  the  19th  Century 

including  Dostoevsky,  Turgenev,  Tolstoy.  Lectures  and  class 

discussion  in  English;  collateral  reading  and  written  reports 

either  in  Russian  or  in  English.  No  knowledge  of  Russian  is 

required. 


Portuguese 


1.  Elementary  Portuguese  (3) 

A  study  of  Portuguese  grammar  and  forms;  practice  in 
writing  and  speaking  Portuguese. 

2.  Elementary  Portuguese  (3) 
Continuation  of  Port.  1.  Prerequisite:  Port.  1. 

Russian 

3.  Elementary  Russian  (5) 

Classroom  and  laboratory  introduction  to  the  fundamentals 
of  conversational  and  grammatical  patterns;  practice  in  pro- 
nunciation, simple  conversation,  reading  and  writing. 

4.  Elementary  Russian  (5) 

Continuation  of  Russian  3.  Prerequisite:  Russian  3  or  2  units 
of  entrance  Russian. 

13.  Intermediate  Russian  (4) 

Classroom  and  laboratory  practice  in  conversation.  Develop- 
ment of  reading  and  writing  skills.  Prerequisite:  Russian  4,  or 
3  units  of  entrance  Russian,  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

14.  Intermediate  Russian  (3) 

Continuation  of  Russian  13.  Prerequisite:  Russian  4  or  13,  or 
3  units  of  entrance  Russian,  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 


343.  Contemporary  Soviet  Literature  (3) 
The  development  of  socialist  realism  in  Russian  literature 
since  1917.  Lectures  and  class  discussion  in  English;  collateral 
reading  and  written  reports  either  in  Russian  or  in  English. 
No  knowledge  of  Russian  is  required. 

Spanish 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Span  3  Elementary  Spanish  (5) 

Span  4  Intermediate  Spanish  (5) 

Span  13  Intermediate  Spanish  (4) 

Span  14  Advanced  Spanish  (3) 

Required  Courses  in  Major 

Eighteen  hours  from  the  following  of  which  at  least  six  shall 
be  chosen  from  courses  at  the  200-  or  300-level. 

Span  51  Cultural  Evolution  of  Spain  (3) 

Span  52  Cultural  Evolution  of  Latin  America  (3) 

Span  61  Survey  of  Contemporary  Spanish  Literature 

from  Generation  of  98  to  the  Present  (3) 
Span  62  Women  Poets  of  Latin  America  (3) 

Span  63  Introduction  to  Spanish  Literature  up  to 

1700  (3) 
Span  64  Introduction  to  Spanish  Literature  from 

1700  to  the  Present  (3) 
Span  271,  272      Readings  (6) 
Span  301  The  Spanish  Essay  (3) 

Span  302  The  Latin  American  Essay  (3) 


216    Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures:  Kiswahili,  Portuguese,  Russian,  Spanish 


Span  303  Cervantes  (3) 

Span  305  Spanish  Literature  in  the  Middle  Ages  (3) 

Span  306  Latin  American  Literature  Since  World  War 

II  (3) 

Span  307  The  Golden  Age  (3) 

Span  308  Spanish  Literature  Since  the  Civil  War  (3) 

Span  309  Sixteenth  Century  (3) 

Span  310  Nineteenth  Century  Spanish  Novel  (3) 

Span  311  The  Generation  of  98  (3) 

Span  321  Latin  American  Literature  in  Translation  (3) 

Span  322  Latin  American  Literature  in  Translation  (3) 

Span  331  Spanish  American  Literature  (3) 

Span  332  Spanish  American  Literature  (3) 

Span  381  Summer  Session  in  Spain  (6) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

3.  Elementary  Spanish  (5) 

Basic  conversational  Spanish  illustrating  essential  grammatical 
principles,  reading  of  simple  texts  and  writing. 

4.  Intermediate  Spanish  (5) 

A  continuation  of  Spanish  3.  Prerequisite:  Span.  3  or  consent 
of  section  head. 

13.  Intermediate  Spanish  (4) 

Practice  in  speaking  and  writing  ot  topics  affording  an  op- 
portunity to  master  the  current  idiom  through  the  use  of 
materials  of  contemporary  interest.  Grammar  review.  Prere- 
quisite: Span.  4  or  consent  of  section  head. 

14.  Advanced  Spanish  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Spanish  1 3.  Emphasis  on  readings  and 
discussion.  Prerequisite:  Span.  13  or  consent  of  section  head. 

51.  Cultural  Evolution  of  Spain  (3) 

The  historical  and  cultural  evolution  of  Spain  from  its  begin- 
ning to  the  present.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite: 
Span.  14  or  consent  of  section  head. 

52.  Cultural  Evolution  of  Latin  America  (3) 

The  historical  and  cultural  evolution  of  Latin  America.  Con- 
ducted in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  Span.  51  or  consent  of 
section  head. 

61.  Survey  of  Contemporary  Spanish  Literature  from  the 
Generation  of  98  to  the  Present  (3) 

A  study  of  the  development  of  the  literature  of  Spain  from 
the  Generation  of  98  to  the  present.  Conducted  in  Spanish. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  section  head. 

62.  Women  Poets  of  Latin  America  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  the  works  of  Sor  Juana  I.  de  la 
Cruz,  Storni,  Agustini,  Vaz  Ferreira,  Ibarborou,  Gabriela 
Mistral,  et  al.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
section  head. 


63.  Introduction  to  Spanish  Literature  up  to  1700  (3) 
Systematic  study  of  Spanish  literature  from  the  Middle  Ages 
to  1700.  Representative  writings  of  each  period  will  be  read 
and  analyzed.  Lectures,  discussion.  Conducted  in  Spanish. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  section  head. 

64.  Introduction  to  Spanish  Literature  from  1700  (3) 
Continuation  of  Spanish  63,  focusing  on  Spanish  literature 
since  1700.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
section  head. 

81.  Summer  Session  in  Spain  (3-6) 

A  summer  program  abroad.  Includes  formal  instruction  in  thi 
Spanish  language  as  well  as  direct  contact  with  the  Spanish 
people  and  their  culture. 

271.  Readings  (3) 

A  study  of  the  works  of  some  author  or  group  of  authors  or 
of  a  period.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  section  head. 

272.  Readings  (3) 

A  study  of  the  works  of  some  author  or  group  of  authors  or 
of  a  period.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  section  head. 

301.  The  Spanish  Essay  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  outstanding  Spanish  thinkers  of 
the  twentieth  century  with  emphasis  on  the  works  of 
Unamuno  and  Ortega  y  Gasset.  Oral  and  written  reports. 
Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  section  head 
or  Spanish  51. 

302.  The  Latin  American  Essay  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  distinguished  Spanish-American 
essayists  of  the  twentieth  century  with  emphasis  on  the 
works  of  Rodo,  Vasconcelos,  Vaz  Ferreira,  and  Francisco 
Romero.  Oral  and  written  reports.  Conducted  in  Spanish. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  section  head  or  Spanish  52. 

303.  Cervantes  (3) 

Reading  and  critical  study  of  the  chief  works  of  Miguel  de 
Cervantes  with  special  emphasis  on  Don  Quijote.  Collateral 
reading  and  reports.  Given  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  Span.  51 
or  consent  of  section  head. 

305.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Middle  Ages  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  outstanding  works  such  as:  El  Cid, 
El  Libro  de  Buen  Amor,  La  Celestina.  Given  in  Spanish.  Pre- 
requisite: Span.  51  or  consent  of  section  head. 

306.  Latin  American  Literature  Since  World  War  II  (3) 
Reading  and  discussion  of  representative  works  of  contempo- 
rary Latin  American  authors.  Given  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite: 
Span.  52  or  consent  of  section  head. 


Modern  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures:  Spanish     21 7 


.107.  The  Golden  Age  (3) 

A  study  of  the  representative  works  ol  the  authors  ol  the 
XVII  century.  Given  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  Span.  51  ot 
consent  ol  section  head. 


38 1 .  Summer  Study  in  Spain 

A  summer  program  in  Sp.ini  oMcrmg  torni.il  language  inur.es 
and  cultural  opportunities  to  graduate  students  ami  tea.  Iters 
of  Spanish. 


108.  Spanish  I  itcrature  Since  the  Civil  War  (3) 
Reading  ami  discussion  ol  representative  contemporary 

Spanish  poets,  playwrights  ami  novelists.  Conducted  in 
Spanish.  Prerequisite:  Spall.  51  or  consent  of  section  head. 


411.  Twentieth  Century  Spanish  Theater  (3) 
A  study  of  the  development  ol  twentieth  century  theater 
from  Galdos  to  the  present.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequi 
site:  .i  300-level  course  or  consent  of  section  head. 


ill''.  Sixteenth  Century  (3) 

Representative  readings.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite: 
Span.  SI   or  consent  ol  section  head. 

310.  Nineteenth  Century  Spanish  Novel  (3) 

Realism  and  Naturalism  in  Spain.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Pre 
requisite:  Span.  51  or  consent  ot  section  head. 

311.  The  Generation  of  98  (3) 

A  study  of  the  outstanding  works  by  the  writers  of  the  Gen- 
eration. Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  Span.  51  or  con- 
sent of  section  head. 

321.  Latin  American  Literature  in  Translation  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  outstanding  works  of  Latin  Ameri- 
can literature  in  translation  to  provide  insight  into  Latin 
American  culture.  No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 
Spanish  321  cannot  count  as  a  language  course.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  section  head. 

322.  Latin  American  Literature  in  Translation  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  outstanding  works  of  Latin  Ameri- 
can literature  in  translation  to  provide  insight  into  Latin 
American  culture.  No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 
Spanish  322  cannot  count  as  a  language  course.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  section  head. 


412.  Neruda  and  Mistral  (3) 

A  study  of  the  representative  works  of  these  authors.  Con- 
ducted in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-lcvel  course  or  consent 
of  section  head. 

413.  Ruben  Dario  and  "Modernismo"  (3) 

A  study  of  the  poetry  of  Ruben  Dario  and  his  relation  to  the 
"Modernismo"  movement.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequi- 
site: a  300-level  course  or  consent  of  section  head. 

414.  Twentieth  Century  Spanish  Poetry  before  the  Civil  War 
(3) 

Readings  of  the  poetry  of  Unamuno,  Antonio  Machado,  Juan 
R.  Jimenez  and  the  poets  of  the  generation  of  1 927.  Con- 
ducted in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or  consent 
of  section  head. 

416.  Spanish  Theater  of  the  17th  Century  (3) 

The  development  of  the  Spanish  drama  of  the  Golden  Age. 
Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or 
consent  of  section  head. 

417.  Seminar  on  Galdos  (3) 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Perez  Galdos.  Conducted  in 
Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or  equivalent,  or 
consent  of  section  head. 


331.  Spanish  American  Literature  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  representative  works  of  the  litera- 
ture of  the  Pre-Columbian,  Conquest  and  Colonial  periods. 
Oral  and  written  reports.  Term  paper.  Conducted  in  Spanish. 
Prerequisite:  Span.  51,  52  or  consent  of  section  head. 

332.  Spanish  American  Literature  (3) 

Reading  and  discussion  of  representative  works  of  the  litera- 
ture of  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries.  Oral  and  writ- 
ten reports.  Term  paper.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite: 
Span.  51,  52  or  consent  of  section  head. 

341.  Conversational  Spanish  (3) 

Practice  in  fluency  and  accuracy  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor. 

342.  Spanish  Composition  (3) 

Practice  in  Spanish  composition;  special  attention  to  syntax 
and  style.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 


418.  Seminar  on  Borges  and  Cortazar  (3) 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Jorge  L.  Borges  and  Julio 
Cortazar.  Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level 
course  or  equivalent,  or  consent  of  section  head. 

419.  Nineteenth  Century  Spanish  Theater  (3) 

From  Romanticism  to  Realism  in  19th  century  Spain.  Con- 
ducted in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or  consent 
of  section  head. 

491.  Independent  Study  (3) 

Special  topics  to  supplement  other  study  for  the  M.A.  degree. 
Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or 
equivalent,  or  consent  of  section  head. 

492.  Independent  Study  (3) 

Special  topics  to  supplement  other  study  for  the  M.A.  degree. 
Conducted  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite:  a  300-level  course  or 
equivalent,  or  consent  of  section  head. 


218     Modem  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures: Spanish 


Music 


104.  The  Twentieth  Century  (3) 

Post-romanticism,  impressionism,  atonality,  dodecaphony, 
experimcntalism.  Prerequisite:  Music  1  and  consent  of  in- 
structor and  chairman  of  Lehigh  department.  Two  70-minute 
periods. 


Professors 

Robert  Benjamin  Cutler,  M.A.,  Chairman 
Jonathan  Britton  Elkus,  M.A. 

The  aim  of  the  music  curriculum  is  to  develop  musical  skills 
and  musicality,  and  to  prepare  students  for  admission  to 
graduate  work  in  music.  The  major  is  based  on  courses  offer- 
ed both  at  Lehigh  and  Moravian  College;  the  greater  portion 
of  the  curriculum  is  currently  taught  at  Moravian  College. 

A  major  concentration  in  music  consists  of  thirty  credit 
hours,  twenty-four  of  which  shall  be  advanced  courses.  The 
Moravian  courses  in  Fundamentals,  Music  1  and  2,  are  re- 
quired for  students  who  have  not  mastered  the  rudiments  of 
music. 

Students  must  demonstrate  their  ability  in  sight-singing 
and  dictation,  and  must  be  able  to  play  major  and  minor 
scales  and  harmonic  progressions  in  all  keys,  and  to  read 
chorales  in  open  score  and  from  figured  bass. 

All  majors  are  required  to  participate  regularly  in  one  or 
more  of  the  Lehigh  University  or  Moravian  College  perform- 
ing organizations  or  ensembles.  Qualified  students  present 
recitals. 

Majors  may  earn  credit  for  private  instruction.  Fees  must 
be  borne  by  the  students. 

Courses  Offered  at  Moravian  College 

1-2.  Fundamentals  (4) 

Hearing  the  materials  of  music,  notation,  dictation,  sight- 
singing  and  musicianship.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor 
and  chairman  of  Lehigh  department.  Five  50-minute  periods. 

101.  Music  before  1600  (3) 

Music  literature  from  its  earliest  evidence  through  the 
Renaissance.  Extensive  score  analysis  and  listening.  Prerequi- 
site: Music  1  and  consent  of  instructor  and  chairman  of 
Lehigh  department.  Two  70-minute  periods. 

102.  The  Seventeenth  and  Eighteenth  Centuries  (3) 

Music  literature  of  the  Baroque,  Rococo  and  Classic  periods. 
Extensive  score  analysis  and  listening.  Prerequisite:  Music  1 
and  consent  of  instructor  and  chairman  of  Lehigh  depart- 
ment. Two  70-minute  periods. 

103.  The  Nineteenth  Century  (3) 

Beethoven  and  his  romantic  heirs.  Extensive  score  analysis 
and  listening.  Prerequisite:  Music  1  and  consent  of  instructor 
and  chairman  of  Lehigh  department.  Two  70-minute  periods. 


121.  Modal  Counterpoint  (2) 

Theory  integrated  with  Music  101.  A  study  of  Medieval 
melody.  Writing  organum  and  motet-madrigal  contrapuntal 
style.  Prerequisite:  Music  2  and  consent  of  instructor  and 
chairman  of  Lehigh  department.  Three  50-minute  periods. 

122.  Traditional  Contrapuntal-Harmonic  Practice  (2) 
Theory  integrated  with  Music  102.  Writing  and  playing 
chords  and  harmonic  progressions.  Dominant-tonic  relation- 
ship and  its  extension.  Association  of  voices,  contrapuntal 
devices  and  textures.  Prerequisite:  Music  2  and  consent  of 
instructor  and  chairman  of  Lehigh  department.  Three  50- 
minute  periods. 

123.  Chromatic  Harmony  (2) 

Theory  integrated  with  Music  103.  The  tonal  harmonic  per- 
spective culminating  in  the  music  of  Wagner.  Prerequisite: 
Music  2  and  consent  of  instructor  and  chairman  of  Lehigh 
department.  Three  50-minute  periods. 

124.  Contemporary  Techniques  (2) 

Theory  integrated  with  Music  104.  Working  with  composi- 
tional ideas  that  approach  a  common  usage.  Manipulating 
sound  formations  expressively.  Prerequisite:  Music  2  and 
consent  of  instructor  and  chairman  of  Lehigh  department. 
Three  50-minute  periods. 

141-142.  Instrumental  Techniques  I  (1) 

Beginning  class  instruction  in  playing  band  and  orchestral 
instruments  with  emphasis  on  teaching  and  learning.  Principal 
instruments  include  flute,  clarinet,  trumpet,  horn,  trombone, 
snare  drum,  violin,  cello.  Prerequisite:  Music  1  or  equivalent 
and  consent  of  instructor  and  chairman  of  Lehigh  depart- 
ment. Two  50-minute  periods. 

151-152.  Instrumental  Techniques  II  (1) 
Continuation  of  Techniques  I.  Prerequisite:  Music  1  or 
equivalent  and  permission  of  instructor  and  chairman  of 
Lehigh  department.  Two  50-minute  periods. 

212-213.  Conducting  (2) 

Technique  and  expression  in  conducting.  Score  study  of 
choral  and  instrumental  literature.  Rehearsal  procedures. 
Field  trip  observation.  Prerequisite:  Music  122  or  123.  Two 
70-minute  periods. 

223.  Orchestration  (2) 

Integrated  with  Music  213.  Instrumental  characteristics,  no- 
menclature, and  notation.  Score  analysis,  scoring  and  arrang- 
ing. Prerequisite:  Music  122  or  123.  Two  70-minute  periods. 


Music      219 


Performance  (Open  to  Majors  <  tni 

The  dcpai  tmcnl  otters  private  instruction  in  piano,  voice, 
organ,  harpsi<  hord,  re  mule  r,  ,  oni  posit  ion.  brass,  string, 
woodwind  and  percussion  instruments.  These  courses  may  be 
elected  by  students  who  first  s.itisty  the  department  that 
they  .ire  prepared  to  undertake  the  study  or  writing  ot  music 
literature  of  artistic  worth.  One  eredit  hour  is  given  for  each 
semester. 

In  each  performing  area  instruction  entails  comprehensive 
repertory,  necessary  technical  study,  sight  reading,  and  musi- 
cality.  Weekly  lessons  and  practice  are  scheduled,  and  atten 
dance  at  stated  performance  classes,  rentals,  and  concerts  is 
required.  The  department  may  require  a  student  to  enroll  in 
one  or  more  courses  which  would  strengthen  and  comple- 
...  nt  liis  proficiency. 

Each  term  of  private  instruction  carries  one  credit  hour. 
When  registering,  the  student  lists  the  course  in  Performance 
as  follows:  Music:  P-name  ot  instrument,  and  1,  2,  3,  etc.  to 
indicate  number  of  terms  of  study  on  the  instrument.  Exam- 
ple: "Music:  P-Clarinet,  4"  (fourth  term  of  private  study  of 
clarinet). 

Fees  for  private  instruction  must  be  borne  by  the  student. 

Courses  Offered  at  Lehigh 

1-4.  Instrumental  Music  (1) 

Study  and  performance  of  instrumental  music.  Participation 
in  the  appropriate  ensemble,  as  determined  by  the  depart- 
ment of  music,  is  an  integral  part  of  the  course.  Students 
enrolling  for  their  first  semester  register  for  Mus.  1;  for  their 
second,  Mus.  2,  etc.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

5-8.  Choral  Music  (1) 

Study  and  performance  of  choral  music.  Participation  in  the 
appropriate  vocal  ensemble,  as  determined  by  the  department 
of  music,  is  an  integral  part  of  the  course.  Students  enrolling 
for  their  first  semester  register  for  Mus.  5;  for  their  second, 
Mus.  6,  etc.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

9.  Instrumental  Music  (0) 

Study  and  performance  of  instrumental  music.  Participation 
in  the  appropriate  ensemble,  as  determined  by  the  depart- 
ment of  music,  is  an  integral  part  of  the  course.  May  be  re- 
peated. Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

10.  Choral  Music  (0) 

Study  and  performance  of  choral  music.  Participation  in  the 
appropriate  ensemble,  as  determined  by  the  department  of 
music,  is  an  integral  part  of  the  course.  May  be  repeated. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

20.  Introduction  to  Musical  Literature  (3) 

An  approach  to  musical  style  through  the  study  of  works  by 

representative  composers  from  1600  to  the  present. 


III.  Sacred  Choral  Music  (3) 

The  In"'  tional  aspects  o(  choral  music  and  its  relationship  to 
ill.   ,  I mrch,  beginning  with  Gregorian  Chant.  Compositions  of 
the  Renaissance  and  Baroque  masters  are  studied,  with 
special  attention  given  to  the  works  ot  l',a.  h.  A  survey  is 
made  of  the  outstanding  sacred  choral  works  of  the  IHth, 
I'lth.  and  20th  centuries,  observing  the  shift  in  emphasis 
from  the  church  to  the  concert  hall.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

142.  Chamber  Music  (3) 

A  survey  of  works  for  smaller  instrumental  ensembles  from 
the  forerunners  of  Haydn  to  Stravinsky.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  chairman  of  department. 

143.  Keyboard  Music  (3) 

Study  of  keyboard  music  with  particular  reference  to  the 
styles  of  Scarlatti,  Bach,  Mozart,  Beethoven,  Chopin,  and 
Bartok;  demonstration  of  performance  techniques  on  the 
various  instruments;  description  of  the  mechanics  of  key- 
board instruments,  such  as  the  organ,  harpsichord,  and  piano. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

144.  Aesthetics  and  Criticism  of  Music  (3) 

An  analytical  approach  to  writings  of  Hanslick,  Nietzsche, 
Stravinsky,  Thomson,  Langer,  and  others  with  particular 
attention  to  the  questions  of  meaning,  intent,  and  expressive 
values  in  music.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

145.  The  Viennese  Classic  Period  (3) 

Exercises  in  musical  composition  in  the  manner  of  eighteenth 
century  common  practice;  analysis  of  musical  examples. 
Knowledge  of  conventional  musical  notation  required.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

146.  Viennese  Classical  Period  (3) 

Intensive  study  of  works  of  various  media  of  Haydn,  Mozart 
and  Beethoven,  with  emphasis  on  form  and  style.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

251.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

Study  of  musical  topics  or  work  in  musical  composition  not 

covered  in  regular  courses,  or  continuation  of  study  of  topics 

or  of  projects  in  composition  begun  in  regular  courses.  May 

be  repeated  for  credit.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of 

department. 

The  Lehigh  University  Band 

Band  may  be  elected  by  suitably  qualified  undergraduates. 
The  band  will  consist  of  a  concert,  varsity,  and  marching 
band  and  will  perform  music,  as  specified  by  the  director,  for 
concerts,  convocations,  and  athletic  events. 

Except  during  the  fall  season,  rehearsals  will  be  held  twice 
weekly  and,  in  addition,  provision  may  be  made  for  required 
section  rehearsals. 


220     Music 


Band  uniforms  and  certain  musical  instruments  are  fur- 
nished by  the  University.  A  deposit  of  $25  is  required  from 
each  member  of  the  band  for  the  uniform  issued  him.  Mem 
bers  of  the  Concert  Band  will  purchase  their  own  blazers, 
which  are  worn  for  certain  performances. 

Students  serving  in  the  band  receive  the  following  awards: 
a  sweater  for  two  years  of  satisfactory  service;  for  three 
years,  $20  in  cash;  and  four  years,  an  additional  $20  in  cash. 

Ttie  Lehigh  University  Glee  Club 

Glee  Club  may  be  elected  by  suitable  qualified  under- 
graduates. 

Traditionally,  the  Glee  Club  has  been  a  men's  chorus.  In 
addition  to  performing  its  own  repertoire,  it  collaborates 
with  choruses  of  women's  colleges  in  performing  major  works 
with  orchestra,  on  the  campus  and  away. 

The  Glee  Club  invites  qualified  women  to  participate  in 
its  activities  and  to  contribute  to  the  development  of  new 
choral  programs  on  the  campus. 


Natural  Science 


J.  Donald  Ryan,  Ph.D.,  Chairman  of  Geological  Sciences  and 
director  of  Natural  Science  program 

This  major  provides  students  with  a  broad  background  in  the 
fundamentals  of  mathematics  and  science  and  the  opportuni- 
ty to  concentrate  to  a  reasonable  degree  in  one  area  of 
science.  The  program  is  designed  especially  for  (1 )  those  stu- 
dents who  desire  preparation  for  graduate  work  or  careers  in 
certain  of  the  derivative  or  interdisciplinary  sciences  or  re- 
lated professional  fields  (oceanography,  astronomy,  psycho- 
physiology,  geophysics,  information  science,  medicine  or 
dentistry,  conservation,  etc.),  and  (2)  those  students  who 
plan  to  teach  in  secondary  schools  or  community  colleges, 
and  (3)  those  students  without  fixed  career  objectives  who 
desire  undergraduate  training  in  science. 

Students  who  register  tor  the  program  are  required  to 
select  an  area  of  concentration  (or  option)  which  must  be 
approved  by  the  dean  of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Science  and 
Professor  J.  Donald  Ryan,  department  of  geological  sciences, 
director  of  the  program.  The  option  may  be  chosen  in 
chemistry,  biology,  geology,  psychology,  or  in  an  approved 
interdisciplinary  area  (geophysics,  marine  science,  bio- 
chemistry, information  science,  etc.).  Courses  included  in  the 
option  will  be  worked  out  individually  for  the  student  by  his 
major  advisor. 

A  special  program  leading  to  a  B.A.  in  Natural  Science 
and  an  M.S.  in  Materials  is  available  for  interested  students. 
See  Five-Year  Programs. 

Qualified  students  may  be  given  permission  at  the  end  of 
the  junior  year  to  enter  a  program  whereby  they  are  able  to 
begin  work  toward  a  graduate  degree  (M.A.,  M.S.,  or  M.Ed.) 
during  the  senior  year.  Students  enrolled  in  this  program 
often  will  be  able  to  complete  all  requirements  for  the 
master's  degree  with  only  one  year  of  study  beyond  the  bac- 
calaureate. 


Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Math  1,  22,  23     Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  (12) 

Phys  11,  12  Introductory  Physics  I  &  Lab  (5) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Chem  21,  22         Introductory  Chemical  Principles  &  Lab  (5) 

Geol  1  Principles  of  Geology 

or 
Astron  1  The  Solar  System  (3) 

Biol  21,22  Principles  of  Biology 

or 
Psych  3  Psychology  as  a  Natural  Science  (3) 


Natural  Science     221 


mi<  Chemistry 

Chcm  91,  190      Physical  Chcmistrj    6  10 
Math 

Opi 

ind  courses  included  in  option  taken 
with  the  approval  ,>t  majoi  advisi 

dcnl  registered  for  this  major  normally  isex|         ; 
is  option  ">>  later  than  the  second  semester  ol  his 
sophomore  year. 


Philosophy 


Division  ol  Philosophy 

Professors 

Thomas  Morris  Hayncs,  Ph.D. 

As-...,  iate  Professors 

Robert  Featherstonc  Barnes,  Ph.D. 

John  Ralph  Lindgren,  Ph.D.,  Head,  Division  of  Philosophy 

Norman  Paul  Melchert,  Ph.D. 

Assist. mi  Professors 

Nicholas  Anthony  LaPara,  Ph.D. 


Students  considering  a  philosophy  major  need  answers  to  two 
main  questions:  What  is  the  field  of  philosophy  like?  And 
what  career  possibilities  are  there  for  someone  who  majors  in 
philosophy?  This  description  tries  to  give  brief  answers  to 
these  questions. 

Philosophically  inclined  thinkers  have  always  asked  funda- 
mental questions  about  the  intellectual,  moral,  religious, 
social,  and  political  aspects  of  human  life.  They  have  tried  to 
subject  these  issues  to  rigorous  analysis  and  provide 
thoughtful  answers  relevant  to  their  time.  The  major  current 
contexts  for  philosophical  inquiry  are  the  dysfunction  of 
social  and  political  institutions,  the  impact  of  technology, 
and  the  challenge  of  the  scientific  world  view.  These  lead  to 
such  questions  as:  What  is  the  relation  of  the  individual  to 
the  state  and  its  laws?  What  human  life  styles  and  institutions 
are  conceptually  viable  in  a  technological  society?  What  are 
the  implications  of  the  scientific  world  picture  for  our  con- 
cepts of  religion,  freedom,  and  creativity?  The  analysis  of  the 
component  issues  in  these  and  many  more  problems,  the 
unearthing  of  presuppositions,  the  proposal  of  answers,  and 
the  critique  of  those  proposals  are  the  actual  elements  of 
philosophical  investigation. 

A  major  in  philosophy  is  excellent  preparation  for  a  vari- 
ety of  careers  either  immediately  after  graduation  or  after 
further  study  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree.  Careers  requiring 
further  study  for  which  philosophy  is  an  especially  suitable 
preparation  include:  academic  philosophy;  law;  some  types 
of  government  service,  e.g.,  urban  planning;  certain  careers  in 
business,  e.g.,  management  consulting,  personnel  and  indus- 
trial relations;  the  ministry;  academic  careers  in  areas  other 
than  philosophy,  e.g.,  intellectual  history,  religious  studies, 
social  and  political  theory,  and  information  systems;  and 
primary  and  secondary  education.  Students  not  considering 
such  fields  will  find  a  wide  range  of  other  careers  open  to 
them  by  majoring  in  philosophy  or  including  philosophy  in 


222     Philosophy 


an  interdisciplinary  or  double  major.  Capable  philosophy 
students  who  choose  their  electives  wisely  find  that  the 
analytical,  logical,  and  discursive  skills  provided  by  philo- 
sophical training  enable  them  to  pursue  successfully  careers 
after  graduation  in  such  fields  as  communications,  publishing, 
insurance,  marketing,  merchandising,  social  services,  advertis- 
ing, transportation,  and  utilities. 

The  curriculum  tor  the  philosophy  major  consists  of  a 
basic  framework  of  required  courses  and  approved  electives. 
The  required  courses  provide  each  student  with  a  direct  ac- 
quaintance with  the  works  ot  major  thinkers  who  have 
proved  to  be  both  influential  in  shaping  our  world  and  useful 
as  models  for  our  own  philosophical  thinking.  The  approved 
electives  provide  a  context  for  focusing  and  further  develop- 
ing analytical  and  critical  skills  according  to  each  student's 
interests  and  goals.  The  range  and  flexibility  of  the  major 
curriculum  combines  with  close  contact  with  departmental 
faculty  to  provide  each  student  with  the  opportunities  for 
both  tailoring  programs  to  his  or  her  own  personal  goals  and 
laying  the  foundations  for  continued  learning  throughout 
life. 

Required  Courses 

Phil  14  Foundations  of  Logic  (3) 

Phil  15  Ethics  (3) 

Plus  three  of  the  following: 

Phil  231  Ancient  Philosophy  (3) 

Phil  235  17th  and  18th  Century  Philosophy  (3) 

Phil  237  19th  Century  Philosophy  (3) 

Phil  241  20th  Century  Continental  Philosophy  (3) 

Phil  242  20th  Century  Anglo-American  Philosophy 

(3) 

And  fifteen  hours  to  be  selected  with  the  counsel  and  ap- 
proval of  departmental  advisor.  At  least  nine  of  these  fifteen 
hours  must  be  at  the  300-level.  Normally  these  will  be 
courses  in  the  philosophy  curriculum,  although  substitutions 
of  courses  from  other  departments  may  be  made  with  the 
approval  of  the  advisor. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

11.  Values,  the  Individual,  and  the  State:  An  Introduction  to 
Philosophical  Thinking  (3) 

An  introductory  course  with  two  goals:  (1)  to  explore  some 
important  current  issues  such  as  the  objectivity  of  values;  the 
moral  status  of  the  state;  the  obligation,  if  any,  to  obey  the 
law;  the  nature  of  violence;  the  metaphysics  of  punishment; 
the  nature  of  personhood;  the  connection  of  law  and  morali- 
ty; and  (2)  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the  sort  of  disci- 
plined reflection  characteristic  of  philosophical  thought.  Not 
available  to  juniors  and  seniors.  Consent  of  instructor  re- 
quired. 


14.  Foundations  of  Logic  (3) 

The  development  of  several  symbolic  languages  as  theoretical 
models  for  explaining  certain  logical  features  of  ordinary 
English  discourse,  such  as  valid  inference  and  necessary  truth. 
Some  of  the  significant  general  properties  of  these  symbolic 
languages  will  be  studied. 

15.  Ethics  (3) 

A  critical  study  of  classic  and  contemporary  ethical  theories 
as  analyses  of  moral  life.  Special  attention  is  given  to  prob- 
lems concerning  the  nature  of  moral  responsibility  and  moral 
judgment,  the  relation  of  man  to  his  world,  and  the  scientific 
status  of  moral  theory. 

42.  The  Scientific  Process  (3) 

A  study  of  the  ways  in  which  scientific  conceptions  of  nature 
are  generated.  Study  of  the  historical  development  of  some 
landmark  achievements  in  science  provides  the  background 
for  understanding  the  logic  of  this  intellectual  activity. 

100.  Philosophy  ot  Contemporary  Civilization  (3) 
A  philosophical  analysis  of  the  theoretical  foundations  of  our 
culture,  providing  a  useful  method  for  formulating  policies  in 
private  and  public  life.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  nature 
and  integration  of  ideals  of  family,  industry,  education,  art, 
science,  religion,  law,  and  politics. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

231.  Ancient  Philosophy  (3) 

A  historical  study  of  philosophy  in  ancient  times  from  its 

origin  in  Ionia  through  its  flowering  with  Plato  and  Aristotle 

to  its  decline  with  the  Roman  Stoics  and  Neo-Platonists. 

Special  attention  will  be  given  to  the  interaction  of  religious, 

political  and  scientific  thought  with  philosophy  during  the 

period. 

235.  17th  and  18th  Century  Philosophy  (3) 

A  historical  study  of  the  major  philosophies  from  the 
Renaissance  to  the  end  of  the  18th  century;  the  work  of 
Descartes,  Spinoza,  Leibniz,  Locke,  Berkeley,  Hume, 
Rousseau,  and  Kant.  Special  attention  will  be  given  to  the 
interaction  of  scientific  and  philosophical  thought  during  the 
period. 

237.  19th  Century  Philosophy  (3) 

A  historical  study  of  the  major  philosophers  of  the  last  cen- 
tury, including  Mill,  Hegel,  Feuerbach,  Marx,  and  Nietzsche. 
Special  emphasis  will  be  given  to  such  issues  as  social  philoso- 
phy, the  philosophy  of  history  and  theory  of  knowledge. 

241.  20th  Century  Continental  Philosophy  (3) 
The  main  philosophical  trends  in  Europe  in  this  century: 
phenomenology,  existentialism,  and  Marxism.  Readings  from 
the  work  of  Husserl,  Heidegger,  Sartre,  Camus,  Buber,  Lenin, 
and  others. 


Philosophy      223 


'i'    'Dili  (  .-miii  v    Vnglo   Vmcrican  Philosophy     I 
The  main  philosophical  trends  in  England  and  Vmcrii  i  in  this 
century  i  pragmatism,  realism,  anal)  sis,  logii  al  positivism, 
ordinary  language  philosophy,  and  the  move  beyond  tradi 
tional  empiricism.  Readings  from  Pcircc,  lames,  Dewey, 
Russell,  Aycr,  Whitehead  .mil  others, 

•i  I   Kierkegaard  .1 

An  introduction  to  the  life  .mil  thought  ol  S4ren 
Kierkegaard,  the  19th  century  Danish  forerunner  of  existen 
tialism,  with  .1  brief  look  .it  Ins  impact  on  philosophy,  thcolo 
\  cholog)  and  literature. 

2S1    Philosophy  oi  Religion  (3) 

A  critical  look  at  some  of  the  iuiul.nncnt.il  problems  of  reli- 
gion: the  nature  of  religious  experience  and  belief,  n  ason  and 
revelation,  tin-  existence  and  nature  of  God,  the  problem  ol 
evil,  and  religious  truth. 

261.  Introduction  to  Philosophy  of  Science  (3) 

An  analysis  of  scientific  concepts  and  the  structure  of  scienti- 
fic knowledge.  ["opi(  •  investigated  arc  explanation,  empirical 
significance,  theory  and  tact,  observation,  opcrationalism. 
behaviorism;  cause,  disposition,  and  law;  determinism,  emer- 
gence, and  the  human  mind:  science  and  value.  Philosophy 
majors  will  also  study  probability  and  induction. 

271.  Readings  in  Philosophy  (1-3) 

A  course  of  readings  designed  primarily  for  undergraduate 
philosophy  majors.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  head  of  division. 

272.  Readings  in  Philosophy  (1-3) 

A  course  of  readings  designed  primarily  for  undergraduate 
philosophy  majors.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  head  of  division. 

301.  Philosophy  of  the  Social  Sciences  (3) 

An  analysis  of  the  social  sciences  considered  as  programs  for 
achieving  understanding  and  control  of  man  and  society. 
Study  is  made  of  assumptions  basic  to,  and  problems  incur- 
red in.  scientific  methodology  in  general;  the  implications  of 
these  for  the  various  social  sciences  are  stressed. 

302.  Value  Theory  (3) 

Consideration  of  types  of  value  and  modes  of  value  judg- 
ment, evidence  and  authority  in  value  judgments,  techniques 
of  normative  analysis,  and  the  relation  of  value  judgments  to 
science.  Exemplification  of  these  issues  will  be  made  in  such 
fields  as  psychology,  economics,  political  science,  morality, 
law,  art  and  religion. 

310.  Social  Philosophy  (3) 

An  analysis  of  the  conditions  for  and  consequences  of  the 
existence  of  a  society  among  men.  The  primary  objective  of 
this  course  is  to  show  what  a  society  is  and  what  it  means  to 
be  a  member  of  a  society.  Attention  is  devoted  to  such  issues 
as  obligation,  authority,  justice,  freedom,  equality,  social 
institutions,  social  choice,  social  change,  and  the  problem  of 


sustaining  the  social  dimension  ol  human  existence,  Readings 
in  contemporary  social  philosophy  emphasized, 

11  I.  1  ogii  (3) 

A  stud)  ol  the  syntactii  and  semantit  methods  ol  modem 

logil    . ■  1 1  •  1   the  relationships  between  them.  Sp.  ,  1.1I  attention 

will  be  given  to  the  philosophical  significance  ol'  tin-  major 
results  in  the  field. 

IIS.  ( 'mi  temporary  I.  thus  (3) 

An  examination  of  recent  literature  on  selected  topics  such  as 
moral  relativism,  the  role  of  reason  in  morality,  conscience 
and  the  law.  Prerequisite:  Phil.  I  5  or  consent  of  the  in- 
structor. 

Hi.  Marxist  Philosophers  (3) 

A  historical  study  of  philosophers  in  the  Marxist  tradition 
including  Marx,  Engels,  Kautsky,  Plckhanov,  Bernstein, 
Lenin.  Lukacs,  Stalin  and  Mao.  Primary  sources  emphasized. 

350.  Philosophy  of  Mind  (3) 

An  examination  of  classical  and  current  literature  on  the 
concept  of  mind:  mind  and  body,  the  other  minds  problem, 
free  will  and  determinism,  minds  and  machines. 

362.  Issues  in  the  Philosophy  of  Science  (3) 
Critical  study  and  review  of  crucial  philosophical  problems 
arising  from  research  into  the  logical  and  epistemological 
foundations  of  science,  with  attention  directed  at  alternative 
approaches  to  their  resolution.  Prerequisite:  Phil.  261  or  con- 
sent of  head  of  division. 

364.  Philosophy  of  Language  (3) 

Investigation  of  the  problems  centering  around  the  question 
of  how  language,  a  conventional  and  arbitrary  structure  of 
symbols,  can  be  a  vehicle  of  meaning,  thought,  and  concept. 
Among  these  problems  are  those  concerning  the  source  of 
meaning,  reference  and  meaning,  truth  and  fact,  necessary 
truth,  truth  by  convention,  and  the  nature  of  conventions 
and  linguistic  rules. 

388.  Philosophy  of  Mathematics  (3) 

An  investigation  of  the  philosophical  foundations  of  mathe- 
matics, with  special  emphasis  on  the  "classical"  views  of  the 
nature  of  mathematics— logicism,  formalism,  and  intuition- 
ism— and  on  their  contempory  counterparts. 

391.  Senior  Seminar  (3) 

Examination  of  selected  topics  for  philosophy  majors  and 
other  advanced  students.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 


224      Philosophy 


Division  of  Information  Science 

Professors 

Donald  John  Hillman,  M.Litt.,  Chairman,  Department  of 
Philosophy,  Head,  Division  of  Information  Science,  Director, 
Center  for  Information  Sciences 
Herbert  Rubensiein,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Robert  Featherstone  Barnes,  Ph.D. 
Andrew  James  Kasarda,  Ph.D. 
John  J.  O'Connor,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

James  Sproat  Green,  Ph.D. 
Louis  W.  Stern,  Ph.D. 


The  rate  of  change  in  information  technology  demands  that 
the  practitioner  have  the  conceptual  background  necessary  to 
participate  in  and  contribute  to  existing  and  developing  sys- 
tems. Within  this  framework,  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degree  pro- 
grams offered  by  the  division  of  information  science  are  de- 
signed to  fulfill  several  objectives.  Each  program  provides  a 
broad  base  of  both  theory  and  application.  Emphasis  is  on 
fundamentals,  rather  than  techniques.  Basic  to  the  program 
of  information  science  at  Lehigh  University  is  the  concept 
that  research  and  instruction  reinforce  one  another.  Conse- 
quently whenever  possible,  students  are  expected  to  partici- 
pate in  research  and  operations  on  a  part-time  basis. 

The  curriculum  in  information  science  is  based  on  a  B.S. 
degree  in  an  engineering  or  scientific  discipline.  Desirable 
preparation  consists  of  at  least  12  hours  of  mathematics, 
including  9  hours  of  differential  and  integral  calculus  and  one 
course  beyond  the  calculus.  In  recognition  of  the  flexibility 
and  cross-disciplinary  nature  of  the  subject,  exception  to  this 
requirement  may  be  granted  to  those  students  with  training 
in  a  systematic  science.  A  course  in  computer  programming 
or  programming  experience  is  desirable.  Mathematics  105, 
Computer  Programming,  is  available,  without  graduate  credit, 
for  those  without  computer  background. 

A  candidate  for  the  degree  of  master  of  science  in  inform- 
ation science  is  required  to  complete  at  least  twenty-four 
hours  of  approved  course  work  and  to  submit  a  thesis.  Each 
student's  schedule  will  be  chosen  in  consultation  with  the 
head  of  the  division.  Three  core  areas  are  at  the  heart  of  the 
M.S.  program:  information  processing  systems;  information 
retrieval  theory;  and  analysis  of  information.  Beyond  this 
basic  core,  student  schedules  are  planned  on  an  individual 
basis  to  fit  previous  academic  experience  and  career  goals. 
Two  options  are  open  for  specialization,  dependent  on  back- 
ground, ability,  and  interests;  systems,  the  integration  of 
machine  and  human  capabilities  and  techniques;  and  logico- 
mathematical,  theoretical  and  systematic  consideration  of 
information  systems  and  processes. 

Maximum  advantage  is  taken  of  courses  in  other  depart- 
ments on  the  campus.  Consequently  a  student's  program  will 


be  a  combination  of  courses  in  information  science,  together 
with  offerings  by  the  departments  of  electrical  engineering, 
industrial  engineering,  mathematics,  psychology,  social  rela- 
tions, and  others. 

The  Ph.D.  in  Information  Science  covers  such  diverse 
topics  as  mathematical  logic,  information  systems,  command 
and  control  systems,  computer  programming,  computer 
languages,  systems  analysis,  operations  research,  computa- 
tional linguistics,  probability  theory,  statistics  and  statistical 
inference,  switching  theory,  graph  theory,  algebra,  topology, 
automata  theory,  and  artificial  intelligence.  The  division  of 
information  science  has  ongoing  programs  of  research  and 
development  in  these  fields,  and  offers  opportunities  for 
well-qualified  students  to  participate  in  sponsored  research 
projects. 

In  these  research  and  development  activities,  the  division 
cooperates  closely  with  the  Center  for  Information  Science 
and  the  Mart  Library  of  Science  and  Engineering.  The  focus 
of  development  is  the  LEADERMART  project,  providing  a 
fully  computerized,  on-line,  conversational  information  sys- 
tem as  a  service  of  the  Mart  Library  to  Lehigh's  interdiscipli- 
nary research  centers. 

A  candidate  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  is  required  to  submit  a 
general  plan  to  the  chairman  of  the  department  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  first  year  of  doctoral  studies.  This  plan  must  be 
approved  by  the  candidate's  special  committee  at  the  time  of 
his  admisssion  to  candidacy. 

The  doctoral  program  in  information  science  will  be  based 
on  the  candidate's  approved  plan  of  original  and  specialized 
research.  A  program  of  courses  and  seminars  at  the  400-level 
will  also  be  formulated  in  the  field  in  which  the  dissertation 
is  to  be  written. 

110.  (Math.  110)  Algorithmic  Reasoning  (3) 

The  role  of  machines  as  physical  models  of  abstract  pro- 
cesses. Computability,  practical  computability,  and  unsolva- 
bility.  Examples  drawn  from  pure  mathematics  and  will  in- 
clude recursive  function  theory  and  the  real  number  system. 
Prerequisite:  Math.  23  or  Math.  32. 

201.  Computers  and  Language  (3) 

The  role  of  computers  in  such  activities  as  natural  language 
processing,  mechanical  translation,  speech  recognition,  and 
augmentation  of  human  reasoning. 

202.  Computers  and  Society  (3) 

A  general  nontechnical  survey  of  the  impact  of  computers  on 
modern  society.  Special  attention  will  be  given  to  the  use  of 
large-scale  data  banks  and  retrieval  systems,  the  problems  of 
privacy  and  file  security,  and  the  impact  of  automation  on 
everyday  life. 

203.  Fields  of  Language  Study  (3) 

A  general  survey  of  the  major  fields  of  language  study:  de- 
scriptive and  historical  linguistics,  psycholinguistics,  sociolin- 
guistics,  computer  applications,  statistical  linguistics,  sty- 
listics. 


Philosophy:  Division  of  Information  Science      225 


101 .  I  lest  i  iprivc  I  inguistics  (3) 

Techniques  tor  the  desci  iption  of  the  phonology,  morpholo 
gy,  and  syntax  ol  natural  languages.  Special  attention  to 
transformational  generative  grammar. 

)02.  (Psych.  320)  Psycholinguistics  (3) 

Study  ol  the  experimental  and  obsorv.itioii.il  literature  on  the 

production  and  comprehension  of  utterances  and  on  (lie 
acquisition  o(  language.  Consideration  ot  performance  of  the 
language  user.  Prerequisite:  l.N.  .101. 

106.  Statistical  Linguistics  (3) 

A  Stud)   ol  statistical  properties  of  natural  language  usage. 
Data  sources,  measurement  techniques  and  applications  will 
be  examined.  Some  competence  in  applied  statistical  analysis 
will  be  assumed.  Offered  as  required. 

J17.  (E.E.  317)  Analytical  Methods  lor  Information  Sciences 

(3) 

For  description  see  E.E.  317. 

321.  Introduction  to  Information  Methodology  (3) 
History,  theory,  and  structure  ot  indexing  and  classification 
systems  for  the  organization  of  information;  comparative 
analysis  of  selected  retrieval  schemes;  experimental  methods 
for  developing  indexing  systems  and  analyzing  subject  con- 
tent. 

350.  Applications  ol  Non-Numerical  Automata  (3) 
An  introduction  to  basic  automata  and  their  application  to 
non-numerical  processes.  Particular  emphasis  is  given  to  uses 
involving  artificial  languages,  simple  natural  languages,  and 
basic  symbol  strings.  The  course  will  include  a  study  of  ele- 
mentary automata  theory;  string  processing  compilers;  auto- 
mated simple  grammars;  and  information  retrieval  aspects. 
Small  computer  programs  will  be  written  by  the  students, 
incorporating  the  theoretical  concepts.  Prerequisite:  Math. 
105  or  equivalent. 

361.  (Math.  361)  Theory  of  Formal  Grammars  (3) 

The  study  of  the  structure  of  formal  languages  as  determined 
by  their  formation-rule  grammars.  Comparison  of  grammars 
of  differing  strengths  (finite— state,  context-free,  context- 
sensitive,  etc.);  considerations  of  applications  in  logic  (Turing 
machines,  decidability)  and  in  linguistic  (phase-structure  and 
transformational  grammars). 

362.  (Math.  362)  Computer  Languages  (3) 
For  description  see  Math.  362. 

373.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Information  Science  (3) 
A  general  consideration  of  the  role  of  mathematical  tech- 
niques in  information  science,  and  a  study  of  specific  mathe- 
matical structures  with  applications  in  information  retrieval 
theory. 


374.  Information  Retrieval  Theory  (3) 
An  introduction  to  the  problems  ol  theory  construction  foi 
computerized  information  storage  and  retrieval  systems. 
Special  attention  is  given  to  the  logical  and  iii.itheinatic.il 
foundations  ol  automatic  text-processing,  file  generation  for 
retrieval,  and  inquiry  negotiation. 

379.  Introduction  to  Library  Organization  (3) 

An  introduction  to  libraries  .is  information  organizations, 
including  their  history,  function,  and  structure.  This  course  is 
intended  to  supply  a  frame  of  reference  for  those  students 
intending  to  take  l.S.  .180,  Library  Automation;  and  to  pro- 
vide a  background  lor  students  interested  in  broad  applica- 
tions of  information  science  to  social  and  educational  needs. 

380.  Library  Automation  (3) 

A  study  of  methods  and  procedures  in  the  application  of 
automated  equipment  in  libraries.  Special  attention  is  given 
to  the  augmentation  of  acquisition,  cataloguing,  circulations 
and  reference  functions.  Prerequisite;  l.S.  379  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

390.  Special  Topics  (1-3) 

An  opportunity  for  advanced  work  through  supervised  read- 
ing and  research.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Offered 
as  required.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

402.  (Psych.  448)  Seminar  in  Psycholinguistics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  psycholinguistics  examined  in  depth  and  in 

detail.  Prerequisite:  l.S.  301. 

418.  Special  Topics  In  Linguistics  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  linguistics  not  covered  in  other  courses. 

(Offered  as  required.) 

422.  Analysis  of  Information  Systems  (3) 
The  study  of  the  organization  of  information  systems  with 
respect  to  design  criteria,  information  acquisition  and  entry, 
information  processing,  classification  and  storage,  retrieval 
and  dissemination,  feedback  control  and  evaluation;  opera- 
tional requirements  such  as  hardware,  software  and  person- 
nel, and  system  economics. 

431.  Subject  Document  Retrieval  (3) 

Technique  and  systems  for  retrieval  of  documents  in  response 
to  subject  requests.  Fundamental  ideas,  achievements  to  date, 
problems  and  possibilities.  Topics  covered  include  request 
negotiation  techniques,  document  indexing  (coordinate,  rela- 
tional, weighted),  "Boolean"  and  weighted  term  searching 
methods,  and  thesauri  and  classifications  as  aids  to  negotia- 
tion, indexing,  and  searching. 


226     Philosophy :  Division  of  Information  Science 


432.  ALP-Aided  Document  Retrieval  (3) 

Subject  document  retrieval  aided  by  automatic  language  pro- 
cessing (ALP).  Fundamental  ideas,  achievements  to  date, 
problems  and  possibilities.  Topics  covered  include  computer 
and  man-machine  performance  of  the  following  functions: 
subject  indexing  and  classification  of  documents,  abstracting, 
construction  of  thesauri  and  classification  of  schedules,  re- 
trieval by  searching  natural  language  text  of  unindexed  docu- 
ments, and  on-line  negotiation  of  retrieval  requests.  Prerequi- 
site: I.S.  431  or  equivalent. 


480.  Sentence  Syntax  (3) 

Survey  ot  various  linguistic  approaches  to  the  analysis  of 
sentences;  co-occurrence,  immediate  constituents,  phrase 
structure,  kernels,  transformations,  and  discourse  considera- 
tions. Relevance  of  the  material  to  language  data  processing 
will  be  considered.  Prerequisite:  I.S.  301. 

481.  Thesis  (3) 

482.  Thesis  (3) 


433.  (E.E.  403)  Design  of  Executive  Systems  (3) 
For  description  see  E.E.  403. 

434.  Document  Retrieval  Evaluation  (3) 

Evaluation  of  systems  and  techniques  for  subject  document 
retrieval.  Fundamental  ideas,  achievements  to  date,  problems 
and  possibilities.  Topics  covered  include  evaluation  of  opera- 
tion systems,  experimental  testing  of  retrieval  techniques, 
uses  of  evaluation  results,  relation  of  "information  needs  and 
uses"  studies,  various  evaluation  measures,  and  the  notion  of 
"relevance."  Prerequisite:  I.S.  431  or  equivalent. 


492.  Special  Topics  in  Information  Science  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  information  sciences  not  covered  in 

other  courses.  Offered  as  required. 


442.  Evaluation  Models  (3) 

An  investigation  of  the  activities  necessary  to  the  develop- 
ment of  formal  structures  for  evaluating  complex  systems. 
Particular  treatment  is  directed  toward  the  evaluation  of  large 
information  retrieval  systems.  Topics  covered  include  estab- 
lishment of  system  objectives,  recognition  and  isolation  of 
variables,  economic  aspects,  empirical  testing. 

450.  Information  Network  Theory  (3) 

Applications  of  graph  theory  to  the  modeling,  simulation, 
and  design  of  information  networks.  Prerequisite:  I.S.  374. 
Offered  as  required. 

462.  Retrieval  Languages  (3) 

The  study  of  formal  indexing  and  retrieval  languages,  with 
special  attention  to  the  interaction  between  syntactic  struc- 
ture and  retrieval  properties.  Examples  will  be  drawn  from 
actual  and  experimental  systems  to  show  the  effect  of  syntac- 
tic structure  upon  system  capabilities. 

464.  Mathematical  Models  in  Linguistics  (3) 
Discussion  of  the  goal  and  function  of  models  in  linguistics 
and  of  various  criteria  of  adequacy  for  such  models.  Develop- 
ment and  comparison  of  relational,  algebraic,  categorical,  and 
other  mathematical  models  for  description  of  linguistic  struc- 
ture. Prerequisite:  I.S.  361. 

475.  Retrieval  Structures  (3) 

Advanced  study  of  the  application  of  mathematics  and  logic 
to  the  problems  of  retrieval  system  design  and  implementa- 
tion, with  particular  emphasis  on  large-scale  computer-based 
information  networks.  Prerequisite:  I.S.  374  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 


Philosophy:  Division  of  Information  Science      227 


Physics 


Professors 

I. lines  Alan  McLennan,  Ph.D..  (  '.hairman 

Raymond  lav  Emrich,  Ph.D. 

Robert  Thomas  Folk,  Ph.D. 

Wvm.in  Beall  Fowler,  Ph.D. 

Wesley  Richard  Smith,  Ph.D. 

Wilbur  Devilla  Bernhardt  Spatz.  Ph.D. 

Wesley  Johnson  V.inSciver.  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Brent  W.  Benson,  Ph.D. 
Garold  J.  Borse,  Ph.D. 
Frank  J.  Feigl,  Ph.D. 
Alvin  S.  Kanofsky,  Ph.D. 
Shelden  H.  Radin.  Ph.D. 
Russell  A.  Shaffer,  Ph.D. 
Donald  B.  Wheeler,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Ernest  E.  Bergmann,  Ph.D. 
Colin  E.  Jones.  Ph.D. 
Yong  Wook  Kim,  Ph.D. 


Students  in  the  College  of  Engineering  or  the  College  of  Arts 
and  Science  may  major  in  physics  leading  to  the  B.S.  or  B.A. 
degree  respectively.  With  the  exception  of  the  college  require- 
ments, for  example  the  language  requirement  of  the  College 
of  Arts  and  Science,  the  curricula  are  similar. 

Major  in  College  of  Arts  and  Science 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

Chem  21,  22         Principles  of  Chemistry  (8) 
Math  21,  22,  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  (12) 
Phys  11,12  Introductory  Physics  I  &  Lab  (5) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Required  Major  Courses 

Phys  31  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Phys  90  Electrical  Phenomena  (1) 

Phys  171  Proseminar  (1) 

Phys  191  Laboratory  Techniques  (2) 

Phys  192  Advanced  Laboratory  (2) 

Phys  212  Electricity  and  Magnetism  I  (3) 

Phys  213  Electricity  and  Magnetism  II  (3) 

Phys  215  Particles  and  Fields  I  (3) 

Phys  216  Particles  and  Fields  II  (3) 


Phys  254  I  Iptii     I   il>..t.n..ry  (2) 

Phys  340  Heat,  Thermodynamics  and  Pyromctry  (3) 

Phys  362  Atomic  and  Molecular  Structure  (3) 

Math  219,  220     Principles  of  Analysis  (6) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Approved  Electives  (6) 

Major  in  College  of  Engineering 

Freshman  Year  (See  page  45) 

Sophomore  War,  First  Semester  ( 15  credit  hours) 

Phys  21,22  Introductory  Physics  II  &  Lab  (5) 

Math  23  Analytical  Geometry  and  Calculus  III  (4) 

G.S.  Requirement  (3) 

Elective  (3) 

Sophomore  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-1  7  credit  hours) 

Phys  31  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Phys  90  Electrical  Phenomena  (1) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Eco  1  Economics  (4) 

Electives  (4-6) 

Junior  Year,  First  Semester  (14-17  credit  hours) 

Phys  191  Laboratory  Techniques  (2) 

Phys  212  Electricity  and  Magnetism  I  (3) 

Phys  215  Particles  and  Fields  I  (3) 

Math  322  Methods  of  Applied  Analysis  I  (3) 

Electives  (3-6) 

Junior  Year,  Second  Semester  (17  credit  hours) 

Phys  254  Optics  Laboratory  (2) 

Phys  213  Electricity  and  Magnetism  II  (3) 

Phys  216  Particles  and  Fields  II  (3) 

G.S.  Requirement  (3) 

Electives  (6) 

Senior  Year,  First  Semester  (14-17  credit  hours) 

Phys  340  Heat,  Thermodynamics  and  Pyrometry  (3) 

Phys  362  Atomic  and  Molecular  Structure  (3) 

G.S.  Requirement  (3) 

Electives  (5-8) 

Senior  Year,  Second  Semester  (15-18  credit  hours) 

Phys  171  Proseminar  (1) 

G.S.  Requirement  (3) 
Electives  (11-14) 

Notes:  The  lower  number  of  credit  hours  represents  the  load 
required  to  meet  the  graduation  requirement;  the  higher  re- 
presents the  normal  semester  load. 

The  electives  must  include  at  least  14  hours  of  approved 
technical  electives,  including  two  of  Physics  363,  364,  365, 
366,  367,  and  369. 


228     Physics 


The  required  courses  in  the  physics  curricula  include  the 
minimum  mathematical  and  subject  matter  requirements  for 
entrance  into  graduate  schools.*  The  intent  of  the  program  is 
to  prepare  students  for  careers  in  scientific  work,  either  in 
physics  or  in  some  other  science.  Usually  this  involves  con- 
tinued study  at  the  post-graduate  level;  however,  many  stu- 
dents who  have  terminated  their  formal  education  with  the 
B.A.  or  B.S.  in  physics  have  found  that  it  has  been  an  excel- 
lent preparation  for  non-technical  activities,  as  well  as  for 
science  or  innovative  engineering. 

The  first  two  years  of  both  programs  are  similar  to  most 
of  the  engineering  curricula.  The  exception  is  Physics  31, 
which  provides  the  student  with  an  introduction  to  quantum 
mechanics  before  he  begins  the  intensive  intermediate  level 
sequences.  However,  Physics  31  is  not  a  prerequisite  for  the 
junior  level  course.  A  strong  student  in  one  of  the  engineering 
or  science  curricula  could  therefore  transfer  into  physics  as 
late  as  the  beginning  of  the  junior  year  with  relatively  little 
difficulty. 

A  liberal  number  of  electives  provides  flexibility  in  allow- 
ing the  curriculum  to  be  adapted  to  the  needs  and  interests  of 
the  individual  student.  Those  whose  interests  lie  in  the 
theoretical  or  analytical  aspects,  or  who  are  preparing  for 
graduate  study  in  physics,  elect  additional  courses  in  mathe- 
matics and  physics.  Those  who  are  interested  in  some  inter- 
disciplinary field  will  choose  some  of  their  electives  from 
other  departments.  To  name  a  few  possibilities,  we  mention: 
biophysics,  chemical  physics,  geophysics,  materials  science, 
and  physical  oceanography.  Students  interested  in  preparing 
for  scientific  work  in  these  areas  would  probably  elect  some 
or  all  of  the  courses  suggested  below: 

Biophysics: 

Biol  21  Principles  of  Biology  (3) 

Biol  28  Genetics  (3) 

Biol  35  Microbiology  (3) 

Biol  320  Cell  Physiology  (3) 

Chem  51  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 
Chem  90  or  194  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  371  Elements  of  Biochemistry  (3) 


Chemical  Physics: 

Chem  90 
Chem  191 
Chem  381 
Phys  363 
Phys  369 


Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Physical  Chemistry  (3) 

Radiation  and  Structure  (3) 

Physics  of  Solids  (3) 

Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 


Geophysics: 

Geol  1 
Geol  23 
Geol  301 
Geol  304 
Phys  363 


Principles  of  Geology  (3) 
Structural  Geology  (3) 
Introduction  to  Geophysics  (3) 
Topics  in  Geophysics  (3) 
Physics  of  Solids  (3) 


Materials  Science: 

Met  91  Elements  of  Materials  Science  (3) 

Met  218  Mechanical  Behavior  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  315  Introduction  to  Physical  Ceramics  (3) 

Met  316  Physical  Properties  of  Materials  (3) 

Met  317  Imperfections  in  Crystals  (3) 

Phys  363  Physics  of  Solids  (3) 

Phys  369  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Physical  Oceanography: 

Geol  363  Introduction  to  Oceanography  (3) 

Mech  323  Fluid  Mechanics  of  the  Ocean  and  Atmo- 

sphere (3) 
Chem  334  Chemical  Oceanography  (3) 

Phys  365  Physics  of  Fluids  (3) 

Phys  366  Ocean  Physics  (3) 

Undergraduate  Courses 

11.  Introductory  Physics  I  (4) 

Kinematics,  frames  of  reference,  laws  of  motion  in  New- 
tonian theory  and  in  special  relativity,  conservation  laws,  as 
applied  to  the  mechanics  of  mass  points;  temperature,  heat 
and  the  laws  of  thermodynamics;  kinetic  theory  of  gases. 
Two  lectures  and  two  recitations  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Math.  21,  31  or  41,  previously  or  concurrently. 

12.  Introductory  Physics  Laboratory  I  (1) 

A  laboratory  course  to  be  taken  concurrently  with  Physics 
11.  Experiments  in  mechanics,  heat,  and  D.C.  electrical  cir- 
cuits. One  three-hour  laboratory  period  per  week. 

13.  General  Physics  (3) 

Introduction  to  electricity  and  magnetism,  waves,  optics,  and 
atomic  physics,  intended  for  students  in  the  colleges  of  Arts 
and  Science  and  of  Business  and  Economics.  Prerequisites: 
Phys.  11  and  Math.  21,  31,  or  41. 

14.  General  Physics  Laboratory  (1) 

A  laboratory  to  accompany  Physics  13.  Prerequisites:  Phys. 
12;  Phys.  13  preferably  concurrently. 


'Students  are  to  be  forewarned  that  admission  to  graduate 
schools  requires  a  minimum  grade  average.  The  level  depends 
on  the  particular  graduate  school,  but  a  typical  minimum  is 
approximately  a  "B"  average.  Also,  many  graduate  schools 
require  a  reading  knowledge  of  a  modern  foreign  language. 


21.  Introductory  Physics  II  (4) 

A  continuation  of  Physics  1 1.  Electrostatics  and  magneto- 
statics;  D.C.  circuits;  Maxwell's  equations;  waves;  physical 
and  geometrical  optics;  introduction  to  modern  physics.  Two 
lectures  and  two  recitations  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Phys. 
11,  and  Math.  23,  32,  or  44  previously  or  concurrently. 


Physics     229 


22.  Introductory  Physics  I  aboratory  II  (1) 
A  laboratory  course  to  be  taken  concurrently  with  Physics 
21 .  One  three  hour  laboratory  period  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Physics  1  2. 

31.  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 
Experimental  basis  and  historical  dcvclopmeni  ol  quantum 
mechanics;  the  Schrodinger  equation;  one  dimensional  prob 
lems;  angular  momentum  and  the  hydrogen  atom;  many 

electron  systems;  spectra;  selected  applications.  Three  lei 
tures  per  week.  Prerequisites;  Phys.  21  .  and  Math.  2i>s.  pre 
viously  or  concurrently. 

32.  Modern  Physics  Laboratory  (1) 

Laboratory  experiments  dealing  with  quantum  physics,  and 
illustrative  of  material  covered  in  Physics  31.  Prerequisite: 
Phys.  21.  One  three-hour  laboratory  period  per  week. 

90.  Electrical  Phenomena  (1) 

Laboratory  studies  of  elementary  electric  and  magnetic 
effects.  Elementary  laboratory  techniques.  Prerequisite: 
Plus.  21,  22  or  13.  14. 

171.  Physics  Proscminar  (1) 

Discussion  of  current  problems  in  physics.  Intended  for 

seniors  majoring  in  the  field. 

191.  Laboratory  Techniques  (2) 

Thermometric,  calorimetric  and  vacuum  techniques.  Ad- 
vanced electrical  measurements.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  21,  22  or 
13,  14. 


216.  Particles  and  Fields  II  (3) 

Generalized  coordinates;  variational  methods  in  theoretical 

physii  ■■;  i In    I  agrangi.in  and  Haniiltonian;  basi cpts  of 

the  spci  i.il  theory  ol  relativity;  survey  ol  the  general  theory 
of  relativity.  Prerequisite:  Phj  s.  2  1  5. 

252.  Optics  (3) 

Wave  theory  <<i  light,  interference,  diffraction,  polarization. 

Prerequisites:  Math.  23  and  Phys.  21  or  13. 

254.  Optus  Laboratory  (2) 

I  Iptical  instruments  and  techniques.  Examination  of  phenom- 
ena, of  measuring  procedures,  and  of  light  sources  and  re- 
cording devices.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  21  or  13. 

266.  Modem  Physics  (3) 

General  foundations  of  quantum  theory,  special  chcory  of 
relativity,  atomic  theory  of  origin  of  spectra,  wave  mechan- 
ics, atomic  and  nuclear  structure,  interaction  of  particles  with 
matter,  radioactivity,  nuclear  structure.  Intended  for  non- 
physics  majors.  Prerequisites:  Math.  205,  and  Phys.  21  or  13. 

281.  Basic  Physics  I  (3) 

A  course  designed  especially  for  secondary  school  teachers  in 
the  master  teacher  program.  Presupposing  a  background  of 
two  semesters  of  college  mathematics  through  differential 
and  integral  calculus  and  of  two  semesters  of  college  physics, 
the  principles  ot  physics  are  presented  with  emphasis  on  their 
fundamental  nature  rather  than  on  their  applications.  Open 
only  to  secondary  school  teachers  and  those  planning  to  un- 
dertake teaching  of  secondary  school  physics. 


192.  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  (1-2) 

Laboratory  experiments  in  modern  physics  designed  to  intro- 
duce students  to  measuring  techniques  and  phenomena  of 
current  interest.  Work  is  of  a  project  nature,  and  the  student 
is  placed  largely  on  his  own  initiative.  Intended  for  seniors 
majoring  in  the  field. 

193.  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  (1-2) 

Continuation  of  Phys.  192.  Intended  for  seniors  majoring  in 
the  field. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

212.  Electricity  and  Magnetism  I  (3) 

Electrostatics,  magnetostatics,  and  electromagnetic  induc- 
tion. Prerequisites:  Phys.  21  or  13;  and  Math.  205  previously 
or  concurrently. 

213.  Electricity  and  Magnetism  II  (3) 

Maxwell's  equations;  electromagnetic  waves  with  applications 
to  optics.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  212. 

215.  Particles  and  Fields  I  (3) 

Aims  and  fundamental  concepts  of  theoretical  physics; 
foundations  of  mechanics  of  mass  points,  systems  of  parti- 
cles, and  continuous  media;  waves;  fields;  conservation  laws. 
Prerequisites:  Math.  205,  Phys.  21,  or  Phys.  13  previously  or 
concurrently. 


282.  Basic  Physics  II  (3) 
Continuation  of  Phys.  281. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Physics 


(1-3) 


340.  Heat,  Thermodynamics  and  Pyrometry  (3) 
Basic  principles  of  heat,  thermodynamics  and  kinetic  theory 
of  gases  with  emphasis  on  physical  systems.  Prerequisites: 
Phys.  21  or  13  and  Math.  23,  32  or  44. 

362.  Atomic  and  Molecular  Structure  (3) 

Structure  of  atoms  and  molecules,  especially  as  related  to 
their  spectra.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  31  or  Chem.  191. 

363.  Physics  of  Solids  (3) 

Introduction  to  the  theory  of  solids  with  particular  reference 
to  the  physics  of  metals.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  362,  or  Met. 
361,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

364.  Nuclear  Physics  (3) 

Properties  of  stable  and  unstable  nuclei  and  experimental 
methods  of  measuring  them;  radioactive  decay;  detectors  of 
nuclear  radiation;  types  of  nuclear  reaction  and  methods  of 
producing  them;  cosmic  rays.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  369. 


230     Physics 


365.  Physics  of  Fluids  (3) 

Basic  concepts  of  classical  fluid  mechanics;  continuum  and 
molecular  approaches;  shock  waves;  high  temperature  proper- 
ties of  reacting  ideal  gases;  plasma  dynamics.  Prerequisites: 
Phys.  213  and  340. 

366.  Ocean  Physics  (3) 

Underwater  sound  and  optics,  thermodynamics  of  the 
oceans,  other  topics  in  physical  oceanography  such  as  cur- 
rents, tides,  and  waves.  Prerequisites:  Math.  205  and  Phys.  21 
or  13. 

367.  Introduction  to  Molecular  Biophysics  (3) 

A  development  of  the  molecular  basis  of  life  in  terms  of 
physical  principles,  including  applications  of  selected  physical 
techniques  to  problems  in  molecular  biology.  Prerequisites: 
Phys.  21  or  13. 

369.  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

Principles  of  quantum  mechanics;  applications  to  atoms  and 

molecules.  Prerequisites:  Phys.  31,  216,  Math.  205. 

372.  Special  Topics  in  Physics  (1-3) 

Special  topics  in  physics  not  sufficiently  covered  in  the 

general  courses.  Lecture  and  recitations  or  conferences. 

For  Graduates 

The  department  of  physics  has  concentrated  its  research 
activities  within  several  fields  of  physics,  with  the  conse- 
quence that  a  number  of  projects  are  available  in  each  area. 
Current  departmental  research  activities  include  the 
following: 

Solid  State  Physics  (Experimental).  Optical  properties  of 
insulators,  defects  in  insulators,  electron  paramagnetic  reso- 
nance, properties  of  thin  films. 

Solid  State  Physics  (Theoretical).  Energy  band  calculations  in 
insulators,  excited  states  and  lifetimes  of  defects,  properties 
of  impurities  in  insulators. 

Molecular  Biophysics.  Magnetic  resonance  studies  of  nucleic 
acid  derivatives. 

Ocean  Physics.  Optical  absorption  and  luminescence  of  or- 
ganic and  inorganic  materials  in  sea  water  and  ice. 

Plasma  Spectroscopy.  Collisional  and  collisionless  phenomena 
of  very  dense  plasmas. 

Nuclear  Theory.  The  few  nucleon  problem,  nuclear  structure 
theory. 

Physics  of  Fluids.  Transition  from  laminar  to  turbulent  flow 
in  boundary  layers,  microscopic  fluctuations  in  a  flow, 
shock-induced  reactions  in  gases,  energy  transfers,  relaxation 
times,  lifetimes,  and  phase  transitions  at  liquid-vapor  inter- 
faces. 

Statistical  Physics.  Kinetic  theory,  transport  in  plasmas  with 
strong  magnetic  fields,  statistical  basis  of  hydrodynamics, 
non-linear  processes. 


Elementary  Particles  (Experimental).  Extensive  air  shower 
studies  and  high-energy  multiple  particle  production  at  the 
AGS. 

Elementary  Particles  (Theoretical).  Properties  of  leptons,  the 
vector  boson,  methods  for  handling  unrenormalized  field 
theories,  electromagnetic  interactions. 

Laser  Physics.  Construction  of  gas  lasers  and  studies  of  their 
characteristics;  use  of  gas  lasers  in  determination  of  oscillator 
strengths  and  atomic  parameters;  mode  structure;  holo- 
graphy. 

Candidates  for  advanced  degrees  normally  will  have  com- 
pleted, before  beginning  their  graduate  studies,  the  require- 
ments for  a  baccalaureate  degree  with  a  major  in  physics, 
including  advanced  mathematics  beyond  differential  and 
integral  calculus.  Students  lacking  the  equivalent  of  this  pre- 
paration will  make  up  deficiencies  in  addition  to  taking  the 
specified  work  for  the  degree  sought. 

Doctoral  candidates  may  be  required  by  their  thesis  com- 
mittee to  demonstrate  a  reading  knowledge  of  one  langu- 
age, usually  chosen  from  French,  German  or  Russian.  Some 
graduate  work  in  mathematics  is  usually  required;  and  certain 
advanced  courses  in  other  fields,  notably  mechanics,  metal- 
lurgy, and  materials  science,  electrical  engineering,  and 
chemistry,  may  be  included  in  a  graduate  program.  Further 
details  regarding  the  special  requirements  for  degrees  in 
physics  may  be  obtained  on  application  to  the  chairman  of 
the  department.  At  least  eight  semester  hours  of  general  col- 
lege physics  using  calculus  are  required  for  admission  to  all 
200-  and  300-level  courses.  Additional  prerequisites  for  indi- 
vidual courses  are  noted  in  the  course  descriptions.  Admis- 
sion to  400  level  generally  is  predicated  on  satisfactory  com- 
pletion of  corresponding  courses  in  the  200  and  300  groups 
or  their  equivalent. 

Special  departmental  facilities  for  teaching  and  research 
include  six  shock  tubes  with  advanced  instrumentation; 
optical  and  cryogenic  equipment  for  solid  state  studies;  mag- 
netic resonance  equipment.  Facilities  of  the  Materials  Re- 
search Center  are  available,  including  crystal  preparation 
equipment,  electron  microscope  facilities,  and  light  scattering 
equipment.  Extensive  use  is  made  for  both  teaching  and  re- 
search of  the  Computing  Center,  which  includes  a  CDC  6400 
computer. 

Graduate  Courses 

420.  Theoretical  Physics  (3) 

This  and  the  three  courses,  Phys.  421,  422,  and  423,  cover  the 
classical  theory  of  particles  and  fields.  Physics  420  includes 
the  variational  methods  of  classical  methanics,  methods  of 
Hamilton  and  Lagrange,  canonical  transformations, 
Hamilton-Jacobi  theory. 

421.  Theoretical  Physics  (3) 

Theory  of  elasticity;  fluid  dynamics;  tensor  analysis;  electro- 
statics and  magnetostatics.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  420. 


Physics     231 


i  !  '    Vdvanccd  rhcoretical  Physics    I) 

tromagnctic  radiation;  dynamics  ol  i  harged  parti(  Ics; 
multipolc  fields;  special  thcorj  ol  rclativit)  and  covarianl 
formulation  of  electrodynamics.  Prerequisite;  Pliys.  421. 

423.  Advanced  Theoretical  Physic       I 

id)  namics  in  anisotropic  media;  physic  al  optic  s;  thcofy 
of  diffraction  and  application  to  holography;  applications  of 
clectrod)  namics  m  various  fields  of  physics.  Prerequisite; 
Phys.  I 

424.  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

General  principles  ol  quantum  theor)  ;  approximation 
methods;  spectra;  symmetry  laws;  theory  ol  scattering.  Prere 
quisite:  Pins.  )69  oi  equivalent. 

425.  Quantum  Mechanics  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Phys.  424.  Rclativistic  quantum  tlicory  of 
the  electron;  theory  of  radiation. 


465.  Nuclcai  and  Elementary  Particle  Physics  (3) 
Nuclei i  structure  and  phenomena;  interactions  among  cle 
men  tar)  partic  les  o  i  >>  I  methods  ol  studying  them. 

467.  Nuclcai  Theory  (3) 

Theory  ol  low  energy  nuclear  phenomena  within  the  frame 

work  ol  non  relativistic  quantum  mechanics. 

471.  (Mcch.  411)  Continuum  Mechanics  (1-3) 

An  introduction  will  he  given  to  the  non-linear  continuum 
theories  of  the  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids,  This  will  in- 
clude a  discussion  of  the  mechanical  and  thci  modynamic 
bases  of  the  subject,  as  well  as  the  use  of  invariancc  principles 
in  formulating  constitutive  equations.  Applications  of  the 
nonlinear  theories  to  specific  problems  will  be  given. 

472.  Special  Topics  in  Physics  (1-3) 

Selected  topics  not  sufficiently  covered  in  the  more  general 
courses.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 


42S.  Methods  of  Mathematical  Physics  (3) 

The  equations  ot  theoretical  physics  and  the  methods  ot  their 

solution. 

429.  Methods  of  Mathematical  Physics  (3) 
Continuation  of  Phys.  428. 

431.  Theory  of  Solids  (3) 

Advanced  topics  in  the  theory  of  the  electronic  structure  of 
solids.  Many-electron  theory.  Theory  of  transport  phenom- 
ena. Magnetic  properties,  optical  properties.  Superconductivi- 
ty. Point  imperfections.  Desirable  preparation:  Phys.  363  and 
Phys.  424. 


474.  Seminar  in  Modern  Physics  (3) 

Discussion  of  important  advances  in  experimental  physics. 

475.  Seminar  in  Modern  Physics  (3) 

Discussion  of  important  advances  in  theoretical  physics. 

491.  Research  (3) 

Research  problems  in  experimental  or  theoretical  physics. 

492.  Research  (3) 

Continuation  of  Phys.  491.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 


434.  Solids  and  Radiation  (3) 

Phenomena  in  solids  resulting  from  interaction  with  electro- 
magnetic radiation  or  charged  particles.  Current  theories  of 
energy  adsorption,  transport,  and  emission.  Prerequisite: 
Phys.  363  or  equivalent. 

442.  Statistical  Mechanics  (3) 

General  principles  of  statistical  mechanics  with  application  to 
thermodynamics  and  the  equilibrium  properties  of  matter. 
Prerequisites:  Phys.  340  and  369. 

443.  Statistical  Mechanics  (3) 

A  continuation  of  Phys.  442.  Applications  of  kinetic  theory 
and  statistical  mechanics  to  non-equilibrium  processes;  non- 
equilibrium  thermodynamics.  Prerequisite:  Phys.  442. 

462.  Theories  of  Elementary  Particle  Interactions  (3) 
Relativistic  quantum  theory  with  applications  to  the  strong, 
electromagnetic  and  weak  interactions  of  elementary  parti- 
cles. Prerequisite:  Physics  425. 


232     Physics 


Psychology 


Professors 

Arthur  L.  Brody,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Joseph  M.  Brozek,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professors 

Martin  L.  Richter,  Ph.D. 
George  K.  Shortess,  Ph.D. 
Sidney  I.  Stecher,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

Edwin  J.  Kay,  Ph.D. 
Roger  C.  Loeb,  Ph.D. 
Donald  A.  Mankin,  Ph.D. 
William  Newman,  Ph.D. 

Adjunct  Professors 

Herbert  Rubenstein,  Ph.D. 
Mervin  P.  Smolinsky,  Ph.D. 


There  are  two  major  programs  available  in  psychology.  The 
B.A.  program  is  in  the  liberal  arts  tradition  with  the  student 
free  to  include  courses  from  a  wide  variety  of  academic  disci- 
plines and  with  maximum  freedom  of  course  selection  in 
psychology.  With  a  judicious  selection  of  courses,  students 
can  prepare  themselves  for  careers  in  areas  for  which  psycho- 
logy is  a  desirable  and  relevant  major,  e.g.,  law,  social  work, 
nursing,  or  special  education. 

The  B.S.  program  stresses  preparation  in  mathematics  and 
science  with  an  emphasis  on  experimental  psychology.  This 
program  is  intended  for  the  student  who  plans  on  graduate 
study  in  psychology  (either  experimental  or  clinical)  or  medi- 
cine or  dentistry.  Students  in  the  B.A.  program  who  decide 
to  pursue  graduate  study  are  encouraged  to  use  the  B.S.  pro- 
gram as  a  guide  in  the  selection  of  courses. 

The  Bachelor  of  Arts  Major 

Required  Major  Courses 

Psychology:  24  semester  hours  with  at  least  12  semester 
hours  in  courses  numbered  100  or  higher. 

Additional  Required  Courses 

College  of  Arts  and  Science  distribution  requirements. 
Elective  courses  to  bring  semester  hour  total  to  120. 


The  Bachelor  of  Science  Major 

Required  Major  Courses 

Psych  3  Psychology  as  a  Natural  Science  (3) 

Psych  4  Psychology  as  a  Social  Science  (3) 

Psych  9  Statistical  Analysis  (3) 

Psych  11  General  Experimental  Psychology  (4) 

Psych  51  Elementary  Quantitative  Psychology  (3) 

Psych  311  History  of  Modern  Psychology  (3) 

Psych  371,  372  Learning  and  Laboratory  (4) 

Psych  373,  374  Sensory  Processes  and  Laboratory  (4) 

Psych  375,  376  Physiological  psychology  and  Laboratory  (4) 


Additional  Required  Courses 

Engl  1  Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Engl  2,  10,  14,  or  16      Composition  and  Literature  (3) 

Math  21,  22,  23  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus  (12) 

or 
Math  31,  32  Calculus  (8) 

or 
Math  41 ,  42,  43,  44      BMSS  Calculus,  Probability,  Linear 

Algebra,  Calculus  (12) 
Biol  21,  22  Principles  of  Biology  and  Laboratory  (4) 

Chem  21,  22         Introductory  Chemical  Principles  and 

Laboratory  (5) 
Phys  11,  12  Introductory  Physics  I  and  Laboratory  (5) 

Phil  selection  of  a  philosophy  of  science  course  (3) 

Plus  12  semester  hours  selected  from  the  following: 

Math  105  Computer  Programming  (3) 

Math  205  Linear  Methods  (3) 

Math  219  Principles  of  Analysis  I  (3) 

Math  220  Principles  of  Analysis  II  (3) 

Math  231  Statistical  Inference  (3) 

Math  309  Theory  of  Probability  (3) 

Math  310  Probability  and  its  Applications  (3) 

Math  334  Mathematical  Statistics  (3) 

Math  362  Computer  Languages  (3) 

Biol  28  Genetics  (3) 

Biol  306  Ecology  (3) 

Biol  (Geol)  317  Evolution  (3) 

Biol  320  Physiology  (3) 

Biol  324  Animal  Behavior  (3) 

Chem  51  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  52  Organic  Chemistry  (3) 

Chem  (Biol)  371  Elements  of  Biochemistry  (3) 

Chem  (Biol)  372  Advanced  Biochemistry  (3) 

Phys  21,  22  Introductory  Physics  II  and  Laboratory  (5) 

IS  201  Computers  and  Language  (3) 

IS  202  Computers  and  Society  (3) 

IS  302  (Psych  320)       Psycholinguistics  (3) 

IS  361  Theory  of  Formal  Grammars  (3) 

or  other  courses  with  the  approval  of  the  chairman  of  the 
department.  (It  is  recommended  that  these  12  semester  hours 


Psychology     233 


m  cntraccd  in  an  area,  c.^.,  mathematics,  probability  and 
statistics,  biology,  biochemistry,  compute! 

Plus  42  semester  hours  ol  clectives.  16  si  mi  ;tci  hours  if 
Math,  31  and  32  .ire  taken.) 

( kidergraduate  (  ourses 

v  Psychology  as  .i  N.mir.il  Science  (3) 

Introduction  to  psychology  .is  .i  science  ol  behavior.  Em 

phasis  on  principles  ol  sensation,  perception,  maturation, 

learning,  motivation,  emotion  .md  physiological  bases  ol  be 

havior. 

I.  Psychology  as  a  Social  Science  (3) 

Introduction  to  psychology  as  a  science  of  behavior.  Em- 
phasis on  principles  of  human  development,  intelligence, 
abilities,  perception,  motivation  and  learning,  personality 
theory  and  social  psychology. 

9.  Statistical  Analysis  (3) 

An  integrated  presentation  of  the  basic  methods  of  evaluating 

data  in  psychological  research. 

II.  General  Experimental  Psychology  (4) 

A  survey  of  basic  data  and  research  methods  in  experimental 
psychology  with  emphasis  on  the  areas  of  learning  and  psy- 
chophysics:  laboratory  exercises  and  an  independent  research 
project.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

21.  (S.R.  21)  Social  Psychology  (3) 
For  description,  see  S.R.  21 . 

51.  Elementary  Quantitative  Psychology  (3) 
Quantitative  analysis  of  behavior,  including  perception, 
choice  and  preference,  conditioning,  memory,  and  problem- 
solving. 

101.  Psychological  Tests  and  Measures  (3) 
Psychological  tests  of  intelligence  and  personality  with  princi- 
ples of  measurement  and  test  construction  emphasized. 

107.  Developmental  Psychology  (3) 

Theories  and  research  dealing  with  the  development  of  the 
human  organism.  The  course  of  development  will  be  traced 
from  fetus  to  adolescent.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

121.  Encountering  Self  and  Others  (3) 
An  experientially-oriented  course  to  facilitate  personal 
growth  and  develop  a  fuller  awareness  of  personal  function- 
ing and  interpersonal  perception  and  communication.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  instructor. 

160.  Independent  Study  (1-3) 

Readings  on  topics  selected  in  consultation  with  a  staff  mem- 
ber. Prerequisites:  Psych.  3  or  4  and  consent  of  chairman  of 
department.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 


I  (.  I .  Independent  Research    i    I 

Rcscan  h  in  areas  selected  in  consultation  with  a  staff  me  in 
her.  Prerequisites:  Psy<  h.  *  or  I,  II.  and  i  onsent  of  chairman 
of  department.  May  be  repeated  foi  credit. 

162.  Psychological  Field  Work  (3) 

Work-study  practice  including  supervised  experience  in  one 
oi  several  local  agencies.  Development  ol  familiarity  with  the 
operations  of  the  agem  v  and  working  with  individual 
patients  or  students.  Prerequisites:  Psych.  3  or  4  and  consent 
of  instructor.  May  be  repeated  lor  credit. 

/  oi    \dvanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

201.  Industrial  Psychology  (3) 

The  application  of  psychological  concepts  and  methods  to 
business  and  industry.  Includes  personnel  selection,  place- 
ment and  training:  studies  of  work  environment,  motivation 
and  morale;  consumer  research  and  advertising.  Prerequisite: 
Psych.  3  or  4. 

251.  Psychological  Perspectives  in  Technological  Society  (3) 
The  relationship  between  technology  and  the  problems  of 
society  with  emphasis  on  the  social  and  psychological  envi- 
ronment. Includes  problems  of  work  and  leisure,  values  in 
post-industrial  society,  futuristics,  and  implications  of  tech- 
nological decisions.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Psychology  —    —  (1-3) 

301.  Psychological  Principles  in  Systems  Design  (3) 
Experimental  psychology  as  applied  to  the  optimal  design  of 
machines,  tasks  and  environments,  including  a  survey  of 
human  capacities,  limitations  and  requirements  in  systems, 
traditional  areas  of  engineering  psychology  in  man-machine 
systems  and  considerations  of  man  in  social  and  environmen- 
tal systems.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

303.  Mathematical  Models  in  Psychology  (3) 
The  application  of  mathematics  in  psychology,  including 
models  for  psychophysics,  learning  acquisition  curves,  dis- 
crimination learning,  concept  formation  and  probability 
learning.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  11. 

306.  Psychopathology  (3) 

Theories  of  abnormal  behavior  and  its  development.  Systema- 
tic analysis  of  psychopathological  syndromes  and  their  re- 
mediation. Lectures  supplemented  by  observations  at  the 
Allentown  State  Hospital.  Prerequisites:  Psych.  3  or  4,  and  6 
additional  credit  hours  of  psychology. 

307.  Perception-Cognition  (3) 

Processes  by  which  sensory  inputs  are  transformed,  reduced, 
elaborated,  stored,  recovered  and  used.  Contemporary 
theories  of  perception  and  memory,  psycholinguistics,  com- 
puter simulation  of  cognitive  processes,  information  process- 
ing models,  and  concept  learning  and  formation.  Prerequisite: 
Psych.  3  or  4. 


234     Psychology 


311.  History  of  Modern  Psychology  (3) 

History  of  psychology,  with  emphasis  on  the  emergence  and 
growth  of  scientific  study  of  behavior.  Includes  the  readings 
of  primary  sources  and  the  autobiographies  of  the  major  con- 
tributors to  the  field.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or4. 

320.  (I.S.  302)  Psycholinguistics  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  I.S.  302. 

331.  Humanistic  Psychology  (3) 

The  literature  of  and  metaphors  underlying  the  humanistic 
point  of  view  in  psychology.  These  "models  of  man"  will  be 
contrasted  with  models  underlying  other  modes  of  psycho- 
logical inquiry.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

361.  Personality  (3) 

Survey  of  basic  theoretical  and  research  techniques  used  to 
conceptualize  and  assess  personality.  Includes  analytic  and 
learning  theory  and  such  methods  as  interviewing,  rating 
scales,  intelligence  tests  and  projective  tests.  Prerequisites: 
Psych.  3  or  4,  and  3  additional  credit  hours  in  psychology. 

371.  Learning  (3) 

Principles  of  learning  with  emphasis  on  reinforcement,  dis- 
crimination, motivation,  verbal  learning  and  memory.  Critical 
evaluation  of  classical  and  contemporary  theories  of  learning. 
Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

372.  Learning  Laboratory  (1) 

Experimentation  on  the  learning  process  utilizing  animal  and 
human  subjects.  Prerequisites:  Psych.  11;  Psych.  371,  pre- 
viously or  concurrently. 

373.  Sensory  Processes  (3) 

Receptor  processes  of  vision,  audition,  touch,  taste  and  smell 
are  considered  with  particular  emphasis  on  problems  of  sen- 
sory intensity,  sensory  discrimination  functions  and  percep- 
tual processes.  Quantitative  methods  are  stressed. 
Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4. 

374.  Sensory  Processes  Laboratory  (1) 

Laboratory  exercises  applying  quantitative  methods  to  the 
study  of  sensory  processes.  Prerequisites:  Psych.  11;  Psych. 
373,  previously  or  concurrently. 

375.  Physiological  Psychology  (3) 

The  physiological  basis  of  behavior,  both  human  and  animal. 
Particular  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  neural  mechanisms  in- 
volved. Prerequisites:  Psych.  3  or  4;  8  semester  hours  of 
physics,  chemistry  or  biology. 

376.  Physiological  Psychology  Laboratory  (1) 

A  survey  of  techniques  in  physiological  psychology.  Prerequi- 
site: Psych.  375  previously  or  concurrently. 


381.  Psychological  Testing  (3) 

Psychological  tests  of  intelligence,  achievement,  and  person- 
ality with  emphasis  on  applications  in  educational  situations. 
Principles  of  measurement  and  test  construction  stressed. 
Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4,  or  consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. Open  only  to  graduate  students  in  the  School  of 
Education. 

382.  Child  Psychology  (3) 

A  systematic  analysis  of  the  critical  periods  of  development 
from  infancy  through  adolescence.  Alternate  theories  and 
recent  research  will  be  stressed.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4,  or 
consent  of  chairman  of  department.  Open  only  to  graduate 
students  in  the  School  of  Education. 

383.  Personality  (3) 

Review  and  analysis  of  psychological  concepts  and  data  rele- 
vant to  the  development  and  functioning  of  personality. 
Comparison  and  critical  examination  of  the  major  historical 
schools  of  personality  theory.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  3  or  4,  or 
consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department.  Open  only  to 
graduate  students  in  the  School  of  Education. 

For  Graduates 

Graduate  study  in  psychology  at  Lehigh  University  is  design- 
ed to  educate  a  limited  number  of  students  for  careers  in 
teaching  and  research.  There  is  an  emphasis  on  independent 
study  and  research.  A  student-faculty  ratio  of  approximately 
two  to  one,  makes  it  possible  for  all  students  to  establish  a 
close  working  relationship  with  the  faculty .  Programs  are 
available  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  and  D.A.  (Doctor  of  Arts)  de- 
grees. The  Ph.D.  program  is  in  experimental  psychology  with 
major  concentration  in  the  area  of  learning  or  visual  science. 
Additional  opportunities  for  interdisciplinary  work  exist  in 
quantitative  methods,  engineering  psychology,  and  psycho- 
linguistics.  The  D.  A.  program  is  designed  as  preparation  for  a 
career  in  college  teaching  of  experimental  psychology  at 
two-year  and  four-year  colleges. 

The  beginning  student  is  required  to  take  (1)  Proseminar, 
an  intensive  one-semester  course  covering  topics  in  experi- 
mental psychology,  (2)  Analysis  and  Design  of  Experiments, 
a  two-semester  course  in  probability,  statistics,  and  research 
methodology,  and  (3)  Research,  an  apprentice  program  in 
which  the  student  works  with  a  faculty  member  on  a  current 
research  project.  A  required  master's  thesis  may  evolve  from 
the  apprentice  research.  An  evaluation  of  each  student  is 
made  at  the  end  of  the  first  year,  based  on  examinations  in 
Proseminar  and  Analysis  and  Design  of  Experiments.  (A 
student  coming  to  the  department  with  a  master's  degree  is 
permitted  to  take  the  examinations  without  taking  these 
courses.)  Evaluation  is  also  based  on  progress  in  research  and 
performance  in  other  courses. 

Each  student's  program  is  tailored  to  his  special  interests 
with  the  student  selecting  from  a  variety  of  psychology 
courses.  A  required  outside  minor  consists  of  integrated 
course  work  offered  by  a  department  other  than  psychology, 
relevant  to  the  specialization  of  the  student.  There  are  no 
foreign  language  requirements. 


Psychology     235 


A  general  examination  is  administered  to  .ill  candidates 
for  .1  doctoral  degree  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  third  year. 
This  is  intended  as  an  evaluation  of  the  student's  ability  to 
organize,  write  and  speak  knowledgeably  on  the  content, 
methodology,  theory  and  current  issues  in  experimental  psy- 
chology. In  addition,  there  is  an  oral  final  examination  focus- 
ing on  the  Ph.D.  dissertation  or  D.A.  project. 

The  Ph.D.  specialization  in  learning  consists  of  investiga- 
tion of  both  human  and  animal  learning.  The  facilities  for 
research  include  housing  for  different  experimental  animals, 
electrical  and  woodworking  shops,  experimental  cubicles, 
electromechanical  and  solid  state  programming  and  recording 
equipment,  desk  calculators  and  a  University  computer.  Cur- 
rent ongoing  research  in  the  department  includes  animal  al- 
ternation learning,  human  information  integration,  and 
human  discrimination  learning. 

The  Ph.D.  specialization  in  visual  science  integrates  the 
physical  science  and  engineering  approach  with  that  of  the 
life  and  behavioral  sciences  for  a  better  understanding  of 
human  visual  interaction  with  the  environment.  Areas  of 
concern  include  neuroanatomical,  neurophysiological  and 
psychophysical  studies  of  vision,  optics  and  the  nature  of  the 
visual  stimulus,  modern  instrumentation  and  research  tech- 
niques, and  current  theory  and  data  of  the  visual  system. 

The  D.A.  program  differs  from  the  Ph.D.  program  in 
having  a  broader  distribution  of  graduate  courses,  training  in 
interpersonal  awareness,  an  extensive  research  project  dealing 
with  problems  of  teaching  and  learning  rather  than  a  disserta- 
tion, and  a  supervised  internship  in  college  teaching.  Training 
in  interpersonal  awareness  is  intended  to  break  down  the 
barriers  which  inhibit  direct  and  genuine  communication 
between  student  and  teacher.  The  research  project  may  deal 
with  innovative  approaches  to  curriculum  preparation  and 
presentation  such  as  course  structure,  curriculum  materials, 
development  of  new  educational  technologies,  and  novel 
means  of  communicating  psychological  concepts.  Teaching 
experience  includes  service  as  a  supervised  teaching  assistant 
in  courses  offered  at  Lehigh  University  and  a  supervised 
teaching  internship  outside  Lehigh  University. 

Applications  for  admission  and  financial  aid  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  department  of  psychology.  Completed  appli- 
cation forms  plus  transcripts,  letters  of  recommendation,  and 
a  report  of  scores  on  the  G.R.E.  aptitude  tests  and  advanced 
test  in  experimental  psychology,  should  be  returned  to  the 
Office  of  Admission  not  later  than  February  1  of  the  year 
of  admission.  Normally,  new  students  are  accepted  for  en- 
trance into  the  program  only  for  the  fall  semester.  Financial 
support  is  available  in  the  form  of  teaching  and  research 
assistantships,  fellowships  and  scholarships.  There  are  special 
fellowships  for  Black  students. 

The  minimum  prerequisites  for  admission  are  one  course 
in  each  of  the  following:  general  psychology,  experimental 
psychology  including  a  laboratory,  and  statistics,  plus  colla- 
teral courses  in  biology,  mathematics,  and  the  physical 
sciences.  Additional  course  work,  the  equivalent  of  a  major  in 
psychology,  is  desirable  but  not  necessary.  Promising  stu- 
dents with  majors  other  than  psychology,  especially  in  the 
biological  and  physical  sciences,  mathematics,  or  engineering, 
are  encouraged  to  apply. 


401 .  Proseminar  (6) 

Intensive  examination  of  the  classic  work  and  current  issues 
in  a  variety  of  areas  of  experimental  psychology. 

411.  Interpersonal  Awareness  (3) 

Designed  to  improve  awareness  of  personal  functioning  and 
to  enhance  interpersonal  perception  and  communication. 
Application  to  problems  of  teaching  and  learning.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

421.  Analysis  and  Design  ot  Experiments  (3) 

Set  theory,  probability  theory,  inferential  statistics,  para- 
metric and  non-parametric  statistical  tests  with  emphasis  on 
the  analysis  of  variance,  curve-fitting,  trend  analysis,  regres- 
sion analysis. 

422.  Analysis  and  Design  of  Experiments  (3) 
Continuation  of  Psych.  421.  Emphasis  on  experimental  de- 
sign. Prerequisite:  Psych.  421. 

423.  Seminar  in  Statistical  Methods  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  statistics  applied  to  psychological  research. 
May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

428.  Thesis  (3) 

Original  investigation  for  the  master's  thesis. 

429.  Thesis  (3) 

Continuation  of  Psych.  428. 

432.  Perception  (3) 

Evaluation  of  contemporary  research  and  theories  of  human 
perception. 

433.  Conditioning  and  Learning  (3) 

Coverage  of  a  variety  of  empirically  investigated  topics  and 
theories  in  learning. 

434.  Personality  (3) 

Traditional  theories  of  personality  will  be  reexamined  in  light 
of  current  research,  particularly  in  the  fields  of  learning  and 
neurophysiology. 

436.  Physiological  Psychology  (3) 

A  detailed  review  of  the  physiological  basis  of  behavior  with 
particular  emphasis  on  infrahuman  vertebrate  neural  systems. 
Prerequisite:  Psych.  365. 

438.  History  of  Psychology  (3) 

Interpretation  of  selected  works  of  authors  who  have  contri- 
buted significantly  to  the  growth  of  scientific  psychology. 

441.  Communicating  Psychological  Concepts  (3) 
How  to  organize  facts  and  ideas  into  broader  meaningful 
units  that  are  readily  communicable.  Includes  media  aids  and 
the  structured  experience  as  a  communication  aid.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor. 


236     Psychology 


448.  (I.S.  402)  Seminar  in  Psycholinguiscics  (3) 
For  course  description,  see  I.S.  402. 

450.  Special  Topics  in  Mathematical  Models  (3) 
Selected  topics  from  stimulus  sampling  theory,  game  and 
decision  theory,  continuous  response  models,  models  of 
memory.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

451.  Vision  (3) 

A  systematic  study  of  the  methods  and  chief  results  in  the 
study  of  visual  processes. 


476.  Special  Topics  in  Cognition  (3) 
Selected  topics  in  cognitive  processes  including  thinking, 
imagery,  daydreaming,  states  of  consciousness,  creativity,  and 
psychophysiological  correlates  of  these  processes.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit. 

478.  Special  Topics  in  Information  Processing  (3) 
A  topic  in  human  information  processing  with  problems 
drawn  from  the  areas  of  perception,  memory,  and  learning, 
e.g.,  short-term  memory,  selective  attention,  pattern  percep- 
tion, perceptual  learning.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 


453.  Advanced  Topics  in  Learning  (3) 

An  intensive  study  with  emphasis  on  current  research  of  dis- 
crimination learning,  avoidance  learning,  concept  learning, 
problem  solving,  or  verbal  learning.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit. 

455.  Topics  in  Engineering  Psychology  (3) 
Application  ot  experimental  psychology  to  man-machine 
systems,  e.g.,  sensory  load  and  performance;  perception  and 
motion;  man-computer  interaction;  system  development; 
psychophysiology  of  human  performance.  May  be  repeated 
for  credit. 

460.  Special  Study  (1-3) 

Study  of  some  special  topic  not  covered  in  the  regular  course 
offerings. 

461.  Research  (1-3) 

Original  research  not  connected  with  master's  or  doctoral 
thesis. 

463.  College  Teaching  of  Psychology  (1-3) 
Consideration  of  problems  in  the  preparation  and  presenta- 
tion of  college  courses  in  psychology;  ancillary  problems 
associated  with  the  profession  of  psychology;  practice  in 
teaching.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

465.  Teaching  Internship  (3-6) 

The  preparation,  teaching  and  grading  of  one  or  two  under- 
graduate courses  with  appropriate  supervision  by  Lehigh 
faculty.  Observation  and  evaluation  of  the  intern  via  class- 
room visits  and  videotapes.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

472.  Special  Topics  in  Physiological  Psychology  (3) 
Selected  topics  from  sensory  psychophysiology,  drive,  short- 
term  memory  mechanisms,  etc.  Prerequisite:  Psych.  365.  May 
be  repeated  for  credit. 

474.  Special  Topics  in  Developmental  Psychology  (3) 
Topics  selected  from  such  areas  as  socialization  and  the 
parent-child  interaction,  personality  disorders  in  childhood, 
moral  development  and  cognitive  development.  May  be  re- 
peated for  credit. 


Psychology     237 


Religion  Studies 


52.  Faiths  ol  the  Wcsi  (3) 

The  rist- .  development,  and  teachings  <>i  ludaisni, 

Christianity,  and  Islam. 


Pi  .'lessor 

A.  Roy  Eck.irdt.  Ph.D..  Chairman 

Assistant  Professor 

Hubert  L.  Flesher,  M.A. 

instructor 

Patricia  M.  Lyons,  M.A. 

Lecturer 

Alice  L.  Eckardt,  M.A. 


As  an  intrinsic  dimension  of  man's  culture,  religion  exerts 
abiding  influence  upon  human  thought  and  behavior.  This 
fact  comprises  the  rationale  for  the  study  of  religion  at 
Lehigh  University.  The  department  of  religion  studies  is  com- 
mitted to  forms  of  intellectuality  identical  with  those  pur- 
sued in  other  humanistic  and  scientific  disciplines.  Our  pur- 
pose is  to  help  complete  and  sustain  a  student's  liberal 
education.  In  addition,  the  scholarly  analysis  of  religion  com- 
prises one  foundation  for  a  mature  personal  and  social  faith. 

Courses  in  the  department  afford  a  comprehensive  under- 
standing ot  the  world's  major  religious  traditions  and  their 
contributions  to  human  culture.  The  curriculum  extends 
through  the  methodology  of  religion  study,  the  history  of 
religions  ("comparative  religion")  in  East  and  West,  biblical 
studies,  influential  theological  movements  and  issues,  and  the 
relating  ot  religion  to  contemporary  moral  and  social 
questions. 

When  this  catalog  went  to  press,  Lehigh  University  was  in 
the  process  of  implementing  a  major  program  in  religion 
studies.  Students  interested  in  such  a  major  are  advised  to 
consult  with  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

15.  Methods  and  Issues  (3) 

introduction  to  the  study  of  religions.  Emphasis  upon  alter- 
native methods  of  analyzing  religious  phenomena  and  upon 
such  major  issues  as  time  and  history,  "natural"  and  induced 
mystical  experience,  and  good  and  evil. 

51.  Faiths  of  the  Orient  (3) 

The  rise,  development,  and  teachings  of  Hinduism,  types  of 
Buddhism,  and  several  lesser-known  religions  of  India. 


ill.  Biblical  Studies  I  (3) 

Theological  examination  of  the  Old  Testament  writings,  with 
emphasis  upon  literary  historical  and  critical  problems.  The 
Exodus  tradition  and  the  Patriarchal  Period;  the  conquest  of 
the  Land;  the  development  and  dissolution  of  the  Monarchy; 
the  Prophetic  Movement;  the  Post  Exilic  Period;  the  Law; 
and  the  Temple  and  its  related  culture. 

1  12.  Biblical  Studies  II  (3) 

Literary-critical  and  theological  study  of  New  Testament 
writings,  with  emphasis  on  the  four  Gospels,  Acts,  and  the 
major  Epistles.  The  life  and  teachings  of  Jesus  and  of  Paul. 
The  theological  viewpoint  of  the  New  Testament  church. 

151.  The  Jewish-Christian  Encounter  (3) 

Analysis  of  relations  between  the  Jewish  community  and  the 
Christian  church  in  history  and  the  present.  Stress  upon 
moral  issues  such  as  antisemitism  and  upon  doctrinal  similari- 
ties and  differences  between  Judaism  and  Christianity.  Reli- 
gious and  sociopolitical  aspects  of  the  recstablishment  of  the 
State  of  Israel. 

152.  American  Religions  (3) 

The  historical  development  of  major  religious  groups  in  this 
country  from  colonial  times  to  the  present.    Their  place  in 
social  and  political  life.  Emphasis  upon  the  uniqueness  of 
American  religious  pluralism  and  of  the  church-state  relation- 
ship. 

161.  Current  Issues  in  Theology  I  (3) 

Major  twentieth-century  movements  in  Protestant  theology, 
understood  as  responses  to  the  problems  ot  modern  times. 
Study  of  such  theologians  as  Karl  Barth,  Dietrich  Bonhoeffer 
Rudolf  Bultmann,  James  H.  Cone,  Reinhold  Nicbuhr, 
Richard  Niebuhr,  and  Ian  T.  Ramsey.  Emphases  include  dc- 
mythologizing,  "the  death  of  God,"  liberalism  versus  conser- 
vatism, new  trends  in  hermeneutics,  and  the  ecumenical 
movement. 

162.  Current  Issues  in  Theology  II  (3) 

Major  twentieth-century  movements  in  Roman  Catholic  and 
Jewish  theology,  understood  as  responses  to  the  problems  of 
modern  times.  Study  of  such  theologians  as  Martin  Buber, 
Abraham  Heschcl,  Hans  Kung,  Jacques  Maritain,  and  Karl 
Rahner.  Current  issues  such  as  Vatican  Council  II  and  its 
aftermath,  and  "radical  Judaism." 

Vor  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

213.  Conflict  and  Conscience  I  (3) 

The  relating  of  religio-ethical  principles  to  major  moral  and 
social  issues  of  today,  with  the  aid  of  influential  contempo- 
rary theologians  and  movements.  Emphasis  upon  competing 
political,  social,  and  economic  systems,  revolution,  inter- 
national conflict,  and  the  rule  of  law. 


238      Religion  Studies 


214.  Conflicts  and  Conscience  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  Religion  Studies  213  {which  is  not  a  prere- 
quisite). Religious  and  racial  prejudice,  ecology,  medical- 
genetic-eugenic  ethics,  sex  and  marriage,  and  vocational 
decision -making. 


Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps 


261.  Seminar  in  World  Religions  (3) 

In-depth  study  of  selected  topics  within  Hinduism, 

Buddhism,  African  religions,  or  other  world  religions. 

272.  Religion  and  the  Arts  (3) 

Examination  of  religious  themes  in  literature,  film,  and  paint- 
ing, with  materials  drawn  from  both  the  Eastern  and  the 
Western  traditions. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Religion  Studies (1"3) 

302.  Seminar  in  Technology  and  Religious  Thought  (3) 
The  understanding  and  assessment  of  our  technological 
society  through  study  of  such  contemporary  thinkers  as  Ian 
Barbour,  Harvey  Cox,  Jacques  Ellul,  Pierre  Teilhard  de 
Chardin,  and  Paul  Tillich. 

313.  (I.R.  313)  Seminar  in  Religion  and  International  Affairs 

(3) 

From  the  standpoint  of  theological  understandings  of  man's 
nature  and  of  human  collective  life,  an  assessment  of  the 
nation-state,  of  the  role  of  power  in  international  affairs,  of 
national  sovereignty  and  internationalism,  and  of  war, 
pacifism,  and  alternative  methods  of  conflict-resolution. 

371.  Readings  in  Religion  (3) 

Selected  scholarship  in  religion,  particularly  for  students  with 
special  competence  or  interest  in  an  area  not  covered  by 
rostered  courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department  chair- 
man. 


Lehigh  University  offers  two  voluntary  Reserve  Officers' 
Training  Corps  programs  in  cooperation  with  the  United 
States  Government:  the  department  of  military  science  offers 
preparation  for  a  commission  in  the  U.S.  Army  while  the 
department  of  aerospace  studies  prepares  individuals  for  com- 
missioning in  the  U.S.  Air  Force. 

The  general  objective  of  both  the  Army  and  Air  Force 
programs  is  to  instill  in  each  student:  (1)  a  basic  understand- 
ing of  associated  professional  knowledge;  (2)  a  strong  sense 
of  personal  integrity  and  individual  responsibility;  (3)  an 
appreciation  of  the  requirements  of  national  security;  and  (4) 
an  opportunity  to  learn  and  develop  leadership  ability. 

Army  and  Air  Force  ROTC  course  credits  may  be  substi- 
tuted for  six  hours  of  electives  for  those  students  in  the  Col- 
lege of  Arts  and  Science  and  the  College  of  Business  and  Eco- 
nomics. Students  in  the  College  of  Engineering  may  substi- 
tute advanced  ROTC  credits  for  six  hours  of  elective  general 
study  courses. 

Both  departments  are  basically  organized  around  four- 
and  two-year  programs  and  offer  financial  assistance  to  quali- 
fied students  in  the  form  of  four-,  three-,  two-,  and  one-year 
scholarships  and/or  monthly  tax-free  subsistence  allowances. 

Department  of  Military  Science 

Professor 

Lieutenant  Colonel  Benjamin  L.  Abramowitz,  M.B.A., 
Chairman 


372.  Readings  in  Religion  (3) 

Continuation  of  Religion  Studies  371.  Prerequisite:  consent 

of  department  chairman. 


Associate  Professor 

Major  Donald  H.  Kunkel,  B.S. 

Assistant  Professors 

Captain  Joseph  F.  Dannentelser,  B.S. 
Captain  John  S.  Ellison,  B.S. 
Captain  Stephen  A.  Schmidt,  B.A. 

Instructors 

SSG  Edward  G.  Becker 
SGM  Joseph  Kress 
SGM  Walter  Malich 


The  general  objective  of  the  course  of  instruction  is  to  pro- 
duce junior  officers  who  by  education,  training,  and  attitude 
are  suitable  for  continued  development  as  officers  in  the 
United  States  Army.  The  course  develops  in  the  student  the 


Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps     239 


characteristics  oi  self-disc  iplinc,  integrity,  and  responsibility. 
The  student's  ability  to  evaluate  mhi.hi. mis,  make  dei  isions, 
work  with  people,  and  lead  effee  tivel)  are  developed.  Addi- 
tion.ilk  the  student  gains  an  appreciation  ol  the  role  ol  .1 
participating  citizen  in  matters  dealing  with  national  defense. 
I  ehigh  has  li.id  an  ROTC  program  since  September  1019. 
Currently.  Army  ROTC  offers  .1  tour  year  program  and  .1 
two  yeai  program.  The  four-year  program  consists  of  a  two- 
ycai  Basic  Course  and  a  two  year  Advanced  Course,  both  of 
which  arc  elective.  Only  students  who  have  demonstrated  a 
potential  tor  becoming  effective  officers  are  approved  for 
enrollment  in  the  Advanced  Course.  The  two-year  program 
consists  of  a  six-week  basic  summer  camp  and  the  two-year 
Advanced  Course. 

Basil  Course.  The  Basic  Course,  normally  taken  in  the  fresh- 
man and  sophomore  years,  provides  training  in  basic  military 
subjects,  military  history,  weapons,  equipment  and  leadership 
techniques.  To  enroll  in  the  Basic  Course,  an  applicant  must 
be:  (1)  a  citizen  ot  the  United  States;  (2)  between  14  and  23 
years  old;  (3)  regularly  enrolled  as  a  student. 

Two-Year  Program.  Students  who  would  otherwise  be  eligible 
tor  enrollment  in  the  Basic  Course  but  who  did  not  take 
ROTC  during  their  first  two  years  of  college  may  apply  for 
this  program.  Applicants  must  successfully  complete  a  six- 
week  basic  summer  camp  and  have  two  years  of  undergradu- 
ate or  graduate  studies  remaining.  Pay  for  the  summer 
training  is  at  the  rate  of  $307.20  per  month  plus  transporta- 
tion costs  to  and  from  this  camp. 

Advanced  Courses.  The  Advanced  Course  is  normally  taken 
in  the  junior  and  senior  years.  The  instruction  includes  mili- 
tary tactics,  logistics,  administration,  communications,  mili- 
tary law,  teaching  methods,  leadership  techniques  and  the 
exercise  of  command.  Students  in  this  course  receive  SI 00.00 
per  month  subsistence  pay  during  the  school  year.  A  six-week 
Advanced  Course  summer  training  camp  is  normally  held 
between  the  junior  and  senior  year.  Pay  for  this  camp  is  at 
the  rate  ot  S283.05  per  month,  plus  travel  expenses.  The 
summer  camp  experience,  in  coordination  with  respective 
engineering  curricula,  may  be  used  to  fulfill  the  requirements 
of  the  engineering  courses  Ch.E.  100,  C.E.  100,  E.E.  100,  I.E. 
100,  M.E.  100,  and  Met.  100,  "Industrial  Employment."  To 
enroll  in  the  Advanced  Course,  an  applicant  must:  (1)  com- 
plete either  the  Basic  Course  or  the  six-week  basic  summer 
camp;  (2)  be  accepted  for  enrollment  by  the  University  and 
the  department  of  military  science. 

Uniforms  and  Equipmoit.  All  uniforms,  textbooks  and 
equipment  needed  by  the  student  for  these  courses  are 
supplied  by  the  department.  A  cash  deposit  of  S25  is  re- 
quired of  all  students  at  the  time  of  registration.  This  deposit 
is  returned  upon  his  return  of  all  issued  property. 

ROTC  Scholarship  Program.  The  ROTC  scholarship  program 
is  designed  to  offer  financial  assistance  to  outstanding  young 
men  entering  the  four-year  ROTC  program  who  are  inter- 
ested in  an  Army  career.  Each  scholarship  provides  free 


tuition,  textbooks,  .md  laboratory  fees,  in  addition  to  paj  ot 

S  loii.on  pci  11 1  on th  for  the  period  that  tin-  scholarship  is  in 
effect.  Four-year  scholarships  .0.'  open  to  .ill  students  enter- 
ing ROTC  as  freshmen.  Applications  must  be  made  to  the 
Army  Headquarters  serving  their  state  ol  reside  n<  e  during  the 
senioi  year  of  high  school,  normally  before  15  January. 
Three  .  two  ,  .md  one  yeai  scholarships  are  available  to  out- 
standing cadets  who  arc  currently  enrolled  in  the  four-year 
R(  )TC  program  and  are  completing  eithci  theit  freshman, 
sophomore,  or  junior  years  of  college. 

Distinguished  Military  Graduate  (DMG)  Program.  This  is  a 
competitive  program  which  permits  outstanding  ROTC  stu- 
dents to  apply  for  a  Regular  Army  commission  immediately 
upon  graduation.  At  the  end  of  the  junior  year  and  prior  to 
the  Advanced  Course  summer  camp,  approximately  one-third 
of  each  junior  ROTC  class  may  be  designated  as  potential 
Distinguished  Military  Students  (DMS).  A  student  who  main- 
tains the  same  high  standards  throughout  summer  camp  and 
his  senior  year  may  qualify  for  designation  as  a  Distinguished 
Military  Graduate  (DMG)  and  be  offered  a  Regular  Army 
commission  upon  graduation. 

plight  'Training  Programs.  For  those  students  interested  and 
qualified,  a  Flight  Training  Program  may  be  offered.  Flight 
training  is  an  extra-curricular  activity  conducted  by  an  ap- 
proved FAA  flying  school  near  the  University.  The  instruc- 
tion consists  of  35  hours  ot  ground  training  and  more  than 
36  hours  of  flight  instruction  in  single  engine,  fixed  wing 
aircraft.  Students  who  take  flight  training  must  agree  to  parti- 
cipate, if  selected,  in  the  Army  Aviation  Program  upon  enter- 
ing active  service. 

'Transfers.  A  qualified  student  transferring  from  another  insti- 
tution may  enter  the  ROTC  program  at  the  appropriate  ad- 
vanced level  and  year,  providing  he  has  received  the  necessary 
credits,  the  recommendation  of  his  former  professor  of  mili- 
tary science,  and  the  approval  of  this  University. 

Obligation  after  Graduation.  Usually  upon  graduation  a  stu- 
dent will  receive  a  Reserve  commission  as  a  second  lieutenant 
and  will  be  required  to  serve  on  active  duty  for  two  years  and 
four  years  in  a  Reserve  status.  Depending  on  Army  require- 
ments, a  3-6  month  active  duty  for  training  with  an  8-year 
reserve  commitment  is  ottered.  Recipients  of  a  Regular  Army 
commission  must  serve  at  least  three  years  on  active  duty. 
Scholarship  students  must  agree  to  accept  a  Regular  Army 
commission  if  offered  and  also  serve  at  least  four  years  on 
active  duty.  Graduates  accepted  for  the  Army  Aviation  Pro- 
gram must  serve  at  least  three  years  on  active  duty  after  com- 
pleting the  Army  Aviation  School  at  Fort  Rucker,  Alabama. 

Graduate  Studies.  Under  normal  circumstances  an  ROTC 
graduate  may  delay  his  active  service  to  pursue  a  full-time 
course  of  instruction  leading  to  an  advanced  degree.  This 
delay  status  does  not  lengthen  the  active  service  obligation 
unless  the  degree  is  obtained  at  government  expense. 

Course  Credit.  Students  in  the  colleges  of  Arts  and  Science 
and  of  Business  and  Economics  may  substitute  advanced 


240     Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps 


military  science  credits  tor  six  hours  ot  electives.  Students  in 
the  College  of  Engineering  may  substitute  advanced  military 
science  for  six  hours  of  general  study  (elective)  courses.  The 
2  credits  allotted  for  apprentice  teaching  will  be  in  addition 
to  the  six  hours  of  electives  aforementioned.  All  military 
science  credits  are  credited  toward  the  student's  overall  cum- 
ulative academic  average. 

Basic  Course 

13.  Basic  Military  Science  (1) 

This  introductory  course  examines  the  purpose,  history  and 
organization  of  ROTC,  the  Army  and  the  Department  of 
Defense,  and  the  evolution  of  military  weapons  with  stress 
placed  on  present-day  weapons  and  their  functioning.  The 
course  consists  of  one  recitation  period  and  two  hours  of 
leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

14.  Basic  Military  Science  (1) 

This  course  examines  the  organization  of  the  Army,  the  in- 
tegration of  small  units  into  larger  teams,  the  missions  and 
function  of  Army  units  in  relation  to  the  roles  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Defense  and  the  other  Armed  Services,  and  the  U.S. 
objectives  of  national  security  and  defense.  The  course  con- 
sists of  one  recitation  period  and  two  hours  of  leadership 
laboratory  per  week. 

21.  Basic  Military  Science  (2) 

This  course  presents  map  and  aerial  photography,  to  include 
use  of  the  compass,  an  introduction  to  military  tactics  and 
operations,  and  the  organization  and  functions  ot  basic  mili- 
tary teams.  The  course  consists  ot  two  recitation  periods  and 
two  hours  of  leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

22.  Basic  Military  Science  (2) 

This  course  is  a  study  of  the  application  of  the  principles  of 
war  observed  in  American  military  history.  Historical  engage- 
ments of  U.S.  Armed  Forces  are  examined  at  the  tactical 
level  in  order  to  foster  an  appreciation  of  tactical  considera- 
tions, and  to  develop  military  planning  ability  among  the 
students.  The  course  consists  of  two  recitation  periods  and 
two  hours  of  leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

Advanced  Course 

105.  Advanced  Military  Science  (1) 

This  course  examines  the  systems,  principles  and  techniques 
of  military  communications,  the  principles  ot  military  in- 
struction, the  techniques  used  in  planning,  presenting  and 
evaluating  instruction  and  an  overview  of  problems  in  under- 
developed countries  and  the  role  of  the  Army  in  their  aid. 
This  course  consists  of  two  recitation  periods  and  two  hours 
of  leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

106.  Advanced  Military  Science  (2) 

This  course  examines  the  leader's  role  in  directing  and  coordi- 
nating small  tactical  units  in  the  execution  of  offensive  and 
defensive  operations,  the  roles,  missions  and  job  opportuni- 
ties of  the  various  branches  of  the  Army,  and  the 


psychological,  physiological,  and  sociological  factors  which 
affect  human  behavior  with  individual  and  group  solutions  of 
case  studies  of  leadership  problems  common  to  small  units. 
The  course  consists  of  three  recitation  periods  and  two  hours 
of  leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

Advanced  ROTC  Summer  Camp 

This  is  a  six-week  training  program  conducted  at  an  active 
Army  post.  Prerequisites  are  completion  of  the  basic  military 
science  courses  or  their  equivalent  and  Military  Science  105 
and  106.  Under  special  circumstances  and  upon  approval  of 
the  professor  of  military  science,  this  camp  may  be  delayed 
until  after  graduation  or  completion  of  the  Advanced  Course. 
The  summer  camp  experience,  in  coordination  with  respec- 
tive engineering  curricula,  may  be  used  to  fulfill  the  require- 
ments of  the  engineering  courses  Ch.E.  100,  C.E.  100,  E.E. 
100,  I.E.  100,  M.E.  100,  and  Met.  100,  "Industrial  Em- 
ployment." 

107.  Advanced  Military  Science  (2) 

This  course  is  a  study  of  military  combat  operations  and  the 
organization  and  roles  of  the  various  components  of  the  mili- 
tary team,  the  coordination  and  planning  necessary  between 
the  elements  of  the  team,  and  the  basic  concepts  of  military 
intelligence,  staff  organization  and  functions,  and  logistics. 
The  course  consists  of  three  recitation  periods  and  two  hours 
of  leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

108.  Advanced  Military  Science  (1) 

This  course  examines  selected  leadership  and  management 
problems  involved  in  unit  administration  and  military  justice, 
the  position  of  the  United  States  in  the  contemporary  world 
and  the  military  implications  of  world  change,  and  the  obliga- 
tions, problems,  and  responsibilities  of  an  officer  entering  on 
active  duty.  This  course  consists  of  two  recitation  periods 
and  two  hours  ot  leadership  laboratory  per  week. 

300.  Apprentice  Teaching  in  Military  Science  (2) 
Enrollment  limited  to  two  MS  IV  students  approved  by  the 
department  chairman. 

Leadership  Laboratory 

Leadership  Laboratory  is  conducted  for  all  courses  at  the 
same  time.  The  Corps  of  Cadets  is  organized  as  a  tactical  unit 
and  must  plan,  organize  and  conduct  its  own  unit  training 
program  during  the  laboratory  period.  Cadets  assume  posi- 
tions in  the  organization  commensurate  with  their  know- 
ledge, experience  and  demonstrated  performance.  Each 
semester  cadets  move  up  the  chain  of  command  to  positions 
of  greater  responsibility.  During  leadership  laboratory  cadets 
practice  the  technical  skills  learned  in  the  classroom  and  de- 
velop their  leadership  skills  through  performance.  Cadets 
learn  the  basic  fundamentals  of  leadership,  techniques  of 
exercise  of  command,  development  of  command  voice,  the 
school  of  the  soldier  with  and  without  arms,  the  conduct  of 
ceremonies,  the  duties  and  responsibilities  of  junior  leaders, 
the  conduct  of  tactical  operations,  the  functioning  of  a  staff 
and  the  development  and  coordination  of  a  unit  training 


Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps     241 


program.  One  four-hour  leadership  laboratory  will  be  con- 
ducted  on  a  Saturday  morning  during  each  of  the  semesters. 
Attendance  at  these  sessions  will  eliminate  the  requirement 
for  at  least  the  equivalent  number  of  the  regular  two-hour 
weekly  sessions  during  the  winter  months. 

Department  of  Aerospace  Studies 

Professor 

Colonel  William  F.  Shimonkcvitz,  M.S.,  Chairman 

Assistant  Protcssors 

Major  Richard  C.  Brace,  M.S. 
Captain  Delford  G.  Britton,  M.A. 
Captain  John  A.  Fratto,  M.B.A. 

Assistants 

Master  Sergeant  Carl  L.  Young,  Jr. 
Staff  Sergeant  Jesse  F.  Marsh 
Staff  Sergeant  David  J.  Adkins 
Staff  Sergeant  Gregory  B.  Wilson 


Air  Force  ROTC  at  Lehigh  University  was  established  in 
October  1946.  The  department'of  aerospace  studies  offers 
two  programs  for  students  to  qualify  for  commission  as  a 
second  lieutenant  in  the  Air  Force:  one  of  four  years  and  one 
of  two  years.  Any  student  who  will  meet  the  baccalaureate 
degree  requirements  at  the  end  of  his  university  education 
may  enroll  in  the  four-year  program  or  apply  for  entry  into 
the  two-year  program.  Students  in  the  advanced  Air  Force 
ROTC  courses  receive  a  $100  monthly  tax-free  subsis- 
tence allowance.  Students  must  complete  their  AFROTC 
training  and  university  education  and  be  commissioned  by 
their  28th  birthday. 

Four-Year  Program.  The  four-year  program  consists  of  class- 
room and  laboratory  work  during  the  four  undergraduate 
years  and  a  field  training  period  of  four  weeks,  usually  be- 
tween the  junior  and  senior  years,  at  an  Air  Force  base. 

During  the  first  two  years,  the  program  acquaints  students 
with  aerospace  technological  advances  and  current  research 
and  development  activities.  Students  also  begin  leadership 
training.  During  the  last  two  years,  emphasis  is  placed  on 
personal  development.  Students  practice  leadership  talents 
and  ability  by  assuming  positions  of  responsibility  in  the 
Cadet  Corps. 

Two-Year  Program.  All  requirements  for  commissioning  can 
be  completed  in  the  two-year  program.  Students  may  apply 
for  entry  not  later  than  March  of  their  sophomore  year.  This 
program  is  also  available  to  select  graduate  students,  on  a 
limited  basis,  who  have  two  full  years  of  academic  study  re- 
maining at  Lehigh.  Prior  to  formal  enrollment,  each  student 
must  successfully  complete  six  weeks  of  field  training  at  an 
Air  Force  Base. 


Scholarship  Program.  Air  Force  ROTC  awards  scholarships  at 
the  freshman,  sophomore,  and  junior  levels.  They  arc  availa- 
ble to  qualified  cadets  in  the  two-year  and  four-year  pro- 
grams. Once  awarded  a  scholarship,  a  cadet  continues  on 
scholarship  status  until  graduation.  These  scholarships  cover 
full  tuition,  laboratory  expenses,  incidental  fees,  and  books. 
Scholarship  cadets  also  receive  a  J 100  monthly  tax-free  sub- 
sistence allowance  throughout  the  activation  of  the  scholar- 
ship. 

Flight  Instruction  Program.  Senior  cadets  who  arc  physically 
qualified  may  take  flight  instruction  in  their  senior  year  at  no 
cost  to  themselves.  The  FIP  provides  36'/i  hours  of  flying 
time,  35  hours  of  instruction  (20  hours  dual  and  15  hours 
solo),  plus  l'/i  hours  for  a  final  flight  progress  check.  Cadets 
who  complete  the  35  hours  of  instruction,  and  pass  the  FAA 
written  examination  and  the  final  flight  check,  may  receive 
an  FAA  private  pilot's  license. 

Field  Training.  Two  field  training  courses  are  offered.  One 
course  covers  four  weeks  for  cadets  in  the  four-year  program, 
and  the  other  covers  six  weeks  for  two-year  applicants. 

Cadets  normally  attend  the  four-week  course  after  their 
sophomore  year.  Candidates  for  the  two-year  program  must 
successfully  complete  the  six-week  course  before  they  enter 
the  Professional  Officer's  course. 

The  six-week  course  includes  substantial  classwork  in 
"United  States  Military  Forces  in  the  Contemporary  World." 
Both  courses  include  orientation,  survival  training,  junior 
officer  training,  aircraft  and  aircrew  orientation,  physical 
training,  small  arms  marksmanship  training,  organization  and 
function  of  an  Air  Force  base,  career  orientation,  and  supple- 
mental training. 

Travel  pay  is  provided  for  those  attending  the  field  train- 
ing courses.  During  their  stay,  Air  Force  ROTC  applicants  in 
the  six-week  course  receive  $460.00,  and  those  in  the  four- 
week  course  receive  $566.00.  All  cadets  are  provided  room 
and  board  while  attending  field  training. 

Eligibility  Requirements.  To  be  eligible  for  the  Air  Force 
ROTC  program,  a  student  must  be:  (1)  a  citizen  of  the 
United  States;  (2)  physically  qualified  for  commission  in  the 
United  States  Air  Force  in  accordance  with  existing  Air 
Force  regulations;  (3)  not  under  14  years  of  age  and,  upon 
graduation,  not  more  than  28  years  of  age;  (4)  planning  to 
pursue  work  leading  to  at  least  a  bachelor's  degree;  (5)  willing 
to  sign  a  formal  agreement  and  enlist  in  the  Air  Force  Re- 
serve at  the  beginning  of  the  third  year  or,  upon  initiation  of 
a  college  scholarship  obligating  him  to  remain  in  the  ROTC 
program,  to  accept  a  commission  and  to  serve  the  required 
period  in  the  Air  Force  upon  graduation. 

21.  Freshman  Aerospace  Studies  (1) 

A  study  of  the  doctrine,  mission,  and  organization  of  the  U.S. 
Air  Force;  a  study  of  U.S.  strategic  offensive  and  defensive 
forces,  their  mission,  function,  and  employment  of  nuclear 
weapons;  and  a  study  of  civil  defense. 


242     Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps 


22.  Freshman  Aerospace  Studies  (1) 

A  study  of  aerospace  defense;  missile  defense;  U.S.  general 
purpose  and  aerospace  support  forces;  the  mission  resources 
and  operations  of  tactical  air  forces  with  special  attention  to 
limited  war;  and  a  review  of  Army,  Navy,  and  Marine  general 
purpose  forces. 

23.  Sophomore  Aerospace  Studies  (1J 

An  examination  of  the  developmental  growth  of  air  power 
over  the  past  sixty  years  by  reviewing  the  various  concepts  of 
employment  and  focusing  upon  the  factors  which  prompted 
research  and  technological  change. 

24.  Sophomore  Aerospace  Studies  (1) 

A  continuation  of  A.S.  23  with  emphasis  on  a  variety  of 
events  and  elements  in  the  history  of  air  power,  especially 
where  these  provide  significant  examples  of  the  impact  of  air 
power  on  strategic  thought. 

111.  Aerospace  Studies— Air  Force  Officer  Development  (3) 
Development  of  the  knowledge  and  skills  required  of  the 
junior  officer  of  the  Air  Force.  This  includes  communicative 
skills,  the  development  of  air  power,  aerospace  power  today, 
and  the  future  of  manned  aircraft. 

112.  Aerospace  Studies— Air  Force  Officer  Development  (3) 
Continuation  of  the  development  of  knowledge  and  skills 
required  of  a  junior  Air  Force  officer  with  emphasis  on  the 
history  and  importance  of  the  national  space  effort,  orbits 
and  trajectories,  space  vehicle  systems,  ground  support  sys- 
tems, manned  space  flight,  and  operations  in  space. 

113.  Aerospace  Studies— The  Professional  Officer  (3) 
Concepts  of  Air  Force  leadership.  A  study  of  the  meaning  of 
professional  responsibilities  of  the  professional  officer,  the 
foundations  of  the  military  profession,  the  military  justice 
system,  theories  of  leadership,  discipline  and  human  rela- 
tions. 

114.  Aerospace  Studies— The  Professional  Officer  (3) 
Concepts  of  Air  Force  management.  Includes  principles  and 
functions  of  management.  Air  Force  personnel  policies,  chan- 
nels of  communication,  problem-solving,  quantitative  models 
and  simulation,  the  command-staff  team,  the  subordinate, 
performance  standards,  data  processing,  and  Air  Force  con- 
trols. 


Social  Relations 


Professors 

Robert  Clifford  Williamson,  Ph.D.,  Chairman 
Morris  H.  Sunshine,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor 

Roy  Cecil  Herrenkohl,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors 

James  Rathburn  Mcintosh,  Ph.D. 
Robert  E.  Rosenwein,  Ph.D. 

Instructor 

Barbara  Brown  Frankel,  M.A. 

Visiting  Instructor 
Philip  W.  Marden,Ph.D. 


There  are  three  major  sequences  combined  in  the  department 
of  social  relations:  social  psychology,  sociology,  and  anthro- 
pology—behavioral sciences.  Students  majoring  in  the  depart- 
ment usually  select  one  option  to  fulfill  requirements. 

With  rapid  expansion  of  the  significance  of  the  social 
sciences  in  contemporary  society,  these  three  fields  provide 
useful  background  not  only  for  graduate  work  in  the  disci- 
plines, but  also  for  careers  as  diverse  as  law,  government  ser- 
vice, community  relations,  or  the  ministry.  As  an  interdisci- 
plinary department,  social  relations  provides  a  unique 
opportunity  for  the  student  to  maintain  a  broad  scope  of 
interests  within  the  context  of  his  major  program. 

Required  Preliminary  Courses 

SR  292  Research  Methods  (4) 

Two  of  the  following: 

Principles  of  Sociology  (3) 


SR  11 
SR21 
SR31 


Social  Psychology  (3) 
Introduction  to  Anthropology  (3) 


(One  course  must  be  in  the  major  option  of  the  student.) 

Option  in  Social  Psychology 

One  of  the  following: 

SR  201  Social  Psychology  of  Education  (3) 

SR  203  Social  Ecology  (3) 


Social  Relations     243 


Two  ol  the  following: 

SR   10  ;  The  Social  Psychology  of  Groups  (3) 

SR  304  1  liiin.m  i  'omnium.  .iiM n  i  i 

SR  305  Personality  and  Social  Processes  (3) 

SR  307  Attitudes  .md  Social  Influence  (3) 

SR  300  Socialization  Through  the  Life  Span   (3) 

One  of  the  following  in  the  senior  year: 

SR  308  Seminar  on  Social  Psychology  (3) 

SR  394  Individual,  Society  and  Culture  (3) 

SR  One  300-level  course  in  either  sociology  or 

anthropology  (3) 
Psych  One  approved  course  (3) 

Option  in  Sociology 

Five  ot  the  tollowing: 

SR  360  Social  Change  in  Africa  (3) 

SR  364  The  Family  (3) 

SR  366  Population  Problems  (3) 

SR  367  Latin  American  Social  Institutions  (3) 

SR  368  The  Urban  Community  (3) 

SR  369  Social  Disorganization  (3) 

SR  370  Juvenile  Delinquency  (3) 

SR  373  Seminar  in  Sociology  (3) 

SR  374  Social  Stratification  (3) 

SR  381  Development  of  Sociological  Theory  (3) 

SR  382  Political  Sociology  (3) 

SR  383  Industrial  Sociology  (3) 

SR  384  Social  Structure  (3) 

SR  300-level  courses  in  anthropology  or  social 

psychology  (6) 

Minor  in  Anthropology-Behavioral  Sciences 

Eighteen  hours  of  which  at  least  twelve  will  be  chosen  from 
S.R.  332,  335,  336,  339,  341,  343,  394,  and  I.S.  301.  The 
remainder  will  be  selected  with  the  approval  of  the  depart- 
mental advisor. 

Undergraduate  Courses 

3.  Introduction  to  Social  Relations  (3) 

An  interdisciplinary  study  of  man's  evolution,  culture, 
society  and  individuality.  Social  psychological,  anthropologi- 
cal and  sociological  materials  will  be  discussed  to  explore  the 
contrasting  definitions  of  man  developed  in  contemporary 
social  science. 

4.  Introduction  to  Social  Relations  (3) 

A  continuation  of  S.R.  3  with  attention  placed  on  man's 
participation  in  the  social  process  and  theories  of  social 
change.  Cross-cultural  investigations  and  research  into  con- 
temporary issues  in  American  society  will  be  studied  to  ex- 
amine how  the  individual  is  affected  by  and  affects  his  social 
environment. 


1  1 .  Principles  of  Sociology  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  field  of  sociology  and  its  concepts 
and  methods.  Among  the  topics  are  the  nature  of  the  group, 
social  organizations  and  structure,  socialization,  stratifica- 
tion, social  institutions,  ethnic  relations,  social  change. 

21.  (Psych.  21)  Social  Psychology  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  theories,  methods  of  investigation, 
and  research  results  of  social  psychology  with  emphasis  on 
psychological  processes  in  social  behavior,  social  attitudes, 
group  behavior  and  social  interaction. 

31.  Introduction  to  Anthropology  (3) 

Examination  of  the  scope,  aims  and  methods  of  anthropolo- 
gy. The  nature  of  culture,  cultural-biological  relationships, 
human  evolution,  archaeology  and  cultural  evolution,  lan- 
guage and  cultures,  cultural  phenomena  with  emphasis  on  eco- 
nomic organization,  kinship  and  social  organization,  religion 
and  political  organization.  Analysis  of  the  characteristic 
features  of  life,  thought  and  culture  of  selected  non-Western 
peoples. 

41.  Human  Sexuality  (3) 

Analysis  of  the  socialization  of  sex  roles  and  the  life  cycle, 
premarital  and  marital  sex  behavior,  human  reproduction  and 
its  control.  Some  attention  to  deviant  sex  roles. 

65.  Contemporary  Social  Problems  (3) 

An  exploration  of  major  problems  facing  contemporary  man, 
the  social  contexts  giving  rise  to  these  problems,  and  the 
social  consequences  of  alternative  strategies  for  dealing  with 
them.  Selected  problems  such  as  mental  health,  crime,  the 
population  explosion,  racial  tensions,  the  modern  city,  and 
war  will  be  studied  in  detail. 

75.  Minority  Groups  (3) 

Ethnic  minorities  and  intergroup  relations.  Consideration  of 
the  historical  and  social  character  of  minority  groups  and  an 
examination  of  theory  and  research  focusing  on  intergroup 
cooperation  and  conflict. 

101-102.  Social  Research  in  the  Field  Setting  (3  or  4) 

Independent  study  of  community  problems  by  participation 
in  community  efforts  to  solve  them.  Students  will  conduct 
research  or  a  relevant  project  under  faculty  supervision.  Pre- 
requisite: consent  of  instructor. 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

201.  Social  Psychology  of  Education  (3) 
An  examination  of  the  manner  in  which  teaching  and  learn- 
ing are  influenced  by  interpersonal,  group  and  institutional 
factors.  The  influence  of  family  dynamics,  peer-group 
pressures,  teacher-expectations  and  social  status  on  the  in- 
dividual's educational  adjustment. 


244     Social  Relations 


203.  Social  Ecology  (3) 

An  examination  of  the  manner  in  which  the  physical  environ- 
ment and  the  organization  of  society  interacting  with  in- 
dividual needs  shape  human  behavior.  Consideration  of 
factors  such  as  technology,  architectural  design,  environmen- 
tal awareness,  the  need  for  privacy  and  interpersonal  space. 

231.  Non-Western  People  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  variety  of  man's  social  life.  A  number 
of  tribal  and  peasant  societies  are  examined  in  relation  to 
their  social  and  technological  complexity.  Emphasis  is  placed 
on  whole  societies  rather  than  societal  mechanisms.  Atten- 
tion is  also  given  to  man's  relationship  to  the  physical  envi- 
ronment and  the  degree  to  which  cultural  change  is  influ- 
enced by  extra-cultural  factors. 

292.  Research  Methods  (4) 

Training  in  the  methods  of  research  used  in  the  study  of 
social  relations.  Study  of  selected  problems  and  applications 
in  research  design,  execution,  analysis,  and  interpretation. 
Introduction  to  major  techniques  of  research  including 
laboratory  experimentation,  field  study,  and  participant  ob- 
servation; questionnaire  construction  and  interview  proce- 
dure. Introduction  to  different  levels  of  analysis.  Prerequi- 
site: six  credit  hours  in  social  relations  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department. 

303.  Groups  and  Organizations  (3) 

Survey  of  theories  and  empirical  research  on  interpersonal 
behavior  in  groups  and  organizations.  Emphasis  on  such 
topics  as:  structure  and  process,  group  size,  communication 
networks,  leadership,  power,  decision-making  and  effective- 
ness. Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in  social  relations  or  con- 
sent of  chairman  of  department. 

304.  Human  Communication  (3) 

Problems  in  understanding  the  processes  and  functions  of 
communicative  behavior.  Analysis  of  speech  and  language 
theories  of  communication,  and  the  effects  of  communica- 
tion in  groups.  Prerequisite:  one  course  in  social  relations  or 
equivalent. 

305.  Personality  and  Social  Processes  (3) 

An  examination  of  the  relationship  between  personality  and 
social  behavior.  Topics  include  small-group  behavior,  personal 
attraction,  competition,  cooperation,  and  communication. 
Prerequisite:  S.R.  21. 

307.  Attitudes  and  Social  Influence  (3) 

An  examination  of  the  concept  of  attitude  in  social  psycholo- 
gy and  the  determinants  of  attitude-change.  Attention  to 
problems  and  issues  in  persuasive  communication,  propa- 
ganda, brainwashing,  conformity,  and  other  social  processes. 
Prerequisite:  S.R.  21. 


308.  Seminar  in  Social  Psychology  (3) 

Intensive  consideration  of  selected  topics  in  current  theory 
and  research  in  social  psychology.  The  subject  matter  will 
vary  from  semester  to  semester,  and  will  include  such  topics 
as  the  social  psychology  of  education,  the  applications  of 
perception  and  learning  theory  to  social  psychological  prob- 
lems, the  social  psychology  of  science,  and  the  social  environ- 
ment of  communication.  Prerequisite:  S.R.  21  or  consent  of 
chairman  of  department.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

309.  Socialization  Through  the  Life  Span  (3) 

An  examination  of  interpersonal  influences  on  human  devel- 
opment from  birth  through  aging.  Consideration  of  social 
influences  on  the  development  of  the  ability  to  communi- 
cate, the  learning  of  social  roles,  the  development  of  socially- 
oriented  motivation,  personality  dynamics,  and  the  impact  of 
societal  pressures  on  the  processes  of  maturing  and  aging. 
Prerequisite:  S.R.  21. 

320.  (U.S.  320)  Urban  Ethnology  (3) 

Ethnocultural  groups  in  urban  settings.  Patterns  of  conflict, 
accommodation  and  assimilation  studied  with  particular 
reference  to  the  United  States. 

321.  (Hist.  321)  Social  Class  and  Mobility  in  American 
History  (3) 

The  distribution  of  wealth,  concepts  of  class  and  social  demo- 
cracy, life  styles  and  values  of  different  social  and  economic 
groups,  and  opportunities  for  mobility;  colonial  times  to  the 
present. 

332.  Peasant  Societies  (3) 

Analysis  of  peasants  as  members  of  transitional  societies; 
relationships  between  peasant  groups  and  larger  political  en- 
tities. Examination  of  peasant  cultures  in  their  economic, 
social,  and  structural  similarities.  Intensive  treatment  of  eth- 
nographies of  peasant  societies.  Prerequisite:  S.R.  31  or  con- 
sent of  chairman  of  department. 

335.  Cultural  Dynamics  (3) 

Critical  evaluation  of  approaches  to  the  problems  of  cultural 
change;  analysis  of  invention  and  intergroup  cultural  borrow- 
ing; agents  and  conditions  conducive  to  change;  mechanics  of 
culture  growth;  and  applications  of  techniques  for  inducing 
change.  Attention  to  the  impact  of  Western  civilization  upon 
traditional  native  societies;  socio-cultural  adjustments  to  the 
impact;  and  community  disintegration  and  reintegration. 

336.  Religion  and  Magic  (3) 

A  comparative  analysis  of  the  origins,  elements,  forms  and 
symbolism  of  religious  beliefs  and  behavior;  the  role  of  reli- 
gion in  society  with  particular  reference  to  nonliterate 
societies.  Anthropological  theories  and  methods  of  analysis 
of  religion,  both  historical  and  contemporary,  will  be  con- 
sidered. 


Social  Relations     245 


Inthropological  Theory  (3) 
An  examination  ol  the  theoretic  al  foci  ol  anthropology  and 

it,',  relation  to  disciplines,  e.g.,  ecology,  linguist  ><  ..  eilmo 
nistoi  j .  the  a  oss  cultural  study  of  cognition,  et< . 

33').  Siiiiiii.il  111  Anthropology  (3) 

Intensive  consideration  ot'  selected  topics  in  contemporary  or 
past  research  in  cultural  anthropology.  The  subject  matter 
will  vary  from  semester  to  semester.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit.  Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in  social  relations  or 
consent  of  the  chairman  ol  department. 

341.  Comparative  Institutions  (3) 

A  cross-cultural  examination  of  topics  such  as  kinship,  social 
institutions,  politics*  law,  and  economic  organization.  Types 
nt  systems  and  their  (unctions:  anthropological  theory  and 
methods  of  analysis.  May  be  repeated  for  credit. 

343.  Area  Studies  (3) 

Particular  cultural-geographic  areas  examined  from  cultural, 
historical,  environmental  and  linguistic  perspectives.  The 
relation  of  area  research  to  anthropological  theory.  May  be 
repeated  for  credit. 

361.  Social  Conflict  (3) 

An  examination  of  theory  and  research  on  interpersonal, 
inter-group  and  international  conflict  and  conflict  resolution. 
Consideration  of  the  characteristics  of  individuals  and  of  the 
dynamics  of  groups  which  predispose  them  to  conflict  or 
enable  them  to  avoid  or  resolve  conflict. 

364.  The  Family  (3) 

A  sociological  study  of  man's  basic  institution.  Includes:  an 
analysis  ot  historical  backgrounds,  interactions  within  the 
family,  relation  to  other  groups  and  institutions,  problems  of 
family  disorganization,  legal  aspects  of  marriage  and  divorce, 
family  adjustment,  the  family  in  a  changing  society. 

366.  Population  Problems  (3) 

Quantitative  and  qualitative  aspects  of  U.S.  and  world  popu- 
lation. Includes:  causes  and  effects  of  migrations,  racial  com- 
positions and  race  relations,  population  theories,  legal 
aspects,  social  consequences  of  population  trends,  present 
trends  and  future  predictions. 

367.  Latin  American  Social  Institutions  (3) 

An  introduction  to  the  contemporary  indigenous,  mestizo 
and  Creole  cultures  of  Latin  America  with  analysis  of  specific 
communities.  An  investigation  of  familial,  educational,  reli- 
gious, and  recreational  institutions  with  particular  emphasis 
on  intellectual  developments.  Attention  to  the  problem  of 
change  and  social  planning.  Prerequisite:  one  course  in  social 
relations  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

368.  The  Urban  Community  (3) 

A  study  of  urban  communities  in  the  world  and  the  United 
States.  A  history  of  the  city,  ecological  and  demographic 
patterns  and  growth,  institutional  organization,  status  sys- 


tems, suburban  development,  resources  and  problems,  future 

development  and  planning.  Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in 
SOI  ill  relations  or  consent  ol  I  hail  m.in  of  department. 

369.  Social  Disorganization  (3) 

Social  disorganization  in  contemporary  society,  with  em 

pli.i  si    "ii  il"   "  mi  epi     ol  ,mi  nine  and  alii  nal  ion    E\  .ilu.it  ion 
of  various  theories  of  social  disorganization.  Prerequisite:  six 
credit  hours  in  social  relations  or  consent  of  chairman  of 
department. 

370.  Juvenile  Delinquency  (3) 

The  development  of  delinquent  behavior  within  its  social 
context:  an  analysis  of  delinquent  gangs  and  subcultures  and 
the  variable  patterns  of  anti-social  activity;  and  evaluation  of 
institutional  controls  and  treatment  of  the  problem. 

371.  Special  Topics  in  Social  Relations  (1-3) 

An  opportunity  for  advanced  work  through  supervised  read- 
ing and  research.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  chairman  of  depart- 
ment. 

372.  Special  Topics  in  Social  Relations  (1-3) 
Continuation  of  S.R.  371. 

373.  Seminar  in  Sociology  (3) 

Intensive  consideration  of  selected  topics  in  contemporary 
theory  or  research  in  sociology.  The  subject  matter  will  vary 
from  semester  to  semester.  Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in 
social  relations  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department.  May 
be  repeated  for  credit. 

374.  Social  Stratification  (3) 

Examination  of  concepts  of  stratification,  such  as  social  class, 
and  of  theories  using  these  concepts.  Consideration  also  of 
research  findings  which  indicate  the  significance  of  stratifica- 
tion for  society.  Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in  social  rela- 
tions or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

381.  Development  of  Sociological  Theory  (3) 

A  critical  and  comparative  study  of  the  principal  schools  of 
social  thought  which  have  contributed  to  the  development  of 
sociological  theory.  The  origins  and  development  of  sociolo- 
gy, major  contributors,  current  trends.  Prerequisite:  six  credit 
hours  in  social  relations  or  consent  of  chairman  of  de- 
partment. 

382.  Political  Sociology  (3) 

Organization  and  development  of  political  action  struc- 
tures—movements, parties,  systems— under  varying  societal 
conditions.  Comparative  analysis  of  ideology,  stratification, 
leadership,  and  patterns  of  political  participation. 

383.  Industrial  Sociology  (3) 

Course  and  consequence  of  industrialization  in  different 
societal  settings.  The  industrial  plant  as  a  composite  and  a 
component  of  local,  regional  and  national  structures  of  or- 
ganization in  transaction  with  other  institutional  areas. 


246     Social  Relations 


384.  Social  Structure  (3) 

The  theory  of  social  structure  considered  as  a  basic  key  to 
the  understanding  of  social  phenomena,  with  attention  to 
such  concepts  as  interaction,  position,  role  and  role-set, 
status,  institutionalization,  equilibrium,  norm,  and  culture. 
Selected  propositions  concerning  structural  relationships  and 
processes  will  be  examined.  Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in 
social  relations  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 

394.  The  Individual,  Society  and  Culture  (3) 
This  course  will  explore  the  interdisciplinary  implications  of 
the  materials  and  methods  of  social  psychology,  sociology, 
and  anthropology.  Prerequisite:  six  credit  hours  in  social 
relations  or  consent  of  chairman  of  department. 


467.  Latin  American  Social  Structure  (3) 

Analysis  of  given  Latin  American  societies  with  special  atten- 
tion to  economic  and  political  structures.  Individual  projects. 

468.  Advanced  Urban  Sociology  (3) 

Selected  problems  in  urban  research,  urban  and  community 
planning  and  redevelopment.  Relation  of  the  city  and  the 
region  to  economic  development  and  government  functions. 

470.  Contemporary  Sociological  Theory  (3) 
An  examination  of  current  developments  in  theoretical  soci- 
ology. Functional  theory  and  conflict  theory  as  reflected  in 
Parsons,  Merton,  Coser  and  Dahrendorf  and  others.  A 
critique  of  current  theoretical  schools. 


For  Graduates 

411.  Advanced  Research  Methods  (3) 

A  basic  course  given  in  research  theory  and  methods.  Con- 
sideration given  the  nature  of  theory,  hypotheses  testing,  the 
definition  of  variables  and  methods  of  measurement. 

412.  Practicum  in  Research  Methods  (3) 

Laboratory  in  the  design  and  execution  of  research.  Emphasis 
on  the  design  of  measurement  instruments,  the  application  of 
statistical  techniques,  and  the  analysis  and  interpretation  of 
data.  The  student  will  pursue  an  independent  research  project 
and  write  a  research  report  based  on  it.  Prerequisite:  S.R. 
411. 

423.  Social  Psychology  (3) 

An  examination  of  theory  and  research  in  social  psychology. 
The  objective  of  the  course  is  to  consider  major  topics  and 
issues  in  relation  to  current  research. 

432.  Culture  Patterns  and  Personality  (3) 
The  psychological  implications  of  cultural  variation,  includ- 
ing the  analysis  of  national  character. 

434.  Advanced  Social  Psychology  (3) 

Intensive  consideration  of  selected  topics  in  social  psycholo- 
gy. The  subject  matter  will  vary  from  semester  to  semester  on 
topics  such  as  socialization,  social  attitudes,  person  percep- 
tion, small  group  processes  and  communication. 

464.  Seminar  on  the  Family  (3) 

Societal  functions  of  marriage  and  the  family  and  the  relation 
of  the  institution  to  the  social  structure  and  demographic 
variables.  Particular  emphasis  on  the  treatment  of  family 
disorganization. 

465.  Organizational  Behavior  (3) 

Theory  and  research  concerning  the  development  and  func- 
tioning of  organizations.  Structure,  goals,  authority  and 
power,  communication,  role  conflict  in  large  organizations. 
Cross-institutional  comparisons  of  industrial,  research, 
governmental,  medical,  and  academic  organizations. 


471.  Special  Topics  (3) 

Intensive  study  in  an  area  of  social  relations,  which  is  appro- 
priate to  the  interests  and  needs  of  the  staff  and  students. 

472.  Special  Topics  (3) 
Continuation  of  S.R.  471. 


Social  Relations     247 


Physical  Education  &  Athletics 


Professoi 

William  Badcr  Leckonby,  B.S. ,  Dm, 

Assistant  Professors 

John  Nelson  Covert,  B.S. 
Frederick  Homer  Dunlap,  B.A. 
Leroy  Arlan  Heckman,  M.A. 
Gerald  Grant  Leeman,  B.A. 
Anthony  Packer,  B.S. 
John  Stohler  Steckbcck,  M.Sc. 
B.  Thayer  Turner,  B.S. 

Instructors 

Helen  Bond,  B.S. 
Barry  J.  Fetterman,  B.S. 
Thomas  M.  Gilburg,  B.A. 
Lawrence  D.  Glueck,  B.A. 
Charles  R.  McNaron,  B.S. 
Stanley  R.  Schultz,  B.A. 
John  Calvin  Whitehead,  B.S. 
Thomas  Pugliese,  B.A. 
Bruce  Gardiner,  M.Sc. 


The  division  consists  of  the  department  of  intercollegiate 
athletics  and  the  department  of  physical  education  and  intra- 
mural sports.  It  has  supervision  over  the  entire  field  of  inter- 
collegiate athletics  and  physical  education  at  the  University. 
Its  activities  consist  of  intercollegiate  athletics,  intramural 
athletics,  and  physical  education,  including  corrective  exer- 
cises. 

Experience  indicates  that  it  is  essential  that  the  physical 
education  program  emphasize  the  physical  fitness  and  effi- 
ciency benefits  to  be  derived  from  a  well-rounded  and  athlet- 
ic phase  of  the  program.  The  purpose  of  the  athletic,  physical 
education,  and  intramural  sports  program  is  designed  to:  (1) 
raise  and  maintain  the  physical  standards  of  the  University: 
(2)  develop  and  maintain  a  high  level  of  all-round  physical 
fitness  so  that  the  undergraduate  student  may  more  readily 
assimilate  instruction;  (3)  encourage  regular  and  healthful 
exercise  by  the  development  of  skills,  techniques,  and  atti- 
tudes; (4)  foster  an  aggressive  and  cooperative  team  spirit,  to 
increase  the  confidence  of  the  individual,  to  develop  sports- 
manship, and  to  increase  University  pride  through  participa- 
tion in  vigorous  competitive  athletics. 

Facilities  for  accomplishing  these  are  afforded  in  Taylor 
Gymnasium,  Grace  Hall,  Taylor  Field,  and  Sayre  Park  field, 
an  area  of  seven  acres  located  above  the  lookout  on  the  top 
of  South  Mountain  and  only  a  short  distance  from  the 


fraternity  houses  and  residence  halls,  and  Saucon  Valley 
Fields  located  south  of  the  campus  and  on  the  south  side  of 
South  Mountain.  These  500  acres  have  the  following  facili- 
ties: all-weather  quarter  mile  track,  nine  all-weather  tennis 
courts,  lacrosse  and  soccer  fields,  three  football  practice 
fields,  Varsity  Mouse,  two  baseball  diamonds,  twelve  to  six- 
teen intramural  fields,  and  a  football  field  which  is  the  site  of 
a  future  stadium.  Almost  all  of  the  outdoor  intramural  sports 
contests  and  all  uppcrclass  intramural  activities  are  held  in 
this  area;  a  shuttle  bus  service  is  provided  to  and  from  this 
field. 

Department  of  Intercollegiate  Athletics 

The  department  of  intercollegiate  athletics  offers  opportuni- 
ty to  the  undergraduate  student  body  to  participate  in  inter- 
collegiate competition  both  at  home  and  away  with  institu- 
tions which  are  Lehigh's  natural  rivals  and  also  other  institu- 
tions which  are  at  some  distance. 

The  intercollegiate  program  consists  of  varsity  teams  in 
football,  cross  country,  soccer,  wrestling,  basketball,  swim- 
ming, tennis,  track,  baseball,  golf,  lacrosse,  hockey,  winter 
track,  and  rifle.  In  addition,  there  are  junior  varsity  and/or 
freshman  teams  in  all  of  the  above. 

Department  of  Physical  Education, 
Intramural  Sports  and  Recreation 

The  department  of  physical  education  has  supervision  and 
control  of  the  intramural  sports  and  the  recreational  physical 
activities  of  the  student  body.  The  aim  is  to  insure  the  health 
and  physical  development  of  every  student  of  the  University. 

Through  its  program  in  physical  education  and  intramural 
sports  the  University  endeavors  to  maintain  among  its  stu- 
dents a  high  degree  of  physical  fitness,  to  establish  habits  of 
regular  and  healthful  exercise,  to  foster  the  development  of 
such  valuable  by-products  as  self-confidence,  good  sports- 
manship, and  a  spirit  of  cooperation,  and  to  provide  each 
student  with  ample  opportunity  for  acquiring  an  adequate 
degree  of  skill  in  sports  of  the  type  in  which  participation  can 
be  continued  after  graduation. 

Prior  to  his  arrival  on  campus,  each  new  or  transfer  stu- 
dent must  submit  to  the  Health  Service  a  record  of  physical 
examination  filled  in  and  signed  by  a  physician,  and  a  com- 
pleted health  history  form.  All  such  forms  are  carefully 
checked  by  the  Health  Service  and  each  student  thereby 
classified  for  activities  in  the  department  of  physical  educa- 
tion in  accordance  with  his  current  health  status. 

The  physical  education  program  is  voluntary,  but  all 
physically  qualified  students  are  required  to  take  a  swimming 
test  and  physical  fitness  test  for  the  purpose  of  guidance  and 
counseling  in  the  voluntary  program  of  personal  develop- 
ment. Both  tests  are  scheduled  during  the  first  week  of  the 
first  semester.  Based  on  the  results  of  the  tests,  each  student 
is  urged  to  follow  the  recommendations  of  counselors  in 
improving  his  physical  condition. 


248     Physical  Education  and  Athletics 


A  wide  variety  of  instruction  courses  are  available  on  a  No  credit  is  given  for  these  courses;  they  are  voluntarily 

voluntary  basis.  Courses  stress  the  history,  rules,  fundamen-  elected  subject  to  permission  of  the  instructor.  A  periodic 

tals  and  playing  situations  and  are  taught  on  an  elective  basis.  announcement  of  class  schedules  is  published. 

Corecreation  (for  men  and  women  simultaneously)  opportu- 
nities are  available.  Coed  instruction  and  competition  are 
available  in  a  number  of  activities.  Individual  sports  are 
offered  on  a  voluntary  basis. 

In  the  gymnasium,  opportunity  is  offered  in  the  following 
activities:  recreational  swimming,  beginner's  swimming, 
dance,  physical  development,  boxing,  fencing,  apparatus  ex- 
ercises, life-saving,  controlled  weight  training,  badminton, 
judo,  karate,  and  sports  fundamentals. 

A  comprehensive  program  in  intramural  sports  is  sponsor- 
ed for  the  student  body  including  fraternity,  residence  hall, 
interclass,  town,  and  independent  groups  in  touch  football, 
tennis,  soccer,  badminton,  handball,  individual  athletics, 
basketball,  swimming,  wrestling,  track,  Softball,  squash,  vol- 
leyball, and  recreative  games.  Students  are  encouraged  to 
participate  in  these  sports,  and  awards  are  given  for  excel- 
lence in  performance. 

Individual  exercises  are  prescribed  for  the  correction  of 
physical  and  functional  defects.  Students  of  this  group  are 
carefully  examined  and  individually  guided. 

The  University  maintains  a  well-equipped  Health  Center 
for  medical  treatment.  If  a  student  is  injured  while  engaged  in 
any  sport  he  must  report  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  first-aid 
room  or  to  the  University  Health  Service. 

Courses  Open  to  All  Lehigh  Students 

Nonswimmers 

Basic  Swimming 

Senior  Life  Saving 

Water  Safety  Instructors 

Scuba  Diving  (fee) 

Fencing 

Field  Archery 

Target  Archery 

Bowling 

Golf 

Basic  Tennis 

Intermediate  Tennis 

Advanced  Tennis 

Modern  Dance 

Horsemanship  (fee) 

Physical  Fitness 

Personal  Defense  (fee) 

Stunts  and  Tumbling 

Basketball 

Volleyball 

Softball 

Squash 

Handball 

Paddle  Ball 

Running 


Physical  Education  and  Athletics     249 


Board  of  Trustees 


Board  ot  Trustees 

Officers  of  the  Hoard  ol  Trustees 

Monroe  Jackson  Rathbonc,  President  (until  6/30/73) 
Harold  Scheaffer  Mohler,  President  (after  7/1/73) 
Elmer  William  Click,  Secretary  and  Treasurer 
Paul  Justus  Franz,  Jr.,  Assistant  Secretary 

Corporate  Members 

Monroe  Jackson  Rathbone,  Ch.E.  '21,  Eng.D.,  Sc.D.,  LL.D. 
Chairman  of  the  Board  (Retired) 
Standard  Oil  Company  (New  Jersey) 

Leonard  Mead  Horton,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.  '28,  LL.D. 
Chairman  oj  the  Board  (Retired) 
Aubrey  C.  Lanston  &  Company,  Inc. 

Edward  A.  Curtis,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.  '26,  LL.B.,  LL.D. 
Vice  President  for  Public  Affairs  (Retired) 
New  Jersey  Bell  Telephone  Company 

Hugh  Paul  McFadden,  B.A.  '25,  LL.B.,  LL.D. 

Partner 

McFadden,  Riskin  &  Huston 

Ivor  Donald  Sims,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.  '33,  LL.D.  '70 
Executive  Vice  President  (Retired) 
Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

Edwin  Henry  Snyder,  E.E.  '23,  Eng.D.  '68 

Board  Chairman  &  Chief  Executive  Officer  (Retired) 

New  Jersey  Public  Service  Electric  &     as  Company 

William  Boa!  Eagleson,  Jr.,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.  '49, 
M.B.A.  '51 
President 
Girard  Bank 

C.  Lester  Hogan,  B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Hon.  A.M.,  Eng.D.,  D.Sc. 

Eng.D.  (Hon.) 

President 

Fairchild  Camera  and  Instrument  Corporation 

Donald  Billman  Stabler,  B.S.  in  C.E.  '30,  M.S. 

President 

Stabler  Construction  Company 

Edwin  Hays  Gott,  B.S.  in  I.E.  '29,  Eng.D.  '68,  Sc.D.,  LL.D. 
Chairman  of  the  Board  (Retired) 
United  States  Steel  Corporation 


Coi  pur. tie  Members  I  'merit ii 

Nevin  EIwcll  Funk,  E.E.  '05,  Eng.D. 
Exci  utive  l  'ice  President  (Retired) 
Philadelphia  Electric  Company 

Frank  William  Sterrctt.  A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D.,  S.T.D.,  LL.D. 

Bishop  (Retired) 

Episcopal  Diocese  oj  Bethlehem 

Andrew  Edward  Buchanan,  Jr.,  Ch.E.  '18,  Eng.D. 

General  Manager  (Retired) 

DuPont 

Frank  Lynn  Magce,  E.E.  '17,  Eng.D.,  LL.D. 
Chairman  of  the  Board  (Retired) 
Aluminum  Company  of  America 

Allen  Corson  Dubois,  B.A.  '25,  LL.D. 
Partner  (Retired) 
Wertheim  &  Company 

Kenneth  Lothaire  Isaacs,  M.E.  '25,  M.B.A.,  LL.D. 
Chairman,  Board  of  Trustees  (Retired) 
Massachusetts  Investors  Trust 

Henry  Randolph  Maddox,  M.E.  '21 

Vice  President  (Retired) 

American  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Company 

Members  Elected  by  Alumni 

(Number  in  parentheses  indicates  year  term  expires) 

Frank  Gregg  Kear,  E.E.  '26,  S.M.,  Sc.D.  (1973) 

Partner 

Kear  &  Kennedy 

John  Dickson  Harper,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.  '65, 

M.B.A.  '67  (1973) 

Chairman 

Cinemette  Corporation  of  America 

Malcolm  Carrington,  Jr.,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.  '39  (1974) 

Vice  President  and  Secretary 

New  Jersey  Public  Service  Electric  &  Gas  Company 

Kirk  P.  Pendleton,  B.S.,  B.A.  '63  (1974) 
Vice  President 
Pitcairn,  Incorporated 

The  Rt.  Rev.  Dean  T.  Stevenson,  B.A.  '37,  M.A.  '49, 

S.T.B.  '40,  S.T.D.,  D.D.  '69  (1975) 

Bishop 

Episcopal  Diocese  of  Harrisburg 

Alfred  Greene  Blake,  C.E.  '25  (1976) 

Chairman  of  the  Board 

Engelhard  Minerals  &  Chemicals  Corporation 

Harold  Sheaffer  Mohler,  B.S.  I.E.  '48  (1977) 

President 

Hershey  Foods  Corporation 


250     Board  of  Trustees 


William  C.  Hittinger,  B.S.  in  Met.  E.  '44  (1977) 
Executive  Vice  President 
Consumer  &  Solid  State  Electronics 
Radio  Corporation  of  America 

Appointed  Trustees 

(Number  in  parentheses  indicates  year  term  expires) 

Ralph  Lawrence  Wilson,  El.Met.  '21,  L.H.D.  '68  (1973) 
Director  of  Metallurgy  (Retired) 
Timken  Roller  Bearing  Company 

William  Frederic  Colclough,  B.A.  '25,  LL.B.  (1974) 
Chairman  of  the  Board  (Retired) 
American  Bank  Note  Company 

Stirling  Murray  Rust,  Jr.,  B.S."  in  M.E.  '34  (1974) 
Chairman  of  the  Board  (Retired) 
Rust  Engineering  Company 

Frank  Cornelius  Rabold,  B.S.  in  E.E.  '39,  Eng.D.  '70  (1975) 
Manager  of  General  Services 
Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

James  Herron  Walker,  B.A.  in  Econ.,  M.B.A.  (1975) 
Vice  President,  Finance  (Retired) 
Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

Leonard  Parker  Pool,  Eng.D.  '65,  Sc.D.,  D.S.S.  (1976) 
Chairman  and  Chief  Executive  Officer 
Air  Products  &  Chemicals,  Inc. 

Frederick  Seitz,  A.B.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.  '66  (1976) 

President 

The  Rockefeller  University 

Edmund  Fible  Martin,  M.E.,  Eng.D.,  LL.D.  '67  (1977) 
Chairman  of  the  Board  and  Chief  Executive  Officer  (Retired) 
Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

Honorary  Trustee 

Leonard  Jerome  Buck,  B.S.  in  E.M.  '15 

President  (Retired) 

Leonard ] .  Buck  Company,  Inc. 

Departmental  Visiting  Committees 

The  University  is  eager  to  strengthen  fruitful  communication 
with  the  society  which  it  serves,  and  that  desire  motivated 
the  establishment  of  Visiting  Committees  of  the  Board  of 
Trustees.  These  committees  annually  bring  to  the  University 
representatives  of  industry,  government,  and  education  who 
study  those  areas  of  the  University  which  they  are  most  com- 
petent to  judge,  and  report  periodically  on  their  evaluation  of 
those  areas.  Members  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  often  serve  as 
chairman  of  the  Visiting  Committees. 


Athletics 

G.  Douglas  Reed 

Vice  Presiden  t—Man  ufac  tu  ring 

McCormick  &  Co.,  Baltimore 

B.  L.  Bishop 

Vice  President— Sales 

Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

Edwin  H.  Gott 

Chairman  of  the  Board 

United  States  Steel  Corporation 

Edward  A.  Curtis 

Vice  President  for  Public  Affairs  (Retired) 

New  Jersey  Bell  Telephone  Co. 

Kirk  P.  Pendleton 
Vice  Presiden  t 
Pitcairn  Incorporated 

E.  H.  Snyder 

Board  Chairman  and  Chief  Executive  Officer  (Retired) 

Public  Service  Electric  &  Gas  Company 

Biology 

Robert  K.  Enders 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Biology 

Swarthmore  College 

Dr.  David  Pratt 

Professor  of  Oceanography 

Narragansett  Marine  Laboratory 

Dr.  George  W.  de  Villafranca 
Professor  of  Zoology 
Smith  College 

Dr.  Robert  P.  Gilbert 

Associate  Dean 

T\\e  Jefferson  Medical  College  of  Philadelphia 

Dr.  Frederick  J.  Pearson 
Physician 
Bethlehem,  Pa. 

H.  P.McFadden 

Partner 

McFadden,  Riskin  and  Huston 

Business  and  Economics 

Ross  Robertson 

School  of  Business  Administration 

Syracuse  University 

Ralph  Gomory 

T.J.  Watson  Research  Center 

York  town  Heights,  N.Y. 


Board  of  Trustees:  Departmental  Visiting  Committees     251 


Morris  Goldstein 

Francis  '.  DuPont  6  (  o.,  Sew  York 

Willis  I.  Winn 

Deem,  The  Wharton  School 

University  oj  Pennsylvania 

Leonard  M.  Horton 
Chairman  of  the  Hoard 
[ubrey  (.'.  /  anston  &  Company,  Inc.,  New  York  City 

Frank  L.  Magee 

Chairman  of  the  Hoard  (Retired) 

Aluminum  Company  of  America 

Chemical  Engineering 

John  Arnold 

I  'ice  President  for  Engineering 

Air  Products  &  Chemicals,  Inc. 

P.  L.  T.  Brian 

Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology 

Vernon  W.  Weekman,  Jr. 
Mobil  Research  Labs 
Paulsboro,  N.J. 

Dr.  Norman  A.  Copeland 

Corporate  Engineering  Department 

E.  I.  duPont  de  Nemours  and  Company 

Dr.  Stephen  F.  Goldmann 

Esso  Mathematics  and  Systems,  Inc. 

Dr.  J.  V.  R.  Kaufman 

Deputy  Director  of  Research,  Development  and  Engineering 

U.  S.  Army  Material  Command,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Alfred  G.  Blake 

Chairman  of  the  Board 

Englehard  Minerals  and  Chemical  Corporation 

Chemistry 

John  C.  Bailar,  Jr. 

Professor  of  Inorganic  Chemistry 

University  of  Illinois 

Ralph  Connor 
Chairman  of  the  Board 
Rohm  and  Haas  Company 

Frank  G.  Kear 

Partner 

Kear  and  Kennedy,  Washington,  D.C. 

Edward  E.  Smissman 

Chairman,  Department  of  Medicinal  Chemistry 

University  of  Kansas 

Charles  N.  Reilley 

Department  of  Chemistry 

University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 


Civil  Engineering 

S.  M.  Rust,  Jr. 

i  'hairman  oj  the  Board  (Retired) 

The  Rust  Engineering  Company 

Samuel  S.  Baxter 
Consulting  Engineer 
Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

Hunter  Rouse 

Carver  Professor  of  Mechanics  and  Hydraulics 

Tlie  University  of  Iowa 

Roblcy  Winfrey 
Consulting  Engineer 
Washington,  D.C. 

G.  A.  Leonards 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

Purdue  University 

Anton  Tedesko 
Consulting  Engineer 
Bronxville,  New  York 

Classics 

Dr.  Frank  C.  Bourne 
Professor  of  Classics 
Princeton  University 

W.  C.McDermott 

Professor  of  Classical  Studies 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Richard  W.  Corney 
Department  of  Old  Testament 
The  General  Theological  Seminary 

The  Rt.  Rev.  Dean  T.  Stevenson 

Bishop 

Diocese  of  Harrisburg 

Computing  Activities 

Thomas  E.  Kurtz 

Director,  Kiewit  Computation  Center 

Dartmouth  College 

S.J.  Fenves 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

University  of  Illinois 

R.  G.  E.  Franks 

Consultant,  Engineering  Services  Department 

E.  I.  duPont  de  Nemours  and  Company 

L.  R.  Dimmick 

General  Manager,  Corporate  Data  Processing 

Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

Dr.  James  F.  Poage 

Director  of  University  Computing 

Princeton  University 


252     Board  of  Trustees:  Departmental  Visiting  Committees 


Creative  Arts 

Philip  Berman 

President 

Hess's  Department  Store,  Allentown 

Paul  Kozelka 

Professor  of  Speech  and  Theatre 

Teachers  College,  Columbia  University 

Robert  K.  Beckwith 

Professor  and  Chairman,  Department  of  Music 

Bowdoin  College 

Robert  Spillman 

Partner 

Lovelace  and  Spillman,  Bethlehem 

Minott  Coombs 

Director  of  Dramatic  Activity 

Lafayette  College 

Ralph  L.  Wilson 

Director  of  Metallurgy  (Retired) 

Timken  Roller  Bearing  Company 

Iva  Dee  Hiatt 

Department  of  Music 

Smith  College,  Northampton,  Massachusetts 

Electrical  Engineering 

Herbert  J.  Carlin 

Head,  Department  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Cornell  University 

W.  Crawford  Dunlap 

Science  Administrator  to  U.  S.  Transportation  Systems 

Center,  Cambridge,  Massachusetts 

William  O.  Fleckenstein 

Executive  Director 

Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Holmdel,  N.J. 

Charles  H.  Titus 

Manager— Engin  eers 

General  Electric  Company,  Philadelphia 

Joseph  A.  Waldschmitt 

Presiden  t 

Page  Communications,  Washington,  D.C. 

Wayne  H.  Chen 

Chairman,  Department  of  Electrical  Engineering 

University  of  Florida 

John  F.  Linvill 

Executive  Head,  Department  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Stanford  University 

Edwin  H.  Snyder 

Board  Chairman  (Retired) 

Public  Service  Electric  &  Gas  Co.,  New  Jersey 


G.  B.  Herzog 

Director,  Solid  State  Technology  Center 

RCA,  Somerville,  N.J. 

English 

James  T.  Nardin 
Professor  of  English 
Louisiana  State  University 

Robert  M.  Lumiansky 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  English 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

Edwin  H.  Miller 
Professor  of  English 
New  York  University 

David  C.  Phillips 

Professor  and  Head  of  the  Department  of  Speech 

University  of  Connecticut 

Maurice  J.  Quinlan 
Professor  of  English 
Boston  College 

John  Strohmeyer 

Vice  President  and  Editor 

Bethlehem  (Pa.)  Globe-Times 

Charles  T.  Prouty 
Professor  of  English 
Yale  University 

Geological  Science 

James  Boyd 

Executive  Director 

National  Commission  on  Materials  Policy,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Richard  H.  Jahns 

Dean,  School  of  Earth  Sciences 

Stanford  University 

Edwin  W.  Roedder 

U.S.  Geological  Survey ,  Washington,  D.C. 

Donald  B.  Stabler 

Presiden  t 

Stabler  Construction  Co. 

MelvinJ.  Hill 

Vice  President  and  Coordinator 
Gulf  Oil  Corporation,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

Gilbert  L.  Hole 

Chief  Geologist,  Mining-Geology 

Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 


Board  of  Trustees:  Departmental  Visiting  Committees     253 


Govemmcnl 


Industrial  Engineering 


Henry  J.  Abraham 
Professoi  oj  Political  Science 
I  University  of  Pennsylvania 

Edward  N.  Cahn 

Partner 

Dower,  Huston  ami  Calm,  Allentown 

Carl  Schier 

Issistant  Professor  of  Law 
Urban  Law  Program,  School  of  Law,  University  of  Detroit 

H.  Gordon  Payrow 

Mayor 

City  of  Bethlehem 

Alfred  E.  Driscoll 

President 

Warner-Lambert  Pharmaceutical  Co. 

Peter  W.  Rodino,  Jr. 

Member,  U.S.  House  of  Representatives 

(10th  District,  New  Jersey) 

Edward  A.  Curtis 

Vice  President  (Retired) 

New  Jersey  Bell  Telephone  Company 

History 

Robert  D.  Cross 
Dean  of  Faculty 
University  of  Virginia 

Laurence  C.  Howard 
Dean,  Graduate  School 
University  of  Pittsburgh 

George  T.  Peck 

Vice  President  (Retired) 

Peck  and  Peck 

Joseph  R.  Strayer 
Dayton-Stockton  Professor 
Princeton  University 

Paul  A.  Varg 

Professor  of  History  and  Dean  of  the  College  of  Arts 

and  Letters 

Michigan  State  University 

Henry  R.  Winkler 

Vice  President  for  Academic  Affairs 

Rutgers  University 

Morgan  J.  Cramer 

President  and  Chief  Executive  Officer  (Retired) 

P.  Lorillard  and  Company,  Inc. 


Marvin  E.  Gantz 

Vice  President    Manufacturing 

aluminum  Company  of  Arm n,  a 

Andrew  Schultz 
Dean  of  Engineering 
Cornell  University 

E.  H.Gott 

Chairman  of  the  Hoard 

United  States  Steel  Corporation 

J.  E.  Angle 

Executive  Vice  President— Production 

United  States  Steel  Corporation 

Paul  D.  O'Donnell 

Director— Manufacturing,  Planning  and  Control 

Westinghouse  Electric  Corporation 

International  Relations 

Morton  Blaustein 
President 
Blaustein  Industries 

Robert  Bowie 

Director 

Center  for  International  Affairs,  and  Clarence  Dillon 

Professor  of  International  Affairs 

Harvard  University 

Richard  A.  Falk 

Albert  G.  Milbank  Professor  of  International  Law 

and  Practice 

Princeton  University 

Monroe  J.  Rathbone 

Chairman  of  the  Board  (Retired) 

Standard  Oil  Company  (New  Jersey) 

Frederick  Seitz 
President 
Rockefeller  University 

Library 

John  H.  Berthel 

Librarian,  Milton  S.  Eisenhower  Library 

The  Johns  Hopkins  University 

Carl  Jackson 

Dean  of  Library  Administration 

Indiana  University 

Thomas  R.  Adams 

Librarian,  John  Carter  Brown  Library 

Brown  University 


254     Board  of  Trustees:  Departmental  Visiting  Committees 


David  Kaser 
Director  of  Libraries 
Cornell  University 

Thomas  H.  Mott 

Demi,  Graduate  School  of  Library  Science 

Rutgers  University 

Dr.  Jack  Vanderryn 

Technical  Assistant  to  the  Director  of  the  Division  of 
Applied  Technology,  U.  S.  Atomic  Energy  Commission, 
Washington,  D.  C. 

Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies 

Dr.  Scott  C.  Daubin 

Chairman,  Ocean  Engineering  Department 

University  of  Miami,  Florida 

Melvin  W.  First 

Professor  of  Environmental  Health  Services 

School  of  Public  Health,  Harvard  University 

George  H.  Keller 

Director,  Marine  Geology  &  Geophysics  Laboratory 
Atlantic  Oceanographic  Laboratory,  National  Oceanic  and 
Atmospheric  Administration,  Miami,  Florida 

J.  M.  Prescott 

Dean,  College  of  Science 

Texas  A  &  M  University 

George  T.  Scott 
Professor  of  Biology 
Oberlin  College 

Robert  Wright,  Jr. 

Manager,  Permasep  Products 

E.  I.  duPont  de  Nemours  and  Company 

Mathematical  Science 

The  Visiting  Committee  for  the  Mathematical  Sciences  over- 
sees the  work  not  only  of  the  Department  of  Mathematics, 
but  also  that  of  the  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathe- 
matics, Department  of  Philosophy  and  Center  for  the  In- 
formation Sciences. 

Vincent  E.  Guiliano 
Arthur  D.  Little,  Inc. 

Paul  Halmos 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

University  of  Indiana 

Henry  O.  Pollack 

Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Inc. 

F.J.  Weyl 

Dean  of  Sciences  and  Mathematics 

Hunter  College 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 

Howard  W.  Emmons 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Harvard  University 

Edward  G.Uhl 

President  and  Chief  Executive  Officer 

Fairchild  Industries,  Inc. 

G.  Douglas  Reed 

Vice  President— Manufacturing 

McCormick  and  Company,  Baltimore,  Md. 

George  F.  Carrier 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Harvard  University 

Daniel  C.  Drucker 

Dean,  College  of  Engineering 

University  of  Illinois 

Leo  Steg 

Manager 

Space  Science  Laboratory,  General  Electric  Company, 

Valley  Forge,  Pa. 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

Donald  Blickwede 

Vice  President  and  Director  of  Research 

Bethlehem  Steel  Corporation 

Morris  Fine 

Professor  of  Materials  Science 

Northwestern  University 

Walter  Hibbard 

Vice  President,  Research  and  Development 

Owings-Cornmg  Fiberglas 

Nathan  Promisel 

Executive  Director 

Materials  Advisory  Board,  National  Research  Council, 

National  Academy  of  Sciences 

Ralph  T.  Wilson 

Director  of  Metallurgy  (Retired) 

Timken  Roller  Bearing  Co. 

L.  H.  Van  Vlack 

Department  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

University  of  Michigan 

Dr.  N.  Bruce  Hannay 

Bell  Telephone  Laboratories 

Eric  Baer 

Case  Western  Reserve  University 

W.  O.  Philbrook 

Department  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

Carnegie-Mellon  University 


Board  of  Trustees:  Departmental  Visiting  Committees     255 


Modern  Foreign  I  .manages  .nul  I  itiraturcs 

William  Hittingcr 

Vice  President  and  General  Manager 

Radio  i  orporation  oj   [merica 

Dr.  Harold  Jantz 
Professoi  oj  i  lerman 
Johns  Hopkins  University 

Dr.  Robert  G.  Mead,  Jr. 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
University  oj  Connecticut 

Dr.  Edward  D.  Sullivan 

Dean  of  the  College  and  Professor  of  French 

Princeton  University 

Physics 

John  F.  Clark 

Director 

Coddard  Space  Flight  Center,  Greenbelt,  Md. 

Ira  G.  Hedriclc 

Vice  Presiden  t— Engineering 

Gntmmaii  Aircraft  Engineering  Corporation,  Bethpage,  N.Y. 

Frederick  C.  Brown 
Physics  Department 
University  of  Illinois 

Sidney  Millman 

Director  of  Physics  Research 

Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  Murray  Hill,  N.J. 

Robert  Serber 
Professor  of  Physics 
Columbia  University 

Robert  H.  Dicke 
Department  of  Physics 
Princeton  University 

John  Gait 

Director,  Solid  State  Electronics  Research  Laboratories 

Bell  Telephone  Laboratories 

Psychology 

Frank  Geldard 
Professor  of  Psychology 
Princeton  University 

Harold  Gulliksen 

Center  for  Psychological  Studies 

Educational  Testing  Service,  Princeton,  N.J. 

Richard  Solomon 
Professor  of  Psychology 
University  of  Pennsylvania 


Richard  Trumball 

<>//,,,   (>/  \aval  Research,  Washing/mi,  /).(.'. 

H.  P.  McFaddcn 

Partner 

W.  I  adden,  Riskin  and  Huston,  Bethlehem 

Social  Relations 

Robert  Bierstcdt 
Department  of  Sociology 
University  of  Virginia 

Kenneth  J.  Gergen 

Chairman,  Department  of  Psychology 

Swarthmorc  College 

Donald  R.  Young 
President  (Retired) 
Russell  Sage  Foundation 

H.  P.  McFadden 

Partner 

McFadden,  Riskin  and  Huston,  Bethlehem 

Harry  C.  Bredemeier 
Department  of  Sociology 
Rutgers  University 


256     Board  of  Trustees:  Departmental  Visiting  Committees 


University  Administration 


Administration 

Office  of  the  President 

Willard  Deming  Lewis,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  L.H.D. 
President 

Albert  Charles  Zettlemoyer,  Ph.D.,  D.Sc. 
Provost  and  Vice  President 

Paul  Justus  Franz,  Jr.,  M.A. 
Vice  President— Development 

Joseph  Francis  Libsch,  Sc.D. 
Vice  President— Research 

Preston  Parr,  M.S. 

Dean  and  Vice  President— Student  Affairs 

Elmer  William  Glick,  B.A. 
Vice  President  and  Treasurer 

Richard  Moore  Spriggs,  Ph.D. 
Vice  President— Administration 

Eric  Van  Tine  Ottervik,  Ph.D. 

Vice  Provost  and  Coordinator  of  University  Planning 

Mary  Isabelle  Malone,  B.A. 
Secretary  to  the  President 

Robert  Sayre  Taylor,  LL.B. 
Legal  Counsel 

Academic  Offices 

John  J.  Karakash,  M.S. 
Dean,  College  of  Engineering 

John  A.  Stoops,  Ed.D. 
Dean,  School  of  Education 

Robert  Daniel  Stout,  Ph.D. 
Dean,  Graduate  School 

Brian  George  Brockway,  LL.M. 

Dean,  College  of  Business  and  Economics 

John  W.  Hunt,  Ph.D. 

Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Science 

George  Mark  Ellis,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Science 

Robert  Taylor  Gallagher,  D.E.M. 
Associate  Dean,  College  of  Engineering 


Max  Donald  Snider,  M.B.A. 

Assistant  Dean,  College  of  Business  and  Economics 

Norman  Harold  Sam,  Ed.D. 
Director,  Summer  Session 

Nan  Van  Gieson,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Dean,  School  of  Education  and  Assistant  Director, 

Summer  Session 

Berry  Gargal  Richards,  M.L.S. 
Secretary  to  the  Faculty 

Student  Personnel  Services 

Office  of  the  Dean  of  Students 

Charles  Wilfrid  Brennan,  M.B.A. 
Dean  of  Students 

Arthur  Howard  Mann,  S.T.B. 
Associate  Dean  of  Students 

Office  of  the  Dean  of  Student  Life 

William  Leroy  Quay,  Ph.D. 
Dean  of  Student  Life 

Ruth  Ann  Hurley,  M.S. 
Associate  Dean  of  Student  Life 

Nathan  Walter  Harris,  B.S. 
Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Life 

Joseph  Hurley  Reynolds,  M.A. 
Assistant  to  the  Dean  of  Student  Life 

Barbara  Elizabeth  Solt,  M.S.S.W. 

Coordinator  of  Volunteer  Community  Services 

Office  of  the  Dean  of  Residence 

Clarence  Bowen  Campbell,  M.A. 
Dean  of  Residence 

Robert  Peter  Shurtleff,  M.Ed. 

Director  of  Residence  Halls,  Assistant  Dean  of  Residence 

Evelyn  Strawn  Eberman,  B.A. 
Assistant  Director  of  Residence  Halls 

James  A.  Tiefenbrunn,  M.B.A. 

Assistant  Director  of  Residence  Halls,  Assistant  Dean  of 

Residence 

Business  Offices 

Donald  Walter  Schmoyer,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm. 
Assistant  Treasurer 

Joseph  Petronio,  B.S. 
Bursar 

Lou  V.  Forcum 
Assistant  Bursar 


University  Administration    257 


Albert  Charles  Molter,  M.S. 
Purchasing    \gcnl 

John  Lester  Kcm merer 
Issistant  Purchasing   Igent 

William  Monroe  Glose  111,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm. 
mntant 

Larry  M.  Milcy,  B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm. 
Assistant  Accountant 

Clark  W.  Il.ihn.  B.A. 
issistant    lecountant 

Robert  Warren  Numbers,  B.S. 
Director,  Physical  Plant 

Paul  Theodore  Miller 

Superintendent,  Buildings  and  Grounds 

Kenneth  E.  Orben,  B.S.  in  E.E. 

Assistant  Superintendent,  Buildings  and  Grounds 

Frank  S.  Donchcz 
Captain  of  Police 

Robert  W.  Bell,  M.S. 
Director,  Bookstore 

Stanley  Frederick  Heffner 
Manager,  Bookstore 

Kenneth  M.  Trumbore,  B.A. 
Assistant  Manager,  Bookstore 

Office  of  the  Registrar 

James  Harold  Wagner,  M.A. 
Registrar 

Frederick  Eugene  Ressler,  A.B. 
Associate  Registrar 

Rodney  Earl  Ressler 
Assistant  Registrar 

Claire  C.  Biser 
Assistant  Registrar 

Office  of  Development 

Robert  Mark  Holcombe,  M.S. 
Director  of  Development 

Michael  G.  Bolton,  M.B.A. 

Director  of  Corporate  and  Foundation  Resources 

Charles  Keller  Zug,  B.S. 

Advisor,  Bequests,  Trusts  and  Insurance 

Austin  V.  McClain,  M.A. 
Consultant 

Stuart  R.  Christie,  B.A. 
Assistant  to  the  Director 


Office  <>i  Community  Relations 

I. lines  W.  Harper,  M.S. 
I  Hrector 

Office  o(  Physical  Planning 

H.  Joris  Rossc,  B.A. 
Director 

Ronald  J.  Horvath,  B.A. 
Assistant  Planner 

Anne  C.  Solderitsch 
Assistant  to  the  Planner 

Office  ot  Public  Information 

Samuel  Irvin  Connor,  B.A. 
Director 

Roy  Foster,  Jr.,  B.A. 
Assistant  Director 

Joseph  Hardy  Whritenour 
Assistant  Director 

Janet  Donna  Connor,  M.A. 
Assistant  to  the  Director 

Diane  Kay  Shaffer,  B.S. 
Assistant  to  the  Director 

Office  of  University  Publications 

George  Leonard  Beezer,  B.A. 
Director 

Marvin  Howard  Simmons,  M.A. 
Assistant  Director 

Lynn  Dianne  Klein,  B.A. 
Production  Assistant 

Sara  Louise  Paden,  B.A. 
Administrative  Assistant 

Office  of  Admission 

Samuel  Harold  Missimer,  B.A. 
Director 

James  Willard  McGeady,  B.A. 
Associate  Director 

Robert  F.  Reeves,  B.A. 
Assistant  Director 

Linda  L.  Tipton,  B.A. 
Assistant  to  the  Director 


258      University  Administration 


Office  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid 

William  Edward  Stanford,  B.A. 
Director 

Deborah  J.  Dwyer,  B.S. 
Assistant  to  the  Director 


Alumni  Association 

James  W.  Niemeyer,  B.S. 
Executive  Director 

Harry  B.  Ramsey,  B.A. 

Associate  Executive  Director,  Editor,  Alumni  Bulletin 

Dennis  R.  Diehl,  M.B.A. 

Assistant  to  the  Executive  Director 

Lucile  Barrett,  A.B. 

Assistant  to  the  Editor,  Alumni  Bulletin 

Margaret  E.  F.  Rocheleau,  B.A. 
Assistant  to  the  Editor,  Alumni  Bulletin 

University  Libraries 

James  Decker  Mack,  M.A. 
Director  of  Libraries 

Lorraine  C.  Abel 
Assistant  to  the  Director 

Brian  Sanders,  M.A. 

Associate  Librarian,  Linderman  Library 

Berry  Gargal  Richards,  M.L.S. 
Associate  Librarian,  Mart  Library 

Margaret  Linn  Dennis,  B.S.  in  L.S. 
Assistant  Librarian,  Readers'  Service 

Mary  Gruber  Riley,  M.S.  in  L.S. 

Head  Reference  Librarian,  Linderman  Library 

Alice  Frances  Bahr,  B.A. 
Assistant  Reference  Librarian 

Margaret  N.  Smith,  M.L.S. 
Assistant  Librarian,  Acquisitions 

Georgia  Emily  Raynor,M.S.  in  L.S. 
Assistant  Librarian,  Cataloging 

Catherine  Riley  Flecksteiner 
Serials  Cataloger 

William  J.  Fincke.Jr.,  M.L.S. 
Social  Science  Cataloger 

Caroline  Cochrane  Nippert,  M.L.S. 
Science  Cataloger 

Daniel  J.  Weine,  A.M. L.S. 
Humanities  Cataloger 


Sharon  Matley  Siegler,  M.L.S. 
Reference  Librarian,  Mart  Library 

Kenneth  J.  Veprek,  M.S. L.S. 
Reference  Librarian,  Mart  Library 

Olive  Stengel 
Circulation  Supervisor 

Clara  M.  Fistner 
Xerox  Technician 

Packer  Memorial  Chapel 

The  Rev.  Hubert  L.  Flesher,  M.A. 
Chaplain 

Robert  Benjamin  Cutler,  M.A. 
Organist 

University  Placement  and  Personnel  Services 

Everett  Anderson  Teal,  M.A. 
Director 

Edward  J.  Trost,  M.A. 
Assistant  Director  of  Personnel 

Richard  B.  Fisher,  M.A. 
Assistant  Director  of  Placement 

Helen  Z.  Rayner 
Administrative  Assistant 

University  Counseling  Services 

Andrew  J.  Edmiston,  Ph.D. 
Director 

Robert  Roupen  Panos,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Director 

William  Joseph  Sibley,  M.Ed. 
Counselor 

Patricia  A.  Finady,  B.A. 
Administrative  Assistant 

University  Health  Service 

P.  Lawrence  Kreider,  M.D. 
Acting  Director 

Duane  E.  Stackhouse,  M.D. 
Associate  Director 

Lucille  H.  Pleiss,  R.N. 
Administrative  Assistant 

Doris  Transue,  R.N. 
Nurse 

Dorothy  Delp,  R.N. 
Nu  rse 


University  Administration      259 


James  P.  Mathews 
Physical  Therapist 

Division  of  Intercollegiate  Athletics  ami  Physical  Education 

William  Bader  Lcckonby,  B.S. 

Direi  tor  oj  Athletics  and  Physical  Education 

Gerald  Grant  Leeman,  B.S. 
Assistant  fi>  the  Director  of  Athletics 

N.  Craig  Anderson 
Business  Manager 

John  S.  Steckbcck,  M.Sc. 

Director  of  Intramurals  and  Recreation  and  Assistant  Director 

of  Physical  Education 

Helen  S.  Bond,  B.S. 

Assistant  Director  of  Women's  Physical  Education 

J.  Bruce  Gardiner,  M.Sc. 
Physical  Education  Assistant 

Administrative  Services 

Thomas  Joseph  Verbonitz,  M.B.A. 
Director 

Administrative  Systems  Office 

William  J.  McGarry,  M.B.A. 
Director 

Wayne  Hotfman 
Assistant  Director 

David  L.  March,  Ph.D. 
Systems  Programmer 

Kathleen  A.  Kemmerle,  B.S. 
Systems  Programmer 

Barbara  Long 
Systems  Programmer 

Mailing  and  Central  Copying  Office 

Catherine  Franklin 
Director 


(cuter  lor  the  Application  ol  Mathematics 

Ronald  S.  Rivlin,  Sc.D. 
Director 

Philip  A.  Blythc,  Ph.D. 
Dominic  G.  B.  Edelcn,  Ph.D. 
Gregory  T.  McAllister.  PhD. 
Gerald  F.  Smith,  Ph.D. 
Eric  Varley,  Ph.D. 
Eric  P.  Salathc.Ph.D. 
Rolf  K.  Adenstcdt,  Ph.D. 
Anastasios  Kydoniefs,  Ph.D. 
Ramamirtham  Venkataraman,  Ph.D. 
Yakovos  Kazakia,  Ph.D. 

Kenneth  N.  Sawyers,  Ph.D. 
Executive  Officer 

Computing  Center 

John  E.Walker,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Computing  Center  &  Associate  Professor,  Economics 

John  E.  Smith,  M.A. 
Manager,  Computer  Service 

William  F.  Hollabaugh,  Ph.D. 

Manager,  Systems  Programming 

Joseph  F.  Scullion,  Jr.,  B.S. 

Manager,  Special  Projects  and  Program  Development 

Joseph  P.  Holzer 
Administrative  Assistant 

Robert  A.  Pfenning,  M.B.A. 
Coordinator,  User  Services 

Carol  D.  Rauch 
Librarian 

Gary  E.  McConnell,  B.S. 

Group  Leader,  Applications  Programming 

John  H.  Morrison 
Operations  Supervisor 

William  E.  Schiesser,  Ph.D. 

Analyst,  Computing  Center  &  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 


Centers  and  Institutes 

Office  of  Research 

George  Robert  Jenkins,  Ph.M. 
Director 

John  M.  Cheezum,  B.S. 
Fiscal  Associate 

Mary  Jo  Hill,  M.A. 
Editorial  Associate 


Center  for  Health  Sciences 

Institute  for  Pathobiology 

Thomas  C.  Cheng,  Ph.D. 

Director 

Experimental  Parasitology;  Immunology;  Invertebrate  Pathology 

Edward  J.  Benz,  M.D. 
Medical  Microbiology 

Ann  Cali,  Ph.D. 

Protozoology;  Electron  Microscopy 


260      University  Administration:  Centers  and  Institutes 


Henry  N.  Fremount,  Dr.  PH. 

Protozoology;  Electron  microscopy;  Malariology 

Sidney  S.  Herman,  Ph.D. 

Director  of  the  South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute;  Pollution 

Biology 

Richard  G.  Malsberger,  Ph.D. 
Virology;  Tissue  Cultures 

Randall  W.  Snyder,  Jr.,  M.D. 

Medical  Parasitology ;  Gastrointestinal  physiology 

Division  of  Biological  Chemistry  and  Biophysics 

Ned  D.  Heindel,  Ph.D. 

Director 

Medicinal  Chemistry;  Bioorganic  Chemistry 

Brent  W.  Bensen,  Ph.D. 

Radiation  biophysics;  Tructure  of  nucleic  acids 

Frederick  M.  Fowkes,  Ph.D. 

Physical  chemistry  of  biological  surf  aces 

Joseph  R.  Merkel,  Ph.D. 
Microbial  enzyme  biochemistry 

William  E.  Ohnesorge,  Ph.D. 
Clinical  chemistry 

Keith  Schray,  Ph.D. 

Intermediary  metabolism;  Enzyme  kinetics 

Thomas  E.  Young,  Ph.D. 

Biosynthetic  pathways;  Melanin  biochemistry 

Eugene  W.  Rice,  Ph.D. 
Clinical  chemistry 

Division  of  Bioengineering 

Arturs  Kalnins,  Ph.D. 

Director 

Physical  properties  of  cell  surfaces 

Russell  E.  Benner,  Ph.D. 
Prosthetics 

Nikolai  Eberhart,  Ph.D. 
Bioinstrumen  tation 

George  Krauss,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 

Fine  structure;  Biological  implants 

Dean  P.  Updike,  Ph.D. 
Properties  of  biological  surfaces 

Division  of  Visual  Science 

George  K.  Shortess,  Ph.D. 

Director 

Psy chobiology  of  vision;  Neurophysiology 


Eugene  Allen,  Ph.D. 
Color  Science 

William  A.  Barrett,  Ph.D. 

Instrumentation  as  applied  to  vision  research 

Ernest  E.  Bergman,  Ph.D. 
Optics;  Laser  physics 

Sidney  Stecher,  Ph.D. 
Visual  discrimination 

Center  for  Information  Science 

Donald  John  Hillman,  M.Litt. 
Director 

Andrew  James  Kasarda,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Director 

Herbert  Rubenstein,  Ph.D. 
Psy  cholinguis  tics 

John  J.  O'Connor,  Ph.D. 
Information  Retrieval 

Robert  Featherstone  Barnes,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 
Mathematical  Linguistics 

James  Sproat  Green,  Ph.D. 
Special  Projects 

Louis  W.  Stern,  Ph.D. 
Batch  Services 

Lawrence  J.  Davis,  M.S. 
Assistant  to  the  Director 

Associates 

Robert  Clifford  Williamson,  Ph.D. 
Man-Machine  Interface 

James  D.  Mack,  M.A. 
Library  Systems 

Berry  Gargal  Richards,  M.L.S. 
Library  Automation 

Sharon  L.  Siegler,  M.L.S. 
LEADERMART  User  Services 

JohnE.  Walker,  Ph.D. 
Computing  Liaison 

LynnS.  Beedle,  Ph.D. 

Tall  Buildings  Information  Systems 

Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental  Studies 

James  Marshall  Parks,  Ph.D. 
Director 

Joseph  R.  Merkel,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Marine  Biochemistry  Laboratory 


University  Administration:  Centers  and  Institutes     261 


Adrian  F.  Richards,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Marine  Geotechnii  al  I  aboratory 

Sidney  Samuel  Herman,  Ph.D. 

DiVi  ■  tor,  South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Environmental  Engineering  Laboratory 

Saul  Benjamin  Barber,  Ph.D. 

Physiology  i>/  Invertebrates 

Arthur  William  Brune,  Ph.D. 
Hydrology 

Bobb  Carson,  Ph.D. 

( leeanie  Sedimentology 

Robert  William  Coughlin,  Ph.D. 
Air  Pollution  Studies 

Jacob  De  Rooy,  Ph.D. 
Econometric  Modeling 

Alfred  James  Diefenderfer,  Ph.D. 
Analytical  Chemistry 

Walter  H.  Graf,  Ph.D. 

River  and  Occanographic  Hydraulics 

Terence  J.  Hirst,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Director,  Marine  Geotechnical  Laboratory 

Matthew  H.  Hulbert,  Ph.D. 
Analytical  Chemistry 

John  B.  Pearce,  Ph.D. 
Benthic  Ecology 

John  Donald  Ryan,  Ph.D. 
Sedimentology 

Alan  Hugh  Stenning,  Sc.D. 
Geophysical  Fluid  Dynamics 

Theodore  Alfred  Terry,  Ph.D. 
Instrument  Design 

Wesley  J.  Van  Sciver,  Ph.D. 

Marine  Optics,  Nuclear  Applications 

Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

Henry  Leidheiser,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 
Director 

John  W.  Vanderhoff,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Director— Coatings,  and  Director,  NPIRI 

Jacqueline  Marie  Fetsko,  M.S. 
Administrative  Assistant 

Eugene  M.  Allen,  Ph.D. 
Color  Science  Laboratory 


Robert  William  Coughlin,  Ph.D. 
Fine  Particle  Dispersions 

Frederick  M.  Fowkes,  Ph.D. 

Surface  Chemistry 

Kamil  Klicr,  Ph.D. 
Catalysis 

Fortunato  Joseph  Micalc,  Ph.D. 
Colloid  Chemistry 

Gary  Wayne  Poehlein,  Ph.D. 
Rheology 

Gary  W.  Simmons,  Ph.D. 
Electron  Spectroscopy 

Robert  Peh-Ying  Wei,  Ph.D. 
Stress  Corrosion,  Corrosion  Fatigue 

John  D.  Wood,  Ph.D. 
Stress  Corrosion 

Albert  C.  Zettlemoyer,  Ph.D. 
Surface  Chemistry  and  Wetting 

Research  Associates 

Mohammed  S.  El-Aasser,  Ph.D. 
Elsie  Kellerman,  Ph.D. 
Richard  Kellerman,  Ph.D. 
Mladen  Topic,  Ph.D. 

Center  for  Social  Research 

L.  Reed  Tripp,  Ph.D. 
Acting  Coordinator 
Director,  Manpower  Research 

Roy  Herrenkohl,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Behavioral  Science  Program 

J.  Richard  Aronson,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Business  and  Economics  Program 

Leonard  Ruchelman,  Ph.D. 
Director,  Urban  Studies  Program 

Charles  Brownstein,  Ph.D. 
Urban  Studies  Program 

Robert  Thornton,  Ph.D. 
Manpower  Studies 


Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory 

Lynn  Simpson  Beedle,  Ph.D. 
Director 

George  C.  Driscoll,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Director 

John  W.  Fisher,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Director 


262      University  Administration:  Centers  and  Institutes 


Bruce  A.  Laub,  M.B.A. 
Administrative  Assistant 

Deborah  J.  Ritter,  B.A. 
Administrative  Assistant 

Lambert  Tall,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Fatigue  and  Fracture  Division 

Hsai-Yang  Fang,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Geotechnical  Engineering  Division 

Walter  H.  Graf,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Hydraidics  and  Sanitary  Engineering  Division 

Le-Wu  Lu,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Building  Systems  Division 

Ti  Huang,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Structural  Concrete  Division 

John  W.  Fisher,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Structural  Connections  Division 

Alexis  Ostapenko,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Structural  Stability  Division 

Roger  C.  Slutter,  Ph.D. 
Director,  Operations  Division 

Celal  N.  Kostem,  Ph.D. 

Chairman,  Computer  Systems  Group 

Kenneth  R.  Harpel 
Laboratory  Superintendent 

Hugh  T.  Sutherland 
Instruments  Associate 

Associates 

Arthur  W.  Brune,  Ph.D. 
Wai-Fah  Chen,  Ph.D. 
J.  Hartley  Daniels,  Ph.D. 
Terence  J.  Hirst,  Ph.D. 
Robert  L.  Johnson,  Ph.D. 
Willard  A.  Murray,  Ph.D. 
Richard  Roberts,  Ph.D. 
Paul  J.  Usinowicz,  Ph.D. 
David  A.  VanHorn,  Ph.D. 
Robert  P.  Y.  Wei,  Ph.D. 
B.  T.  Yen,  Ph.D. 

Materials  Research  Center 

Donald  M.  Smyth,  Ph.D. 
Director 

David  A.  Thomas,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Director,  and  Director,  Materials  Liaison  Program 

Sidney  R.  Butler,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Advanced  Materials  Laboratory 


Walter  E.  Dahlke,  Ph.D. 
Advanced  Materials  Laboratory 

Frank  J.  Feigl,  Ph.D. 
Advanced  Materials  Laboratory 

D.  P.  H.  Hasselman,  Ph.D. 

Director,  Physical  Ceramics  Laboratory 

Richard  Warren  Hertzberg,  Ph.D. 
Director,  Mechanical  Behavior  Laboratory 

R.  Wayne  Kraft,  Ph.D. 
Advanced  Materials  Laboratory 

George  Krauss,  Jr.,  Sc.D. 
Electron  Microscopy  Laboratory 

John  Alexander  Manson,  Ph.D. 
Director,  Polymer  Laboratory 

Michael  R.  Notis,  Ph.D. 
Advanced  Materials  Laboratory 

Richard  Roberts,  Ph.D. 
Mechanical  Behavior  Laboratory 

Leslie  H.  Sperling,  Ph.D. 
Polymer  Laboratory 

Richard  Moore  Spriggs,  Ph.D. 
Physical  Ceramics  Laboratory 

Lawrence  Henry  Gipson  Institute  for  Eighteenth-Century 
Studies 

Lawrence  H.  Leder,  Ph.D. 
Coordinator 

Peter  Beidler,  Ph.D. 
Josef  M.  Brozek,Ph.D. 
Ernest  N.  Dilworth,  Ph.D. 
Jonathan  B.  Elkus,  M.A. 
Edward  J.  Gallagher,  Ph.D. 

E.  Anthony  James,  Ph.D. 
J.  Ralph  Lindgren,  Ph.D. 
JohnB.  Owens,  Ph.D. 
Richard  J.  Redd,  M.F.A. 
James  S.  Saeger,  Ph.D. 
John  A.  Van  Eerde,  Ph.D. 

D.  Alexander  Waldenrath,  Ph.D. 
Robert  C.  Williamson,  Ph.D. 
W.  Ross  Yates,  Ph.D. 

Institute  of  Fracture  and  Solid  Mechanics 

George  C.  M.  Sih,  Ph.D. 
Director 

Robert  Badaliance,  M.S. 
Tony  E.P.Chen,  Ph.D. 
Fazil  Erdogan,  Ph.D. 
Ronald  J.  Hartranft,  Ph.D. 


University  Administration:  Centers  and  Institutes     263 


Peter  D.  Hilton,  Ph.D. 

Arturs  K.ilnins,  Ph.D. 
Martin  E.  Kipp,  M.S. 
Robert  A.  1  ucas,  Ph.D. 
Richard  Roberts,  Ph.D. 
Robert  G.  Sarubbi,  Ph.D. 
Dean  P.  Updike.  Ph.D. 
Robert  P.  V.  Wei.  Ph.D. 


H.iydcn  N.  Pritchard,  Ph.D. 
Chemical  •■•  i  sni igraphy 

J.Donald  Ryan,  Ph.D. 

Geological  history  of  coastal  salt  marshes,  sedimentation 


Institute  lor  Mct.il  Forming 

Betzalel  Avitzur,  Ph.D. 
Director 

Walter  C.  Hahn,  Ph.D. 
Program  Manager 

South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute 

Sidney  S.  Herman,  Ph.D. 

Director 

Biological  oceanography,  marine  ecology,  food  chain 

relationships 

Saul  B.  Barber,  Ph.D. 
Physiology  of  invertebrates 

David  M.  Bell,  Ph.D. 
Behavior  of  marine  animals 

Bobb  Carson,  Ph.D. 
Geological  oceanography 

Thomas  C.  Cheng,  Ph.D. 

Marine  symbiosis,  shellfish  pathobiology,  invertebrate 

hn munobiology,  parasitology 

A.  James  Diefenderfer,  Ph.D. 
Analytical  chemistry,  instrumentation 

Walter  Graf,  Ph.D. 

Hydraulics  of  sediment  transport 

Ned  D.  Heindel,  Ph.D. 
Photochemistry 

Matthew  H.  Hulbert,  Ph.D. 
Chemical  oceanography 

Robert  L.  Johnson,  Ph.D. 
Tertiary  sewage  treatment 

Richard  G.  Malsberger,  Ph.D. 
Viral  diseases  offish 

Joseph  R.  Merkel,  Ph.D. 

Biochemistry  of  marine  bacterial  enzymes 

James  M.  Parks,  Ph.D. 
Beach  preservation 


264      University  Administration:  Centers  and  Institutes 


Faculty  &  Staff 


David  C.  Amidonjr.  (1965,  1971) 

Lecturer  in  Social  Relations 

B.  A.,  Juniata  College,  1957;  M.A.,  Penn  State,  1959. 


The  first  date  after  the  name  indicates  the  date  of  first 
appointment  to  continuous  service  on  the  faculty  or  staff; 
the  second  date,  when  the  first  fails  to  do  so,  indicates  the 
date  of  appointment  to  present  professional  rank.  Listings  of 
emeriti  faculty,  and  those  members  of  the  faculty  and  staff 
deceased,  retired,  or  resigned  in  the  past  year  are  noted  at  the 
end  of  this  section. 

Lorraine  C.  Abel  (1969) 

Assistant  to  the  Director  of  Libraries 

Benjamin  L.  Abramowitz  (1972) 

Professor  of  Military  Science 

B.S.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute,  1955;  M.B.A.,  George 

Washington,  1971. 

Lt.  Col.,  Army. 

Ljubisa  S.  Adamovic  (1973) 
Visiting  Professor  of  Economics 

John  William  Adams  (1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  University  of  Nebraska,  1952;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

North  Carolina,  1962. 

Rolf  K.  Adenstadt  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Brown,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

David  Adkins  (1972) 

Staff  Assistant,  Aerospace  Studies 

Staff  Sergeant,  U.S.A.F. 

Eugene  Murray  Allen  (1967) 

Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Director,  Color  Science 

Laboratory,  CSCR 

B.A.,  Columbia,  1938;  M.S.,  Stevens  Institute  of  Technology, 

1944;  Ph.D.,  Rutgers,  1952. 

Goren  Alpstein  (1967) 

Postdoctoral  Research  Associate  in  Civil  Engineering 
Teknologie  Licentiat— Royal,  Institute  of  Technology 
(Sweden),  1967. 

Carlos  J.  Alvare  (1968,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Fine  Arts 

B.A.,  Yale,  1947;  M.C.P.,  Penn,  1952;  M.Arch., 

Yale,  1973. 


Norman  Craig  Anderson  (1966,  1968) 

Business  Manager,  Athletics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1960;  M.S.,  Southern  Illinois,  1964. 

Kemal  Arin  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanics 

M.S.,  Technical  University  of  Istanbul,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1969. 

Ray  Livingstone  Armstrong  (1946,  1970) 
Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Williams,  1930;  B.A.,  Oxford,  1932;  M.A.,  1936; 
Ph.D.,  Columbia,  1941. 

Jay  Richard  Aronson  (1965,  1972) 

Professor  of  Economics 

A.B.,  Clark,  1959;  M. A.,  Stanford,  1961;  Ph.D.,  Clark,  1964. 

Edward  F.  Assmus,  Jr.  (1966,  1970) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Oberlin,  1953;  A.M.,  Harvard,  1955;  Ph.D.,  1958. 

Betzalel  Avitzur  (1964,  1968) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science  and  Director, 

Institute  for  Me  tal  Forming 

B.Sc.  and  Dip.  Ing.,  Israel  Institute  of  Technology,  1949; 

M.S.,  Michigan,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Dunham  R.  Bainbridge  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Accounting 

B.S.,  Rider,  1963;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1972.  C.P.A.,  1971. 

Alice  Frances  Bahr  (1971) 

Assistant  Reference  Librarian,  Linderman  Library 

B.A.,  Temple,  1968;  M.L.S.,  Drexel,  1971. 

Nicholas  W.  Balabkins  (1957,  1966) 

Professor  of  Economics 

Dipl.  rer.  pol.,  Gottingen,  1949;  M. A.,  Rutgers,  1953; 

Ph.D.,  1956. 

Saul  Benjamin  Barber  (1956,  1965) 

Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  Rhode  Island  State,  1941;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1954. 

Thoburn  Vail  Barker  (1953,1962) 

Associate  Professor  of  Speech 

B.A.,  Ohio  Wesleyan,  1943;  M.A.,  Columbia,  1951. 

Robert  Featherstone  Barnes,  Jr.  (1965) 

Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy 

B.S.,  M.I.T.,  1957;  M.A.,  Dartmouth,  1959;  Ph.D.,  Berkeley, 

1965. 


Faculty  and  Staff     265 


David  Barrett  III  (1071) 
Instructor  in  Education 
B.S.,  West  Chester,  L954;M.Mus.,  Boston,  1962. 

Lucile  Lewis  Barrett  (1944,  1970) 
Assistant  to  the  Editor,  llumni  Bulletin 

A.B.,  Syracuse,  1939. 

William  A.  Barrett  (1966,  1968) 
Issoi  tare  Professor  oj  Electrical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Nebraska,  1952;  M.S.,  1953;  Ph.D.,  Utah,  1957. 

Donald  Delyle  Barry  (1963,  1970) 

Professor  of  Government 

A.B.,  Ohio,  1956;  M.A.,  Syracuse,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1963. 

Sandra  Lee  Bartoli  (1970) 
Instructor  in  Education,  Centennial  School 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College  (Maryland),  1963;  M.S., 
Shippcnsburg.  1968. 

Frederick  Baus  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Education 

A.B.,  Muhlenberg,  1967;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1968. 

Edward  G.  Becker  (1971) 
Instructor  in  Military  Science 
SSG,  U.S.  Army. 

Lynn  Simpson  Beedle  (1947,  1957) 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering;  Director,  Fritz  Engineering 

Laboratory 

B.S.  in  C.E.,  Berkeley;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1949;  Ph.D.,  1952. 

Ferdinand  Pierre  Beer  (1947,  1957) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Mechanics  and 

Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Geneva  (Switzerland),  1933;  M.S.,  1935;  Ph.D.,  1937; 

M.S.,  Paris,  1938. 

George  L.  Beezer  (1973) 
Director,  University  Publications 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1957. 

Carl  Robert  Beidleman  (1967,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Finance 

B.S.,  Lafayette,  1954;  M.B. A.,  Drexel,  1961;  Ph.D.,  Penn, 

1968. 

Peter  Grant  Beidler  (1963,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Earlham,  1962;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1965;  Ph.D.,  1968. 

David  Morgan  Bell  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology 

B.A.,  Lehigh  1967;  Ph.D.,  Stanford,  1972. 


Raymond  Bell  (1966,  1971) 
Assistant  Professor  oj  Education 

Teaching  Certificate,  St.  John's  College,  York  (England), 
1961;  B.A.,  Leed  U.  Institute  of  Education  (England);  M. A., 
Temple,  1966;  Ed.D.,  Lehigh,  1971. 

Robert  W.  Bell  (1969) 

Director,  University  Bookstore 

B.S.,  New  York  at  Albany,  1952;  M.S.,  1960. 

Russell  Edward  Benner  (1962) 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.M.E.,  Cornell,  1947;  M.S.  in  M.E.,  Lehigh,  1951 ;  Ph.D., 

1959.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1970. 

Grahame  Bennett  (1970) 
Visiting  Lecturer  in  Mathematics 
B.Sc,  Newcastle,  1966. 

Brent  W.  Benson  (1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

B.A.,  Knox  College,  1963;  M.S.,  1965;  Ph.D.,  Penn  State, 

1969. 

Edward  John  Benz  (1956,  1963) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Medical  Microbiology 

B.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1944;  M.D.,  1946;  M.S.,  Minnesota,  1952. 

Ernest  E.  Bergmann  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics 

A.B.,  Columbia,  1964;  M.A.,  Princeton,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

Bartus  Hendrik  Bijsterbosch  (1969) 

Visiting  Assistant  Professor,  Center  for  Surface  and 

Coatings  Research 

B.S.,  State  University  of  Utrecht  (Netherlands),  1965; 

M.S.,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1965. 

Claire  C.  Biser  (1970,  1972) 
Assistant  Registrar 

Hartwig  R.  F.  Blume  (1967) 

Research  Associate  in  Physics 

Dipl.  Phys.,  University  of  Freiburg  (Germany),  1962; 

Ph.D.,  1967. 

Philip  Anthony  Blythe  (1968,  1970) 

Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Manchester  (England),  1958;  Ph.D.,  1961. 

George  H.  Bodnar  (1973) 
Instructor  in  Accounting 
B.S.  Bucknell,  1970. 

Michael  G.  Bolton  (1971) 

Director  of  Corporate  and  Foundation  Resources 

B.A.,  1966;  M.B.A.,  Lehigh,  1967. 


266     Faculty  and  Staff 


HelenS.  Bond  (1972) 

Assistant  Director  of  Women's  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Youngstown,  1956. 

John  W.  Bonge  (1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Management 

B.S.,  Princeton,  1957;  M.B.A.,  1959;  Ph.D.,  Northwestern, 

1968. 

Garold  Joseph  Borse  (1966,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Detroit,  1962;  M.S.,  Virginia,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

Richard  C.  Brace  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

B.A.,  Buffalo,  1957;  B.S.,  Air  Force  Institute  of 

Technology,  1965;  M.A.O.M.,  Berkeley,  1967.  Major,  USAF. 

Henderson  Bampfield  Braddick  (1956,  1972) 
Professor  of  International  Relations 
A.B.,  Washington,  1942;  LL.B.,  Harvard,  1949; 
Ph.D.,  Washington,  1957. 

Charles  Wilfrid  Brennan  (1955,  1964) 

Dean  of  Students 

B.S.,  Alabama,  1934;  M.B.A.,  1953. 

Frank  S.  Brenneman  (1968) 

Assistant  Professor  o^  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Goshen,  1960;  M.A.,  Penn  State,  1965;  Ph.D., 

Oklahoma  State,  1967. 

DelfordG.  Britton  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

B.A.,  Santa  Clara,  1961;  M.A.,  Southern  California,  1969. 

Captain,  USAF. 

Brian  George  Brockway  (1971) 

Dean  of  the  College  of  Business  and  Economics,  Professor  of 

Law 

B.S.,  Northwestern,  1957;  LL.B.,  Georgetown,  1961; 

LL.M.,  1963. 

Arthur  L.  Brody  (1957,  1971) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Psychology 

B.A.,  George  Washington,  1951;  Ph.D.,  Indiana,  1956. 

Addison  C.  Bross  (1967) 

Assistant  Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Davidson,  1959;  M.A.,  Duke,  1960;  Ph.D.,  Louisiana 

State,  1967. 

Forbes  Taylor  Brown  (1970) 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

S.B.,  M.I.T.,  1958;  S.M.,  1959;  Sc.D.,  1962. 


Charles  W.  Brownstein  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Government 

A. B.,  Temple,  1965;  M.A.,  1967;  Ph.D.,  Florida  State,  1971. 

Josef  M.  Brozek  (1959,  1963) 
Research  Professor  of  Psychology 
Ph.D.,  Charles  (Prague),  1937. 

Arthur  William  Brune  (1952,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.  in  E.M.,  Missouri  School  of  Mines,  1941;  M.S.  in  E.M., 

1946;  Ph.D.,  Penn  State,  1952.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1957. 

John  Joseph  Burbridge,  Jr.  (1962,  1964) 
Instructor  in  Industrial  Engineering 
B.S. ,  Lehigh,  1962;  M.S.,  1964. 

Sidney  R.  Butler  (1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Maine,  1954;  M.S.,  Penn  State,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1960. 


Ann  Cali  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  Florida,  1964;  M.S.,  Ohio  State, 


1966;Ph.D.,  1970. 


Clarence  Bowen  Campbell  (1955,  1966) 

Dean  of  Residence 

B.A.,  Temple,  1937;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1947. 

BirutaCap  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  French,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

B.A.,  Connecticut,  1960;  M.A.,  Rutgers,  1961;  Ph.D.,  1968. 

Bobb  Carson  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 

B.A.,  Carleton  College,  1965;  M.S.,  Washington,  1967;  Ph.D., 

1971. 

Alfred  Joseph  Castaldi  (1964,  1972) 

Professor  of  Education  and  Director,  Division  of  Elementary 

Education,  School  of  Education 

B.S.,  Penn,  1951;  M.S.,  1956;  Ed.D.,  1964. 

Edward  Charles  (1969) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.A.,  Bluffton,  1953;  LL.B.,  Rutgers,  1953;  M.A.,  Temple, 

1961;  Ed.D.,  Lehigh,  1970. 

Marvin  Charles  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Brooklyn  Polytechnic,  1964;  M.S.,  1967;  Ph.D.,  1970. 

John  Mcllvain  Cheezum,  Jr.  (1964,  1972) 
Fiscal  Associate,  Office  of  Research 
A.B.,Penn,  1964. 


Faculty  and  Staff     267 


John  C.  Chen  il970) 

Professoi  oj  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 
B.Ch.E.,  Coopci  Union,  L 95 6;  M.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon,  1959; 
Ph.D.,  Michigan,  1961. 

Tony  E.  P.  Chen  (1972) 
Assistant  Professor  oj  Mechanics 

B.S.,  National  Chung-hsing  University  (Taiwan),  1966:  M.S., 
Lehigh,  1969;  Ph.D.,  1972. 

Wai-FahChen  (1966,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  Cheng-Kung  University,  1959;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1963; 

Ph.D.,  Brown,  1966. 

Chang-Shuei  Cheng  (1965) 

Instructor  iti  Physics 

B.S.,  National  Taiwan  University,  1958;  M.S.,  National  Tsing 

Hua  University,  1960;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh,  1968. 

Thomas  C.  Cheng  (1969,  1970) 

Professor  of  Biology  and  Director,  Center  for  Health  Sciences 

and  Institute  for  Pathobiology 

A. B.,  Wayne  State,  1952;  M.S.,  Virginia,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1958. 

YeT.  Chou  (1968,  1970) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Chungking  University,  1945;  M.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon, 

1954;  Ph.D.,  1957. 

Glenn  James  Christensen  (1939,  1969) 

University  Distinguished  Professor 

B.A.,  Wooster,  1935;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1939;  LL.D.,  College  of 

Notre  Dame  (Md.),  1966. 

Stuart  R.Christie  (1971) 

Assistant  to  the  Director  of  Development 

B.A.,  Washington  and  Jefferson,  1969. 

Maria  C.Chun  (1969) 

Postdoctoral  Research  Assistant  in  Chemistry 
B.S.,  Manila  University  (Philippines),  1965;  Ph.D., 
Perm  State,  1969. 

Charles  K.  Clarke  (1969) 

Instructor  in  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Alabama,  1968. 

Curtis  William  Clump  (1955,  1960) 

Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Bucknell,  1947;  M.S.,  1949;  Ph.D.,  Carnegie-Mellon, 

1954. 

Alvin  Cohen  (1962,  1970) 

Professor  of  Economics 

B.A.,  George  Washington,  1953;  M.B.A.,  Columbia,  1955; 

Florida,  1962. 


Robert  Carlton  Cole  (1964,  1972) 

Assistant  Professor  oj  English 

A.B.,  Marshall,  1959;  M. A.,  Wake  Forest,  1964;  Ph.D., 

Lehigh,  1971. 

Frank  Thomas  Colon  (1965,  1967) 
IsjVi  iate  Professor  oj  Government 
A.B.,  Geneva  College,  1954;  M.A.,  Pittsburgh,  1960; 
Ph.D.,  1963. 

Mary  A.  Conahan  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education 

B.A.,  Penn  State,  1949;  E.D.,  Lehigh,  1971 

George  Powell  Conard  II  (1952,  1960) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Brown,  1941;  M.S.,  Stevens  Institute,  1948;  Sc.D., 

M.I.T.,  1952. 

Janet  Donna  Connor  (1971) 

Assistant  to  the  Director,  Public  Information 

B.  A.  .Moravian,  1969;  M. A.,  Rutgers,  1971. 

Samuel  Irvin  Connor  (1961) 
Director  of  Public  Information 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1949. 


Robert  William  Coughlin  (1965,  1971) 

Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Fordham,  1956;  Ph.D.,  Cornell,  1961.  P.E.. 

1964. 


New  Jersey, 


John  Nelson  Covert  (1967) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Education,  Varsity  Cross 

Country  and  Track  Coach 

B.S.Ed.,  Buffalo  State,  1953. 

Raymond  Gibson  Cowherd  (1956,  1963) 

Professor  of  History 

A.B.,  William  Jewell,  1933;  M.A.,  Penn,  1936;  Ph.D.,  1940. 

Edward  J.  Crawford  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Education,  Centennial  School 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1971;  M.Ed.,  Syracuse,  1972. 

Cloyd  Criswell  (1947,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  English 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  Millersville  State,  1933;  M.A.,  New  York,  1937. 

Robert  Benjamin  Cutler,  (1954,  1962) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Music,  University  Organist 

A.B.,  Bucknell,  1934;  M.A.,  Columbia,  1935. 

Walter  Emil  Dahlke  (1964) 

Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Diploma,  University  of  Berlin;  Ph.D.,  1936;  Ph.D.  (habil), 

University  of  Jena,  1939. 


268     Faculty  and  Staff 


George  F.  Dalton  (1970) 

Executive  Director,  Institute  for  the  Development  of 

Riverine  and  Estuarine  Systems 

B.S.,  United  States  Naval  Academy,  1938. 

John  Hartley  Daniels  (1964,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  in  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  University  of  Alberta  (Canada),  1955;  M.S.,  Illinois, 

1959;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh,  1967.  P.E.,  Alberta,  Canada,  1955. 

Joseph  F.  Dannenfelser  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Military  Science 

B.S.,  Loyola  College,  1967.  Captain,  U.S.  Army. 

Paul  L.  Davis  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  West  Virginia,  1962;  M.S.,  1962;  Ph.D., 

Carnegie-Mellon,  1969. 


Warren  B.  Davis  (1971) 
Associate  Professor  of  Education 
A.B.,  Ohio,  1933;  M.A.,  Ohio  State, 


1939;  Ph.D.,  1952. 


Edna  Sophia  DeAngeli  (1963,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Classics 

B.S.,  Temple,  1938;  M.A.,  Penn,  1960;  Ph.D.: 


1965. 


1959;  Ph.D.,  1964. 


Jack  Angelo  DeBellis  (1964,  1969) 
Associate  Professor  of  English 
A.B.,  Florida,  1957;  A.M.,  U.C.L.A. 

Dorothy  Delp  (1971) 
Nurse,  Health  Service 
R.N.,  St.  Luke's  Hospital,  1946. 


Margaret  Linn  Dennis  (1953,  1968) 

Assistant  Librarian,  Readers'  Service 

A.B.,  Allegheny,  1939;  B.S.  in  L.S.,  Syracuse,  1940. 

Jacob  De  Rooy  (1967,  1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

A.B.,  Rutgers,  1963;  A.M.,  1965;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

Alfred  James  Diefenderfer  (1961,  1965) 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1957;  Ph.D.,  M.I.T.,  1961. 

Dennis  Roby  Diehl,  (1972) 

Assistant  to  the  Executive  Director,  Alumni  Association 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1970;M.B.A.,  1971. 

Doris  Dillman  (1970) 

Assistant  to  the  Dean,  Graduate  School 


Andrew  D.  Dimargonas  (1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Mechanical  Engineer,  Athens  National  University  of  Technology, 

1961;  Ph.D.,  Rensselaer,  1970. 

George  Anson  Dinsmore  (1955,  1967) 
Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 
B.E.,  Yale,  1946;  M.S.,  Colorado,  1955. 

Thomas  L.  Dinsmore  (1965,  1967) 
Administrator,  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 
B.S.,  Rochester,  1946;  M.S.,  Princeton,  1948. 

Harry  A.  Dower  (1970) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Law 

A.B.,  Lafayette,  1940;  L.L.B.,  Yale,  1948. 

Joseph  Albert  Dowling  (1958,  1967) 

Professor  of  History 

A.B.,  Lincoln  Memorial,  1948;  M. A.,  New  York,  1951;  Ph.D., 

1958. 

George  Clarence  Driscoll,  Jr.  (1950,  1965) 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering;  Associate  Director,  Fritz 

Engineering  Laboratory 

B.S.  in  C.E.,  Rutgers,  1950;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1952;  Ph.D., 

1958.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1969. 

Glenny  Dunbar  (1972) 
Instructor  in  Education 
A.A.,  Finch,  1965;  B. A.,  Boston,  1967;  M.A.,  Fordham,  1972. 

Aurie  Nichols  Dunlap  (1948,  1972) 

Professor  of  International  Relations 

A.B.,  Union  (New  York),  1929;  A.M.,  Columbia,  1931;  Ph.D., 

1955. 

Frederick  Homer  Dunlap  (1965) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Education,  Varsity  Head 

Football  Coach 

B.A.,  Colgate,  1950. 

Deborah  J.  Dwyer  (1971) 

Assistant  to  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid 

A. A.,  Green  Mountain,  1967;  B.S.,  Springfield  (Mass.),  1969. 

Nikolai  Eberhardt  (1962,  1970) 

Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Dipl.  Engr.,  University  of  Munich,  1957;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

Evelyn  Strawn  Eberman  (1955,  1972) 
Assistant  Director  of  Residence  Halls 
B.A.,  Swarthmore,  1921. 


Ernest  Nevin  Dilworth  (1949,  1967) 

Professor  of  English 

Ph.B.,  Kenyon,  1933;  M.A.,  Pittsburgh,  1937;  Ph.D.. 

Columbia,  1948. 


Faculty  and  Staff     269 


Arthur  Roy  Bckardt  (1951,  1956) 

Professoi  and  I  hairman  oj  Religion  Studies 

B.  \  .  Brooklyn,  1942;  B.D.,  Yale.  L944;  Ph.D.,  Columbia, 

1947;  L.H.D.,  Hebrew  Union  College,  Jewish  Institute  of 

Religion,  1969. 

Dominic  G.  B.  Edelen  (1969) 

Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  oj  Mathematics 

B.E.S.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1954;M.S.E.,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1965. 

Andrew  J.  Edmiston  (1967) 

<sor  of  Education,  Director,  Counseling  Service 
A.B.,  West  Virginia,  1951;  M.S.,  Miami,  1953;  Ph.D.,  Pcnn 
State.  1960. 

Bennett  Eisenberg  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Dartmouth,  1964;  Ph.D.,  M.I.T.,  1968. 


Hsia-Yang  Fang  (1966,  1969) 
issoi  iate  Professor  oj  t  'ivil  Engineering 

B.S.,  Hangchow  University,  1947;  M.S.,  Purdue,  1956;  Ph.D., 
West  Virginia,  1966. 

Douglas  David  Feavcr  (1956,  1966) 

Professor  of  Classics 

B.A.,  Toronto,  1948;  M. A.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1949;  Ph.D.,  1951. 

Frank  Joseph  Fcigl  (1967,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

A.B..  Notre  Dame,  1958;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh, 

1965. 

Jacqueline  Marie  Fetsko  (1949,  1966) 

Administrative  Assistant,  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings 

Research 

B.A.,  Penn,  1946;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1953. 


Mohammed  S.  El-Aasser  (1972) 

Research  Associate,  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

B.S.,  Alexandria  U.  (Egypt),  1962;  M.S.,  1966;  Ph.D.,  McGill, 

1972. 

Jonathan  Britton  Elkus  (1957,  1965) 

Professor  of  Music 

B.A.,  Berkeley,  1953;  M.A.,  Stanford,  1954. 

George  Mark  Ellis  (1967) 

Assistant  Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Science,  and  Associate 

Professor  of  History 

A.B.,  Yale,  1943;  A.M.,  Harvard,  1947;  Ph.D.,  1952. 

John  H.  Ellis  (1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  History 

B.S.,  Memphis  State,  1955;  M.A.,  1957;  Ph.D.,  Tulane,  1962. 

John  Stuart  Ellison  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Military  Science 

B.S.,  Illinois,  1964.  Captain,  U.S.  Army. 

Raymond  Jay  Emrich  (1946,  1958) 

Professor  of  Physics 

A.B.,  Princeton,  1938;  Ph.D.,  1946. 

James  Vandeusen  Eppes  (1950,  1972) 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.A.,  Virginia,  1928;  M.E.,  Cornell,  1931;  M.S.  in  M.E., 

Lehigh,  1943. 

Fazil  Erdogan  (1952,  1963) 

Professor  of  Mechanics 

Yuk.  Muh.,  Technical  Institute  of  Istanbul,  1948;  Ph.D., 

Lehigh,  1955. 


Barry  J.  Fetterman  (1968) 
Instructor  in  Physical  Education 
B.S.,  Delaware,  1963. 

Patricia  A.  Finady  (1971) 
Administrative  Assistant,  Counseling 
B. A. .Moravian,  1965. 

William  J.  Finckejr.  (1972) 

Social  Sciences  Cataloger 

B.A.,  New  York  at  Oneonta,  1970;  M.L.S.,  New  York  at  Albany, 

1971. 

John  William  Fisher  (1961,  1969) 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering  and  Associate  Director, 

Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory 

B.S.,  Washington,  1956;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1958;  Ph.D.,  1964. 

P.E.,  Illinois,  1960. 

Richard  B.  Fisher  (1970) 

Assistant  Director  of  Placement  and  Personnel  Services 

B.A.,  Moravian,  1966;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1970. 

Thomas  Fleck,  Jr.  (1965,  1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education  and  Principal,  Centennial 

School 

B.S.,  West  Chester,  1956;  M.Ed.,  Temple,  I960.;  Ed.D., 

Lehigh,  1970. 

Catherine  L.  Flecksteiner  (1945,  1965) 
Serials  Cataloger 

Hubert  L.  Flesher  (1971) 

Chaplain  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion  Studies 

B.A.,  Pomona  College,  1954;  B.D.,  Yale,  1958;  M.A.,  1961. 


F.  Laird  Evans  (1969) 

Instructor  in  Centennial  School 

B.A.,  Perm  State,  1966;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh,  1969. 


270     Faculty  and  Staff 


Robert  Thomas  Folk  (1961,  1966) 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  in  E.E.,  Lehigh,  1953;  B.S.,  in  Phys.,  1954;  M.S., 

1955;  Ph.D.,  1958. 

Lou  V.  Forcum  (1971) 
Assistant  Bursar 

Roy  Foster  (1967) 

Assistant  Director,  Public  Information 

A.B.,  Ursinus,  1951. 

Alan  Shivers  Foust  (1952,  1965) 

McCann  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Texas,  1928;  M.S.,  1930;  Ph.D.,  Michigan,  1938.  P.E., 

Michigan,  1947. 

Frederick  Mayhew  Fowkes  (1968) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  University  of  Chicago,  1936;  Ph.D.,  1938. 

Wyman  Beall  Fowler,  Jr.  (1966,  1969) 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  Ph.D.,  Rochester,  1963. 


Edward  J.  Gallagher  (1969,  1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  English 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's,  1964;  Ph.D.,  Notre  Dame,  1970. 

Robert  Taylor  Gallagher  (1942,  1964) 

Professor  of  Mining  Engineering;  Associate  Dean,  College  of 

Engineering 

B.S.  in  E.M.,  Penn  State,  1927;  M.A.,  in  Geol.,  Missouri, 

1938;  D.E.M.,  Colorado  School  of  Mines,  1941.  P.E., 

Pennsylvania,  1945;  New  Jersey,  1955. 

Gerald  Garb  (1967) 

Professor  of  Economics 

B.S. ,  Penn,  1948;  M. A.,  Berkeley,  1951;  Ph.D.,  1957. 

Arthur  Parcel  Gardner  (1958,  1966) 

Associate  Professor  of  German,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

A.B.,  Duke,  1944;  A.M.,  Harvard,  1945;  Ph.D.,  1950. 

Duncan  Buchanan  Gardiner,  Jr.  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Russian,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

B.A.,  Miami  of  Ohio,  1961;  M. A.,  Indiana,  1965. 


James  Richard  Frakes  (1958,  1967) 

Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Penn  State,  1948;  M.A.,  Chicago,  1949;  Ph.D.,  Penn, 

1953. 


J.  Bruce  Gardiner  (1972) 

Head  Swimming  Coach,  and  Assistant  Director  of  Intramurals 

and  Recreation 

B.S.,  Springfield,  1968;  M.Sc,  1972. 


Barbara  Brown  Frankel  (1973) 

Instructor  in  Cultural  Anthropology 

Ph.B.,  Chicago,  1947;  B.A.,  Goddard,  1966;  M.A.,  Temple, 

1970;  M.A.,  Princeton,  1971. 

Catherine  Franklin  (1959,  1971) 
Director  of  Central  Copying  and  Mailing 


Dermot  M.  Garrett  (1973) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.Sc.Ed.,  Christ's  College  (Liverpool,  England),  1970. 

James  J.  Garrigan  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Education 

A.B.,  Seton  Hall,  1963;  M.A.,  1965. 


Paul  Justus  Franz,  Jr.  (1944,  1962) 

Vice  President— Development 

B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.,  Lehigh,  1944;  M.A.,  1955. 

John  A.  Fratto  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

B.A.,  Fairmount  State,  1967;  M.B. A.,  Missouri,  1972. 

Captain,  U.S. A. F. 

Bruce  Dale  Fritchman  (1969,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1960;  E.P.,  1961;  M.S.,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

Matthew  W.  Gaffney  (1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education 

A.B.,  Hobart,  1935;  M.A.,  Rochester,  1941;  Ed.D.,  Buffalo, 

1953. 


Juraj  Gebauer  (1969) 

Postdoctoral  Research  Associate  in  Chemical  Engineering 
M.S.,  Komensky  University  (Bratislava),  1958;  Slovak 
Academy  of  Sciences,  1965. 

Jacob  Myer  Geist  (1959) 

Lecturer  in  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Purdue,  1940;  M.S.,  Penn  State,  1942;  Ph.D.,  Michigan, 

1950. 

Bhaskar  Kumar  Ghosh  (1961,  1968) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.Sc,  Calcutta  (India),  1955;  Ph.D.,  London,  1959. 

Thomas  de  Magnin  Gilburg  (1971) 

Assistant  Varsity  Football  Coach  and  Varsity  Lacrosse  Coach 

B. A.,  Syracuse,  1961. 


Linda  Galda  (1971) 

Assistant  Operations  Supervisor  of  Administrative  Systems 

B.A.,  Rider,  1969. 


Faculty  and  Staff     271 


Jerome  J.  Gillen  (1973) 
Idjunct    \ssistant  Professot  o]  History 
A.B.,  St.  Petei's  (New  Jersey),  1956;  M.A.,  1968;  Ph.D., 
Lehigh,  1972. 

Frederick  Robert  Gladeck  (1966) 
Instructor  in  International  Relations 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  I960;  M.A.,  Perm,  1964. 

Elmer  William  Glick  (1949,  1972) 
Vice  President  and  Treasurer 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1933. 

William  Monroe  Glosc  III  (1960,  1967) 

Accountant 

B.S.  in  Bus.  Adm.,  Lehigh,  1958. 

Lawrence  D.  Glueck  (1971) 

Assistant  Football  Coach 

B.S.,  Villanova,  1963;  B.A.,  1970. 

Hans  Rueniger  Gnerlich  (1967,  1969) 

Instructor  in  Electrical  Engineering 

Dipl.  Ing.,  Technical  University  (Karlsruhe),  1967;  M.S., 

Lehigh,  1969. 

Joseph  I.  Goldstein  (1968,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  M.I.T.,  1960;  S.M.,  1962;  Sc.D.,  1964. 

Arthur  Freeman  Gould  (1947,  1953) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Industrial  Engineering 

S.B.,  M.I.T.,  1938;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1949.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania, 

1949. 

Christa  V.  Graf  (1970) 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Berkeley,  1962;  M.A.,  Cornell,  1965;  Ph.D.,  1970. 

Walter  H.  Graf  (1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

Dipl.  Ing.,  University  of  Vienna  (Austria),  1959;  Ph.D., 

Berkeley,  1963. 

Margaret  C.  Grandovic  (1962,  1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education 

B.S.,  Temple,  1938;  M.Ed.,  1957;  Ed.D.,  1968. 

Marguerite  B.  Gravez  (1957,  1971) 

Lecturer  in  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Hunter,  1950;  M.A.,  Radcliffe,  1951. 

James  Sproat  Green  V  (1966,  1969) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Information  Science 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1966;  M.A.,  1968;  Ph.D.,  1969. 


David  Mason  Greene  (1958,  1964) 

Professot  oj  English 

H.A.,  San  Diego  State,  1951-.M.A.,  Berkeley,  1952 

1958. 


Ph.D., 


James  A.  Grcenleaf  (1970) 
Instructor  in  Management  ami  Finance 
B.S.,  Penn  State,  1964;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1  966. 

Mikcll  Porter  Groover  (1966,  1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1961;  B.S. ,  1962;  M.S.,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

Charles  Guditus  (1964,  1968) 

Professor  of  Education  and  Director,  Division  of  Educational 

Administration,  School  of  Education 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1950;  M.S.,  Bucknell,  1952;  Ed.D.,  Lehigh, 

1965. 

Samuel  Linial  Gulden  (1953,  1967) 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
B.S.,  City  College  of  New  York,  1949;  M. A.,  Princeton,  1950. 

Gopal  D.  Gupta  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.Tech.,  Indian  Institute  of  Technology  (Kanpur,  India), 

1967;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1968;  Ph.D.,  1970. 

Clark  W.  Hahn  (1967) 
Assistant  Accountant 
B. A. .Muhlenberg,  1972. 

Walter  Charles  Hahn,  Jr.  (1963,  1972) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science  and  Program 

Manager,  Institute  for  Metal  Forming 

B.S.,  Lafayette,  1952;  M.S.,  Penn  State,  1958;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

John  McVickar  Haight,  Jr.  (1949,  1967) 
Professor  of  History 

A.B.,  Princeton,  1940; M.A.,  Yale,  1947;Ph.D., 
Northwestern,  1953. 

Theodore  Hailperin  (1946,  1961) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Michigan,  1939;  Ph.D.,  Cornell,  1943. 

James  W.  Harper  (1971) 
Director,  Community  Relations 
B.S.,  Northwestern,  1954;  M.S.,  1956. 

Nathan  Walter  Harris  (1970) 
Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Life 
B.A.,  Lincoln  University,  1965. 

Robert  Richard  Harson  (1966) 

Assistant  Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Wagner,  1963;  M.A.,  Ohio,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1966. 


272     Faculty  and  Staff 


Ronald  John  Hartranft  (1966,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1963;  M.S.,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

Miloslav  Hartman  (1969) 

Postdoctoral  Research  Associate  in  Chemical  Engineering 
M.S.,  Technical  University  (Prague),  1960;  Ph.D.,  Czech 
Academy  of  Science  (Prague),  1965. 

Albert  Edward  Hartung  (1947,  1968) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  English 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1947;  M.A.,  1949;  Ph.D.,  1957. 

D.  P.  H.  Hasselman  (1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 
B.Sc,  Queen's  University,  1957;  M.A.,  Sc,  University  of 
British  Columbia,  1960;  Ph.D.,  Berkeley,  1966. 

Emil  Andrew  Havach  (1941,  1949) 

Head  Trainer 

D.  Surg.  Chirop.,  Temple,  1936. 

Michael  P.  Hayes  (1968) 

Visiting  Associate  Professor  in  Center  for  Application  of 

Mathematics 

B.Sc,  University  College  (Galway),  1956;  M.Sc,  1957;  Ph.D. 

Thomas  Morris  Haynes  (1952,  1969) 

Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Director,  Freshman  Seminars 

A.B.,  Butler,  1941;  M. A.,  Illinois,  1949;  Ph.D.,  1949. 

Leroy  Arlan  Heckman  (1967) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Education  and  Varsity 

Basketball  Coach 

B.S.  Ed.,  Kutztown  State,  1949;  M. A.,  Colorado  State,  1961. 

Stanley  Frederick  Heffner  (1930,  1946) 
Manager,  Bookstore 

Ned  D.  Heindel  (1966,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Director,  Division  of 

Biological  Chemistry  and  Biophysics,  Center  for  Health 

Sciences 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley,  1959;  M.S.,  Delaware,  1961;  Ph.D., 

1963. 

Sidney  Samuel  Herman  (1962,  1971) 

Professor  of  Biology  and  Director,  South  Jersey  Wetlands 

Institute 

B.S.,  Georgetown,  1953;  M.S.,  Rhode  Island,  1958;  Ph.D., 

1962. 


Richard  Warren  Hertzberg  (1964,  1968) 
Associate  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 
B.S.,  City  College  of  New  York,  1960;  M.S.,  M.I.T.,  1961; 
Ph.D.,  Lehigh,  1965. 

AnnaPirscenok  Herz  (1966,  1972) 

Professor  of  Russian  and  Chairman  of  Modern  Foreign 

Languages  and  Literatures 

B.S.,  Penn,  1949;  M. A.,  1950;  M. A.,  Columbia,  1951;  Ph.D., 

Penn,  1956. 

Gail  Chadwell  Herz  (1972) 

Lecturer  in  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Nevada,  1964;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1970;  Ph.D.,  1972. 

Leon  Nathaniel  Hicks,  Jr.  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Fine  Arts 

B.S.,  Kansas  State,  1959;  M.A.,  M.F.A.,  Iowa,  1963. 

Frank  H.  Hielscher  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Drexel,  1961;  M.S.,  Denver,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Illinois, 

1966. 

Mary  Joanne  Hill  (1967) 

Editorial  Associate,  Office  of  Research 

B.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon,  1959;  M.A.,  Pittsburgh,  1964. 

Donald  John  Hillman  (1960,  1964) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Philosophy  and  Director,  Center 

for  Information  Science 

B.A.,  Cambridge  (England),  1955;  M.A.,  1959;  M.Litt.,  1962. 

Peter  Daniel  Hilton  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1965;  M.S.,  Harvard,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

Terence  John  Hirst  (1968,  1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering  and  Associate 

Director,  Marine  Geotechnical  Laboratory 

B.A.S.,  University  of  British  Columbia,  1962;M.A.S.,  1966; 

Ph.D.,  Berkeley,  1968. 

James  B.  Hobbs  (1966,  1970) 

Professor  of  Management  and  Accounting  and  Chairman  of 

Management  and  Finance 

A.B.,  Harvard,  1952;M.B.A.,  Kansas,  1957;D.B.A.,  Indiana, 

1962. 

Wayne  Hoffman  (1968,  1973) 

Assistant  Director,  Administrative  Systems  Office 


Roy  Cecil  Herrenkohl,  Jr.  (1966,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Social  Psychology  and  Methodology  and 

Director,  Behavioral  Science  Program,  Center  for  Social 

Research 

B.A.,  Washington  &  Lee,  1954;  Ph.D.,  N.Y.U.,  1966. 


Frank  Holcombe  (1969) 
Postdoctoral  Fellow  in  Chemistry 
B.S.,  Old  Dominion  College,  1964. 


Faculty  and  Staff    273 


Robert  Mark  Holcombe  .  1963,  1 168) 
Director  oj  Development 
B.S.,  I  ehigh,  1958;  M.S.,  1969. 

William  Fowler  Hollabaugh  (1960,  1  072) 

Manager  oj  Systems  Programming,  Computing  Center 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  M.S.,  I960;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

foseph  I'.  Holzer(1970) 

Administrative  Assistant,  Computing  Center 

Carl  Sanford  Holzingcr  (1959,  1968) 
Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1956;  M.S.,  1957;  Ph.D.,  1963. 


John  W.  Mum  (1972) 

Dean  oj  thet  ollege  oj   Irts  and  Science  and  Professo)  oj 

l-nglish 

B.A.,  Oklahoma,  1949;  B.D.,  1952;  Ph.D.,  Chicago,  1961. 

Ruth  A.  Hurley  (1971) 

Associate  Dean  oj  Student  Life 

B.A..  New  Hampshire,  1963;  M.S.,  Indiana,  1966. 

Allen  E.  Hye  (1973) 

Assistant  Professor  of  German,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

B.A.,  Franklin  and  Marshall,  1966;  M.A.,  Middlcbury,  1967; 

Ph.D.,  Connecticut,  1972. 


Frank  Scott  Hook  (1952,  1965) 

Professor  of  English 

A.B.,  Missouri,  1942;  M.A.,  1947;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1952. 


Donald  Gary  Ingalls  (1969) 

Electronics  Specialist,  Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental 

Studies 


Ronald  F.  Horvath  (1972) 
Issistant  Planner,  Campus  Planning  Office 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1972. 

David  D.  Hott  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Salem,  1964;  M.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1967;  M.S.,  N.Y.U.,  1971. 

LynneH.  Hott  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1967;  M.S.,  Stevens  Institute,  1970. 

Richard  Hsia  (1969) 

Postdoctoral  Fellow  in  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Cheng  Kung  University  (Taiwan),  1963;  Ph.D.,  McGill 

University  (Canada),  1969. 

Chuan-Chih  Hsiung  (1952,  1960) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  National  Chekiang  (China),  1936;  Ph.D.,  Michigan 

State,  1948. 


Jon  Terence  Innes  (1965,  1968) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1958;  M.A.,  Oregon,  1961;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

George  Irwin  (1967) 

Faculty  Associate,  Fritz  Lab 

A.B.,  Knox  College,  1930;  M.S.,  Illinois,  1933;  Ph.D.,  1937. 

George  John  Jackson  (1972) 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Biology 
B.A.,  Chicago,  1952;  M.S.,  1954;  Ph.D.,  1958. 

Thomas  Edgar  Jackson  (1937,  1969) 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon,  1934;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1937.  P.E., 

Pennsylvania,  1946. 

Eustace  Anthony  James  (1962,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  English 

A.B.,  Princeton,  1958;  M. A.,  Pennsylvania,  1960;  Ph.D., 

1965. 


Ti  Huang  (1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  Tangshan  Engineering  College,  1948;  M.S.,  Michigan, 

1952;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

John  Joseph  Huber  (1968) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Military  Science 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  Military  College,  1963.  Major, 

Transportation  Corps,  U.S.  Army. 

Volker  Huelck  (1968) 

Research  Associate  in  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  University  of  Karlsruhe  (Germany),  1967. 

Matthew  H.  Hulbert  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Washington  &  Lee,  1964;  M.S.  Wisconsin,  1967;  Ph.D. 

1969. 


M.  M.  P.Janssen  (1967) 

Research  Associate  in  Chemistry 

M.S.,  Technological  University  Eindhoven  (Netherlands), 

1960;  Chemistry  Engineering,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Technological 

Sciences,  1966. 

George  Robert  Jenkins  (1948,  1963) 

Director  of  the  Office  of  Research  and  Professor  of  Geology 

B.A.,  Colorado,  1936;  Ph.M.,  Wisconsin,  1938. 

Finn  Bjorn  Jensen  (1947,  1954) 

MacFarlane  Professor  in  Theoretical  Economics  and 

Chairman  of  Economics 

A.B.,  Southern  California,  1934;  M.A.,  1935;  Ph.D.,  1940. 


274     Faculty  and  Staff 


Robert  Leroy  Johnson  (1970,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering  and  Director, 

Environmental  Engineering  Laboratory,  CMES 

B.S.,  Iowa  State,  1957;  M.S.,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1969.  P.E.,  Iowa. 

Robert  W.  Johnson  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Columbia,  1962;  M.S.,  City  University  of  New  York, 

1965;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

Colin  E.  Jones  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon,  1963;  M.S.,  Illinois,  1965;  Ph.D.. 

1970. 


Marshall  L.  Kaufman  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  English  and  Technical  Director  of 

Special  University  Events 

B.A.,  Bridgeport,  1969;  M.A.,  Trinity  at  San  Antonio,  1972. 

Edwin  J.  Kay  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.S.,  Rensselaer,  1964;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1966;  Ph.D. 

(mathematics),  1968;  Ph.D.  (psychology),  1972. 

Yakovos  Kazakia  (1972) 

Research  Associate,  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 

M.Sc,  Istanbul  Technological  University,  1968;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1972. 


Reese  D.Jones  (1969) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Economics 

B.S.,  Wilkes,  1955;  M.S.,  Penn,  1957. 

Robert  Griffith  Jones  (1965,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Social  Psychology 

A.B.,  Davidson,  1958;  B.D.,  Yale,  1961;  Ph.D.,  Duke,  1966. 


John  Daniel  Keefe  (1965,  1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1948;  M.A.,  Miami  (Florida),  1955. 

C.  Merris  Keen,  Jr.  (1967) 
Manager,  Fraternity  Services 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1948. 


Carey  Bonthron  Joynt  (1951,  1960) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  International  Relations 

B.A.,  Western  Ontario,  1945;  M.A.,  1948;  Ph.D.,  Clark,  1951. 

Safeta  Sophie  Juka  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  French,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

Lie.  Litt.,  Sorbonne,  1950;  Dr.  d'Univ.,  1969. 

Arturs  Kalnins  (1965,  1967) 

Professor  of  Mechanics  and  Director,  Division  of 
Bioengineering,  Center  for  Health  Sciences 
B.S.,  Michigan,  1955;  M.S.,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

George  Eugene  Kane  (1950,  1964) 

Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1948;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1954.  P.E., 

Pennsylvania,  1955. 

Alvin  Sheldon  Kanofsky  (19  67,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

B.A.,  Penn,  1961;  M.S.,  1962;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

John  J.  Karakash  (1946,  1966) 

Distinguished  Professor  and  Dean,  College  of  Engineering 

B.S.,  Duke,  1937;  M.S.,  Penn,  1938.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania, 

1948. 


William  E.  Keim  (1967) 

Lecturer  in  Education 

B.S.,  Millersville  State,  1949;  M.A.,  1953;  D.Ed.,  1956. 

Elsie  L.  Kellerman  (1966) 

Research  Associate,  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

A.B.,  Mt.  Holyoke,  1959;Ph.D.,  Penn,  1963. 

Richard  Kellerman  (1967) 

Research  Associate,  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

B.S.,  Manchester  (England),  1966;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh,  1972. 

John  L.  Kemmerer  (1966) 
Assistant  Purchasing  Agent 

Kathleen  A.  Kemmerle  (1970) 

Systems  Programmer,  Administrative  Systems  Office 

B.S.,  Moravian,  1969. 

Joseph  P.  Kender  (1968,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education 

A.B.,  Mt.  St.  Mary's  College,  1952;  M. A.,  Villanova,  1955; 

Ed.D.,  Penn,  1967. 

Robert  W.  Kennedy  (1968) 
Instructor  in  Physical  Education 
B.S.,  West  Virginia,  1962. 


Andrew  James  Kasarda  (1968,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Information  Sciences,  and  Associate 

Director,  Center  for  Information  Science 

B.A.,  Penn  State,  1962;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1968. 


Samir  Anton  Khabbaz  (1960,  1968) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Bethel,  1954;  M.A.,  Kansas,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Frank  J.  Kidder  III  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.S.,  Ursinus,  1969;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh,  1971. 


Faculty  and  Staff     215 


Vong  Wook  Kim  ,1'H>8) 
[ssistant  Pi  <  Physics 

B.S.,  Seoul  National  University,  I960;  M.S.,  1962;  Ph.D., 
Michigan,  1968. 

Jerry  Porter  King  (1962,  1968) 
Professor  o]  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Kentucky,  1958;  M.S.,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

Martin  Eugene  Kipp  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1967;  M.S.,  1968. 

Charles  Edward  Klatt  (1969) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Military  Science 
B.S.,  Michigan,  1963.  Captain,  U.S.  Army. 

Lynn  Diannc  Klein  (1970) 

Production  Assistant,  University  Publications 

B. A.,  Muhlenberg,  1970. 

Mary  R.  Kleinginna  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.A.,  Wilkes,  1963;  M.S.Ed.,  Temple,  1971. 

Kamil  Klier  (1967,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Chemico-Technological  University  (Prague),  1954. 


Gretchen  A.  Krasley  (1970) 
Instructor  in  Education 

B. A.,  Muhlenberg,  1968;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh,  1970. 

Michael  R.  Krasley  (1971) 
instructor  in  Education 
B.S.,  Moravian,  1965. 

George  Krauss,  Jr.  (1963,  1972) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1955;  M.S.,  M.I.T.,  1958;  Sc.D.,  1961. 

Steven  Krawiec  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology 

A.B.,  Brown,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1968. 

Philip  L.  Kreider  (1970) 

Acting  Director,  University  Health  Service 

A.B.,  Dartmouth,  1953;  M.D.,  Temple,  1957. 

Joseph  R.  Kress  (1971) 
Instructor  in  Military  Science 
MSG,  U.S.  Army 

Leon  Elwood  Krouse  (1951,  1963) 

Associate  Professor  of  Finance 

B.A.,  Susquehanna,  1941;  M.S.,  Bucknell,  1947;  Ph.D.. 

New  York,  1958. 


Alfred  Paul  Koch  (1946,  1961) 

Professor  of  Accounting 

B.S.,  Bloomsburg  State,  1939;  M.S.,  Bucknell,  1940.  C.P.A., 

Pennsylvania,  1952. 

Winfred  Kohls  (1969) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Augustana,  1951;  M.A.,  California  at  Berkeley,  1959; 

Ph.D.,  1967. 

Celal  Nizamettin  Kostem  (1966,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  Technical  University  of  Istanbul,  1960;  M.S.,  1961; 

Ph.D.,  Arizona,  1966. 

Ralph  Wayne  Kraft  (1962,  1965) 

New  Jersey  Zinc  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials 

Science 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1948;  M.S.,  Michigan,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1958. 

Charles  Stephen  Kraihanzel  (1962,  1970) 

Professor  of  Chemistry 

Sc.B.,  Brown,  1957;  M.S.,  Wisconsin,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

Paul  F.  Kram  (1971) 

Instructor,  School  of  Education 

B.A.,  Moravian,  1965;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1967. 


John  Milton  Kulicki  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Civil  Engineering 

B.A.,  Lafayette,  1965;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1967. 

Donald  H.  Kunkel  (1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Military  Science 

B.S.,  St.  Peter's  (New  Jersey),  1960.  Major,  U.S.  Army. 

EUa  Jane  Kunkle  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.A.,  Fairleigh  Dickinson,  1963. 

Albert  Barry  Kunz  (1962,  1968) 

Research  Associate  in  Physics 

B.S.,  Muhlenberg,  1962;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

Anastasios  Kydoniefs  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics 

B.Sc,  Athens  (Greece),  1963;  M.Sc,  Nottingham  (England 

1965;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

JayC.  Lacke  (1969) 

Instructor  in  Marketing 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1964;  M.B.A.,  Columbia,  1966. 

Gary  Bernard  Laison  (1961,  1970) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 
B.A.,  Penn,  1958;  M.A.,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1969. 


27f5     Faculty  and  Staff 


Eugene  M.  Landis  (1967) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  Penn,  1922;  M.S.,  1924;  M.D.,  1926;  Ph.D.,  1927;  M.S. 

(Hon.),  Yale  1938. 

John  D.  Landis  (1967,  1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1965;  M.S.,  1967;  Ph.D.,  1971. 

Nicholas  Anthony  Lapara  (1964,  1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Philosophy 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  B. A.,  1961;  M. A.,  Pittsburgh,  1962; 

Ph.D.,  1970. 

Arthur  Irving  Larky  (1954,  1964) 

Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1952;  M.S.,  Princeton,  1953;  Ph.D.,  Stanford, 

1957. 


Nancy  Larrick  (1964,  1967) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Education 

B.A.,  Goucher,  1930;  M.A.,  Columbia,  1937;  Ed.D.: 

1955. 


N.Y.U.. 


Bruce  Alan  Laub  (1965,  1968) 

Administrative  Assistant,  Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1961;  M.B.A.,  1968. 

Leslie  Leber  (1969) 

Computer  Analyst 

B.S.,  Dayton  (Ohio),  1967. 

William  Bader  Leckonby  (1946,  1962) 

Professor  of  Physical  Education  and  Director  of  the  Division 

of  Athletics  and  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  St.  Lawrence,  1939. 


Robert  Lewis  Leight  (1963,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education  and  Director,  Division  of 

Secondary  Education,  School  of  Education 

B.S.,  Kutztown  State,  1959;  M. A.,  Lehigh,  1961;  M.Ed.,  1964; 

Ed.D.,  1966. 

Edward  Kenneth  Levy  (1967,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 
B.S.,  University  of  Maryland,  1963;  S.M.,  M.I.T.,  1964; 
Sc.D.,  1967. 

Willard  Deming  Lewis  (1964) 

President 

A.B.,  Harvard,  1935;  B.A.,  Oxford,  1938;  Ph.D.,  Harvard, 

1941;  M.A.,  Oxford,  1945;  LL.D.,  Lafayette,  1965;  L.H.D., 

Moravian,  1966;  LL.D.,  Muhlenberg,  1968. 

Joseph  Francis  Libsch  (1946,  1969) 

Alcoa  Foundation  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials 

Science  and  Vice  President— Research 

B.S.,  M.S.,  M.I.T.,  1940;  Sc.D.,  1941.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania, 

1947. 

John  Orth  Liebig,  Jr.  (1946,  1970) 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering,  Undergraduate  Officer 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1940;  M.S.,  1949.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1951. 

Thelma  Lifland  (1971) 

Instructor  in  School  of  Educatiori 

B.A.,  Brooklyn,  1956;  M.Ed.,  Rutgers,  1960. 

John  Ralph  Lindgren  (1965,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Head,  Division  of 

Philosophy 

B.S.,  Northwestern,  1959 ;  M.A.,  Marquette,  1961;  Ph.D., 

1963. 


Lawrence  H.  Leder  (1968) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  History  and  Coordinator,  Lawrence 
Henry  Gipson  Institute  for  Eighteenth-Century  Studies 
B.A.,  Long  Island,  1949;  M.A.,  N.Y.U.,  1950;  Ph.D.,  1960. 


Benjamin  Litt  (1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Management  and  Marketing 

B.S.,  Brooklyn  Polytechnic,  1950;  M.S.,  Stevens  Institute, 

1957;  M.B.A.,  N.Y.U.,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1970. 


Gerald  Grant  Leeman  (1950,  1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Education  and  Assistant 

to  the  Director  of  Athletics 

B.A.,  State  College  of  Iowa,  1948. 

Daniel  Leenov  (1963) 

Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  George  Washington,  1943;  M.S.,  Chicago,  1948;  Ph.D. , 

1951. 

Henry  Leidheiser,  Jr.  (1968) 

Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Director  of  Center  for  Surface 

and  Coatings  Research 

B.S.,  Virginia,  1941;  M.S.,  1943;  Ph.D.,  1946. 


Roger  C.Loeb  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 

A.B.,  Bucknell,  1967; Ph.D.,  Cornell,  1972. 

Joanne  K.  LoGiudice  (1971) 
Visiting  Instructor  in  Social  Relations 
B.S.,  Penn  State,  1959;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1962. 

Barbara  Long  (1971) 

Systems  Programmer,  Administrative  Systems  Office 

Francis  A.  Long  (1971) 
Lecturer  in  Electrical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Northeastern. 


Faculty  and  Staff    277 


Roland  Willi.un  i  1962) 

Issociate  Professoi  oj  (  'hemistry 
B.A.,  Reed  College,  1955;  Ph.D.,  Washington  State,  1060. 

1969) 
Professoi  oj  <  ivil  Engineering,  Graduate  Officer 
B.S.,  National  Taiwan,  11>M:  M.S.,  Iowa  State,  1956;  Ph.D., 
Lehigh,  1960. 

Robert  Alan  Lucas  (1958,  1969) 
issociate  Professor  oj  Mechanical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1957;  M.S.,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1964. 


Feng-Shyang  Luh  (1965,  1968) 
\ssociatc  Professor  of  Accounting 
B.A.,  National  Taiwan,  1957;  M.S., 
Ohio  State,  1965. 


linois,  1961;  Ph.D., 


J.Gary  Lutz  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1965;  M.A.,  1968;  Ed.D.,  1969. 

William  L.  Luyben  (1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1955;  M.B.A.,  Rutgers,  1958;  M.S.,  1962; 

Ph.D.,  Delaware,  1963. 

Patricia  M.  Lyons  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Religion  Studies 

B.S.,  Ohio,  1968;  M.A.,  Princeton,  1971. 

George  Buchanan  MacDonald  (1964,  1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  English 

A.B.,  Boston  College,  1962;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1964. 

James  Decker  Mack  (1946,  1950) 

Director  of  Libraries 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1938;  M. A.,  1949. 

Alistair  Kenneth  MacPherson  (1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 
B.S.,  University  of  Sydney  (Australia),  1957;  M.S.,  1965; 
Ph.D.,  1967. 


Rosemarie  A.  Maier  (1972) 
Assistant  Professor  of  English 
B.A..  Nazareth,  1966;  A.M.,  Illinois, 

Walter  Malich  (1971) 
Instructor  in  Military  Science 
SGM,  U.S.  Army. 

Mary  Isabelle  Malone  (1966) 
Secretary  to  the  President 
B.A.,  Rosary  College,  1945. 


1967;  Ph.D.,  1972. 


Richard  Griffith  Malsberger  (1959,  1972) 

I't,  /.   .'.,•>  ,(m</  I  'hairman  <>/  Hi*  'logv 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1948;M.S.,  L949;Ph.D.,  1958. 

Donald  A.  Mankin  (1968) 

■\ssislant  Profess, 'i  of  Psychology 

B.S.E.E.,  Drexel,  1964;  M.A.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1966;  Ph.D., 

1968. 

Arthur  Howard  Mann  (1965,  1970) 

Associate  Dean  of  Students 

B.A.,  Weslcyan,  1  940;  S.T.B.,  General  Theological  Seminary, 

1944. 

John  Alexander  Manson  (1966,  1971) 

Professor  of  Chemistry,  and  Director  of  the  Polymer 

Laboratory,  Materials  Research  Center 

B.Sc,  McMaster  University  (Ontario),  1949;  M.Sc,  1950; 

Ph.D.,  1956. 

David  L.March  (1969,  1971) 

Systems  Analyst,  Administrative  Systems  Office,  and  Professor 

of  Education 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1964;M.Ed.,  1965;Ph.D.,  1970. 

Philip  W.  Marden  (1973) 

Visiting  Instructor  in  Social  Relations 

B.A.,  Rutgers,  1955;  M. A.,  Illinois,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1963. 

Jesse  F.  Marsh  (1970) 
Instructor  in  Aerospace  Studies 
Sergeant,  USAF. 

James  Patrick  Mathews  (1947) 
Physiotherapist,  Health  Service 

Joseph  Abele  Maurer  (1947,  1964) 
Professor  and  Chairman  of  Classics 
B.A.,  Moravian,  1932;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1936;  Ph.D.,  Penn,  1948. 

Gregory  T.  McAllister,  Jr.  (1965,  1972) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  St.  Peter's  College,  1956;  Ph.D.,  Berkeley,  1962. 

Austin  V.  McClain  (1971) 

Consultant,  Office  of  the  Vice  President— Development 

B.S.,  1930;  M.A.,  1933;  L.H.D.,  Washington  &  Jefferson. 

George  E.  McCluskey  (1965) 

Associate  Professor  of  Astronomy 

A.B.,  Penn,  1960;  M.S.,  1965;  Ph.D.,  1965. 

Gary  E.  McConnell  (1972) 

Croup  Leader,  Applications  Programming,  Computing  Center 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1968. 


278     Faculty  and  Staff 


Charles  Man  McCoy  (1968) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Government 
B.S.  Ed.,  Illinois,  1948;  M.A.,  Colgate,  1950;  Ph.D., 
Boston  University,  1958. 

Joseph  Brendan  McFadden  (1948,  1961) 

Professor  and  Head,  Division  of  Journalism 

B.A.,  St.  Joseph's  (Canada),  1941;  M. A.,  Syracuse,  1948. 

William  J.  McGarry  (1969,  1973) 

Director,  Administrative  Systems  Office 

B.S.,  King's  College,  1965;  M.B.  A.,  University  of  Scran  ton, 

1967. 

James  Willard  McGeady  (1950,  1959) 
Associate  Director  of  Admission 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1950. 

Edward  H.  McGee  (1970) 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Law 
A.B.,  Lehigh,  1952;  LL.B.,  Yale,  1955. 


Norman  Paul  Melchert  (1962,  1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy 

B.A.,  Wartburg,  1955;  B.D.,  Lutheran  Theological  Seminary, 

1958;M.A.,Penn,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1964. 

Joseph  Robert  Merkel  (1962,  1965) 

Professor  of  Biochemistry  and  Director,  Marine  Biochemistry 

Laboratory,  CMES 

B.S.,  Moravian,  1948;  M.S.,  Purdue,  1950;  Ph.D.,  Maryland, 

1952. 

Fortunato  Joseph  Micale  (1962,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.A.,  St.  Bonaventure,  1956;  B.S. ,  Niagara,  1959;  M.S., 

Purdue,  1961;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh,  1965. 

John  Anthony  Mierzwa  (1966,  1972) 

Professor  of  Education  and  Director,  Division  of 

Counselor  Education,  School  of  Education 

B.S.,  Ohio,  1954;  M.A.,  1955;  Ed.M.,  Harvard,  1958;  Ed.D., 

1961. 


Anthony  J.  McHugh  (1971,  1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Cleveland,  1966;  M.S.,  Delaware,  1970;  Ph.D.,  1972. 

Donald  Mcllvain  (1970) 
Lecturer  in  Industrial  Engineering 
B.S.,  Penn,  1952;  M.S.,  1959. 

James  Rathburn  Mcintosh  (1966,  1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Sociology 

B.A.,  Colby,  1960;  M.A.,  Syracuse,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

James  Alan  McLennan,  Jr.  (1948,  1968) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Physics 

A.B.,  Harvard,  1948;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1950;  Ph.D.,  1952. 

Grayson  E.  McNair  (1970) 
Lecturer  in  Electrical  Engineering 
B.S.E.E.,  Virginia,  1962. 

Judith  E.  McNally  (1972) 

Serials  Assistant,  Linderman  Library 

John  R.  McNamara  (1973) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

B.A.,  Columbia  College,  1959;  M.S.,  Rensselaer,  1965;  Ph.D., 

1971. 

Charles  R.  McNaron  (1969) 

Head  Football  Trainer  and  Instructor  in  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Mississippi  State,  1965. 

Albert  E.  Meder,  Jr.  (1968) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Education 

A.B.,  Columbia,  1922;  M.A.,  1923;  LL.D.,  Fairleigh  Dickinson, 

1956;  L.H.D.  (Hon.),  Bloomsburg,  1961. 


Gombilenga  Mikongomi  (1970) 

Visiting  Instructor  in  Kiswahili,  Modern  Foreign  Languages 

and  Literatures 

Certificate,  Kivukoni  College  (Tanzania),  1962;  Certificate, 

Mlonot  Company  Ltd.  (Tel  Aviv),  1965. 

Larry  M.  Miley  (1967) 
Assistant  Accountant 
B.S.,Penn  State,  1964. 

Paul  Theodore  Miller  (1961,  1972) 
Superintendent  of  Buildings  and  Grounds 

Paul  Van  Reed  Miller  (1966,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education  and  Director,  Division  of 
Educational  Measurements  and  Research,  School  of  Education 
B.A.,  Yale,  1946;  M.A.,  Penn,  1948;  Ph.D.,  1965. 

Richard  W.  Miller  (1968) 

Intern  Supervisor  of  Education 

B.S.,  Kutztown  State,  1958;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1962. 

Robert  Hugh  Mills  (1964,  1967) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Accounting 

B.S.,  Colorado,  1949;  M.S.,  1955;  Ph.D.,  Wisconsin,  1960. 

C.P.A.,  Illinois,  1957. 

Samuel  Harold  Missimer  (1950,  1962) 
Director  of  Admission 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1950. 

Sitsansu  S.  Mittra  (1968,  1970) 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

M.A.,  Calcutta;  M.S.,  University  of  Toronto;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1971. 


Faculty  and  Staff     279 


Albert  Charles  Moltcr  (19  10 

Purchasing  Agent 

U.S..  Norwich,  1928;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1969. 

Sutton  Monro  (1959,  1964) 
Professoi  .'/  Industrial  Engineering 
B.S..  M.I.T.,  L942. 


William  Edward  Ohncsorge  (1965,  1971) 

Pn  ■/.  mi  *  of  l  hcmist)  y 

Sc.B.,  Brown,  1953;  Ph.D.,  M.I.T.,  1956. 

JohnOndria  (1967,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  oj  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1960;  M.S.,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1967. 


Carl  l.eland  Moore  (1948,  1963) 

Professor  of  Accounting 

A.B..  Bucknell,  I  943;  M.A.,  Pittsburgh,  1948.  C. P. A.. 

Pennsylvania,  1952. 

Charles  M.  Morris  (1967) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

A.B.,  Bucknell,  1931;  M.Ed.,  1932;  Ph.D.,  N.Y.U.,  1938. 

John  H.  Morrison  (1968) 

Operations  Supervisor,  Computing  Center 

Willard  Austin  Murray  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  Wisconsin,  1965;  M.S.,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1970. 

Paul  Benton  Myers,  Jr.  (1962,  1965) 

Associate  Professor  of  Geology 

A.B.,  Colgate,  1955;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1597;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Benjamin  Edward  Nevis  (1960,  1968) 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1955:  M.S.,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1965. 

William  Newman  (1968) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.S.,  CUNY  (Brooklyn),  1964;  Ph.D.,  Stanford,  1968. 

James  Walter  Niemeyer  (1968,  1970) 
Executive  Director,  Alumni  Association 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1943. 

Caroline  Gladys  Nippert  (1971) 

Science  Cataloger 

B.A.,  Dowling,  1968;  M.L.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1971. 

Michael  Richard  Notis  (1967,  1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1960;  M.S.,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1969. 

Robert  Warren  Numbers  (1960,  1972) 
Director  of  Physical  Plant 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1950. 

John  J.  O'Connor  (1967) 

Research  Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy,  Center  for 

Information  Science 

B.A.,  Columbia,  1945;  M.A.,  Cornell,  1947;  Ph.D.,  Columbia, 

1952. 


Kenneth  Everett  Orbcn  (1963) 

Assistant  Superintendent  of  Buildings  and  Grounds 

B.S.,  Pcnn  State,  1947. 

Joseph  C.  Osborn  (1946,  1961 ) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanics 

B.S.M.E.,  Purdue,  1933;  M.S.,  Michigan,  1946.  P. E., 

Michigan,  1955. 

Alexis  Ostapenko  (1957,  1965) 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

Dipl.  Ing.,  Munich  Institute  of  Technology,  1951;  Sc.D., 

M.I.T.,  1957. 

Peggy  A.Ota  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.A.,  Cornell,  1966;  M.S.,  Penn,  1969. 

Eric  Van  Tine  Ottervik  (1966,  1969) 

Vice  Provost  and  Coordinator  of  University  Planning 

B.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon,  1959;  M. A.,  Pittsburgh,  1961;  Ph.D., 

1966. 

Jerzy  Antoni  Owczarek  (1960,  1965) 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Dipl.  Ing.,  Polish  University  College  (London),  1950;  Ph.D. 

University  of  London,  1954. 

Bradford  Breckenridge  Owen  (1945,  1948) 

Associate  Professor  of  Biology 

B.A.,  Williams,  1934;  M.A.,  1936;  Ph.D.,  Harvard,  1940. 

John  B.  Owens  (1973) 

Assistant  Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Oberlin,  1966;  M.A.,  Wisconsin,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1972. 

Mustafa  R.  Ozgu  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Middle  East  Technical  University  (Ankara,  Turkey), 

1967;  M.S.,  1968;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh,  1971. 

Anthony  Packer  (1946,  1950) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Education  and  Assistant  to 

the  Director  in  Charge  of  Fields 

B.S.,  St.  Lawrence,  1938. 

Sara  Louise  Paden  (1971) 

Administrative  Assistant,  University  Publications 

B. A.,  Moravian,  1971. 


280     Faculty  and  Staff 


Artis  J.  Palmo  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education 

B.S.,  California  State  (Pennsylvania),  1967;  M.A.,  West 

Virginia,  1968;  Ed.D.,  1971. 

Robert  Roupen  Panos  (1964,  1969) 

Assistant  Director  of  Counseling  and  Testing  and  Assistant 

Professor  of  Education 

B.A.,  Queen's  College,  1956;  M.S.,  Penn  State,  1958;  Ph.D., 

1968. 

Basil  Waldo  Parker  (1940,  1954) 

Professor  of  Biology 

S.B.,  M.I.T.,  1933;  A.M.,  Harvard,  1935;  Ph.D.,  M.I.T., 

1939. 

Lloyd  C.  Parker  (1971) 
Instructor  in  Education 
B.A.,  Connecticut  College,  1956. 

James  Marshall  Parks  (1967,  1970) 

Professor  of  Geology  and  Director,  Center  for  Marine  and 

Environmental  Studies 

A.B.,  Kansas,  1948;  M.S.,  Wisconsin,  1949;  Ph.D.,  1951. 

Preston  Parr  (1949,  1970) 

Dean  and  Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1943;  M.S.,  1944. 

Ruth  B.  Parr  (1967,  1968) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.S.,  Simmons,  1945;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1969. 

Elizabeth  Patterson  (1970) 
Administrative  Secretary,  Forum  Office 

John  B.  Pearce  (1966) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Biology 

A.B.,  Humboldt  State,  1957;  M.S.,  Washington,  1960;  Ph.D., 

1962. 

John  M.  Pearson  (1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  English  and  Head,  Division  of  Speech 

B.A.,  Baylor,  1958;  M.F.A.,  Penn  State,  1968. 

Alan  Wiggins  Pense  (1957,  1971) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Cornell,  1957;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

Joseph  Petronio  (1968) 

Bursar 

B.S.,  King's  College,  1960. 

Robert  L.  Pettigrew  (1969) 
Computer  Analyst 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1969. 


Robert  A.  Pfennig  (1969,  1972) 
Coordinator,  User  Services,  Computing  Center 
B.A.,  Wesleyan,  1962;  M.B.A.,  Michigan,  1964. 

Dennis  A.  Pickering  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education 

B.S.,  Ohio  State,  1965;  M.A.,  1967;  Ed.D.,  Ball  State,  1972. 

Warren  Aiken  Pillsbury  (1962,  1965) 

Associate  Professor  of  Economics 

A.B.,  New  Hampshire,  1953;  M.S.,  Florida  State,  1958;  Ph.D., 

Virginia,  1963. 

Arthur  Everett  Pitcher  (1938,  1960) 
Distinguished  Professor  and  Chairman  of  Mathematics 
A.B.,  Case-Western  Reserve,  1932;  A.M.,  Harvard,  1933; 
Ph.D.,  1935;  D.Sc.  (Hon.),  Case-Western  Reserve,  1957. 

Lucille  H.  Pleiss  (1961,  1971) 

Administrative  Assistant  to  Director,  Health  Service 

R.N.,  St.  Luke's,  1949. 

Gary  Wayne  Poehlein  (1965,  1969) 
Associate  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Purdue,  1958;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

Hayden  Nelson  Pritchard  (1964,  1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Biology 

A.B.,  Princeton,  1955;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1963. 

Thomas  A.  Pugliese  (1972) 

Head  Basketball  Coach 

A. A.,  Sacramento  City  College,  1961;  B.A.,  Sacramento  State, 

1963. 

William  Leroy  Quay  (1963,  1970) 

Dean  of  Student  Life 

A.B.,  Muhlenberg,  1956;  A.M.,  Penn,  1957;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1969. 

Clifford  Steven  Queen  (1972) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Ph.D.,  Ohio  State,  1969. 

Shelden  Henry  Radin  (1963,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Worcester  Polytechnic,  1958;  M.S.,  Yale,  1969;  Ph.D., 

1963. 

Beegamudre  Rakosh-Das  (1967) 

Instructor  in  Electrical  Engineering 

B.Sc,  Engineering,  Banaras,  1949;  A.I.I.Sc,  Bangalore, 

1952. 

Harry  B.  Ramsey  (1963,  1971) 

Associate  Executive  Director,  Alumni  Association  and 

Editor,  Lehigh  Alumni  Bulletin 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1950. 


Faculty  and  Staff     281 


Viswanatha  R.ij.i  Gopala  Rao  (1972) 
\ssistanl  Pi  ■:  Mathematics 

B  S<  .  Vndhra  U.  (Waltair,  India),  1964;  M.S..  1965;  A.M., 
Illinois,  I'll.":  Ph. II.,  1972. 


Berry  C.irg.il  Richards  (1969) 

Associate  I  ibrarian,  Mart  Si  fence  and  Engineering  Library 

,iii, y  Sci  retary  tf  the  Faculty 

A.B.,  Vassar,  1952;  M.L.S.,  New  York  at  Albany,  1969. 


Carol  D.  Ranch  (1968.  1970) 
Librarian,  Computing  Center 

Gerhard  Rayna  (1955.  I  "(.'>' 
\ssociate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
A.B.,  Harvard,  1952;  M.A.,  Princeton,  1953:  Ph.D.,  1965. 

Helen  Z.  Rayner  (1963,  1969) 

Administrative  Assistant,  Placement  and  Personnel  Services 

Georgia  Emily  Raynor  (1961,  1968) 
Issistant  Librarian,  Cataloging 

A.B.,  Chatham,  1945;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1954;  M.S.  in  L.S., 
Columbia,  1954. 

Richard  James  Redd  (1958,  1970) 
Professor  and  Chairman  of  Fine  Arts 
B.Ed.,  Toledo,  1953;  M.F.A.,  Iowa,  1958. 

Estoy  Reddin  (1964,  1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education 

B.S..  Penn,  1932;  M.S.,  1956;  Ed.D.,  1964. 

John  K.  Redmon  (1970) 

Lecturer  in  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Newark  College  of  Engineering,  1942;  M.S.,  Stevens 

Institute,  1949;  M.S.,  Worcester  Polytechnic,  1970.  P.E., 

New  Jersey,  1961 ;  Pennsylvania,  1970. 

Robert  F.  Reeves  (1968,  1972) 
Assistant  Director  of  Admission 
B.A.,  Drew,  1966. 

Robert  E.  Reidnauer  (1961,  1972) 

Operations  Supervisor  of  Administrative  Systems 

Frederick  Eugene  Ressler  (1952,  1964) 
Associate  Registrar 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1952. 

Rodney  Earl  Ressler  (1947,  1964) 
Assistant  Registrar 

Joseph  H.  Reynolds  (1970) 
Assistant  to  the  Dean  of  Student  Life 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1968;  M.A.,  1972. 

Adrian  F.  Richards  (1969) 

Professor  of  Oceanography  and  Ocean  Engineering  and  Director, 

Marine  Geotechnical  Laboratory,  CMES 

B.S.,  New  Mexico,  1951;  Ph.D.,  University  of  California, 

Scripps  Institution  of  Oceanography,  1957. 


Wallace  James  Richardson  (1952,  1959) 

Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S..U.S.  Naval  Academy,  1941 ;  M.S.,  Purdue,  1948.  P. E., 

Delaware,  1956. 

Martin  L.  Richtcr  (1965,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.A.,  Rutgers,  1960;  Ph.D.,  Indiana,  1965. 

James  Peter  Ries  (1967) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.M.E.,  Iowa,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

Mary  Gruber  Riley  (1953,  1968) 

Head  Reference  Librarian,  Linderman  Library 

B.A.,  Penn  State,  1952;  M.S.  in  L.S.,  Drexel,  1953. 

Alice  Duffy  Rinehart  (1964,  1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education  and  Coordinator  of 

Educational  Placement 

B.A.,  Smith,  1947;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh,  1965;  Ed.D.,  1969. 

Deborah  J.  Ritter  (1972) 

Administrative  Assistant,  Fritz  Engineering  Lab 

B.A.  in  Fine  Arts,  Toepaste  Kunsten  (Maastericht,  Holland), 

1969. 

Donald  L.  Ritter  (1969) 

Assistant  to  the  Vice  President— Research 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1961 ;  S.M.,  M.I.T.,  1963;  Sc.D.,  1966. 

Ronald  Samuel  Rivlin  (1967) 

Centennial  University  Professor  of  Mathematics  and 

Mechanics  and  Director,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  Cambridge  (England),  1937;  M.A.,  1939;  Sc.D.,  1952. 

Richard  Roberts  (1964,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Drexel,  1961;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1962;  Ph.D.,  1968. 

Margaret  Ellen  Felice  Rocheleau  (1971) 
Assistant  to  the  Editor,  Alumni  Bulletin 
B.A.,  Muhlenberg,  1968. 

Donald  O.  Rockwell,  Jr.  (1970,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Bucknell,  1964;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1965;  Ph.D.,  1968. 


282     Faculty  and  Staff 


Alberto  Romero  (1967) 

Instructor  in  Spanish,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

B.A.,  S.  Esteban  (Salamanca),  1960;  Lie,  Angelicum  (Rome), 

1961;  M.A.,  Penn,  1971. 

Robert  E.  Rosenwein  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Social  Relations 

B.A.,  Berkeley,  1962;  M.A.,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Michigan,  1970. 

H.  Joris  Rosse  (1972) 
Director  of  Physical  Planning 
B.A.,  Idaho,  1954. 

Herbert  Rubenstein  (1967,  1973) 

Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.A.,  Penn,  1942;  M.A.,  1943;  Ph.D.,  Columbia,  1949. 

Leonard  I.  Ruchelman  (1969,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Government  and  Head,  Division  of 

Urban  Studies 

B.A.,  Brooklyn  College,  1954;  Ph.D.,  Columbia,  1965. 

Sylvia  Rutkoff  (1966) 
Lecturer  in  Education 
B.A.,  Hunter,  1940;  M.A.,  Columbia  Teacher's  College,  1958. 

J.  Donald  Ryan  (1952,  1962) 

Professor  of  Geology  and  Chairman  of  Geological  Sciences 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1943;  M.S.,  1948;  Ph.D.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1952. 

James  S.  Saeger  (1967,  1969) 
Assistant  Professor  of  History 
B.A.,  Ohio  State,  1960;  M.A.,  1963;  Ph.D.,  1969. 


Stephen  Alan  Schafer  (1967) 

Visiting  Lecturer  in  Education 

B.A.,  Delaware,  1949;M.H.L.,  Hebrew  Union  College,  1955; 

Ed.D.,  Lehigh,  1971. 

Murray  Schechter  (1963,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Brooklyn,  1957;  M. A.,  N.Y.U.,  1959;  Ph.D.,  1964. 

William  Edward  Schiesser  (1960,  1963) 

Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering  and  Analyst,  Computing 

Center 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1955;  M. A.,  Princeton,  1958;Ph.D.,  1960. 

Stephen  Allen  Schmidt  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Military  Science 

B.S.,  LaSalle,  1963.  Captain,  Infantry,  U.S.  Army. 

Edward  Wilfred  Schmitt  (1968) 
Instructor  in  Marketing  and  Management 
B.S.,  Drexel,  1960;M.B.A.,  1964. 

Donald  Walter  Schmoyer  (1946,  1962) 
Assistant  Treasurer 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1944. 

John  A.  Schnaible  (1969) 

Instructor  in  Speech 

B.A.,  Indiana,  1967;  M.A.,  Colorado  State,  1969. 

Donald  D.  Schneider  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Fine  Arts  and  Director  of  Exhibitions 

and  Curator 

A.B.,  Wesleyan,  1957;  M.F.A.,  Princeton,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1971. 


Eric  Paul  Salathe  (1967,  1970) 

Associate  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics 

Sc.B.,  Brown,  1960;  M.S.,  Princeton,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Brown, 

1965. 

Norman  Harold  Sam  (1962,  1970) 

Professor  of  Education  and  Director,  Summer  Session 

B.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1951;  M.Ed.,  1955;  Ed.D.,  1962. 

Brian  Sanders  (1969) 

Associate  Librarian,  Linderman  Library 

B.A.,  Nottingham,  1959;  M.A.,  London,  1964;  M.L.S.,  Rutgers, 

1967. 

Robert  Guy  Sarubbi  (1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanics 

B.Sc.E.,  Cooper  Union,  1953;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1957;  Ph.D., 

1963. 

Kenneth  N.  Sawyers  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  I.T.T.,  1962;  Ph.D.,  Brown,  1967. 


Keith  J.  Schray  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  University  of  Portland,  1965;  Ph.D.,  Penn  State,  1970. 

Henry  J.  Schreitmueller  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Education 

A.B.,  Seton  Hall,  1952;  M.A.,  1970;  M.A.,  Catholic  University, 

1971. 

Stanley  Robert  Schultz  (1966) 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education,  Varsity  Baseball  Coach 

B. A. .Trenton  State,  1964. 

Eli  Schwartz  (1954,  1962) 

Professor  of  Economics  and  Finance 

B.S.,  Denver,  1943;  M.A.,  Connecticut,  1948;  Ph.D.,  Brown, 

1952. 

Charles  Bertrand  Sclar  (1968) 

Professor  of  Geology 

B.S.,CUNY,  1946;  M.S.,  Yale,  1948;  Ph.D.,  1951. 


Faculty  and  Staff     283 


I, -soph  l  .  Scullion.Jr.  (1972) 

Manager,  Special  Projei  ts  and  Program  Development,  and 
Director  of  Computing   issociates  Program,  l  omputingt 
B.S.,  Drcxcl.  1966. 

Andrea  Jane  Sedlak  (1971) 

Visiting  Instructor  in  Social  Relations 

A.B.,  Rutgers.  1968. 

Margaret  Melchior  Seylar  (1966) 
idjunct  Professor  in  Education 
B.S.,  Kutztown  State,  1945,  M. A.,  Lehigh,  1956. 

Sandra  Shaber  (1972) 

I  'isiting  Instructor  in  Government 

B.S.,  Ohio  State,  1957;  M.A.,  1959. 

William  Gerald  Shade  (1966,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  History 

A.B.,  Brown,  1961;  M. A.,  1962;  Ph.D.,  Wayne  State,  1966. 

Diane  Kay  Shaffer  (1971) 

Assistant  to  the  Director,  Public  Information 

B.S.,  Syracuse,  1970. 

Russell  Allen  Shaffer  (1964,  1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,Drexel,  1956;  Ph.D.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1962. 

Ching  Sheng  Shen  (1964,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Economics 

B.A.,  Yen-Ching  University,  1941;  M.A.,  Boston  University, 

1951 ;  Ph.D.,  North  Carolina,  1957. 

William  F.  Shimonkevitz  (1972) 

Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

B.S.,  Nebraska,  1952;  M.S.,  George  Washington,  1966. 

Colonel,  U.S.A.F. 

M.  Wayne  Shiveley  (1968,  1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Missouri,  1960;  B.S.,  1965;  M.S.,  1967;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1971. 

George  K.  Shortess  (1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Psychology  and  Director,  Division  of 

Visual  Science,  Center  for  Health  Sciences 

A.B.,  Lycoming,  1954;  M.A.,  Brown,  1960;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

Thomas  D.  Shreiner  (1970) 

Assistant  Football  and  Lacrosse  Coach  and  Instructor  in 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Gettysburg,  1963. 

Robert  Peter  Shurtleff  (1963,  1972) 

Director  of  Residence  Halls  and  Assistant  Dean  of  Residence 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1955;  M.Ed.,  1964. 


William  Joseph  Sibley  (1964) 
Counselor,  (  ounseling  Service 
B.S.,  East  Stroudsburg  State,  1955;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh,  L964. 

Sharon  Lois  Sicglcr  (1971) 

Reference  Librarian,  Mart  Library 

B.A.,  University  of  Maine,  1969;  M.L.S.,  New  York  at  Albany, 

1971. 

George  CM.  Sih  (1958,  1965) 

Professor  of  Mechanics  and  Director,  Institute  of  Fracture 

and  Solid  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Portland,  1953;  M.S.,  New  York,  1957;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1960. 

David  K.Silhanek  (1972) 

Visiting  Assistant  Professor  of  Classics 

A.B.,  Princeton,  1957;  M.A.  (Latin),  Michigan,  1968;  M.A. 

(Greek),  1969;  Ph.D.,  N.Y.U.,  1972. 

Ruth  Silverman  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Syracuse,  1956;  M.S.,  Cornell,  1958;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Washington,  1970. 

Gary  W.  Simmons  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  West  Virginia,  1961;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

Marvin  Howard  Simmons  (1970,  1973) 

Assistant  Director  of  University  Publications 

B.A.,  Juniata,  1964;  B.F.A.  and  M.F.A.,  Yale,  1970. 

Roger  D.  Simon  (1970,  1971) 
Assistant  Professor  of  History 
A.B.,  Rutgers,  1965;  M.A.,  Wisconsin,  1966,  Ph.D.,  1971. 

Dale  Rodekohr  Simpson  (1960,  1966) 

Professor  of  Geology 

B.S.,Penn  State,  1956;  M.S.,  Cal  Tech,  1958;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Kenneth  P.  Sinclair  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Accounting 

B.A.,  Massachusetts,  1968;  M.S.,  1970;  Ph.D.,  1972. 

Herbert  Bancroft  Skerry  (1967) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Harvard,  1954;  M.S.,  Wisconsin,  1958;  Ph.D.,  Michigan, 

1967. 

ZdenekJ.  Slouka  (1972) 

Visiting  Associate  Professor  of  International  Relations 

B.A.,  Masaryk  University  (Czechoslovakia),  1948;  M.A.,  N.Y.U. 

1958;  Ph.D.,  Columbia,  1965. 


284     Faculty  and  Staff 


Roger  George  Slutter  (1961,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering  and  Director  of 

Operations,  Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1953;  M.S.,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1968. 

Bruce  M.  Smackey  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Management  and  Marketing 

B.S.,  Rensselaer,  1962;  M.S.,  Case-Western  Reserve,  1964; 

Ph.D.,  Rensselaer,  1969. 

David  B.  Smith  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Economics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1969;  M.S.,  1970. 

Gerald  Francis  Smith  (1965) 

Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Buffalo,  1953;  Ph.D.,  Brown,  1956. 

John  Edwin  Smith  (1967,  1972) 

Manager,  Computer  Services,  Computing  Center 

B.A.,  Wesleyan,  1950;  M.A.,  1952;  B.S.,  Camsius,  1958. 

Margaret  N.  Smith  (1968) 

Assistant  Librarian,  Acquisitions 

A.B.,  Oberlin,  1940;  M.L.S.,  Drexel,  1966. 


William  J.  Snyder  (1967) 

Postdoctoral  Fellow  in  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1963;  M.S.,  1965;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

Anne  C.  Solderitsch  (1972) 

Assistant  to  the  Planner,  Campus  Planning  Office 

Albert  J.  Solomon  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  University  of  Scranton,  1962;  M.A.,  1964;  Ph.D.,  Penn 

State,  1969. 

Barbara  E.  Solt  (1970) 

Coordinator  of  Volunteer  Community  Services 

A.B.,  Muhlenberg,  1965;  M.S. S.W.,  Columbia,  1967. 

Erwin  Alfred  Sommer  (1967) 

Research  Associate  in  Mechanics 

Dipl.  Phys.,  University  of  Gottingen  (Germany),  1962; 

Dr.  Rer.  Nat.,  University  of  Freiburg  (Germany),  1966. 

Wilbur  Devilla  Bernhart  Spatz  (1946,  1970) 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Lafayette,  1930;  M.S.,  Purdue,  1934;  Ph.D.,  New  York, 

1943. 


Wesley  Richard  Smith  (1958,  1968) 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1950;  M.S.,  1951;  Ph.D.. 


Princeton,  1957. 


Leslie  H.  Sperling  (1967) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Florida,  1954;  M.A.,  Duke,  1957;  Ph.D.,  1959. 


William  Adams  Smith,  Jr.  (1955,  1968) 

Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  U.S.  Naval  Academy,  1951;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1957;  Ph.D.. 

N.Y.U.,  1966.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1959. 


Oles  M.  Smolansky  (1963,  1970) 

Professor  of  International  Relations 

A.B.,  N.Y.U.,  1953;  A.M.,  Columbia,  1955;  Ph.D. 


1959. 


Robert  Steacy  Sprague  (1957,  1966) 

Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Washington  &  Jefferson,  1943;  Ph.D.,  Illinois,  1949. 

Richard  Moore  Spriggs  (1964,  1972) 

Vice  President— Administration  and  Professor, 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1952;M.S.,  Illinois,  1956;  Ph.D.,  1958. 


Mervin  Philip  Smolinsky  (1970) 

Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.A.,  Temple,  1951;  M.S.,  Pittsburgh,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1969. 


Duane  E.  Stackhouse  (1969) 

Associate  Director,  Health  Service 

B.S.,  Juniata,  1957;  M.D.;  Temple,  1961. 


Donald  Morgan  Smyth  (1971) 

Director,  Materials  Research  Center  and  Associate  Professor, 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science  and  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Maine,  1951;  Ph.D.,  M.I.T.,  1954. 

Max  Donald  Snider  (1946,  1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Marketing  and  Assistant  Dean  of  the 

College  of  Business  and  Economics 

B.S.,  Illinois,  1936;  M.S.,  1937;  M.B.A.,  Stanford,  1941. 

Andrew  Kagey  Snyder  (1967,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Swarthmore,  1959;  M.A.,  Colorado,  1961;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh, 

1965. 


William  Butler  Stafford  (1967,  1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education 

A.B.,  Ohio,  1954;  M.A.,  1955;  Ed.D.,  Indiana,  1965. 

William  Edward  Stanford  (1967,  1970) 
Director  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid 
B. A.,  Drew,  1962. 

Sidney  Stecher  (1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.B.A.,  CCNY,  1957;  M.S.,  1959;  Ph.D.,  CUNY,  1966. 


Faculty  and  Staff     285 


I,.hn  Stohlct  Steckbecl     196 

Assistant  Professoi  oj  Physical  Education  and  Assistant 

Direi  tor,  Physical  Education  and  {ntramurals 

B.S.,  Wesl  Chester  State,  1936;  M.Sc,  Penn,  1951. 

Fred  P.  Stein  .  1963,  1971) 

•  of(  hemical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1956;  M.S.E.,  Michigan,  1957;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Olive  Stengel  (1966) 

ilation  Supervisor,  Library 


fames  Edward  Sturm  (1956,  1972) 

Pi  i/     oi    7  (  'hemistry 

B.A.,  St.  John's  (Minnesota),  1951;  Ph.D.,  Notre  Dame,  1957 

Robert  Joseph  Sullivan  (1962,  1969) 

Professor  of  Journalism 

B.A.,  Syracuse,  1947;  M. A.,  1951. 

John  R.  Sumner  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 

B.S.,  Arizona,  1966;  M.S.,  1968;  Ph.D.,  Stanford,  1971. 


Gilbert  Allan  Stengle  (1960,  1970) 

Professor  oj  Mathematics 

B.E. P.,  Cornell,  1954;  M.S.,  Wisconsin,  1957;  Ph.D. 


1961. 


Morris  H.  Sunshine  (1972) 

Associate  Professor  of  Social  Relations 

B.A.,  Missouri,  1949;  M.A.,  1954;  Ph.D.,  Northwestern,  1962 


Alan  Hugh  Stenning  (1965) 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.Sc,  Glasgow  University,  1950;  M.S.,  M.I.T.,  1951;  Sc.D., 

1955. 


Alfred  Kriss  Susskind  (1968) 

Professor  and  Chairman  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.B.E.,  B.S.,  Brooklyn  Polytechnic,  1948;  S.M.,  M.I.T., 

1950. 


Theodore  M.  Stephens,  Jr.  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.S.,  Patterson  State,  1957;  M.S.,  1959. 


Harry  O.  Tachovsky  (1971) 
Instructor  in  Education 
B.S.,  Kutztown  State,  1970. 


Louis  W.  Stern  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Philosophy 

B.A.,  Temple,  1964;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1966;  Ph.D.. 


1970. 


Donald  Lee  Talhelm  (1960) 
Instructor  in  Electrical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  M.S.,  1960. 


Richard  L.  Stocker  (1973) 

Assistan  t  Professor  of  Geology 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1964;  M.S.,  1966;  M.Phil.,  1969;  Ph.D.,  Yale, 

1972. 


Lambert  Tall  (1955,  1970) 

Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.E.,  Sydney  (Australia),  1954;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1957;  Ph.D. 

1961. 


John  A.  Stoops  (1959,  1966) 

Professor  and  Dean  of  the  School  of  Education 

B.S.,  California  State  College,  1948;  M.S.,  Penn,  1949; 

Ed.D.,  1960. 

Robert  Daniel  Stout  (1939,  1960) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science  and  Dean  of 

the  Graduate  School 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1935;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1941;  Ph.D.,  1944; 

D.Sc,  Albright,  1967.  P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1946. 

Carl  Ferdinand  Strauch  (1934,  1953) 

Distinguished  Professor  of  English 

A.B.,  Muhlenberg,  1930;  M.A.,  Lehigh,  1934;  Ph.D.,  Yale, 

1946. 

Karol  Strelecki  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.S.,  Rutgers,  1961;  M.S.,  Temple,  1970. 

Joseph  Strickland,  Jr.  (1972) 
Instructor  in  Education 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1972. 


Stephen  Kenneth  Tarby  (1961,  1967) 

Associate  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon,  1956;  M.S.,  1958;  Ph.D.,  1962. 

AnnTarola  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.S.,  Penn  State,  1965;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh,  1972. 

Catherine  Tarrant  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Illinois,  1968;  Ph.D.,  Rice,  1972. 

Merle  W.Tate  (1965) 

Professor  of  Education,  Graduate  Student  Advisor 

A.B.,  Central  Wesleyan,  1926;  M.A.,  Montana,  1943;  Ed.M. 

Harvard,  1946;  Ed.D.,  1947. 

Robert  Sayre  Taylor,  Jr. 

Legal  Counsel 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1925;  LL.B.,  Penn,  1928. 

Everett  Anderson  Teal  (1945) 

Director  of  Placement  and  Personnel  Services 

B.S.,  Ball  State  Teachers,  1932;  M.A.,  Columbia,  1941. 


286     Faculty  and  Staff 


Theodore  Alfred  Terry  (1951,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Drexel,  1950;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1951;  Ph.D.,  1963.  P. E., 

Pennsylvania,  1957. 


David  Trutt  (1965,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Lafayette,  1959;  M.S.,  Brown,  1962;  Ph.D.,  Purdue, 

1964. 


David  A.  Thomas  (1968,  1970) 

Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science  and  Associate 

Director,  Materials  Research  Center 

B.S.,  Cornell,  1953;  Sc.D.,  M.I.T.,  1958. 

John  H.  C.  Thompson  (1968) 

Visiting  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  New  College  (Oxford),  1930;  M.A.,  D.Ph.L.,  1933. 


B.  Thayer  Turner  (1970) 
Varsity  Wrestling  Coach 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1961. 

LeRoy  J.  Tuscher  (1971) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education 

B.S.,  Northern  State,  1958;  M.A.,  Stanford,  1964;  Ph.D. 

Florida  State,  1971. 


H.  Louis  Thompson  (1969,  1972) 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Accounting 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1930;  M.B.A.,  1965. 

Robert  J.  Thornton  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

A.B.,  Xavier,  1965;  M.A.,  Illinois,  1967;  Ph.D., 


1970. 


James  A.  Tiefenbrunn  (1969,  1972) 

Assistant  Director  of  Residence  Halls  and  Assistant  Dean  of 

Residence 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1966;  M.B.A.,  1972. 

Charles  Leon  Tipton  (1964,  1971) 

Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Southern  California,  1958;  M.A.,  1961;  Ph.D.,  1964. 

Linda  L.  Tipton  (1972) 

Assistant  to  the  Director  of  Admission 

B.A.,  Dickinson,  1971. 

Doris  Mae  Transue  (1964) 
Nurse,  Health  Service 
R.N.,  St.  Luke's,  1947. 

Louis  Reed  Tripp  (1964) 

Frank  L.  Magee  Professor  of  Business  Administration  and 

Acting  Coordinator,  Center  for  Social  Research 

B.A.,  Union,  1934;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1942. 

Edward  J.  Trost  (1971,  1972) 

Assistant  Director  of  Placement  and  Personnel  Services 

A.B.,  Michigan,  1941;  M. A.,  Lehigh,  1971. 

Kenneth  Mangold  Trumbore  (1946) 
Assistant  Manager,  Bookstore 
B.A.,  Moravian,  1940. 

Wendell  Piggott  Trumbull  (1957,  1958) 

Professor  of  Accounting 

B.S.,  Illinois,  1937;  M.A.,  Michigan,  1941;  Ph.D.,  1954. 

C.P.A.,  Mississippi,  1949. 


Kenneth  Kai-Ming  Tzeng  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

B.S.,  National  Taiwan,  1959;  M.S.,  Illinois,  1962;  Ph.D., 

1969. 

S.  Herbert  Unterberger  (1965) 
Adjunct  Professor  in  Economics 
B.S.,Penn,  1934;  M. A.,  1935;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Dean  Pearson  Updike  (1965) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Princeton,  1957;  M.S.,  N.Y.U.,  1960;  Ph.D.,  Brown, 

1964. 

Paul  J.  Usinowicz  (1972) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  Iowa,  1968;  M.S.,  1969;  Ph.D.,  Michigan,  1970. 

Victor  Manuel  Valenzuela  (1957;  1969) 

Professor  of  Spanish,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

B.A.,  San  Francisco  State,  1951;  M.  A.,  Columbia,  1952; 

Ph.D.,  1965. 

John  W.  Vanderhoff  (1970) 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry,  Director,  National 

Printing  Ink  Research  Institute  and  Associate  Director, 

Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 

B.S.,  Niagara,  1947;  Ph.D.,  Buffalo,  1951. 

Anje  C.  van  der  Naald  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Spanish,  Modern  Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

B.A.,  Carleton  University  (Ottawa),  1963;  M.A.,  Illinois, 

1965;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

George  VanDoren  (1971) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1969;  M.A.,  1971. 


Faculty  and  Staff    287 


John  Andrews  Van  Eerdc  (1960,  1963) 

Prof  iic/i,  Modem  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 

A.B.,  Harvard,  1938:  M.  A.,  1939;  Ph.D.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1953. 

Nan  Van  Gieson  (1973) 

Assistant  Director  of  Summet  Session  aiul  issistant  Dean  oj 

Education 

B.A.,  Russell  Sage,  1958;  M.Ed..  Lehigh,  1967;  Ed.D.,  1969. 

David  Alan  VanHorn  (1962.  1967) 

ssor  and  Chairman  oj  Civil  Engineering 
B.S.,  Iowa  State,  1951;  M.S.,  1956;Ph.D.,  1959.  P. E.,  Iowa, 
1957. 

Wesley  Johnson  Van  Sciver  (1962,  1965) 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  M.I.T.,  1940;  Ph.D.,  Stanford,  1954. 

Eric  Varley  (1967) 

Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathematics 
B.Sc.,  University  of  Manchester  (England),  1955;  M.Sc, 
1957;  Ph.D.,  Brown,  1961. 

Ramamirthan  Venkataraman  (1968) 

Assistant  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College  (Madras,  India),  1960;  M.A., 

1961;  Ph.D.,  Brown,  1968. 

Kenneth  J.  Veprek  (1968) 

Reference  Librarian,  Mart  Science  and  Engineering  Library 

B.S.,  Newark  College  of  Engineering,  1953;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel, 

1966. 

Thomas  Joseph  Verbonitz  (1967,  1973) 
Director  of  Administrative  Services 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1958;  M.B. A.,  1960. 

John  F.  Vickrey  (1961,  1966) 
Associate  Professor  of  English 
Ph.B.,  Chicago,  1949;  A.M.,  1952;  Ph.D.,  Indiana,  1960. 

Charles  F.  Vihon  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Law 

B.S.,  Northwestern,  1959;  J. D.,  Chicago,  1962. 

Edwin  M.  Wagner  (1966) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

B.G.E.,  Omaha,  1965.  Major,  USAF. 

James  Harold  Wagner  (1949,  1951) 

Registrar 

B.A.,  Gettysburg,  1947;  M. A.,  Pennsylvania,  1950. 

D.  Alexander  Waldenrath  (1968,  1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  German,  Modern  Foreign  Languages 

and  Literatures 

B.A.,  Berkeley,  1961;  M.A.,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1969. 


John  E.  Walker  (1967.  1972) 

Director  <>/  Computing  Center  anil  Associate  Professor  of 

Economics 

B.S.,Clemson,  1958;  Ph.D.,  Virginia,  1963. 

Elvin  Galen  Warfcl  (1966,  1971) 

Associate  Professor  of  Education 

B.S.,  Shippcnsburg  State,  1950;  M.Ed.,  Pcnn  State,  1958; 

Ed.D.,  Columbia,  1967. 

Stuart  K.  Webster  (1972) 

Instructor  in  Accounting 

B.A.,  Heidelberg  College,  1964;  M.B. A.,  Bowling  Green,  1965. 

C.P.A.,  Iowa,  1969. 

Robert  Pey-Ying  Wei  (1966,  1970) 

Professor  of  Mechanics 

B.S.,  Princeton,  1953;  M.S.,  1954;  Ph.D.,  1960. 

Daniel  Jacob  Roger  Weine  (1972) 

Humanities  Cataloger 

B.A.,  Vermont,  1961 ;  M.A.T.,  Harvard,  1962;  A.M.L.S., 

Michigan,  1967. 

Andrew  R.  Weintraub  (1966) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

B.A.,  Rutgers,  1961;  M.A.,  1964;  Ph.D.,  1966. 

Leonard  Andrew  Wenzel  (1951,  1962) 
Professor  and  Chairman  of  Chemical  Engineering 
B.S.,Penn  State,  1943;  M.S.,  Michigan,  1948;  Ph.D.,  1950. 
P. E.,  Pennsylvania,  1958. 

NilsH.  Wessell  (1972) 

Visiting  Assistant  Professor  of  Government 

A.B.,  Stanford,  1964;  M.A.,  1970;  Ph.D.,  Columbia,  1972. 

Donald  Bigham  Wheeler,  Jr.  (1947,  1957) 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1938;Ph.D.,  Cal  Tech,  1947. 

Howard  R.  Whitcomb  (1967) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Government 
A.B.,  Brown,  1961;  M. A.,  Lehigh,  1963. 

John  Calvin  Whitehead  (1967) 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education  and  Assistant  Varsity 

Football  Coach 

B.S.,  East  Stroudsburg  State,  1950. 

Gary  E.  Whitehouse  (1965,  1969) 

Associate  Professor  of  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1960;  M.S.,  1962;  Ph.D.,  Arizona  State,  1966. 

P.E.,  Pennsylvania,  1966. 

Joseph  Hardy  Whritenour  (1965) 
Assistant  Director  of  Public  Information 


288     Faculty  and  Staff 


Albert  Wilansky  (1948,  1957) 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Dalhousie  (Canada),  1941;  B.S.,  1942;  Ph.D.. 

1947. 


Brown, 


Robert  Clifford  Williamson  (1963,  1964) 
Professor  of  Sociology  and  Chairman  of  Social  Relations 
B.A.,  U.C.L.A.,  1938;  M.A.,  1940;  Ph.D.,  Southern 
California,  1951. 

Gregory  B.  Wilson  (1972) 

Staff  Assistant,  Aerospace  Studies 

Staff  Sergeant,  USAF. 

Kenneth  E.  Wolf  (1966) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  Utah,  1951;  M.S.,  1951;  Ph.D.,  1956. 

John  Dudley  Wood  (1960,  1965) 

Associate  Professor  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

B.S.,  Case-Western  Reserve,  1953;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  Ph.D., 

1962. 

Willard  Ross  Yates  (1955,  1963) 

Professor  of  Government 

B.A.,  Oregon,  1948;  M.A.,  1949;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1956. 

Bung-Tseng  Yen  (1957,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

B.S.,  National  Taiwan,  1955;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1959;  Ph.D., 

1963. 

CarlL.  Young  (1972) 

Staff  Assistant,  Aerospace  Studies 

Master  Sergeant,  USAF. 

Thomas  Edwin  Young  (1958,  1966) 

Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1949;  M.S.,  1950;  Ph.D.,  Illinois,  1952. 

Gregory  A.  Zebrowski  (1972) 
Instructor  in  Education 
B.S.,  East  Stroudsburg,  1971. 

Daniel  Zeroka  (1967) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 
B.S.,  Wilkes,  1963;  Ph.D.,  Penn,  1966. 

Albert  Charles  Zettlemoyer  (1941,  1969) 

Provost  and  Vice  President,  and  Distinguished  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1936;  M.S.,  1938;  Ph.D.,  M.I.T.,  1941; D.Sc, 

Clarkson,  1965. 

Earl  R.  Zimmerman  (1968) 

Instructor  in  Education 

B.S.,  California  State,  1944;  M.Ed.,  Penn  State,  1954. 


Emory  W.  Zimmers,  Jr.  (1969) 

Instructor  in  Industrial  Engineering 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1966;  B.S.,  1967;  M.S.,  1967. 

Charles  Keller  Zug  (1961) 

Advisor  on  Bequests,  Trusts,  and  Insurance 

B.S.  in  I.E.,  Lehigh,  1927;  B.S.  in  E.E.,  1927. 


Emeriti 

Carl  Elmer  Allen  (1930,  1964) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Accounting 

B.S.,  Illinois,  1923;  M.S.,  1925;  Ph.D.,  1930.  C.P.A., 

Pennsylvania,  1939. 

Edward  Delbert  Amstutz  (1938,  1972) 

Howard  S.  Bunn  Distinguished  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 
B.S.,  Wooster,  1930;  M.S.,  Institute  of  Paper  Chemistry, 
1932;  Ph.D.,  Cornell,  1936;  D.Sc,  Wooster,  1969. 

Lloyd  William  Ashby  (1966,  1971) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B.,  Hastings  (Nebraska),  1927;  M.A.,  Columbia  Teachers 

College,  1935;  Ed.D.,  1950. 

Allen  Jennings  Barthold  (1939,  1967) 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Romance  Languages 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1921;  Ph.D.,  Yale,  1931. 

Jacob  Lynford  Beaver  (1917,  1952) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Electrical  Engineering 

E.E.,  Lehigh,  1904;  M.S.,  1921;  Sc.D.,  Harvard,  1932. 

Lois  Reed  Benson  (1955,  1971) 

Chief  Nurse  and  Administrative  Assistant  Emeritus,  Health 

Service 

B.A.,  Michigan,  1932;  R.N. ,  Allentown  Hospital,  1939. 

Robert  Dominick  Billinger  (1923,  1965) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Lehigh,  1921;  M.S.,  1925;  Ph.D.,  Cincinnati,  1929. 

Natt  Bryant  Burbank  (1964,  1971) 

Professor  and  Assistant  Dean  Emeritus,  School  of  Education 

A.B.,  Vermont,  1925;  M. A.,  Columbia,  1931;  LL.D.,  Vermont, 

1963. 

Allison  Butts  (1957,  1961) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

A.B.,  Princeton,  1911;  B.S. ,  M.I.T.,  1913. 

Cassius  Wild  Curtis  (1946,  1971) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 

A.B.,  Williams,  1928;  Ph.D.,  Princeton,  1936. 


Faculty  and  Staff     289 


.!  Hutchins  Cutlci  1 1"  10,  1947) 
I  or  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

A. II..  Harvard,  1925;  A.M.,  1926;  Ph.D.,  1930. 

II.  Barrett  Davis  [1946,  1972) 

Professoi  Emeritus  of  Speech 

B.L.I.,  Emerson,  1920;  Cert.,  American  Academy  of  Dramatic 

Arts.  1"  10;  M.A.  (Hon.),  Emerson.  1958. 

Albert  William  dc  Ncufville  (1948,  1957) 
[ssoi  iati  Professor  Emeritus  oj  Mechanics 
Dipl.  Ing.,  Berlin,  1922;  M.S.,  Stevens  Institute,  1948; 
Ph.D.,  Lehigh.  1952. 

Herbert  Maynard  Diamond  (1927,  1964) 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Economics 
B.A.,  Yale,  1914;  Ph.D.,  1917. 

William  Joseph  Eney  (1936,  1971) 

Joseph  T.  Stuart  Professor  Emeritus  of  Civil  Engineering 
B.S.,  Johns  Hopkins,  1927;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1938.  P. E., 
Pennsylvania,  1939. 

George  Dormer  Fame  (1927,  1945) 

Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Romance  Languages 

A.B.,  Columbia,  1926;  M.A.,  1927. 

Adelbert  Ford  (1931,  1955) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology 

A.B.,  Michigan,  1920;  A.M.,  1923;  Ph.D.,  1926. 

George  Dewey  Harmon  (1925,  1964) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  American  History 

B.A.,  Duke,  1921;  M.A.,  1922;  Ph.D.,  Penn,  1930. 

Robert  Austin  Harrier  (1951,  1970) 

Executive  Secretary  Emeritus,  Alumni  Association 

E.M.,  Lehigh,  1927. 

Ladd  E.  Hoover  (1960,  1967) 

Associate  Director  Emeritus  of  the  University  Health  Service 
B.Sc,  University  of  Nebraska  College  of  Medicine,  1924; 
M.D.,  1926. 

George  Rankin  Irwin  (1967,  1972) 

Boeing  University  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mechanics 

A.B.,  Knox  College,  1930;  M.S.,  Illinois,  1933;  Ph.D.,  1937. 

Voris  V.  Latshaw  (1931,  1947) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Indiana,  1927;  A.M.,  1928;  Ph.D.,  1930. 

John  Douglas  Leith  (1945,  1964,  1966) 

Dean  Emeritus  of  Students 

A.B.,  North  Dakota,  1920;  A.M.,  Columbia,  1924. 


Ethel  M.iv  M.fnrmick  (l')ti-l.  I')6<)) 
\     ■,  iate  Professor  Emeritus  oj  Education 
B.S.,  Northwestern,  1931;  M.Ed.,  Penn  State,  1941 ;  D.Sc.Ed., 
Cedar  Crest,  1963. 

George  Walter  McCoy,  Jr.  (1956,  1970) 
University  Physician  Emeritus 
B.S.,  Penn,  1929;  M.D.,  1932. 

Archie  Roscoe  Miller  (1922,  1961) 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Electrical  Engineering 
B.S.,  Illinois,  1918;M.S.,  Lehigh,  1925. 

Harvey  Alexander  Neville  (1927,  1964) 

President  Emeritus 

A.B.,  Randolph-Macon,  1918;  M.A. ,  Princeton,  1920;  Ph.D., 

1921;  LL.D.  (Hon.),  Randolph-Macon,  1952;  L.H.D.  (Hon.), 

Moravian,  1962;  LL.D.  (Hon.),  Lafayette,  1962;  Sc.D.  (Hon.) 

Lehigh,  1965. 

Howard  Charles  Pieper  (1967,  1973) 
University  Physician  Emeritus 
B.S.,  Iowa  State,  1926;  M.D.,  1932. 

Francis  Joseph  Quirk  (1950,  1972) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Fine  Arts 

Dipl.,  Rhode  Island  School  of  Design,  1929. 

George  Emil  Raynor  (1931,  1964) 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 
B.S.,  Washington,  1918;  M.A.,  Princeton,  1920;  Ph.D.,  1923. 

Joseph  Benson  Reynolds  (1907,  1948) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics  and  Theoretical  Mechanic: 

B.A.,  Lehigh,  1907;  M.A.,  1910;  Ph.D.,  Moravian,  1919. 

Edgar  Heisler  Riley  (1926,  1958) 
Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 
A.B.,  Cornell,  1915;  Ph.D.,  1925. 

Raymond  Burkert  Sawyer  (1946,  1964) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 

Ph.B.,  Ripon,  1921;  M.S.,  Wisconsin,  1925;  Ph.D.,  Chicago, 

1930. 

Ernest  Bernhard  Schulz  (1927,  1965) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

B.S.,  Michigan,  1920;  M. A.,  1921;  Ph.D.,  1927. 

Charles  Augustus  Seidle  (1948,  1962) 

Vice  President  Emeritus 

B.A.,  Pittsburgh,  1931;  M.A.,  Columbia,  1936;  Ed.D.,  1948. 

Edith  Amanda  Seifert  (1923,  1969) 
Bursar  Emeritus 


290     Faculty  and  Staff 


Jonathan  Burke  Severs  (1927,  1969) 

Distinguished  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

A.B.,  Rutgers,  1925;  A.M.,  Princeton,  1927;  Ph.D.,  Yale, 

1935.  F.R.S.A.,  1962. 

Earl  Kenneth  Smiley  (1934,  1964) 

Vice  President  Emeritus 

A.B.,  Bowdoin,  1921;  M. A.,  Lehigh,  1935;  L.H.D.  (Hon.). 

Moravian,  1947;  LL.D.,  (Hon.),  Waynesburg,  1952. 


Fred  Assenheimer  (1970,  1971) 

Assistant  Executive  Secretary,  Alumni  Association 

Howard  J.  Axon  (1971) 

National  Science  Foundation  Visiting  Senior  Scientist  in 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

John  Ross  Baker  (1962,  1971) 
Lecturer  in  English 


Judson  Gray  Smull  (1919,  1950) 
Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 
B.S.,  Lehigh,  1906;  M.S.,  1921. 

Milton  Caleb  Stuart  (1926-,  1952) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

B.S.,  Penn,  1909;  M.E.,  1924. 

Francis  John  Trembley  (1928,  1972) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Ecology 

B.S.,  Hobart,  1928;  M.S.,  Lehigh,  1931;  Ph.D.,  Penn,  1934; 

D.Sc,  Hobart,  1964. 

John  Schrader  Tremper  (1939,  1968) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  German 

A.B.,  Colgate,  1928;  M.A.,  Cornell,  1932;  Ph.D.,  1938. 

John  Harms  Ubben  (1960,  1973) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  German 

A.B.,  Central  College  (Iowa),  1936;  M.A.,  Kentucky,  1937; 

Ph.D.,  Chicago,  1942. 

Ralph  Newcomb  vanArnam  (1928,  1967) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics  and  Astronomy 

E.E.,  Cornell,  1926;  M.S.,  1927. 

Lawrence  Whitcomb  (1930,  1965) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 

Ph.B.,  Brown,  1922;  A.M.,  Princeton,  1928;  Ph.D.,  1930. 


Richard  H.  Barkalow  (1970) 

Instructor  in  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

Allen  Merril  Barstow  (1967) 
Instructor  in  Romance  Languages 

Inge  F.  Bennett  (1971) 
Research  Associate,  Psychology 

Raymond  W.  Bennett  (1971) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 

Vahram  Biricikoglu  (1966,  1968) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanics 

Harold  Clarke  (1967) 

Lecturer  and  Technician  in  Physics 

Percy  Elwood  Corbett  (1964) 

Adjunct  Professor  of  International  Relations 

Keith  H.Corkum  (1970) 
Instructor  in  Economics 

Joseph  A.  Corrado  (1963,  1967) 
Instructor  in  Civil  Engineering 

Mildred  J.  Crosby  (1962) 
Psychometrician,  Counseling 


Bradford  WiUard  (1939,  1959) 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 
B.A.,  Lehigh,  1921;  A.M.,  Harvard,  1922;  Ph.D.,  1923. 

Ralph  Charles  Wood  (1958,  1961) 

Professor  Emeritus  of  German 

B.A.,  and  B.E.,  Cincinnati,  1928;  M.A.,  1930;  Ph.D., 

Cornell,  1933. 


Osman  A.  El-Ghamry  (1969) 

Visiting  Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

George  Tyler  Embley  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Mechanics 

David  M.  Fairhurst  (1969) 

Research  Associate,  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings  Research 


Resignations  and  Retirements 

Thomas  Althouse  (1971) 

Visiting  Assistant  Professor  of  Fine  Arts 


Robert  Donald  Gaines  (1971) 
Instructor  in  Military  Science 

Leanor  Ruth  Gilbert  (1930,  1943) 
Recorder 


Charles  Arthur  Apple  (1970) 

Instructor  in  Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 


Richard  Allyn  Gonce  (1965) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 


Faculty  and  Staff     291 


James  B.  Covin'     I'li.'ii 
Psychiatrist,  Health  Service 

Lloyd  Hitchcock,  [r.  ^1966) 
idjunct  Professor  oj  Psychology 

John  Wilham  Humes  (1969) 
[ssistant  Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Information  Science 

Sam  path  N.  S.  Iyengar  (1969) 
Instructor  in  Civil  Engineering 

Pierre  Juliard*  (1968) 
Assistant  Professor  oj  History 

Miguel  Angel  Macias,  Jr.  (1965) 
Instructor  in  Civil  Engineering 

Ronald  Bennett  Madison  (1964) 
Instructor  in  Civil  Engineering 

George  D.  Marsh,  Jr.  (1965) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 

Lynne  Carol  Marsh  (1971) 
Social  Science  Cataloger 

Walter  Frederick  Marshall  (1967) 
Instructor  in  Romance  Languages 

Leslie  Guy  McCracken,  Jr.  (1956) 
Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Donald  Frazier  McLeroy  (1966) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 

Michael  P.  Mortell  (1967,  1972) 

Associate  Professor,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics 

John  Wayne  Murphy  (1962,  1964) 
Director  of  University  Publications 

Linda  A.  Myers  (1970) 
Humanities  Cataloger 

LajosG.  Nagy  (1970) 

Visiting  Research  Associate  Professor,  Center  for  Surface 

and  Coatings  Research 

Judith  Neale  (1969) 
Instructor  in  Centennial  School 

William  L.  Nelson  (1969) 
Instructor  in  Centennial  School 

Julius  Nimmons  (1970) 
Lecturer  in  History 


Monroe  C.  Nichols  (1968) 
Instructot  m  Physical  Education 

Thomas  Russell  Ortolano  (1965) 
Assistant  I'rofessoi  of  Chemistry 

Paul  Croce  Paris  (1955,  1965) 

l'r,<fi-<i,n  .'I  Mr,  hani,  s 

Donald  G.Podoll  (1969) 

Staff  Sergeant,  Aerospace  Studies 

Betty  Potash  (1970) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology 

Donald  L.  Prullage  (1968) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Peter  Jules  Richetta  (1965,  1966) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Fred  S.  Sauerwine  (1966,  1971) 

Visiting  Assistant  Professor  in  Metallurgy  and  Materials 

Science 

Richard  N.  Sopko  (1961) 

Photographer— Draftsman  in  Civil  Engineering 

Glenn  E.Stauffer  (1969) 
Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

Joseph  C.  Surico  (1969) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Aerospace  Studies 

Hugh  T.  Sutherland  (1967) 

Instrument  Associate  in  Civil  Engineering 

Douglas  Henley  Taylor  (1964,  1965) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Peter  Tinker  (1971) 
Instructor  in  English 

John  Thomas  Hanley  Timm  (1967) 
Instructor  in  Romance  Languages 

Frank  Van  der  Woude  (1970) 

Postdoctoral  Research  Associate  in  Civil  Engineering 

LeoF.  VanHoey  (1969) 
Associate  Professor  of  Sociology 

Bruce  A.  Wagaman  (1969) 
Assistant  Accountant 

Walter  Barry  Wagner  (1968) 
Instructor  in  Mechanical  Engineering 


292     Faculty  and  Staff 


ussian 


John  Loren  Washburn  (1965) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Government 

Richard  A.  K.  Watt  (1969) 
Assistant  Professor  of  German  and  R 

Ben  L.  Wechsler  (1969) 
Professor  of  Military  Science 

Michael  Wilkinson  (1971) 

Postdoctoral  Research  Associate  in  Center  for  Surface  and 

Coatings  Research 

Elizabeth  E.  M.  Williams  (1969) 
Visiting  Lecturer  in  Education 


Deceased 

Fay  Conant  Bartlett  (1917,  1956) 

Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physical  Education 

December  28,  1971. 

Francis  Mario  Brady,  Jr.  (1955,  1970) 
Associate  Professor  of  Accounting 
July  30,  1972. 

Merton  Otis  Fuller  (1912,  1955) 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Civil  Engineering 

September  25,  1972. 

E.  Everett  MacNamara  (1968) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 
December  16,  1972. 


Registration  Statistics 


Spring.  1 ')  7  0 

Undcrgr.idu.ito  Students 30-12 

Graduate  Students 1788 

Special  Students 24 

Total 4854 


Summer,  1970 

Undergraduate  Students 335 

Graduate  Students 1254 

Total 1589 


Fall,  1970 

Undergraduate  Students 3166 

Graduate  Students 1933 

Special  Students 46 

Total 5145 


Students  in  Undergraduate  Curricula  Spring,  1970 


Curriculum 

Seniors 

Juniors 

Sophomores 

Freshmen 

Arts  and  Science 

249 

237 

234 

244 

^Arts  and  Engineering 

22 

16 

27 

27 

Business  and  Economics 

160 

145 

139 

105 

Chemical  Engineering 

40 

50 

51 

■"  Chemistry 

13 

16 

23 

Civil  Engineering 

32 

37 

44 

Electrical  Engineering 

64 

74 

66 

Engineering  Mechanics 

3 

2 

6 

,,    Engineering  Physics 

13 

3 

15 

,    Fundamental  Science 

5 

8 

17 

Industrial  Engineering 

37 

47 

47 

Mechanical  Engineering 

67 

62 

52 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

36 

23 

20 

Unclassified  Engineers 

1 

10 

451 

--General  College  Division 

Total 

741 

721 

748 

827 

G.C.D. 


Total 


Students  in  Undergraduate  Curricula  Fall,  1970 


Curriculum 

Seniors 

Juniors 

Sophomores 

Freshmen 

Arts  and  Science 

230 

232 

241 

234 

Arts  and  Engineering 

18 

22 

17 

43 

Business  and  Economics 

144 

131 

127 

128 

Chemical  Engineering 

52 

48 

67 

Chemistry 

13 

22 

14 

Civil  Engineering 

34 

41 

64 

Electrical  Engineering 

70 

66 

84 

Engineering  Mechanics 

2 

7 

1 

Engineering  Physics 

14 

13 

Fundamental  Science 

7 

20 

18 

Industrial  Engineering 

44 

43 

44 

2 

Mechanical  Engineering 

68 

56 

55 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

25 

18 

33 

Unclassified  Engineers 

6 

30 

510 

General  College  Division 

Total 

707 

726 

808 

917 

G.C.D. 


Total 

937 

100 

530 

167 

49 

139 

220 

10 

27 

45 

133 

179 

76 

546 

8 

3166 


294      Registration  Statistics 


Geographical  Distribution  of  Undergraduate  Students  Fall,  1970  f 


/ 


Alabama 

1 

California 

10 

Colorado 

4 

Connecticut 

105  - 

Delaware 

26 

District  of  Columbia 

13 

Florida 

14 

Georgia 

3 

Illinois 

21 

Indiana 

6 

Iowa 

2 

Kentucky 
Louisiana 

1 
7 

Maine 
Maryland 

I 

Massachusetts 

59 

Michigan 
Missouri 

7 
4 

Nebraska 

2 

Nevada 

1 

New  Hampshire 

6 

New  Jersey 

663   y 

New  Mexico 

3 

New  York 

450 

North  Carolina 

5 

Ohio 

41 

Pennsylvania 

1513  x 

Rhode  Island 

8 

South  Carolina 

1 

Tennessee 

5 

Texas 

5 

Vermont 

4 

Virginia 

31 

West  Virginia 

6 

Wisconsin 

5 

Africa 

1 

Argentina 

4 

Arabia 

1 

Belgium 

2 

Bermuda 

1 

Canada 

3 

Chile 

Colombia 

Ecuador 

Germany 

Ghana 

Greece 

Hong  Kong 

India 

Liberia 

Malaysia 

Pakistan 

Panama 

Peru 

Phillipines 

Puerto  Rico 

Switzerland 

Taiwan 

United  Kingdom 

3 

Total 

3170 

Spring,  1971 

Undergraduate  Students 3049 

Graduate  Students 1940 

Special  Students 32 

Total 5021 


Summer,  1971 

Undergraduate  Students 313 

Graduate  Students 1382 

Special  Students 8 

Total 1703 


Fall,  1971 

Undergraduate  Students 3438 

Graduate  Students 1935 

Special  Students 37 

Total 5410 


Students  in  Undergraduate  Curricula  Spring,  1971 


Curriculum 

Seniors 

Juniors 

Sophomores 

Freshmen 

G.C.D. 

Total 

Arts  and  Science 

279 

208 

224 

226 

937  -  ~ 

Arts  and  Engineering 

28 

14 

6 

21 

69/ 

Business  and  Economics 

150 

134 

139 

152 

575  ^ 

Chemical  Engineering 

52 

45 

51 

148 

Chemistry 

12 

23 

12 

47  X 

Civil  Engineering 

39 

36 

47 

122 

Electrical  Engineering 

74 

60 

63 

197 

Engineering  Mechanics 

2 

7 

9 

Engineering  Physics 

4 

12 

7 

41  K 

Fundamental  Science 

13 

14 

14 

Industrial  Engineering 

48 

41 

32 

121 

Mechanical  Engineering 

70 

48 

51 

169 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

22 

22 

32 

76 

Unclassified  Engineers 

9 

28 

469 

506 

General  College  Division 

9 

9 

Total 

793 

673 

706 

868 

9 

3049 

Registration  Statistics     295 


Student-,  in  UnJt-igr.Klti.iu- Curricula  I'.ill,  1**71 


Curriculum 

Seniors 

Juniors 

Sophomores 

Freshmen 

\i : .  mil  Science 

215 

256 

286 

389 

\i  is  and  Engineering 

23 

1  1 

15 

•II 

Business  .mJ  Economics 

126 

146 

168 

149 

Chemical  Engineering 

43 

52 

62 

1 

Chemistry 

26 

14 

25 

Civil  Engineering 

46 

47 

61 

Electrical  Engineering 

66 

61 

86 

Engineering  Mechanics 

6 

3 

3 

Engineering  Physics 

12 

6 

15 

Fundamental  Science 

16 

19 

15 

Industrial  Engineering 

43 

36 

42 

Mechanical  Engineering 

51 

51 

61 

Metallurgy  and  Materials  Science 

16 

38 

29 

Unclassified  Engineers 

2 

10 

48 

475 

General  College  Division 

Total 

691 

750 

916 

1055 

(.  I  I) 


Total 


1146 

90 

589 

158 

65 

154 

213 

12 

33 

50 

121 

163 

83 

535 

26 

26 

26 

3438 

Geographical  Distribution  of  Undergraduate  Students  Fall,  1971 


Alabama 

2 

Arizona 

1 

California 

9 

Colorado 

3 

Connecticut 

105  y 

Delaware 

30 

District  of  Columbia 

9 

Florida 

15 

Georgia 

5 

Illinois 

20 

Indiana 

4 

Kentucky 

3 

Louisiana 

7 

Maine 

4 

Maryland 

107  ' 

Massachusetts 

55 

Michigan 

7 

Mississippi 

1 

Missouri 

3 

Nebraska 

2 

New  Hampshire 

8 

New  Jersey 

788 

New  Mexico 

2 

New  York 

480 

North  Carolina 

4 

Ohio 

42 

Oklahoma 

1 

Pennsylvania 

1647 

Rhode  Island 

10 

South  Carolina 

1 

Tennessee 

2 

Texas 

7 

Vermont 

4 

Virginia 

25 

West  Virginia 

3 

Argentina 

2 

Belgium 

1 

Bermuda 

1 

Canada 

5 

Colombia 

2 

Dominican  Republic 

1 

France 

2 

Ghana 

1 

Greece 

1 

Holland 

1 

Hong  Kong 
India 

3 

1 

Iran 

4 

Italy 
Korea 

1 
1 

Liberia 

1 

Malaysia 
Mexico 

1 

2 

Norway 
Panama 

1 
2 

Peru 

2 

Philippines 
Puerto  Rico 

1 
1 

Switzerland 

1 

Taiwan 

1 

United  Arab  Republic 
United  Kingdom 

2 
2 

Venezula 

2 

West  Germany 

1 

Total 

3468 

296      Registration  Statistics 


Index 


Academic  calendar,  3 

Academic  opportunities,  special,  49 

Academic  regulations,  24 

Accelerated  programs,  50 

Accident  and  sickness  reimbursement 
insurance,  19,  65 

Accounting,  86 

Graduate  study,  88 

Major  in  Arts  and  Science  College, 

86 
Major  in  Business  and  Economics 
College,  86 

Achievement  tests,  C.E.E.B.,  8 

Admission 

Graduate,  57 
Undergraduate,  7 

Advanced  placement,  9 

Aerospace  studies,  242 

Afro-American  studies,  52 

Alcoholic  beverages,  regulations 
concerning,  28 

American  studies,  89 

Application  for  admission  fee,  14 

Application  of  Mathematics,  Center 
for  the,  71,  260 

Applied  mathematics,  graduate  study 
in,  70 

Apprentice  Teaching  program,  51,  85 

Arts  and  Science  College,  35 
Arts-Engineering,  37 
Bachelor  of  arts  degree,  35 
Bachelor  of  science  degree,  36 
Distribution  requirements,  35 
Interdisciplinary  major,  36 
Multiple  major,  36 
Special  opportunities,  38 

Arts,  Doctor  of,  63 

Arts-Engineering,  37,  47,  90 

Arts-Chemical  Engineering,  90 
Arts-Civil  Engineering,  90 
Arts-Electrical  Engineering,  91 
Arts-Engineering  Physics,  91 
Arts-Industrial  Engineering,  92 
Arts-Mechanical  Engineering  and 

Engineering  Mechanics,  92 
Comprehensive  examinations,  38 
Graduation  requirements,  37 
Senior  thesis,  38 
Special  requirements,  37 

Assistantships,  66 


Astronomy,  194 

Athletics,  intercollegiate,  22,  148 

B 

Bachelor  of  arts  degree,  College  of 

Arts  and  Science,  36 
Bachelor  of  science  degree 

College  of  Arts  and  Science,  36 

College  ot  Business  and  Economics, 
39 

College  of  Engineering,  44 
Band,  University,  22,  220 
Berman  Lectures  in  Economics,  23 
Bethlehem  area  map,  34 
Bioengineering  Division,  Center  for 

Health  Sciences,  74,  261 
Biological'Chemistry  and  Biophysics 

Division,  Center  for  Health 

Sciences,  73,  261 
Biology,  94 

Bachelor  of  arts  major,  94 

Bachelor  of  science  major,  95 

Graduate  study,  98 
Blaustein  Lectures  in  International 

Relations,  23 
Board  of  Trustees,  250 
Brown  and  White,  student  newspaper, 

22 
Buildings,  campus,  29 
Business  and  Economics  College,  39 

Bachelor  of  science  curricula,  40 

Core  requirements,  40 

Graduate  study,  41 

Programs  of  study,  39 
Bureau  of  Educational  Research,  84 


Calendar,  academic,  3 

CAM,  Center  for  the  Application  of 

Mathematics,  71,  260 
Campus  buildings,  29 
Campus  events,  64 
Campus  map,  32 

Candidacy  for  degree,  notice  of,  24 
Center  for  Health  Sciences  (CHS),  73, 

260 

Bioengineering  Division,  74,  261 

Biological  Chemistry  and  Biophysics 
Division,  73,  261 

Institute  for  Pathobiology,  73,  260 

Visual  Science  Division,  74,  261 
Center  for  Information  Science  (CIS), 

74,261 
Center  for  Marine  and  Environmental 

Studies  (CMES),  75,  261 
Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings 

Research  (CSCR),  76,  262 
Center  for  Social  Research  (CSR),  77, 

262 


Center  for  the  Application  of  Mathe- 
matics (CAM),  71,260 
Centers,  research,  71,  260 
Change  of  major,  49 
Change-of-roster  fee,  13 
Chapel  services,  22 
Chaplain's  Council,  22 
Chemical  engineering,  100 

Graduate  study,  103 

Recommended  sequence  of  courses, 
100 
Chemistry,  106 

Bachelor  of  arts  major,  107 

Bachelor  of  science  major,  107 

Five-year  program,  107 

Graduate  program,  110 

Specialized  undergraduate  curri- 
cula, 106 
Chemistry  breakage  fee,  13 
CHS,  Center  for  Health  Sciences,  73, 

260 
CIS,  Center  for  Information  Sciences, 

74,261 
Civil  engineering,  113 

Graduate  study,  117 

Recommended  sequence  of  courses, 
114 
Class  honors,  26 
Classics,  121 

Greek,  121,  122 

Latin,  121,  122 

Major  programs,  121 
CMES,  Center  for  Marine  and  Environ- 
mental Studies,  75,  261 
College  of  Arts  and  Science,  35 

Arts-Engineering,  37 

Bachelor  of  arts  degree,  35 

Bachelor  of  science  degree,  36 

Distribution  requirements,  35 

Interdisciplinary  major,  36 

Multiple  major,  36 

Special  opportunities,  38 
College  of  Business  and  Economics,  39 

Bachelor  of  science  curricula,  40 

Core  requirements,  40 

Graduate  study,  41 

Programs  of  study,  39 
College  of  Engineering,  44 

Curricula,  44 

General  studies  program,  45 

Graduation  requirements,  47 

Honors  programs,  47 

Inspection  trips,  47 

Recommended  freshman  year,  45 
College  Work-Study  Program 

(CW-SP),  17 
Completion  of  academic  requirements, 

final  date  for,  24 


Index    297 


Comprehensive  honors  program, 
Computer  science,  master  ol  science 

in,  69,  l": 
Computing  Associates  Program,  72 

Computing  Center,  72,  260 

Cooperative  college  program,  52 

Core  requirements.  College  of  Busi- 
ness .ind  Economics,  40 

Council  for  Research  in  Teaching  and 
Learning,  84 

Counseling  and  assistance,  18 

Counseling  Service,  20 

Course  numbering,  85 

Course  prerequisites,  86 

Creative  Arts,  Globus  Series  in 
Avant-Garde,  23 

Creative  Concepts  Seminars,  53 

Credit  and  grades,  24 

Credit  hours,  85 

Cross-registration  with  area 
colleges,  52 

Crossroads  Africa,  22 

CSCR,  Center  for  Surface  and  Coatings 
Research,  76,  262 

CSR,  Center  for  Social  Research,  77, 
262 


Degree  candidacy,  notice  of,  24 
Degree  eligibility,  24 
Departmental  honors,  53 
Departmental  visiting  committees, 

251 
Deposit,  admission,  10 
Description  of  courses,  85 
Dining  services,  13 
Distribution  requirements,  College 

of  Arts  and  Science,  35 
Doctor  of  Arts  degree,  63 
Doctor  of  Education  degree,  63 
Doctor  of  Philosophy  degree,  61 
Dramatics  society,  22 
Drugs,  regulations  concerning,  28 


Early  decision  admission,  9 
Economics,  124 

Graduate  study,  126 

Major  in  Arts  and  Science  College, 
124 

Major  in  Business  and  Economics 
College,  124 
Economics,  Berman  Lectures  in,  23 
Economics  statistics  major,  124 
Education  courses,  128 
Education,  Doctor  of,  63 
Education,  School  of,  67 
Educational  Research,  Bureau  of,  84 


IK.  ii  I,  al  engineering,  I  $4 

Graduate  study,  I  38 

Recommended  course  sequence, 
135 
Eligibility  for  degree,  24 
Emeriti  faculty,  289 
Engineering  College-,  -14 

Curricula,  44 

General  studies  program,  45 

Graduation  requirements,  47 

Honors  programs,  47 

Inspection  trips,  47 

Recommended  freshman  year,  45 
English,  140 

Composition  courses,  undergraduate 
141 

English  literature  major,  140 

Graduate  study  in  English  litera- 
ture, 142 

Journalism,  146 

Speech,  147 
English  requirement  for  freshmen,  35 
Entrance  examinations,  8 
Environmental  sciences  and  resource 

management,  149 
Environmental  Studies,  Center  for 

Marine  and,  75,  261 
Epitome,  student  yearbook,  22 
Evening  classes,  65 
Examination  fee,  13 
Examinations,  physical,  19 


Faculty  and  staff  listing,  265 

Fees,  special,  13 

Final  date  for  completion  of  academic 

requirements,  24 
Finance  courses,  183 
Financial  aid 

Graduate,  65 

Undergraduate,  16 
Fine  arts,  150 

Art  history  major,  151 

General  art  major,  150 

Pre-architecture  major,  151 
Five-year  programs,  50,  153 

Arts-M.B.A.,  155 

B.S.  engineering-M.S.  materials, 
155 

Electrical  engineering  and 
engineering  physics,  153 

Engineering-M.B.A.,  155 

Industrial  engineering  and 
business,  154 
Foreign  careers,  157 
Foreign  Opportunities  Committee,  22 
Foreign  study,  51 
Forum  for  Visiting  Lecturers,  23 


Forum,  University,  21 

l  racture  and  Solid  Mechanics,  Insti 

tute  of,  81,  263 
Fraternities,  social,  12 
French,  210 

Graduate  study,  2!  1 

Required  courses,  210 
Freshman  English  requirement,  35 
Freshman  honors,  52 
Freshman  Seminars,  52 
Freshman  year,  engineering,  45 
Fritz  Engineering  Laboratory,  78,  262 
Fundamental  sciences,  158 


General  College  Division,  24 
General  studies  program,  engineering 

College,  45 
Geological  sciences,  159 

Bachelor  of  arts  program,  160 

Bachelor  of  science  program,  159 

B.A./B.S.  and  M.S.  program,  1  60 

Graduate  study,  162 
German,  213 

Graduate  study,  214 

Required  courses,  213 
German  semester  abroad,  51 
Gipson  Institute  for  18th  Century 

Studies,  81,  263 
Glee  Club,  22,  221 
Globus  Series  in  Avant-Garde  Creative 

Arts,  23 
Grades,  24 

Graduate  assistantships,  66 
Graduate  degrees,  60 

Doctor  of  Arts,  42,  63 

Doctor  of  Education,  63 

Doctor  of  Philosophy,  61 

Master's,  41,  43,  60 
Graduate  programs,  interdisciplinary, 

69 
Graduate  School,  57 

Admission,  57 

Areas  of  study,  57 

Degrees  offered,  60 

Financial  assistance,  65 

Housing,  64 

Registration,  58 

Resident  graduate  student,  58 

Resources,  64 

Special  student,  58 

Tuition  and  fees,  59 
Graduate-standing  prerequisite, 

waiver  of,  53 
Graduate  study,  areas  of,  57 
Graduating  thesis,  undergraduate,  24 
Graduation  honors,  26 


298     Index 


Government,  164 

Graduate  study,  166 
Suggested  course  sequence,  164 
Urban  studies  division,  168 

Greek,  121,  122 

Guests,  regulations  concerning,  28 

H 

Health  Service,  Students',  19 
Health  Sciences,  Center  for,  73,  260 
High  Immediate  Relevancy  courses,  49 
Hillel  Foundation,  22 
H.I.R.  courses,  49 
History,  170 

Graduate  study,  174 

Required  courses,  170 
History  of  Lehigh  University,  5 
Honorary  societies,  national,  21 
Honors  programs,  26,  52 
Housing,  graduate,  64 

I 

Industrial  engineering,  176 

Graduate  study,  178 

Recommended  course  sequence,  176 
Information  Science,  Center  for,  74 

261 
Information  science  courses,  225 
Inspection  trips,  engineering,  47 
Institute  for  18th  Century  Studies, 

81,  263 
Institute  for  Metal  Forming,  82,  264 
Institute  for  Pathobiology,  73,  260 
Institute  of  Fracture  and  Solid 

Mechanics,  81,  263 
Institutes,  research,  81,  263 
Insurance,  accident  and  sickness 

reimbursement,  19,  65 
Intercollegiate  athletic  program, 

22,  148 
Interdepartmental  honors,  53 
Interdisciplinary  graduate  programs, 

69 

Applied  mathematics,  70 

Computer  science,  69,  192 

Management  science,  43,  70 
Interdisciplinary  major,  36 
Interdisciplinary  study,  49 
International  relations,  180 

Graduate  study,  182 

Required  courses,  180 
International  Relations,  Blaustein 

Lectures  in,  23 
International  study,  51 
Intramural  sports  program,  23,  248 
Italian,  215 


J 
Journalism,  146 
Junior  honors,  53 
Junior-standing  prerequisite,  waiver 

of,  52 
Junior  year  abroad,  51 


K 


Kiswahili,  216 


Late  fees,  13 
Latin,  121,  122 
Law,  business,  185 
Leadership  awards,  16 
Lecturers,  Forum  for  Visiting,  23 
Lecture  series 

Berman  in  Economics,  23 

Blaustein  in  International 
Relations,  23 
Lehigh  University  Merit  Scholarships, 

16 
Lehigh  Valley  Association  of  Indepen- 
dent Colleges  (LVAIC),  52 
Listener's  fee,  14 
Loan  programs 

College  Work-Study  Program 
(CW-SP),  17 

National  Direct  Student  Loan 
(NDSL),  17,  67 

Supplementary  Educational  Oppor- 
tunity Grant  (SEOG),  17 

State  aid,  17 
LVAIC  program,  52 

M 

Major,  change  of,  49 
Management  courses,  185 
Management  and  finance,  185 

Finance,  183 

Law,  185 

Management,  185 

Marketing,  187 
Management  science,  master  of  science 

in,  43,  70 
Maps 

Bethlehem  area,  34 

Campus,  32 
Marketing,  187 
Marine  and  Environmental  Studies, 

Center  for,  75,  261 
Master's  degrees,  57,  60 
Materials  course  offerings,  156 
Materials  Research  Center,  79,  263 
Mathematics,  188 

Astronomy,  194 

Graduate  study,  189 

Required  courses,  189 


Mathematics,  applied,  70 
Mathematics,  Center  for  the  Applica- 
tion of,  71,260 
Mechanical  engineering  and  mechanics, 

195 

Graduate  study 

Mechanical  engineering,  198 
Mechanics,  201 

Mechanical  engineering  courses, 
196 

Mechanics  courses,  200 

Recommended  course  sequence,  196 
Merit  Scholarships,  16 
Metal  Forming,  Institute  for,  82,  264 
Metallurgy  and  materials  science,  203 

Graduate  study,  206 

Industrial  metallurgy  option,  204 

Recommended  sequence  of  courses, 
203 

Research  activities,  207 

Research  option,  204 
Military  deposit,  13 
Military  science  studies,  239 
Modern  foreign  languages  and  litera- 
tures, 210 

French,  210 

German,  213 

Italian,  215 

Kiswahili,  216 

Portuguese,  216 

Russian,  216 

Spanish,  216 
Motor  vehicles,  regulations  concern- 
ing, 28 
Multiple  major,  Arts  and  Science 

College,  36 
Music,  219 

Courses  offered,  219 

Band, 220 

Glee  Club,  221 
Mustard  and  Cheese   dramatics  society, 

22 

N 

National  Direct  Student  Loan  (NDSL) 
progam,  17,  67 

National  honorary  and  recognition 
societies,  21 

National  Printing  Ink  Research  Insti- 
tute (NPIRI),  76 

Natural  science  program,  221 

Newman  Club,  22 

Newspaper,  student,  22 

Night  classes,  65 

Notice  of  candidacy  for  degree,  24 

O 

Office  of  Research,  84,  260 


Index    299 


Parking  regulations,  65 

Pass  fail  grading,  25 

Pathobiology,  Institute  for,  73,  260 

Ph.D.  degree.  (.1 

Philosophy,  2  22 

Division  of  information  science, 
225 

Division  of  philosophy,  222 
Physical  education  6V  athletics,  248 

Courses  available,  249 

Intercollegiate  athletics,  248 

Intramural  sports,  248 

Physical  education,  248 
Physical  examinations.  19 
Physics,  228 

Graduate  study,  231 

Major  in  Arts  and  Science 
College,  228 

Major  in  Engineering  College,  228 
Physiotherapy,  19 
Placement  Service,  20 
Portuguese,  216 
Post-doctoral  work,  63 
Pre-law  program,  50 
Pre-med  program,  50 
Prerequisite,  course,  86 
Prerequisite,  waiver  of 

Graduate  standing,  53 

Junior  standing,  52 
Presidential  Prizes,  10,  17,  54 
Probation,  academic,  26 
Psychology,  233 

Bachelor  of  arts  major,  233 

Bachelor  of  science  major,  233 

Graduate  study,  235 
Publications,  student,  22 
Purpose  of  Lehigh  University,  5 

R 

Reading  and  Study  Clinic,  20 
Recommended  freshman  year, 

engineering,  45 
Refunds 

Graduate  tuition,  59 

Residence  hall  rental  and  dining 
service  fee,  14 

Undergraduate  tuition,  14 
Registration  date,  latest,  25 
Registration,  graduate,  58 
Registration  statistics,  294 
Regulations 

Academic,  24 

Social,  27 
Religion  studies,  238 
Religious  activities,  22 
Requirements,  final  date  for  comple- 
tion of  academic,  24 


300    Index 


Requirements,  undergraduate 

admission,  7 
Resean  h  assistantships,  66 
Research  centers  and  organizations, 

71 
Research  initiates,  50 
Research,  Office  of,  84,  260 
Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps,  239 

Aerospace  studies,  242 

Military  science,  239 
Residence  halls,  12 
Resource  management,  environmental 

sciences  and,  1  49 
Review-Consultation-Study  (RCS) 

period,  25 
R.O.T.C.,  239 
Russian,  216 


Scholarships  and  loans,  under- 
graduate, 16 

Scholastic  probation,  26 

School,  Graduate,  57 

School  of  Education,  67 

Seminars  for  freshman,  52 

Senior  honors,  53 

Short-term  loans,  17 

Social  fraternities,  12 

Social  regulations,  27 

Social  relations,  243 
Graduate  study,  247 
Required  preliminary  courses,  243 

Social  Research,  Center  for,  77,  262 

Social  Welfare  Education  Program, 
49,52 

Sophomore  honors,  52 

South  Jersey  Wetlands  Institute,  83, 
264 

Spanish,  216 

Special  academic  opportunities,  49 

Special  student,  graduate,  58 

Speech,  147 

Sports,  intramural,  23,  248 

Staff  and  faculty  listing,  265 

State  grants  and  loans,  17 

Statistics  of  registration,  294 

Student  activities  and  events,  21 

Student  Loan  Fund,  67 

Student  personnel  services,  18 

Student  publications,  22 

Students'  Health  Service,  19 

Study  in  foreign  countries,  51 

Summer  language  and  literature  pro- 
grams, 51 

Summer  Session,  65 

Supplementary  Educational  Oppor- 
tunity Grant  (SEOG),  17 

Surface  and  Coatings  Research, 
Center  for,  76,  262 


Teaching  assistantships,  66 
Teaching  and  Learning,  Council  for 

Research  in,  84 
Theses,  undergraduate,  24 
Transcripts,  14,  59 
Transfer  students,  1  1 
Trustee  scholarships,  1  6 
Trustees,  Board  of,  250 
Tuition  and  lees 

Graduate,  59 

Undergraduate,  I  1 
Tuition  refunds 

Graduate,  59 

Undergraduate,  14 
Two-degree  programs,  50 

U 
Undergraduate  admission,  7 
Undergraduate  scholarships  and  loans, 

16 
University  Forum,  21 
University  Scholar,  53 
University  Tuition  Loan  Program,  67 
Urban  Studies,  Division  of,  168 

Graduate  study,  169 

Required  courses,  168 


Visiting  Committees,  Departmental, 

251 
Visiting  Lecturers,  Forum  for,  23 
Visual  Science  Division,  Center  for 

Health  Sciences,  74,  261 
Volunteer  services,  21 

W 

Washington  Semester,  51 

Welfare  Education  Program,  Social, 

49,52 
Wetlands  Institute,  South  Jersey,  83 

264 


Yearbook,  student,  22 


Lehigh 
University  Catalog 


Second  class  postage  paid  at 
Bethlehem,  Pennsylvania  18015 


/